Yamaha PM5D El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: PM5D

Categoría: Mezcladores de audio

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

PM5D/PM5D-RH

DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE

PM5D / PM5D-RHPM5D / PM5D-RH

PM5D / PM5D-RH

Owner’s ManualOwner’s Manual

Owner’s Manual

The above warning is located on the rear of the unit.

Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning ﬂash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert

the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufﬁcient magnitude to

constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and

maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

literature accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators,

heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including

ampliﬁers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or

grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades

with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug

has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide

blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If

the provided plug does not ﬁt into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched

particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the

point where they exit from the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories speciﬁed by the

manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table speciﬁed

by the manufacturer, or sold with

the apparatus. When a cart is

used, use caution when moving

the cart/apparatus combination

to avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during

lightning storms or when unused for long periods of

time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualiﬁed service personnel.

Servicing is required when the apparatus has been

damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug

is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have

fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been

exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally,

or has been dropped.

(98-6500)

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modiﬁcations not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT:

When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE:

This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line ﬁlter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning

må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte

batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller

en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo

ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty

paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

(lithium caution)

NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.

• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het

moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt

of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing

Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Tel. 030-2828425

•For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the

end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service

Center as follows:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center

Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Tel: 030-2828425

• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical

waste.

(lithium disposal)

This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains

a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material

may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer to

the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(5)-1

1/2

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, ﬁre or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Use only the speciﬁed power supply (PW800W or an equivalent recommended

by Yamaha).

• Only use the voltage speciﬁed as correct for the device. The required voltage is

printed on the name plate of the device.

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify

them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should

appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected

by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions,

or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden

loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or smoke

should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch,

disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by

qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• If this device or the power supply should be dropped or damaged, immediately

turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have

the device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the

plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Do not turn the PW800W POWER switch OFF and ON in rapid succession.

Doing so can result in excessive current ﬂow that can cause damage. Wait at

least 5 seconds before turning the POWER switch ON after it has been turned

OFF.

• When transporting or moving the device, always use four or more people.

• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.

•Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on

the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may

damage the speakers.

• Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat

(such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent

the possibility of panel disﬁguration or damage to the internal components.

• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the front and rear to

prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. In particular, do not place

the device on its side or upside down, or place it in any poorly-ventilated

location, such as a bookcase or closet.

• Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile

phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the device, TV, or radio may

generate noise.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord Location

(5)-1

2/2

• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices.

Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to

minimum.

• Do not insert your ﬁngers or hand in any gaps or openings on the device (vents

etc.).

•Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any

gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

device inspected by qualiﬁed Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable

volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience

any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use

excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from

the AC outlet, the internal data of current scene is retained. However, if the

backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When the backup battery

is running low, the LCD display indicates “Low Battery!” during operation or

“No Battery!” when starting up the system. In this case, have qualiﬁed Yamaha

service personnel replace the backup battery.

XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-).

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modiﬁcations to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.

The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualiﬁed Yamaha service

personnel about replacing defective components.

Connections

Handling caution

Backup battery

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual

Table of Contents

Table of Contents — Operating section

Introduction ........................................ 10

Thank you................................................................... 10

An overview of the PM5D........................................... 10

Differences between the PM5D model and the

PM5D-RH model ............................................. 11

About the channel structure of the PM5D.......................... 12

Regarding word clock synchronization ....................... 12

How this manual is organized..................................... 13

Conventions in this manual ................................................. 13

Top, front, and rear panels................. 14

Top panel ................................................................... 14

Rear panel................................................................... 16

Front panel ................................................................. 18

Basic operation on the PM5D............. 19

About the various types of user interface .................... 19

User interface in the display.................................................. 19

DISPLAY ACCESS section ................................................... 20

Data Entry section ................................................................. 20

External user interface........................................................... 21

Basic operation ........................................................... 22

Click........................................................................................ 22

Drag ........................................................................................ 22

Drag and drop........................................................................ 22

Accessing a desired screen..................................................... 23

Moving the cursor ................................................................. 23

Scrolling the screen................................................................ 24

Operating the buttons........................................................... 25

Adjusting the setting of a knob or fader .............................. 25

Assigning a name................................................................... 26

Connections and setup ....................... 27

Audio connections ...................................................... 27

Analog audio connections .................................................... 27

Analog output connections .................................................. 28

Digital input/output connections ........................................ 29

Installing an option card....................................................... 30

Word clock connections and settings.......................... 31

About word clock .................................................................. 31

Selecting the word clock master ........................................... 31

Restoring the current scene to the default state.......... 32

Input channel operations ................... 33

About the input channels ........................................... 33

AD IN section.............................................................. 35

Items in the AD IN section ................................................... 35

Controlling the input sensitivity and phantom power

(+48V) of the head amp.............................................. 36

INPUT channel strip.................................................... 37

Items in the INPUT channel strip........................................ 37

ST IN/FX RTN channel strip ........................................ 39

Items in the ST IN/FX RTN channel strip........................... 39

FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section ........................ 40

Items in the FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section...... 40

Various operations for input channels ......................... 41

Selecting the function of the encoders................................. 41

Exchanging the fader and encoder functions...................... 41

Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO

bus ................................................................................. 42

Sending the signal from the input channel to a MIX

bus ................................................................................. 43

Enabling/disabling pairing....................................................45

Output channel operations .................47

About the output channels..........................................47

MIX section .................................................................49

Items in the MIX section....................................................... 49

Operations in the MIX section ............................................. 49

STEREO A/B channel strip............................................53

Items in the STEREO A/B channel strip..............................53

Operations in the STEREO A/B channel strip ....................54

MATRIX section...........................................................55

Items in the MATRIX section............................................... 55

Operations in the MATRIX section ..................................... 55

Using the Selected Channel section ...57

About the SELECTED CHANNEL section......................57

Items in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................57

GROUP................................................................................... 57

CHANNEL SELECT.............................................................. 58

DELAY.................................................................................... 58

GAIN/ATTENUATION/ø (Gain / Attenuation / Phase)...59

NOISE GATE ......................................................................... 59

STEREO.................................................................................. 60

COMPRESSOR...................................................................... 60

HPF (High Pass Filter) .......................................................... 61

EQUALIZER .......................................................................... 61

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ..........62

Selecting a channel and editing its parameters.................... 62

Compressor operations.........................................................63

Gate operations......................................................................64

EQ/HPF operations ...............................................................65

Input Patch / Output Patch operations ..66

Changing the input patch settings..............................66

Changing the output patch settings ...........................67

Inserting an external device into a channel .................69

Connecting an external device for insertion........................ 69

Patching the insert-out and insert-in................................... 70

Directly outputting the signal of an input channel ......72

Grouping and linking ..........................73

About DCA Groups and Mute Groups.........................73

Items in the ASSIGN MODE section ............................73

Items in the DCA strip .................................................73

Using DCA Groups ......................................................74

Assigning channels to DCA groups...................................... 74

Controlling DCA groups.......................................................75

Using mute groups......................................................75

Assigning channels to mute groups......................................75

Controlling mute groups ......................................................76

Using the Mute Safe function............................................... 76

Using EQ Link and Compressor Link............................77

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual

Table of Contents

Scene memory..................................79

About scenes .............................................................. 79

Items in the SCENE MEMORY section......................... 80

Using scene memories................................................ 81

Storing a scene........................................................................81

Recalling a scene.....................................................................82

Using PREVIEW mode ................................................. 82

Using the Auto Store function .................................... 83

Using the Direct Recall function.................................. 83

Using the Selective Recall function ............................. 84

Using the Recall Safe function..................................... 86

Using the Fade function.............................................. 87

Using the Tracking Recall function.............................. 88

Using the Global Paste function.................................. 89

Monitor and Cue..............................91

About the MONITOR and CUE sections...................... 91

Using the Monitor function ........................................ 92

Items in the MONITOR section ...........................................92

Monitoring a signal................................................................93

Using the Cue/Solo functions ..................................... 94

Items in the CUE section.......................................................94

About CUE mode and SOLO mode.....................................94

Cue and Solo groups..............................................................95

Using the Cue function..........................................................96

Using the Solo function .........................................................96

Talkback and Oscillator....................97

About the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections .............. 97

Items in the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections..............97

Using talkback ............................................................ 98

Using the oscillator ..................................................... 99

Meters.............................................100

Items in the meter section ........................................ 100

Switching the meter display ..................................... 100

Switching the metering point................................... 101

Specifying the metering point for input channels ............ 101

Specifying the metering point for output channels.......... 101

Viewing the gain reduction of the internal gates and

compressors .................................................. 102

Viewing the gain reduction for input channels ................ 102

Viewing the gain reduction for output channels.............. 102

Effects .............................................103

About the internal effects ......................................... 103

Using an internal effect via a MIX bus....................... 104

Inserting an internal effect into a channel................. 105

Basic operations in the effect screen ......................... 106

Recalling settings from the effect library ........................... 106

Editing the effect parameters.............................................. 106

Storing settings in the effect library ................................... 107

Using the Tap Tempo function................................. 108

Using the Freeze effect ............................................. 109

Using optional Add-On Effects.................................. 109

Graphic EQ .....................................110

Patching the graphic EQ ...........................................110

Basic graphic EQ operations......................................111

Controlling the graphic EQ from the display ................... 111

Controlling the graphic EQ from the DCA section.......... 111

Remote control ..............................113

MIDI on the PM5D ...................................................113

Using program changes to control events.................113

Using control changes to control events ...................115

Using the MIDI Remote function...............................117

Assigning MIDI messages to controllers ........................... 117

Using MIDI remote channels............................................. 121

Transmitting MIDI events when you switch scenes ...122

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) ......................123

Using GPI IN ....................................................................... 123

Calibrating the GPI IN ports .............................................. 125

Using GPI OUT................................................................... 126

Using memory cards......................128

Using memory cards with the PM5D ........................128

Saving files to a memory card ...................................128

Loading files from a memory card.............................130

Surround pan.................................132

About surround pan..................................................132

Bus configuration and operation in surround mode..133

About the surround buses .................................................. 133

How the MIX section will operate ..................................... 133

Basic settings for surround buses...............................134

Controlling surround pan..........................................135

Notes regarding surround pan..................................137

Other functions..............................138

Using the user defined keys.......................................138

Items in the USER DEFINED section................................ 138

Assigning functions to the User Defined keys................... 138

Executing functions assigned to the User Defined keys... 139

Using the Fader Assign function................................139

Items in the FADER MODE section.................................. 139

Assigning channels to DCA faders..................................... 139

Controlling the channels assigned to DCA faders ............ 140

Locking the PM5D (Security functions) .....................141

Setting the System Password or Console Password.......... 141

Using Parameter Lock or Console Lock............................ 142

Using cascade connections .......................................143

Making cascade connections .............................................. 143

Basic settings for cascade connection ................................ 143

Selecting the buses used for cascade connection .............. 144

Connecting the PM5D to a computer via USB ..........146

Caution when using the USB TO HOST connector ........ 146

Initializing the PM5D’s internal memory ...................147

Adjusting the faders and input/output gain

(Calibration) ..................................................147

Calibrating the faders.......................................................... 148

Adjusting the analog input gain (PM5D-RH model

only)............................................................................ 148

Adjusting the output gain................................................... 148

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual

Table of Contents

Table of Contents — Reference section

Information shown in the display.......... 149

Upper part of the display (always visible).................. 149

Main area of the display............................................ 150

Lower part of the display (always visible) .................. 150

Function menu........................................ 151

Global functions...................................... 152

EFFECT functions ...................................................... 152

EFFECT PARAM (Effect parameter) screen..................... 152

EFFECT ASSIGN screen ..................................................... 154

EFFECT LIBRARY screen................................................... 155

GEQ function............................................................ 156

GEQ PARAM (GEQ parameter) screen ............................ 156

GEQ ASSIGN screen ........................................................... 157

GEQ LIBRARY screen......................................................... 158

SCENE function ........................................................ 159

SCENE screen ...................................................................... 159

EVENT LIST screen ............................................................ 161

SELECTIVE RECALL screen.............................................. 164

RECALL SAFE screen.......................................................... 166

FADE TIME screen ............................................................. 167

TRACKING RECALL screen.............................................. 169

GLOBAL PASTE screen...................................................... 170

MIDI REMOTE function............................................. 171

MIDI SETUP screen............................................................ 171

MIDI PGM CHANGE (MIDI program change) screen .. 173

MIDI CTRL CHANGE (MIDI control change) screen ... 174

MIDI REMOTE screen ....................................................... 175

GPI screen ............................................................................ 177

FADER START screen ........................................................ 179

TRANSPORT screen........................................................... 181

DME CONTROL screen..................................................... 182

UTILITY function ....................................................... 186

PREFERENCE 1/2 screens.................................................. 186

USER DEFINE screen ......................................................... 189

SAVE screen ......................................................................... 192

LOAD screen........................................................................ 195

FADER ASSIGN screen....................................................... 197

SECURITY screen................................................................ 198

SYS/W.CLOCK function ............................................ 199

WORD CLOCK screen ....................................................... 199

MIXER SETUP screen......................................................... 200

CASCADE screen ................................................................ 204

HA (Head Amp) screen ...................................................... 206

OUTPUT PORT ATT (Output port attenuation) screen 207

DITHER screen.................................................................... 207

HA LIBRARY screen ........................................................... 208

METER function ........................................................ 209

INPUT METER screen........................................................ 209

OUTPUT METER screen ................................................... 210

INPUT GR (Input Gain Reduction) screen ...................... 211

OUTPUT GR (Output Gain Reduction) screen............... 211

MON/CUE function .................................................. 212

TALKBACK screen.............................................................. 212

OSCILLATOR screen.......................................................... 213

2TR I/O screen..................................................................... 215

MONITOR screen............................................................... 216

CUE/SOLO screen............................................................... 217

Output functions .................................... 220

OUTPUT PATCH function..........................................220

OUTPUT PATCH screen ...................................................220

INSERT PATCH screen ...................................................... 221

INSERT POINT screen .......................................................222

OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen..................................223

OUTPUT INSERT function..........................................224

INSERT IN MIX 1-24 screen.............................................. 224

INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR screen ........224

HA LIBRARY screen ...........................................................225

OUTPUT EQ function ................................................225

EQ PARAM (EQ Parameter) screen ..................................225

MIX 1-24 screen................................................................... 227

MATRIX/STEREO screen...................................................227

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY screen..........................................228

OUTPUT COMP function ..........................................229

COMP PARAM (Compressor parameter) screen ............ 229

MIX 1-24 screen................................................................... 231

MATRIX/STEREO screen...................................................231

COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library) screen ................ 232

OUTPUT DELAY function...........................................233

MIX 1-24 screen................................................................... 233

MATRIX/STEREO screen...................................................233

OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function.................................234

DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen............................................ 234

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen.........................................235

EQ LINK ASSIGN screen....................................................236

COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link assign) screen .237

MATRIX/ST function..................................................238

MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen .........................................238

MIX to MATRIX VIEW screen ..........................................240

LCR screen ...........................................................................242

SURR SETUP screen ...........................................................244

OUTPUT VIEW function.............................................245

CH VIEW (Channel view) screen ......................................245

SIGNAL FLOW screen........................................................247

FADER VIEW screen ..........................................................249

CH COPY (Channel copy) screen......................................249

OUTPUT CH LIBRARY screen .........................................251

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Table of Contents 9

Input functions ........................................252

INPUT PATCH function............................................. 252

INPUT PATCH screen ....................................................... 252

DIRECT OUT PATCH screen ........................................... 253

INSERT PATCH screen...................................................... 254

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen............................. 256

NAME screen....................................................................... 257

INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen ..................................... 257

INPUT HA/INSERT function ...................................... 258

CH 1-24 (Input channel 1-24) screen ............................... 258

STIN/FXRTN (ST IN/FXRTN channel) screen ............... 258

INSERT 1-24 screen............................................................ 259

INSERT 25-48 screen.......................................................... 259

INSERT STIN screen .......................................................... 259

HA LIBRARY screen........................................................... 260

INPUT ø/EQ function................................................ 260

EQ PARAM (EQ parameter) screen.................................. 260

EQ 1-24 screen..................................................................... 261

EQ 25-48 switch .................................................................. 261

EQ STIN/FXRTN screen .................................................... 261

ø/ATT 1-48 (Phase/Attenuation 1-48) screen .................. 262

ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN (Phase/Attenuation STIN/FXRTN)

screen .......................................................................... 262

INPUT EQ LIBRARY screen.............................................. 263

INPUT GATE/COMP function ................................... 264

GATE PARAM (Gate parameter) screen .......................... 264

COMP PARAM (Compressor parameter) screen............ 266

CH 1-12 (Input channel 1–12) screen............................... 267

CH 13-24 (Input channel 13–24) screen........................... 267

CH 25-36 (Input channel 25–36) screen........................... 267

CH 37-48 (Input channel 37–48) screen........................... 267

ST IN (ST IN channel) screen............................................ 267

GATE LIBRARY screen ...................................................... 268

COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library) screen................ 269

INPUT DELAY function.............................................. 270

CH 1-24 (Input channel 1–24) screen............................... 270

CH 25-48 (Input channel 25–48) screen........................... 270

ST IN (ST IN channel) screen............................................ 270

INPUT DCA/GROUP function ................................... 271

DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen ........................................... 271

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen ........................................ 272

EQ LINK ASSIGN screen ................................................... 272

COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link assign) screen. 273

PAN/ROUTING function ........................................... 274

CH to MIX (Channel to mix) screen................................. 274

MIX SEND VIEW screen ................................................... 280

FIX ASSIGN VIEW screen ................................................. 282

LCR screen........................................................................... 283

SURR PARAM (Surround parameter) screen.................. 283

SURR VIEW (Surround view) screen ............................... 285

M/S screen............................................................................ 285

INPUT VIEW function................................................ 286

CH VIEW (Channel view) screen...................................... 286

SIGNAL FLOW screen ....................................................... 287

FADER VIEW screen.......................................................... 288

CH COPY screen................................................................. 289

INPUT CH LIBRARY (Input channel library) screen..... 289

Appendices..............................................290

EQ Library List ...........................................................290

GATE Library List .......................................................291

Compressor Library List.............................................292

Dynamics Parameters................................................294

GATE section....................................................................... 294

COMP section ..................................................................... 295

Effect Library List .......................................................297

Effects Parameters .....................................................298

Effects and tempo synchronization.................................... 307

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change

Table .............................................................308

Parameters that can be assigned to control changes.312

Control change parameter assignments....................314

NRPN parameter assignments...................................331

Channel Library List ..................................................334

Channel parameter behavior when paired ................335

MIDI Data Format .....................................................336

Warning Messages ....................................................343

Error Messages..........................................................344

Troubleshooting........................................................345

General Specifications ...............................................346

Input/output characteristics ......................................348

Electrical characteristics.............................................352

Other Functions ........................................................354

Pin Assignment .........................................................355

Dimensions ...............................................................356

MIDI Implementation Chart......................................357

Index.........................................................................358

PM5D/PM5D-RH Block Diagram.............. End of Manual

PM5D Level Diagram ............................... End of Manual

PM5D-RH Level Diagram ......................... End of Manual

• The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this

Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only,

and may be different from the ones on your device.

• The company names and product names in this

Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered

trademarks of their respective companies.

10 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Operating section

Thank you

Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PM5D digital mixing console. In order to take full advantage of the PM5D’s superior

functionality and enjoy years of trouble-free use, please read this manual before you begin using the product. After you have

read the manual, keep it in a safe place.

An overview of the PM5D

The PM5D is a digital mixing console with the following features.

❏ Full digital SR mixing system

The PM5D is a full-digital SR mixing console that takes

advantage of cutting-edge digital audio processing technol-

ogy. 24-bit linear AD/DA converters are used to deliver up

to 110 dB of dynamic range and amazing sound quality. As

input channels, it provides 48 monaural channels, four ste-

reo channels, and four stereo channels for effect return. As

output channels, it provides 24 MIX channels, eight

MATRIX channels, and two STEREO channels. The PM5D

can be used in a wide range of applications. You can assign

desired channels to be controlled by the eight DCA faders

on the panel, and use them as group faders.

❏ PM5D model and PM5D-RH model

In addition to the standard PM5D model that provides

manual control of the head amp for each input, the

PM5D-RH model is also available, providing programma-

ble control of head amp input sensitivity and phantom

power settings. You can choose the model appropriate for

your situation and budget.

❏ Cutting-edge user interface

For the input channels and STEREO A/B channels, dedi-

cated channel strips are provided where you can operate

the fader, pan, cue, and on/off controls. For MIX channels

and MATRIX channels, encoders allow you to control the

send level and master level. The PM5D allows quick and

intuitive operation just as on an analog mixer. In addition,

you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to manu-

ally control the principal parameters (delay, EQ, gate,

compressor) of the desired channel.

❏ Eight effect modules / Twelve graphic

EQ modules

Eight high-quality multi-effect modules are built in. Effects

such as reverb, delay, multiband compressor, and various

modulation effects can be routed via internal buses or

inserted into the desired channel. 31-band graphic EQ can

also be inserted into any channel or any output.

❏ Scene memories and libraries

Mix parameters and internal effect settings can be stored in

memory as up to 500 scenes for immediate recall. Effects,

input/output patching, input channel/output channel set-

tings, internal head amp (PM5D-RH model only) or

external head amp settings can be stored in various librar-

ies, independently of scenes.

❏ Digital cascade connection

Up to four PM5D units, or one PM5D and one Yamaha

DM2000/02R96 unit, can be cascade-connected to share

buses in the digital domain. In particular when PM5D

units are cascaded together, operations such as scene sav-

ing and recall can also be linked. Compatible external

devices can also be used as inserts or as extended signal

processors via a cascade connection.

❏ Surround panning

Surround pan functionality allows multi-channel playback

systems to be used, letting you place the signal of an input

channel in two-dimensional space, or move the sound

image forward/backward and left/right. 3-1ch, 5.1ch, and

6.1ch surround modes are available.

❏ I/O card expansion

The rear panel provides four slots in which separately sold

mini-YGDAI cards can be installed. AD cards, DA cards, or

digital I/O cards can be installed in these slots to add inputs

and outputs.

❏ Add-On Effects provide additional effect

types

Separately sold Add-On Effects packages can be installed to

add new effect types for the internal effects. The REV-X

reverb effect sold as an Add-On Effect for the DM2000 or

02R96 is included as standard.

1 Introduction

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 11

Introduction

Differences between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH

model

The PM5D is available as the standard PM5D model or as the PM5D-RH model which allows internal head amp settings to be

programmed. These models differ as follows.

❏ PM5D model

• Head amp adjustments (input sensitivity settings,

phantom power (+48V) on/off) for the analog inputs

(INPUT jacks 1–48, ST IN jacks 1–4) are performed

manually, using the controls of the top panel.

• Insert jacks (INSERT IN/OUT jacks) for the monaural

analog inputs (INPUT jacks 1–48) are provided on the

rear panel, allowing external effect processors to be

inserted in the analog domain.

• ST IN jacks 1–4 are only for line level.

• There is no +48V MASTER switch.

❏ PM5D-RH model

• Head amp adjustments (input sensitivity settings,

phantom power (+48V) on/off) for the analog inputs

are controlled from within the screen via software. For

this reason, the top panel does not have head amp con-

trols; instead, indicators showing the presence or

absence of a signal are provided. Head amp settings can

be saved in a library and recalled at any time.

• Insert jacks for the analog inputs are not provided.

• ST IN jacks 1–4 support mic levels through line levels.

Phantom power can also be supplied to ST IN jacks 1–

• The +48V MASTER switch turns all phantom power

(+48V) on/off.

INPUT jacks 1–48ST IN jacks 1–4

INSERT IN/OUT jacks 1–48

INPUT jacks 1–48

ST IN jacks 1–4

2 Introduction

12 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

The PM5D provides the following input channels and out-

put channels.

❏ Input channels

This section processes input signals and sends them to the

STEREO bus or MIX buses. There are three types of input

channel, as follows.

• Input channels 1–48

These channels are used to process monaural signals.

By default, the input signals from the monaural analog

input jacks (INPUT jacks 1–48) are assigned to these

channels.

• ST IN channels 1–4

These channels are used to process stereo signals. By

default, the input signals from the stereo analog input

jacks (ST IN jacks 1–4) are assigned to these channels.

• FX RTN channels 1–4

These channels are used mainly to process the return

signals (stereo) from the internal effects. By default, the

left/right output channels of internal effects 1 through

4 are assigned to these channels.

Hint

Signal assignments to the input channels can be changed as

desired.

❏ Output channels

This section mixes the signals sent from input channels

etc., and sends them to the corresponding output jacks or

output buses. There are three types of output channel, as

follows.

• MIX channels 1–24

These process the signals sent from input channels to

MIX buses, and output them from MIX OUT jacks 1

through 24. These channels are used mainly for fold-

back or as sends to external effects. The signals of MIX

channels 1–24 can also be sent to the STEREO bus or

MATRIX buses.

• MATRIX channels 1–8

These process the signals sent from MIX channels or

STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses, and output

them from the MATRIX OUT jacks. This allows MIX

channels or STEREO A/B channels to be mixed at the

desired balance for output.

• STEREO A/B channels

These process the signals sent from input channels or

MIX channels, and output them to STEREO OUT

jacks A/B. These channels are used as the main stereo

outputs. Normally, the same signal is sent from the

STEREO A and B channels. However, it is also possible

to use the STEREO B channel as the center channel for

three-channel L/C/R playback.

Regarding word clock synchronization

The signal used to synchronize digital audio signal process-

ing is called “word clock.” Normally, one device transmits

a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive

this word clock signal and synchronize to it.

In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or

from an external device via the PM5D’s digital input/out-

put jacks or via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, the

word clock must be synchronized between the devices. Be

aware that if the word clock is not synchronized, the sig-

nals will not be transmitted correctly, and unpleasant noise

will occur.

Hint

• For details on synchronizing the word clock of the PM5D

and external devices, refer to the explanation of word clock

in Operating section “Chapter 4. Connections and setup”

(

➥

p.31), and to the Reference Section “WORD CLOCK

screen” (

➥

p.199).

• As an exception, digital signals that are not synchronized

with the PM5D can be input via a digital I/O card that con-

tains a sampling rate converter, or via the 2TR IN/OUT

DIGITAL jacks.

About the channel structure of the

PM5D

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 13

Introduction

How this manual is organized

This owner’s manual is divided into the following three

sections.

❏ Operating section

This section explains the items on the front and rear pan-

els, connections and setup, and how to operate the PM5D’s

basic functionality. In particular if you have not operated a

digital console before, we recommend that you read chap-

ters 2 through 7 first.

❏ Reference section

This section explains the functionality and operation for all

of the PM5D’s screens. Refer to this section when you want

to learn about the items in the screens.

❏ Appendices

This contains various information such as library lists,

parameter lists for the internal effects, the MIDI data for-

mat, and lists of warning messages and error messages.

In this manual, non-locking panel switches that you press

are called “keys,” and those that change their on/off status

when you push them in (locking types) are called

“switches.” Of the control knobs on the panel, those that

turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are

called “knobs,” while those that turn endlessly are called

“encoders.”

Controls located on the panel are enclosed in square brack-

ets [ ] (e.g., [CUE] key, [PAD] switch) in order to

distinguish them from the buttons and knobs displayed in

the screen. For some controls, the section name is listed

before the [ ] (e.g., CH [ON] key, EQ [FREQUENCY]

encoder).

Unless otherwise specified, references to the PM5D apply

to both the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH model. If

specifications differ between the PM5D model and the

PM5D-RH model, such differences will be noted each time

they occur.

Conventions in this manual

2 Top, front, and rear panels

14 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

This chapter explains the names and functions of each part of the PM5D. Details for each section of

the top panel are explained in subsequent chapters of this operating section; refer to the appropri-

ate chapter for more information.

Top panel

A AD IN section (PM5D model)

In this section you can adjust the sensitivity of the ana-

log signals being input from the rear panel INPUT

jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4, and switch pad, insert,

and phantom power (+48 V) on/off (➥ p.35).

B AD IN section (PM5D-RH model)

This area indicates the presence, peak level, and phan-

tom power (+48V) on/off status of the input signal

from rear panel INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–

Hint

For the PM5D-RH model, input sensitivity and phantom power

on/off are controlled by operations in the display (

➥

p.36).

C INPUT channel strip section

This section controls the principal parameters for input

channels 1–48 (➥ p.37).

D FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section

Here you can select the parameters controlled by the

faders/encoders of the INPUT channel strip (

(➥ p.40).

E MIX section

This section controls the on/off status and send level of

the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and

adjusts the master level of the MIX channels (➥ p.49).

F MATRIX section

This section controls the send level of the signals sent

from MIX channels to MATRIX buses, and adjusts the

master level of the MATRIX channels (➥ p.55).

G SELECTED CHANNEL section

In this section you can view and control the mix

parameters for the currently selected input channel or

output channel (➥ p.57).

H Meter section

This section contains peak level meters that indicate

the input levels of input channels and the output levels

of output channels and cue monitoring, as selected by

key operations (➥ p.100).

2 Top, front, and rear panels

(PM5D model)

(PM5D-RH model)

4 5

6 8

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 15

Top, front, and rear panels

I Display

This display shows the information you need to oper-

ate the PM5D, and lets you make system-wide settings

and control mix parameters for input and output

channels (➥ p.19).

Hint

You can adjust the angle of the display by moving the upper

part of the display frame forward or backward.

Note

Before moving the PM5D, you must lower the display all the

way back until it is fastened in place.

J FADER MODE section

Here you can select the combination of channels or

DCA groups that will be controlled by the faders of the

DCA strip section (

K) (➥ p.73).

K DCA strip section

From this section you can control the channels

assigned to DCA groups 1–8 (➥ p.73).

L ST IN/FX RTN (Stereo in / Effect return)

channel strip section

This section controls the principal parameters of ST IN

channels 1–4 or FX RTN channels 1–4 (➥ p.39).

M STEREO strip section

This section controls the principal parameters of the

STEREO A/B channels (➥ p.53).

N SCENE MEMORY section

This section stores/recalls mix parameters as scene

memories (➥ p.80). Mute operations for mute groups

1–8 are also performed in this section (➥ p.75).

O CUE/MONITOR section

This section selects the monitor source that is output

from the MONITOR OUT jacks, and adjusts the lev-

els. This section also determines the cue point and

monitoring method that will be used when you press a

[CUE] key for a channel (➥ p.91).

P OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK section

This section switches the oscillator or talkback on/off,

and adjusts the talkback level (➥ p.97).

Q DISPLAY ACCESS section

This section selects the functions or screen shown in

the display (➥ p.20).

R USER DEFINED KEYS sections

This section executes the functions that have been

assigned to the User Defined keys [1]–[25] (➥ p.138).

S Data entry section

This section lets you move the pointer (the arrow dis-

played in the screen) or cursor (the red frame

indicating a selection) in the display and edit the

parameter value (➥ p.20).

T ASSIGN MODE section

This section lets you assign mute groups and DCA

groups for control from the panel (➥ p.73).

N O P

K M L

2 Top, front, and rear panels

16 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Rear panel

A INPUT jacks 1–48 (PM5D model)

These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for

inputting analog audio signals from line level devices

or microphones. Nominal input level is

–60 dBu to +10 dBu.

B INSERT IN/OUT jacks 1–48 (PM5D model

only)

These are balanced TRS phone type input/output jacks

for inserting external effects or dynamics processors

etc. into INPUT jacks 1–48. Nominal input/output

level is +4 dBu.

C ST IN (Stereo input) jacks 1–4 (PM5D

model)

These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for

inputting analog audio signals from line level devices.

Nominal input level is –34 dBu to +10 dBu.

D +48V MASTER switch (PM5D-RH model

only)

This is the master phantom power (+48V) switch for

INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4. If this switch is

off, the +48V buttons shown in the display are

unavailable.

E INPUT jacks 1–48 (PM5D-RH model)

These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for

inputting analog audio signals from line level devices

or microphones. Nominal input level is

–62 dBu to +10 dBu.

F ST IN (Stereo input) jacks 1–4 (PM5D-RH

model)

These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for

inputting analog audio signals from line level devices

or microphones. Nominal input level is

–62 dBu to +10 dBu.

3 1

(PM5D model)

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

1/4" TRS

phone plug

Tip (hot)

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

(PM5D-RH model)

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 17

Top, front, and rear panels

G MIX OUT jacks

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

analog signals of MIX channels 1–24. Nominal output

level is +4 dBu.

H LAMP connector

This is a four-pin female XLR output jack for supply-

ing power to a gooseneck lamp. (These jacks are

provided at three locations). The location of these jacks

differs between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH

model.

I MONITOR OUT jacks

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

monitor signal selected in the MONITOR section of

the top panel. Nominal output level is +4 dBu.

Note

Although the various output jacks and 2TR IN ANALOG jacks

have a nominal input/output level of +4 dBu (maximum level is

+24 dBu), an internal switch allows this to be changed to

–2 dBu (maximum level +18 dBu) if necessary. For details,

contact your Yamaha dealer.

J CUE OUT jacks

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

cue monitor signal from the channel selected by its

[CUE] key. Nominal output level is +4 dBu.

K STEREO OUT A/B jacks

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

analog signals of the STEREO A/B channels. Nominal

output level is +4 dBu.

L MATRIX OUT jacks

These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the

analog signals of MATRIX channels 1–8. Nominal out-

put level is +4 dBu.

M DC POWER INPUT connector

This is a connector for connecting the PW800W power

supply. Use the dedicated cable included with the

PM5D to make the connection.

N 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2

These are XLR-3-31 (balanced) jacks that input stereo

analog signals from an external source. Nominal input

level is +4 dBu.

O TIME CODE INPUT jack

This is an XLR-3-31 (balanced) jack that receives

SMPTE time code (LTC) from an external source.

P TO HOST connector

This is a USB (type B) connector that allows communi-

cation with a computer.

Q GPI connector

This is a D-sub 25-pin female connector that allows

communication with a GPI-equipped external device.

Female XLR plug

2 (hot)

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

RLRL

87654321

MJ9KL

Female XLR plug

2 (hot)

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

Female XLR plug

2 (hot)

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

Female XLR plug

2 (hot)

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

Female XLR plug

2 (hot)

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

SMPTE

USB

OUT IN

ON OFF

COAXIAL COAXIALAES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU

THRU OUT IN

N X YVUT

Q R S Z aWPO

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

2 Top, front, and rear panels

18 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

R RS422 REMOTE connector

This is a D-sub 9-pin female connector for remotely

controlling an external device that supports the RS422

protocol.

S HA REMOTE connector

This is a D-sub 9-pin male connector for remotely con-

trolling an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha

AD8HR or AD824) that supports a special protocol.

T WORD CLOCK IN connector

This is a BNC connector for supplying a word clock

from an external device to the PM5D.

U 75Ω ON/OFF switch

This switch terminates the word clock connection.

Normally you will leave this ON. If a device made by

another manufacturer is connected and word clock

cannot be received correctly, try turning this OFF.

V WORD CLOCK OUT connector

This is a BNC connector for supplying a word clock

from the PM5D to an external device.

W MIDI IN/THRU/OUT connectors

These connectors are used to transmit and receive

MIDI messages to and from external MIDI devices.

The MIDI IN connector receives messages from an

external device, and the MIDI OUT connector trans-

mits messages from the PM5D. Messages received at

the MIDI IN connector are retransmitted without

change from the MIDI THRU connector.

X 2TR OUT DIGITAL (2 track out digital) jacks

1–3

These jacks digitally output the signals of the STEREO

A/B channels. Two types are provided; AES/EBU

(XLR-3-32) jacks (1/2) which output AES/EBU format

signals, and a COAXIAL (RCA phono) jack (3) which

outputs consumer format signals (IEC60958).

Y 2TR IN DIGITAL (2 track in digital) jacks 1–3

These jacks input digital audio from external devices

such as CD players. Two types are provided; AES/EBU

(XLR-3-31) jacks (1/2) which receive AES/EBU format

signals, and a COAXIAL (RCA phono) jack (3) which

receives consumer format signals (IEC60958).

Z CASCADE OUT connector

This is a D-sub half-pitch 68-pin female connector that

can be connected to another PM5D for transmission/

reception of control signals and transmission of audio

signals.

a CASCADE IN connector

This is a D-sub half-pitch 68-pin female connector that

can be connected to another PM5D for transmission/

reception of control signals and reception of audio

signals.

b Fan grille

This is an output grille for the fan that cools the inte-

rior of the console (two locations). Be careful not to

obstruct the fan exhaust.

c SLOT 1–4

These slots allow separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O

cards to be installed to expand the input/output ports.

Front panel

A MEMORY CARD slot

A memory card inserted in this slot can be used to

save/load scene memories or library data. You can use

PCMCIA Type II flash ATA cards, or CompactFlash

cards inserted into a PC card adaptor.

B MOUSE connector

A PS/2 mouse can be connected to this connector and

used to perform operations in the display.

C KEYBOARD connector

A PS/2 keyboard can be connected to this connector

and used to input text or perform operations in the

display.

D PHONES (Headphone) jack

This headphone jack lets you monitor the MONITOR

OUT or CUE signals.

PHONES

KEYBOARD

MOUSE

MEMORY CARD

PHONES

KEYBOARD

MOUSE

MEMORY CARD

1 2 3 4

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 19

Basic operation on the PM5D

This chapter explains the various types of user interface used to operate the PM5D.

About the various types of user interface

Basic parameters such as mixing and editing the sound of each channel can be controlled by the faders and encoders of the top

panel. However to make more detailed settings, you will need to access the appropriate “function” and edit the parameter val-

ues in the display. The section below explains the various user interface components shown in the display, and how to use

them.

The user interface in the PM5D’s display uses the follow-

ing components.

❏ Pointer

The arrow shown in the display is called the “pointer.” Use

the pointer to select the parameter you want to control

next.

❏ Cursor

The red frame shown in the display is called

the “cursor.” If the cursor encloses a parame-

ter on the screen, that parameter is selected

for operation.

❏ Tabs

The screen names shown in

the upper left of the display

are called “tabs.” Tabs are

used to switch between

screens within the same

function.

❏ Buttons

Buttons in the display are

used to switch parameters

on/off or to select one of

multiple choices. Buttons

that are currently on are dis-

played in green (some

buttons are displayed in red

or blue); buttons that are

turned off are displayed in

gray.

❏ Knobs/Faders/Boxes

Knobs/faders in the display are used to edit parameter val-

ues. The current value is shown in the box. Boxes for which

/ buttons are displayed at left and right allow you to

edit the parameter by using these buttons. (If editing is not

possible, the buttons will be gray.)

If you want to assign a name to a channel or scene, input

characters, numerals, and symbols into the box.

❏ Character palette

This is a “virtual” keyboard used to input characters,

numerals, and symbols into a text input box.

3 Basic operation on the PM5D

User interface in the display

Cursor

Ta b

Buttons turned

off (gray)

Buttons turned

on (green)

Fader

Box

Knob

/ buttons for

editing the value

3 Basic operation on the PM5D

20 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

❏ Scroll bar

If the displayed items are too numerous to fit into a single

screen, you can use the scroll bar to view the portion that is

not currently displayed.

The DISPLAY ACCESS section contains keys that access

the desired function or screen in the display.

A Global functions

These keys access functions that affect the entire

PM5D.

B Output functions

These keys access functions that are related to output

channels.

C Input functions

These keys access functions that are related to input

channels.

When you press the key for the desired function, the screen

for that function will appear in the display. By repeatedly

pressing a key you can cycle through the screens included

in that function.

Hint

If you hold down the [SHIFT] key and press a key in the DIS-

PLAY ACCESS section, the screens included in that function

will appear in the reverse order (Page Back function). You can

also use the Page Back function by holding down a key in the

DISPLAY ACCESS section. If you rapidly press a key twice,

you will return to the first screen in that function.

Controllers used to edit settings and values in the display

are gathered into the data entry section.

A [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] keys

Use these keys to increase or decrease the value of the

parameter where the cursor is located. If the PM5D has

displayed a window asking you to confirm an opera-

tion such as recall or store, these buttons can be used

instead of the CANCEL button and OK button shown

in the window.

B CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys

These keys are used to move the cursor to the desired

parameter.

C [SHIFT] key

This key can be used in conjunction with the CUR-

SOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys to move the cursor

rapidly, or in conjunction with the [DATA] encoder or

[DEC]/[INC] keys to change the parameter value

rapidly.

If you hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the

[ENTER] key, the JOB SELECT window will appear,

allowing you to set multiple parameters in a single

operation. (When you move the cursor to a parameter

for which there is a JOB SELECT window, an indica-

tion of “Job Select = [SHIFT] + [ENTER]” will

appear.)

D [ENTER] key

Use this key to switch a button at the cursor location

on/off, or to open a window.

E [DATA] encoder

Use this to increase or decrease the value of the param-

eter where the cursor is located. The parameter value

will change more rapidly if you turn the [DATA]

encoder while holding down the [SHIFT] key.

Scroll bar

DISPLAY ACCESS section

Data Entry section

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 21

Basic operation on the PM5D

F Track pad and left/right buttons

These are used to move the pointer or select the desired

parameter. To adjust a knob-type parameter in the dis-

play, hold down the left button or right track pad

button while you operate the track pad.

G PHONES (Headphone) jack

This is a stereo phone jack for connecting a set of

headphones.

If desired, you can add the following external user inter-

face components.

❏ Mouse

A PS/2 compatible mouse can be connected to the MOUSE

connector located on the front panel of the PM5D and

used in the same way as the track pad.

❏ Keyboard

A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected to the KEY-

BOARD connector located on the front panel of the PM5D

and used in the same way as the character palette in the

display to input characters, numerals, and symbols. The

numeric key pad of the keyboard can be used to input

numerical values or to recall scenes.

Each key (or combination of keys) has the following

function.

Full keyboard

Numeric key pad

External user interface

Key Function

Same function as the [INS/OK] key of the Data

Entry section

Same function as the [DEC/CANCEL] key of

the Data Entry section

<←>, <→>,

<↑>, <↓>

Same function as the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/

[†] keys

<Alt> +

Same function as moving the [DATA] encoder

clockwise

<Alt> +

Same function as moving the [DATA] encoder

counterclockwise

<Enter> Same function as the [ENTER] key

<Shift> Same function as the [SHIFT] key

<Ctrl> + <←>,

Same function as the buttons of the

character palette

Copies the text string in the box and clears the

copy-source character string (Cut)

Same function as the COPY button of the

character palette

Same function as the PASTE button of the

character palette

Same function as the INS button of the char-

acter palette

Same function as the DEL button of the char-

acter palette

<Home>

Moves the input location in the box to the

beginning

<End>

Moves the input location in the box to after the

last-input character

Deletes the preceding character that was

input in the box (Backspace)

<Tab>

Switches to the next screen within the same

function

Switches to the previous screen within the

same function

<Esc>

Accesses the function menu (if the function

menu is already displayed, recalls the last-dis-

played screen)

<Alt> +

<0>–<9>

Switch screens within the same function

Key Function

<0>–<9>

Input a scene number (if the PREFERENCE 1

screen item USE NUMERIC-KEYPAD is on),

input numerical values (if off)

<.>

Returns the scene selection number to the

number of the scene that was last recalled or

stored

<+>

Same function as the [π] key of the SCENE

MEMORY section

<->

Same function as the [†] key of the SCENE

MEMORY section

</>, <*> Not used

<Enter>

Same function as the [RECALL] key of the

SCENE MEMORY section (if the PREFER-

ENCE 1 screen item USE NUMERIC-KEY-

PAD is on), same function as the [ENTER] key

(when off)

Key Function

3 Basic operation on the PM5D

22 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Basic operation

This section explains the basic procedures you can perform in the PM5D’s display. In general, you will perform operations in

the PM5D’s display by combining the operations described here.

Moving the pointer to a specific parameter in the screen

and pressing the left/right track pad button (or the left/

right mouse button) is called “clicking.” Clicking is mainly

used to turn an on-screen button on/off, to move the cur-

sor, or to make fine adjustments to a value.

Using the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys of the data

entry section to move the cursor to a desired parameter

and then pressing the [ENTER] key is equivalent to click-

ing. If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you can perform the

same action using the arrow keys and the <Enter> key.

Subsequently in this manual, this operation will simply be

called “clicking.”

Hint

When using the track pad, you can

move the pointer to the desired param-

eter and then tap the track pad to

obtain the same result as if you

pressed the left button. (This is called

the Tapping function.) If you want to

use the tapping function, you must

enable it in the PREFERENCE 2

screen (UTILITY function) (

➥

p.188).

Moving the pointer to a specific parameter in the screen

and then holding down the left/right track pad (or mouse)

button while moving up/down/left/right is called “drag-

ging.” Dragging is used mainly to adjust the value of a

knob or fader.

Using the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys of the data

entry section to move the cursor to a desired parameter

and then turning the [DATA ] encoder (or pressing the

[DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] keys) is equivalent to drag-

ging. If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you can perform the

same action using the arrow keys and the <PageUp>/

<PageDown> keys (or keys that have the same function).

Subsequently in this manual, this operation will simply be

called “dragging.”

Moving the mouse pointer to a specific parameter in the

screen, dragging to another location in the screen, and then

releasing your finger is called “dragging and dropping.”

Dragging and dropping is used to copy EQ or compressor

settings to another channel. Dragging and dropping can-

not be performed using the CURSOR keys or keyboard.

Subsequently in this manual, this operation will be called

“dragging and dropping.”

Click

• Track pad • Mouse

• Track pad

Tapping

Drag

While pressing

• Track pad • Mouse

Drag and drop

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 23

Basic operation on the PM5D

A desired function/screen can be accessed in the display

using either of the following two methods.

❏ Using the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS

section

From the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section,

press the key corresponding to the desired

function.

The most recently operated screen for that function

will appear.

If you want to switch to another screen within

that function, press the same key you pressed

in step 1.

If you repeatedly press a key in the DISPLAY ACCESS

section, or hold down the [SHIFT] key of the data

entry section and press the same key as in step 1, you

will return to the preceding screen of the same

function.

❏ Using buttons within the display

In any screen, click the function name area

located in the upper left of the screen.

When you click the function name area, the function

menu screen will appear. This screen is the starting

point from which you can access the desired screen via

operations in the display.

In the function menu screen, click the button

corresponding to the desired function.

The most recently operated screen for that function

will appear.

Click a tab in the screen to select the desired

screen.

Hint

By clicking the buttons located below

the function name area you can switch backward through the

screens that had been previously displayed for at least two

seconds (not including the function menu). Up to the eight

most recent screens are remembered.

To select a parameter, use the data entry section’s control-

lers or a PS/2 keyboard to move the cursor (the red frame).

Hint

If you are using a mouse or the track pad, the cursor will move

when you click on the button or knob of the desired

parameter.

Use the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys to

move the cursor.

The cursor in the display will move in the direction of

the key you pressed. However, it will not move if there

is no parameter in the direction of that key.

Accessing a desired screen

Click the function name area

Click a tab

Moving the cursor

Move to the adjacent grid

3 Basic operation on the PM5D

24 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

To move quickly to the outer edge of the cur-

rent window or to a different window, hold

down the [SHIFT] key and use the CURSOR

[√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys.

You will move from the scroll window in which the

cursor is currently located, in the direction of the key

you pressed.

Hint

If the cursor is located on a grid such as in a PATCH screen,

turning the [DATA] encoder clockwise will move the cursor

toward the right, and turning it counterclockwise will move the

cursor toward the left. If you are holding down the [SHIFT]

key, turning the [DATA] encoder clockwise will move the cur-

sor downward, and turning it counterclockwise will move the

cursor upward.

A scroll bar is displayed if there are more items than can be

shown in a single screen. To scroll the screen, drag the box

shown in the bar.

You can also scroll the screen by clicking the vacant por-

tion of the scroll bar or the / buttons or /

buttons located at the ends of the scroll bar.

If you move the cursor to the scroll bar

and press the [DEC/CANCEL] key or

turn the [DATA] encoder counterclock-

wise, the screen will scroll toward the left

(or upward, in the case of vertical scroll-

ing). If you press the [INC/OK] key or

turn the [DATA] encoder clockwise, the screen will scroll

toward the right (or downward, in the case of vertical

scrolling).

Hint

If the cursor is located at the scroll bar box, holding down the

[SHIFT] key and turning the [DATA] encoder will have the

same result as clicking the button or button, depend-

ing on the direction in which you turn the encoder.

[SHIFT] key

CURSOR [®] key

Scrolling the screen

➠

Drag

Click these buttons to move the

scroll bar box step-wise in the

direction indicated. Clicking the

/ buttons will move in larger

steps than clicking the /

buttons.

Click in these areas to

make the scroll bar box

move by a large step in the

corresponding direction;

the screen will scroll

accordingly.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 25

Basic operation on the PM5D

Buttons in the display are used to switch parameters on/off

or to select one of multiple choices.

Move the pointer to the desired button, and

use the left/right buttons of the track pad (or

mouse) to click the button.

The button will be switched on/off (or the correspond-

ing button will be selected).

Hint

You can use the CURSOR [

√

]/[

†

] keys and the

[ENTER] key (or the arrow keys and <Enter> key of a PS/2

keyboard) to perform the equivalent operation.

Hint

When using the track pad, you can also click by tapping the

track pad if you have enabled tapping in the PREFERENCE 2

screen (UTILITY function

➥

p.188). In this case, the result will

be the same as if you pressed the left button of the track pad

(or mouse).

Knobs and faders in the display are used to adjust the value

of specific parameters.

Move the pointer to the desired knob/fader,

and use the left/right buttons of the track pad

(or mouse) to click the knob/fader.

The cursor will move to that location.

To increase or decrease the value in steps of 1,

click the right button or left button of the

track pad (or mouse).

Clicking the right button will raise the value by one

step, and clicking the left button will lower the value by

one step.

To raise or lower the value continuously, use

the track pad (or mouse) to drag the knob/

fader.

The value will change as you drag the knob or fader

left/right or up/down. For a parameter whose knob has

a wide range of adjustment, holding down the right

button of the track pad (or mouse) as you drag will

produce a larger range of change than when using the

left button.

Hint

You can also adjust the value by using the [DEC/CANCEL]/

[INC/OK] keys, the [DATA] encoder, or the <PageUp>/<Page-

Down> keys of a PS/2 keyboard. When adjusting a parameter

that has a wide range of adjustment, you can increase the rate

of change by holding down the [SHIFT] key while you press

the [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] keys (or turn the [DATA]

encoder).

Operating the buttons

➠

Click

Off On

Adjusting the setting of a knob or

fader

Adjust the

knob value

Adjust the

fader value

3 Basic operation on the PM5D

26 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

On the PM5D you can assign a four-character name to

each input channel or DCA group, and assign a title to

scene and library data when saving it.

For example, the screen shown below is the LIBRARY

STORE window that appears when you assign a name to

the INPUT EQ library. To input characters in this screen,

use the following procedure.

Use the character palette (or a PS/2 key-

board) to input a character.

When you click the character palette, a character will

be input in the box, and the highlighted area will move

to the right.

Input the subsequent characters in the same

way.

When inputting characters, you can use the following

buttons in the character palette.

Note

Copy/paste operations are not possible in some screens.

There are also cases in which the paste operation cannot be

performed due to the type of character string copied to the

buffer memory.

When you have finished inputting the name,

click the STORE button.

The name you input will be stored.

Hint

• In general, the same procedure applies in screens where

you enter names for scenes or other library items.

• If a PS/2 keyboard is connected, you can use it to enter

characters.

• If you move the cursor to the text input box and press the

[ENTER] key (or click), the input position will move to that

point. If the cursor is located at the text input box, you can

step through the available characters by turning the [DATA]

encoder. If the cursor is located elsewhere, turning the

[DATA] encoder will move the selected position. The [INC]/

[DEC] keys move the selected position regardless of where

the cursor is located.

Note

The number of characters that can be input will depend on the

type of data (scene/library) you are saving. You cannot input

more than the specified number of characters, or move the

highlighted area beyond that range.

INS button

Inserts a space (blank) at the high-

lighted position. Pressing the

<Insert> key of a PS/2 keyboard will

produce the same result.

DEL button

Deletes the character at the high-

lighted position. Pressing the

<Delete> key of a PS/2 keyboard will

produce the same result.

CLEAR button

Deletes all characters that have been

input in the text input box.

buttons

Move the highlighted area to left or

right.

PASTE button

Pastes the character string that was

copied to buffer memory by the

COPY button. Holding down the

<Ctrl> key and pressing the <V> key

of a PS/2 keyboard will produce the

same result.

COPY button

Copies the character string in the box

to a temporary buffer memory. Hold-

ing down the <Ctrl> key and pressing

the <C> key of a PS/2 keyboard will

produce the same result.

CAPS LOCK button

Switches between uppercase and

lowercase alphabetical characters.

Uppercase characters can be input

while this button is on.

Assigning a name

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 27

Connections and setup

This chapter explains how to make audio input/output connections, and how to perform the setup

required when starting the PM5D for the first time.

Audio connections

PM5D model

INPUT jacks 1–48 are used mainly to connect micro-

phones or monaural line-level devices. ST IN jacks 1–4 are

used mainly to connect stereo line-level devices.

Input signal sensitivity, pad on/off, and phantom power

(+48V) on/off are controlled from the top panel AD IN

section (➥ p.36).

PM5D-RH model

INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4 can both be used to

connect microphones or line-level devices.

Input signal sensitivity and phantom power (+48V) on/off

are controlled from within the display (➥ p.36). However,

all phantom power can be switched on/off as a whole by

the rear panel [+48V MASTER] switch.

On either model, the default state is for the input signals

from INPUT jacks 1–48 to be patched to input channels 1–

48 and the input signals from ST IN jacks 1–4 to be

patched to the ST IN channels. However, this can be

changed if desired. (For details on returning the patching

to its default state ➥ p.32)

4 Connections and setup

Analog audio connections

Synthesizer Microphone

Effect processor

Synthesizer

MicrophoneMicrophone

4 Connections and setup

28 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

MIX OUT jacks 1–24, MATRIX OUT jacks 1–8, and STE-

REO OUT A/B jacks respectively output the signal from

MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, and the STE-

REO A/B channels.

The MONITOR OUT jacks output the monitor signal that

is selected in the top panel MONITOR section.

The CUE OUT jacks output the cue monitor signal of the

channel that is currently selected by its [CUE] key.

Analog output connections

RLRL

87654321

MIX OUT MATRIX OUT

MONITOR OUT DC POWER INPUTCUE OUT

STEREO OUT

Monitor speakers Monitor speakers

PW800W power supply

Monitor speakers

(foldback)

Main speakers

Recorder, relay

vehicle, etc.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 29

Connections and setup

Use 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 to connect digital sources

such as CD players or DAT recorders. (To input analog

output signals from a CD player or DAT recorder, use 2TR

IN ANALOG jacks 1/2.)

Use 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 to send the STEREO A/

B channel signals to a DAT recorder or other digital device.

By installing separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards in slots

1–4 you can add analog input/output jacks to the PM5D or

allow connection of digital devices such as digital MTR or

HDR units.

The following types of I/O card can be used.

Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most

recent information on I/O cards.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com

Note

• In order to send or receive digital audio via the 2TR IN DIGI-

TAL jacks, 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks, or slots 1–4, the word

clock data of the respective signals must be synchronized

(

➥

p.31).

• In order to assign input signals from the 2TR IN DIGITAL

jacks, 2TR IN ANALOG jacks, or slots 1–4 to input channels

or ST IN channels, you will need to change the input patch-

ing (

➥

p.66).

Digital input/output connections

SMPTE

USB

OUT IN

ON OFF

COAXIAL COAXIALAES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU

THRU OUT IN

DAT

00.00.00.00

2TR IN

ANALOG

2TR OUT

DIGITAL

2TR IN

DIGITAL

SLOT

CD player DAT recorder

Digital MTR/HDR

Digital I/O card

Card type Model

Number of

channels

Digital

format

Bit

depth

AD card

MY4-AD 4

—

24 bit

MY8-AD

20 bit

MY8-AD24

24 bit

MY8-AD96

DA card

MY4-DA 4

—

20 bit

MY8-DA96 8 24 bit

Digital I/O card

MY8-AE

AES/EBU

24 bit

MY8-AE96

MY8-AE96S

MY16-AE 16

MY8-AT 8

ADAT

MY16-AT 16

MY8-TD 8

TASCAM

MY16-TD 16

CobraNet card MY16-C 16 CobraNet 24 bit

4 Connections and setup

30 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Before installing a card, you must check the Yamaha web-

site to make sure that this device is compatible with this

card, and to verify the number of cards that can be

installed in conjunction with other Yamaha or third-party

cards.

Yamaha website: http:www.yamahaproaudio.com

To install an optional mini-YGDAI card, proceed as

follows.

Make sure that the power is turned off.

Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover in

place, and remove the slot cover.

Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place.

Align the edges of the card with the guard

rails inside the slot, and insert the card into

the slot.

Push the card all the way into the slot so that the con-

nector at the end of the card is correctly mated with the

connector inside the slot.

Use the screws included with the card to fas-

ten the card in place.

Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the

card is not fastened.

Installing an option card

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

AES/EBU AES/EBU

COAXIAL

AES/EBU

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 31

Connections and setup

Word clock connections and settings

This section explains the word clock settings required in order to send or receive digital audio between the PM5D and an

external digital device.

When digital audio signals are being sent or received

between multiple devices, the devices must process the

audio signals at the matching timing. For example if the

audio signal processing is not synchronized, the signals will

not be transmitted correctly and unpleasant noise will

occur even if both devices are set to the same sampling

frequency.

The signal used to synchronize digital audio signal process-

ing is called “word clock.” Normally, one device transmits

a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive

this word clock signal and synchronize to it. (The transmit-

ting device is called the “word clock master” and the

receiving devices are called “word clock slaves.”)

The word clock can be synchronized between the PM5D

and external devices in either of two ways; you can send/

receive a word clock signal by itself, or use the clock data

that is included in a digital audio signal.

The WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors on the rear

panel of the PM5D are used to send/receive a word clock

signal by itself. In general, word clock connections can be

made in either of the following two ways.

Using daisy-chain connections

In this method, the signal is distributed sequentially; the

WORD CLOCK OUT connector of the first device is con-

nected to the WORD CLOCK IN connector of the second

device, and so on. Turn ON all of the 75Ω ON/OFF

switches. This method is not recommended for large

systems.

Using a word clock distribution box

In this method, a special word clock distribution box is

used to distribute the signal from the word clock master to

multiple word clock slaves. Turn ON all of the 75Ω ON/

OFF switches.

If an external device does not have WORD CLOCK IN/

OUT connectors, the clock data included in the digital

audio signal is used. In this case, both the digital audio sig-

nal and the clock data are sent from the DIGITAL OUT

jack of the word clock master to the DIGITAL IN jack of

the word clock slave.

When digitally connecting the PM5D to an external device,

you must select the source that will be the word clock mas-

ter for the system.

Repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key of

the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the WORD

CLOCK screen appears.

In this screen you can select the master clock, and

check the input signal synchronization status for each

slot or jack.

Note

When you switch the word clock source, noise may occur due

to loss of synchronization. You must lower the level of your

monitoring equipment before you perform the following

operation.

About word clock

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

WC OUT (BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

75Ω ON/OFF= ON

75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON

Word clock

master

Device A

Word clock

slave

Device B

Word clock

slave

Device C

Word clock

slave

WC OUT

(BNC)

WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC)

75Ω ON/OFF= ON

75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON

Word clock

master

Device A

Word clock

slave

Word clock

distribution box

Device B

Word clock

slave

Device C

Word clock

slave

Device D

Word clock

slave

DIGITAL

OUT

DIGITAL

Digital audio signal

Clock data

Device A

Word clock

master

Device B

Word clock

slave

Selecting the word clock master

WORD CLOCK MASTER CLOCK SELECT area

4 Connections and setup

32 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Use the MASTER CLOCK SELECT area located in the

upper part of the screen to select the master clock

source. You can choose one of the following sources.

Note

Sources for which the symbol at the left of the button is red

(UNLOCK) or yellow (UNKNOWN) cannot be selected, since

a valid clock is not being input or the clock cannot be

detected.

In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT area located in

the upper part of the screen, click a button to

select the desired master clock source.

A window will appear, asking you to confirm that you

want to switch the master clock.

Click the OK button.

The selected word clock master will be enabled. The

selected word clock master is remembered even if you

turn off the power. As long as the connections have not

been changed, you don’t have to make this setting

again.

Note

• If a digital I/O card (such as the MY8-AE96S) that contains a

built-in SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is installed in slots

1–4, you can switch the SRC on/off in groups of two chan-

nels. The input signals from channels for which the SRC is

turned on do not need to be synchronized with the PM5D’s

word clock.

• If transferring high sampling rate (88.2 kHz/96 kHz) signals

between the PM5D and an external device, you will need to

select the transmission method. (For details, refer to p.200)

Restoring the current scene to the default state

When the PM5D is in its default state, the input signals

from INPUT jacks 1–48 are patched to input channels 1–

48 and the input signals from ST IN jacks 1–4 are patched

to the ST IN channels, and can then be output via the STE-

REO bus or MIX buses.

However, if the PM5D’s internal mix parameter settings

(referred to as the “current scene”) have been modified,

the signal of a specific input may not be sent to an input

channel, or the EQ or dynamics processors may be set to

produce extreme effects.

To initialize the mix parameters from such a state, proceed

as follows.

Use the SCENE [π]/[†] keys of the SCENE

MEMORY section to make the scene number

indicator show “000”.

Scene number “000” is a scene memory containing the

default settings.

Press the [RECALL] key of the SCENE MEM-

ORY section.

Scene number “000” will be loaded, and the current

scene will return to the default state.

Note

Be aware that when scene number “000” is loaded, the input

patch, output patch, internal effect, and HA (Head Amp) set-

tings will also return to their default state. (However, the word

clock master selection is not affected.)

INT 96, INT 88.2,

INT 48, INT 44.1

These settings select the PM5D’s inter-

nal clock. If you select one of these set-

tings, the PM5D will operate as the

word clock master. As necessary,

make settings within your external

devices so that they will operate as

word clock slaves.

W.CLOCK IN

The PM5D will follow the word clock

signal being input from the rear panel

WORD CLOCK IN connector.

CASCADE IN

The PM5D will follow the clock data

being sent from another PM5D con-

nected to the CASCADE IN connector.

2TR IN D1–D3

The PM5D will follow the clock data

included in the input signal from 2TR

IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3.

SLOT 1–4

The PM5D will follow the clock data

included in the input signal from a digi-

tal I/O card installed in slots 1–4. (You

can select a speciﬁc pair of adjacent

odd-numbered/even-numbered chan-

nels.)

Scene number

indicator

SCENE [π]/[†]

keys

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 33

Input channel operations

This chapter explains the functions and operation of each section related to input channels.

About the input channels

The input channel section processes the signals that are input via the input patch section, and outputs them to the STEREO

buses or MIX buses. There are three types of input channel, as follows.

Input channels 1–48

These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the input patching is in the default state, the input signals from

INPUT jacks 1–48 are assigned to these channels.

ST IN channels 1–4

These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the input patching is in the default state, the input signals from ST IN

jacks 1–4 are assigned to these channels.

5 Input channel operations

34 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

FX RTN channels 1–4

These channels are used mainly to process the return signals (stereo) from the internal effects. When the input patching is in

the default state, the left/right channels of internal effects 1–4 are assigned to these channels.

• INPUT PATCH

This assigns an input signal to the input channel.

•ø (Phase)

Switches the phase of the input signal.

• MS DECODE (Input channels / ST IN channels

only)

Switches MS decode processing on/off when an MS

mic is connected.

• ATT (Attenuator)

Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal.

• HPF (High Pass Filter)

This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the

specified frequency.

•4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer)

A parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID,

LOW MID, and LOW.

• GATE (Input channels and ST IN channels only)

This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gat-

ing or ducking.

• COMP (Compressor) (Input channels and ST IN

channels only)

This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com-

pressor, expander, or limiter.

• INPUT DELAY (Input channels and ST IN channels

only)

This delays the input signal. It can be used to make fine

adjustments in the relative timing between channels.

• LEVEL/DCA 1-8

Adjusts the input level of the effect.

• ON (On/off)

Turns the input channel on/off. If off, that channel is

muted.

• PAN

Adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the input

channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, this pan set-

ting can also be applied to signals sent to two paired

MIX buses.

• LCR (Left/Center/Right)

Sends the three-channel signal (left/right channels and

a center channel) to the STEREO bus.

• MIX 1-24 (Mix send level 1–24)

Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input

channel to MIX buses 1–24. As the position from

which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose

from the following; immediately before the 4-band EQ,

pre-fader, or post-fader.

• INSERT (Input channels and ST IN channels only)

Here you can patch the desired output port and input

port to insert-out/insert-in, allowing an external effect

processor or other device to be inserted. You can

switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.

• DIRECT OUT (Input channel and ST IN channels

only)

This can be patched to an output port, and the input

signal sent directly from that output port.

• METER

This meters the level of the input channel. The level

detection point can be switched.

Note

The signal assignments from input patch to input channel can

be edited in the INPUT PATCH function INPUT PATCH

screen.

To edit the parameters of an input channel, you can either

use the panel controllers (e.g., INPUT channel strip, ST

IN/FX RTN channel strip, SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion), or access the appropriate screen in the display and

edit the parameters in the screen.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 35

Input channel operations

AD IN section

The AD IN section AD-converts the signals that are input from the rear panel INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4, and

sends them to the input patch section. The structure of this section differs between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH

model.

PM5D model

A [+48V ON/OFF] switch

If this switch is on, +48V is supplied to the condenser

mic or direct box connected to the INPUT jack 1–48.

B [PAD] switch

If this switch is on, the input level is attenuated by

26 dB.

C [GAIN] knob

Adjusts the input sensitivity of the input channel. The

range of adjustment is –34 dBu to +10 dBu (when the

PAD switch is on) or –60 dBu to –16 dBu (when the

PAD switch is off).

D [PEAK]/[SIGNAL] LED

The [SIGNAL] LED will light when the input level

reaches 14 dB below nominal level (i.e., 34 dB below

clipping level). The [PEAK] indicator will light when

the signal reaches 3 dB below clipping level.

E [INSERT ON/OFF] switch

This switch enables/disables the INSERT IN/OUT jack

located on the rear panel.

F ST IN [GAIN] knob

Adjusts the input sensitivity of the ST IN channel. The

range of adjustment is –34 dBu to +10 dBu.

G ST IN [PEAK]/ST IN [SIGNAL] LED

The ST IN [SIGNAL] LED will light when the input

level of the ST IN channel reaches 14 dB below nomi-

nal level (34 dB below clipping level). The ST IN

[PEAK] indicator will light when the signal reaches

3 dB below clipping level.

H [LAMP DIMMER] knob

This adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to

the LAMP connector.

PM5D model

PM5D-RH model

Items in the AD IN section

5 Input channel operations

36 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

PM5D-RH model

A [+48V ON/OFF] LED

This LED will light if phantom power (+48V) is being

supplied to the corresponding INPUT jacks 1–48 or ST

IN jacks 1–4. However, +48V will not be supplied

unless the rear panel [+48V MASTER] switch is on.

B [PEAK]/[SIGNAL] LED

The [SIGNAL] LED will light when the input level

reaches 14 dB below nominal level (i.e., 34 dB below

clipping level). The [PEAK] indicator will light when

the signal reaches 3 dB below clipping level.

C [LAMP DIMMER] knob

This adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to

the LAMP connector.

On the PM5D-RH model, the AD IN input signal sensitiv-

ity and phantom power (+48V) on/off setting for each

channel are controlled from within the display. However,

the rear panel [+48V MASTER] switch is the phantom

power master switch.

You can adjust the input sensitivity and switch phantom

power (+48V) on/off for the signals being input from

INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4. These operations

are performed differently on the PM5D model and PM5D-

RH model.

Hint

Even if input channels are paired, head amp settings must be

made individually.

PM5D model

For the PM5D model, head amp settings are made using

the controls of the AD IN section of the panel (➥ p.35).

• The input sensitivity is adjusted by the combination of

the [GAIN] knob setting and [PAN] switch on/off set-

ting for that jack.

• To supply phantom power (+48V) to an INPUT jack

1–48, turn on the [+48V] switch corresponding to that

jack.

• To enable an external device that is inserted into the

INSERT IN/OUT jacks, turn on the [INSERT] switch

corresponding to that jack.

PM5D-RH model

On the PM5D-RH model, head amp settings are made by

operations within the display.

Repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key of

the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the HA

screen appears.

In the screen, click the INTERNAL HA button.

The internal head amp settings for INPUT jacks 1–48

and ST IN jacks 1–4 will be displayed.

Use the buttons and knobs in the screen to

edit the head amp settings.

A +48V button

Click this button to switch phantom power (+48V) on/

off for that jack.

B GAIN knob

Drag this knob to adjust the input sensitivity of that

jack in a range of +10 dB to –62 dB.

C GANG button

If this button is on, the input sensitivity of two adja-

cent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels will

change in tandem, maintaining the current offset value.

When making these settings, the LEDs of the AD IN

section of the panel will indicate the input signal level

and the phantom power (+48V) on/off status.

Note

• On the PM5D-RH model, head amp settings can also be

made from the HA/INSERT function CH 1-24 screen, CH

25-48 screen, or ST IN/FX RTN screen (

➥

p.258).

• Settings for an external head amp device (AD8HR) can also

be made from the screen in the same way as for the inter-

nal head amps.

Controlling the input sensitivity and

phantom power (+48V) of the head amp

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 37

Input channel operations

INPUT channel strip

The INPUT channel strip is the section where you can control the principal parameters of the input channels.

This section is layered as shown in the following diagram; choose the CH 1-24 layer when you want to control input channels

1–24, or the CH 25-48 layer when you want to control input channels 25–48.

A [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys

These keys select the layer (CH 1-24 or CH 25-48) con-

trolled by the INPUT channel strip. The LED of the

currently selected layer will light.

B [PRE] key

This selects the output location of the signal when send

level to MIX bus 1–24 is selected as the encoder func-

tion. The pre-fader signal is sent to the corresponding

MIX bus if this key is on, and the post-fader signal is

sent if this key is off.

C ENCODER [ON] key

This switches the function currently assigned to the

encoder on/off. By default, this switches the signal sent

from the input channel to MIX buses 1–24 on/off.

D Encoder

According to the selection in the ENCODER MODE

section / FADER FLIP section (➥ p.40), this encoder

adjusts the send level from the input channel to MIX

buses 1–24, the panning of the input channel, or the

level of the input channel in the layer that is not cur-

rently selected. By default, this adjusts the send level to

MIX buses 1–24.

E [SEL] key

This selects the input channel that you will control

from the SELECTED CHANNEL section or from

within the display.

F Name indicator

This displays the name that has been assigned to the

input channel.

G CH [ON] key

Switches the input channel on/off. If this key is off

(LED dark), no signal will be sent from that input

channel to the STEREO bus or MIX buses.

H Fader

This 100 mm fader adjusts the input level of the input

channel.

I [CUE] key

This key lets you cue-monitor the signal of the input

channel.

CH 1-24 layer

CH 25-48 layer

Items in the INPUT channel strip

5 Input channel operations

38 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

J [TO ST] LED

This LED will light when the signal sent from the input

channel to the STEREO bus is on.

K [COMP] LED

This indicates the operational status of the compressor

for the input channel. This will be dark when the gain

reduction amount is 0 dB, dimly lit when it is 0–10 dB,

and lit when it is greater than 10 dB.

L [GATE] LED

This indicates the operational status of the gate for the

input channel. This will be dark when the gain reduc-

tion amount is 0 dB, dimly lit when it is 0–30 dB (or 0–

10 dB when ducking), and lit when greater than this.

M Meter LEDs

This is a six-point LED meter that indicates the input

level of the input channel. OVER indicates clipping

level, and –6 to –60 indicate the level of the signal rela-

tive to clipping level (0 dB). The level detection point

can be switched.

N DCA assign LEDs

The LED of the DCA group to which that input chan-

nel is assigned will light.

O MUTE assign LEDs

The LED of the mute group to which that input chan-

nel is assigned will light.

P [RCL SAFE]/[MUTE SAFE] LEDs

The corresponding LED will light when recall safe or

mute safe is enabled for the input channel.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 39

Input channel operations

ST IN/FX RTN channel strip

In this section you can control the ST IN channels and FX RTN channels.

This section is layered as shown in the diagram below; choose the ST IN layer when you want to control the ST IN channels,

or the FX RTN layer when you want to control the FX RTN channels.

A [ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys

These keys select the layer that will be controlled by the

ST IN/FX RTN channel strip. Press the [ST IN 1-4] key

to control ST IN channels 1–4, or press the [FX RTN 1-

4] key to control FX RTN channels 1–4.

Items

2–P below are the same as in the INPUT channel

strip (➥ p.37). However since FX RTN channels do not

have a gate or compressor, the [GATE] LED (

L) and

[COMP] LED (

K) are not used.

B [PRE] key

C ENCODER [ON] key

D Encoder

E [SEL] key

F Name indicator

G CH [ON] key

H Fader

I [CUE] key

J [TO ST] LED

K [COMP] LED

L [GATE] LED

M Meter LEDs

N DCA assign LEDs

O MUTE assign LEDs

P [RCL SAFE]/[MUTE SAFE] LEDs

FX RTN 1-4 layer

ST IN 1-4 layer

Items in the ST IN/FX RTN channel

strip

5 Input channel operations

40 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section

In the FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section you can change the parameter that is assigned to the encoders, and exchange

the parameters assigned to the faders and encoders.

A FADER [FLIP] key

If this key is on, the parameters controlled by the fad-

ers and encoders will be exchanged.

B Encoder mode indicator

This indicates the number of the MIX bus (1–24)

selected by the MIX SEND SELECT keys (

6) or the

encoder function selected by keys

3–5.

C [PAN] key

This key selects pan (balance) as the parameter con-

trolled by the encoders. The encoder mode indicator

will indicate “Pn” while this key is on.

D [GAIN/ATT] key

This key selects input sensitivity to the internal head

amp (PM5D-RH model only) or external head amp

device (AD8HR or AD824) or attenuation immedi-

ately after AD conversion as the parameter controlled

by the encoders. The encoder mode indicator will indi-

cate “HA” (if input sensitivity to the head amp is

selected) or “At” (if attenuator is selected) while this

key is on.

E [ALT LAYER] key

This key selects “input level of the channel not

included in the currently selected layer” as the parame-

ter controlled by the encoders. The encoder mode

indicator will indicate “AL” while this key is on.

F MIX SEND SELECT [1]–[24] keys

These keys select the MIX bus (1–24) whose send level

will be controlled by the encoders. When you press one

of these keys, the LED of that key will light, and the

encoder mode indicator will show the number of the

MIX bus.

Hint

If you turn on any key

–

, the remaining keys will automati-

cally turn off.

Items in the FADER FLIP/ENCODER

MODE section

5432

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 41

Input channel operations

Various operations for input channels

When the PM5D is in the default state, the encoders of the

INPUT channel strip and ST IN/FX RTN channel strip are

assigned to control send levels to MIX buses 1–24. How-

ever you can use the various ENCODER MODE keys to

select one of the following as the function of the encoders.

The currently selected function is shown by the key that is

lit and by the encoder mode indicator.

Repeatedly pressing the [PAN] key or [ALT LAYER] key

will alternate between the function selected by that key and

the MIX bus send level. Repeatedly pressing the [GAIN/

ATT] key will alternate between the following three

choices; input sensitivity to the internal head amp → atten-

uator → MIX bus send level.

Hint

If the FADER section [FLIP] key is on, the functions controlled

by the encoders and faders will be exchanged.

You can use the FADER [FLIP] key to exchange the func-

tions assigned to the faders and encoders of the channel

strip.

For example with the default setting (FADER [FLIP] key

off), the faders control the input channel input levels, and

the encoders control the send levels to the MIX buses. If

you then press the FADER [FLIP] key to make the LED

light, the faders will control the send levels to the MIX

buses and the encoders will control the input channel

input levels.

The function assigned to the controls when the [FLIP] key is on (LED lit) will depend on the current encoder mode as follows.

Note

• The DCA channel strip and STEREO A/B channel strip are not affected by the on/off status of the [FLIP] key.

• The Flip function cannot be used if PAN or GAIN/ATT is selected as the encoder mode. If you turn on the [FLIP] key in these modes, MIX

SEND will automatically be selected as the encoder mode, and then the fader and encoder parameters will be exchanged.

Key Encoder function Display

MIX SEND SELECT

[1]–[24] keys

Send levels to MIX buses 1–24 1–24

[PAN] key Pan (balance) Pn

[GAIN/ATT] key Head amp input sensitivity HA

[GAIN/ATT] key Attenuator At

[ALT LAYER] key

Input level for the currently un-

selected layer

*1. In the INPUT channel strip, the CH 1-24 layer and the CH

25-48 layer are in a “front/rear” relation. In the ST IN/FX

RTN channel strip, the ST IN 1-4 layer and the FX RTN 1-4

layer are in a “front/rear” relation.

Selecting the function of the encoders

Exchanging the fader and encoder

functions

➠

Control the channel input

level and on/off status

Control the channel input

level and on/off status

Control the send level and on/off

status of the signal sent from the

channel to the MIX buses

Control the send level and on/off

status of the signal sent from the

channel to the MIX buses

[FLIP]

key

Encoder

mode

Function of each control

Encoder ENCODER [ON] key Fader CH [ON] key

Off

MIX

SEND

Send level from channel to

MIX bus

On/off status of signal sent

from channel to MIX bus

Channel (currently

selected layer) input level

Channel (currently

selected layer) on/off

PA NPan (balance)

On/off status of signal sent

from channel to STEREO

bus

GAIN/ATT

Head amp input sensitivity

/ attenuator

No function

ALT

LAYER

Channel (currently un-

selected layer) input level

Channel (currently un-

selected layer) on/off

MIX

SEND

Channel (currently

selected layer) input level

Channel (currently

selected layer) on/off

Send level from channel

(currently selected layer) to

MIX bus

On/off status of signal sent

from channel (currently

selected layer) to MIX bus

PA N

————

GAIN/ATT

ALT

LAYER

Send level from channel

(currently un-selected

layer) to MIX bus

On/off status of signal sent

from channel (currently un-

selected layer) to MIX bus

Send level from channel

(currently selected layer) to

MIX bus

On/off status of signal sent

from channel (currently

selected layer) to MIX bus

5 Input channel operations

42 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here’s how to use the INPUT channel strip or ST IN/FX

RTN channel strip to send an input channel signal to the

STEREO bus. The explanation here uses the example of an

input channel, but the procedure is essentially identical

when using a ST IN channel or FX RTN channel.

Make sure that an input source is correctly

assigned to the input channel, and that the

head amp gain is set appropriately.

Make sure that the appropriate CH [ON] key is

turned on in the INPUT channel strip, and

press the [SEL] key for that channel to make it

light.

The [SEL] keys are used to select the channel you want

to control.

In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the

[TO STEREO] key to make it light.

In the SELECTED CHANNEL section you can make

detailed parameters settings for the channel currently

selected by its [SEL] key. (For details on the

SELECTED CHANNEL section ➥ p.57.)

When you turn on the [TO STEREO] key, the signal

sent from that input channel to the STEREO bus will

be turned on. At this time, the [TO ST] LED of the

INPUT channel strip will light.

Raise the corresponding fader of the INPUT

channel strip.

The level of the input signal is shown by the level meter

located at the right of the CH [ON] key.

Turn on the [PAN] key in the ENCODER MODE

section.

Use the encoder in the INPUT channel strip to

adjust the pan of the input channel.

Note

If you are sending the signal from a ST IN channel / FX RTN

channel to the STEREO bus, you can repeatedly press the

[SEL] key to switch between L/R channels, and make pan set-

tings for each channel.

In the STEREO A/B channel strip, turn the STE-

REO A [ON] key and STEREO B [ON] key on

(LED lit).

In the STEREO A/B channel strip, raise the

[STEREO A]/[STEREO B] faders.

The signal sent to the stereo bus will be routed through

the STEREO A/B channels and output from the STE-

REO OUT A/B jacks.

Sending a signal from an input chan-

nel to the STEREO bus

CH [ON] key

[SEL] key

Level meter

STEREO [PAN] encoder

[TO STEREO] key

STEREO B

[ON] key

STEREO A

[ON] key

STEREO A

fader

STEREO B

fader

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 43

Input channel operations

Signals from input channels or ST IN/FX RTN channels

can be sent to the desired MIX bus. This can be done either

by specifying the send level sent from all input channels to

a specific MIX bus, or by specifying the send level sent

from a specific input channel to all MIX buses.

The explanation here uses an input channel as the send-

source, but the procedure is the same when using a ST IN

channel or FX RTN channel.

To send signals from all input channels to

a speciﬁc MIX bus

Use MIX SEND SELECT [1]–[24] keys of the

ENCODER MODE section to select the destina-

tion MIX bus.

The selected key will light, and the encoder mode indi-

cator will show the number of the destination MIX

bus. In this state, the encoders of the channel strip

adjust the send level to the MIX bus. Make sure that

the FADER [FLIP] key is dark.

Turn the encoders of the INPUT channel strip.

When MIX SEND is selected as the encoder mode, you

can use the encoders of the INPUT channel strip to

adjust the level of the signal that is sent to the currently

selected MIX bus from the corresponding input

channel.

The LEDs around the periphery of the encoder indi-

cate the approximate send level.

To turn off the signal sent from a specific

channel to the MIX bus, press the ENCODER

[ON] key for that channel to turn it off.

Press the same key once again to turn it back on.

Note

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to FIXED mode

(

➥

p.44), the encoders have no effect; the signal can only be

switched on/off by the ENCODER [ON] key.

In the same way, select a different send-desti-

nation MIX bus, and use the encoders of the

INPUT channel strip to adjust the send levels

to it.

To send signals from a speciﬁc input chan-

nel to all MIX buses

Press a [SEL] key of the INPUT channel strip to

select the send-source channel.

In the MIX section, press the [MIX SEND] key

to make it light.

The MIX section lets you control the signals sent to

MIX buses 1–24 and the signals output from MIX

channels 1–24. (For details, refer to ➥ p.49)

When the [MIX SEND] key is lit, you can use the

encoders of the MIX section to control the send levels

from the currently selected input channel to MIX buses

1–24.

Hint

When the [MIX MASTER] key of the MIX section is lit, you can

hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel to make the [MIX

SEND] key light (the [MIX MASTER] key will go dark). In this

state, you can use the encoders of the MIX section to adjust

the send levels from the selected channel to MIX buses 1–24.

Turn the MIX encoders to adjust the send lev-

els to the MIX buses.

The LEDs around the periphery of the encoder indi-

cate the approximate send level.

Sending the signal from the input

channel to a MIX bus

Switches the sig-

nal sent from the

input channel to

the MIX bus on/

off.

Adjusts the send

level of the signal

sent from the

input channel to

the MIX bus.

MIX bus

Input channels

[MIX SEND] key [MIX MASTER] key

MIX [ON] key

MIX encoder

5 Input channel operations

44 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

To turn off the signal sent from that channel

to a MIX bus, press the MIX [ON] key to turn it

off.

Press the MIX [ON] key once again to turn it back on.

Note

MIX buses can be switched (in units of two adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered MIX buses) between VARI type (send

levels are variable) and FIXED type (send levels are fixed).

(For details on switching the type

➥

p.274)

If the send-destination MIX bus is set to FIXED mode, the MIX

encoders have no effect; the signal can only be switched on/

off by the MIX [ON] key.

MIX bus

Input channels

Switches the sig-

nal sent from the

input channel to

the MIX bus on/

off.

Adjusts the send

level of the signal

sent from the

input channel to

the MIX bus.

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

❏ When sending a signal from an input channel to

a VARI type MIX bus

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

❏ When sending a signal from an input channel to

a FIXED type MIX bus

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 45

Input channel operations

Monaural input channels can be paired to link their princi-

pal parameters. There are two types of pairing; you can use

only one type.

• Horizontal pair mode

This mode pairs adjacent odd-numbered/even-num-

bered channels (default setting).

• Vertical pair mode

This mode pairs channels of different layers that share

the same fader.

Hint

Input channels that are paired will have their parameters

linked except for head amp, delay, pan, attenuation, and

phase.

❏ Using horizontal pairing

Here’s how to enable or defeat pairing for adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered channels.

To enable pairing, hold down the [SEL] key of

one of the adjacent odd-numbered/even-num-

bered channels, and press the [SEL] key of the

other channel.

The parameters of the channel you pressed first will be

copied to the subsequently-pressed channel.

Hint

The copy-source channel is determined by the order in which

you press the [SEL] keys. For example if you hold down the

channel 1 [SEL] key and press the channel 2 [SEL] key, the

channel 1 parameters will be copied to channel 2.

To defeat pairing, hold down the [SEL] key of

one of the paired channels and press the [SEL]

key of the other channel.

Note

If you are unable to enable/defeat pairing by using the above

procedure, make sure that PAIR SHORTCUT is turned on in

the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen (

➥

p.187).

❏ Using vertical pairing

Here’s how to enable or disable pairing for channels of dif-

ferent layers that share the same fader.

Repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key of

the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the MIXER

SETUP screen appears.

Click the VERTICAL PAIR button in the PAIR

MODE area to turn it on.

A window will appear, asking you to confirm that you

want to change the pair mode.

Click the OK button.

Now you can use “vertical pair” mode.

When you switch to “vertical pair” mode, new num-

bers will be assigned to the input channels. For details,

refer to p.200.

You can return to “horizontal pair mode” by clicking

the HORIZONTAL PAIR button to turn it on.

Enabling/disabling pairing

Horizontal pair

Ver tical pair

PAIR MODE area

VERTICAL PAIR button

MIXER SETUP

5 Input channel operations

46 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Hint

When you switch between vertical pair mode and horizontal

pair mode, the input channel numbers will change, but the

channel names and parameter values will not change.

Hold down the [SHIFT] key of the data entry

section, and press the [SEL] key of one of the

channels you want to pair.

A window will appear, allowing you to select how pair-

ing will be handled.

Click the appropriate button to choose the

source/destination for the parameters that will

be copied.

The channels will be paired as you specify.

Hint

If you click the RESET BOTH button, the parameters of both

channels will be reset to their default value.

To defeat pairing, hold down the [SHIFT] key

and press the [SEL] key of one of the channels.

A window will ask you to confirm that you want to

defeat pairing. Click the OK button to defeat pairing.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 47

Output channel operations

This chapter explains the functions and operation of each section related to output channels.

About the output channels

Output channels mix the signals sent from input channels etc., and send them to the corresponding output jacks or output

buses.

There are three types of output channel, as follows.

MIX channels 1–24

The signals sent from input channels to MIX buses are sent via these channels to MIX OUT jacks 1–24 or the STEREO/

MATRIX buses.

STEREO A/B channels

The signals sent from input channels or MIX channels are sent via these channels to STEREO OUT jacks A/B.

6 Output channel operations

48 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

MATRIX channels 1–8

The signals sent from MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses are sent via these channels to the MATRIX

OUT jacks.

•8 BAND EQ (8 band equalizer) (MIX channels and

STEREO A/B channels)

This is an eight-band (four upper bands + four lower

bands) parametric EQ.

•4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) (MATRIX channels)

This is a four-band (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID,

LOW) parametric EQ.

• COMP (Compressor)

This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a com-

pressor, expander, or limiter.

• LEVEL

This adjusts the output level of the channel.

• ON (On/off)

This switches the channel on/off. If this is off, that

channel will be muted.

• OUTPUT DELAY

This delays the output signal. It can be used to make

fine adjustments in the relative timing between

channels.

• OUT ATT. (Output attenuator)

This attenuates or boosts the level of the channel’s out-

put signal.

• METER

This meter indicates the output level of the output

channel. The level detection point can be switched.

• MIX to STEREO (MIX channels)

This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the

MIX channel to the STEREO bus.

• to MATRIX (MIX channels and STEREO A/B

channels)

This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the

MIX channel to the MATRIX bus.

• PAN (MIX channels)

This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the

MIX channel to the STEREO bus.

• BAL (Balance) (STEREO channels)

This adjusts the L/R volume balance of the STEREO

channel.

• LCR (Left/Center/Right) (MIX channels)

This sends the three-channel signal (left/right channels

and a center channel) to the STEREO bus.

• INSERT

Here you can patch the desired output port and input

port to insert-out/insert-in, allowing an external effect

processor or other device to be inserted. You can

switch the insert-out and insert-in locations.

Hint

MIX channels 1–24, STEREO A/B channels, and MATRIX

channels 1–8 are always connected to MIX OUT jacks 1–24,

STEREO OUT jacks A/B, and MATRIX OUT jacks 1–8

respectively. However, you can also make output patch set-

tings to send the signals of these output channels to slots 1–4

or the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 49

Output channel operations

MIX section

The MIX section adjusts the send level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and adjusts the output level of

the MIX channels.

A [TO ST] LED

This LED will light when the signal sent from the MIX

channel to the STEREO bus is on.

B [TO MTRX] LED

This LED will light when the signal sent from the MIX

channel to the MATRIX bus is on.

C DCA group LEDs

The LED of the DCA group to which this MIX channel

is assigned will light.

D MIX [PAIR] LED

This LED will light if adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered MIX channels are paired.

E MIX [ON] key

If the [MIX SEND] key (9) is on, this switches the sig-

nal sent from the input channel to the MIX bus on/off.

If the [MIX MASTER] key (

J) is on, this switches the

MIX channel on/off.

F MIX encoder

If the [MIX SEND] key (9) is on, this adjusts the send

level to the MIX bus. If the [MIX MASTER] key (

J) is

on, this adjusts the output level of the MIX channel.

G MIX [CUE] key

This is used to monitor a MIX channel via the Cue

Monitor/Solo function.

H MIX [SEL] key

This selects the MIX channel to which operations in

the SELECTED CHANNEL section or in the display

will apply.

I [MIX SEND] key

J [MIX MASTER] key

These keys switch the operation of the MIX section.

When the [MIX SEND] key is on, you can use the con-

trols of the MIX section to edit the send level and on/

off status of the signal being sent from the currently

selected input channel to the MIX buses. Controls

other than

4–6 will have no effect.

When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, you can use the

controls of the MIX section to edit the output level and

on/off status of the MIX channels.

❏ Sending signals from MIX channels to

output jacks

Here’s how a signal sent from an input channel to a MIX

bus can be sent from the corresponding MIX OUT jack.

Make sure that an appropriate signal is being

sent from an input channel to the MIX bus.

Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX

section.

When this key is on, you can use the MIX section to

control the signals being sent from the MIX channels

to the MIX OUT jacks.

Turn on the MIX [ON] key for the MIX chan-

nel whose signal you want to output.

Turn the MIX encoder to adjust the output

level of the corresponding MIX channel.

The signal of the corresponding MIX channel will be

sent from the corresponding MIX OUT jack.

If you want the meters of the panel to indi-

cate the output level of the MIX channels,

press the [MIX/MATRIX] key of the meter

section.

The output level of the MIX channels will be shown by

the [INPUT/MIX] meters.

Items in the MIX section

124

Operations in the MIX section

MIX

PEAK

HOLD

CH 1 -24

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

2322212019181716151413121110987654321

ST IN/

/ST IN

MATRIX

INPUT/MIX meters

[MIX/MATRIX] key

6 Output channel operations

50 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Hint

The detection point (metering point) of the signal levels shown

in the meters can be changed if desired. For details, refer to

p.101.

❏ Sending signals from MIX channels to

MATRIX buses

Here’s how a signal sent from an input channel to a MIX

bus can be output to a MATRIX bus. This can be done

either by specifying the send level sent from all MIX chan-

nels to a specific MATRIX bus, or by specifying the send

level sent from a specific MIX channel to all MATRIX

buses.

To send signals from all MIX channels to a

speciﬁc MATRIX bus

Make sure that appropriate signals are being

sent from input channels to the MIX buses.

Repeatedly press the [MATRIX/ST] key of the

DISPLAY ACCESS section to access the

MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen shown below.

Use the left/right scroll bar to display the MIX

channel that you want to send to the MATRIX

bus, and click the MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF

button to turn it on.

The signal of the corresponding MIX channel is now

sent to the MATRIX bus.

Hint

You can use the PRE FADER/POST FADER buttons in the

MIX TO MATRIX area to change the send point (pre-fader/

post-fader) of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the

MATRIX bus.

Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX

section.

Press and hold the MATRIX [SEL] key for the

send-destination MATRIX bus.

All MIX [SEL] keys will blink. As long as you hold

down the MATRIX [SEL] key, the MIX encoders 1–24

will respectively adjust the send levels from the MIX

channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus.

Continuing to hold down the MATRIX [SEL]

key, turn MIX encoders 1–24 to adjust the level

of the signal sent from each MIX channel to

the currently selected MATRIX bus.

The LEDs around the periphery of the MIX encoder

indicate the approximate level. When you take your

hand off the MATRIX [SEL] key, the encoders will

revert to their previous function.

Hint

You can fix the encoders in the above state by rapidly press-

ing the MATRIX [SEL] key twice. To return to the previous

state, press any MIX [SEL] key or MATRIX [SEL] key.

To send from a speciﬁc MIX channel to all

MATRIX buses

Make settings so that a signal is sent from the

desired MIX channel to a MATRIX bus, as

described in steps 1–3 of “To send signals from

all MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus.”

Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX

section.

Press and hold the MIX [SEL] key for the send-

source MIX channel.

All MATRIX [SEL] keys will blink. As long as you con-

tinue to hold down the MIX [SEL] key, MATRIX

encoders 1–8 will adjust the send levels sent from the

selected MIX channel to each MATRIX bus.

Continuing to hold down the MIX [SEL] key,

turn MATRIX encoders 1–8 to adjust the level

of the signal sent from the currently selected

MIX channel to the MATRIX buses.

The LEDs around the periphery of the MATRIX

encoder indicate the approximate send level. When

you take your hand off the MIX [SEL] key, the encod-

ers will revert to their previous function.

MIX channelsMIX TO MATRIX

ON/OFF buttons

MATRIX/ST ROUTING

Use the encoders of the MIX section to

adjust the send levels

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 51

Output channel operations

Hint

You can fix the encoders in the above state by rapidly press-

ing the MIX [SEL] key twice. To return to the previous state,

press any MIX [SEL] key or MATRIX [SEL] key.

If you want the meters of the panel to indi-

cate the output level of the MIX channels,

press the [MIX/MATRIX] key of the meter

section.

Hint

The send levels from MIX channels to MATRIX buses can

also be edited in the display. For details, refer to p.238.

❏ Sending signals from MIX channels to

the STEREO bus

Here’s how signals sent from input channels to MIX buses

can be output to the STEREO bus.

Make sure that appropriate signals are being

sent from input channels to the MIX buses.

Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX

section.

Turn on the MIX [ON] key for the MIX chan-

nels whose signals you want to send to the

STEREO bus.

Press the MIX [SEL] key of the channel whose

signal you want to send to the STEREO bus,

and turn on the [TO STEREO] key of the

SELECTED CHANNEL section.

To adjust the pan of the signal sent from the

MIX channel to the STEREO bus, press the MIX

[SEL] key of the desired MIX channel and turn

the STEREO [PAN] encoder of the SELECTED

CHANNEL section.

Turn the MIX encoder to adjust the signal level

that is sent to the STEREO bus.

Hint

You can also switch the output to the STEREO bus on/off and

adjust the pan from within the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen

(MATRIX/ST function). If desired, the send position (post fader

or post ON key) for the signal sent from the MIX channel to

the STEREO bus can also be changed in this screen

(

➥

p.239).

In the STEREO A/B channel strip, turn the STE-

REO A [ON] key and STEREO B [ON] key on

(LED lit).

In the STEREO A/B channel strip, raise the

[STEREO A]/[STEREO B] faders.

The signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO

bus will be sent from STEREO OUT jacks A/B.

The level of the signal output from the STEREO A/B

channels is shown by the [MASTER] meters in the

meter section.

❏ Pairing MIX channels

Adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX channels

can be paired. If two MIX channels are paired, their

parameters (with the exception of pan and delay) will be

linked.

Turn on the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX

section.

Of the desired two adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered MIX channels, hold down the

MIX [SEL] key of one, and press the MIX [SEL]

key of the other.

The [PAIR] LED will light, and the MIX channels will

be paired. At this time, the parameters of the channel

whose MIX [SEL] key you pressed first will be copied

to the channel whose MIX [SEL] key you pressed later.

For example if you pressed the keys in the order of

MIX channel 1 → MIX channel 2, the parameters of

MIX channel 1 will be copied to MIX channel 2.

To defeat pairing, hold down the MIX [SEL]

key of one of the paired MIX channels and

press the MIX [SEL] key of the other channel.

When MIX channels are paired, the signal flow will

change as follows.

Use the encoders of the MATRIX section to

adjust the send level

STEREO [PAN] encoder

[TO STEREO] key

6 Output channel operations

52 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Signals sent from an input channel to a

VARI type MIX bus

• If the VARI type MIX bus is not paired

When the [MIX SEND] key is on, the MIX encoders

will adjust the send level of the signals sent to the corre-

sponding MIX bus from the currently selected input

channel.

• If the VARI type MIX bus is paired

When the [MIX SEND] key is on, MIX encoders of

odd-numbered channels will adjust the pan of the sig-

nal sent to the two MIX buses. MIX encoders of even-

numbered channels will adjust the shared send level for

the two MIX buses.

MIX channel output signals

• If MIX channels are not paired

When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, the MIX encod-

ers will adjust the output level of the corresponding

MIX channels.

• If MIX channels are paired

When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, the MIX encod-

ers of odd-numbered channels will adjust the volume

balance between paired MIX channels. The MIX

encoders of even-numbered channels will adjust the

shared level of the two paired channels.

Hint

MIX channel pairing status and output level/balance settings

can also be edited in the CH to MIX screen (

➥

p.274) or

MATRIX/ST screen (

➥

p.238).

MIX bus 1

SEND LEVEL

MIX bus 2

SEND LEVEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX bus 1/2

SEND PAN

MIX bus 1/2

SEND LEVEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX channel 1

OUTPUT

LEVEL

MIX channel 2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

OUTPUT LEVEL

MIX OUT 1

MIX 1

MIX CHANNEL

OUTPUT LEVEL

MIX OUT 2

MIX 2

MIX channel

1/2 BALANCE

MIX channel

1/2 OUTPUT

LEVEL

OUTPUT LEVEL

MIX OUT 1BALANCE

MIX 1

MIX CHANNEL

MIX OUT 2

MIX 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 53

Output channel operations

STEREO A/B channel strip

The STEREO A/B channel strip lets you send the signal of the STEREO A/B channels to the MATRIX bus, and adjust the out-

put level of the STEREO A/B channels.

A [TO MATRIX] LED

This LED will light when the signal sent from the STE-

REO channel to the MATRIX bus is on.

B [COMP] LED

This indicates the operating status of the compressor

for the STEREO channel. This will be dark when the

gain reduction amount is 0 dB, dimly lit when it is 0–

10 dB, and lit when it is greater than 10 dB.

C STEREO A/B [SEL] key

This selects the STEREO A or STEREO B L/R channels

for editing in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or

display. The L/R channels will alternate each time you

press the key.

D STEREO [MONO] key

This switches the STEREO B channel to monaural. The

status will alternate between monaural and stereo each

time you press the key.

E STEREO [ON] key

This switches the STEREO channel on/off. If this key is

off (LED dark), no signal will be output from that STE-

REO channel.

F STEREO fader

This 100 mm fader adjusts the output level of the STE-

REO channel.

G STEREO [CUE] key

This is used to monitor the STEREO A/B channel via

the Cue Monitor/Solo function.

Items in the STEREO A/B channel

strip

6 Output channel operations

54 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

❏ Sending signals from the STEREO A/B

channels to output jacks

Here’s how the signals sent from input channels or MIX

channels to the STEREO bus can be output from STEREO

OUT jacks A/B.

Make sure that appropriate signals are being

sent from the desired channels to the STEREO

bus.

Turn on the STEREO [ON] key of the STEREO

A/B channel strip.

Raise the [STEREO A]/[STEREO B] faders.

The signal of the STEREO A/B channels will be output

from STEREO OUT jacks A/B. The output level of the

STEREO A/B channels is shown by the [MASTER]

meters in the meter section.

Hint

Normally, the same signal is output from the STEREO A and

B channels. However you can also use the STEREO B chan-

nel as a Center channel for L/C/R three-channel playback

(

➥

p.201, 242).

❏ Sending signals from the STEREO A/B

channels to MATRIX buses

Here’s how the signal of the STEREO A/B channels can be

sent to the MATRIX buses.

Make sure that an appropriate signal is being

input to the STEREO bus.

Repeatedly press the [MATRIX/ST] key of the

DISPLAY ACCESS section to access the

MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen.

Use the left/right scroll bar to display the STE-

REO A/B channels, and click the MIX TO

MATRIX ON/OFF button to turn it on.

With these settings, the signal of the STEREO A/B

channels will be sent to the MATRIX channels.

Make sure that the STEREO A/B [ON] keys are

turned on in the STEREO A/B channel strip;

then hold down the STEREO A [SEL] key or

STEREO B [SEL] key.

While you continue holding down the key, all

MATRIX [SEL] keys will blink. In this condition, you

can use the MATRIX encoders to adjust the signal lev-

els sent from the STEREO A or B channel to the

MATRIX buses.

While continuing to hold down the STEREO A

[SEL] key or STEREO B [SEL] key, turn MATRIX

encoders 1–8 to adjust the signal level sent to

the MATRIX buses.

The LEDs around the periphery of the MATRIX

encoder indicate the approximate send level. When

you take your hand off the STEREO A [SEL] key or

STEREO B [SEL] key, the MATRIX encoders will

revert to their previous function.

Hint

• You can also switch to the above state by rapidly pressing

the STEREO A [SEL] key or STEREO B [SEL] key twice. To

return to the previous state, press any [SEL] key.

• Send levels from the STEREO A/B channels to the MATRIX

buses can also be adjusted from within the display

(

➥

p.238).

Operations in the STEREO A/B chan-

nel strip

MASTER meters

MIX TO MATRIX

ON/OFF buttons

MATRIX/ST ROUTING

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 55

Output channel operations

MATRIX section

In the MATRIX section you can adjust the send levels from MIX channels to MATRIX buses, and adjust the output level of

the MATRIX channels.

A DCA group LEDs

The LED of the DCA group to which this MATRIX

channel is assigned will light.

B MATRIX [PAIR] LED

This LED will light if adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered MATRIX channels are paired.

C MATRIX [ON] key

This switches the MATRIX channel on/off.

D MATRIX encoder

This adjusts the output level of the MATRIX channel.

E MATRIX [CUE] key

This is used to monitor a MATRIX channel via the Cue

Monitor/Solo function.

F MATRIX [SEL] key

This selects the MATRIX channel to which operations

in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or in the display

will apply.

❏ Sending signals from the MATRIX sec-

tion to output jacks

Here’s how the signals sent from MIX channels or STE-

REO A/B channels to MATRIX buses can be sent to the

MATRIX OUT jacks.

Make sure that appropriate signals are being

sent from the MIX channels or STEREO A/B

channels to the MATRIX buses.

In the MATRIX section, press the MATRIX [ON]

buttons to turn the desired MATRIX chan-

nel(s) on.

Turn the encoders of the MATRIX section to

adjust the output level of the MATRIX

channels.

The signals sent to the MATRIX bus(es) will be sent

from the corresponding MATRIX OUT jack(s).

To check the output level of the MATRIX chan-

nels, press the [MIX/MATRIX] key in the meter

section.

The [ST IN/MATRIX] meters will show the output

levels.

Hint

The detection point (metering point) of the signal levels shown

in the meters can be changed if desired (

➥

p.101).

❏ Pairing the MATRIX section

Adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MATRIX chan-

nels can be paired if desired. If two channels are paired,

their parameters (with the exception of pan and delay) will

be linked.

In the MATRIX section, hold down the MATRIX

[SEL] key for one of two adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered channels, and press the

MATRIX [SEL] key of the other channel.

The [PAIR] LED will light, and the MATRIX channels

will be paired. At this time, the parameters of the chan-

nel whose MATRIX [SEL] key you pressed first will be

copied to the channel whose MATRIX [SEL] key you

pressed later.

For example if you pressed the keys in the order of

MATRIX channel 1 → MATRIX channel 2, the param-

eters of MATRIX channel 1 will be copied to MATRIX

channel 2.

To defeat pairing, hold down the [SEL] key of

one of the paired MATRIX channels and press

the [SEL] key of the other MATRIX channel.

When MATRIX channels are paired, the signal flow

will change as follows.

Items in the MATRIX section

Operations in the MATRIX section

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

1L 1R 2L 2R 3L 3R 4L 4R

MATRIX

ST IN / /

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MIX

PEAK

HOLD

CH 1-24

ST IN/

/ST IN

MATRIX

ST/IN MATRIX meters

[MIX/MATRIX] key

6 Output channel operations

56 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Signals sent from MIX channels and STE-

REO A/B channels to MATRIX buses

• If MATRIX channels are not paired

When you are holding down the [SEL] key of a spe-

cific MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel in order to

adjust the send levels from that channel to all MATRIX

buses, the MATRIX encoders will adjust the send level

to the corresponding MATRIX bus.

• If MATRIX channels are paired

When you are holding down the [SEL] key of a spe-

cific MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel in order to

adjust the send levels from that channel to all MATRIX

buses, the MATRIX encoder of the odd-numbered

channel will adjust the pan of the signal sent to the two

MATRIX buses. The MATRIX encoder of the even-

numbered channel will adjust the send level shared by

the two MATRIX buses.

Hint

For details on how to send the signal of a specific MIX chan-

nel to all MATRIX buses, refer to p.50. For details on how to

send the signal from either the STEREO A or B channel to all

MATRIX buses, refer to p.54.

Output signals from MATRIX channels

• If MATRIX channels are not paired

The MATRIX encoders adjust the output level of the

corresponding MATRIX channel.

• If MATRIX channels are paired

MIX encoders of odd-numbered channels adjust the

volume balance between paired MATRIX channels.

MATRIX encoders of even-numbered channels will

adjust the shared level of the two paired channels.

Hint

You can access the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (MATRIX/

ST function) to see a list of the MATRIX channels in the dis-

play, and edit the pairing and other parameters. For details,

refer to p.238 of the Reference section.

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

MATRIX 1

LEVEL

encoder

MATRIX 2

LEVEL

encoder

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

……

MATRIX1

MATRIX2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL

MATRIX 1/2

PA N encoder

MATRIX1/2

LEVEL

encoder

MATRIX chan-

nel 1 OUTPUT

LEVEL

encoder

MATRIX chan-

nel 2 OUTPUT

LEVEL

encoder

OUTPUT LEVEL

OUTPUT PATCH

MATRIX 1

MATRIX CHANNEL

OUTPUT LEVEL

MATRIX 2

MATRIX

channel 1/2

BALANCE

encoder

MATRIX

channel 1/2

OUTPUT

LEVEL

encoder

OUTPUT PATCH

MATRIX 1

MATRIX CHANNEL

MATRIX 2

OUTPUT LEVEL

BALANCE ON

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 57

Using the Selected Channel section

This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control input chan-

nels and output channels.

About the SELECTED CHANNEL section

The SELECTED CHANNEL section lets you edit the mix parameters of the currently selected input channel or output chan-

nel; it corresponds to a channel module of a conventional analog mixer.

This section controls the channel that was last selected by pressing its [SEL] key. (In the case of an ST IN channel, FX TRN

channel, or STEREO A/B channel, you will select either the L or the R channel.) However, you will be able to edit essentially all

of the mix parameters (head amp settings, EQ/compressor/gate settings, output to the STEREO bus, DCA group and mute

group assignments, etc.) using panel controls.

Items in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

Here you can assign the currently selected channel to DCA

groups and mute groups. (For details on DCA groups and

mute groups ➥ p.74, 75)

A DCA [1]–[8] keys

These keys assign the selected channel to DCA groups

1–8. The key LED for the assigned DCA group(s) will

light.

Input channels can use DCA groups 1–8, and output

channels can use DCA groups 7/8. For DCA groups 7/

8, input channels and output channels can both exist in

the same-numbered group.

B MUTE [1]–[8] keys

These keys assign the selected channel to mute groups

1–8. The key LED for the assigned mute group(s) will

light.

Mute groups 1–8 allow you to mix input channels and

output channels.

C [RECALL SAFE] key

This key switches Recall Safe on/off for the selected

channel. If this key is on, the parameters of the corre-

sponding channel will not be affected when a scene is

recalled. The applicable parameters can be specified in

the RECALL SAFE screen (SCENE function)

(➥ p.166).

D [MUTE SAFE] key

This key switches Mute Safe on/off for the selected

channel. If this key is on, the corresponding channel

will be temporarily excluded from mute groups.

E Level meter

This indicates the input/output level of the selected

channel.

Using the Selected Channel section

GROUP

1 2

7 Using the Selected Channel section

58 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here you can select or copy channels.

A INPUT/OUTPUT indicators

These indicators show whether an input channel or

output channel is selected.

B Name indicator

This indicates the name of the selected channel.

C Number indicator

This is the number of the selected channel. For stereo

channels (ST IN, FX TRN, STEREO A/B), the number

and a character of “L” or “r” will appear, depending on

whether the L or R channel is selected. If a channel is

paired, the decimal point for the lowest place will light.

For a FX RTN channel, the LED for the highest place

will light.

D [PASTE] key

E [COPY] key

These keys are used to copy and paste channel data.

When you press the [COPY] key, the data of the cur-

rently selected channel will be copied into a memory

buffer; when you press the [PASTE] key, the data in the

memory buffer will be pasted into the currently

selected channel. You can specify the parameters that

will be copied in the INPUT VIEW function CH COPY

screen (for input channels) or the OUTPUT VIEW

function CH COPY screen (for output channels).

Note

• If the buffer memory contains no data, or if the data in the

buffer memory is of a different type than the selected chan-

nel, a warning message will appear and the Paste operation

cannot be executed.

• The data in the buffer memory is lost when the power is

turned off.

F CH [DEC] key

G CH [INC] key

The CH [DEC] key decrements the currently selected

channel number, and the CH [INC] key increments it.

• Input channels 1–48

• ST IN channels 1L/1R–4L/4R

• FX RTN channels 1L/1R–4L/4R

• MIX channels 1–24

• MATRIX channels 1–8

• STEREO A channel L/R

• STEREO B channel L/R

Here you can edit delay-related parameters for the cur-

rently selected channel.

A DELAY [TIME] indicator

This indicates the currently specified delay time in

msec units. However in the case of one second, the

indicator will be “1...”.

B DELAY [TIME] encoder

This controls the delay time of the selected channel.

C DELAY [ON] key

This key switches delay on/off for the selected channel.

Channel Display

ST IN channel 1L./1r. – 4L./4r.

FX RTN channel 1.L./1.r. – 4.L./4.r.

STEREO A channel AL./Ar.

STEREO B channel BL./Br.

CHANNEL SELECT

DELAY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 59

Using the Selected Channel section

Here you can edit the head amp, post AD conversion

attenuator, and phase parameters for the currently selected

channel. This section is available only if an input channel is

selected.

A A[GAIN/ATT] key

This key selects the parameter that is controlled by the

[GAIN/ATT] encoder (

2).

• [GAIN/ATT] key lit (Gain)

The encoder adjusts the input sensitivity of the inter-

nal head amp patched to the input channel (PM5D-

RH only) or of an external head amp that supports the

dedicated protocol (Yamaha AD8HR, AD824, etc.).

The range of adjustment is +10 to –62.

• [GAIN/ATT] key dark (Attenuator)

The encoder controls the post AD conversion attenua-

tor of the input channel. The range of adjustment is

–96 to +24.

Note

Gain cannot be selected for channels to which an internal/

external head amp is not patched.

B [GAIN/ATT] encoder

According to the setting of the [GAIN/ATT] key (1),

this encoder controls either the input sensitivity of the

internal/external head amp patched to the input chan-

nel, or the attenuator following AD conversion.

The LEDs around the periphery will change as follows.

• [GAIN/ATT] key lit (Gain)

• [GAIN/ATT] key dark (Attenuator)

C [ø] key

This switches the phase of the selected input channel. If

this key is on, the phase will be reversed.

Here you can edit noise gate parameters for the selected

channel. This section is valid only if an input channel or ST

IN channel is selected.

A GATE GR meter

This meter indicates the amount of reduction pro-

duced by the gate of the selected channel.

B GATE [ON] key

Switches the gate on/off for the selected channel.

C GATE [ATTACK] indicator

Indicates the attack time of the gate in msec units.

D GATE [ATTACK] encoder

Specifies the attack time of the gate (the time from

when the signal exceeds the threshold until the gate

opens).

E GATE [HOLD] indicator

Indicates the hold time of the gate in msec units or sec

units (the indicator for the displayed unit will light).

F GATE [HOLD] encoder

Specifies the hold time of the gate (the time from when

the signal falls below the threshold until the gate

closes).

G GATE [DECAY] indicator

Indicates the decay time of the gate in msec units or sec

units.

H GATE [DECAY] encoder

Specifies the hold time of the gate (the time over which

the gate will close after the hold time has elapsed).

I GATE [THRESHOLD] encoder

Specifies the threshold level of the gate (the level at

which the gate will open or close). The gate will open

when the signal exceeds this level, and will close when

the signal falls below this level.

J GATE [RANGE] encoder

Specifies the amount of attenuation while the gate is

closed.

GAIN/ATTENUATION/ø (Gain /

Attenuation / Phase)

➠

–

(attenuation)

(boost)

NOISE GATE

7 Using the Selected Channel section

60 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here you can switch the on/off status of the signal sent

from the selected channel to the STEREO bus, and adjust

the pan.

A STEREO [PAN] encoder

The function of this encoder depends on the currently

selected channel, as follows.

B [TO STEREO] key

The function of this key depends on the currently

selected channel, as follows.

Here you can edit compressor parameters for the selected

channel. This section is available only if a channel other

than an FX RTN channel is selected.

A COMP GR meter

This meter indicates the amount of reduction pro-

duced by the compressor of the selected channel.

B COMP [ON] key

Switches the compressor on/off for the selected

channel.

C COMP [ATTACK] indicator

Indicates the attack time of the compressor in msec

units.

D COMP [ATTACK] encoder

Specifies the attack time of the compressor (the time

from when the signal exceeds the threshold level until

compression begins).

E COMP [RELEASE] indicator

Indicates the release time of the compressor in msec

units or sec units (the indicator for the displayed unit

will light).

F COMP [RELEASE] encoder

Specifies the release time of the compressor (the time

from when the signal falls below the threshold level

until compression is removed).

G COMP [RATIO] indicator

Indicates the compression ratio setting.

H COMP [RATIO] encoder

Specifies the compression ratio (the ratio at which the

input signal will be compressed when the signal

exceeds the threshold level).

I COMP [THRESHOLD] encoder

Specifies the threshold level of the compressor (the

level at which the compressor will operate). The input

signal will start being compressed when the signal

exceeds this level; compression will be removed when

the signal falls below this level.

Selected channel Function

Input channel

Adjusts the panning of the signal

sent from that channel to the STE-

REO bus.

ST IN channel

FX RTN channel

MIX channel

STEREO A/B channels

Adjusts the left/right balance of the

signal sent from the STEREO A/B

channels.

MATRIX channel No function.

Selected channel Function

Input channel

Functions as an on/off switch for

the signal sent from that channel

to the STEREO bus.

ST IN channel

FX RTN channel

MIX channel

STEREO A/B channels

No function.

MATRIX channel

STEREO

COMPRESSOR

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 61

Using the Selected Channel section

J COMP [GAIN] encoder

Specifies the gain of the signal that has passed through

the compressor.

Here you can edit high pass filter parameters for the

selected channel. This section is available only if an input

channel is selected.

A HPF [FREQUENCY] encoder

Specifies the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter.

B HPF [FREQUENCY] indicator

Indicates the currently specified high pass filter cutoff

frequency, in units of Hz.

C HPF [ON] key

Switches the high pass filter on/off.

Here you can edit equalizer parameters for the selected

channel. The equalizer structure differs as follows between

input channels and output channels.

❏ Input channels

You can use a four-band peak/dip type EQ (HIGH, HIGH

MID, LOW MID, LOW). The HIGH band can be switched

to an LPF or shelving type; the LOW band can be switched

to a shelving type.

❏ Output channels

If a MIX channel or STEREO A/B is selected, you can use

an eight-band peak/dip type EQ. (Operation is divided into

UPPER and LOWER groups of four bands each.) For

MATRIX channels, you can use a four-band peak/dip type

EQ.

For any output channel, the HIGH band can be switched

to shelving or LPF. The LOW band can be switched to

shelving or HPF. For MIX channels and STEREO A/B

channels, this can be specified for UPPER and LOWER,

allowing you to apply shelving or filtering twice.

Hint

• Input channels also provide an HPF that is independent of

the four-band EQ.

• Output channels do not have an independent HPF, but

instead allow you to switch the LOW band type to HPF.

• Switching the equalizer type to HPF or LPF can be done in

the EQ PARAM screen (

➥

p.225)

A EQ [ON] key

Switches the equalizer on/off for the selected channel.

B EQ [UPPER] key

C EQ [LOWER] key

If a MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel is selected,

these keys select the four-band group (UPPER or

LOWER) that you will edit. (The LED of the currently

selected key will light.)

If any other channel is selected, the LEDs of both keys

will be dark.

Hint

By simultaneously holding down the EQ [UPPER] key and EQ

[LOWER] key, you can return the EQ GAIN settings of the

selected channel to a flat state.

D EQ [ ] key

If this key is on, the corresponding HIGH band EQ

type will be switched to shelving. In this case, the

HIGH band EQ [Q] knob will have no function.

HPF (High Pass Filter)

EQUALIZER

45 6

7 Using the Selected Channel section

62 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

E EQ [Q] encoder

Adjusts the Q (steepness) of each band. This encoder

does nothing for bands whose EQ type is set to shelv-

ing, LPF, or HPF.

F EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder

Adjusts the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) at

which each band will be boosted or cut.

G EQ [FREQUENCY] indicator

Indicates the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) at

which boost/cut will occur, in units of kHz or Hz. (The

indicator for the displayed unit will light.)

H EQ [GAIN] encoder

Adjusts the amount of cut/boost for each band.

I [] key

If this key is on, the corresponding LOW band EQ will

be switched to shelving type. In this case, the LOW

band EQ [Q] knob will have no function.

Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section

The SELECTED CHANNEL section always controls the

channel that was last selected by its [SEL] key.

To select an input channel, press a [SEL] key in the INPUT

channel strip or ST IN/FX RTN channel strip. (If neces-

sary, switch the layer before pressing a [SEL] key.) To select

an output channel, press a [SEL] key in the MIX section,

MATRIX section, or STEREO A/B channel strip.

Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you

want to control.

The number and name of the currently selected chan-

nel is shown in the SELECTED CH area at the lower

left of the display, and by the name indicator and num-

ber indicator in the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

The number shown in the number indicator is as fol-

lows. If a channel is paired, the decimal point for the

lowest place will light. For a FX RTN channel, the deci-

mal point for the highest place will light.

Hint

• In the case of stereo channels (ST IN/FX RTN channels,

STEREO A/B channels), you can switch between L/R by

pressing the same [SEL] key.

• You can also switch the channel by using the CH [DEC] key

/ CH [INC] key of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

Use the controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL

section to edit the parameters of the selected

channel.

When you select a channel in step 1, the parameter val-

ues of that channel will be shown by the LEDs and

indicators of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

These parameters can be edited using the controls of

the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

Hint

• Gate, compressor, and EQ/HPF operations are explained in

the second half of this chapter; refer to the appropriate sec-

tion for details.

• For details on DCA group and mute group operations, refer

to p.74, 75.

• If you operate a parameter that is selected for AUTO DIS-

PLAY in the PREFERENCE 1 screen, the screen associated

with that parameter will appear automatically.

In the same way, select other channels and

edit their parameters.

Selecting a channel and editing its

parameters

CH 1

Number of the selected channel

Name of the selected channel

Name

indicator

The name of

the selected

channel

Number

indicator

The number

of the

selected

channel

Selected channel Number indicator

Input channels 1–48 1–48

ST IN/FX RTN channels 1–4 (L/R) 1L./1r. – 4L./4r.

MIX channels 1–24 1–24

MATRIX channels 1–8 1–8

STEREO A/B channels (L/R) AL., Ar., BL., Br.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 63

Using the Selected Channel section

Here’s how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion to operate the internal compressor.

Note

The PM5D provides four types of built-in compressor; COMP

(compressor), EXPANDER (expander), COMPANDER H

(hard compander), and COMPANDER S (soft compander).

These four operate in different ways. This means that if you

want to use a compressor, you must load compressor set-

tings of the desired type from the compressor library, and then

edit the parameters as desired.

Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you

want to control.

A compressor is available for all channels except for FX

RTN channels.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

INPUT [GATE/COMP] key (for an input chan-

nel) or OUTPUT [COMP] key (for an output

channel) several times to access the COMP

LIBRARY screen.

In the COMP LIBRARY screen you can store compres-

sor settings in the library, or recall existing data from

the library. The operations described below are the

same for the COMP LIBRARY screen of both output

channels and input channels.

Move the cursor to the scroll bar of the library

list in the lower right of the screen, and turn

the [DATA] encoder to select the library item

that you want to load. (The library item

selected in the list is highlighted.)

Numbers 001–036 for which an “R” is shown at the

right of the list contain read-only preset library items.

Numbers 001–004 contain preset library items of dif-

ferent types. It is convenient to use these library items

when you want to select a specific type. Preset library

items 001–004 are respectively of the following types.

Hint

• The type of the currently selected compressor is shown in

the COMP PARAM screen (

➥

p.229, 266).

• The COMP LIBRARY screen also provides other library set-

tings suitable for a wide variety of instruments or purposes.

Settings you edit can also be stored in the library.

• For a detailed explanation of each type of compressor, refer

to the Appendices (

➥

p.295).

After selecting a library item, click the RECALL

button located at the lower left of the library

list.

The library item you selected in step 3 will be recalled

to the channel you selected in step 1.

In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the

COMP [ON] key to make the LED light.

The compressor of the selected channel will be

activated.

You can use the compressor controls of the

SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the com-

pressor parameters.

The amount of gain reduction produced by the com-

pressor is shown by the COMP GR meter in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section.

Hint

• For details on the function of the compressor controls, refer

to p.60.

• More detailed parameters for the compressor (selection of

the key-in signal, stereo link on/off, assignment to a com-

pressor link group) can be edited in the COMP PARAM

screen of the INPUT GATE/COMP function or the OUTPUT

COMP function (

➥

p.229, 266).

• You can also cause the COMP PARAM screen to appear

automatically when you operate a compressor-related con-

trol. This setting is made in the UTILITY function

PREFERENCE 1 screen (

➥

p.186).

Number Name Type

001 Comp COMP (Compressor)

002 Expand EXPANDER

003 Compander (H)

COMPANDER H (Hard com-

pander)

004 Compander (S)

COMPANDER S (Soft com-

pander)

Compressor operations

COMP LIBRARY

Scroll barRECALL button

COMP [ON] key

COMP GR meter

7 Using the Selected Channel section

64 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here’s how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion to operate the internal gate.

Note

The PM5D provides two types of built-in gating; GATE and

DUCKING. These operate in different ways. This means that if

you want to use a gate, you must load gate settings of the

desired type from the gate library, and then edit the parame-

ters as desired.

Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you

want to control.

Gate is available only for input channels or ST IN

channels.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

INPUT [GATE/COMP] key several times to

access the GATE LIBRARY screen.

In the GATE LIBRARY screen you can store gate set-

tings in the library, or recall existing data from the

library.

Move the cursor to the scroll bar of the library

list in the lower right of the screen, and turn

the [DATA] encoder to select the library item

that you want to load. (The library item

selected in the list is highlighted.)

Numbers 001–036 for which an “R” is shown at the

right of the list contain read-only preset library items.

Numbers 001–002 contain preset library items of dif-

ferent types. It is convenient to use these library items

when you want to select a specific type. These numbers

correspond to the different types as follows.

Hint

• The type of the currently selected gate is shown in the

GATE PARAM screen (

➥

p.264).

• The GATE LIBRARY screen also provides other library set-

tings suitable for a wide variety of instruments or purposes.

You can also save your own settings in the library.

• For a detailed explanation of each type of gate, refer to the

Appendices (

➥

p.294).

After selecting a library item, click the RECALL

button located at the lower left of the library

list.

The library item you selected in step 3 will be recalled

to the channel you selected in step 1.

In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the

GATE [ON] key to make the LED light.

The gate of the selected channel will be activated.

You can use the gate controls of the SELECTED

CHANNEL section to edit the gate parameters.

The amount of gain reduction produced by the gate is

shown by the GATE GR meter in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section.

Hint

• For details on the function of the gate controls, refer to p.59.

• More detailed parameters for the gate (selection of key-in

signal, stereo link on/off) can be edited in the INPUT GATE/

COMP function GATE PARAM screen (

➥

p.264).

• You can also cause the GATE PARAM screen to appear

automatically when you operate a gate control. This setting

is made in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen

(

➥

p.186).

Number Name Type

001 Gate GATE

002 Ducking DUCKING

Gate operations

GATE LIBRARY

Scroll barRECALL button

GATE [ON] key

GATE GR meter

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 65

Using the Selected Channel section

Here’s how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion to edit the EQ (equalizer) and HPF (High Pass Filter).

EQ can be used on all input channels and all output chan-

nels. An HPF that is independent of the EQ is provided

only for input channels. However even on output chan-

nels, you can switch the LOW band type to HPF.

Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you

want to control.

Four-band EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID,

LOW) is provided on all input channels and on

MATRIX channels.

Eight-band EQ is provided on MIX channels and STE-

REO A/B channels. (Control is divided into UPPER

and LOWER sections of four bands each.)

In the SELECTED

CHANNEL section,

make sure that the

EQ [ON] key is on.

If you selected a MIX

channel or STEREO A/

B channel in step 1,

use the SELECTED

CHANNEL section EQ

[UPPER] key or EQ

[LOWER] key to select the UPPER or LOWER group

of four bands.

For each band, use the EQ [Q] encoder, EQ

[FREQUENCY] encoder, and [GAIN] encoder to

edit the steepness, center frequency, and gain

respectively.

Hint

If the input signal of an input channel clips because of EQ

boost, make the SELECTED CHANNEL section [GAIN/ATT]

key go dark and use the [GAIN/ATT] encoder to lower the

level.

If you want to restore the EQ of the currently

operated channel to a flat state, simulta-

neously hold down the EQ [UPPER] and EQ

[LOWER] keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL

section.

When you hold down these two keys simultaneously,

the boost/cut amount of all bands will be reset to 0 dB.

If you want to use the HIGH band or LOW

band as a shelving-type EQ, turn on the [ ]

key or [ ] key for the corresponding band.

If you want to use HPF on an input channel,

turn on the HPF [ON] key in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section.

Input channels provide an HPF that is independent of

the four-band EQ. Use the HPF [ON] key to switch the

HPF on/off, and use the HPF [FREQUENCY] encoder

to specify the cutoff frequency.

Hint

• Output channels do not provide an HPF that is independent

of the EQ, but you can switch the LOW band type to HPF, or

the HIGH band type to LPF. This change is made in the

OUTPUT EQ function EQ PARAM screen (

➥

p.225).

• For input channels you can switch the HIGH band type to

LPF. This change is made in the INPUT ø/EQ function EQ

PARAM screen (

➥

p.260).

Hint

• You can cause the associated screen to appear automati-

cally when you operate equalizer or HPF parameters in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section. This setting is made in the

UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen (

➥

p.186).

• In the same way as for compressor or noise gate settings,

EQ settings can also be stored to or recalled from a dedi-

cated EQ library. Preset library items suitable for a variety of

instruments or situations are also provided.

EQ/HPF operations

EQ [UPPER]

key

EQ [LOWER]

key

EQ [ON] key

EQ [FREQUENCY]

encoder

EQ [ ] key

EQ [Q] encoder

Q [GAIN] encoder

EQ [ ] key

HPF [FREQUENCY]

encoder

HPF [ON]

key

8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations

66 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

This chapter explains how to edit the input patch and output patch settings, and how to use insert

connections and direct output.

Changing the input patch settings

The input patch section lets you assign input ports to input

channels. In the PM5D’s default state, the input patch set-

tings assign the following signals to input channels.

However, you will need to edit the input patch settings if

you want input signals from an I/O card installed in slots

1–4 or input signals from a 2TR IN DIGITAL jack to be

assigned to an input channel. Here’s how to do this.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the

INPUT PATCH screen.

The INPUT PATCH screen is where you can patch

(assign) input ports (rear panel input jacks or input

channels of I/O cards) to input channels.

The horizontal direction of the screen shows the input

ports (i.e., patch sources), and the vertical direction of

the screen shows the input channels (i.e., patch

destinations).

If an input port is patched to an input channel, a

symbol is displayed at the intersecting grid.

Use the left/right scroll bar to display the

patch-source input port.

The horizontal direction of the screen shows the patch

source’s input port type, ID number, port number, and

the number of input channels that are assigned to it. To

view input ports that are not currently visible, use the

horizontal scroll bar or the [DATA] encoder.

You can select the following input ports.

Use the vertical scroll bar to display the patch-

destination input channel.

The vertical direction of the screen shows the patch-

destination input channels. To see channels that are

not currently visible, use the vertical scroll bar. Alterna-

tively, you can hold down the [SHIFT] key and turn

the [DATA] encoder.

The following input channels can be selected.

8 Input Patch / Output Patch

operations

Input channels 1–48 Input signals from INPUT jacks 1–48

ST IN channels 1–4

Input signals from ST IN jacks 1–4

(L/R)

FX RTN channels 1–4

Output signals of internal effects 1–4

(L/R)

INPUT PATCH

AD IN 1–48 INPUT jacks 1–48

AD ST IN 1–4 ST IN jacks 1–4 (L/R)

SLOT IN 1–4 Input channels (1–16) of slots 1–4

FX OUT 1–8 Outputs (L/R) of internal effects 1–8

2TR IN D1–D3 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R)

2TR IN A1/A2 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2

CH 1–48 Input channels 1–48

STIN1L/1R–STIN4L/4R ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R)

FXRTN1L/1R–FXRTN4L/4R FX RTN channels 1–4 (L/R)

Indicates the number of the input channel.

Indicates the name of the input channel.

Indicates the number of input ports

assigned to the input channel.

To patch an input port to an input

channel, click this grid to display a “ ”

symbol.

From the top, this shows the input port type

and ID number, the port number, and the

number of input channels currently assigned.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 67

Input Patch / Output Patch operations

Click the grid where the desired patch-source

and patch-destination intersect.

The vertical and horizontal red lines indicate the grid

position where the cursor is located. The SELECTED

PATCH area in the upper left of the screen shows the

input port and input channel for the grid at which the

cursor is located.

When you click a grid, a window will ask you to con-

firm that you want to change the patch setting.

Click the OK button in the window.

The new patch will be finalized, and a “ ” symbol will

appear at the corresponding grid.

To cancel the patch, click the “ ” symbol once again.

Hint

• If you want to change the patch directly without having to

respond to the confirmation window, go to the UTILITY func-

tion PREFERENCE 1 screen and turn PATCH

CONFIRMATION off (

➥

p.186).

• To move the cursor location rapidly in or out of the grid, hold

down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [

√

]/[

[

†

] keys.

Note

You can patch a single input port to multiple input channels,

but you cannot patch multiple input ports to a single input

channel.

Changing the output patch settings

In the output patch section you can assign output chan-

nels to output ports. The PM5D’s output channels are

always connected to the following output jacks.

However you can edit the output patch settings so that the

signals of these output channels are also sent from other

output ports in parallel. Here’s how to do this.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

OUTPUT [PATCH] key several times to access

the OUTPUT PATCH screen.

In the OUTPUT PATCH screen you can patch (assign)

output channels to output ports. The horizontal direc-

tion of the screen shows the output ports (i.e., patch

destinations), and the vertical direction of the screen

shows the output channels (i.e., patch sources).

When the PM5D is in its default state, MIX channels

1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, and the STEREO A

channel are patched to the output channels of slots 1–4

and the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks in addition to the

output jacks that are always connected. However, you

are free to change this patching.

Use the horizontal scroll bar to display the

patch-destination output port.

The horizontal direction of the screen shows the patch

destination’s output port type, ID number, port num-

ber, and the number of output channels that are

assigned to it.

You can select the following output ports.

Use the vertical scroll bar to display the patch-

source output channel.

The vertical direction of the screen shows the patch-

source output channels.

The following output channels can be selected.

Input port

Input channel

number

Input channel

name

MIX channels 1–24 MIX OUT jacks 1–24

STEREO A/B channels STEREO OUT jacks A/B

MATRIX channels 1–8 MATRIX OUT jacks 1–8

Monitor output L/C/R MONITOR OUT jacks L/R/C

OUTPUT PATCH

SLOT OUT 1–4

Output channels (1–16) of an I/O

card installed in slots 1–4

FX IN 1–8 Inputs (L/R) of internal effects 1–8

2TR OUT D1/D2 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–2 (L/R)

MIX 1–24 MIX channels 1–24

MATRIX 1–8 MATRIX channels 1–8

ST AL/AR STEREO A channel (L/R)

ST BL/BR STEREO B channel (L/R)

MONITOR L/R/C Monitor output (L/C/R)

TALKBACK OUT Talkback output

OSC OUT Oscillator output

Indicates the output channel number.

Indicates the number of output ports

assigned to the output channel.

To patch an output port to an output

channel, click this grid to display a “ ”

symbol.

From the top, this area shows the output

port type, ID number, port number, and

number of assigned output channels.

8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations

68 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Click the grid where the desired patch-source

and patch-destination intersect.

The SELECTED PATCH area in the upper left of the

screen shows the output port and output channel for

the grid at which the cursor is located.

When you click a grid, a window will ask you to con-

firm that you want to change the patch setting.

Hint

If you want to change the patch directly without having to

respond to the confirmation window, go to the UTILITY func-

tion PREFERENCE 1 screen and turn PATCH

CONFIRMATION off (

➥

p.186).

Click the OK button in the window.

The new patch will be finalized, and a “ ” symbol will

appear at the corresponding grid. To cancel the patch,

click the “ ” symbol once again.

Note

You can patch an output channel to more than one output

port, but you cannot patch multiple output channels to a sin-

gle output port.

Output port

Output channel

number

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 69

Input Patch / Output Patch operations

Inserting an external device into a channel

You can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal route of an input channel or output channel. When

doing so, you can specify for each channel the input/output port and insert I/O point that you want to use for insertion.

When inserting an external device into a desired channel,

you can use the rear panel input/output jacks or the input/

output jacks of an I/O card installed in a slot as insert-out/

insert-in jacks.

The following diagrams show typical examples of insert

connections.

Insert connection example 1

Insert connection example 2

Insert connection example 3

If you are inserting an external digital device via a digital I/

O card as shown in “Insert connection example

3,” you

will need to synchronize the word clock of the PM5D and

the external device. Normally, we recommend that you set

the external device as a word clock slave, and make it fol-

low the PM5D’s word clock. (For details on how to set

your device as a word clock slave, refer to its manual.)

Hint

For the PM5D model, you can also use the rear panel

INSERT IN/OUT jacks to insert an external device into an

input signal, as an alternative to the method described above.

In this case, the insert I/O point is fixed at immediately before

AD conversion. Also, the steps described p.70 will not be

necessary.

Connecting an external device for

insertion

COAXIAL COAXIALAES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU AES/EBU

DIGITAL IN

(AES/EBU)

DIGITAL OUT

(AES/EBU)

Effect processor

MY8-DA96MY8-AD96

ANALOG OUT ANALOG IN

Effect processor

AES/EBU

MY8-AE

DIGITAL OUT

(AES/EBU)

INPUT 1/2 OUTPUT 1/2

DIGITAL IN

(AES/EBU)

Effect processor

(female) (male)

Special AES/EBU

cable for MY8-AE

8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations

70 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here we will explain how to make insert connections,

using an example in which an external device connected to

an AD/DA card in a slot is inserted into an input channel.

However, the procedure is the same when inserting into an

output channel, the only difference being that you will be

working in a screen for output channels.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the

INSERT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH func-

tion) shown below.

In the left side of this screen you can select an output

port to use as insert-out, and in the right side of the

screen you can select an input port to use as insert-in.

If you want to insert into an output channel, press the

OUTPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the

OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen.

In the left side of the screen, click the grid at

which the output port connected to your

external device intersects the desired channel.

The procedure is the same as in the INPUT PATCH

screen or OUTPUT PATCH screen. You can select the

following output ports.

Hint

If you select GEQ IN at the left side of the screen, the identi-

cally-numbered GEQ OUT will be automatically selected at

the right side of the screen, inserting the correspondingly-

numbered GEQ module into that channel. (For details on

using the graphic EQ

➥

p.110)

In the right side of the screen, click the grid at

which the input port connected to your exter-

nal device intersects the desired channel.

You can select the following input ports.

The SELECTED PATCH area shows the channel corre-

sponding to the grid at which the cursor is located. To

the right of this are shown the input/output ports

patched to insert-out/insert-in for this channel.

Hint

To move the cursor rapidly between the grids in the left and

right sides of the screen, you can hold down the [SHIFT] key

and press the CURSOR [

√

]/[

] keys.

Note

With the steps you have taken so far, the external device has

been patched to the insert-out/insert-in of the selected chan-

nel. However, please note that the insert connection is not

actually enabled until you turn on the INSERT I/O ON/OFF

button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen as described

below. As an exception to this, the INSERT I/O ON/OFF but-

ton is automatically turned on if you patch a GEQ.

Press the INPUT [PATCH] key several times to

access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen

(INPUT PATCH function) shown below.

In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT

PATCH function) you can switch insert on/off for each

input channel. In this screen you can also select the

insert I/O point (the location at which the external

device will be inserted).

If you want to insert into an output channel, press the

OUTPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the

OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen.

SLOT OUT 1–4

Output channels of an I/O card

installed in slots 1–4

FX IN 1–8 L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8

GEQ IN 1–12 Inputs of GEQ modules 1–12

2TR OUT 1–3 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R)

Patching the insert-out and insert-in

INSERT PATCH

AD IN 1–48 INPUT jacks 1–48

AD ST IN 1–4 ST IN jacks 1–4 (L/R)

SLOT IN 1–4

Input channels of an I/O card

installed in slots 1–4

FX OUT 1–8 Outputs (L/R) of internal effects 1–8

GEQ OUT 1–12 Outputs of GEQ modules 1–12

2TR IN D1–D3 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R)

2TR IN A1/A2 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 (L/R)

Channel at which

the cursor is located

Port patched to

insert-out

Port patched to

insert-in

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 71

Input Patch / Output Patch operations

Select one of the following as the insert I/O

point for each channel, and turn on the corre-

sponding button.

The selected point is indicated by the graphic in the

upper part of the screen.

Click the INSERT I/O ON/OFF button for the

desired channel to turn it on.

This enables the insert connection for the correspond-

ing channel.

If you selected AD IN as the insert-in, or if you selected

a slot to which an external head amp supporting the

special protocol (Yamaha AD8HR, AD824) is con-

nected, make head amp settings as necessary (➥ p.36).

PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ

POST EQ Immediately after the EQ

PRE DELAY Immediately before the delay

POST FADER Immediately after the fader

Select the insert I/O point for

each channel.

The INS symbol indicates the insert I/O point

for the channel at which the cursor is located.

These are the INSERT I/O ON/OFF buttons

that switch insert on/off for each channel.

These indicate the channel numbers.

These indicate the names of the input channels.

8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations

72 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Directly outputting the signal of an input channel

Here’s how the signal being input to an input channel or ST IN channel can be output directly from the desired output jack.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the

DIRECT OUT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH

function) shown below.

In this screen you can select the output port that will

directly output the input signal of an input channel or

ST IN channel. You can select the following output

ports.

Click the grid at which the desired channel

and output port intersect.

The procedure is the same as in the INPUT PATCH

screen or OUTPUT PATCH screen. The SELECTED

PATCH area at the upper left of the screen shows the

channel and output port corresponding to the grid at

which the cursor is located.

Note

With the procedure up to this point, the selected channel and

output port are now patched. However, please note that direct

output is not actually enabled until you turn on the DIRECT

OUT ON/OFF button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen

described below.

Press the INPUT [PATCH] key several times to

access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen

(INPUT PATCH function) shown below.

In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT

PATCH function) you can switch direct output on/off,

and select the direct out point (the location from which

the signal is taken for direct output).

Choose the direct out point for each channel

from the following choices, and turn on the

appropriate button.

The selected point is indicated by the graphic in the

upper part of the screen.

Click the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button for the

desired channel to turn it on.

This enables direct output for the corresponding

channel.

SLOT OUT 1–4

Output channels of an I/O card

installed in slots 1–4

2TR OUT D1–D3 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R)

DIRECT OUT PATCH

PRE HPF Immediately before the HPF

PRE EQ

Immediately before the EQ (immedi-

ately after the PRE EQ of the

INSERT I/O)

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

Select the direct out point

for each channel.

The “D” symbol indicates the direct out point

for the channel at which the cursor is located

Switch direct out on/off

for each channel.

These indicate the number of the input channels.

These indicate the name of the input channels.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 73

Grouping and linking

This chapter explains DCA Groups and Mute Groups which let you control the level or muting of

multiple channels simultaneously, and EQ Link and Compressor Link which let you link EQ or

compressor parameters of multiple channels.

About DCA Groups and Mute

Groups

You can use eight DCA groups and eight mute groups to

control multiple channels simultaneously.

DCA groups allow the level of multiple channels to be con-

trolled together by the DCA faders 1–8 of the top panel

DCA strip. A single DCA fader will control the level of

channels belonging to the same DCA group while main-

taining the level difference between the channels. This

provides a convenient way in which drum mics can be

grouped.

DCA groups 1–6 are for input channels only, but DCA

groups 7/8 can be used with both input channels and out-

put channels. Both types of channel can exist in an

identically-numbered group.

Mute groups allow multiple channels to be switched on/off

simultaneously by the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys in

the SCENE MEMORY section of the top panel. You can

use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously.

Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels

and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in an

identically-numbered group.

Items in the ASSIGN MODE

section

The ASSIGN MODE section lets you use the panel to

assign channels to DCA groups or mute groups.

A ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key

This key lets you assign channels to DCA groups 1–8.

While this key is blinking, you can use the [CUE] key

of each channel to assign that channel to the currently

selected DCA group.

B ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key

This key lets you assign channels to mute groups 1–8.

While this key is blinking, you can use the [CUE] key

of each channel to assign that channel to the currently

selected mute group.

Items in the DCA strip

The DCA strip is where you control DCA groups 1–8.

A Name indicator

This indicates the name assigned to each DCA group.

B DCA [MUTE] key

This switches DCA group muting on/off. If you turn

this key on (LED lit), channels assigned to that DCA

group will be muted.

C DCA [NOMINAL] LED

This LED will light when the corresponding DCA fader

is at the 0 dB position.

D DCA fader

This fader adjusts the level of the DCA group.

E DCA [RCL SAFE] LED

If Recall Safe is enabled for a DCA group, the corre-

sponding LED will light.

9 Grouping and linking

9 Items in the DCA strip

74 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

F DCA [CUE] key

This key is used to cue-monitor all channels assigned to

that DCA group.

Using DCA Groups

Here we explain how to assign channels to DCA groups and use the DCA faders to control them.

From the panel, you can assign channels to DCA groups

either by selecting a specific channel and specifying the

DCA group to which it will belong, or by selecting a spe-

cific DCA group and specifying the channels that will

belong to that DCA group.

❏ To select the DCA groups to which a

speciﬁc channel will belong

Press a [SEL] key to select the channel for

which you want to make assignments.

In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press a

DCA [1]–[8] key to select the DCA group to

which the channel will be assigned (you may

select more than one DCA group).

The LEDs will light for DCA [1]–[8] key(s) that are

turned on. If an input channel is selected, its corre-

sponding DCA assign LED(s) in the channel strip will

also light.

Select the DCA group(s) for other channels in

the same way.

❏ To select the channels that will belong

to a speciﬁc DCA group

In the ASSIGN MODE section, press the

ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key.

The ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key will blink. The [DCA]

key of the FADER MODE section will also blink. While

this key is blinking, you can use the [CUE] key of each

channel to assign that channel to a DCA group.

Press a DCA [CUE] key in the DCA strip to

select the DCA group (1–8) to which you want

to assign channels.

Press the [CUE] key of input channels / output

channels (you may select more than one) to

assign them to the selected DCA group.

If a DCA group 1–6 is selected, you can select only

input channels. If a DCA group 7/8 is selected, you can

select input channels and output channels. If an input

channel is selected, its corresponding DCA assign

LED(s) in the channel strip will also light.

Assign channels to other DCA groups in the

same way.

When you have finished making assignments,

press the ASSIGN MODE section ASSIGN

MODE [DCA] key to make its LED go dark.

The FADER MODE section [DCA] key will also stop

blinking, and return to its previous state.

Hint

• You can also assign channels to DCA groups from within the

display. Input channel DCA assignments are made in the

INPUT DCA/GROUP function DCA GROUP ASSIGN

screen (

➥

p.271), and output channel DCA assignments are

made in the OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function DCA GROUP

ASSIGN screen (

➥

p.265).

• DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene.

Assigning channels to DCA groups

DCA [1]–[8] keys

DCA assign LEDs

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 75

Grouping and linking

Here’s how you can use the DCA strip to control DCA

groups.

In the FADER MODE section, make sure that

the FADER MODE [DCA] key LED is lit.

The FADER MODE section selects the function of the

DCA strip faders. When the FADER MODE [DCA]

key LED is lit, you can use the faders of the DCA strip

to control DCA groups 1–8.

Use the faders of the channel strip to adjust

the relative levels between the channels

belonging to the DCA group you want to use.

Operate the DCA fader for the DCA group you

want to use.

The level of the channels assigned to that DCA fader

will change while preserving the level differences you

established in step 2.

If you want to mute a DCA group, press the

[MUTE] key for that DCA group in the DCA

strip.

The [MUTE] key will light, and muting will be turned

on for channels belonging to that DCA group (the

same state as if the faders were lowered to –∞ dB). At

this time, the name indicator for that DCA group will

be dimmed.

Hint

If desired, you can cause the DCA assign LEDs of the corre-

sponding input channels to blink while the DCA group is

muted. To do so, turn on the DCA/MUTE FLASH INDICATE

setting in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY screen).

To un-mute a DCA group, press the lit [MUTE]

key in the DCA strip.

Using mute groups

This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the panel keys to control them.

From the panel, you can assign channels to mute groups

either by selecting a specific channel and specifying the

mute groups to which that channel will belong, or by

selecting a specific mute group and specifying the channels

that will belong to that mute group.

❏ To select the mute groups to which a

speciﬁc channel will belong

Press a [SEL] key to select the channel for

which you want to make assignments.

In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the

MUTE [1]–[8] keys to select the mute group to

which the channel will be assigned (you may

select more than one mute group).

The LEDs will light for MUTE [1]–[8] key(s) that are

turned on. If an input channel is selected, its corre-

sponding mute assign LED(s) in the channel strip will

also light.

Select the mute group(s) for other channels in

the same way.

Controlling DCA groups

FADER MODE [DCA] key

Assigning channels to mute groups

MUTE [1]–[8] keys

Mute assign LEDs

9 Items in the DCA strip

76 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

❏ To select the channels that will belong

to a speciﬁc mute group

In the ASSIGN MODE section, press the

ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key.

The ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key will blink. In the

SCENE MEMORY section, the MUTE MASTER LED

will also blink. While this key is blinking, you can use

the [CUE] key of each channel to assign that channel to

a mute group.

In the SCENE MEMORY section, use the SCENE

MEMORY [1]–[8] keys to select the mute group

(1–8) for which you want to make

assignments.

While the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key is blinking,

you can use the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys to

select the mute group for which you will make assign-

ments. Press one of these keys; the LED of that key will

blink.

Press the [CUE] key of input channels / output

channels (you may select more than one) to

assign them to the selected mute group.

The [CUE] key will light, and that channel will be

assigned to the selected mute group.

Both input channels and output channels can be

assigned to mute groups 1–8.

Assign channels to other mute groups in the

same way.

When you have finished making assignments,

press the ASSIGN MODE section ASSIGN

MODE [MUTE] key to make its LED go dark.

The SCENE MEMORY section MUTE MASTER/

DIRECT RECALL LED will also return to its previous

state.

Hint

• You can also assign channels to mute groups from within

the display. Input channel assignments are made in the

INPUT DCA/GROUP function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

screen (

➥

p.272), and output channel assignments are

made in the OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function MUTE

GROUP ASSIGN screen (

➥

p.235).

• Mute group assignments are saved as part of the scene.

Here’s how you can use the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8]

keys of the SCENE MEMORY section to switch muting

on/off for mute groups 1–8.

Turn on the MUTE MASTER button located in

the lower right of the display.

The DIRECT RECALL button and MUTE MASTER

button located in the lower right of the display select

the function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys.

• When the DIRECT RECALL button is on

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will directly recall

the scene that is assigned to each key.

• When the MUTE MASTER button is on

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will switch mut-

ing on/off for mute groups 1–8.

Press the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] key for the

mute group you want to mute.

The key LED will light, and all channels belonging to

the selected mute group will be muted (the same state

as when the [ON] key is turned off). You can turn on

more than one key to mute multiple mute groups.

To un-mute a mute group, press a lit SCENE

MEMORY [1]–[8] key.

Hint

• The mute group mute on/off status is saved in the scene.

However, you can also use the Recall Safe function to

exclude the mute group status from scene recall.

• If desired, you can cause the MUTE assign LEDs of the cor-

responding input channels to blink while the mute group is

muted. To do so, turn on the DCA/MUTE FLASH INDICATE

setting in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY screen).

If necessary, channels belonging to a mute group can be

temporarily excluded from mute group operations (Mute

Safe).

Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you

want to exclude from mute groups.

In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the

[MUTE SAFE] key to make the LED light.

Mute Safe will be enabled for the corresponding chan-

nel. (In the case of an input channel, the [MUTE

SAFE] LED in the channel strip will light.) In this state,

muting an applicable mute group will not affect that

channel.

To defeat Mute Safe, press the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [MUTE SAFE] key once again

to make the LED go dark.

Hint

Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene. They will

remain effective until you manually defeat them.

Controlling mute groups

DIRECT RECALL button

MUTE MASTER button

Using the Mute Safe function

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 77

Grouping and linking

Using EQ Link and Compressor Link

EQ Link and Compressor Link are functions that respectively link the EQ parameters or compressor parameters of multiple

channels. Editing the EQ or compressor parameters of any channel belonging to a link group will similarly edit the other

channels in that link group.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

INPUT [DCA/GROUP] key (for an input chan-

nel) or OUTPUT [GROUP] key (for an output

channel) to access one of the following

screens.

• INPUT DCA/GROUP function EQ LINK ASSIGN

screen

Assign EQ link groups (1–8) for input channels

• INPUT DCA/GROUP function COMP LINK

ASSIGN screen

Assign compressor link groups (1–8) for input

channels

• OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function EQ LINK ASSIGN

screen

Assign EQ link groups (A–F) for output channels

• OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function COMP LINK

ASSIGN screen

Assign compressor link groups (A–F) for output

channels

In each screen, the channels (assignment source) are

listed horizontally, and the link group number or

alphabetical character (assignment destination) are

listed vertically.

Hint

The EQ link groups and compressor link groups are indepen-

dent for input channels and output channels.

EQ LINK ASSIGN

COMP LINK ASSIGN

EQ LINK ASSIGN

COMP LINK ASSIGN

9 Items in the DCA strip

78 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Click the grid at which the desired channel

(assignment source) intersects the desired link

group (assignment destination).

A “ ” symbol will appear at the corresponding grid.

To cancel the assignment, click the “ ” symbol once

again.

In the case of output channel EQ link groups, MIX

channels and STEREO A/B channels can be assigned

only to groups A–F, and MATRIX channels can be

assigned only to groups G/H. (Unavailable grids are

grayed-out.)

If another channel is already assigned to the assign-

ment-destination group, the EQ and compressor

parameters of the previously-assigned channel will be

copied to the channel that is added later, causing the

settings to be the same.

If you want to use the [CUE] key of each chan-

nel to assign it to a link group, click the SET BY

CUE button for the corresponding link group

in the screen to turn it on.

While the SET BY CUE button is on, you can use the

channel [CUE] keys to set or cancel link group

assignments.

Note

• The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one link

group.

• When you switch to a different screen, the SET BY CUE but-

ton that was turned on will automatically be defeated.

When you have finished making link group

assignments, operate the EQ or compressor

parameters of a channel belonging to a link

group.

The EQ or compressor parameters of channels belong-

ing to the same link group will follow your editing.

Hint

Link group settings are saved as part of the scene.

Note

The STEREO LINK button and KEY IN SOURCE settings are

not linked even for channels belonging to the same compres-

sor link group.

SET BY CUE button

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 79

Scene memory

This chapter explains how to store and recall the PM5D’s mix parameters as “scenes.”

About scenes

The PM5D can store and recall the current state of its mix parameters as a “scene.” Scenes are assigned a scene number of

000–500. Scene 000 is read-only, and cannot be overwritten. Other scene numbers may be rewritten freely.

A scene contains the settings of the panel controls (except

for the TALKBACK section, CUE/MONITOR section, and

the AD IN section of the PM5D model) as well as the set-

tings of the functions and screens listed below.

• INPUT function settings

• OUTPUT function settings

• EFFECT PARAM screen settings

• GEQ PARAM screen settings

• SELECTIVE RECALL screen (SCENE function)

settings

• FADE TIME screen (SCENE function) settings

• MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function)

settings

• HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function) settings

However, input patch, output patch, and HA (head amp)

settings are saved in the corresponding library, and the

scene contains only a library number that links to these

saved settings.

For example if the input patch, output patch, and HA

(head amp) settings have been edited when you store a

scene, the changes will be stored in the corresponding

library, and the library number of these stored library

items will be stored in the scene.

Hint

You can choose how the changes will be stored in the library;

they can either be stored in a new unused library number, or

overwritten onto the existing library number (

➥

p.81).

When you recall a scene, the input patch, output patch,

and HA (head amp) library numbers linked to that scene

will be recalled simultaneously.

For each scene, you can specify whether to enable linking

to these libraries (➥ p.159). For example if you turn off

linking to the HA library for a certain scene, recalling that

scene will not update the HA settings.

Note

By “head amp settings” we mean settings for the internal head

amps of the PM5D-RH model and for an external head amp

device that supports the special protocol (e.g., Yamaha

AD8HR or AD824). The settings of the AD IN section of the

PM5D model are not included.

10 Scene memory

00 Initial Data

10 InPatch #1

00 Initial Data

10 OutPatch #1

00 Initial Data

10 HA #1

000 Initial Data

010 Music #1

Current scene

Scene memory

Input patch

settings

Output patch

settings

Internal/external

head amp settings

Input patch library

Output patch library

HA library

• Storing a scene

000 Initial Data

010 Music #1

00 Initial Data

10 InPatch #1

00 Initial Data

10 OutPatch #1

00 Initial Data

10 HA #1

• Recalling a scene

Current scene

Scene memory

Input patch

settings

Output patch

settings

Internal/external

head amp settings

Input patch library

Output patch library

HA library

10 Scene memory

80 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Items in the SCENE MEMORY section

The SCENE MEMORY section lets you store and recall mix parameters as scene memories. Mute operations for mute groups

1–8 are also performed in this section.

A SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys

The function of these keys will depend on the selection

of the DIRECT RECALL button and MUTE MASTER

button in the lower right of the display.

• When the DIRECT RECALL button is on

SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys operate as Direct

Recall keys that directly recall the eight scenes assigned

to these keys.

• When the MUTE MASTER button is on

SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys operate as Mute Mas-

ter keys that switch muting on/off for mute groups 1–8.

B [DIRECT RECALL]/[MUTE MASTER]

indicators

These indicators indicate the currently selected func-

tion of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys (

1).

C SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] key

This key selects either NORMAL mode or PREVIEW

mode as the operation when you recall a scene. PRE-

VIEW mode is selected if this key LED is lit; NORMAL

mode is selected if it is dark. Operation will differ as

follows according to the selected mode.

• NORMAL mode

This mode lets you store and recall scenes as usual.

When you recall a scene in this mode, the current scene

will be overwritten by the settings of the newly recalled

scene.

• PREVIEW mode

This mode lets you preview the settings of a scene

stored in memory without affecting the signal process-

ing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this

mode, the mix parameter values of that scene will be

shown in the PM5D’s panel, but the internal signal

processing will remain as it was before the recall.

When you operate the panel keys or encoders at this

time, the panel display will change but internal signal

processing will not be affected. If desired, you can save

the edited content in the desired scene number or

library number.

D Scene number indicator

This indicate shows the number (000–500) of the scene

that is selected for store or recall.

E SCENE MEMORY [UNDO] key

This key cancels the most recently-executed scene recall

operation. If you have accidentally recalled an

unwanted scene, you can press this key to return to the

state prior to recalling the scene.

F SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key

This key recalls the scene whose number is shown in

the scene number indicator (

4).

G SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys

These keys increment or decrement the number dis-

played in the scene number indicator (

4). However if

the SCENE screen BLANK SKIP button is turned on,

you will only be able to select numbers in which a scene

is actually stored.

H SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key

This key stores the current scene into the number

shown by the scene number indicator (

4).

DIRECT RECALL button

MUTE MASTER button

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 81

Scene memory

Using scene memories

Here’s how to store the current mix settings (the current

scene) into a scene memory.

Note

Before you continue with the following procedure, make sure

that the SCENE MEMORY section SCENE MEMORY [PRE-

VIEW] key is off (dark). (If it is on, turn it off.)

Use the PM5D’s panel controls to set the mix

parameters as desired.

Use the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys to

select the store-destination scene number.

When you select a new scene number, the scene num-

ber and name shown at the top of the display and the

scene number shown in the scene number indicator of

the SCENE MEMORY section will blink. This blinking

indicates that the settings of the indicated scene differ

from the currently-set mix parameters.

Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key.

The SCENE STORE window will appear, allowing you

to assign a title to the scene and store it. This window

shows the following information.

Use the SCENE TITLE area to assign a name to

the scene. (For details on how to input text

➥ p.26)

As desired, specify the library numbers in

which the input patch, output patch, and HA

settings will be stored.

To specify a store-destination library number, scroll

the input patch, output patch, or HA library list, and

click the desired number. (The number currently

selected as the store-destination is highlighted.) The

library number you select here is saved as part of the

scene.

The default selection of store-destination will depend

on the setting in the DEFAULT EDIT LIBRARY NO.

area.

• If the NEW button is on

The lowest of the unused library numbers will be

selected.

• If the OVERWRITE button is on

The number from which the library was originally

recalled will be selected. (If this was a read-only library

item, the lowest-numbered unused library number will

be selected.)

Click the STORE button in the window.

A message will ask you to confirm the store operation.

Click the OK button.

The current settings will be stored to the scene number

you selected in step 2, and the upper part of the screen

and the scene number indicators will stop blinking. If

any changes have been made to the input patch, out-

put patch, and HA settings used by this scene, they will

be stored in the corresponding library number.

Storing a scene

Scene number and name will blink

Scene number

will blink

An “EDIT” indicator appears here if the library settings have

been modiﬁed from the state in which they were last stored.

SCENE TITLE area, where you can rename the scene.

As the default choice in which edited library

settings will be stored when you store a scene,

choose either NEW (select an unused library)

or OVERWRITE (select the original library).

HA library

list

Input Patch

library list

Output Patch

library list

10 Scene memory

82 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here’s how to recall a stored scene from memory.

Note

Before you continue with the following procedure, make sure

that the SCENE MEMORY section SCENE MEMORY [PRE-

VIEW] key is off (dark). (If it is on, turn it off.)

Use the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys to

select the scene number that you want to

recall.

When you select a new scene number, the scene num-

ber and name shown at the top of the display and the

scene number shown in the scene number indicator of

the SCENE MEMORY section will blink.

Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.

A message in the display will ask you to confirm the

recall operation. When you click the OK button, the

scene number you selected in step 1 will be recalled.

If input patch, output patch, and HA libraries are

linked to that scene, the correspondingly numbered

libraries will also be recalled.

Hint

If desired, you can disable the link between the scene and

these libraries, so that specific libraries will not be updated

when you recall that scene.

Using PREVIEW mode

Preview mode lets you check or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the

current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the PM5D’s panel,

but the internal signal processing will remain as it was prior to the recall.

During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to

make minor changes to a scene and then store it.

In the SCENE MEMORY section, turn on the

SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] key.

The key LED will light, and the SCENE MEMORY sec-

tion will operate in PREVIEW mode. At this time, the

scene indicator at the top of the display will turn red,

and the “PREVIEW” indicator will appear.

While in PREVIEW mode, operating the knobs,

encoders, and other controls (except for the TALK-

BACK section, CUE/MONITOR section, and the AD

IN section of the PM5D model) will not affect the

audio signal processing.

Use the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys to

select the scene number that you want to

recall.

The scene number will light in the scene number

indicator.

Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key.

Only the setting values of the scene you selected in step

2 will be loaded and shown in the PM5D’s panel LEDs

and display. However, the internal signal processing of

the system will remain unchanged as it was prior to the

Recall operation.

If desired, you can access a specific channel in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section, or access a specific

screen in the display to examine the values in detail.

If desired, use the controls of the console to

edit the settings.

Operating a panel control in PREVIEW mode will edit

the settings of the scene you recalled in step 3, but will

not affect the PM5D’s internal signal processing.

If you want to store the changes you made in

step 4, select the scene number in which you

want to store the scene, and press the SCENE

MEMORY [STORE] key.

The settings you edited in step 4 will be stored into

memory.

To return the SCENE MEMORY section to

NORMAL mode operation, press the SCENE

MEMORY [PREVIEW] key to make the key LED

go dark.

Note

• PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene

memory, all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and

OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters. PREVIEW

mode does not apply to parameters other than these.

• Even while you are in PREVIEW mode, recall operations in

the EVENT LIST screen or via MIDI messages will apply to

the current scene. While in PREVIEW mode, operations of

parameters that can be edited in the USER DEFINED

screen will generally apply to PREVIEW mode, not to the

current scene.

Recalling a scene

“PREVIEW” indicator

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 83

Scene memory

Using the Auto Store function

With the PM5D’s default settings, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key will open the SCENE STORE window where

you can name the scene and store it. If you enable the Auto Store function, you can execute the Store operation simply by

pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice. Here’s the procedure.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[UTILITY] key several times to access the PREF-

ERENCE 1 screen shown below.

The PREFERENCE 1 screen is where you can make

various default settings for the PM5D.

In the STORE/RECALL area at the upper left of

the screen, turn on the AUTO STORE button.

The Auto Store function is now enabled. When you

press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once, the

SCENE STORE window will appear as usual; press the

key once again to execute the Store operation. If you

rapidly press the key twice, the Store operation will be

executed before the SCENE STORE window appears.

Note

Note that if the STORE CONFIRMATION button is turned on

in the STORE/RECALL area of this PREFERENCE 1 screen,

a window will ask you to confirm the Store operation even if

Auto Store is enabled. If you don’t want any windows to

appear, turn off the STORE CONFIRMATION button as well.

Using the Direct Recall function

If you assign frequently-used scenes to the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys of the SCENE MEMORY section, you will be able

to recall these scenes with a single keystroke.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE] key several times to access the SCENE

screen shown below.

In the SCENE screen you can use the DIRECT

RECALL ASSIGN list shown in the lower middle of the

screen to assign scene numbers to the SCENE MEM-

ORY [1]–[8] keys.

Use the DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list to assign a

scene number to a SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8]

key.

Move the cursor to the left-hand field of the DIRECT

RECALL ASSIGN list and turn the [DATA] encoder or

click the / buttons to select a scene number; the

scene name will appear in the field at right.

Assign scene numbers to other keys in the

same way.

In the KEY MODE area at the right side (or

lower right) of the screen, make sure that the

DIRECT RECALL button is turned on. (If it is

off, click the DIRECT RECALL button.)

When the DIRECT RECALL button is on, the SCENE

MEMORY section [DIRECT RECALL] LED will light,

and the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will operate as

Direct Recall keys.

PREFERENCE 1 AUTO STORE button

SCENE

DIRECT RECALL

button

DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list

Scene name is

displayed

10 Scene memory

84 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

In the SCENE MEMORY section of the console,

press one of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys.

The LED of the corresponding key will light, and the

scene assigned to that key will be recalled.

Using the Selective Recall function

“Selective Recall” is a function that lets you restrict the parameters or channels that will be updated when you recall a specific

scene, or, conversely, specify for each scene parameters or channels that will be excluded from recall operations.

Hint

As a function similar to Selective Recall, there is also a “Recall

Safe” function that lets you select channels and parameters to

be excluded from recall operations (

➥

p.86). However it dif-

fers from Selective Recall in that Recall Safe settings apply to

all scenes.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE] key several times to access the SELEC-

TIVE RECALL screen shown below.

In the SELECTION MODE area in the upper

middle of the screen, choose one of the fol-

lowing two selection modes to specify how the

SELECTIVE RECALL screen will operate.

• SAFE PARAMETER mode

Specify channels/parameters that will be excluded from

Recall operations.

• RECALL PARAMETER mode

Specify channels/parameters that will be affected by

Recall operations.

When you click a button to change the mode, a confir-

mation window will appear. Immediately after you

switch modes, all channels/parameters will be subject

to recall.

Use the buttons in the screen to select the

parameters/channels that will be subject to

recall (or excluded from recall).

The SELECTIVE RECALL screen is divided into three

areas. From the left, these areas let you make settings

for input channels, output channels, and other param-

eters. The buttons in the screen correspond to

parameters and channels as follows.

❏ Input channels / Output channels

A SAFE ON/OFF

RECALL ON/OFF

The functions and names of these buttons will depend

on the currently-chosen SELECTION MODE.

• SAFE PARAMETER mode

The buttons will function as SAFE ON/OFF buttons to

select the channels that will be excluded from Recall.

• RECALL PARAMETER mode

The buttons will function as RECALL ON/OFF but-

tons to select the channels that will be subject to Recall.

B Parameter matrix grid

Here you can select the parameters that will be

excluded from (or subject to) Recall. If the ALL button

is on, all parameters will be excluded from (or subject

to) Recall.

C SET ALL

Turns on all buttons for all input channels/output

channels or for the corresponding parameter.

D CLEAR ALL

Turns off all buttons for all input channels/output

channels or for the corresponding parameter.

SELECTIVE RECALL SELECTION MODE area

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 85

Scene memory

❏ Other parameters

A DCA/GEQ/EFFECT

These buttons specify whether DCA groups, GEQ

modules, and internal effects will be excluded from (or

subject to) Recall.

B MUTE MASTER

This button specifies whether the Mute Master key on/

off status will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall.

C MIDI REMOTE

These buttons specify whether MIDI remote layers A–

D will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall.

D SET ALL

This button turns on all buttons for parameters 1–3.

E CLEAR ALL

This button turns off all buttons for parameters 1–3.

In the upper left of the screen, switch the

SELECTIVE RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE button to

ENABLE.

When this button is set to ENABLE, the Selective Recall

function will apply to subsequently-stored scenes.

Store the current scene.

The settings of the SELECTIVE RECALL screen will be

saved as part of the scene. When you recall this scene,

only the selected channels/parameters will be excluded

from (or subject to) Recall.

Note

• If you edit the settings of the SELECTIVE RECALL screen,

you must store that scene in order to make your changes

effective.

• Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together.

Channels/parameters excluded from recall operations by

either Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will not be

recalled.

10 Scene memory

86 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Using the Recall Safe function

“Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels from Recall operations. This differs from the Selec-

tive Recall settings (➥ p.84) made for individual scenes in that Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE] key several times to access the

RECALL SAFE screen shown below.

Use the buttons in the screen to select the

parameters/channels that will be excluded

from Recall operations.

The function of the buttons in the screen and the pro-

cedures are the same as in the SELECTIVE RECALL

screen (when SAFE PARAMETER mode is selected),

except for the fact that HA (Head Amp) SAFE ON/

OFF button is added as a parameter in the INPUT

SAFE PARAMETER area.

The [RCL SAFE] indicator of the channel strip will

light for input channels, STEREO A/B channels, and

DCA groups for which Recall Safe is turned on.

Hint

• In the RECALL SAFE screen, clicking the parameter matrix

grid will display a “ ” symbol with a “G” character in the

center. This “G” indicates that the setting is global, and

applies to all scenes.

• If desired, you can copy and paste Selective Recall settings

from the currently selected scene into the RECALL SAFE

screen (

➥

p.166).

• If you scroll the scroll bar downward, you will see that the

CH column of the SAFE PARAMETERS area shows not

only input channels but also input ports. If you set the HA of

a certain input port to Recall Safe, the HA of the correspond-

ing channel will also be set to Recall Safe. Even if they are

assigned to multiple channels, the HA Recall Safe settings

for corresponding input ports/channels will be linked.

If you want to use the panel to switch Recall

Safe on/off for a channel, use the [SEL] key to

select a channel and then press the SELECTED

CHANNEL section [RECALL SAFE] key to make

the key LED light.

Recall Safe will be turned on for the corresponding

channel.

Note

By default, ALL is selected as the parameters that will be

excluded from recall. This means that if you turn on Recall

Safe from the panel, the Recall Safe setting will affect all

parameters of the channel(s) for which it is turned on.

After you have finished making Recall Safe settings and

you recall a scene, only the selected channels/parame-

ters will be excluded from the Recall operation.

Note

Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together. Chan-

nels/parameters excluded from recall operations by either

Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will not be recalled.

RECALL SAFE

[RECALL SAFE] key

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 87

Scene memory

Using the Fade function

“Fade” is a function that smoothly changes fader and pan to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a

scene. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE] key several times to access the FADE

TIME screen shown below.

In this screen you can select the channels that will use

the Fade function, and specify the fade time and start

offset time.

In the upper left of the screen, click the FAD-

ING ENABLE/DISABLE button to select

ENABLE.

When the FADING ENABLE/DISABLE button is set to

ENABLE, the Fade function will be enabled for the fad-

ers in the current scene.

In the upper right of the screen, make sure

that the FADE TIME button is on.

The FADE TIME/START OFFSET buttons in the

upper right of the screen select the parameter that will

be edited in the lower part of the FADE TIME screen.

When this button is on, you can specify the fade time

(the time over which fader and pan parameters will

reach their new value) for each channel.

In the rows of buttons at the bottom of the

screen, click to turn on the buttons of the

channels for which you want to enable the

Fade function.

By clicking the SET ALL buttons located at the right of

the screen, you can turn on the buttons of all input

channels and all DCA groups, or the buttons of all out-

put channels.

By clicking the CLEAR ALL buttons located at the right

of the screen, you can turn off the buttons of all input

channels and all DCA groups, or the buttons of all out-

put channels.

Move the cursor to the box located immedi-

ately below each button, and turn the [DATA]

encoder to specify the fade time for that chan-

nel. (Alternatively, click the / buttons at

the left and right of the box.)

Hint

If the numerical value is displayed in light blue when you per-

form the above actions, this indicates that an offset time has

been specified for the corresponding channel.

In the same way, specify the fade time for

other channels as well.

If desired, you can easily copy the fade time setting of a

channel to another channel (➥ p.167).

In the upper right of the screen, click the

START OFFSET button to turn it on.

When the START OFFSET button is on, you can spec-

ify an offset time for each channel (the time from when

the scene is recalled until the fader or pan parameter

begins to change).

As you did in steps 4–6, specify an offset time

for each channel.

If you want to enable the Fade function not

only for faders but also for the PAN (BAL-

ANCE) parameters of input channels, set the

INPUT CH PANNING ENABLE/DISABLE button

(located in the upper middle of the screen) to

ENABLE.

The FADING ENABLE/DISABLE button and INPUT

CH PANNING ENABLE/DISABLE button can be set

independently. Use the following two buttons to select

the input channels to which this will apply.

• When the ALL INPUT button is on

The Fade function will apply to the pan (balance)

parameter of all input channels.

• When the SAME AS FADING button is on

The Fade function will apply to the pan (balance)

parameters of only the input channels selected in step

When you have finished making settings,

store the scene.

The settings in the FADE TIME screen are saved

independently for each scene. The Fade function will

apply when you recall a scene for which this button

is set to ENABLE. After recall, the fader and pan

(balance) parameter values will begin changing when

the specified Start Offset Time has elapsed, and will

reach their new values over the specified Fade Time.

FADE TIME

FADING ENABLE/

DISABLE button

FADE TIME button

Fade time

10 Scene memory

88 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Using the Tracking Recall function

“Tracking Recall” is a function that adds a specified offset value to each fader or level value when a scene is recalled. Tracking

Recall settings are common to all scenes. For example if the original level of a certain sound source has changed, or if an actor

was replaced by an understudy, this function provides a convenient way to adjust the level of that specific channel for all

scenes.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE] key several times to access the

TRACKING RECALL screen shown below.

In this screen you can select the channels that will use

the Tracking Recall function, and specify the offset

value for each channel.

In the upper left of the screen, click the

TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE button to

make it indicate ENABLE.

When the TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE

button is set to ENABLE, the Tracking Recall function

will be enabled for all scenes.

Using the buttons of the DISPLAY SELECT area

in the upper middle of the screen, select the

type of channels for which you want to make

settings.

• If the INPUT button is on

The screen will show the faders of input channels 1–48,

ST IN channels 1–4, FX RTN channels 1–4, DCA

groups 1–8, and STEREO A/B channels.

• If the OUTPUT button is on

The screen will show the faders of MIX channels 1–24,

MATRIX channels 1–8, DCA groups 7/8, and STE-

REO A/B channels.

In the row of buttons above the faders in the

screen, click to turn on the buttons of the

channels for which you want to enable the

Tracking Recall function.

Clicking the SET ALL button located in the upper right

of the screen will turn on the buttons of all channels

and DCA groups.

Clicking the CLEAR ALL button located in the upper

right of the screen will turn off the buttons of all chan-

nels and DCA groups.

To set the offset value for each channel, drag

the fader upward or downward for a channel

whose button you have turned on.

When you turn on the setting for a channel in step 4,

the offset value is set to 0. The offset value can be

adjusted in a range of –15 dB to +15 dB. The current

value is shown in the box immediately below the fader.

In the same way, specify the offset value for

other channels as well.

When you have finished making settings, turn

on the OFFSET LOCK button located in the

upper right of the screen.

When this button is on, the offset values currently

specified for the channels will be fixed; this prevents the

offset values from being unintentionally changed.

When you recall a new scene in this state, the offset val-

ues will be added to the level of each channel when the

scene is loaded. (However, the upper and lower level

limits will not be exceeded.)

Note

Channels that are excluded from Recall operations by the

Recall Safe or Selective Recall functions will not change even

if Tracking Recall is turned on.

TRACKING RECALLTRACKING RECALL

ENABLE/DISABLE button

DISPLAY SELECT area OFFSET LOCK button

Offset value

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 89

Scene memory

Using the Global Paste function

“Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings of the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to

scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed). This is a convenient way in which changes to the current scene can be

applied to scenes that have already been stored.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE] key several times to access the GLO-

BAL PASTE screen shown below.

In this screen you can select the copy-source channels/

parameters and specify the paste-destination scene

data.

Use the buttons in the PASTE MODE area to

select one of the following as the type of item

you want to paste.

In the CURRENT SCENE area, select the copy-

source channels or parameters.

The contents shown in the CURRENT SCENE area

will depend on what you select in the PASTE MODE

area (

1).

• When PASTE MODE = INPUT

Select input channels in the left area, and select param-

eters in the right area. (For details on the parameters

➥ p.170).

• When PASTE MODE = OUTPUT

Select output channels in the left area, and select

parameters in the right area. (For details on the param-

eters ➥ p.170).

INPUT Input channel parameters

OUTPUT Output channel parameters

DCA, GEQ, EFFECT

DCA level or mute on/off status,

GEQ settings, internal effect settings

GLOBAL PASTEPASTE MODE area

CURRENT SCENE area

DESTINATION SCENE area

PASTE button

10 Scene memory

90 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

• When PASTE MODE = DCA, GEQ, EFFECT

Select DCA groups, GEQ modules, and internal effects.

Hint

In either of these modes, you can click the SET ALL button to

turn on all channels, or click the CLEAR ALL button to turn off

all channels.

In the DESTINATION SCENE area, select the

paste-destination scene(s).

To select a single scene, click the desired line in the

upper half of the list.

To select multiple consecutive scenes, use the upper

half of the list to click the scene number at which you

want to begin pasting, and use the lower half of the list

to click the scene number at which you want to stop

pasting.

The order in which the scenes are listed can be changed

by clicking one of the buttons at the top of the list; the

button (sort by number), SCENE TITLE button

(sort by scene title), or TIME STAMP button (sort by

the date on which the scene was saved).

Click the PASTE button.

The selected items of the current scene will be pasted to

the scene(s) in memory.

Note

• If the parameter settings differ between the copy-source and

paste-destination, exception handling may be applied when

the data is pasted (

➥

p.171).

• Only the parameters selected by PASTE MODE will be

pasted. Note that even if you selected parameters in the

CURRENT SCENE area, they will be excluded from the

paste operation if you switch the PASTE MODE.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 91

Monitor and Cue

This chapter explains the PM5D’s Monitor and Cue functions.

About the MONITOR and CUE sections

The MONITOR section sends the signal selected as the

monitor source to the MONITOR OUT jacks. You can

select the following signals as the monitor source.

• The input signal from 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2

• The input signal from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3

• The output signal of the STEREO A/B channels

• The output signal of the LCR channels

• The output signal of a pre-selected MIX channel 1–24

or MATRIX channel 1–8

The CUE section sends the cue signal of the channel/group

selected by a panel [CUE] key to the CUE OUT jacks.

Hint

If the CUE INTERRUPTION button is turned on in the MONI-

TOR screen (MON/CUE function), the Cue/Solo signal will

also be sent from the MONITOR OUT jacks when Cue/Solo is

active.

• MONITOR SELECT

Selects the monitor source.

• MONITOR DELAY

Delays the monitor signal.

• CUE OUT DELAY

Delays the cue signal.

• METER

Switches the signal that is shown in the meter section

or in the display.

• DIM (Dimmer)

Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount.

• OUT ATT. (Output attenuator)

Attenuates/boosts the monitor/cue signal.

• ON (On/off)

Switches the monitor signal on/off.

• PHONES LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the top panel and front

panel PHONES jacks.

• MONITOR LEVEL

Adjusts the monitor level.

• CUE OUT LEVEL

Adjusts the output level of the cue signal.

11 Monitor and Cue

92 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Using the Monitor function

A [2TR IN A1] key

B [2TR IN A2] key

These keys select the input signals of 2TR IN ANA-

LOG jacks 1/2 as the monitor source.

C [2TR IN D1] key

D [2TR IN D2] key

E [2TR IN D3] key

These keys select the input signals of 2TR IN DIGITAL

jacks 1–3 as the monitor source.

F [STEREO A] key

G [STEREO B] key

These keys select the output signals of STEREO A/B

channels as the monitor source. By simultaneously

pressing the [STEREO A] key and [STEREO B] key

you can select the LCR channels as the monitor source.

H [DEFINE] key

This key selects the output signal of the pre-selected

MIX channel 1–24 or MATRIX channel 1–8 as the

monitor source. This monitor source selected by this

key can be specified in the MONITOR screen (MON/

CUE function).

Hint

The currently selected source is shown by the lit/dark state of

keys

–

I MONITOR [LEVEL] knob

This knob adjusts the output level of the signal being

output from the MONITOR OUT L/R/C jacks.

J MONITOR [ON] key

This key turns the monitor output on/off.

K MONITOR [PHONES] knob

This analog volume adjusts the output level of the

PHONES jacks.

L [MONO] key

If this key is on, the monitor output L/R channels will

be mixed and output as a monaural signal. The signal

will return to stereo when you turn this key off.

Items in the MONITOR section

J L

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 93

Monitor and Cue

Here we explain how you can use the MONITOR section

to monitor the desired source.

Make sure that your monitor system is con-

nected to the rear panel MONITOR OUT jacks

L/R/C.

If you want to monitor through headphones, make

sure they are connected to the top panel or front panel

PHONES jack.

Note

• MONITOR OUT jack C is a special jack used to monitor the

center channel when LCR mode is active. Note that the

appropriate signal will not be output from MONITOR OUT

jack C unless the LCR channel is selected as the monitor

source and the USE AS CENTER BUS button is turned on

in the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function)

(

➥

p.201).

• Turning on the [CUE] key of even one input channel, output

channel, or DCA group will override the settings of the MON-

ITOR section and cause the Cue signal to be output from

the MONITOR OUT jacks. Make sure that the CUE section

[INPUT]/[DCA]/[OUTPUT] LEDs are not lit.

To specify the channel that will be selected by

the [DEFINE] key, press the DISPLAY ACCESS

section [MON/CUE] key repeatedly to access

the MONITOR screen shown below.

Click a button in the DEFINE area to select the

channel that will be monitored when you

press the [DEFINE] key.

You can assign more than one channel to the

[DEFINE] key. You can choose from the following

sources.

Hint

The MONITOR screen also lets you make settings for monitor

signal delay, insert-out/in, and dimmer (

➥

p.216).

Use the keys of the MONITOR section to select

the monitor source from the following.

Hint

• If you select STEREO A/B channel or LCR channel, you can

also simultaneously select one other monitor source.

• The monitor source can also be selected in the MONITOR

screen (MON/CUE function).

Press the MONITOR [ON] key to turn it on.

Hint

A signal is always output from the PHONES jacks regardless

of the on/off state of the MONITOR [ON] key.

Turn the MONITOR [LEVEL] knob to adjust the

monitor level. If you are monitoring through

headphones, turn the PHONES [LEVEL] knob

to adjust the monitor level.

If you want to monitor the signal in monaural,

turn the MONITOR section’s [MONO] key on.

MIX 1–MIX24 Output signals of MIX channels 1–24

MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Output signals of MATRIX buses 1–8

Monitoring a signal

MONITOR DEFINE area

[2TR IN A1]/[2TR IN

A2] keys

The input signal from 2TR IN ANA-

LOG jacks 1/2

[2TR IN D1]/[2TR IN

D2]/[2TR IN D3] keys

The input signal from 2TR IN DIGI-

TAL jacks 1–3

[STEREO A]/[STE-

REO B] keys

The output signal of the STEREO A/

B channels

[STEREO A] key +

[STEREO B] key

The LCR channel output

[DEFINE] key

The signal pre-selected in the MON-

ITOR screen (MON/CUE function)

11 Monitor and Cue

94 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Using the Cue/Solo functions

A [INPUT]/[DCA]/[OUTPUT] LEDs

These LEDs indicate the monitoring status. If even one

[CUE] key is on, the LED of the group to which that

key belongs will light. If a special Cue signal such as

KEY IN CUE or EFFECT CUE is active, all three LEDs

will light.

B [SOLO] key

This selects how monitoring will occur when you use

the [CUE] keys. If this key is on, monitoring will oper-

ate in SOLO mode. If this key is off, monitoring will

operate in CUE mode.

C [LAST CUE] key

This selects the mode of operation when more than

one [CUE] key is on. Turning the key on selects LAST

CUE mode; turning the key off selects MIX CUE

mode. When you switch this mode, Cue will be turned

off for all channels.

D CUE [LEVEL] knob

This adjusts the signal level that is sent from the CUE

OUT jacks.

E [OUTPUT PFL] key

This switches the location from which the signal is sent

to the CUE bus when you turn on the [CUE] key of an

output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STE-

REO A/B channel). If this key is on, the PFL (pre-

fader) signal will be sent. If this key is off, the POST

ON (immediately after the [ON] key) signal will be

sent.

The PM5D lets you select either SOLO mode or CUE

mode when using the [CUE] key to monitor signals. Use

the [SOLO] key in the CUE section of the panel to switch

the mode.

In CUE mode, holding down the [SOLO] key will switch

to SOLO mode; the [CUE] keys of all channels will go

dark. Conversely in SOLO mode, pressing the [SOLO] key

will immediately switch to CUE mode.

These modes differ as follows.

• CUE mode

The cue signals of channels / DCA groups whose

[CUE] key is on will be sent via the CUE bus and out-

put from the CUE OUT jacks (Cue function). Choose

this method when you want to monitor a signal with-

out affecting other channels. When the PM5D is in the

default state, the cue signal can also be monitored from

the MONITOR OUT jacks.

• SOLO mode

Only the channels / DCA groups whose [CUE] key is

on will be output from the MIX/MATRIX/STEREO

buses, and other channels / DCA groups will be muted

(Solo function). The MONITOR OUT jacks also will

output only the signal from these same channels / DCA

groups.

Note

• If an input channel is soloed, the on/off setting of the output

channels will remain unchanged; only the signal of the corre-

sponding input channel will be sent to the buses. If an output

channel is soloed, the on/off setting of the input channels will

remain unchanged; the signal will be sent only to the corre-

sponding bus.

• If a DCA group is soloed, only the signals of input channels

belonging to that DCA group will be output to the corre-

sponding buses. However if output channels are assigned to

DCA groups 7/8, signals will be sent only to buses belong-

ing to that DCA group.

Hint

If desired, you can exclude specific channels from Solo opera-

tions (

➥

p.219).

Items in the CUE section

About CUE mode and SOLO mode

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 95

Monitor and Cue

The PM5D’s cue and solo signals can be categorized into

the following four groups.

• INPUT CUE group

The cue/solo signals of input channels make up this

group. This group becomes active when a [CUE] key of

an input channel, ST IN channel, or FX RTN channel

is pressed to turn it on.

• DCA CUE group

The cue/solo signals of DCA groups make up this

group. This group becomes active when a [CUE] key in

the DCA strip is pressed to turn it on.

• OUTPUT CUE group

The cue/solo signals of output channels make up this

group. This group becomes active when a [CUE] key of

a MIX channel, MATRIX channel, or STEREO A/B

channel is pressed to turn it on.

• Other CUE group

This group consists of the cue/solo signals operated by

the CUE buttons in the display. This group becomes

active when you click to turn on a CUE button in the

EFFECT PARAM screen (EFFECT function) or GATE

PARAM screen (INPUT GATE/COMP function).

It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue

between different groups. Normally, the group to

which the most recently pressed [CUE] key (CUE but-

ton) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys of

the previously selected group will be defeated.

However if you have switched cue/solo signal groups in

a certain order, the [CUE] key status of the previously

selected group will be recovered when you turn off the

[CUE] key (CUE button) to defeat the current cue/solo

selection.

The [CUE] key status can be recovered for the follow-

ing combinations of groups.

• OUTPUT CUE group → DCA CUE group

• OUTPUT CUE group → INPUT CUE group

• DCA CUE group → INPUT CUE group

• INPUT CUE / OUTPUT CUE / DCA CUE group →

Other CUE group

For example if you switch groups in the order of OUT-

PUT CUE group → DCA CUE group → INPUT CUE

group → Other CUE group, you can then successively

defeat the [CUE] keys (CUE buttons) to recover the

[CUE] key status of the previously selected group.

Cue and Solo groups

Input channel [CUE] key

ST IN/FX RTN channel

[CUE] key

DCA strip [CUE] key

MIX/MATRIX channel

[CUE] key

STEREO A/B channel

[CUE] key

CUE button in the display

11 Monitor and Cue

96 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

This section explains how you can use the [CUE] key of a

desired channel or DCA group to monitor the Cue signal.

Note

If you want the cue/solo signal to be output from the MONI-

TOR OUT jacks as well, access the MONITOR screen (MON/

CUE function) and make sure that the CUE INTERRUPTION

ON/OFF button is on before you continue with the following

procedure (

➥

p.217).

Using the [OUTPUT PFL] key of the CUE sec-

tion, select one of the following as the output

position of the signal sent to the CUE bus

when an output channel [CUE] key is pressed.

• PFL ([OUTPUT PFL] key is on)

The signal from immediately before the fader will be

sent to the CUE bus.

• POST ON ([OUTPUT PFL] key is off)

The signal from immediately after the [ON] key will be

sent to the CUE bus.

Hint

The above setting can also be made in the CUE screen

(MON/CUE function) (

➥

p.217). In this screen you can also

specify the output position of the signal sent from input chan-

nels and DCA groups to the CUE bus.

In the CUE section, use the [LAST CUE] key to

specify the mode of operation when more

than one [CUE] key within the same group is

turned on.

• LAST CUE mode ([LAST CUE] key is on)

Only the channel/group whose [CUE] key was last

turned on will be monitored.

• MIX CUE mode ([LAST CUE] key is off)

Channels/groups within the same group whose [CUE]

key is turned on will be monitored.

Note

• [CUE] keys belonging to different groups cannot be turned

on simultaneously. The group to which the last-pressed

[CUE] key belongs will be turned on, allowing the signals of

that group to be monitored.

• If you press the [CUE] key of a paired channel, both chan-

nels will be turned on.

Make sure that the [SOLO] key in the CUE sec-

tion is turned off.

Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel or

DCA group to turn it on.

The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be

output from the CUE OUT jacks and the MONITOR

OUT jacks.

To defeat Cue, press the currently-on [CUE]

key once again.

Hint

If you press the [LAST CUE] key to switch from LAST CUE

mode to MIX CUE mode (or vice versa), all previously-

enabled Cue (Solo) signals will be defeated. For example if

you have turned on multiple [CUE] keys in MIX CUE mode,

you can quickly turn them all off by pressing the [LAST CUE]

key twice.

This section explains how to use the Solo function.

Use the [LAST CUE] key of the CUE section to

specify the mode of operation when a [CUE]

key is turned on (LAST CUE mode or MIX CUE

mode).

In the CUE section, press and hold the [SOLO]

key.

When you press and hold the [SOLO] key, the key LED

will blink and SOLO mode will be enabled. In SOLO

mode, only the signal of the channel or DCA group

whose [CUE] key is turned on will be sent to the MIX,

MATRIX, and STEREO buses. The same signal can

also be monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks and

CUE OUT jacks.

Hint

If desired, you can exclude specific channels or groups from

Solo operations (for details, refer to

➥

p.219).

Turn on the [CUE] key of a desired channel or

DCA group.

Only the corresponding channel or DCA group will be

output to the buses and output jacks; the remaining

channels and DCA groups will be muted. The same sig-

nal will also be output from the CUE OUT jacks and

the MONITOR OUT jacks.

Note

If you turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel, the signal

will be sent only to the corresponding bus.

To defeat Solo, press the [SOLO] key.

If you press the [SOLO] key while in SOLO mode, you

will immediately return to CUE mode.

Note

• Normally, the Cue/Solo functions can be operated indepen-

dently of scene memories.

• Even if you pair a Cued channel, the cue settings will not

change in tandem at the moment you pair the channel. The

setting will change in tandem when you subsequently switch

Cue on/off.

Using the Cue function

MONITOR CUE INTERRUPTION

Using the Solo function

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 97

Talkback and Oscillator

This chapter explains how to use talkback and oscillator.

About the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections

The TALKBACK and OSCILLATOR sections let you send the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack or the signal

of a test oscillator to the desired output jacks.

Signal flow in the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections is as follows.

A TALKBACK jack

This is a balanced XLR-3-31 jack to which a talkback

mic can be connected. You can make settings in the

display to supply +48V phantom power to this jack.

B TALKBACK [LEVEL] knob

This adjusts the input level of the mic connected to the

TALKBACK jack.

C TALKBACK [ON] key

This switches the talkback signal on/off. When you

press and hold the key, talkback will be on as long as

you hold down the key. If you press and immediately

release the key, talkback will remain on until you press

the key once again.

However if the NEVER LATCH button is turned on in

the TALKBACK screen, talkback will be on only while

you hold down the key, and will turn off when you

release the key; i.e., talkback will not “latch” even if you

press and immediately release the key.

D OSCILLATOR [ON] key

This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the

internal oscillator to the specified bus(es).

Note

If the OSCILLATOR [ON] key is off, and a screen other than

the OSCILLATOR screen (TALKBACK function) is displayed,

pressing this key will only display the OSCILLATOR screen;

the key will not turn on. When you press the key once again, it

will turn on. If the key is on, pressing it once again will turn it

off regardless of the screen that is displayed.

12 Talkback and Oscillator

Items in the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR

sections

12 Talkback and Oscillator

98 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Using talkback

Here’s how the talkback signal input from the TALKBACK jack can be sent to the desired bus(es).

Repeatedly press the [MON/CUE] key of the

DISPLAY ACCESS section until the TALKBACK

screen appears.

Turn the TALKBACK [LEVEL] knob to adjust the

input sensitivity of the talkback mic.

The meter in the TALKBACK IN area indicates the

input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK

jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be sup-

plied to the TALKBACK jack, turn on the +48V button

located in the TALKBACK IN area.

Hint

The INPUT TO TALKBACK area also lets you use any INPUT

jack 1–48 as a supplementary input for talkback.

Click a button in the BUS ASSIGN area to spec-

ify the bus(es) to which the talkback signal will

be sent (multiple selections are allowed).

These buttons correspond to the following buses.

Hint

If desired, the talkback signal can also be output directly from

an output channel of slot 1–4 or from 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks

1–3. To do so, click the PATCH button in the TALKBACK

OUT area to access the OUTPUT PATCH screen, and patch

talkback to the jack you want to use for direct output.

To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK [ON]

key in the TALKBACK section of the panel to

turn it on.

The TALKBACK [ON] key can operate in either of the

following two ways, depending on the setting of the

NEVER LATCH button in the TALKBACK area.

• If the NEVER LATCH button is off

Talkback will be switched on/off each time you press

the TALKBACK [ON] key (Latched). However if you

press and hold down the TALKBACK [ON] key, talk-

back will remain on only while you continue holding

down the key, and will turn off when you release the

key (Unlatched).

• If the NEVER LATCH button is on

Talkback will be on only while you continue holding

down the TALKBACK [ON] key, and will turn off

when you release the key (Unlatched).

Hint

• The TALKBACK [ON] key of the panel and the TALKBACK

ON/OFF button in the screen are linked. The setting of the

NEVER LATCH button also affects both of these. However if

the NEVER LATCH button is off, holding down the on-

screen TALKBACK ON/OFF button will cause Latched

operation.

• When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to

lower the monitor levels other than talkback (

➥

p.216).

• You can also assign the talkback function to a user-defined

key (

➥

p.189).

MIX 1–24 buttons MIX buses 1–24

MATRIX1–8 buttons MATRIX buses 1–8

STEREO AL/R STEREO A bus L/R channels

STEREO BL/R STEREO B bus L/R channels

TALKBACK BUS ASSIGN areaTALKBACK area

INPUT TO TALKBACK area TALKBACK OUT area

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 99

Talkback and Oscillator

Using the oscillator

The PM5D contains a test oscillator. By outputting the oscillator signal to the desired bus you can check the operation of con-

nected devices or test the acoustics of a hall.

Repeatedly press the [MON/CUE] key of the

DISPLAY ACCESS section until the OSCILLA-

TOR screen appears.

Click a button in the OSC MODE section to

select the type of oscillator to output, from the

following choices.

Use the knobs and buttons of the PARAME-

TERS area to adjust the oscillator parameters.

The parameters that can be adjusted will depend on the

type of oscillator you selected in step 2. For example if

you selected SINE WAVE 1CH as the oscillator type,

the PARAMETERS area will contain the following

parameters.

Click a button in the BUS ASSIGN area to

select the oscillator signal output destination

from the following choices.

Hint

• If you selected SINE WAVE 2CH as the oscillator type, the

L-channel signal of the oscillator will be sent to odd-num-

bered buses (or the L output jack) and the R-channel signal

of the oscillator will be sent to even-numbered buses (or the

R output jack).

• You can use the OSC OUT area to directly output the oscil-

lator signal from an output jack or slot (

➥

p.214).

Press the OSCILLATOR [ON] key of the OSCIL-

LATOR section.

The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus you selected

in step 4. When you press the key again, the oscillator

will turn off.

Hint

The OSCILLATOR [ON] key of the panel and the OSC ON/

OFF button in the screen are linked.

Note

If the OSCILLATOR [ON] key is off, and a screen other than

the OSCILLATOR screen (TALKBACK function) is displayed,

pressing this key will only display the OSCILLATOR screen;

the key will not turn on. When you press the key once again, it

will turn on.

SINE WAVE 1CH button Sine wave x 1 channel

SINE WAVE 2CH button Sine wave x 2 channels

PINK NOISE button Pink noise

BURST NOISE button

Burst noise (repeated output

of pink noise)

OSCILLATOR BUS ASSIGN areaOSC MODE area

PARAMETERS areaOSC OUT area

FREQ knob

Adjusts the frequency of

the sine wave output from

the oscillator. You can

choose preset frequen-

cies by clicking the but-

tons below.

LEVEL knob

Adjusts the output level of

the oscillator.

MIX 1–24 MIX buses 1–24

MATRIX1–8 MATRIX buses 1–8

STEREO AL/R STEREO A bus L/R channels

STEREO BL/R STEREO B bus L/R channels

13 Meters

100 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

This chapter explains meter-related operations.

Items in the meter section

The meter section shows the input levels of the input channels and the output levels of the output channels.

A INPUT/MIX meters

Depending on the key you press, these meters indicate

the input levels of input channels 1–24 or 25–48, or the

output levels of MIX channels 1–24.

B [CH 1-24/ST IN/FX RTN] key

When this key is on, the INPUT/MIX meters indicate

the input levels of input channels 1–24 and the ST IN/

FX RTN/MATRIX meters indicate the output level of

ST IN channels (or FX RTN channels, depending on

the FOLLOW INPUT LAYER setting) 1–4.

C [CH 25-48/FX RTN/ST IN] key

When this key is on, the INPUT/MIX meters indicate

the input levels of input channels 25–48 and the ST IN/

FX RTN/MATRIX meters indicate the output level of

FX RTN channels (or ST IN channels, depending on

the FOLLOW INPUT LAYER setting) 1–4.

D [MIX/MASTER] key

When this key is on, the INPUT/MIX meters indicate

the output levels of MIX channels 1–24 and the ST IN/

FX RTN/MATRIX meters indicate the output levels of

MATRIX channels 1–8.

E [PEAK HOLD] key

Switches the peak hold function on/off for the meter

display.

F ST IN/FX RTN/MATRIX meters

Depending on the key you press, these meters indicate

the output levels of ST IN channels 1–4 or MATRIX

channels 1–8.

G MASTER meters

These meters always indicate the output levels of the

STEREO A/B channels and CUE bus.

Switching the meter display

You can use the keys of the meter section to specify the

channels whose levels will be shown in the INPUT/MIX

meters and ST IN/MATRIX meters. The following chan-

nels correspond to each key.

Hint

• The type of channels shown in the meter section is also

shown in the METER SECTION area in the upper right of

the display.

• The MASTER meters always indicate the output levels of

the STEREO A/B channels and CUE bus.

13 Meters

MIX

PEAK

HOLD

CH 1 -24

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

2322212019181716151413121110987654321

ST IN/

/ST IN

MATRIX

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-40

-50

-60

STEREO

B CUE

LR LR LR

1L 1R 2L 2R 3L 3R 4L 4R

MATRIX

ST IN / /

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

32 54

6 7

Key

[INPUT/MIX]

meters

[ST IN/MATRIX]

meters

[CH 1-24/ST IN/FX

RTN] key

Input channels

1–24

ST channels

(or FX RTN channels)

1–4

[CH 25-48/FX RTN/

ST IN] key

Input channels

25–48

FX RTN channels

(or ST IN channels)

1–4

[MIX/MATRIX] key

MIX channels

1–24

MATRIX channels

1–8

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 101

Meters

Switching the metering point

The metering point for the level meters (i.e., the position at which the level is detected) can be specified separately for input

channels and output channels.

Here’s how to specify the metering point for input chan-

nels and ST IN/FX RTN channels.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [METER] key to access the INPUT

METER screen.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of

the METERING POINT box to choose one of

the following metering points.

Here’s how to specify the metering point for output chan-

nels, MONITOR channels, and the CUE bus.

Hint

The metering point setting for the CUE bus is independent

from the other output channels.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [METER] key to access the OUTPUT

METER screen.

To specify the metering point for output chan-

nels and MONITOR channels, click the /

buttons at the left and right of the METERING

POINT box to choose one of the following.

To specify the metering point for the CUE bus,

click the / buttons at the left and right of

the CUE METERING POINT box to choose one

of the following.

PRE ATT Immediately before the attenuator

PRE GATE Immediately before the internal gate

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST FADER Immediately after the fader

POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key

Specifying the metering point for

input channels

INPUT METER METERING POINT box

PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST FADER Immediately after the fader

POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key

POST DELAY Immediately after the internal delay

PRE DELAY Immediately before the internal delay

POST DELAY Immediately after the internal delay

Specifying the metering point for

output channels

OUTPUT METER

METERING POINT

box

CUE METERING POINT

box

13 Meters

102 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Viewing the gain reduction of the internal gates and compres-

sors

The amount of gain reduction produced by the gates/compressors of the input channels and the amount of gain reduction

produced by the compressors of the output channels can be viewed in the display.

Here’s how to view the amount of gain reduction pro-

duced by the gates/compressors provided on input

channels 1–48 and ST IN channels 1–4.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [METER] key to access the INPUT GR

screen.

Click the GATE button or COMP button to

select the parameter that will be displayed.

For an explanation of the items shown in the screen,

refer to the explanation of the INPUT GR screen

(➥ p.211) in the Reference section.

To view the amount of gain reduction produced by the

compressors provided on the output channels, repeatedly

press the [METER] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section

to access the OUTPUT GR screen.

For an explanation of the items shown in the screen, refer

to the explanation of the OUTPUT GR screen (➥ p.211)

in the Reference section.

Viewing the gain reduction for input

channels

INPUT GR

GAIN button COMP button

Viewing the gain reduction for out-

put channels

OUTPUT GR

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 103

Effects

This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the PM5D’s internal effects.

About the internal effects

The PM5D contains eight internal effect modules. For each module, you can choose one of 48 effect types (not including Add-

On Effects) for the module to use.

Hint

You can add effect types for the internal effects by installing

an optional Add-On Effects package (

➥

p.109).

To use an internal effect via send/return, assign the output

of a MIX channel to the input of the effect, and assign the

output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the

corresponding MIX bus is used as an effect send AUX bus,

and the input channel is used as an effect return channel.

By default, the L/R outputs of effects 1–4 are assigned to L/

R of FX RTN channels 1–4.

Alternatively, you can insert an internal effect into a chan-

nel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to

the insert-out/insert-in of the desired channel.

The PM5D’s effect types fall into two categories; “stereo

effect types” which process the L/R channel input signals

independently, and “mix effect types” which mix the two

channels before processing the signal.

If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an

effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will

depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type

is selected, as follows.

If a signal is assigned to only one input of an effect, it will

be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regardless of whether a

Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected.

14 Effects

OUTPUT PATCH

INPUT PATCH

EFFECT 1

EFFECT 2

EFFECT 3

EFFECT 8

Input channel 1–48

inputs

ST IN channel 1–4

inputs

FX RTN channel

1–4 inputs

MIX chan-

nel 1–24

outputs

EFFECT

Insert-out of the

desired channel

Insert-in of the

desired channel

INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN

INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN

INPUT L L RETURN

INPUT R

EFFECT

R RETURN

• Stereo effect types

• Mix effect types

L RETURN

EFFECT

R RETURN

INPUT L

or R

14 Effects

104 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Using an internal effect via a MIX bus

This section explains how to use an internal effect via a

MIX bus. As an example, we will choose effect 1 for our

operations, assign MIX bus 1 to the effect input, and assign

the effect output to FX RTN channels 1/2.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the INPUT [PAN/ROUTING] key to access

the CH to MIX screen.

Make sure that the MIX bus 1 type selection

box indicates “VARI.”

If the box indicates “FIXED,” click the / buttons

at left and right to change the indication to “VARI”;

then press the [ENTER] key (or click inside the box) to

finalize the change.

This box selects the operation of the MIX bus (VARI or

FIXED). If VARI is selected, the bus send levels will be

adjustable.

Hint

The VARI/FIXED selection is made for two adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered MIX buses. If the effect input is stereo,

it is convenient to pair these two MIX buses.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT

PARAM screen.

Make sure that the box in the upper left of the

screen indicates EFFECT 1.

This box lets you select the effect module that you want

to control. If a different effect module is selected, click

the / buttons at left and right to select EFFECT 1.

Hint

You can access the EFFECT ASSIGN screen (EFFECT func-

tion) to see all eight effect modules at once while you assign

signal routes to the effect inputs and outputs, or operate

Bypass and Cue (

➥

p.154).

In the INPUT area, click the / buttons at

the left and right of the L CH box to select

MIX 1 (MIX channel 1); then press the [ENTER]

key (or click within the box).

This assigns the output of MIX channel 1 to the L input

of the effect.

If a signal route is already assigned, a window will

appear when you press the [ENTER] key, asking you to

confirm the assignment. Click the OK button to con-

firm the assignment.

If you want to use the effect input in stereo, assign MIX

channel 2 to the R CH box in the same way.

In the OUTPUT area, make sure that the L CH

box indicates FX RTN1L and the R CH box indi-

cates FX RTN1R.

The L CH/R CH boxes in the OUTPUT area select the

input channels that are assigned to the L/R outputs of

the effect.

By default, the L/R outputs of effect 1 are assigned to

FX RTN channel 1 (L/R). If different channels are

selected, use the / buttons at the left and right of

the boxes to select FX RTN1L and FX RTN1R

respectively.

Set the MIX BALANCE knob to about 100.

The MIX BALANCE knob adjusts the balance between

the original sound and effect sound included in the

output signal from the effect. If this knob is at the 100

(%) position, only the effect sound will be output.

In the ENCODER MODE section, press the MIX

SEND SELECT [1] key to make the encoder

mode indicator show “1”.

In this state you can use the input channel encoders to

adjust the send level from each channel to MIX bus 1.

Turn the encoders of the INPUT channel strip

and ST IN channel strip to adjust the send

level of the signal sent from each channel to

MIX bus 1.

Don’t raise the encoder of the FX RTN channel you are using

as the effect return. Doing so will send the output of the effect

back to the input, possibly causing oscillation.

Hint

• The send position of the signals sent from input channels to

the MIX bus can be specified for each channel (

➥

p.43).

• As an alternate way to adjust the send level, you can turn on

the [MIX SEND] key of the MIX section, then use a [SEL]

key to select an input channel and turn the corresponding

MIX encoder (

➥

p.43).

CH to MIX Type selection box

EFFECT PARAM

OUTPUT area

INPUT area MIX BALANCE knob

The effect module you are using

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 105

Effects

In the MIX section, press the [MIX MASTER]

key to turn it on (LED lit).

When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, you can use the

controls of the MIX section to control MIX channels

1–24.

Press the MIX channel 1 MIX [ON] key to

turn it on. Use the MIX encoder of that MIX

channel to adjust the master send level of

the signal sent to the effect.

In the FX RTN channel strip, press the FX

RTN channel 1 [ON] key to turn it on.

Use the FX RTN channel 1 fader to adjust the

effect return level.

Hint

The input/output levels of the effect can be viewed in the

meters shown in the EFFECT PARAM screen or EFFECT

ASSIGN screen.

Inserting an internal effect into a channel

You can insert an internal effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the insert-out/insert-in of

the desired channel. As an example, here’s how to insert an effect into an input channel.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT

PARAM screen.

To select the effect module you want to use,

click the / buttons at the left and right of

the box in the upper left of the screen.

In the INPUT area, use the / buttons at

the left and right of the L CH box to select the

insert-out of the channel into which you want

to insert the effect, and press the [ENTER] key.

(If a signal route has already been assigned, a

window will ask you to confirm the assign-

ment change.)

If you are inserting the effect into a stereo channel (or

two paired channels), use the R CH box to assign the

insert-out for the other channel in the same way.

In the OUTPUT area, use the / buttons at

the left and right of the L CH box to select the

insert-in assigned to the L output of the effect.

If you are inserting the effect into a stereo channel (or

two paired channels), use the R CH box to assign the

insert-in for the other channel in the same way.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the INPUT [PATCH] key to access the

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen.

Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the

channel into which you inserted the effect.

This enables the effect insertion for the corresponding

channel.

Use the buttons of the INSERT I/O area to

specify the insert-out/in point.

Hint

For details on the INSERT I/O area, refer to INSERT/DIRECT

POINT screen (

➥

p.256) in the Reference section.

Turn on the [ON] key for the channel into

which you inserted the effect, and use the

fader to adjust the input level.

Access the EFFECT PARAM screen, and drag

the MIX BALANCE knob to adjust the balance

of the effect sound and original sound.

The input/output levels of the effect can be viewed in

the meters shown in the EFFECT PARAM screen or

EFFECT ASSIGN screen.

EFFECT PARAM

OUTPUT area

INPUT area MIX BALANCE knob

The effect module you are using

INSERT I/O area INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

INSERT ON/OFF button

14 Effects

106 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Basic operations in the effect screen

This section explains how to store or recall effect library data, and how to edit effect parameters.

Here’s how to recall existing settings from the effect library.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT

PARAM screen.

Note

You cannot change the currently selected effect type in the

EFFECT PARAM screen. To change the effect type, you must

recall (load) a library item that uses the desired effect type.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of

the box in the left side of the screen to select

the effect module you want to use, and then

click the LIBRARY button.

The EFFECT LIBRARY screen will appear, allowing

you to recall or store settings in the effect library.

Hint

You can also access this screen by repeatedly pressing the

[EFFECT] key. The effect module you are controlling can also

be selected in this screen.

In the library list at the right of the screen,

click to select the library item you want to

recall

When you click a library item in the library list, that

line will be highlighted and move to the center of the

list. The effect type of the currently selected library item

will be shown above the library list.

Click the RECALL button.

The selected library item will be loaded into the effect

module you chose.

Hint

You can click the EDIT button in the upper right of the screen

to access the EFFECT PARAM screen for the currently

selected effect.

Here’s how to edit the parameters of an internal effect.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT

PARAM screen.

The lower part of the screen will show knobs and but-

tons for editing the parameters of the currently selected

effect. The content of the parameters will depend on

the type of the currently selected effect.

Use the box in the upper left of the screen to

select the effect module you want to control.

Use the knobs and buttons in the lower part of

the screen to edit the effect parameters.

For details on the effect parameters, refer to the Appen-

dices at the end of this manual.

Hint

The parameter settings for internal effect modules 1–8 are

saved in the scene. The settings of individual effects can also

be stored in the effect library independently of scene memory.

Recalling settings from the effect

library

EFFECT PARAM

The effect module you are controlling

LIBRARY button

EFFECT LIBRARY RECALL button

Library listCurrent effect type

Editing the effect parameters

EFFECT PARAM

The effect module you are controlling

Effect parameters

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 107

Effects

Here’s how to store effect parameter settings in the effect

library.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT

PARAM screen.

Use the box in the upper left of the screen to

select the effect module whose settings you

want to store, and click the LIBRARY button.

The EFFECT LIBRARY screen will appear, allowing

you to recall or store settings in the effect library.

In the library list, choose the store-destination

number and click that line.

Note

Library items for which an “R” (read-only) appears in the right

column of the list are factory preset library items. These num-

bers cannot be overwritten.

Click the STORE button.

The EFFECT LIBRARY STORE window will appear,

allowing you to name the library item you are saving.

Use the character palette to assign a name to

the library item.

For details on using the character palette, refer to p.26.

Click the STORE button.

A window will ask you to confirm the Store operation.

To execute the Store operation, click the OK

button.

The data will be stored, and you will return to the pre-

vious screen.

If you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK but-

ton, the Store operation will be aborted and you will

return to the previous screen.

Storing settings in the effect library

EFFECT PARAM

The effect module whose data you want to store

LIBRARY button

EFFECT LIBRARY

“R” (read-only)

14 Effects

108 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Using the Tap Tempo function

This section explains how to use the Tap Tempo function. “Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a

delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval.

From the effect library, recall a library item

whose effect type uses a TEMPO parameter

(e.g., Delay+ER., Echo, Chorus).

TEMPO is a parameter that specifies a time-related

effect parameter (the DELAY parameter of Delay+ER.

or Echo, or the FREQ. parameter of Chorus, etc.) in

terms of a BPM value or a manual setting. The TEMPO

parameter is included in delay-type effects or modula-

tion-type effects, and is shown in the lower left of the

EFFECT PARAM screen.

Hint

For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the

Appendices at the end of this manual (

➥

p.298).

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT

PARAM screen.

The following illustration shows the screen when the

“Delay

→ER.” effect type is selected.

Move the cursor to the TAP TEMPO button,

and repeatedly press the [ENTER] key at the

desired tempo. (Alternatively, repeatedly click

the TAP TEMPO button.)

The average interval (BPM) at which you press the key

will be calculated, and that value will be input for the

TEMPO parameter.

Hint

• The Tap Tempo function is valid only for the currently dis-

played internal effect. However, it is ignored if the selected

effect type does not include a TEMPO parameter.

• If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it

will be ignored.

• If desired, an external switch connected to the GPI connec-

tor can be used to operate the Tap Tempo function of the

current page (

➥

p.123).

EFFECT PARAM

TAP TEMPO button

ab c

First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap

The average interval will be input

(the average of a, b, and c)

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 109

Effects

Using the Freeze effect

Here’s how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is

selected, you can perform operations in the screen to record (sample) and play back a sound.

In the EFFECT LIBRARY screen, recall a library

item that uses the FREEZE effect type.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT

PARAM screen.

If the FREEZE effect type is selected, the lower left of

the EFFECT PARAM screen will show a REC button, a

PLAY button, and a progress bar.

To begin recording (sampling), click the REC

button and then click the PLAY button.

The signal being input to the effect will be recorded.

The progress bar shows the current recording location.

When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will auto-

matically turn off.

Hint

You can adjust the parameters in the screen to make detailed

settings for recording time, the way in which recording will

begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For

more about the parameters, refer to the Appendices at the

end of this manual (

➥

p.305).

To play back the recorded sample, click the

PLAY button.

Note

Once you stop, the sampled content will be erased.

Using optional Add-On Effects

You can add effect types for the internal effects by install-

ing an optional Add-On Effects package. The installed

effect types can be recalled from effect library numbers 049

and following. For details on the installation procedure,

refer to the installation guide included with the Add-On

Effects package you purchased.

As of August 2004, the following Add-On Effects packages

are available for purchase.

• AE011 Channel Strip Package

• AE021 Master Strip Package

However, the Reverb Package sold as an Add-On Effects

package for the DM2000 or 02R96 is already included on

the PM5D as effect library numbers 046–048.

Other Add-On Effects packages are expected to go on sale

in the future, so please check the Yamaha website for the

latest information.

Yamaha Pro Audio Website:

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com

EFFECT PARAM

Progress bar

PLAY button

REC button

EFFECT PARAM

15 Graphic EQ

110 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

The PM5D contains twelve 31-band graphic EQ modules. This chapter explains how to use the

graphic EQ.

Patching the graphic EQ

The twelve GEQ (Graphic EQ) modules built into the PM5D can be inserted into the insert-out/in of the desired channel. As

an example, here’s how to insert graphic EQ into the STEREO A channel.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [GEQ] key to access the GEQ PARAM

screen.

In this screen you can select a GEQ module, specify the

channel into which it will be inserted, and edit its

parameters.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of

the MODULE box in the upper left of the

screen to select the GEQ module you want to

operate.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of

the INSERT box to select ST AL [INS] (STEREO

A L channel insert-in/out) as the channel into

which the GEQ module will be inserted, and

press the [ENTER] key (or click within the box).

You can choose one of the following insert

destinations.

If an insert destination is already assigned, a window

will appear when you click within the box, asking you

to confirm the change. Click the OK button to execute.

In the upper left of the screen, click the /

buttons at the left and right of the MODULE

box to select another GEQ module, and assign

it to ST AR [INS] (STEREO A R channel insert-

in) in the same way.

Click the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn it on.

Note

When you insert a GEQ, the insert-in for the channel will be

enabled automatically.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the OUTPUT [PATCH] key to access the

INSERT POINT screen.

If desired, change the insert point for the STE-

REO A channel into which you inserted the

graphic EQ.

When you insert a GEQ, the insert-in point for that

channel will be enabled automatically.

Note

• If you inserted a graphic EQ into an input channel, repeat-

edly press the INPUT [PATCH] key to access the INSERT/

DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function), and

edit the settings in the same way.

• You can also insert a graphic EQ into the desired channel’s

insert-in/out by using the INSERT PATCH screen (INPUT

PATCH function and OUTPUT PATCH function).

15 Graphic EQ

INS CH 1–INS CH48 Input channel 1–48 insert in/out

INS STIN1L–INS

STIN4R

ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) insert in/

out

INS MIX 1–INS MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 insert in/out

INS MTRX1–INS

MTRX8

MATRIX channel 1–8 insert in/out

INS ST AL/INS ST AR

STEREO A channel (L/R) insert

in/out

INS ST BL–INS ST BR STEREO B channel insert in/out

INS MON L–INS MON C

MONITOR channel (L/R/C) insert

in/out

MODULE box GEQ ON/OFF button

GEQ PARAM

INSERT box

INSERT POINT

ON/OFF button Insert point

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 111

Graphic EQ

Basic graphic EQ operations

There are two ways to control a graphic EQ; using the virtual faders and buttons within the display, or using the DCA faders of

the panel.

Here’s how to control the desired GEQ module by using

the faders and buttons shown in the GEQ PARAM screen

(GEQ function).

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [GEQ] key to access the GEQ PARAM

screen.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of

the MODULE box to select the GEQ module

you want to operate.

At this time make sure that the GEQ ON/OFF button

is on. Also make sure that the corresponding module is

inserted into an appropriate channel, and that insert-

in/out is enabled for that channel.

Hint

• The upper part of the GEQ PARAM screen functions as a

spectrum analyzer. If a signal is being input to the corre-

sponding channel, the level of each frequency band is

displayed in realtime.

• As an alternate way to select the desired GEQ module, you

can use the GEQ ASSIGN screen (GEQ function) (

➥

p.157).

If desired, use the buttons of the LIMIT area to

specify the variable range of the faders.

The LIMIT area lets you select the maximum amount

and direction of the change controlled by the faders.

You can select ±15 dB/±12 dB/±6 dB (both boost and

cut directions) or –24 dB (cut only).

Drag the faders in the lower part of the screen

to adjust the amount of boost/cut.

The value of each fader is shown by the box below it.

Hint

Clicking the EQ FLAT button below the LIMIT area will reset

all faders to 0 dB.

Here’s how to control the graphic EQ using the keys and

faders of the panel DCA strip. In this case, the correspond-

ing GEQ module is divided into six regions for control.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [GEQ] key to access the GEQ PARAM

screen.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of

the MODULE box to select the GEQ module

you want to operate.

At this time, make sure that the GEQ ON/OFF button

is turned on. Also make sure that the corresponding

module is inserted into an appropriate channel, and

that insert is enabled for that channel.

Hint

When the GEQ PARAM screen is displayed, pressing the

[SEL] key of a channel in which a GEQ module is inserted will

recall the corresponding GEQ module in the screen.

Use the buttons of the LIMIT area to select the

maximum amount and direction of the change

controlled by the faders.

In the lower part of the screen, click a button

in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area to select the

region you will control from the DCA faders.

The buttons in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area corre-

spond to the following frequency regions.

Controlling the graphic EQ from the

display

MODULE box Spectrum analyzer

GEQ PARAM

Faders LIMIT area

A 20.0-100 button The eight bands 20.0 Hz–100 Hz

B 63.0-315 button The eight bands 63.0 Hz–315 Hz

C 200-1.00k button The eight bands 200 Hz–1.00 kHz

D 630-3.15k button The eight bands 630 Hz–3.15 kHz

2.00k-10.0k button

The eight bands 2.00 kHz–10.0 kHz

4.00k-20.0k button

The eight bands 4.00 kHz–20.0 kHz

Controlling the graphic EQ from the

DCA section

MODULE box GEQ ON/OFF button

GEQ PARAM

LIMIT areaASSIGN TO FADERS area

15 Graphic EQ

112 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

When a button is clicked, you can use the DCA faders

to control the faders of that frequency region. The fad-

ers of the selected region are indicated by a red line in

the center of the fader.

While any of the buttons in the ASSIGN TO FADERS

area is on, you can use the FADER MODE section

FADER MODE [A]–[F] keys to select the frequency

region corresponding to these buttons.

Even if all of the buttons in the ASSIGN TO FADERS

area are off, you can hold down the [SHIFT] key and

press one of the FADER MODE [A]–[F] keys to select

the region to be controlled by the DCA faders.

Operate DCA faders 1–8.

The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or

cut.

Hint

If the fader of a GEQ module is at the 0 dB position, the

[NOMINAL] LED of the DCA fader will light. If it is at other than

the 0 dB position, the DCA [MUTE] key will light. While the

DCA [MUTE] key is lit, pressing the DCA [MUTE] key will

reset the corresponding band to 0 dB.

If you want to use the DCA faders to control a

different region, repeat steps 4–5.

When you have finished using the DCA faders

to control the graphic EQ, either press the

FADER MODE [DCA] key or click the OFF but-

ton in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area.

When the [DCA] button is on, the FADER MODE

keys and the DCA faders will return to their normal

state. If you once again want to assign the graphic EQ

to the DCA faders, either click a button in the ASSIGN

TO FADERS area or hold down the [SHIFT] key and

press a FADER MODE [A]–[F] key.

Hint

• GEQ settings are saved as part of the scene. The settings of

a GEQ module can also be saved in the GEQ library. For

details, refer to GEQ LIBRARY screen (

➥

p.158) in the Ref-

erence section.

• When you switch the display to a different screen, the DCA

fader assignments will be forcibly defeated, and will no

longer function even if you return to the GEQ screen. How-

ever if you turn on the AUTO ASSIGN button in the GEQ

PARAM screen, the DCA faders will automatically be

assigned to the most recently operated region when you

access the GEQ PARAM screen.

20.0Hz–100Hz 630Hz–3.15kHz

63.0Hz–315Hz 200Hz–1.00kHz

2.00kHz–10.0kHz

4.00kHz–20.0kHz

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 113

Remote control

This chapter explains how you can use MIDI or GPI to control the PM5D’s parameters from an

external device, or conversely how you can use the PM5D to control external devices.

MIDI on the PM5D

The PM5D can use MIDI to perform the following operations.

• Program Change transmission and reception

When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library

recall) on the PM5D, a program change message of the

corresponding number can be transmitted to an exter-

nal device. Conversely, the corresponding events can be

executed when program change messages are received

from an external device.

• Control Change transmission and reception

When you execute a specific event (fader/encoder or

key operation) on the PM5D, a control change mes-

sage of the corresponding number can be transmitted

to an external device. Conversely, events can be exe-

cuted when control change messages are received from

an external device. This capability can be used to

record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer

or other external device, and play back this data later.

System exclusive messages can also be used to transmit

or receive bulk data (scene or library content) or

parameters.

• MIDI Remote function

You can assign MIDI messages to the controls of the

INPUT/ST IN channel strip, and transmit those MIDI

messages by operating the controls. This capability can

be used for remote control of external MIDI devices

such as synthesizers, or to control the parameters of

DAW software or a HDR unit.

• MIDI Event transmission

MIDI messages can be registered independently for

each scene in scene memory, and transmitted when

that scene is recalled.

Note

For each of the above functions, the MIDI port used to trans-

mit/receive MIDI messages can be selected from the rear

panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors, the rear panel USB connec-

tor, and an I/O card installed in slots 1 through 4. (If the USB

connector or an I/O card is selected, you can additionally

choose from ports 1 through 8.) However, MIDI Event trans-

mission is fixed at the MIDI OUT connector.

Using program changes to control events

The PM5D lets you assign specific events (scene recall / effect library recall) to each MIDI program number, so that the corre-

spondingly-numbered program change message will be transmitted to an external device when you execute that event on the

PM5D. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external

device.

Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the exter-

nal device to the PM5D’s MIDI IN connector.

Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the PM5D

to the MIDI IN connector of the external

device.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

MIDI PGM CHANGE screen shown below.

In the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen you can assign

events to each program number, select the port at

which MIDI messages will be transmitted and received,

and select how program changes will be transmitted

and received.

16 Remote control

MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUTMIDI IN

PM5D

External

device

MIDI PGM CHANGE

16 Remote control

114 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

In the PROGRAM CHANGE SETUP area at the

left of the screen, you can select the way in

which program changes will be transmitted

and received, and switch reception and trans-

mission on/off.

The MODE area of PROGRAM CHANGE SETUP lets

you choose one of the following as the way in which

program changes will be transmitted and received.

• SINGLE

If this button is on, program changes will be transmit-

ted/received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode).

• OMNI ON/OFF

If this button is on, program changes of all MIDI chan-

nels will be received in Single mode (this is unavailable

in Multi mode).

• BANK ON/OFF

If this button is on, bank select messages will be trans-

mitted and received in Single mode (this is unavailable

in Multi mode).

• MULTI

If this button is on, program changes will be transmit-

ted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode).

You can use the Tx (transmission) and Rx (reception)

buttons to turn program change transmission and

reception on/off separately.

In the MIDI SETUP area at the upper left of the

screen, select the port at which program

changes will be transmitted/received, and the

MIDI channel that will be used for transmis-

sion and reception. You have the following

choices.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of the Tx

box (transmission) or Rx box (reception) to change the

setting, and press the [ENTER] key (or click within the

box) to finalize the setting. If you select USB or SLOT

1–4, use the box at the right to specify the port number

(1–8) as well.

If SINGLE (single mode) is selected as the program

change transmission/reception mode, use the MIDI

CH field to select the MIDI transmit channel and MIDI

receive channel.

Hint

The MIDI port and MIDI channel used for program change

transmission/reception can also be specified from the MIDI

SETUP screen (

➥

p.171).

In the list at the right side of the screen, dis-

play the MIDI channel (bank) and program

number to which you want to assign an event,

and click that line.

This list lets you select the event (scene recall / effect

library recall) assigned to each program number.

The list contains the following columns.

• CH/BANK (Channel/Bank)

In Multi mode, or in Single mode when the BANK

ON/OFF button is off, the value in this column indi-

cates the MIDI channel on which program changes are

transmitted and received.

In Single mode when the BANK ON/OFF button is on,

the value in this column indicates the bank number.

• PGM No. (Program number)

Indicates the program number 1–128.

• LIBRARY NAME

In this column you can view/select the type and the

number of the event assigned to each channel (bank)/

program number.

Use the scroll bar at the right to display the desired

channel (bank) and program number, and click that

line; the line you click will move to the center and will

be highlighted.

Click the button in the LIBRARY NAME col-

umn of the currently selected line to open the

MIDI PGM CHANGE window.

In this window you can select the type of event (a

scene, or a library item for effect 1–8) and its number.

MIDI The rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors

USB The rear panel USB connector

SLOT 1–4 An I/O card installed in rear panel slot 1–4

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 115

Remote control

In the list at the left, select the type of event. In the list

at the right, select the scene/library number that will be

recalled. The following types of event can be selected in

the list at the left.

When you have finished making settings, click

the OK button in the MIDI PGM CHANGE

window.

Assign events to other program numbers in

the same way.

With these settings, executing the specified event on

the PM5D will cause a program change (or bank select

+ program change) message to be transmitted to the

external device.

When an external device transmits a program change

(or bank select + program change) message on the

appropriate channel, the event assigned to that pro-

gram number will be executed.

Hint

• You can use the CLEAR button above the list to erase all

assignments to program numbers. The PRESET button will

return all program number assignments to their default state.

• The contents of the program change table are not saved in

the scene. If desired, you can save this data on a memory

card as a MIDI PGM TABLE.

Note

If more than one program number is assigned to a single

scene, only the lowest-numbered program change will be

transmitted in Single mode, and in Multi mode the lowest-

numbered program change for each channel will be

transmitted.

Using control changes to control events

You can use MIDI control change messages to control specified events (fader/encoder operations, key on/off operations etc.)

on the PM5D. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device,

and play back this data later.

You can use control changes to control events in either of

the following two ways.

• Using control change numbers 1–119

This method uses the common variety of control

change messages. You can freely assign an event to each

control number.

• Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number)

This method uses a special type of control change mes-

sages called NRPN. NRPN uses control change

numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Signifi-

cant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the

parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted con-

trol change messages of control change number 6 (or 6

and 38) to specify the value of that parameter.

The event specified by each combination of MSB and

LSB is fixed.

Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the exter-

nal device to the PM5D’s MIDI IN connector.

Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the PM5D

to the MIDI IN connector of the external

device.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen shown below.

In the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen you can select the

port used to transmit/receive MIDI messages, and how

control changes will be transmitted and received. If

control change 1–119 is selected as the transmission/

reception method, you can assign the desired event to

each control number.

NO ASSIGN No event is assigned

SCENE Scene memory recall

EFFECT 1–8

Recall an effect library item into an internal

effect module 1–8

Event type Scene/library number

MIDI CTRL CHANGE

16 Remote control

116 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

In the CONTROL CHANGE SETUP area at the

left of the screen, you can select the way in

which control changes will be transmitted and

received, and switch reception and transmis-

sion on/off.

The MODE area of CONTROL CHANGE SETUP lets

you choose one of the following as the way in which

control changes will be transmitted and received.

You can use the buttons in the Tx (transmission) area

and Rx (reception) area to turn control change trans-

mission/reception on/off.

In the MIDI SETUP area at the upper left of the

screen, select the port used to transmit/

receive control changes, and the MIDI chan-

nel used for transmission and reception.

In MIDI SETUP, the MIDI PORT settings let you select

the port used for MIDI control change transmission/

reception; you have the following choices.

Click the / buttons at the left and right of the Tx

box (transmission) or Rx box (reception) to change the

setting, and press the [ENTER] key to finalize the set-

ting. If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, use the box at the

right to specify the port number (1–8) as well.

If TABLE [SINGLE] or NRPN are selected as the con-

trol change transmission/reception method, use MIDI

CH field to choose the MIDI channel used for trans-

mission and reception.

Hint

The MIDI port and MIDI channel used for control change

transmission/reception can also be specified from the MIDI

SETUP screen (

➥

p.171).

If TABLE [SINGLE] or TABLE [MULTI] are

selected as the control change transmission/

reception method, use the list in the right of

the screen to display the MIDI channel and

control number to which you want to assign

an event, and click that line.

In this list you can select the event (fader/encoder oper-

ation, key operation, etc.) that will be assigned to each

control number. The list contains the following

columns.

• CH (Channel)

Indicates the MIDI channel on which the control

change is transmitted/received.

Note

You can use this column to specify multiple MIDI channels

even if TABLE [SINGLE] is selected as the transmission/

reception method. However in actuality, only the MIDI trans-

mit/receive channel selected in the MIDI SETUP field will be

valid.

• CTRL No. (Control number)

Indicates the control number 1–119. You cannot make

settings for numbers 0, 32, or 96–101.

• CTRL CHANGE EVENT (Library name)

Indicates/selects the type of event assigned to the corre-

sponding channel / control number.

Use the scroll bar at the right to display the desired

channel and control number, and click that line; the

line you click will move to the center and will be

highlighted.

Click the button in the CTRL CHANGE

EVENT column of the currently selected line to

open the MIDI CTRL CHANGE window, and

specify the parameter that you want to assign.

In this window you can specify the parameter in three

levels (mode, parameters 1/2).

When you have finished making settings, click

the OK button in the MIDI CTRL CHANGE

window.

Assign events to other control numbers in the

same way.

When you operate the parameters you assigned on the

PM5D, control change messages will be transmitted to

external devices.

Similarly, if the corresponding control change mes-

sages are sent from an external device on the

appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to those

control numbers will change.

NRPN

If this button is on, PM5D parameters

will be transmitted/received as NRPN

messages.

TABLE [SINGLE]

If this button is on, PM5D parameters

will be transmitted/received as control

change messages on a single MIDI

channel according to the assignments

in the list at the right side of the screen.

TABLE [MULTI]

If this button is on, PM5D parameters

will be transmitted/received as control

change messages on multiple MIDI

channels according to the assignments

in the list at the right side of the screen.

MIDI The rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors

USB The rear panel USB connector

SLOT 1–4 An I/O card installed in rear panel slot 1–4

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 117

Remote control

Hint

• You can use the CLEAR button above the list to erase all

assignments to control numbers. The PRESET button will

return all control number assignments to their default state.

• The contents of the control change table are not saved in

the scene. If desired, you can save this data on a memory

card as a MIDI CTRL TABLE.

Using the MIDI Remote function

“MIDI Remote” allows you to assign MIDI messages to the controllers (faders, encoders, CH [ON] keys, ENCODER [ON]

keys) of the INPUT/ST IN channel strips so that these MIDI messages will be transmitted when you operate these controllers.

This capability can be used for remote control of external MIDI devices such as synthesizers, or to control the parameters of

DAW software or a HDR unit.

While the MIDI Remote function is active, INPUT chan-

nel strip 1–24 functions as MIDI remote channels 1–24,

and ST IN channel strip 1–4 functions as MIDI remote

channels 25–28.

To each controller you can assign a MIDI message consist-

ing of up to sixteen bytes of hexadecimal data. If desired,

you can specify that a value within the message varies

according to the movement of the controller.

Here’s how to specify the MIDI port used by the MIDI

Remote function, and assign a MIDI message to the

desired MIDI remote channel.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

MIDI SETUP screen shown below.

In the MIDI REMOTE area at the right of the

screen, select one of the following as the port

from which MIDI messages will be output for

each of the four MIDI Remote banks (BANK A–

D).

Click the / buttons at the left and right of each

box to change the setting, and press the [ENTER] key

(or click within the box) to finalize the setting. If you

select USB or SLOT 1–4, use the box at the right to

specify the port number (1–8) as well.

MIDI remote channels 1–24 MIDI remote channels 25–28

MIDI The rear panel MIDI OUT connector

USB The rear panel USB connector

SLOT 1–4 An I/O card installed in rear panel slot 1–4

Assigning MIDI messages to controllers

MIDI SETUP

16 Remote control

118 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

MIDI REMOTE screen shown below.

In the BANK SELECT area at the upper right of

the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the

bank you want to use.

The bank name is displayed above buttons A–D. You

can change the name by clicking the button at the

left of the bank name.

In the upper left of the screen, set the TRANS-

MIT ENABLE/DISABLE button to ENABLE.

Transmission will be enabled for the selected bank.

(You can enable/disable transmission for each of the

four banks.)

Use the channel select area at the left of the

screen to select the MIDI remote channel to

which you want to assign a MIDI message.

These buttons correspond to the following channel

strips.

When you click the / buttons at the left and right

of the box, the corresponding name is displayed in the

box at the right. You can change the name of the MIDI

remote channel by clicking the button of the box at

right.

Use the MIDI message boxes in the lower part

of the screen to specify a MIDI message for

each controller of the channel.

The lower part of the MIDI REMOTE screen contains

MIDI message boxes that let you assign a MIDI mes-

sage to the ENCODER [ON] key, encoder, CH [ON]

key, and fader.

You can assign a MIDI message to a controller in any

of the following three ways.

A Directly inputting hexadecimal values

In this method you directly input the message as hexa-

decimal values. To use this method, click the button

at the left edge of the desired MIDI message box to

open the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window.

In this window you can input a message by clicking the

desired input box to select it (the box will be high-

lighted) and turning the [DATA] encoder. You can use

the [INC]/[DEC] keys to move the selected position.

You can input the following values.

REMOTE CH 1–24 INPUT channel strip 1–24

REMOTE CH 25–28 ST IN channel strip 1–4

MIDI REMOTE

BANK SELECT area

Channel select area

TRANSMIT

ENABLE/DISABLE button

Value

Available

assign-

ments

Content

00(H)–

FF(H)

All

The MIDI message that is transmitted

(hexadecimal).

END All

Indicates the end of the MIDI mes-

sage. When you operate the corre-

sponding controller, the MIDI

message from the beginning until

immediately before END will be

transmitted.

SW All

Indicates the on/off status of the

encoder [ON] key or the channel

[ON] key. A value of 7F(H) is transmit-

ted when the key turns on, and a

value of 00(H) is transmitted when

the key turns off. If this is assigned to

an encoder or fader, the current value

of the key will be transmitted when

the encoder or fader is operated.

ENC

ENCODER

ON/

ENCODER

Indicates the current position of the

encoder. If assigned to an encoder, a

value of 00–7F(H) is transmitted

when the encoder is operated. If

assigned to an encoder [ON] key, the

current value of the encoder is trans-

mitted when the key is switched on.

FAD

CH ON/

FADER

Indicates the current position of the

fader. If the message is assigned to a

fader, this value is transmitted as a

value of 00–7F(H) when the fader is

operated. If assigned to a CH [ON]

key, the current value of the fader is

transmitted when the key is switched

on.

LEARN buttonLATCH button MIDI message box

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 119

Remote control

If you set a value to SW, ENC, or FAD, that value will

be linked to the state of the controller. For example if

you have made settings as shown in the following

screen, the last value will be linked with the fader posi-

tion, and will change in the range of 0–127.

When you click a box in which a hexadecimal value has

been input, the range of values that can be interpreted

as a valid MIDI message (including that box) will turn

red. The lower part of the screen shows the MIDI chan-

nel (MIDI CH), message type (TYPE), and data values

(DATA 1, DATA 2) for this MIDI message, letting you

verify that the appropriate MIDI message has been

input.

You can use the following buttons to input or edit the

message in this window.

When you have finished inputting data in the MIDI

REMOTE SETUP window, click the OK button. The

hexadecimal values will be input in the MIDI message

box of the MIDI REMOTE screen.

B Specifying the type of message

In this method you specify the desired MIDI channel,

type of message, and data value; these will be con-

verted into the appropriate hexadecimal values. Access

the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window in the same way

as for method

1, and click the first box into which

you want to input data.

Next, click the / buttons at the left and right of the

TYPE box to select the type of message.

Then use the MIDI CH, DATA 1, and DATA 2 boxes

to specify the MIDI channel and various values. The

values that can be selected in the MIDI CH, DATA 1,

and DATA 2 boxes will depend on the type of message

you selected first.

If you set the DATA 1 or DATA 2 value to SWITCH,

ENCODER (available only for encoders), or FADER

(available only for faders), that value will be linked with

the state of the controller.

buttons Move the highlighted area to left or right.

INS button

Inserts a space (blank) at the highlighted

position. Pressing the <Insert> key of a

PS/2 keyboard will produce the same

result.

DEL button

Deletes the character at the highlighted

position. Pressing the <Delete> key of a

PS/2 keyboard will produce the same

result.

CLEAR button

Erases the entire message that was input

in the MIDI message input boxes.

PASTE button

Pastes the message that was copied to

buffer memory by the COPY button.

COPY button

Copies the message from the MIDI mes-

sage input box to temporary buffer mem-

ory. Use this in conjunction with the PASTE

button to copy a message from one con-

troller to another bank or controller.

TYPE MIDI CH DATA 1 DATA 2

NOTE OFF

1–16

Note number

(0–127)

Note-off velocity

(0–127)

NOTE ON

Note-on velocity

(0–127)

KEY PRES-

SURE

Pressure value

(0–127)

CONTROL

CHANGE

Control num-

ber (0–127)

Controller value

(0–127)

PROGRAM

CHANGE

Program

number

—

CHANNEL

PRESSURE

Pressure

value (0–127)

PITCH BEND

Pitch bend

MSB (0–127)

Pitch bend LSB

(0–127)

EXCLUSIVE

MESSAGE

—

Hexadecimal values that were input

Type of message

16 Remote control

120 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

When you have specified all of the values, click the

“” button in the screen; the hexadecimal val-

ues for that message will be input in the input box of

the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window. As necessary, you

can edit the message by clicking an input box and turn-

ing the [DATA] encoder.

C Using the LEARN button

The LEARN button lets you assign a MIDI message to

a controller by receiving that message from an external

device. To use the Learn function, go to the MIDI

REMOTE screen and click the LEARN button in for

the controller to which you want to assign a message.

Note

• Only one LEARN button can be turned on simultaneously.

• The LEARN button is valid only for the MIDI remote channel

that is currently selected. Also, you cannot change the MIDI

remote channel while this button is on.

• The LEARN button is turned off automatically when you

switch to a different screen.

If a MIDI message is received at a MIDI port available

for the current bank while the LEARN button is on, the

received message will be input to the MIDI input box.

The following screen shows an example of when the

modulation wheel (control change #1) of a synthesizer

is operated.

Hint

• MIDI messages assigned using the LEARN button can be a

maximum of 16 bytes long (the 17th and subsequent bytes

are discarded). If the message is less than 16 bytes long,

END will be placed immediately after the last data value.

• If a control change is received, the third byte will automati-

cally be replaced by FAD (if the assignment destination is a

fader), ENC (if the assignment destination is an encoder), or

SW (if the assignment destination is an encoder [ON] or CH

[ON] key).

• If multiple messages are received while the LEARN button is

on, the last-received message will be used. If the status byte

is omitted from the last message, the appropriate status byte

will be supplied.

Assign messages to other MIDI remote chan-

nels or other banks in the same way.

If a specific byte is set to “SW” for the ENCODER

[ON] key or CH [ON] key, use the LATCH button to

select one of the following behaviors.

• If the LATCH button is on

The on/off status will change each time you press the

key (Latched). If you press the key from the Off state, a

MIDI message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be

transmitted, and when you press the same key once

again a MIDI message with 00(H) as the SW value will

be transmitted.

• If the LATCH button is off

The switch will be on only while you are holding it

down, and will turn off when you release it

(Unlatched). The moment you press the key, a MIDI

message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be transmit-

ted; the moment you release the key, a MIDI message

with a SW value of 00(H) will be transmitted.

If a specific byte is set to “ENC” (or “FAD”) for the

ENCODER [ON] key or CH [ON] key, use the

LATCH button to select one of the following

behaviors.

• If the LATCH button is on

If you press the key from the Off state, a MIDI message

with the current value of the encoder (or fader) as the

ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted, and when you

press the same key once again a MIDI message with

00(H) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted.

• If the LATCH button is off

The moment you press the key, a MIDI message with

the current value of the encoder (or fader) as the ENC

(or FAD) value will be transmitted, and the moment

you release the key a MIDI message with 00(H) as the

ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted.

Note

If SW/ENC/FAD are not specified as the last byte of the MIDI

message, the same MIDI message will be transmitted when

the key is turned on or off. (The same message will be trans-

mitted when the key is turned off.)

Hexadecimal values that were input

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 121

Remote control

Here’s how to recall banks A–D to which you assigned

MIDI messages, and operate MIDI remote channels.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

following MIDI REMOTE screen.

In the BANK SELECT area at the upper right of

the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the

bank you want to use.

In the upper middle of the screen, use the

ASSIGN TO CH STRIP SECTION buttons to

select the MIDI remote channel you want to

control. (Multiple simultaneous selections are

allowed.)

This setting applies to all four banks.

Turning on a button will enable the MIDI Remote

function; the corresponding channel strip will func-

tion as MIDI remote channels. (The usual function of

the controllers will be disabled.)

At this time, the lower part of the display will indicate

“REMOTE” in the encoder/fader mode area. The

INPUT CH layer and ST IN/FX RTN layer indications

will change to the corresponding MIDI remote

channel.

Operate the appropriate channel strip.

MIDI messages will be transmitted from the corre-

sponding MIDI port.

To disable the MIDI Remote function, turn off

the ASSIGN TO CH STRIP SECTION buttons.

Note

• When the MIDI Remote function is enabled, the controllers

will return to their normal state if you switch to another

screen. However when you come back to the MIDI

REMOTE screen, the remote function of the controllers will

be enabled.

• The controller values during MIDI Remote operation are

included in the scene data. This means that when you recall

a scene, the controller values will change and MIDI mes-

sages will be transmitted. Recall Safe settings can also be

applied to the MIDI Remote function

INPUT CH INPUT channel strip 1–24

STIN/FXRTN ST IN/FX RTN channel strip 1–4

Using MIDI remote channels

MIDI REMOTE BANK SELECT area

ST IN/FX RTN

layer

INPUT CH

layer

Encoder/fader

mode area

16 Remote control

122 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Transmitting MIDI events when you switch scenes

You can register a desired MIDI message for each scene in scene memory so that this message will be transmitted from the

MIDI OUT connector when you recall the scene. For example you can use this to switch programs on an external MIDI-com-

patible effect processor when the scene changes.

Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the PM5D

to the MIDI IN connector of the external

device.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[SCENE] key several times to access the SCENE

screen shown below.

Scroll the scene list upward or downward to

select the scene number for which you want to

assign a MIDI event.

Scroll the scene list toward the right to dis-

play the MIDI EVENT column.

In the MIDI EVENT column you will input the MIDI

message that will be transmitted when you recall that

scene.

Click the button at the left edge of the MIDI

EVENT column to open the MIDI EVENT SETUP

window.

Use the MIDI EVENT SETUP window to specify

the MIDI message that will be linked with that

scene.

The procedure for specifying a MIDI message in the

MIDI EVENT SETUP window is the same as in the

MIDI REMOTE screen MIDI REMOTE SETUP win-

dow, with the exceptions that you cannot select FAD,

ENC, or SW for the DATA 1/DATA 2 boxes, and that

there is no LEARN button. (For details, refer to ➥

p.118) When you have finished making settings, click

the OK button in the MIDI EVENT SETUP window.

Click the Tx ON/OFF

column located at the

right of the MIDI EVENT

column to turn it on.

The MIDI event linked to

the corresponding scene is

now enabled.

In the same way, specify MIDI events for other

scene numbers.

Recall a scene to which a MIDI event is linked.

The MIDI message will be transmitted from the speci-

fied MIDI port.

SCENE

MIDI EVENT column

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 123

Remote control

Using GPI (General Purpose Interface)

The GPI connector on the rear panel can be used as a GPI (General Purpose Interface) input/output connector. This connec-

tor provides four GPI IN ports and twelve GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch or joystick to control

the PM5D’s parameters, or conversely use the PM5D’s keys and faders to send control signals to an external device.

The following diagram is an example of an external circuit

that can operate GPI via the GPI connector. (For specifica-

tions of the GPI connector pins, refer to the Appendices

p.348 and p.355 at the end of the manual.)

This circuit uses four switches (GPI 1–GPI 4) to switch the

GPI IN ports between active and inactive. If the polarity of

a GPI OUT port is set to Low Active, and you operate the

PM5D to make the GPI OUT port Active, the correspond-

ing LED in the above circuit (GPO 1–GPO 12) will light.

(If the polarity of the GPI OUT port is High Active, the

LED will go dark.)

You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to con-

trol PM5D parameters from an external device. For

example you can use an external switch to turn the

PM5D’s talkback on/off or to operate its Tap Tempo func-

tion, or you can use a joystick to control surround

panning.

Connect an external device to the PM5D’s GPI

connector.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

GPI screen shown below.

In this screen, the upper list is used to make GPI IN

settings and the lower list is used to make GPI OUT

settings.

In the POLARITY column of the GPI IN list,

select the polarity of each GPI IN port.

You can select one of the following as the polarity for a

GPI IN port.

• (Low active)

When controlling an on/off switch-type parameter, the

port will become active when the switch is grounded.

When controlling a continuously-variable parameter,

that parameter will be at its maximum value when the

voltage is at low level (by default, 0V), and at its mini-

mum value when the voltage is at high level (by default,

approximately 5V).

• (High active)

When controlling an on/off switch-type parameter, the

port will be active when the switch is opened or when a

high-level voltage is input.

9 1 21 14 9 2 21 15

GPO 1 GPO 2 GPO 3 GPO 4

9 3 21 16 9 4 21 17

GPO 5 GPO 6 GPO 7 GPO 8

21 24 9 12 21 25 9 13

GPO 9 GPO 10 GPO 11 GPO 12

GPI 1 GPI 2

GPI 3 GPI 4

22 18 10 6 23 19 11 7

Using GPI IN

GPIGPI IN list

GPI OUT list

16 Remote control

124 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

When controlling a continuously-variable parameter,

that parameter will be at its minimum value when the

voltage is at low level, and at its maximum value when

the voltage is at high level.

While the GPI screen is displayed, the GPI IN status

column of the GPI IN area will show a yellow bar

graph to indicate the approximate value of the voltage

being input to each port. (If the bar is not shown, the

voltage is grounded; if the bar is displayed all the way

to the right edge, the voltage is at high level.)

Hint

The voltage value at which the PM5D detects High or Low

level can be adjusted to suit the external controller (except for

external switches) you are using (

➥

p.125).

At the left edge of the FUNCTION column,

click the button to open the GPI IN PORT

ASSIGN window.

In the GPI IN PORT ASSIGN window you can select

the PM5D function that will be controlled by each GPI

IN port.

Use the FUNCTION column to select the type of func-

tion, and use the PARAMETER column to select the

optional parameters. You can select the following func-

tions and parameters.

After you have specified the function and parameter,

click the OK button.

Note

• If latched operation is selected, the port will change between

active/inactive each time a trigger is input from an external

switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-lock-

ing type of external switch.

• If unlatched operation is selected, the port will be active only

while the signal from the external switch stays at high level

or low level. In this case, we recommend that you use either

a non-locking or a locking type of external switch as appro-

priate for your situation.

FUNCTION PARAMETER PM5D operation

ASSIGN

— No assignment

MONITOR

DIMMER ON

Switches the Dimmer func-

tion on/off

SOURCE =

[monitor

source name]

Switches the monitor source

MONO ON

Switches the Monitor section

[MONO] key on

PARAMETER

column

FUNCTION columnGPI IN

status

POLARITY column

TALK-

BACK ON

LATCH

Switches the Talkback func-

tion on/off (latched operation)

UNLATCH

Switches the Talkback func-

tion on/off (unlatched opera-

tion)

CH ON-

LATCH

[channel

name]

Switches the channel on/off

(latched operation)

CH ON-

UNLATCH

[channel

name]

Switches the channel on/off

(unlatched operation)

FADER

LEVEL

[channel

name]

Modiﬁes the fader value

(LEVEL parameter) accord-

ing to the voltage

SUR-

ROUND

PA N

FRONT-REAR

PAN [SEL]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (front/rear) of the

selected channel according

to the voltage

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN [SEL]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (left/right) of the selected

channel according to the volt-

age

FRONT-REAR

PAN [ODD]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (front/rear) of the

selected odd-numbered

channel according to the volt-

age

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN [ODD]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (left/right) of the selected

odd-numbered channel

according to the voltage

FRONT-REAR

PAN [EVEN]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (front/rear) of the

selected even-numbered

channel according to the volt-

age

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN [EVEN]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (left/right) of the selected

even-numbered channel

according to the voltage

USER

DEFINED

KEY

FUNCTION

[User Deﬁned

key bank / key

number]

While the external input is

active, executes the same

operation as when the

selected User Deﬁned key is

pressed

USER

DEFINED

KEY LED

[User Deﬁned

key bank / key

number]

While the external input is

active, lights the LED of the

selected User Deﬁned key

PEAK

HOLD ON

—

Switches the Peak Hold func-

tion on/off

OSCILLA-

TOR ON

Switches the Oscillator on/off

SOLO ON

Switches the Solo function

on/off

FUNCTION PARAMETER PM5D operation

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 125

Remote control

Specify the function and parameter for other

GPI IN ports in the same way.

With these settings when you operate an external

device to make the GPI IN port active, the correspond-

ing PM5D function will be executed. (If a

continuously-variable parameter is assigned, the

parameter value will vary according to the change in

voltage.)

Hint

The settings in the GPI screen apply to all scenes. These set-

tings can also be saved on a memory card as SETUP data.

If necessary, the voltage values at which the PM5D detects

Low and High levels can be adjusted appropriately for the

voltage of the signals being input from the GPI IN port.

You can use this to set the variable range of a PM5D

parameter to match the range of voltage change produced

by a continuously-variable controller (such as a joystick).

Connect an external device to the PM5D’s GPI

connector.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

GPI screen.

In the GPI IN MONITOR area at the upper

right of the screen, select the GPI IN port that

you want to calibrate.

If you are calibrating a two-dimensional controller

such as a joystick, click the / buttons at the left

and right of the X-AXIS and Y-AXIS fields to specify

the two GPI IN ports.

If you are calibrating only one GPI IN port, set one of

them to “----” (no assignment).

When you specify a GPI IN port, the voltage from that

GPI IN port is indicated by a yellow symbol in the

GPI IN monitor area. In this case, the horizontal posi-

tion (X-axis) corresponds to the voltage of the GPI IN

port selected in the X-AXIS field, and the vertical posi-

tion (Y-axis) corresponds to the voltage of the GPI IN

port selected in the Y-AXIS field.

The red line (or red square) displayed in the GPI IN

monitor area indicates the range between High level

and Low level for the GPI IN ports corresponding to

the Y-axis and X-axis.

Hint

If necessary, you can click the REVERSE button to invert the

Low level and High level of the input signal. (The result is the

same as switching the POLARITY setting of the GPI IN port.)

Turn on the CALIBRATION button.

The red line (or red square) in the GPI IN monitor

area will temporarily disappear, and only the yellow

symbol will remain.

If you are calibrating only one GPI IN port,

vary the voltage of the signal being input to

the GPI IN port specified in step 3 from the

maximum value to the minimum value.

The yellow symbol will move up/down or left/right

as the voltage changes. The red line will extend accord-

ing to this change, and the maximum and minimum

voltage values for the corresponding GPI IN port will

be stored.

If you are calibrating a joystick, move the joy-

stick through a 360-degree path.

The yellow symbol will rotate. The red square will

broaden accordingly, and the maximum and mini-

mum voltage values of the GPI IN ports corresponding

to the X-axis and Y-axis will be stored.

Turn off the CALIBRATION button.

The maximum and minimum voltage values detected

will be remembered as the reference values for the

High and Low levels. (When controlling a continu-

ously variable parameter, the maximum value and

minimum value of that parameter will be aligned with

these reference values.)

Hint

The results of calibration apply to all scenes. They are also

preserved even when the PM5D is powered-off.

Calibrating the GPI IN ports

16 Remote control

126 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here’s how you can use the GPI OUT ports of the GPI

connector to control an external device from the PM5D’s

faders or keys.

To the PM5D’s GPI connector, connect the

external device that you want to control from

the PM5D.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

GPI screen.

In the POLARITY column of the GPI OUT area,

select the polarity of the signal that is output

from each GPI OUT port.

The POLARITY column of the GPI OUT area selects

one of the following two settings as the polarity of the

signal that is output when the GPI OUT port becomes

active.

• (Low active)

Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active.

• (High active)

Open when the GPI OUT port is active.

In the GPI OUT area, use the FADER START,

USER DEFINED KEYS, and TALLY columns to

select the PM5D function for GPI OUT ports 1

through 12.

When an operation selected here is executed on the

PM5D, the corresponding GPI OUT port will become

active, and a control signal will be output.

For each GPI OUT port you can select the following

three functions (multiple selections are allowed).

❏ FADER START

A fader operation on the PM5D will be the trigger for out-

putting a signal from the GPI OUT port.

To edit the setting, click the button at the left to open

the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select the fader

mode (trigger detection method) and channel. You can

select the following fader modes.

• FADER START

A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be

output when the fader of the selected channel moves

from –60 dB or below to above –60 dB.

• FADER STOP

A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be

output when the fader of the selected channel reaches

–∞ dB.

• FADER TALLY

A control signal will be output when the fader of the

selected channel moves from –60 dB or below to above

–60 dB. This control signal will be held until the fader

reaches –∞ dB (or until that GPI OUT port receives a

different trigger).

The following illustration shows how the output signal

from the GPI OUT port changes when you operate a

fader in each of the fader modes. (This illustration

shows operation when is selected as the POLAR-

ITY of the GPI OUT port. If POLARITY is , the

polarity of the output signal will be the opposite.)

Note

When the voltage is at High level, the output signal of the port

will be open. If the receiving device requires High level, it can

be taken from the +5 power supply pin. However in this case

there is a limitation on the current flow; for details, refer to the

Appendices at the end of this manual.

Using GPI OUT

TALLY columnFADER START column

GPI OUT

status

POLARITY column

TEST button

USER DEFINED KEYS

column

FADER

START

FADER

STOP

FADER

TALLY

➪

➠

➪➪➪➪

250 msec

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 127

Remote control

❏ USER DEFINED KEYS

Operation of a User Defined key on the PM5D will be the

trigger for outputting a signal from the GPI OUT port.

To edit the setting, click the button at the left to open

the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window; from the list, select

the User Defined key bank (A–D) and number (1–25), and

choose the trigger mode (how the trigger will operate when

the key is pressed). You can choose one of the following

trigger modes.

• LATCH

Alternate between active and inactive each time the key

is pressed.

• UNLATCH

Active only while the key remains pressed.

The following illustration shows how the output signal

from the GPI OUT port changes when you operate a

User Defined key in each of the trigger modes. (This

illustration shows operation when is selected as the

POLARITY of the GPI OUT port. If POLARITY is ,

the polarity of the output signal will be the opposite.)

❏ TALLY (other)

Other operations on the PM5D will be the trigger for out-

putting a signal from the GPI OUT port. When the

corresponding operation is executed on the PM5D, a con-

trol signal will be output. This control signal will be held

until you defeat the above operation (or until that GPI

OUT port receives a different trigger).

To edit the settings, click the button at the left to open

the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select one of

the following functions.

Make settings for other GPI OUT ports in the

same way.

With these settings, executing an operation assigned to

the GPI OUT port will output a control signal accord-

ing to the POLARITY setting.

You can use the TEST buttons in the GPI OUT area to

check the operation of the GPI OUT ports. When a

TEST button is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port

will become active, and a control signal will be output.

The GPI OUT status column indicates the status of the

output signal of the corresponding port. The charac-

ters L/H indicate the Low or High level of the signal.

The background color is yellow when active, and gray

when inactive.

LATCH

UNLATCH

Function PM5D operation

NO ASSIGN No assignment

POWER ON The PM5D’s power is turned on

SOLO ON [SOLO] key is turned on

GPI IN 1

FUNCTION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 1

becomes active

GPI IN 2

FUNCTION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 2

becomes active

GPI IN 3

FUNCTION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 3

becomes active

GPI IN 4

FUNCTION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 4

becomes active

PREVIEW ON

SCENE MEMORY section [PREVIEW] key is

turned on

CUE ON

[INPUT ONLY]

Input channel [CUE] key is turned on

CUE ON

[DCA ONLY]

DCA [CUE] key is turned on

CUE ON

[OUTPUT

ONLY]

Output channel [CUE] key is turned on

CUE ON Any [CUE] key is turned on

17 Using memory cards

128 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

This chapter explains how to save/load PM5D internal data using a memory card.

Using memory cards with the PM5D

You can insert a commercially available memory card into

the memory card slot located on the front panel of the

PM5D, and use it to save or load various types of data.

You can use PCMCIA Type II PC flash ATA cards, or

CompactFlash media inserted in a PC card adaptor. (In

either case, media with a power supply voltage of 3.3V or

5V is supported.) Normally, these cards are sold in an

already-formatted state. This means that you won’t need to

format them before using them with the PM5D. If you do

need to format a card, use a computer or other external

device to format the card in FAT16 format.

Note

Operation is not guaranteed for any type of media other than

described above.

Saving ﬁles to a memory card

Here’s how to save individual items of data (or all data) from the PM5D onto a memory card.

Insert the memory card into the memory card

slot located on the front panel of the PM5D.

You may insert or remove cards while the PM5D is

powered-on.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [UTILITY] key to access the SAVE

screen.

In the left side of the SAVE screen you can select the

save mode and the item(s) that will be saved. The file

list in the right side of the screen contains four col-

umns; FILE NAME, TYPE, DATE/SIZE, and

COMMENT. This list shows the files and directories

on the memory card. (To see the COMMENT col-

umn, scroll the list toward the right.)

In the MODE area, click the BASIC button to

select BASIC as the save mode.

If BASIC mode is selected, you can choose the desired

item (or all items) and save them to a memory card.

Hint

The other save modes provided are ADVANCED mode which

lets you save scene memories or libraries under different

numbers, and CSV EXPORT mode which lets you save the

names of scene memories or libraries as a CSV format file.

For details, refer to the Reference section (

➥

p.193).

Use the buttons below the MODE area to

select the item you want to save.

The item whose button is turned on is selected for sav-

ing. (You can turn on only one button.) By clicking the

ALL DATA button you can select all items at once.

These buttons correspond to the following items.

17 Using memory cards

PHONES

KEYBOARD

MOUSE

MEMORY CARD

SAVE

SAVE button

MODE area

File list

Button Content

ALL DATA

All items, and the contents of the cur-

rent scene

SCENE MEMORY Contents of scene memory

LINKED LIBRARY

Libraries linked to the scene (available

only if the SCENE MEMORY button is

on)

HA Contents of the HA library

INPUT PATCH Contents of the input patch library

OUTPUT PATCH Contents of the output patch library

INPUT CH Contents of the input channel library

OUTPUT CH Contents of the output channel library

INPUT EQ Contents of the input EQ library

OUTPUT EQ Contents of the output EQ library

GATE Contents of the gate library

COMP Contents of the compressor library

EFFECT Contents of the effect library

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 129

Using memory cards

If you select the SCENE MEMORY, HA, INPUT

PATCH, or OUTPUT PATCH items, you can specify

the starting number and ending number so that only

the desired range of scenes or library items will be

saved. The LINKED LIBRARY button is available only

if the SCENE MEMORY button is on.

Hint

The TOTAL SIZE field at the bottom of the MODE area indi-

cates the file size for the selected item(s). The available

capacity of the inserted memory card is shown below the file

list.

If you selected scenes or libraries for saving,

use the boxes at the right of the button to

specify the starting number and ending

number.

As necessary, use the file list to select the

directory (folder) in which you will save the

data.

If the file list contains a directory below the current

level, the TYPE column will indicate “[DIR].”

To move to a lower directory, click the directory line to

select it (that line will move to the center of the list),

and click the directory name shown in the FILE NAME

column.

If the file list contains a directory above the current

level, it will be shown as “. .” in the FILE NAME col-

umn and “[DIR]” in the TYPE column.

To move to a higher directory, click the directory line

to select it (that line will move to the center of the list),

and click the “. .” shown in the FILE NAME column.

Hint

• The directory currently selected as the save destination is

also shown in the FILE PATH field above the list

• If you want to create a new directory in the current location,

click the MAKE DIR button below the file list.

Note

• The file list can display only up to one hundred items.

• Saving is not possible if the FILE PATH field exceeds 60

characters (including the filename extension).

After specifying the item to be saved and the

save-destination directory, click the SAVE

button.

The FILE NAME EDIT window will appear, allowing

you to assign a name to the data that will be saved.

Use the character palette to input a filename,

and click the OK button.

A window will ask you to confirm the Save operation.

Note

• When assigning a name to a file on a memory card, lower-

case alphabetical characters and some symbols in the

character palette cannot be used.

• If you paste text copied from another character palette when

inputting the file name, all lowercase alphabetical charac-

ters will be converted to uppercase.

GEQ Contents of the GEQ library

SETUP Various settings not saved in a scene

USER DEFINED

KEY

User Deﬁned key settings

DCA FADER

MODE

DCA fader mode settings

MIDI REMOTE MIDI remote settings

MIDI PGM TABLE

Contents of the list in the MIDI PGM

CHANGE screen

MIDI CTRL TABLE

Contents of the list in the MIDI CTRL

CHANGE screen

EVENT LIST

Contents of the list in the EVENT LIST

screen

Button Content

Starting number Ending number

Scene/library name

A directory below the current level

A directory above the current level

17 Using memory cards

130 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

To execute the Save operation, click the OK

button.

A window will appear, indicating the progress of the

Save operation. When saving is completed, the previ-

ous screen will reappear. If you click the CANCEL

button instead of the OK button, the Save operation

will be aborted and you will return to the previous

screen.

Do not insert or remove the memory card while it is being

accessed. A BUSY indicator at the upper right of the display

will light while the card is being accessed.

Loading ﬁles from a memory card

Here’s how to load data from a memory card into the PM5D.

Insert the memory card containing the data

you want to load into the memory card slot

located on the front panel of the PM5D.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [UTILITY] key to access the LOAD

screen.

As necessary, use the file list to specify the

load-source directory.

Navigation between directories is the same as in the file

list of the SAVE screen (➥ p.129). The currently

selected directory is also shown in the FILE PATH field

above the list

In the file list, click the line showing the file

you want to load.

That file will move to the center of the list, and will be

highlighted.

The file list shows the following information.

• FILE NAME column

This column shows the names of the files saved on the

memory card. If a directory is selected, the directory

name is shown.

• TYPE column

This column shows the content that was saved. The

indication in the TYPE column will be one of the

following.

Hint

For scene memory data, the type can be either “SCENE” in

which only scene memory data is saved, and “SCENE+LIB” in

which linked libraries are included.

• DATE/SIZE column

This shows the date on which the file was last saved,

and its size. If a directory is selected, only the date is

shown.

• COMMENT column

This shows the comment assigned when the file was

saved. To input a comment, scroll the file list horizon-

tally and click the COMMENT column for the

currently selected file.

Hint

By clicking the headings at the top of the list, you can sort the

list in ascending or descending order of that item. The text of

the currently selected button will turn red, and an arrow indi-

cating ascending (

↑

) or descending (

↓

) order will appear.

In the MODE area, click the BASIC button to

select BASIC as the loading mode.

Similarly to the Save mode in the SAVE screen, you can

choose either BASIC, ADVANCED, or CSV IMPORT

as the Load mode. If BASIC mode is selected, the item

buttons appropriate for the currently selected file will

turn on.

Hint

• If ADVANCED mode is selected, you can specify the range

of scenes or library numbers that will be loaded from a

scene memory and/or library file saved in BASIC mode or

ADVANCED mode.

• If CSV IMPORT is selected, you can load CSV files that

were saved in CSV EXPORT mode. For details on each

mode, refer to the Reference section (

➥

p.193).

LOAD

LOAD button

MODE area

File list

FILE NAME

column

DATE/SIZE columnTYPE column

ALL A ﬁle in which all items were saved

[DIR] A directory

UNKNOWN A ﬁle that cannot be loaded by the PM5D

Other A ﬁle in which a speciﬁc item was saved

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 131

Using memory cards

Note

• If you select a directory in the file list, the Load mode will

automatically switch to CSV IMPORT, and the screen will

indicate whether that directory contains any CSV files. If you

subsequently select any file readable by the PM5D other

than a CSV file, the mode will automatically switch to

BASIC.

• If the type of file to be loaded is ALL DATA, the entire con-

tents of the PM5D’s scene memories and libraries will be

rewritten. Before loading, make sure you are not acciden-

tally overwriting important scenes or library data.

When loading scenes or libraries, you can click

the / buttons at the left and right of the

boxes beside each button to select the scene

or library numbers that will be loaded.

Click the LOAD button.

A window will ask you to confirm the Load operation.

To execute the Load operation, click the OK

button.

A window will appear, indicating the progress of the

Load operation. When loading is completed, the previ-

ous screen will reappear.

If you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK but-

ton, the Load operation will be aborted and you will

return to the previous screen.

Do not insert or remove the memory card while it is being

accessed. A BUSY indicator at the upper right of the display

will light while the card is being accessed.

18 Surround pan

132 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

This chapter explains how to use the surround pan functionality.

About surround pan

“Surround pan” is functionality that, when used with a multi-channel playback system, lets you place the signal of an input

channel in two-dimensional space or move the sound image between front/back and left/right. (To move the surround pan

image, you can use the mouse, the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys, or the MIX encoders etc.)

The PM5D lets you choose from the following three surround modes, depending on the number of channels in your sur-

round environment.

• 3-1ch

This mode uses four channels; left and right front,

front center, and rear (surround).

• 5.1ch

This mode uses six channels; left and right front, left

and right rear, front center, and subwoofer.

• 6.1ch

This mode uses seven channels; 5.1ch with the addi-

tion of rear center.

Hint

The surround mode can be selected in the MIXER SETUP

screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function) or SURR SETUP screen

(MATRIX/ST function).

18 Surround pan

Front L Center Front R

Rear (surround)

Subwoofer

Rear L Rear R

Front L Center Front R

Subwoofer

Rear L Rear R

Front L Center Front R

Rear center

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 133

Surround pan

Bus conﬁguration and operation in surround mode

When any of the three surround modes (3-1ch, 5.1ch, 6.1ch) are selected, the PM5D’s bus configuration and operation will

change as follows.

While a surround mode is selected, MIX buses 1–8 or MIX

buses 9–16 can be used as surround buses. (The choice of

whether to use MIX buses 1–8 or MIX buses 9–16 is made

in the MATRIX/ST function SURR SETUP screen.)

When you switch the surround mode, the following sur-

round channels will be assigned by default to each of the

MIX buses. (You are free to change these assignments

subsequently.)

Note

MIX buses shaded in gray in this table can be used as con-

ventional MIX buses. However in 6.1ch mode, the MIX 8/16

bus will operate only as FIXED type.

For example when the surround mode is 6.1ch and you

have chosen MIX 1–8 to use as the surround buses, the

surround pan signal flow will be as follows.

When a surround mode is selected, the MIX encoders allo-

cated to surround buses will operate differently than

normal. For example if MIX buses 1–8 are being used as

surround buses, you can use MIX encoders 1–8 of the MIX

section to edit the following parameters.

❏ If the MIX section [MIX SEND] key is on

A L ↔ R

Moves the surround pan of the selected channel

between left and right.

B F ↔ R

Moves the surround pan of the selected channel

between front and rear.

C Front divergence (5.1ch and 6.1ch modes

only)

Adjusts the front divergence (the proportion at which a

signal panned to the center will be sent to the front

center bus and to the front LR buses) of the selected

channel. Front divergence (the DIV F parameter) can

be adjusted if 6.1ch mode is being used.

D Rear divergence (6.1ch mode only)

Adjusts the rear divergence (the proportion at which a

signal panned to the rear will be sent to the rear center

bus and to the rear LR buses) of the selected channel.

E LFE (5.1ch and 6.1ch modes only)

Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the

selected channel to the LFE (Low Frequency Effects)

bus.

Hint

• For details on each of the surround pan parameters, refer to

SURR PARAM screen (

➥

p.283) in the Reference section.

• If MIX buses 9–16 are being used as surround buses, you

can use MIX encoders 9–16 to perform the above

operations.

Surround

mode

MIX bus

3-1ch 5.1ch 6.1ch

MIX bus 1/9

(Front L)

MIX bus 2/10

(Front R)

MIX bus 3/11

(Center)

(Rear L)

MIX bus 4/12

(Surround)

(Rear R)

MIX bus 5/13

(Center)

MIX bus 6/14

LFE

(Subwoofer)

(Rear center)

MIX bus 7/15

LFE

(Subwoofer)

MIX bus 8/16

About the surround buses

Input channel 1

Input channel 2

How the MIX section will operate

1 2 3 4 5

18 Surround pan

134 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

❏ If the MIX section [MIX MASTER] key is on

A Output level

The encoders adjust the output level of each surround

channel.

Basic settings for surround buses

Here’s how to choose either 3-1ch, 5.1ch, or 6.1ch as the surround mode, and make settings for the MIX buses you will use as

surround buses.

According to the surround mode you intend to

use, connect an appropriate playback system

to MIX OUT jacks 1–8 or MIX OUT jacks 9–16.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [MATRIX/ST] key to access the SURR

SETUP screen.

In order to use a surround mode, you will first choose

a surround mode, and then specify the MIX buses that

will be the surround output destinations.

Click a button in the SURROUND MODE area

to select the desired surround mode.

When you click a button a window will appear, asking

you to confirm that you want to switch the surround

mode.

Click the OK button to enable the surround mode you

selected. For example if you switch to 6.1ch mode, the

screen display will change as follows.

In the SURROUND BUS ALLOCATION area,

press the MIX 1-8 button or the MIX 9-16 but-

ton to select the MIX buses you want to use as

surround buses.

You can select either MIX buses 1–8 or MIX buses 9–

16. When you click a button a window will appear, ask-

ing you to confirm that you want to change the MIX

bus allocation.

When you click the OK button, the selected MIX buses

will be allocated as surround buses, and will be

assigned to surround channels according to the cur-

rent surround mode.

If you want to change the surround channel

assignments, click the / buttons at the left

and right of each field in the bus assign area,

and press the [ENTER] key (or click within the

box) to confirm the setting.

When the setting is confirmed, the previously-selected

bus and the newly-assigned bus will be exchanged.

Hint

You can initialize the surround channel assignments by click-

ing the INIT button located at the right of the bus assign area.

SURR SETUP

SURROUND MODE area

SURROUND BUS

ALLOCATION area

Bus assign area

SURR SETUP

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 135

Surround pan

Use the knobs and buttons in the lower part of

the screen to adjust the volume, delay, on/off

status, and cue for each surround channel.

For details on these knobs and buttons, refer to SURR

PARAM screen (➥ p.283) in the Reference section.

In the MIX section, make the [MIX MASTER]

key light, and turn on the MIX [ON] keys of all

MIX buses that will be used as surround buses.

The signal of each surround bus is now sent from the

corresponding MIX OUT jack.

Controlling surround pan

Here’s how to control surround pan for two adjacent input channels (or ST IN/FX RTN channels L and R).

Note

• Before you continue with the following procedure, you must

select the desired surround mode and connect MIX OUT

jacks 1–8 or MIX OUT jacks 9–16 to an appropriate play-

back system, as described in “Basic settings for surround

buses” (

➥

p.134).

• If you use 5.1ch or 6.1ch surround mode, connect the LFE

(Low Frequency Effects) channel signal to a dedicated sub-

woofer for the low frequencies. However, simply switching

the surround mode does not change the EQ (filter) settings.

As necessary, use the EQ (LPF) of the MIX channel

assigned to the LFE channel to cut the high-frequency por-

tion of the signal according to the frequency response of the

subwoofer you are using.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [PAN/ROUTING] key to access the

SURR PARAM screen (PAN/ROUTING

function).

The SURR PARAM screen always shows surround pan

settings for two channels.

Use the channel selection area to select the

input channels whose surround pan settings

you want to edit.

Two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered chan-

nels (or ST IN/FX RTN channels L and R) will be

displayed.

Use the SURROUND BUS ON/OFF buttons

located around the surround pan grid to select

the surround buses to which the input chan-

nel will be sent.

The SURROUND BUS ON/OFF buttons are on/off

switches for the signal sent from the input channel to

each surround bus.

Hint

You can do the same thing by pressing a [SEL] key to select

an input channel, making the MIX section [MIX SEND] key

light, and then turning on the MIX [ON] key for the desired sur-

round buses.

Use any of the following methods to adjust the

surround pan of the selected channel.

• Using the mouse or track pad

Move the pointer into the surround pan grid of the

channel you want to control, and drag the yellow O

symbol forward/backward/left/right. (The symbol will

turn red while you are dragging it.) Alternatively, you

can click a desired location within the surround pan

grid to move the surround pan to that location.

• Using the pan buttons around the surround pan

area

If you want to quickly move the channel signal to the

location of a speaker, click one of the pan buttons (e.g.,

L, R, C) shown around the edge of the surround pan

grid.

• Using the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys

Move the cursor to the surround pan grid and press the

[ENTER] key; the O symbol will turn red.

In this condition, you can use the CURSOR [√]/[®]

keys to move surround pan left/right, or the CURSOR

[π]/[†] keys to move it forward/backward, in a range

of eight steps. By performing this operation while hold-

ing down the [SHIFT] key, you can quickly move

surround pan in a range of 32 steps. To finalize the sur-

round pan adjustment, press the [ENTER] key once

again.

SURR PARAM

Pan buttons SURROUND BUS

ON/OFF buttons

Channel selection

STEREO LINK button

Surround pan grid

18 Surround pan

136 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

• Using the MIX encoders

If you turn on the [MIX SEND] key of the MIX sec-

tion, you can use MIX encoders 1 or 9 to adjust the

left/right position of the input channel, and MIX

encoders 2 or 10 to adjust the front/rear position. The

SURR PARAM screen MIX SECTION ASSIGNMENT

area shows the parameters assigned to each MIX

encoder.

• Using MIDI control changes or GPI

If you assign surround pan parameters to MIDI con-

trol changes or GPI, you can use an external device to

control surround pan. For details, refer to MIDI CTRL

CHANGE screen (➥ p.174) and GPI screen (➥ p.177)

in the Reference section.

If you want surround pan operations to be

linked for two adjacent channels, turn on the

STEREO LINK button, and use the box at right

to select the link pattern.

When you turn on the STEREO LINK button, sur-

round pan will be linked for the two channels shown in

the SURR PARAM screen. To specify how they will be

linked, select one of the following link patterns by

clicking the / buttons at the left and right of the box

located to the right of the STEREO LINK button.

Edit other parameters as desired.

In the SURR PARAM screen you can also edit the fol-

lowing parameters.

• Divergence

These controls specify the proportion at which the sig-

nals are sent to each surround bus when the input

channel is positioned in the center. The parameters

that are displayed will depend on the surround mode

that is currently selected. (For details, refer to p.283)

•LFE

This adjusts the output level of the signal sent from the

input channel to the LFE (Low Frequency Effect) bus

for a subwoofer. You can also use the ON/OFF button

to switch the signal sent from the input channel to the

LFE bus on/off.

Hint

• The master level of each surround bus is shown in the upper

right of the screen.

• You can use the SURR VIEW screen to see the surround

pan settings of all channels at a glance.

Pattern 1

The channels will move in the same

direction for both the front/rear axis

and the left/right axis.

Pattern 2

The channels will move in opposite

directions for the front/rear axis, and in

the same direction for the left/right

axis.

Pattern 3

The channels will move in the same

direction for the front/rear axis, and in

opposite directions for the left/right

axis.

Pattern 4

Left↔right movement of the odd-num-

bered channel will be linked with

rear↔front movement of the even-

numbered channel. Front↔rear move-

ment of the odd-numbered channel

will be linked with left↔right move-

ment of the even-numbered channel.

Pattern 5

Left↔right movement of the odd-num-

bered channel will be linked with

front↔rear movement of the even-

numbered channel. Front↔rear move-

ment of the odd-numbered channel

will be linked with left↔right move-

ment of the even-numbered channel.

Pattern 6

Front/rear and left/right movement will

both be linked in the opposite direc-

tion.

Pattern 7

Left↔right movement of the odd-num-

bered channel will be linked with

front↔rear movement of the even-

numbered channel. Front↔rear move-

ment of the odd-numbered channel

will be linked with right↔left move-

ment of the even-numbered channel.

Pattern 8

Left↔right movement of the odd-num-

bered channel will be linked with

rear↔front movement of the even-

numbered channel. Front↔rear move-

ment of the odd-numbered channel

will be linked with left↔right move-

ment of the even-numbered channel.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 137

Surround pan

Notes regarding surround pan

Here are some notes and limitations that you should be aware of when using surround pan.

❏ Scene recall operations

• The surround mode selection and the surround pan

settings of each channel are stored as part of the scene.

• If you recall a scene whose surround mode differs from

the current scene, the screen and panel display will

change accordingly. The surround mode is recalled

regardless of Selective Recall or Recall Safe settings.

• If one channel (of a pair of channels) is excluded from

recall, and you recall a scene in which the STEREO

LINK button is on, the STEREO LINK button will

remain on but only the other channel (of the pair) will

be recalled.

• SURROUND BUS SETUP settings (MIX bus 1-8/9-16

selection, and assignments to each surround channel)

are not included in the scene data.

❏ Channel library recall operations

• Surround pan related parameters for inputs are stored

in the input channel library.

• If the STEREO LINK button is on, and you recall input

channel library settings, the STEREO LINK button will

remain on, but only one channel will be recalled. Sub-

sequent operation will be according to STEREO LINK.

❏ Channel copy

• When you copy an input channel using panel opera-

tions, surround-related parameters will also be copied.

• In order to copy surround-related parameters using the

CH COPY screen (INPUT VIEW function), the ALL

button must be turned on in the DESTINATION area.

❏ Global paste

• In order to paste surround-related parameters, the ALL

button must be turned on in the CURRENT SCENE

area of the GLOBAL PASTE screen (SCENE function).

In addition, the settings of the STEREO LINK area will

also be pasted if two adjacent channels are selected.

19 Other functions

138 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

This chapter explains other functionality of the PM5D not covered elsewhere.

Using the user deﬁned keys

You can assign the desired functions to the User Defined keys in the USER DEFINED section of the top panel, and press these

keys to execute the defined function.

A USER DEFINED [1]–[24] keys

B USER DEFINED [25] key

These are User Defined keys that execute the assigned

function.

Here’s how to assign the functions that will be executed

when the USER DEFINED [1]–[25] keys are pressed.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[UTILITY] key repeatedly to access the USER

DEFINE screen shown below.

In this screen you can make User Defined key assign-

ments for each of four banks; A–D.

In the BANK SELECT area at the upper left of

the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the

bank you want to use.

To clear the assignments of the current bank, click the

CLEAR BANK button located at the bottom of the

BANK SELECT area.

Click the button located on the line of the

User Defined key you want to assign.

The USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN window will

appear. In this window you can select a function to

assign to the User Defined key, and select option

parameters.

Select the desired function in the FUNCTION

column, select parameters in the PARAMETER

1/2 columns, and click the OK button.

For details on the available functions and parameters,

refer to the Reference section (➥ p.189).

19 Other functions

Items in the USER DEFINED section

Assigning functions to the User

Deﬁned keys

USER DEFINE

BANK SELECT area

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 139

Other functions

Assign functions to other keys and banks in

the same way.

Hint

The User Defined key assignments are not saved in the

scene. If desired, you can save the assignments on a mem-

ory card as USER DEFINED KEY data.

Here’s how to use the USER DEFINED [1]–[25] keys to

execute the functions that have been assigned to them.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [UTILITY] key to access the USER

DEFINE screen.

In the BANK SELECT area at the upper left of

the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the

bank (A–D) you want to use.

Press a USER DEFINED [1]–[25] key.

The function assigned to that key will be executed.

Using the Fader Assign function

“Fader Assign” is a function that lets you assign the desired channels to the DCA faders 1–8 of the DCA strip in the top panel.

For each of six layers A–F, you can specify the channel that is assigned to each fader. For example, you might use this to simul-

taneously control the send level and return level of an internal effect, or to use a fader as the master fader of a MIX bus or

MATRIX bus.

For each layer you can specify the channel that is assigned to each fader, and use the FADER MODE section to switch between

layers while you operate the faders.

In the FADER MODE section you can select the combina-

tion of channels or DCA groups that will be controlled by

DCA faders 1–8.

A FADER MODE [A]–[F] keys

If one of these buttons is on, DCA faders 1–8 will con-

trol the level of the channels assigned for that layer (A–

F).

B FADER MODE [DCA] key

If this button is on, DCA faders 1–8 will control DCA

groups 1–8.

Here’s how to assign the desired channels to the DCA fad-

ers 1–8 of the DCA strip section.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [UTILITY] key to access the FADER

ASSIGN screen.

In this screen you can select the channel assigned to

each fader in each layer A–F.

Executing functions assigned to the

User Deﬁned keys

Items in the FADER MODE section

Assigning channels to DCA faders

FADER ASSIGN

19 Other functions

140 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Use the channel selection boxes for the

desired layer (A–F) to select the channel

assigned to each fader 1–8.

To select a channel, click the / buttons located at

the left and right of each box. You can choose from the

following channels.

Hint

• If an input channel or a DCA fader 1–8 is selected, the chan-

nel name is displayed immediately below the channel

selection box.

• Input channels and output channels can coexist in the same

layer.

Assign channels to other layers in the same

way.

Hint

Fader Assign settings are not saved in the scene. If desired,

you can save these settings on a memory card as DCA

FADER MODE data.

In the FADER MODE section, use the FADER

MODE [A]–[F] keys to select the layer you want

to use.

The key LED will light, and the corresponding layer

will become active. If input channels are assigned to the

DCA faders, the channel names will appear in the

name indicators of the DCA strip.

Hint

You can also switch layers from within the FADER ASSIGN

screen. This screen also shows the values of the DCA faders

and their approximate positions.

Operate the faders of the DCA strip.

The level of the corresponding channels will change. If

a channel assigned to a DCA fader is paired (or if one

side of a stereo channel is assigned), the level of the

other paired channel (or the other side of the stereo

channel) will follow.

Note

When a FADER MODE [A]–[F] key is on, and channels other

than DCA channels are assigned to the DCA faders, the

[MUTE] keys of the DCA channel strip are inactive. However,

the [CUE] keys can be used to cue-monitor the corresponding

channel.

Item Selected channel

CH 1–CH48 Input channel 1–48

STIN1L/STIN1R–STIN4L/

STIN4R

ST IN channel 1–4 L or R

FXRTN1L/FXRTN1R–

FXRTN4L/FXRTN4R

FX RTN channel 1–4 L or R

MIX 1–MIX24 MIX channel 1–24

MTRX1–MTRX8 MATRIX channel 1–8

DCA1–8 DCA fader 1–8

Channel selec-

tion box

Controlling the channels assigned to

DCA faders

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 141

Other functions

Locking the PM5D (Security functions)

The PM5D lets you prohibit changes to certain parameters (Parameter Lock), or prohibit operation of the console (Console

Lock). For example, this lets you prevent an unauthorized person from operating the console while the engineer is taking a

break.

You can also apply password protection to the lock function using a “system password” which is remembered even after

power-off, or a “console password” which is cleared when the power is turned off. If you specify a system password, both

Parameter Lock and Console Lock are available. If you specify a console password, only Console Lock is available.

Here’s how to set the password used for Parameter Lock

and Console Lock. However, it is possible to apply the lock

function even if a password has not been specified.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [UTILITY] key to access the SECU-

RITY screen.

In this screen you can use the SYSTEM PASSWORD

and CONSOLE PASSWORD fields located at the left to

specify the passwords. (If no password has been speci-

fied, the corresponding box will indicate “--FREE--”.)

To set the system password, click the but-

ton for the SYSTEM PASSWORD field. To set

the console password, click the button for

the CONSOLE PASSWORD field.

A window will appear, and you will be asked to input

the new password. (The upper left of the window indi-

cates “NEW PASSWORD.”)

As an example, the illustration below shows the SYS-

TEM PASSWORD CHANGE window where you

specify the system password.

Note

• If a password has already been input, you will be requested

to input the old password. (The upper left of the window indi-

cates “OLD PASSWORD”.) In this case, input the existing

password and click the OK button before you continue to

step 3.

• If you want to return the system to a condition in which a

password has not been specified, input the existing pass-

word, click the OK button, and then leave the new password

field blank when you execute steps 3–5.

Use the character palette to input a password

of up to eight characters in the NEW PASS-

WORD text box.

The characters you input are displayed as “ * ”

(asterisks).

Any character of the character palette except for

SPACE can be used in a password. (The password is

case-sensitive; i.e., uppercase and lowercase alphabeti-

cal characters are distinguished.) When inputting a

password, the COPY, PASTE, SPACE, INS,

←, and →

keys of the character palette cannot be used.

Click the OK button.

The indication in the upper left of the window will

change to “RE-ENTER PASSWORD”.

Input the same password once again, and click

the OK button.

The password will be applied, and you will return to

the SECURITY screen.

Note

The console password will be cleared when the PM5D is pow-

ered-off. In contrast, the system password is remembered

even after the power is turned off. This means that if you for-

get the system password, you will be unable to defeat

Parameter Lock or Console Lock except by initializing the

entire memory of the PM5D (

➥

p.147). Please be careful not

to lose the system password.

Setting the System Password or Con-

sole Password

SECURITY

SYSTEM PASSWORD area

CONSOLE PASSWORD area

19 Other functions

142 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here’s how to lock parameters or the console. You can also

lock using the password you specified.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [UTILITY] key to access the SECU-

RITY screen.

If you want to lock only specific parameters,

use the buttons of the LOCK PARAMETER

SELECT area to select the parameters for

which you want to prohibit editing.

When you click a button, a check mark will appear for

the selected item. You can select the following items

(multiple selections are allowed).

Note

As long as the PARAMETER LOCK button is on, the above

settings cannot be edited. You will need to defeat the lock

function before editing them.

Depending on the items you want to lock, click

either the PARAMETER LOCK button or one of

the two CONSOLE LOCK buttons.

If a password has been specified, a window will ask you

to input the password. If you click the CANCEL but-

ton without inputting a password in this window, you

will return to the previous screen.

Input the password you assigned beforehand,

and click the OK button.

If you clicked the PARAMETER LOCK button in step

3, a message of “Parameter Locked” will appear briefly,

and then editing will be disabled for the selected

parameters.

If you clicked the CONSOLE LOCK button in step 3,

an indication of “CONSOLE LOCKED” will appear on

the screen, and all operations other than pressing the

UNLOCK button will be disabled.

To defeat Parameter Lock, click the PARAME-

TER LOCK button. To defeat Console Lock,

click the UNLOCK button.

If a password has been specified, a window will ask you

to input the password. Input the password and click

the OK button to defeat the lock function. You will

return to the screen in which you were prior to apply-

ing the security setting.

Note

The console password will be cleared when the PM5D is pow-

ered-off. In contrast, the system password is remembered

even after the power is turned off. This means that if you for-

get the system password, you will be unable to defeat

Parameter Lock or Console Lock except by initializing the

entire memory of the PM5D (

➥

p.147). Please be careful not

to lose the system password.

Item Content

SYSTEM CON-

FIGURATION

Changes to the settings of the MIXER

SETUP screen and CASCADE screen

WORD CLOCK

SETUP

Changes to the word clock setting

DITHER Changes to dither-related settings

INPUT PATCH

Changes to the input patch settings

(and names)

OUTPUT PATCH Changes to the output patch settings

INPUT CH ON/

OFF

Input channel on/off operations

OUTPUT CH ON/

OFF

Output channel on/off operations

MIX TO ST ON/

OFF

MIX TO STEREO button on/off opera-

tions

DCA MUTE ON

DCA [MUTE] key On operations

(Off operations are not included)

Using Parameter Lock or Console

Lock

SECURITY

LOCK PARAMETER SELECT area

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 143

Other functions

Using cascade connections

Buses can be shared by cascade-connecting multiple PM5D units (up to four) or the PM5D with an external mixer (such as

the Yamaha DM2000/02R96). When multiple PM5D units are cascade-connected, operations such as scene store/recall, cue/

solo, and dimmer can also be linked.

Here we will explain cascade connections and operation,

using an example in which two PM5D units are cascade-

connected.

To cascade-connect two PM5D units, connect the CAS-

CADE IN connectors and CASCADE OUT connectors of

the two units to each other. This allows the MIX bus, STE-

REO bus, and CUE bus output signals to be transmitted

and received between the two units.

If you want operations such as scene store/recall and cue/

solo to be linked between the two PM5D units, specify one

unit as the cascade master and the other as the cascade

slave. (This setting is made in the SYS/W.CLOCK function

MIXER SETUP screen.) The PM5D assigned as the cas-

cade master will output control signals (operational

signals) via its CASCADE IN connector, and the PM5D

assigned as the cascade slave will receive these signals via its

CASCADE OUT connector.

Hint

• If you want to daisy-chain two to four PM5D units (i.e., con-

nect the first unit’s CASCADE OUT

→

second unit’s

CASCADE IN, and the second unit’s CASCADE OUT

→

third unit’s CASCADE IN. Up to four units can be con-

nected.), you should assign the PM5D located last in the

chain (the PM5D connected only via its CASCADE IN con-

nector) as the cascade master, and the remaining PM5D

units as cascade slaves (

➥

p.204).

• If you want to cascade-connect a PM5D with a Yamaha

DM2000 or 02R96, connect the CASCADE OUT connector

of the DM2000/02R96 to the CASCADE IN connector of the

PM5D. However in this case, it is not possible to link

operations.

• If you want to cascade-connect the PM5D with any other

external mixer, use I/O cards installed in slots 1–4 to send

and receive the audio signals (

➥

p.202).

Here we will explain the basic settings required for a bi-

directional cascade connection between two PM5D units;

we will provide separate explanations for the cascade mas-

ter and the cascade slave.

❏ Cascade master

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key until the MIXER

SETUP screen appears.

In the CASCADE MODE area at the lower part

of the screen, select “MASTER”. In addition,

turn on the BI-DIRECTION button located

immediately below it.

When multiple PM5D units are cascaded, the settings

of the CASCADE MODE area specify whether the unit

will operate as a cascade master (when “MASTER” is

selected) or as a cascade slave (when “SLAVE” is

selected).

If you turn the BI-DIRECTION button on, the mixed

audio signals of both cascade-connected PM5D units

will be output from both units.

Making cascade connections

PM5D A

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

PM5D B

Audio

signals of

units A+B

Audio

signals of

units A+B

(cascade master) (cascade slave)

Basic settings for cascade connection

MIXER SETUP

CASCADE MODE area

CASCADE MODE area BI-DIRECTION button

19 Other functions

144 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Select “PM5D” in the CASCADE FROM field

and in the CASCADE TO field.

In the CASCADE FROM field, select one of the follow-

ing as the type of the external device that is sending

signals to the PM5D via the cascade connection.

In the CASCADE TO field, select either “PM5D” or “--

--” (transmission disabled) as the external device to

which the signal will be sent from the PM5D via the

cascade connection.

Make sure that “CASCADE IN” is selected for

the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field, and “CAS-

CADE OUT” is selected for the CASCADE OUT

PORT SOURCE SELECT field.

The CASCADE IN PORT SELECT and CASCADE

OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT fields select the ports

through which audio signals will be transmitted to and

received from the cascade-connected external device.

If “PM5D” or “DM2000/02R96” are selected as the

other cascade-connected device, only “CASCADE IN”

can be selected for the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT

field. In the CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT

field, you can choose from the output channels of slots

1–4 as well as “CASCADE OUT” (➥ p.203).

Hint

If you choose a setting other than “CASCADE OUT” in the

CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT field, the same

signal will be output from both the specified slot/channel and

from the CASCADE OUT connector.

❏ Cascade slave

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key to access the

MIXER SETUP screen.

In the CASCADE MODE area at the lower part

of the screen, select “SLAVE”. In addition, turn

on the BI-DIRECTION button located immedi-

ately below it.

Select “PM5D” in the CASCADE FROM field

and in the CASCADE TO field.

Make sure that “CASCADE IN” is selected in

the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field, and “CAS-

CADE OUT” is selected in the CASCADE OUT

PORT SOURCE SELECT field.

Here we will explain how to select the buses used for the

cascade connection, specify the items that will be linked,

and enable the cascade connection. Perform the following

steps on both the cascade master and cascade slave units.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key until the CAS-

CADE screen shown below appears.

In this combination you can enable/disable buses used

for transmission/reception in the cascade connection,

and select the operations that will be linked when mul-

tiple PM5D units are cascade-connected.

Display

Source

device

Selectable cas-

cade input port

Parameter

linkage

—

Cascade dis-

abled

CASCADE IN,

SLOT 4, SLOT 3/4,

SLOT1-4 [CH1-8],

SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16]

Not

possible

PM5D another PM5D CASCADE IN Possible

*1. Linked parameters are speciﬁed in the CASCADE

screen.

DM2000

/02R96

YAMAHA

DM2000 or

02R96

CASCADE IN

Not

possible

MIXER

[30BUS]

A mixer other

than the above

(maximum 30

bus)

SLOT 3/4,

SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8],

SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16]

MIXER

[16BUS]

A mixer other

than the above

(maximum 16

bus)

SLOT 4

CASCADE FROM

ﬁeld

CASCADE TO ﬁeld

CASCADE IN

PORT SELECT

ﬁeld

CASCADE OUT PORT

SOURCE SELECT

ﬁeld

Selecting the buses used for cascade

connection

CASCADE

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 145

Other functions

In the CASCADE LINK area at the left of the

screen, turn on the buttons for the operations

that you want to be linked.

The settings of the CASCADE LINK area select the

operations that will be linked when multiple PM5D

units are cascade-connected. You can select the follow-

ing items.

• SCENE RECALL

Scene recall operations / Recall undo operations

• SCENE STORE/EDIT

Scene store operations, store undo operations, title

editing, sorting

• CUE/SOLO LOGIC

Cue/Solo operations

• DIMMER ON/OFF

Dimmer effect (including talkback dimmer)

• PAGE CHANGE

Switching the display screen

• DCA FADER MODE

Switching the mode of the top panel FADER MODE

section

• ENCODER MODE

Switching the mode of the top panel ENCODER

MODE section

• PANEL/LCD BRIGHTNESS

BRIGHTNESS settings in the PREFERENCE 2 screen

(UTILITY function)

• INPUT METER POINT/OUTPUT METER POINT/

PEAK HOLD

Input channel / output channel metering point selec-

tion, and peak hold on/off

• DCA LEVEL/MUTE

DCA group 1–8 level, name, [CUE] key on/off opera-

tions, and [MUTE] key on/off operations

• MUTE MASTER

Mute group 1–8 on/off

Note

• Note that linking is enabled only if the LINK buttons for the

same item are turned on for both the cascade master unit

and the cascade slave unit.

• If you have cascade-connected three or more PM5D units in

a daisy-chain, you can also turn linking off for the cascade

master but on between the cascade slaves.

Hint

DCA and MUTE parameter values will be linked as soon as

linking is turned on. CUE/SOLO will be initialized as soon as

linking is turned on. Other parameters will be linked only when

that parameter is first operated after Link is turned on.

In the CASCADE I/O ASSIGN VIEW area, use

the CASCADE IN and CASCADE OUT ON/OFF

buttons to specify whether each bus will trans-

mit or receive audio signals to or from the

external cascade-connected device.

The CASCADE IN and CASCADE OUT ON/OFF but-

tons specify whether signals of each bus will be

transmitted to or received from the cascade-connected

external device. These settings are made independently

for each bus; MIX buses 1–24, STEREO A bus L/R,

STEREO B bus L/R, and CUE bus L/R.

Buses whose CASCADE IN button is on will receive

signals from the external device; buses whose CAS-

CADE OUT button is on will send signals to the

external device.

The CASCADE IN SOURCE fields indicate each of the

source buses. If the other cascade-connected device is a

PM5D, these assignments are fixed and cannot be

modified.

Note

• When two PM5D units are cascade-connected, signal trans-

mission and reception is enabled if the CASCADE OUT

button of the transmitting unit and the CASCADE IN button

of the receiving unit are both turned on for the same bus.

• If a device other than the PM5D is selected as the other cas-

cade-connected device, the transmission source indication

shown in the CASCADE IN SOURCE field will change

(

➥

p.205).

Set the CASCADE ENABLE/DISABLE button to

ENABLE.

The cascade connection will be enabled when the CAS-

CADE ENABLE/DISABLE button is set to ENABLE on

both the cascade master and the cascade slave.

CASCADE IN

ON/OFF buttons

CASCADE OUT

ON/OFF buttons

CASCADE IN SOURCE area

19 Other functions

146 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Connecting the PM5D to a computer via USB

The PM5D Editor application can be installed in a computer and used to control the PM5D’s parameters or to backup and

restore the contents of the PM5D’s memory.

Here we will explain the operations required in order to establish a USB connection between the PM5D and a computer.

Note

The following procedure assumes that the PM5D Editor pro-

gram and USB driver have already been correctly installed in

the computer. For details on installing the program and driver,

refer to the Studio Manager installation guide.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly

press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key until the MIDI

SETUP screen appears.

In the PM5D EDITOR area at the lower right of

the screen, select the port to which the com-

puter is connected, and select the PM5D’s ID

number.

First use the PORT field to select the port that will be

used to communicate with the computer. Click the /

buttons located at the left and right of the left box to

select the type of port, and press the [ENTER] key (or

click inside the box) to finalize your selection. If you

select USB or SLOT 1–4, use the box at the right to

select a port number 1–8.

Next, use the ID field to select an ID number in the

range of 1–8 for the PM5D that you want to control.

(This number is used to distinguish individual PM5D

units when multiple units are being used together.)

Note

Set the USB port number and PM5D ID number to match the

settings in the PM5D Editor. For details, refer to the PM5D

Editor owner’s manual.

Start up PM5D Editor on the computer, and

use a USB cable to connect the computer to

the PM5D.

This enables communication between the computer

and the PM5D. For details on operation, refer to the

PM5D Editor owner’s manual.

Note

• If you disconnect or reconnect the USB cable, or power-

cycle the PM5D, you must close the PM5D Editor and shut

down the computer. In some cases, it may not be possible to

reconnect with the PM5D until the computer is restarted.

• Use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters. Also, connect the

PM5D directly to the USB connector of the computer; do not

use a USB hub.

You must observe the following points when connecting

the PM5D to your computer via the USB TO HOST con-

nector. If you fail to observe these points, your computer

or the PM5D may stop operating (“hang up”), causing

data to be corrupted or lost. If the computer or the PM5D

stops working, turn the power off and then on again, and

restart the computer.

• Before connecting the computer via the USB TO

HOST connector, disable the power management

mode (suspend/sleep/standby/hibernate) on your

computer.

• Connect the USB TO HOST connector to the com-

puter before you power-on the PM5D.

• Close all application programs (such as PM5D Edi-

tor) before turning the PM5D’s power on or off, or

connecting or disconnecting the USB cable.

• Leave an interval of at least three seconds between

powering the PM5D on and off, or between discon-

necting and connecting the USB cable.

MIDI SETUP

PM5D EDITOR area

Caution when using the USB TO

HOST connector

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 147

Other functions

Initializing the PM5D’s internal memory

If an error occurs in the PM5D’s internal memory, or if you are unable to return to normal operation because you have for-

gotten the system password, use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory.

All of the content that had been saved in memory will be lost if

you initialize the internal memory. You must use extreme cau-

tion when performing this operation.

While holding down the SCENE MEMORY

[STORE] key of the panel, turn on the power of

the PW800W power supply.

After the opening screen, the following initialization

menu screen will appear.

Click one of the following buttons to select the

desired type of initialization.

• INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES

All memories including scene memories and libraries

will return to their factory-set condition.

• INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES

Memories other than scene memories and libraries will

return to their factory-set condition.

• CANCEL

The initialization procedure will be aborted, and the

PM5D will start up in normal operating mode.

Note

If the voltage of the backup battery runs low, or if an error

occurs in the internal memory, a warning message will appear

at the bottom of the screen, and the initialization menu will

appear “by force.” Please note that if the warning message is

displayed, and you click the CANCEL button to start in normal

operating mode, we cannot guarantee that the system will

operate correctly.

A message will ask you to confirm that you

really want to initialize; click the OK button.

When the internal memory has been initialized, the

PM5D will start up in normal operating mode.

Adjusting the faders and input/output gain (Calibration)

Depending on the conditions of use, discrepancies may occur in the behavior of the motor faders. you can use the Calibration

function to correct such discrepancies. If necessary, you can also make fine adjustments to the analog input/output gain.

While holding down the [ENTER] key of the

panel, turn on the power of the PW800W

power supply.

After the opening screen, the following calibration

menu screen will appear.

Click one of the following buttons to choose

what you want to calibrate.

A window for the calibration item you selected will

appear.

Make calibration settings as directed by the

instructions that appear in the window.

Click the OK button in the window.

The calibration settings will be applied, and the PM5D

will start up in normal mode.

CALIBRATE FADER

POSITION

The FADER CALIBRATION win-

dow will appear, allowing you to

calibrate the speciﬁed faders.

CALIBRATE AD INPUT

GAIN (make ﬁne adjust-

ments to the analog

input gain; PM5D-RH

model only)

The AD INPUT TRIM window

will appear, allowing you to

make ﬁne adjustments to the

gain of the speciﬁed analog

input port.

CALIBRATE OUTPUT

GAIN (make ﬁne adjust-

ments to the output

ports)

The OUTPUT TRIM window will

appear, allowing you to make

ﬁne adjustments to the gain of

the speciﬁed output port.

19 Other functions

148 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section

Here you can execute a semi-automatic procedure for cali-

brating the faders of the specified channel strip (INPUT,

DCA, STEREO A/B, ST IN/FX RTN). This window will

also appear if a problem with the fader settings is detected

when the PM5D is started up.

Click a fader select button to add a check mark

to the faders you want to calibrate.

If problems with certain faders were detected during

start-up, those buttons will be on (green), and check

marks will already be shown for them.

Click the START CALIBRATION button; calibra-

tion will begin automatically.

A progress bar will indicate the state of the process.

The automatic processing will end when the

progress bar reaches 60%. Manually move all

faders you specified for calibration to the posi-

tions listed below in the following order:

1 –∞

2 –20 dB

3 0 dB

4 +10 dB

After you have set the faders to the correct

position, press the [ENTER] key.

Processing will proceed to the next fader position.

Repeat steps 3–4 for each fader position 1–4.

Verify that calibration has been completed and

that all fader select buttons are now off. Then

click the OK button.

The calibration settings will be stored in internal mem-

ory. If a fader select button remains on (green),

calibration has failed. Try executing calibration once

again.

Note

The progress bar will indicate “Writing...” while the settings are

being written to internal memory; do not turn off the power

while this indication is visible.

If necessary, you can make fine adjustments in steps of 0.1

dB to the gain of the specified analog input port. Since the

input levels of all ports are set to match each other when

the PM5D is shipped from the factory, you will normally

not need to change these settings.

Note

Since these are set to optimal values at the factory, the default

values will differ between input ports. Initializing the internal

memory will return these settings to their factory-set values.

To adjust the gain, click the / buttons located at the

left and right of each box to specify the gain of each input

port in 0.1 dB units. If you want to restore all input ports

to their factory settings, click the FACTORY PRESET but-

ton. Click the OK button to apply the settings.

If necessary, you can make fine adjustments in steps of 0.01

dB to the gain of the specified output port. The factory set-

ting is 0.00 dB.

To adjust the gain, click the / buttons located at the

left and right of each box to specify the gain of each output

port in 0.01 dB units. If you want to reset all output ports

to 0.00 dB, click the FACTORY PRESET button. Click the

OK button to apply the settings.

Calibrating the faders Adjusting the analog input gain

(PM5D-RH model only)

Adjusting the output gain

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 149

Reference section

The Reference section explains the functionality and operations for every screen of the PM5D,

organized into four main areas; function menu, global functions, output functions, and input

functions.

The following illustration is a typical screen on the PM5D.

This screen shows the following information.

Upper part of the display

(always visible)

A Function Name Indication

Displays the name of the function currently selected in

the screen. By clicking the BACK/FORWARD buttons

you can move through the eight most recent screens

that were displayed for at least two seconds (with the

exception of function menus). You can also access the

Function menu by clicking this function name indica-

tion. When the Function menu is displayed, click once

again to return to the previously-displayed screen.

B SCENE MEMORY

Indicates the number and title of the last-stored or

recalled scene memory. If you select a different scene,

the number and title will blink. If you edit the contents

of a scene after storing it, the EDIT indicator in the

upper right will light. If the scene is write-protected, a

lock icon is displayed at the right of the title, and read-

only scenes are indicated as “R.”

Note

• You can move the cursor to the scene number and turn the

[DATA] encoder to select a scene.

• If you click here while the number and title are blinking, the

most recently stored or recalled scene will be displayed.

C NEXT SCENE/NEXT EVENT

Indicates the scene/event that will be recalled next by

the User Defined keys or the Event List function. The

information shown here will differ as follows, depend-

ing on the settings in the EVENT LIST screen of the

SCENE function.

• If the DISABLE button is turned on in the EVENT

LIST screen

Indicates the number and name of the next scene (the

scene that will be recalled when you press a User

Defined key assigned to the “INC RECALL” function).

Normally, this will be the scene of the number follow-

ing the most recently recalled or stored scene.

• If the ENABLE [ALL MANUAL] button or the

[ENABLE] button is turned on in the EVENT LIST

screen

Indicates the number and name of the next event (the

scene that will be recalled next by the Event List func-

tion). At the right is displayed the time until the next

event will be recalled (or the condition upon which the

event will be recalled).

Note

• The “MANUAL” indication means that the user must exe-

cute the Next Event operation in order to recall the next

event. (Press a User Defined key assigned to the “NEXT

EVENT RECALL” function, or click the NEXT button in the

EVENT LIST screen.)

• If a time is displayed, this indicates the remaining time until

the next event is recalled automatically.

• The “--------” indication means that there is no event to be

recalled next.

D PRESENT TIME, TIME CODE, CASCADE/Fs

Click this area to cycle through the following three

items of information. This is linked with the UPPER

PART DISPLAY setting in the PREFERENCE 2 screen

(UTILITY function).

Information shown in the display

6 7 8 9 J K

4 5

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Main area of the display

150 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• PRESENT TIME

Indicates the present time. The time can be specified in

the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen.

• TIME CODE

Indicates the internal time code being generated by the

PM5D, or the time code being received from an exter-

nal device. This is the same as the time code shown in

the SCENE function EVENT LIST screen.

• CASCADE/Fs

Indicates the master/slave status when using a cascade

connection, and the sampling frequency at which the

PM5D system is currently operating.

E METER SECTION

Indicates the type of channels that are currently shown

by the meters in the upper left and right of the panel.

You can also click the / buttons to switch this

directly.

F EVENT indicator

The EVENT indicator is displayed here if the ENABLE

[ALL MANUAL] or ENABLE button is turned on in

the SCENE function EVENT LIST screen.

G FADING/TRACKING indicator

This area shows the FADING indicator while fade time

is being executed, or the TRACKING indicator if

Tracking Recall is available. If both are enabled, FAD-

ING takes priority.

H LCR/LCR [B] indicator

If there is at least one channel for which LCR is turned

on, the LCR indicator is displayed here.

If in the SYS/W.CLOCK function MIXER SETUP

screen the BUS SETUP setting STEREO B is set to USE

AS CENTER BUS, the LCR [B] indicator is displayed

here.

I TB/OSC/DIMM indicator

If talkback, oscillator, or dimmer are on, the respective

TB/OSC/DIMM indicator is displayed here. If more

than one of these are enabled, the display priority is

TB>OSC>DIMM.

J SOLO/INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE/

KEY IN CUE/EFFECT CUE/EXTERNAL CUE

indicator

If Solo or Cue Monitor is enabled, the corresponding

indicator is shown here. If more than one Cue is

selected, only the indicator for the currently-valid Cue

is shown.

K BUSY/RS422/HA/GPI/MIDI indicator

The BUSY indicator is shown here while internal mem-

ory or a PC card in the card slot is being accessed.

When RS422/HA/GPI/MIDI signals are received (in

the case of RS422, when Status is received to indicate a

status change on a connected device), the appropriate

indicator will appear briefly. If more than one of these

conditions occur simultaneously, the display priority is

BUSY>RS422>HA>GPI>MIDI.

Note

In the case of MIDI signals, the indicator will light if signals are

received at the MIDI connector, USB connector, or slots 1–4.

However, active sensing, MIDI clock, and quarter time code

messages will not cause the indicator to light.

Main area of the display

A Tabs

Click this area to switch between screens within the

selected function.

B Function parameters

This area shows parameters for the currently selected

function or screen.

Lower part of the display

(always visible)

A SELECTED CH (Selected channel)

Indicates the type and name of the channel currently

selected by the [SEL] key. You can also click the /

buttons to switch this directly.

B MIX SECTION

Indicates the encoder mode currently selected in the

MIX section. In MIX SEND mode this indicates

“SEND,” in MIX MASTER mode this indicates “MAS-

TER,” and if a shortcut operation has been used to

select TO MATRIX mode this indicates “TO

MATRIX.” You can also click the / buttons to

directly switch between “SEND” and “MASTER.”

C Encoder/Fader mode

Indicates the parameters that are assigned to the

encoders/faders of the input channel strip.

The encoders can be assigned to MIX SEND 1–24,

GAIN, ATT, PAN/BAL, LEVEL, or REMOTE. The fad-

ers can be assigned to LEVEL, MIX SEND 1–24, or

REMOTE. For both the encoders and the faders, you

can click / to directly select parameters other than

REMOTE.

If you select LEVEL for the encoders, the faders will be

flipped; the most recently selected of the MIX SEND 1–

24 parameters will be assigned to the faders. Similarly,

the faders will also be flipped if you select MIX SEND

4 5 6 8

1 32 7

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 151

1–24 for the faders; the LEVEL parameter will be

assigned to the encoders.

D INPUT CH (Input channel) layer

This is linked with the [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] key in

the input channel strip of the panel, and indicates the

layer that is selected for the input channel strip. (If the

MIDI REMOTE layer is selected, this indicates

REMOTE 1-24.) Layers other than MIDI REMOTE

can also be switched directly by clicking the /

buttons.

E FADER MODE

This is linked with the FADER MODE section on the

panel, and indicates the function that is assigned to the

faders of the DCA strip. You can also click the /

buttons to switch this directly.

F ST IN/FX RTN (ST IN channel / Effect

return) layer

This is linked with the [ST IN] key and [FX RTN 1-4]

key in the ST IN channel strip of the panel, and indi-

cates the layer that is selected for the ST IN channel

strip. (If the MIDI REMOTE layer is selected, this indi-

cates REMOTE 25-28.) Layers other than MIDI

REMOTE can also be switched directly by clicking the

/ buttons.

G DIRECT RECALL/MUTE MASTER

This switches between the following two choices as the

function of the [1]–[8] keys in the SCENE MEMORY

section of the panel.

• DIRECT RECALL

Keys [1]–[8] of the SCENE MEMORY section will

directly recall the scene that was assigned in the SCENE

screen.

• MUTE MASTER

Keys [1]–[8] of the SCENE MEMORY section will

switch mute groups 1–8 on/off.

H USER DEFINED KEY BANK

Indicates the currently selected bank of User Defined

keys. You can also click the / buttons to switch this

directly.

Here you can select the function that you want to view in

the display. These operate in the same way as the keys of

the DISPLAY ACCESS section.

Hint

To access this screen from another function, click the Func-

tion Name area at the top of the display.

A Global functions

These buttons access functions that affect the entire

PM5D.

B Output-related functions

These buttons access functions related to output chan-

nels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO A/B

channels).

C Input-related functions

These buttons access functions related to input chan-

nels (input channels, ST IN channels, FX RTN

channels).

Function menu

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Global functions

152 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

EFFECT functions

Here you can select the type of internal effect, edit its

parameters, and perform input/output patching.

A Effect selection

Of the internal effects 1–8, select the effect for which

you want to make settings. To switch between effects,

place the cursor here and turn the [DATA] encoder, or

click the / buttons at left or right.

B Effect type

Indicates the currently selected effect type, both by

name and as a graphic. The number of input/output

channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is

also shown at the bottom of this area.

Note

You can’t switch the effect type in this screen. If you want to

switch to a different effect type, recall an effect that uses the

desired effect type from the effect library.

C Input patch

This box lets you select the signal path that will be

patched to the L/R input channels of the internal effect.

Move the cursor to this box and turn the [DATA]

encoder or click the / buttons at left or right to dis-

play the desired signal path, and then press the

[ENTER] key to finalize the change.

You can choose the following signal paths.

Note

• If you move the cursor away without pressing the [ENTER]

key, the setting will revert to its original state.

• If you assign a signal to both input channels for a 1 IN/2

OUT effect type, the two will be mixed to monaural and then

input.

• If you assign a signal to only one input channel for a 2 IN/2

OUT effect type, the same signal will be sent to both chan-

nels of the effect.

• If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the

PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), and you

attempt to make patch settings that would cause an existing

patch to be modified, a confirmation message will appear.

D Input meter

Indicates the level of the signal being input to the effect.

Global functions

EFFECT PARAM (Effect parameter)

screen

EFFECT PARAM

2 3 4

MIX1–MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 output

INS CH1–INS CH48 Input channel 1–48 insert out

INS STIN1 (L/R)–INS STIN4

(L/R)

ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R)

insert out

INS MIX1–INS MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 insert out

INS MTRX1–INS MTRX8

MATRIX channel 1–8 insert

out

INS ST A (L/R)

STEREO A channel (L/R)

insert out

INS ST B (L/R)

STEREO B channel (L/R)

insert out

INS MON (L/R/C)

MONITOR channel (L/R/C)

insert out

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 153

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

E MIX BALANCE

Adjusts the balance of the effect sound relative to the

original sound.

0 (%) outputs only the original sound, and 100 (%)

outputs only the effect sound.

F BYPASS

This button temporarily bypasses the effect.

G CUE

This button cue-monitors the output of the effect

shown in the screen. Cue is automatically defeated

when you switch to a different screen. (However, cue

will be held if you switch to the EFFECT ASSIGN

screen.)

H Output meter

Indicates the level of the signal being output from the

effect.

I Output patch

This box lets you select the signal path that will be

patched to the L/R output channels of the internal

effect. The selection method is the same as for Input

Patch. You can choose the following signal paths.

Note

Even if you’ve patched multiple channels in the INPUT

PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen,

changing the input/output patch in this screen will turn off

patching to other channels.

J LIBRARY

This button accesses the EFFECT LIBRARY screen for

the currently selected effect.

K TEMPO parameter

If a delay-type or modulation-type effect type is

selected, the tempo parameter will be displayed here.

The TEMPO parameter specifies time-related parame-

ters in units of BPM (Beats Per Minute). For a delay-

type effect it sets the DELAY (delay time), and for a

modulation-type effect it sets the FREQ. (modulation

frequency).

Note

For some effect types, a parameter unique to the effect may

be shown instead of the TEMPO parameter. For example if

FREEZE is selected as the effect type, a button for recording/

playing the input signal is shown.

The BPM value can be edited using the on-screen

knob, or by repeatedly clicking the TAP TEMPO but-

ton. (In this case, the average interval between clicks is

detected. If the average value is outside the range of 20–

300 BPM, it will be ignored.)

If the MIDI CLK button is on, the TEMPO parameter

will synchronize to the MIDI timing clock being

received from the MIDI port.

L Effect parameters

This area shows parameters for the currently selected

effect type.

CH1–CH48 Input channel 1–48 input

STIN1–STIN4 (L/R) ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) input

FXRTN1–FXRTN4 (L/R) FX RTN channel 1–4 input

INS CH1–INS CH48 Input channel 1–48 insert in

INS ST1 (L/R)–INS ST4 (L/

ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) insert

INS MIX1–INS MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 insert in

INS MTRX1–INS MTRX8 MATRIX channel 1–8 insert in

INS ST A (L/R)

STEREO A channel (L/R)

insert in

INS ST B (L/R)

STEREO B channel (L/R)

insert in

INS MON (L/R/C)

MONITOR channel (L/R/C)

insert in

J8 9

K L

ab c

First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap

The average of the intervals is input as the parameter

value (average of a, b, and c)

EFFECT functions

154 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

This screen lists the effect types used by internal effects 1–8,

and shows their input levels.. Here you can also assign sig-

nals to input/output channels, and make settings for

bypass and cue.

A Level meter

Indicates the input level to the effect.

B Effect type

Indicates the selected effect type, both by name and as a

graphic. When you click this area, the EFFECT

PARAM screen will appear. You can also drag and

drop this area onto another effect in this screen to copy

the effect settings.

C BYPASS

This button temporarily bypasses the effect.

D CUE

This button cue-monitors the effect output. Cue is

automatically defeated when you switch to a different

screen. (However, cue will be held if you switch to the

EFFECT PARAM screen of the corresponding effect.)

E Input patch

This box indicates the signal path that is patched to the

L/R input channels of the internal effect. You can also

directly assign the signal path in this box.

F Output patch

This box indicates the signal path that is patched to the

L/R output channels of the internal effect. You can also

directly assign the signal path in this box.

Note

Even if you’ve patched multiple channels in the INPUT

PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen,

changing the input/output patch in this screen will turn off

patching to other channels.

EFFECT ASSIGN screen

EFFECT ASSIGN

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 155

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

effect library.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the EFFECT PARAM

screen for the currently selected effect will appear.

B Effect selection

Of the internal effects 1–8, select the effect for which

you want to make settings.

C Input meter

Indicates the input level of the effect.

D Current effect type

Indicates the effect type of the currently selected effect.

E Output meter

Indicates the output level of the effect.

F Library effect type

Indicates the effect type of the library item selected in

the list.

G RECALL

Recalls the library item shown in the list into the cur-

rently selected effect.

H STORE

Stores the currently selected effect into the selected

location of the list. When you click this button a win-

dow will appear, allowing you to name and save the

effect.

I TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

J CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

K Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

Note

• If the library item selected for operations is different than the

last-stored/recalled library item, the last-stored/recalled

library item will be shown with a blue background.

• Library items 049 and later that are grayed-out are reserved

for Add-On Effects. They will become available if you install

a separately sold Add-On Effects package (

➥

p.109).

EFFECT LIBRARY screen

EFFECT LIBRARY

3 54

1 2

GEQ function

156 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

GEQ function

Here you can adjust the boost/cut for a 31-band graphic

EQ, specify the input/output patching, and assign a GEQ

to faders.

A Module select

Of the twelve graphic EQ modules (GEQ1–GEQ12),

select the module that you want to operate. To switch

between modules, place the cursor here and turn the

[DATA] encoder, or click the / buttons at left or

right.

B LINK button

This button links adjacent odd-numbered → even-

numbered graphic EQ modules. When you turn this

button on, a window will appear, allowing you to select

whether the parameters will be copied from one mod-

ule to the other, or whether both modules will be

initialized.

C INSERT (Insert destination)

Selects the location at which the graphic EQ module

will be inserted. Move the cursor to this box and turn

the [DATA] encoder or click the / buttons at left or

right to display the desired insertion destination, and

then press the [ENTER] key to finalize the change.

You can choose the following insertion destinations.

• INS CH1–INS CH48

Input channel 1–48 insert in/out

• INS STIN1 (L/R)–INS STIN4 (L/R)

ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) insert in/out

• INS MIX1–INS MIX24

MIX channel 1–24 insert in/out

• INS MTRX1–INS MTRX8

MATRIX channel 1–8 insert in/out

• INS ST A (L/R)

STEREO A channel (L/R) insert in/out

• INS ST B (L/R)

STEREO B channel (L/R) insert in/out

• INS MON (L/R/C)

MONITOR channel (L/R/C) insert in/out

Note

• When you select the insertion destination here, insert in/out

will be patched simultaneously, and insertion will automati-

cally be turned on for the channel into which the graphic EQ

module was inserted.

• If you move the cursor away without pressing the [ENTER]

key, the setting will revert to its original state.

D GEQ ON/OFF button

Switches the currently selected graphic EQ module on/

off.

E SLOW/FAST

Switches the fall speed of the spectrum analyzer

between slow or fast. This setting does not affect the

meters in other screens or the meters on the panel.

F PEAK HOLD

Switches the peak hold function on/off for the spec-

trum analyzer. The peak level for each band is held

while this button is on. (To reset the peak level display,

turn this button off and then on again). This setting

does not affect the meters in other screens or the

meters on the panel.

G Spectrum analyzer

This is an analyzer that shows a realtime level display

for each band of the input signal.

H EQ graph

Indicates the current frequency response of the graphic

EQ.

I Faders

These faders cut/boost the frequency bands of the

graphic EQ. The actual values are shown in the numer-

ical boxes below.

J ASSIGN TO FADERS

These buttons divide the 31 bands of the graphic EQ

into six groups so that you can use the DCA faders to

adjust the boost/cut amount of each band. Click one of

the six buttons A (20.0-100), B (63.0-315), C (200-

1.00k), D (630-3.15k), E (2.00k-10.0k), F (4.00k-

20.0k). DCA faders 1–8 will be assigned to the corre-

sponding region of frequency bands, allowing you to

control them with the DCA faders. At this time, the

divisions of the corresponding faders and the value in

the numerical box screen will turn red in the screen. To

return to the original state, press the DCA (OFF) but-

ton in the screen or the [DCA] button on the panel.

GEQ PARAM (GEQ parameter) screen

GEQ PARAM

1 3 4 5 62

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 157

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Note

• If the ASSIGN TO FADERS buttons A–F are off, you can

hold down the [SHIFT] button on the panel and press a

FADER MODE section button [A]–[F], and then use the DCA

faders to control the corresponding region of the graphic EQ

in the same way as if you had pressed a button A–F in the

screen.

• The currently selected DCA fader mode (DCA, A–F) is dis-

abled while one of the ASSIGN TO FADERS buttons A–F is

on. At this time, you can also use the FADER MODE sec-

tion buttons [A]–[F] to switch between regions of the graphic

EQ; the button for the selected region will blink, and the

remaining buttons will light.

• The setting in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area is defeated

when you switch screens; the currently selected DCA fader

mode will again be applied.

K LIBRARY

This button accesses the GEQ LIBRARY screen.

L Level meter

This meter indicates the peak level before and after the

graphic EQ.

M LIMIT

The range and direction of adjustment controlled by

the faders can be selected from the following: ±15 dB,

±12 dB, ±6 dB (these are valid in both the boost and

cut directions), or –24 dB (valid only in the cut

direction).

N EQ FLAT

Resets all faders to the 0 dB position. When you click

this button, a confirmation message will appear.

O AUTO ASSIGN

This button automates assignments to the DCA faders.

If this button is on, the most recently selected region of

GEQ bands will be assigned to the DCA faders when

you access the GEQ PARAM screen.

This screen lists the approximate values of the graphic EQ

settings, and shows the input/output levels. The signal path

assignments and on/off status can also be edited in this

screen.

A Level meter

This meter indicates the peak level before and after the

graphic EQ.

B Fader graph

This indicates the approximate fader position for each

band. When you click this area, the GEQ PARAM

screen for the corresponding GEQ module will appear.

You can also drag and drop this area onto another

GEQ module to copy the GEQ settings.

C GEQ ON/OFF button

Switches the graphic EQ module on/off.

D Insert destination

Indicates the location at which the graphic EQ module

is inserted. You can also specify the insert location

from within this screen.

E LINK button

This button indicates the link status of adjacent odd-

numbered → even-numbered graphic EQ modules.

When you turn this button on, a window will appear,

allowing you to select whether the parameters will be

copied from one module to the other, or whether both

modules will be initialized.

GEQ ASSIGN screen

GEQ ASSIGN

1 2 3

GEQ function

158 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

GEQ library.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the GEQ PARAM screen

for the currently selected GEQ module will appear.

B GEQ module select

Of the GEQ modules 1–12, select the module for which

you want to make settings.

C Current EQ graph

Indicates the approximate response of the currently

selected GEQ module.

D Level meter

This meter indicates the peak level before and after the

graphic EQ.

E RECALL

Recalls the library item selected in the list into the cur-

rently selected GEQ module.

F STORE

Stores the settings of the currently selected GEQ mod-

ule into the selected location in the list. When you click

this button a window will appear, allowing you to

name and save the GEQ module settings.

G TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

H CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

I Library EQ graph

Shows the response curve of the library selected in the

list.

J Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

GEQ LIBRARY screen

GEQ LIBRARY

1 2 3

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 159

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

SCENE function

Here you can store/recall scenes.

A Scene list

This is a list of the stored scenes. For each scene, the

following items are displayed. (To view

7 COM-

MENT and subsequent items, scroll the list to the

right.)

B (Scene number)

This is the scene number 0–500. You can click this icon

to reverse the order in which the scenes are sorted.

C TITLE

This is the name assigned to each scene. You can click

the TITLE button to sort the scenes in order of their

titles. When you click the button at the left, a win-

dow will appear, allowing you to edit the title.

D (Protect)

This button switches Protect on/off for each scene. A

lock icon indicates scenes for which Protect is turned

on; these scenes cannot be overwritten. Read-only

scenes are indicated by a “R” displayed here.

E SEL.RECALL (Selective recall)

For each scene, you can specify whether the Selective

Recall function will be used when recalling the scene. If

the Selective Recall function is enabled (➥ p.164),

scenes for which this button is turned on can recall

only specific parameters. (Alternatively, you can

exclude only specific parameters from the recall.)

If the scenes are sorted in order of TITLE, a check mark

is displayed for scenes for which this is turned on. If the

scenes are sorted in numerical order, a downward or

upward arrow is displayed for scenes for which this is

turned on; this makes it easy to see which was the origi-

nal scene prior to selective recall.

F Library link

This area shows the number and title of the INPUT

PATCH library, OUTPUT PATCH library, and HA

library used by each scene. You can click the button

at the left to access a window that lets you change the

library number that is linked. The LINK button for

each library determines whether library recall opera-

tions will be linked to scene recall operations.

If the LINK button is on (this column indicates

“LINK”), the library of the corresponding number will

also be recalled when you recall that scene. A library

whose LINK button is off will not change when you

recall that scene.

G COMMENT

In this column you can enter or view a comment for

the scene. A text input window will appear when you

move the cursor to the COMMENT field and press the

[ENTER] key, or when you click the button at the

left.

H TIME STAMP

Indicates the time at which the scene was last stored, in

the format of month/day/year/hours/minutes/seconds.

I MIDI EVENT

Specifies a MIDI message that will be transmitted from

the MIDI OUT connector when the scene is recalled.

When you click the button at left a window will

appear, allowing you to input a MIDI event in hexa-

decimal form (➥ p.118).

J TX ON/OFF (MIDI event transmission on/

off)

Specifies whether the assigned MIDI event will be

transmitted.

SCENE screen

SCENE

2 3 45 6

7 8

9 J

SCENE function

160 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

K GPI OUT CONTROL 1–12

Specifies the polarity and transmission method (tally/

trigger) of the signal that is sent from GPI OUT ports

1–12 when the scene is recalled. When you click a but-

ton corresponding to a port 1–12, the setting will

change in the following order.

Note

• GPI OUT CONTROL settings are independent of the set-

tings in the MIDI/REMOTE function GPI screen.

• In the case of a Trigger type setting, the time interval

between becoming active and returning to the inactive state

is 250 msec.

L REMOTE TRANSPORT

Selects the transport command (MMC or RS422 pro-

tocol) that will be transmitted when you recall the

scene. If you click the button at the left a window

will appear, allowing you to select the output destina-

tion and the type of command.

M SCENE FUNCTION (Recall function)

Here you can store/recall scenes.

• RECALL

Loads the scene currently selected in the scene list into

the PM5D.

• STORE

Saves the current settings of the PM5D in the scene

currently selected in the scene list. (This button is inop-

erable if the selected scene is read-only or protected.)

• UNDO

Cancels the preceding Recall or Store operation. You

can click this once again (Redo) to return to the state

prior to Undoing.

• PREVIEW

If this button is on, the PM5D will be in PREVIEW

mode; this allows you to view or edit the settings of a

scene stored in memory or the settings of a library item

without affecting the internal signal processing. This is

linked with the [PREVIEW] key in the SCENE MEM-

ORY section of the panel (➥ p.80).

Note

• Monitor settings will apply to internal signal processing even

during Preview mode. You can perform cue/monitor opera-

tions while Previewing.

• EVENT LIST, MIDI, and GPI operations will apply to internal

signal processing, but not to Preview.

• Memory card save/load operations cannot be performed

during Preview.

• During Preview, user defined operations that affect internal

signal processing are disabled; such operations include

EVENT LIST, TALKBACK ASSIGN, MONITOR, MIDI

DIRECT OUT, MACHINE CONTROL, and GPI OUT

CONTROL.

N BLANK SKIP

Specifies how scene numbers can be selected. If the

BLANK SKIP button is off, all scene numbers can be

selected consecutively regardless of whether they con-

tain scene data. In contrast if the BLANK SKIP button

is on, only numbers in which a scene is actually stored

can be selected. This setting applies when you switch

scenes using the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys in

the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel, the

[DATA] encoder, or the / buttons in the screen.

O EDIT

These buttons let you rearrange the order of the scenes

in memory.

• CUT

Cuts the scene selected in the list, and holds it in a tem-

porary memory buffer. Subsequent scenes will be

moved forward by one.

• COPY

Copies the scene selected in the list into the memory

buffer. The copy-source and other scenes will not be

affected.

• INSERT

Inserts the scene from the memory buffer at the num-

ber selected in the list. Scenes that follow the number at

which you inserted will be moved backward by one.

• PASTE

Overwrites the scene from the memory buffer onto the

blank number selected in the list. Other scenes will not

be affected.

• CLEAR

Deletes the scene selected in the list.

• UNDO

Cancels the operation that was last performed in the

EDIT area.

Note

•A confirmation message will appear when you click one of

these buttons.

• If a read-only or protected scene is selected in the list, the

CUT, INSERT, and CLEAR buttons are grayed-out, and

cannot be used.

• If an existing scene is selected in the list, the PASTE button

is grayed-out, and cannot be used.

• If the list is sorted by title, the CUT, INSERT, and UNDO

buttons are displayed in gray.

• If you modify the contents of a scene by operations in other

than the EDIT section, the UNDO button is displayed in gray.

Display Polarity

Transmission

method

None Disabled

High active Tally

Low active Tally

High active Trigger

Low active Trigger

K L

M O P

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 161

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

P DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN

This lets you select the scenes that will be directly

recalled by the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys on the

panel. This function is available if the DIRECT

RECALL button is on.

When you move the cursor to the field on the left and

turn the [DATA] encoder, or when you click the /

buttons to select a scene number, the scene name will

appear in the field on the right.

Q DIRECT RECALL/MUTE MASTER

These are linked with the DIRECT RECALL/MUTE

MASTER buttons shown at the bottom of the display.

(➥ p.151)

The Event List function lets you register scenes in the order

of use, so that these scenes can be recalled either manually

or automatically according to the specified time code or

interval.

A EVENT LIST ENABLE/DISABLE

Use the following three buttons to enable/disable the

Event List function.

• DISABLE

The Event List function will not recall scenes registered

in the event list.

• ENABLE [ALL MANUAL]

Scenes registered in the event list will be recalled only

by manual operation. If the list contains events for

which a time code has been specified, the candidate

event for recall will change as time code progresses, but

events will not actually be recalled unless the recall

operation is performed manually.

• ENABLE

Scenes registered in the event list will be recalled

according to the specified condition (time code, inter-

val, or manual operation).

B Event list

In this list you can register the scenes to be recalled,

and the conditions under which the scenes will be

recalled. Click a line to select the event of that line for

editing; it will be highlighted in the center of the list.

EVENT LIST screen

EVENT LIST

SCENE function

162 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• No.

Indicates the event number.

• EVENT TRIGGER

This column specifies the condition that will recall each

event. Click the button, and in the window that

appears, use the following three buttons to select the

condition.

MANUAL . . . . . The event can be recalled by the

DIRECT button in the EVENT

RECALL area (

3) or by a User

Defined key. The EVENT TRIG-

GER field will indicate

“[MANUAL]”.

INTERVAL . . . . The scene will be recalled when a

specified time has elapsed after the

preceding scene was recalled. If you

select this button, specify the wait

time in the lower part of the win-

dow. The EVENT TRIGGER field

in the list shows a “ ” symbol and

the wait time.

TIME CODE . . . The scene will be recalled when the

time code (LTC, MTC, internal

time code) reaches the specified

time. If you select this button, spec-

ify the time code location (hours/

minutes/seconds/frames) in the

lower part of the window. The

EVENT TRIGGER field in the list

shows the time code.

Hint

• As long as an event for which MANUAL is specified is

selected in the list, the scene will not change until you manu-

ally execute a recall.

• However, if a event for which TIME CODE is specified is

registered later in the list, events set to MANUAL will be

skipped when that time code arrives, and the corresponding

scene will be recalled.

• The condition for recalling the scene that will be recalled

next is shown in the NEXT SCENE/NEXT EVENT fields in

the upper part of the display.

Note

• If time code source is OFF, events whose EVENT TRIG-

GER is set to TIME CODE will not be recalled unless you

perform a manual recall.

• In contrast, events whose EVENT TRIGGER is set to

INTERVAL will be recalled automatically after the specified

interval elapses from the previous recall operation, even if

the time code source is OFF.

• In the two-second interval after time code starts, events may

not be executed because synchronization is being estab-

lished. You must start time code at least two seconds earlier

than an event you want to execute.

• SCENE TITLE

This is the number and title of the scene to be recalled.

Click the button, and in the window that appears,

click the number of a scene to select it.

C EVENT RECALL

Here you can recall events. The following three but-

tons are provided.

• PREV

When you click this button, the event of the line pre-

ceding the last-recalled event will be recalled and

selected.

• DIRECT

When you click this button, the event currently

selected in the event list will be recalled. This is used

mainly to recall an event whose EVENT TRIGGER

field is set to “[MANUAL]”.

• NEXT

When you click this button, the event of the line fol-

lowing the last-recalled event will be recalled and

selected.

D AUTO CAPTURE

This button lets you automatically register events in

realtime while time code runs. If time code is running

and this button is on, using the buttons of the panel

SCENE MEMORY to recall a scene will cause the cor-

responding scene number and time code location to be

captured, and this will be added as a new event.

Note

• If the list contains previously-recorded events, they will be

sorted in descending order of their time code.

• If an event already exists at the identical time code location,

it will be overwritten by the new event.

• Even if time code source is “OFF,” performing a recall oper-

ation while this button is on will register a new event in the

list. In this case, the EVENT TRIGGER field will be regis-

tered as “[MANUAL]”.

• If an offset value is specified, the sum of the offset value and

the displayed time code is captured as the time code.

E MOVE UP

This button moves the currently selected event one

position earlier in the event list.

Event that will be recalled manually

Event that will be recalled when time code reaches the

speciﬁed location

Event that will be recalled when the speciﬁed interval elapses

after the previous recall operation

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 163

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

F MOVE DOWN

This button moves the currently selected event one

position later in the event list.

Note

• The MOVE UP/DOWN buttons are available only for events

whose EVENT TRIGGER field is shown as “[MANUAL]” or

the “ ” symbol.

• If the EVENT TRIGGER field of the selected event shows a

time code, these buttons will be grayed-out and unavailable.

G MANUAL INSERT

This button inserts a new event at the location selected

in the event list. The EVENT TRIGGER field of the

new event will be “[MANUAL],” and its SCENE TITLE

field will be “no assignment.” You can change these as

desired.

H MANUAL OVERWRITE

This button overwrites a new event onto the location

currently selected in the event list. (If the line at the

current location is blank, this button will be grayed-out

and unavailable.) The EVENT TRIGGER field of the

new event will be “[MANUAL].”

I TIME CODE SETUP

Here you can make settings for the time code received

by the PM5D.

• TC SOURCE (Time code source)

Select one of the following as the time code source that

will be used.

OFF . . . . . . . . . . Time code will not be received.

INTERNAL . . . . The time code generated within the

PM5D will be used.

TIME CODE . . . The time code (LTC) received via

the rear panel TIME CODE connec-

tor will be used.

MIDI . . . . . . . . . The MIDI time code (MTC)

received via the rear panel MIDI IN

connector will be used.

USB . . . . . . . . . . The MIDI time code received from

the specified port via the rear panel

USB connector will be used.

SLOT 1–4 . . . . . If a card that supports MIDI input

is installed in one of the rear panel

slots, the MIDI time code received

from the specified port will be used.

Note

• This setting does not affect the MIDI REMOTE function MIDI

SETUP screen.

• If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, you will need to specify the

port number (1–8) in the field on the right (Depending on the

card that is installed, some slots may have only one port.)

• If you switch to INTERNAL, the time code will be set to the

Start Time value.

• FRAME RATE

Select one of the following as the frame rate for the

time code (LTC, MTC, internal time code) you are

using.

30 . . . . . . . . . . 30 frames/second (non-drop)

30D . . . . . . . . . 30 frames/second (drop frame)

29.97 . . . . . . . . 29.97 frames/second (non-drop)

29.97D . . . . . . 29.97 frames/second (drop frame)

25 . . . . . . . . . . 25 frames/second

24 . . . . . . . . . . 24 frames/second

• OFFSET TIME/START TIME

If INTERNAL is selected as the time code source, use

this field to specify the time at which internal time code

will begin (START TIME).

If any other time code source is selected, use this field

to specify the offset (OFFSET TIME). The offset is the

interval by which the timing at which scenes are

recalled is adjusted backward or forward relative to the

incoming time code (LTC or MTC).

In either case, you can edit the value by clicking the

button and specifying the value in hours/minutes/sec-

onds/frames units in the window that appears.

J Time code display area

This displays the value of the incoming time code (LTC

or MTC) or the internal time code. If INTERNAL is

selected as the time code source, transport buttons are

shown immediately below the time code value; you can

use these buttons to rewind, stop, or start the internal

time code.

In addition, if INTERNAL is selected you can click the

button to access the TIME CODE window, and

specify the time code directly.

Note

An offset value is not added to the displayed time code.

K TIME CODE INSERT

This button registers the time code data in the list in

realtime. When the time code source is running, click-

ing this button will capture the time code value and

add it as a new event. The captured time code is input

in the EVENT TRIGGER field of the new event, and

the SCENE TITLE field will be “no assignment.” At this

time, the events within the list are sorted in descending

order of time code. (If an event exists at the same time

location, it will be overwritten by the new event.)

Note

If the time code source is OFF, the EVENT TRIGGER column

will be “[MANUAL].” If the time code source is TIME CODE,

MIDI, USB, or SLOT 1–4, the offset value has been added to

the time code value of the newly added event.

L TIME CODE OVERWRITE

This button replaces the time code of the event selected

in the list in realtime. When the time code source is

running, clicking this button will write the current time

location as the time code value of the currently selected

event. (The SCENE TITLE field will not change.) At

this time, the events within the list are sorted in

descending order of time code.

If a blank line is selected, this button is grayed-out.

Note

If the time code source is OFF, the EVENT TRIGGER column

will be “[MANUAL].” If the time code source is TIME CODE,

MIDI, USB, or SLOT 1–4, the offset value has been added to

the rewritten time code value.

RETURN TO START TIME

(rewind the time code to

the start time)

START

(start the time code

from the current

location)

STOP

(stop the time code)

SCENE function

164 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

M SCENE INSERT

This button inserts one or more consecutive scenes

from scene memory into the event list. Use the FROM/

TO fields located at right to specify the starting and

ending scene numbers, and click this button; the speci-

fied scenes will be inserted as new events for recall

immediately before the currently selected event. The

EVENT TRIGGER field is set to “[MANUAL]” for all

of the new events.

N SCENE OVERWRITE

This button overwrites the scene assignments of con-

secutive events in the event list with multiple

consecutive scenes from scene memory. Use the

FROM/TO fields located at right to specify the starting

and ending scene numbers, and click this button; start-

ing at the currently selected line of the event list, the

SCENE TITLE field of the corresponding number of

subsequent events will be rewritten to the scenes you

specified. (The EVENT TRIGGER field will not

change.) If a blank line is selected, this button is

grayed-out.

O DELETE

This button deletes the event selected in the event list.

If a blank line is selected, this button is grayed-out.

P UNDO

This button returns the event list to its state prior to the

most recent editing operation. If undo cannot be exe-

cuted, this button is grayed-out.

Q ALL DELETE

This button deletes all events from the event list. When

you click this button, a confirmation message will

appear.

Note

If you edit the list (

–

) or change the time code, the

NEXT EVENT button in the constantly-displayed area will

search from the current time code. However if the time code

source is OFF, or if there is no time code setting in the EVENT

TRIGGER field (only for [MANUAL] and [INTERVAL]), the

NEXT EVENT will be the beginning of the list.

In this screen you can make settings for the Selective Recall

function, which, independently for each scene, lets you

exclude specific parameters/channels from recall, or con-

versely recall only specific parameters/channels.

A SELECTIVE RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE

Enables/disables Selective Recall for the currently

selected scene. If this button is set to DISABLE, the

Selective Recall function is disabled.

Note

• Unlike the RECALL SAFE screen (

➥

p.166) which is com-

mon to all scenes, the settings in the SELECTIVE RECALL

screen are independent for each scene.

• If you edit the settings of the SELECTIVE RECALL screen,

you must store that scene in order to make your changes

effective.

B SELECTION MODE

Use the following two buttons to choose how you want

to use the SELECTIVE RECALL screen.

• SAFE PARAMETER button

If this button is on, you can specify the channels/

parameters that will be excluded from recall

operations.

• RECALL PARAMETER button

If this button is on, you can specify the channels/

parameters that will be recalled.

Immediately after you switch buttons, all channels/

parameters will be subject to recall.

SELECTIVE RECALL screen

SELECTIVE RECALL

1 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 165

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

C SAFE ON/OFF buttons

RECALL ON/OFF buttons

The function of these buttons will depend on the

SELECTION MODE (

2) setting.

If the SAFE PARAMETER button is on

These buttons function as SAFE ON/OFF buttons that

specify the channels excluded from recall operations.

If the RECALL PARAMETER button is on

These buttons function as RECALL ON/OFF buttons

that specify the channels that will be recalled.

D Parameter matrix grid

Here you can select the parameters that will be recalled

(or excluded from recall). SAFE PARAMETER selec-

tions are shown in green, and RECALL PARAMETER

selections are shown in blue. If the ALL button is on, all

parameters other than CH to MIX will be recalled (or

excluded from recall).

Note

• Matrix grids corresponding to combinations that cannot be

selected are grayed-out.

• Settings in the parameter matrix grid are ignored for chan-

nels whose SAFE ON/OFF button or RECALL ON/OFF

button is switched off.

E ASSIGN

This area indicates the number of assigned channels for

each parameter.

F SET ALL

These buttons turn on the buttons of all channels or all

buttons of the corresponding parameter.

G CLEAR ALL

These buttons turn off the buttons of all channels or all

buttons of the corresponding parameter.

H OTHER SAFE/RECALL PARAMETERS

By using these buttons, parameters other than those

described above can be excluded from recall

operations.

If the SAFE PARAMETER button is turned on in the

SELECTION MODE (

2) area, these buttons specify

the parameters that will be excluded from recall. If the

RECALL PARAMETER button is turned on, these but-

tons specify the parameters that will be recalled.

I SET ALL

This button turns on all buttons of the OTHER SAFE

PARAMETERS area.

J CLEAR ALL

This button turns off all buttons of the OTHER SAFE

PARAMETERS area.

In the case of parameters (such as those listed below) for

which two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered chan-

nels or modules share a single parameter, the parameter

will be recalled (or excluded from recall) only if selective

recall is specified for both channels/modules.

• GATE STEREO LINK

• COMP STEREO LINK

• DELAY GANG

• PAN MODE

• GEQ LINK

• ATT GANG

• MS DECODE

• FIXED/VARI

Note

• Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together.

Channels/parameters excluded from recall operations by

either Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will not be

recalled.

• Selective Recall applies when a scene is recalled in PRE-

VIEW mode.

• When you recall a scene, there may be cases in which a

conflict in pairing settings between Recall Safe and Selec-

tive Recall causes the settings of a parameter to differ

between L and R channels. In such cases, the parameter

will be linked when it is next operated.

3 4

SCENE function

166 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can specify parameters/channels that will be

excluded from recall operations for all scenes.

A HA SAFE ON/OFF (Head Amp safe on/off)

buttons

These buttons select the channels whose assigned HA

(Head Amp) will be excluded from recall operations.

Note

If you scroll the scroll bar downward, you will see that the CH

column of the SAFE PARAMETERS area shows not only

input channels but also the following input ports.

AD1-AD48 . . . . INPUT jacks 1-48

AD1L-AD4R . . L/R channels of ST IN jacks 1-4

ExHA1-1–ExHA8-8 . . . . Channels 1-8 of external head amps

1-8 (AD8HR or AD824)

B CH SAFE ON/OFF (Channel safe on/off)

buttons

These buttons select the channels that will be excluded

from recall operations. These are linked with the

[RECALL SAFE] key of the panel.

C Parameter matrix grid

Here you can select the channel parameters that will be

excluded from recall operations. If the ALL button is

on, all parameters except for CH to MIX will be

excluded.

Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together.

Channels/parameters excluded from recall operations

by either Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will

not be recalled.

Note

Settings in the parameter matrix grid are ignored for channels

whose CH SAFE ON/OFF button is OFF.

D ASSIGN

This area indicates the number of assigned channels for

each parameter.

E SET ALL

These buttons turn on the buttons of all channels or all

buttons of the corresponding parameter.

F CLEAR ALL

These buttons turn off the buttons of all channels or all

buttons of the corresponding parameter.

G SELECTIVE RECALL PARAMETERS PASTE

This button copies parameter settings from the SELEC-

TIVE RECALL screen, and pastes them into the

RECALL SAFE screen. When you click the button, a

confirmation message will appear.

H OTHER SAFE PARAMETERS

By using these buttons, parameters other than those

described above can be excluded from recall

operations.

I SET ALL

This button turns on all buttons of the OTHER SAFE

PARAMETERS area.

J CLEAR ALL

This button turns off all buttons of the OTHER SAFE

PARAMETERS area.

RECALL SAFE screen

RECALL SAFE

1 2 3

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 167

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

In the case of parameters (such as those listed below) for

which two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered chan-

nels or modules share a single parameter, the parameter

will be excluded from recall only if recall safe is specified

for both channels/modules.

• GATE STEREO LINK

• COMP STEREO LINK

• DELAY GANG

• PAN MODE

• GEQ LINK

• ATT GANG

• MS DECODE

• FIXED/VARI

Note

• Selective Recall applies when a scene is recalled in PRE-

VIEW mode.

• When you recall a scene, there may be cases in which a

conflict in pairing settings between Recall Safe and Selec-

tive Recall causes the settings of a parameter to differ

between L and R channels. In such cases, the parameter

will be linked when it is next operated.

Here you can specify how fader and pan will change

smoothly to their new values over a specified duration

when the scene is recalled.

A FADING ENABLE/DISABLE

Enables/disables the Fade function for fader levels.

Note

• The settings in the FADE TIME screen are independent for

each scene. If you edit these settings, you must store that

scene in order to make your changes effective.

• The Fade function will apply when you recall a scene for

which the ENABLE button is selected.

B INPUT CH PANNING ENABLE/DISABLE

(Input channel panning enable/disable)

If the ENABLE button is selected, the Fade function

will also apply to the PAN (BALANCE) parameter of

input channels. This button is independent from the

FADING ENABLE/DISABLE (

1) setting. Use the fol-

lowing two buttons to select the input channels to

which this will apply.

• When the ALL INPUT button is on

The Fade function will apply to the PAN (BALANCE)

parameter of all input channels.

• When the SAME AS FADING button is on

The Fade function will apply to the PAN (BALANCE)

parameter of only the input channels you select in

C FADE TIME/START OFFSET

Use the following two buttons to select the parameters

that can be viewed/edited in the FADE TIME screen.

The indication at the right shows which button is cur-

rently selected.

• When the FADE TIME button is on

Edit the time (fade time) over which the fader or pan

parameter of the corresponding channel will reach the

new value when you recall a scene for which the Fade

function is enabled.

FADE TIME screen

FADE TIME

1 2 3

SCENE function

168 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• When the START OFFSET button is on

Edit the time (start offset time) after which the fader or

pan parameter of the corresponding channel will begin

changing when you recall a scene for which the Fade

function is enabled.

D Channel settings

Here you can turn the Fade function on/off and spec-

ify the fade time (or the start offset time) for each input

channel / output channel.

Use the channel name buttons to switch the Fade func-

tion on/off. The box below each button lets you specify

the fade time or start offset time. Move the cursor to a

box, and turn the [DATA] encoder or click the /

buttons at the left and right to edit the value.

The color of the numerical value shown in the box will

change as follows.

• When the FADE TIME button is on

The value is displayed in white for channels whose start

offset time is “----” (unset), and in light blue for chan-

nels that are set to 0.1 or above.

• When the START OFFSET button is on

The value is displayed in red for channels whose start

offset time is “----” (unset), and in yellow for channels

that are set to 0.1 or above.

If desired, you can copy the fade time / offset time

value from one channel to another as follows. Move

the cursor to the box that displays the value you want

to copy; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the

[ENTER] key to access the JOB SELECT window.

In this window, select the copy-destination item and

click the OK button; the value of the selected channel

will be copied.

E SET ALL

This button enables the Fade function for all input

channels or output channels.

F CLEAR ALL

This button disables the Fade function for all input

channels or output channels.

4 65

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 169

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can make settings for the Tracking Recall func-

tion, which adds a specified offset value to the value of each

fader when you recall a scene.

A TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE

Enables/disables the Tracking Recall function.

Hint

The settings in the TRACKING RECALL screen apply to all

scenes.

B DISPLAY SELECT

These buttons select the type of channels that are

shown in the TRACKING RECALL screen; either

INPUT (input channels) or OUTPUT (output

channels).

C SET ALL

This button enables Tracking Recall for all channels

(including channels not currently shown in the screen).

D CLEAR ALL

This button disables Tracking Recall for all channels

(including channels not currently shown in the screen).

E OFFSET LOCK

If this button is on, the sliders of all channels (includ-

ing channels not currently shown in the screen) will be

grayed-out, and you will be unable to edit the offset

value.

F ON (Tracking On)

These buttons enable/disable tracking for each chan-

nel. If the TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE

button is set to ENABLE, tracking is enabled on chan-

nels for which this button is ON.

Note

If OFFSET LOCK (

) is off, turning this button on will reset

the tracking offset of the corresponding channel to 0 dB. If in

this state you operate the fader of the corresponding channel,

the relative amount of fader movement from the point at which

this button was turned on will be memorized as the tracking

offset. You can then turn OFFSET LOCK on to lock the offset.

This offset value will be added whenever you subsequently

recall a scene.

G Tracking offset

Here you can specify the offset value applied to each

channel if tracking is enabled. The range is ±15 dB.

While OFFSET LOCK (

5) is off, operating the panel

faders will cause these values to change as well; how-

ever, adjusting the offset values in the screen will not

cause the panel faders to move.

TRACKING RECALL screen

TRACKING RECALL

21 5

SCENE function

170 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

This screen lets you copy parameter settings of any desired

channel or parameter in the current scene, and paste them

into one or more scenes in scene memory.

A PASTE MODE

Select the type of copy-source parameter from the fol-

lowing choices. You cannot select more than one type

simultaneously.

INPUT . . . . . . Input channel parameters

OUTPUT . . . . Output channel parameters

DCA, GEQ, EFFECT . . . . DCA level or mute on/off

status, GEQ settings, inter-

nal effect settings

B CURRENT SCENE

Here you can select the channels and parameters that

will be copied from the currently selected scene. The

contents shown in this area will depend on the paste

mode (

1) you choose.

• If Paste Mode= INPUT

Select input channels in the left area, and select param-

eters in the right area. You can select the following

parameters.

• If Paste Mode= OUTPUT

Select output channels in the left area, and select

parameters in the right area. You can select the follow-

ing parameters.

Note

• If Paste Mode= INPUT, and the parameter being pasted is

NAME, the name library linked to the selected scene will be

searched automatically and pasted.

• Be aware that if other scenes link to this library, the paste

operation will overwrite the library, meaning that other

scenes may be affected.

GLOBAL PASTE screen

GLOBAL PASTE

ALL

All parameters except for HA, PATCH, and

NAME

ATT Attenuator

EQ EQ function settings

GATE GATE function settings

COMP COMP function settings

DELAY DELAY function settings

FADER Fader level

ON CH [ON] key on/off status

PAN/BAL Pan/balance settings

INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point

SEND

*1. If the SEND button is on, use the MIX buttons (1–24) to

select the applicable MIX bus. If the MIX bus is paired,

SEND PAN is included in PAN/BAL if FOLLOW PAN

“VARI” is on, or included in SEND if it is off.

Send level to the desired MIX bus(es)

DCA Associated DCA group

MUTE Associated mute group

LCR LCR screen settings

Settings for the head amp assigned to the

corresponding input channel

PATCH

Settings for the input patch assigned to the

corresponding input channel

NAME

Name assigned to the corresponding input

channel

EQ EQ function settings

COMP COMP function settings

DELAY DELAY function settings

FADER Fader level

ON CH [ON] key on/off status

BAL Balance settings

INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point

TO MTRX

*1. If the TO MTRX button is on, use the MATRIX buttons

(1–8) to select the applicable MATRIX bus.

Send level to the desired MATRIX bus(es)

DCA Associated DCA group

MUTE Associated mute group

LCR LCR screen settings

WITHOUT

MIX SEND/

WITH MIX

SEND

Selects whether the send level sent from

input channels to the selected MIX bus will

be included (WITH...) or will not be included

(WITHOUT...) in the pasted data.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 171

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

C DESTINATION SCENE (Paste-destination

scene)

This list lets you select the scenes to which the data will

be pasted. If you want to select multiple consecutive

scenes as the paste-destination, select the starting num-

ber in the upper list and the ending number in the

lower list. (If you’re pasting to only one scene, select

the same scene in the upper and lower lists.)

You can change the order in which the list is sorted by

clicking the buttons shown at the top of the scene

number, SCENE TITLE, TIME STAMP, or COM-

MENT columns.

D PASTE

This button executes the Global Paste operation. When

you click this button, a confirmation message will

appear.

In the case of parameters such as those listed below, of

which only one exists for each two adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered channels or modules, the

parameter will be pasted only if both channels/mod-

ules are specified for pasting.

• GATE STEREO LINK

• COMP STEREO LINK

• DELAY GANG

• PAN MODE

• GEQ LINK

• ATT GANG

• MS DECODE

• FIXED/VARI

Note

• Paste is valid even in PREVIEW mode.

• When you paste to a scene, there may be cases in which a

conflict in pairing settings causes the settings of a parame-

ter to differ between L and R channels. In such cases, the

parameter will be recalled with those settings, and will be

linked when it is next operated.

MIDI REMOTE function

Here you can select the types of MIDI message transmitted

and received by the PM5D, and select the MIDI port that

will be used.

A MODE

Here you can select the way in which program changes

and control changes will be transmitted/received.

• PROGRAM CHANGE MODE

In this area you can select the program change trans-

mission/reception method.

SINGLE

If this button is on, program changes will be trans-

mitted/received on a single MIDI channel (Single

mode).

OMNI ON/OFF

If this button is on, program changes of all MIDI

channels will be received in Single mode (this is

unavailable in Multi mode).

BANK ON/OFF

If this button is on, bank select messages will be trans-

mitted and received in Single mode (this is

unavailable in Multi mode).

MIDI SETUP screen

MIDI SETUP

1 2 3 4

MIDI REMOTE function

172 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

MULTI

If this button is on, program changes will be trans-

mitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi

mode).

Hint

• If program change reception is on, the PM5D’s scenes or

effects will switch when the appropriate program change is

received from an external device. Additionally, if transmis-

sion is on, program changes will be transmitted to an

external device when scenes or effects are switched on the

PM5D.

• The scene/effect assignment for each program change num-

ber is made in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen (

➥

p.173).

• CONTROL CHANGE MODE

In this area you can select the control change transmis-

sion/reception method.

NRPN

If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be

transmitted/received as NRPN messages.

TABLE [SINGLE]

If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be

transmitted/received as control change messages on a

single MIDI channel.

TABLE [MULTI]

If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be

transmitted/received as control change messages on

multiple MIDI channels.

Hint

• If control change reception is on, the PM5D’s parameters

will change when the appropriate control change is received

from an external device. If transmission is on, a control

change will be transmitted to an external device when you

edit a parameter on the PM5D.

• If NRPN is selected as the control change mode, the assign-

ment of parameters to NRPN is pre-defined and cannot be

changed.

• If TABLE [SINGLE] or TABLE [MULTI] is selected as the

control change mode, the parameter assignment for each

control number can be edited in the MIDI CTRL CHANGE

screen (

➥

p.174).

B Tx (MIDI transmission)

Here you can make various settings for transmission of

MIDI messages.

• MIDI PORT Tx (MIDI transmission port)

Select the port at which the PM5D will transmit MIDI

messages. You have the following choices.

MIDI . . . . . . . The rear panel MIDI IN connector

USB . . . . . . . . The rear panel USB connector

SLOT 1–4 . . . A card that supports serial transmis-

sion and is installed in rear panel slot

1–4

Move the cursor to this box and turn the [DATA]

encoder or click the / buttons at left or right to

change the setting; then press the [ENTER] key to

finalize the change.

If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, you will need to spec-

ify the port number (1–8) in the field on the right

(Depending on the card that is installed, some slots

may have only one port.)

• SINGLE MODE MIDI CH Tx (MIDI transmission

channel for Single mode)

Select the MIDI channel on which the PM5D will

transmit program changes, control changes, parameter

changes, and bulk data. (This setting is valid only in

Single mode.) Move the cursor to this box and turn the

[DATA] encoder or click the / buttons at left or

right to change the setting; then press the [ENTER] key

to finalize the change.

• PROGRAM CHANGE Tx (Program change

transmission)

• CONTROL CHANGE Tx (Control change

transmission)

• PARAMETER CHANGE Tx (Parameter change

transmission)

These buttons turn transmission on/off for program

changes, control changes, and parameter changes

respectively.

Hint

Parameter changes are a method by which PM5D parame-

ters are transmitted in the form of system exclusive

messages.

• MIDI THRU Tx (Thru output)

Select the port from which messages input to MIDI

THRU Rx will be output. The selection method is the

same as for MIDI PORT Tx.

C Rx (MIDI reception)

Here you can make various settings for reception of

MIDI messages.

• MIDI PORT Rx (MIDI reception port)

Select the port from which the PM5D will receive

MIDI messages.

• SINGLE MODE MIDI CH Rx (MIDI reception chan-

nel for Single mode)

Select the MIDI channel on which the PM5D will

receive program changes, control changes, parameter

changes, and bulk data. (This setting is valid only in

Single mode.)

• PROGRAM CHANGE Rx (Program change

reception)

• CONTROL CHANGE Rx (Control change

reception)

• PARAMETER CHANGE Rx (Parameter change

reception)

These buttons turn transmission on/off for program

changes, control changes, and parameter changes

respectively.

• MIDI THRU Rx (Thru input)

Here you can select the port that will “thru input” the

received MIDI messages.

D ECHO (MIDI message echo output)

Here you can select whether received program changes,

control changes, parameter changes, and other MIDI

messages will be echoed out from the MIDI transmis-

sion port.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 173

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

E MMC OUTPUT PORT

This selects the port that will transmit MMC (MIDI

Machine Control).

F MIDI REMOTE OUTPUT PORT (MIDI remote

output port)

Here you can select the port from which MIDI mes-

sages will be transmitted by the MIDI Remote

function, for each of the four banks. Incoming mes-

sages used by the LEARN function of the MIDI

REMOTE screen are also received at this port.

G PM5D EDITOR (PM5D EDITOR connection

port)

Here you can select the port and ID number (1–8) used

to communicate with the PM5D EDITOR application,

which controls the PM5D from a computer.

In this screen you can select the scene or effect library

assigned to each MIDI program number.

A MIDI SETUP

Select the ports that the PM5D will use to transmit and

receive MIDI messages, and the MIDI channels. This

item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP

screen.

B PROGRAM CHANGE SETUP

Here you can specify how program changes will be

transmitted and received, and turn transmission and

reception on/off. This item is linked with the settings in

the MIDI SETUP screen.

C ECHO ON/OFF

This selects whether program changes received from an

external device are echoed-out from the MIDI trans-

mission port. This item is linked with the settings in the

MIDI SETUP screen.

MIDI PGM CHANGE (MIDI program

change) screen

MIDI PGM CHANGE

MIDI REMOTE function

174 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

D List

In this list you can view and select the event (scene

recall / effect library recall) assigned to each program

number.

• CH/BANK (Channel/Bank)

Indicates the MIDI channel on which the program

change is transmitted/received. In Single mode when

the BANK ON/OFF button is on, this column is dis-

played as BANK, and the value shown corresponds to

the bank number.

• PGM No. (Program number)

Indicates the program number 1–128.

• LIBRARY NAME

Here you can view/select the type and the number of

the event (scene or effect) assigned to each channel/

program number.

To make an assignment, click the desired line to select

it. (That line will be highlighted in the center of the

list.) Click the button shown at the left of the

LIBRARY NAME field; the MIDI PGM CHANGE

SETUP window will appear. In this window you can

select the type of event (a scene, or a library item for

effect 1–8) and its number.

When a program change on the corresponding MIDI

channel is received, the event assigned to that program

number will be recalled. In addition, the correspond-

ing program change will be transmitted when this

event is recalled on the PM5D.

E PRESET

Clicking this button will restore all event assignments

in the list to their default state.

F CLEAR ALL

Clicking this button will delete all event assignments in

the list.

Here you can select the PM5D parameter (fader operation,

[ON] key operation, etc.) assigned to each control number.

A MIDI SETUP

Select the ports that the PM5D will use to transmit and

receive MIDI messages, and the MIDI channels. This

item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP

screen.

B CONTROL CHANGE SETUP

Here you can specify how control changes will be

transmitted and received, and turn transmission and

reception on/off. This item is linked with the settings in

the MIDI SETUP screen. You have the following

choices of transmission/reception method.

• NRPN

If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be

transmitted/received as NRPN messages.

• TABLE [SINGLE]

If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be

transmitted/received as control change messages on a

single MIDI channel according to the assignments in

the list (

4).

• TABLE [MULTI]

If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be

transmitted/received as control change messages on

5 64

MIDI CTRL CHANGE (MIDI control

change) screen

MIDI CTRL CHANGE

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 175

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

multiple MIDI channels according to the assignments

in the list (

4).

C ECHO ON/OFF

This selects whether control changes received from an

external device are echoed-out from the MIDI trans-

mission port. This item is linked with the settings in the

MIDI SETUP screen.

D List

In this list you can view/select the events assigned to

each control number.

• CH (Channel)

Indicates the MIDI channel on which the control

change is transmitted/received.

• CTRL No. (Control number)

Indicates the control number 0–119. Control numbers

0, 32, and 96–110 cannot be specified.

• CTRL CHANGE EVENT (Control change event)

Indicates/selects the type of event assigned to the corre-

sponding channel / control number.

To make an assignment, click the desired line (that line

will be highlighted in the center of the list); then click

the button at the left of the CTRL CHANGE

EVENT field to open the MIDI CTRL CHANGE

SETUP window. In this window you can specify the

parameter in three levels (mode, parameters 1/2).

When a control change on the corresponding MIDI

channel is received, the event assigned to that control

number will be edited. In addition, the corresponding

control change will be transmitted when this event is

edited on the PM5D.

Note

This list is ignored if the control change mode is set to NRPN.

E PRESET

Clicking this button will restore all event assignments

in the list to their default state.

F CLEAR ALL

Clicking this button will delete all event assignments in

the list.

Here you can assign MIDI messages to panel faders, CH

[ON] keys, encoders, and ENCODER [ON] keys, and

make settings for the MIDI Remote function used to con-

trol external devices.

A TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE (Enable/dis-

able transmission)

Enables/disables the MIDI Remote function. You can

enable/disable this function for each of the four banks

(memories in which MIDI Remote settings are stored).

B ASSIGN TO CH STRIP SECTION (Assign to

channel strip)

You can choose the following two as the channel strip

to which the MIDI Remote function is assigned (both

can be selected simultaneously if desired).

INPUT CH . . . . . . . INPUT channel strip 1–24

STIN/FXRTN . . . . . ST IN/FX RTN channel strip 1–

This setting applies to all four banks.

C Channel selection

Select the MIDI Remote channel for which you want to

make settings. When you click the / buttons at the

left and right of the box, the corresponding name is

displayed in the box at the right. You can change the

name by clicking the button of the right box.

Note

You cannot change the MIDI Remote channel you’re editing

while any of the LEARN buttons (

) are on. You will have to

turn off the LEARN button first.

5 6

MIDI REMOTE screen

MIDI REMOTE

1 2

MIDI REMOTE function

176 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

D BANK SELECT

Of the four banks, select the bank for which you want

to make settings. When you use the A–D buttons to

select a bank, the name of that bank will be displayed in

the field immediately above. You can click the but-

ton at the left to edit the name of the bank.

E CLEAR BANK

This button erases the currently selected bank (all

MIDI messages will be deleted).

F MIDI message

From the top, these fields assign MIDI messages to the

ENCODER [ON] keys, encoders, CH [ON] keys, and

faders. Click the to open the MIDI REMOTE

SETUP window, and input the message as hexadeci-

mal values. You can input the following values.

Hint

When you click a hexadecimal value, the region interpreted as

a MIDI message that includes that value will be displayed in

red.

G LEARN

Use this button to assign a received MIDI message to a

controller. When you turn on one of the four LEARN

buttons, the MIDI message received by the PM5D will

be assigned to the corresponding controller. The

LEARN function uses the MIDI messages received at

the input port specified by the MIDI REMOTE OUT-

PUT PORT in the MIDI SETUP screen.

Hint

• MIDI messages assigned using the LEARN button can be a

maximum of 16 bytes long (the 17th and subsequent bytes

are discarded). If the message is less than 16 bytes long,

END will be immediately after the last data value.

• If a control change is received, the third byte will automati-

cally be replaced by FAD (if the assignment destination is

FADER), ENC (if the assignment destination is ENCODER),

or SW (if the assignment destination is ENCODER ON or

CH ON).

• If more than one message is received while a LEARN but-

ton is on, the last message will be used. (If the status byte

was omitted from the last message, the appropriate status

byte will be added.)

H LATCH

If a specific byte is set to “SW” in a message assigned to

an ENCODER [ON] key or CH [ON] key, use the

LATCH button to select one of the following

behaviors.

• If the LATCH button is on

The on/off status will change each time you press the

key (Latched). If you press the key from the Off state, a

MIDI message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be

transmitted, and when you press the same key once

again a MIDI message with 00(H) as the SW value will

be transmitted.

• If the LATCH button is off

The switch will be on only while you are holding it

down, and will turn off when you release it

(Unlatched). Immediately after you press the key, a

MIDI message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be

transmitted; immediately after you release the key, a

MIDI message with a SW value of 00(H) will be

transmitted.

If a specific byte is set to “ENC” (or “FAD”) in a mes-

sage assigned to an ENCODER [ON] key or a CH

[ON] key, use the LATCH button to select one of the

following behaviors.

• If the LATCH button is on

If you press the key from the Off state, a MIDI message

with the current setting of the encoder (or fader) as the

ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted, and when you

press the same key once again a MIDI message with a

value of 00(H) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be

transmitted.

• If the LATCH button is off

The moment you press the key, a MIDI message with

the current setting of the encoder (or fader) as the ENC

(or FAD) value will be transmitted; the moment you

release the key, a MIDI message with 00(H) as the ENC

(or FAD) value will be transmitted.

Note

If SW/ENC/FAD is not specified as the last byte of the MIDI

message, turning the key on or off will transmit the same MIDI

message; i.e., the same message is transmitted when the key

goes off.

Value

Available

Assignments

Content

00(H)–

FF(H)

All

The MIDI message that is trans-

mitted (hexadecimal).

END All

Indicates the end of the MIDI

message. When you operate the

corresponding controller, the

MIDI message from the begin-

ning until immediately before

END will be transmitted.

SW All

Indicates the on/off status of the

encoder [ON] key or the channel

[ON] key. A value of 7F(H) is

transmitted when the key turns

on, and a value of 00(H) is trans-

mitted when the key turns off. If

this is assigned to an ENCODER

or FADER, the current value of

the key will be transmitted when

the encoder or fader is operated.

ENC

ENCODER

ON/

ENCODER

Indicates the current position of

the encoder. If assigned to an

ENCODER, a value of 00–7F(H)

is transmitted when the encoder

is operated. If assigned to an

ENCODER [ON] key, the current

value of the encoder is transmit-

ted when the key is switched on.

FAD

CH ON/

FADER

Indicates the current position of

the fader. If assigned to a

FADER, a value of 00–7F(H) is

transmitted when the fader is

operated. If assigned to a CH

[ON] key, the current value of the

fader is transmitted when the key

is switched on.

6 7

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 177

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can make settings for GPI (General Purpose

Interface) input/output, used to transfer control signals

between the PM5D and an external device.

A GPI IN port

These are the numbers of the GPI IN ports for which

you can make settings.

B GPI IN status

The yellow bar indicates the input signal voltage state

of the corresponding port. If the bar is not shown, the

signal is in the grounded state; if the bar is displayed to

the right edge, the signal is at the high level state. Use

the POLARITY (

3) field to select whether the signal is

active when low or high.

C POLARITY

This selects how GPI IN on/off will be detected. You

can choose Low Active (active when the key is

grounded) or High Active (active when key is open, or

when a high level signal is input).

D FUNCTION

E PARAMETER

These fields indicate the function that is executed when

the corresponding GPI IN port becomes active (or the

function that is controlled by the voltage value being

input from the GPI IN port), and option parameters

for that function.

To edit the settings, click the button at the left to

open the GPI IN PORT ASSIGN window, and select

the function and parameter from the following table.

GPI screen

GPI

1 2

3 4 5

FUNCTION PARAMETER PM5D operation

NO ASSIGN — No assignment

MONITOR

DIMMER ON

Switches the Dimmer

function on/off

SOURCE=

[monitor source

name]

Switches the monitor

source

MONO ON

Switches the monitor sec-

tion [MONO] key on

TALKBACK

LATCH

Switches the Talkback

function on/off (latched

operation)

UNLATCH

Switches the Talkback

function on/off (unlatched

operation)

CH ON-

LATCH

[channel name]

Switches the channel on/

off (latched operation)

CH ON-

UNLATCH

[channel name]

Switches the channel on/

off (unlatched operation)

FADER

LEVEL

[channel name]

Modiﬁes the fader value

(LEVEL parameter)

according to the voltage

SUR-

ROUND PAN

FRONT-REAR

PAN [SEL]

according to the voltage.

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN [SEL]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (left/right) of the

selected channel accord-

ing to the voltage.

FRONT-REAR

PAN [ODD]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (front/rear) of the

selected odd-numbered

channel according to the

voltage.

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN [ODD]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (left/right) of the

selected odd-numbered

channel according to the

voltage.

FRONT-REAR

PAN [EVEN]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (front/rear) of the

selected even-numbered

channel according to the

voltage.

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN [EVEN]

Modiﬁes the surround pan-

ning (left/right) of the

selected even-numbered

channel according to the

voltage.

USER

DEFINED

KEY FUNC-

TION

[User Deﬁned

key bank / key

number]

While the external input is

active, executes the same

operation as when the

selected User Deﬁned key

is pressed

USER

DEFINED

KEY LED

[User Deﬁned

key bank / key

number]

While the external input is

active, lights the LED of

the selected User Deﬁned

key

PEAK HOLD

—

Switches the Peak Hold

function on/off

OSCILLA-

TOR ON

Switches the Oscillator on/

off

SOLO ON

Switches the Solo func-

tion on/off

MIDI REMOTE function

178 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ GPI IN MONITOR

F GPI IN monitor

The voltage from the GPI IN port selected by the X-

AXIS field (

8) and Y-AXIS field (9) is respectively

indicated by a yellow in the X-axis (horizontal) and

Y-axis (vertical) dimensions of the graph.

The range of voltage variation used to determine the

active/inactive status is shown as a red rectangle.

G CALIBRATION

This button calibrates the range of voltage variation

used by the PM5D to determine active/inactive status,

so that the range will be appropriate for the voltages

being input from the GPI PORT. (For details on using

calibration ➥ p.125)

When you turn this button on, the range of voltage

variation will be temporarily cleared; the range will be

updated every time the GPI IN voltage changes. When

you turn this button off, the range of variation will be

memorized, and this range of variation will subse-

quently be used to determine the active/inactive state.

H X-AXIS

I Y-AXIS

These fields select the GPI IN port for which calibra-

tion will be performed. You can click the /

buttons at left and right to change the port.

If you are using a two-dimensional controller such as a

joystick, specify a port for both the X-axis and Y-axis. If

you want to perform calibration for only one direc-

tion, set one of the ports to “-----.”

J REVERSE

This button inverts the low/high level of the input,

changing the displayed direction of the graph. This is

equivalent to switching the POLARITY (3) of the

selected GPI IN port.

❏ GPI OUT

K GPI OUT port

These are the numbers of the GPI OUT ports for which

you can make settings.

L GPI OUT status

This indicates the state of the output signal for the cor-

responding port. The L/H character indicates whether

the signal level is Low (the output level is grounded) or

High (the output level is high). The background color

is yellow when active, and gray when inactive. Use the

POLARITY (

L) field to select whether the signal is

active when low or high.

M POLARITY

Selects the polarity of the signal that is output when the

GPI OUT port becomes active. You can select either

Low Active (grounded when active) or High Active

(high level when active).

N TEST

This button tests the operation of each GPI OUT port.

While this button is on, the corresponding GPI OUT

port will temporarily become active, and a signal will

be output according to the POLARITY (

L) setting.

O FADER START

Indicates the channel of the fader assigned as a trigger

to each GPI OUT port, and the fader mode (trigger

detection method) of that fader.

To edit the settings, click the button at the left to

open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select

the fader mode and channel. You can select the follow-

ing fader modes.

• FADER START

A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be

output when the fader of the selected channel moves

from –60 dB or below to exceed –60 dB.

• FADER STOP

A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be

output when the fader of the selected channel reaches

–∞ dB.

• FADER TALLY

A control signal will be output when the fader of the

selected channel moves from –60 dB or below to

exceed –60 dB. This control signal will be held until the

fader reaches –∞ dB (or until that GPI OUT port

receives a different trigger).

The setting of the GPI screen’s FADER START field is

linked with the GPI-related settings of the FADER

START screen (➥ p.179).

K L

M N O P Q

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 179

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

P USER DEFINED KEYS

This area indicates the User Defined keys that are

assigned as triggers to each GPI OUT port, and their

operations.

To edit the setting, click the button at the left to

open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window; from the

list, select the User Defined key bank (A–D) and num-

ber (1–25), and how the trigger signal will be

transmitted. As the transmission method for the trig-

ger signal, you can select either Latch (switch between

active/inactive each time the key is pressed) or Unlatch

(active only while the key is pressed).

Q TALLY

This area indicates the state of other Tally output func-

tions assigned as triggers to each port. When you

execute the corresponding operation on the PM5D, a

control signal will be output from the corresponding

GPI OUT port. This control signal will be held until

you defeat the above operation (or until that GPI OUT

port receives a different trigger).

To edit the settings, click the button at the left to

open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select

one of the following functions.

Here you can make settings for the Fader Start function

which lets you use input channel faders to control GPI

OUT ports or external devices.

A INPUT CH (Input channel)

This area shows the number and name of the channels

(input channels, ST IN channels) for which you can

make settings. When you click a line to select it, that

line will be highlighted in the center of the list.

B OUTPUT TYPE

C PARAMETER

Indicates the type of signal that will be output when

you operate the corresponding fader, and option

parameters for it. To edit the setting, click the but-

ton at the left of the OUTPUT TYPE field to open the

FADER START ASSIGN window. You can select the

following output types and parameters.

• NO ASSIGN

No assignment.

• GPI

A trigger will be sent to the specified GPI OUT port

according to the fader operation of the corresponding

channel, and a control signal will be output. (The

polarity of the control signal will be as specified by the

settings in the GPI screen.) If this output type is

selected, you can choose from the following two option

parameters.

FADER START . . . GPI OUT port from which the

trigger is sent when the fader

changes from below –60 dB to

exceed –60 dB.

Function PM5D operation

NO ASSIGN No assignment

POWER ON The PM5D’s power is turned on

SOLO ON [SOLO] key is turned on

GPI IN 1 FUNC-

TION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 1

becomes active

GPI IN 2 FUNC-

TION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 2

becomes active

GPI IN 3 FUNC-

TION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 3

becomes active

GPI IN 4 FUNC-

TION

The function assigned to GPI IN port 4

becomes active

PREVIEW ON

SCENE MEMORY section [PREVIEW]

key is turned on

CUE ON [INPUT

ONLY]

Input channel [CUE] key is turned on

CUE ON [DCA

ONLY]

DCA [CUE] key is turned on

CUE ON [OUT-

PUT ONLY]

Output channel [CUE] key is turned on

CUE ON Any [CUE] key is turned on

FADER START screen

FADER START

1 2 3 4

MIDI REMOTE function

180 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

FADER STOP . . . . . GPI OUT port from which the

trigger is sent when the fader

reaches –∞ dB.

Note that the GPI-related settings you make in the

FADER START screen are linked with the FADER

START field of the GPI screen.

For example, if in the FADER START screen you spec-

ify different ports for the FADER START parameter

and FADER STOP parameter of a certain channel, the

FADER START field of the GPI screen will be assigned

to the corresponding channel (Fader Mode= FADER

START/FADER STOP) of those ports. (The opposite

also applies.)

If the same port is specified for the FADER START

parameter and the FADER STOP parameter, the GPI

screen FADER START field will be assigned to the

channel corresponding to that port (Fader Mode=

FADER TALLY). (The opposite is also true.)

•MMC

An MMC command will be sent from the currently-

enabled MIDI port according to the fader operation of

the corresponding channel. (The MIDI transmit port is

selected in the MIDI SETUP screen.)

An MMC PLAY command is transmitted when the

fader changes from below –60 dB to –60 dB or higher,

and an MMC STOP command is transmitted when the

fader reaches –∞ dB.

If this output type is selected, you can use an option

parameter to specify the MMC device ID number (1–

127 or ALL).

•RS422

An RS422 protocol command will be sent from the

RS422 REMOTE connector according to the fader

operation of the corresponding channel.

An RS422 protocol PLAY command is transmitted

when the fader changes from below –60 dB to –60 dB

or higher, and an RS422 protocol STOP command is

transmitted when the fader reaches –∞ dB.

D CLEAR ALL

Clears the Output Type field assignments of all

channels.

⇔

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 181

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can use MMC/RS422 protocol commands to

remotely control transport/locate operations on a recorder

or other external device from the PM5D.

A MMC DEVICE No.

Indicates the device ID number

of the external device to be con-

trolled via MMC. To change

this setting, click the / but-

tons at left and right to choose

from the range 1–127 or ALL

(applies to all device ID

numbers).

B RS422 DATA FORMAT

Select the format (P2 or

DENON) of the RS422 com-

mands sent from the RS422

REMOTE connector. When you

click this button, a confirma-

tion message will appear.

Note

The RS422 command format you

specify in this screen also applies to

the RS422 commands issued by

the Fader Start function or the User

Defined keys.

Note

DENON format is a set of commands used in devices such as

Denon’s professional CD (DN-C680) and MD (DN-M1050R)

players. On the CD or MD player, set the settings to 9600 bps

and RS422. If you are using DENON format, clicking the

button during Play will enter Pause mode; clicking the

button during Standby will Stop. While stopped, click the

button once again if you want to Standby. Clicking the

button will return to the previous track, and clicking the

button will advance to the next track. Use a D-sub 9-pin

straight cable to connect the REMOTE RS422 connector to

the device you wish to control using P2 or DENON format.

C Transport

These buttons operate the transport of an external

device. When you click a button, the corresponding

MMC/RS422 command (from the left, REWIND,

FAST FORWARD, STOP, PLAY, REC) will be

transmitted.

There is an indicator above each RS422 transport but-

ton; the indicator will light as follows according to the

status of the external device being controlled.

•P2

• DENON

TRANSPORT screen

TRANSPORT

Playing lit

Fast-forwarding lit

Rewinding lit

Stopped lit

Recording and lit

Playing lit

Paused blinking

Standby lit

Stopped All dark

Recording and lit

Recording paused lit, blinking

5 64

MIDI REMOTE function

182 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

D LOCATE POINT

These buttons correspond to each locate point. Twenty

locate points can be specified for MMC-compatible

devices, and another twenty locate points can be sepa-

rately specified for RS422-compatible devices. When

you click buttons 1–20, an MMC command or RS422

command for moving to that locate point will be

transmitted.

E Time code

This field indicates the time code that is specified for

each locate point. To edit the time code, click the

button located at the left to open the MMC/RS422

LOCATE POINT window, and specify the new time

code in hours/minutes/seconds/frames. (In the case of

DENON format, use track/minute/second/frame units

to specify the value.) You can also use the CAPTURE

button located at the right to capture the time code

being received by the PM5D.

F CAPTURE

This button captures the time code currently being

received by the PM5D, and inputs it in the time code

field. In the case of MMC, the time code source, frame

rate, and offset time can be specified in the EVENT

LIST screen (SCENE function). (➥ p.161) In the case

of RS422, the time data at that moment for the exter-

nal device being controlled will be captured.

Here you can remotely control various functions of a

Yamaha DME series digital mixing engine.

Hint

As of this writing (August 2004), this function can be used with

the DME series models DME64N and DME24N. (This func-

tion cannot be used with the DME32.)

A Component type selection area

Here you can select the type of DME series component

that you want to control from the PM5D. When you

click the / buttons at the left and right to select the

type of component, the display in the central area of

the screen will change accordingly. The following types

of component can be selected.

• SETUP

Select the port connecting the PM5D and the DME

series unit, and initiate or terminate communication.

• GEQ

Control the DME series unit’s graphic EQ from the

PM5D.

• PEQ

Control the DME series unit’s parametric EQ from the

PM5D.

• CROSS OVER

An internal signal within the DME series unit is divided

into six bands, and the output level, filter slope and

type, and cutoff frequency etc. can be controlled for

each band. This screen also lets you specify the cross-

over frequency at which the bands are divided.

• LONG DELAY

• SHORT DELAY

Control the long delay and short delay functions of the

DME series unit from the PM5D.

• MATRIX

Specify the level of the signals sent from a specific input

of the DME series unit to all outputs, or from all inputs

to a specific output.

• SLOT OUTPUT

For each slot of the DME series unit, specify the out-

put level, delay time, and phase setting of each port.

B Component selection area

From the type of component you selected in 1, select

the component that you want to control.

DME CONTROL screen

3 41 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 183

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

C SCENE

This area indicates/selects the scene that will be stored/

recalled on the DME series unit. When you click the /

buttons located at left and right to select a number,

the name of that scene is shown in the field at right.

D STORE/RECALL

These buttons save (overwrite) the settings of the DME

series unit edited in the PM5D’s screen into the scene

selected in the SCENE area, or recall the scene selected

in the SCENE area into the DME.

Note

• When storing a DME scene from the PM5D’s screen, you

can only store by overwriting an existing scene on the DME;

you cannot store the settings as a new scene or edit the

scene name.

• If SETUP is selected, items

, and

are not shown.

E Parameter display area

This area displays the parameters of the currently

selected component. The displayed contents will

depend on the component.

F ASSIGN TO FADERS (DCA fader

assignments)

You can use DCA faders 1–8 to control the parameters

of the component currently shown in the screen.

Note

The parameters that can be assigned to DCA faders will

depend on the component. This function may not be available

for some components.

❏ Connecting the PM5D with a DME

series unit

Various methods for connecting the PM5D with a DME

series unit to transmit and receive audio signals and con-

trol signals are shown below.

Note

If characters other than alphabetical characters and symbols

(e.g., double-byte characters such as Japanese) are used on

the DME series unit in a component name or scene name,

such characters may not be displayed correctly.

1 Bi-directional connection via CobraNet

This connection method uses CobraNet (a format for

transmitting multi-channel audio signals and control sig-

nals over Ethernet). Install an MY16-C CobraNet format

compliant digital I/O card in a slot on both the PM5D and

the DME series unit, and use an Ethernet cable to connect

the two MY16-C cards. This method allows bi-directional

transfer of audio signals over a single cable. For example,

signals can be sent via the PM5D’s MIX bus to the DME

for processing, and then returned to a PM5D input

channel.

2 Bi-directional connection using the CASCADE IN/

OUT connectors (DME64N only)

In this connection method, the CASCADE IN connector

and CASCADE OUT connector of the PM5D and the

DME64N are connected to each other, allowing bi-direc-

tional transfer of audio signals. Since the DME24N does

not have CASCADE IN/OUT connectors, it cannot use this

method.

3 Uni-directional connection using the CASCADE IN/

OUT connectors — 1 (DME64N only)

This method is a uni-directional connection that sends

audio signals from the DME64N to the PM5D via its CAS-

CADE IN connector.

4 Uni-directional connection using the CASCADE IN/

OUT connectors — 2 (DME64N only)

This method is a uni-directional connection that sends

audio signals from the PM5D via its CASCADE OUT con-

nector to the DME64N.

Note

When using the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors to make con-

nections, the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors are used as the

connectors, but the settings will be the same as when using

slot input/output. In the CASCADE CONNECTION area of the

MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function), you will

need to make settings so that the CASCADE IN connector is

assigned to the SLOT IN port (if using the CASCADE IN con-

nector) or the SLOT OUT port is assigned to the CASCADE

OUT connector (if using the CASCADE OUT connector).

Hint

If desired, you can control the DME series unit from the PM5D

without transmitting or received audio signals. In this case,

simply make one of the connections shown in examples

–

; control signals will be sent from the PM5D to the DME.

DME64N

DME24N

PM5D

MY16-CMY16-C

SlotSlot

DME64N

PM5D

CASCADE

OUT connector

CASCADE

OUT connector

CASCADE

IN connector

CASCADE

IN connector

DME64N

PM5D

CASCADE

IN connector

CASCADE

OUT connector

DME64N

PM5D

CASCADE

OUT connector

CASCADE

IN connector

MIDI REMOTE function

184 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ Initiating communication between the

PM5D and the DME series unit

To select the port used for audio signal transmission/recep-

tion between the PM5D and the DME series unit, and to

initiate communication, proceed as follows.

Connect the PM5D and the DME series unit.

In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the

[MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the

DME CONTROL screen.

In the component selection area at the upper

left of the screen, select SETUP.

A screen like the following will appear.

The SETUP screen contains the following items.

A CONNECT

This button initiates or terminates the connection

between the PM5D and the DME series unit.

B MIDI PGM CHANGE (MIDI program

change)

If this button is on, a program change message will be

transmitted to the DME via the I/O card (MY16-C) or

via the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors when a scene is

recalled on the PM5D. This allows scenes to be recalled

on the DME in tandem with scene recall operations on

the PM5D.

C INPUT PORT

Here you can select the PM5D port that will receive

audio signals from the DME.

D MONITOR PORT

Here you can select the PM5D port that will receive

monitor signals from the DME. Since this monitor sig-

nal is sent to the PM5D’s CUE bus, the DME’s monitor

function can be controlled from the PM5D just like the

PM5D’s own cue function (EXTERNAL CUE

function).

E MIXER SETUP (show the MIXER SETUP

screen)

This button displays the SYS/W.CLOCK function

MIXER SETUP screen.

F OUTPUT PORT

Here you can select the PM5D port that will output

audio signals to the DME.

In the INPUT PORT area

located at the lower left

of the screen, select the

PM5D port that will

receive audio signals from

the DME series unit.

The types of port that can be

selected here will depend on

the port that is currently selected for cascade input

(MIXER SETUP screen CASCADE IN PORT SELECT

field), as follows.

Note

You cannot switch the cascade input port setting from the

DME CONTROL screen. If necessary, click the MIXER

SETUP button to access the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/

W.CLOCK function), and change the port you will use for cas-

cade input.

In the MONITOR PORT field, select the PM5D

port that will receive monitor signals from the

DME series unit.

The following ports can be selected.

---- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .No assignment

SLOT1-1–SLOT4-16 . . .The desired port of slot 1–4

CASCADE 1–32 . . . . . . .CASCADE IN ports 1–32

In the OUTPUT PORT field

located in the lower right

of the screen, select the

PM5D port that will trans-

mit audio signals to the

DME.

The types of port that can be

selected here will depend on

the port that is currently selected for cascade output

(MIXER SETUP screen CASCADE OUT PORT

SELECT field), as follows.

Note

You cannot switch the cascade output port setting from the

DME CONTROL screen. If necessary, click the MIXER

SETUP button to access the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/

W.CLOCK function), and change the port you will use for cas-

cade output.

4 6

Setting in the CAS-

CADE IN PORT

SELECT ﬁeld (MIXER

SETUP screen)

Items available in the INPUT

PORT ﬁeld

CASCADE IN ----, SLOT1–SLOT4

SLOT4 ----, CASCADE IN, SLOT1–SLOT3

SLOT3/4 ----, CASCADE IN, SLOT1–SLOT2

SLOT1-4 [CH1-8] ----, CASCADE IN

SLOT1-4 [CH9-16] ----, CASCADE IN

Setting in the CAS-

CADE OUT PORT

SELECT ﬁeld (MIXER

SETUP screen)

Items available in the OUTPUT

PORT ﬁeld

CASCADE OUT ----, SLOT1–SLOT4

SLOT3/4

----, SLOT1–SLOT4, CASCADE

OUT

SLOT1-4 [CH1-8]

SLOT1-4 [CH9-16]

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 185

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

If you want scene changes on the PM5D to be

linked with scene changes on the DME series

unit, turn on the MIDI PGM CHANGE button

in the center of the screen.

If the MIDI PGM CHANGE button is on, switching

the scene on the PM5D will cause a program change

message of a number corresponding to that scene to be

sent to the DME.

Hint

• The above program change message is always transmitted

via the MY16-C card or the CASCADE IN/OUT connector.

This is not affected by MIDI PGM CHANGE or by the MIDI

program change transmission port or transmission on/off

setting selected in the MIDI SETUP screen.

• The program number assignment for each scene can be

specified in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen.

To initiate communication between the PM5D

and the DME series unit, click the CONNECT

button to turn it on.

While the CONNECT button is on, parameter opera-

tions and scene store/recall operations on the DME can

be remotely controlled from the PM5D. To terminate

communication, click the CONNECT button once

again to turn it off.

❏ Controlling DME parameters

Here’s how the parameters of the DME series unit can be

controlled from the PM5D. If desired, the changes you

make can be saved in the scene of the DME series unit.

In the DME CONTROL screen, choose SETUP,

and turn on the CONNECT button to initiate

communication.

In the upper left of the screen, use the compo-

nent type / component selection areas to

select the component you want to control.

If a component other than SETUP is selected, internal

parameters of the DME can be controlled from the

PM5D screen. The following illustration is an example

of when the SLOT OUTPUT component is selected.

Use the knobs, sliders, and buttons in the

screen to control the parameters of the DME

series unit.

Knob, slider, and button operation methods are the

same as for the PM5D’s internal parameters. For details

on the parameters that can be operated for each com-

ponent, refer to the owner’s manual of the DME series

unit.

If you want to use DCA faders 1–8 to control

the parameters of the component, click an A–F

button in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area.

When you click a button A–F, the corresponding

parameters will be assigned to DCA faders 1–8, and can

be controlled by the faders. To return to the previous

state, click the DCA button.

Hint

As an alternative to clicking the A–F buttons, you can obtain

the same result by holding down the top panel [SHIFT] key

and pressing the [A]–[F] keys of the FADER MODE section.

If you want to store your changes in a scene of

the DME series unit, use the SCENE field in the

upper right of the screen to select the store-

destination, and click the STORE button.

The edited settings will be stored as a scene in the

DME. To recall this scene, use the SCENE field in the

upper right of the screen to select the scene, and click

the RECALL button.

Note

When storing a DME scene from the PM5D’s screen, you can

only store by overwriting an existing scene on the DME; you

cannot store the settings as a new scene or edit the scene

name.

UTILITY function

186 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

UTILITY function

Preference settings for the PM5D are divided into two

screens.

A STORE/RECALL

These buttons let you turn on/off options related to

scene store/recall operations. You can select the follow-

ing options.

• AUTO STORE

Turns the Auto Store function on/off. If this button is

on, pressing the [STORE] button (SCENE MEMORY

section) of the panel twice in succession will store the

current scene in the currently selected scene number.

• LINKED LIBRARY PROTECTION

If this button is on, you will be unable to overwrite or

delete library items that are linked to a protected scene.

This option prevents a protected scene from being

modified by having an associated library item edited.

• USE NUMERIC-KEYPAD

If this button is on, the numeric keypad of a PS/2 key-

board connected to the KEYBOARD connector (or a

numeric keypad connected to the KEYBOARD con-

nector) can be used to specify the scene number

directly.

• STORE CONFIRMATION

• RECALL CONFIRMATION

If these buttons are on, a confirmation message will

appear when you perform a Store or Recall operation

respectively.

B PATCH

These buttons let you turn on/off options related to

patch operations. You can select the following options.

• PATCH CONFIRMATION

If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear

when you edit an input patch or output patch.

• STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION

If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear

when you edit an input patch or output patch item that

is already patched.

C GATE/COMP (Gate / Compressor)

These buttons let you turn on/off options related to

gating and compression.

• GR METER ON/OFF LINK

If this button is on, the GR meter will not show the

reduction amount for gates/compressors that are cur-

rently off.

D METER SECTION

Here you can set the following meter-related options.

• FOLLOW INPUT LAYER

This option lets you specify how the [CH 1-24]/[CH

25-48] keys (INPUT channel strip) and [STIN 1-4]/

[FXRTN 1-4] keys will select the layer that is shown by

the meters in the center of the panel and the meters in

the upper right of the panel. Click the / buttons at

left and right to make your choice.

OFF . . . . . . . . Operating the [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48]

keys will not affect the content shown

by the meters in the center of the

panel. Pressing the [STIN 1-4]/

[FXRTN 1-4] keys will not affect the

content shown by the meters in the

upper right of the panel.

SAME . . . . . . . When you press the [CH 1-24] or

[CH 25-48] key, the corresponding

layer will be shown by the meters in

the center of the panel (if an input

channel is selected in the meter sec-

tion). When you press the [STIN 1-4]

or [FXRTN 1-4] key, the correspond-

ing layer will be shown by the meters

in the upper right of the panel.

PREFERENCE 1/2 screens

REFERENCE 1

PREFERENCE 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 187

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

ALTERNATIVE . . . When you press the [CH 1-24]

or [CH 25-48] key, the opposite

layer will be shown by the

meters in the center of the panel

(if an input channel is selected

in the meter section). When you

press the [STIN 1-4] or

[FXRTN 1-4] key, the opposite

layer will be shown by the

meters in the upper right of the

panel.

Note

• If this is set to SAME or ALTERNATIVE, the meters in the

center of the panel and the meters in the upper right can be

switched independently.

• If the selected layer is switched from the panel, the layer

shown by the meters will also change. However if you switch

the METER SECTION field in the constantly-displayed area

in the upper part of the screen, the layer selected on the

panel will not change.

• FOLLOW MIX MASTER MODE

If this button is on, pressing the MIX section [MIX

MASTER] key will cause the meters in the center of the

panel and the meters in the upper right of the panel to

show the MIX/MATRIX channel levels. Press the MIX

section [MIX SEND] key to return to the original input

channel level display.

E PANEL OPERATION

Here you can set the following options for panel

operation.

• AUTO CHANNEL SELECT

This specifies whether the corresponding channel will

be selected when you operate a channel’s [ON] key,

fader, or encoder. INPUT CH (input channels) and

OUTPUT CH (output channels) can be turned on/off

separately.

• AUTO DISPLAY

For each of the following items, you can individually

specify whether the related screen will automatically

appear when you use the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion to operate a specific parameter. The following

table shows the parameters corresponding to each but-

ton and the screen that will appear.

• MAKE PAIR ON PANEL

If this button is on, you can use the [SEL] keys to set/

defeat pairing. In Horizontal Pair mode, you can set/

defeat pairing by simultaneously pressing the [SEL]

keys of two pairable channels. In Vertical Pair mode,

you can set/defeat pairing by holding down the

[SHIFT] key and pressing the [SEL] key of one of the

channels. (For more about pair modes ➥ p.45)

• DCA/MUTE FLASH INDICATE

If this button is on, the DCA [MUTE] key LED and the

DCA assign LED for channels belonging to that DCA

group will blink when you turn on a DCA [MUTE] key

(DCA section).

• MIX MINUS CONFIRMATION

If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear

when you execute the Mix Minus setting (hold down

the [SEL] key of an input channel and press the [SEL]

key of a MIX channel) from the panel.

• SCENE UP/DOWN KEY

This specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†]

keys will do when pressed in the SCENE screen. You

can choose one of the following two operations.

SCENE +1/–1 . . . . . Pressing the SCENE MEMORY

[π] key will select the next

highest-numbered scene, and

pressing the SCENE MEMORY

[†] key will select the next low-

est-numbered scene. (Key

presses will increment/decre-

ment the scene number.)

5 6 7

Button name

Corresponding

parameters

Screen that appears

Input channel head

amp gain

INPUT HA/INSERT

function screens

PHASE/ATT

Input channel

phase/attenuator

INPUT EQ function ø/

ATT screen

EQUALIZER

EQ-related param-

eters

INPUT EQ/OUTPUT

EQ function EQ

PARAM screen

DYNAMICS

Gate/compressor-

related parameters

INPUT GATE/COMP

function or OUTPUT

COMP function GATE

PARAM or COMP

PARAM screen

DELAY

Delay-related

parameters

INPUT DELAY/OUT-

PUT DELAY function

screens

DCA/MUTE/

SAFE

DCA group / Mute

group / Recall safe-

related parameters

INPUT DCA/GROUP

function or OUTPUT

DCA/GROUP func-

tion DCA GROUP

ASSIGN, MUTE

GROUP ASSIGN or

RECALL SAFE

screen

TO MIX/STE-

REO

TO MIX/TO STE-

REO-related

parameters

PAN/ROUTING func-

tion CH to MIX screen

or SURR PARAM

screen, or MATRIX/ST

function MATRIX/ST

ROUTING screen

TO MATRIX

Send level to

MATRIX bus

MATRIX/ST function

MATRIX/ST ROUT-

ING screen

OUTPUT

MASTER

MIX/MATRIX chan-

nel output level

OUTPUT VIEW func-

tion FADER VIEW

screen

UTILITY function

188 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

LIST UP/DOWN . . Pressing the SCENE MEMORY

[π] key will scroll the list

upward, and pressing the

SCENE MEMORY [†] key will

scroll the list downward.

(Key presses will scroll the list

upward/downward.)

• LIST ORDER

This specifies the order in which scene memories and

library items will appear in the screen.

NORMAL . . . . . . . . Show the list in ascending

numerical order.

REVERSE . . . . . . . . Show the list in descending

numerical order.

F INTERNAL CLOCK

This indicates the date (DATE) and time (TIME) of the

internal clock. To edit the setting, click the SET button.

G BATTERY

This indicates the voltage of the internal battery.

❏ PREFERENCE screen 2

H BRIGHTNESS

Here you can make settings for the brightness of the

panel LED and LCD displays.

• PANEL UNITY POINT

If this button is on, LEDs corresponding to a specific

reference value (e.g., 0 dB or CENTER) will light more

brightly than usual. However, this is valid only if

PANEL BRIGHTNESS is set to 5 or less.

• PANEL ASSISTANCE

If this button is on, even LEDs that should be off will

stay dimly lit so that you can tell their location even in

a dark environment. However, this is valid only if

PANEL BRIGHTNESS is set to 5 or less.

• PANEL BRIGHTNESS

This adjusts the brightness of all panel LEDs in a range

of 1–8.

• LCD BRIGHTNESS

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD display in a

three-step range: HIGH, MID, or LOW.

• LCD BACK LIGHT

You can adjust the brightness of the LCD display back-

light in a two-step range: HIGH or LOW.

I TRACK PAD/MOUSE

Here you can make settings for the built-in track pad

or a PS/2 mouse connected to the MOUSE connector.

• TRACK PAD TAPPING

This enables/disables the Tapping function (a function

that lets you perform the track pad left-click operation

by tapping quickly on the track pad).

• MOVING SPEED

This selects the speed at which the cursor in the screen

will move when you operate the built-in track pad or a

PS/2 mouse connected to the MOUSE connector.

Choose one of three speeds; FAST, MID, or SLOW.

J SCREEN TIPS

• SHOW SCREEN TIPS

If this button is on, moving the cursor onto an item in

the screen and waiting for a short time will (in some

cases) display a “screen tip” reminding you of the oper-

ation. The screen tip is displayed when you open the

JOB SELECT window by holding down the [SHIFT]

key and pressing the [ENTER] key, or when you need

to press the [ENTER] key to finalize an edited value.

K UPPER PART DISPLAY

These buttons select the item that is shown in the cen-

ter right (to the right of the scene memory indication)

of the upper part of the display (the constantly dis-

played area).

• PRESENT TIME

Indicates the present time.

• TIME CODE

Indicates the internal time code being generated by the

PM5D, or the time code being received from an exter-

nal device. This is the same as the time code shown in

the SCENE function EVENT LIST screen.

• CASCADE/Fs

Indicates the master/slave status when using a cascade

connection, and the sampling frequency at which the

PM5D system is currently operating.

Hint

You can also cycle through these choices by clicking in this

display section.

L NAME DISPLAY ([NAME] indicator display)

Choose one of the following as the content that will be

shown by the [NAME] indicators of the INPUT chan-

nel strip and DCA strip.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 189

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

• NAME

The indicators will show the names assigned to the

input channels / DCA groups in the NAME screen

(INPUT PATCH function). (➥ p.257)

• PORT

For input channels, the indicators will show the name

of the currently assigned port. For DCA groups, the

indicators will show the ID number.

•ID

For both input channels and DCA groups, the indica-

tors will show the fixed ID number.

M WARNING DISPLAY

Here you can select whether a warning will be dis-

played when the following problems occur.

• TIME CODE DROP

When time code (LTC, MTC) being received from an

external device is dropped.

• DIGITAL I/O ERROR

When a DIO error is detected.

• MIDI I/O ERROR

When a MIDI error is detected.

Here you can assign functions to the User Defined keys

(USER DEFINED [1]–[25] keys).

A BANK

Select a bank A–D (groups of functions assigned to the

User Defined keys).

B CLEAR BANK

Clears the currently selected bank.

C List

This area lists the functions and option parameters

assigned to the User Defined keys in the currently

selected bank.

To edit the settings, click the button at the left to

open the USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN window, and

select the function and parameter from the following

table.

USER DEFINE screen

USER DEFINE

UTILITY function

190 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation

NO ASSIGN — — No assignment

SCENE

INC RECALL — Recall the scene of the next existing number.

DEC RECALL — Recall the scene of the previous existing number.

DIRECT RECALL SCENE #000–#500 Directly recall the scene of the speciﬁed number

EVENT LIST

TIME CODE [RTN TO

START]

—

The same functions as the RETURN TO START TIME,

STOP, and PLAY buttons displayed when INTERNAL is

selected as the time code source in the EVENT LIST screen

TIME CODE [STOP]

TIME CODE [PLAY]

TIME CODE [INSERT]

The same function as the TIME CODE INSERT button in the

EVENT LIST screen

AUTO CAPTURE ON

The same function as the AUTO CAPTURE button in the

EVENT LIST screen

DIRECT EVENT RECALL EVENT #000–#999

Recall the speciﬁed event registered in the EVENT LIST

screen

NEXT EVENT RECALL

—

Recall the next-numbered event

PREV EVENT RECALL Recall the previous-numbered event

ENABLE/DISABLE

Switch the ENABLE button and DISABLE button in the

EVENT LIST screen

ENABLE [ALL MANUAL]/DIS-

ABLE

Switch the ENABLE [ALL MANUAL] button and DISABLE

button in the EVENT LIST screen

EFFECT LIBRARY

DIRECT RECALL → EFFECT

1–8

INC RECALL Recall the next-numbered library item into effect 1–8

DEC RECALL Recall the previous-numbered library item into effect 1–8

LIBRARY #001–#199 Recall the library item of the speciﬁed number into effect 1–8

EFFECT BYPASS EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 BYPASS ON Bypass the speciﬁed effect

INPUT CH LIBRARY

DIRECT RECALL

LIBRARY #000–#199

Recall the library item of the speciﬁed number into the

selected channel/GEQ module

OUTPUT CH

LIBRARY

GATE LIBRARY

LIBRARY #001–#199

COMP LIBRARY

INPUT EQ LIBRARY

OUTPUT EQ

LIBRARY

INPUT PATCH

LIBRARY

LIBRARY #00–#99

OUTPUT PATCH

LIBRARY

HA LIBRARY

LIBRARY #000–#199

GEQ LIBRARY

DIRECT RECALL → GEQ 1–

TRACKING RECALL

ENABLE/DISABLE

—

The same function as the ENABLE/DISABLE button in the

TRACKING RECALL screen

OFFSET LOCK

The same function as the OFFSET LOCK button in the

TRACKING RECALL screen

SELECTED CH ON

Switch the Tracking Recall function on/off for the currently

selected channel

TALKBACK ASSIGN

SELECTED CH ASSIGN —

When an output channel is selected, turn talkback transmis-

sion on/off for that channel

DIRECT ASSIGN

MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8,

STEREO A L/R, STE-

REO B L/R

Send the talkback signal to the speciﬁed output channel

MONITOR

DIRECT ASSIGN MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 Monitor the desired MIX/MATRIX channel

DIMMER ON — Switch on the monitor dimmer function

TAP TEMPO

CURRENT PAGE

—

Control the Tap Tempo function in the displayed screen

EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 Control the Tap Tempo function of the speciﬁed effect

SURROUND PAN GRAB

SELECTED CH, ODD

CH, EVEN CH

Use a joystick assigned to GPI to begin controlling the sur-

round pan of the corresponding channel

NAME DISPLAY

NAME → PORT → ID —

Each time you press the key, the [NAME] indicator for each

fader will cycle through the channel name → port name → ID

(channel number)

UNLATCH

The [NAME] indicator for each fader will show the ID (chan-

nel number) only while you hold down the key

PORT

The [NAME] indicator for each fader will show the port name

only while you hold down the key

NAME

The [NAME] indicator for each fader will show the channel

name only while you hold down the key

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 191

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Note

During PREVIEW mode, the following USER DEFINE functions that affect internal signal processing are disabled;

EVENT LIST, TALKBACK ASSIGN, MONITOR, MIDI DIRECT OUT, MACHINE CONTROL, and GPI OUT CONTROL.

PAGE CHANGE

PAGE BACK

—

Display the screen that you used immediately prior to the

current screen

PAGE FORWARD

Display the screen that you used immediately after the cur-

rent screen

PAGE BOOKMARK

Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the key

for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized

screen (press and release the key within two seconds)

GEQ PARAM PAGE GEQ 1–12 Display the GEQ PARAM screen

EFFECT PARAM PAGE EFFECT 1–8 Display the EFFECT PARAM screen

LAYER SNAPSHOT — —

Memorize the state of the layer assigned to the panel (hold

down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-

memorized layer (press and release the key within two sec-

onds)

DIRECT RECALL/

MUTE MASTER

MODE CHANGE

LATCH

Switch the function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys

(DIRECT RECALL / MUTE MASTER) each time you press

the User Deﬁned key

UNLATCH

The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will function as DIRECT

RECALL while you hold down the User Deﬁned key

USER DEFINED KEY

BANK

NEXT BANK

—

Switch to the next bank of User Deﬁned key assignments

PREVIOUS BANK

Switch to the previous bank of User Deﬁned key assign-

ments

DIRECT SELECT BANK A–D Switch to the desired bank of User Deﬁned key assignments

MIDI DIRECT OUT

MIDI NOTE C-2–G 8

When you press the key, transmit a note-on message with

the speciﬁed note number and a velocity of 127 When you

release the key, transmit a note-on message of the same

note number with a velocity of 0 (= note-off)

MIDI PGM CHANGE 1–128

When you press the key, transmit a program change mes-

sage with the speciﬁed number

MIDI CTRL CHANGE 0–119

When you press the key, transmit a control change message

with the speciﬁed control number and a value of 127 When

you release the key, transmit a control change message of

the same control number with a value of 0

MACHINE CONTROL

SET LOCATION, RS-422

REC, RS-422 PLAY, RS-422

STOP, RS-422 FF, RS-422

REW, RS-422 LOCATE 1–20

—

Transmit the speciﬁed RS422/MMC command from the

RS422 REMOTE connector or the currently-valid MIDI port

(the SET LOCATION command is common to RS422 and

MMC)

MMC REC, MMC PLAY, MMC

STOP, MMC FF, MMC REW,

MMC LOCATE 1–20

MMC ID= 1–127, ALL

GPI OUT CONTROL PORT 1–12

LATCH

Switch the speciﬁed GPI OUT port between active/inactive

each time you press the key

UNLATCH

Switch the speciﬁed GPI OUT port to inactive while you hold

down the key

PM5D EDITOR CON-

TROL

*5 *5

Switch windows in PM5D Editor on a PC

*1. The corresponding channel will be selected in the DEFINE ﬁeld of the MONITOR screen, and the monitor source will switch to

DEFINE.

*2. The LED will light for User Deﬁned keys for which a screen has been memorized. The column in the right of the list in the USER

DEFINE screen shows the name of the memorized screen.

*3. Layers that can be memorized include the following items.

- The layer selected in the INPUT channel strip (CH 1-24, CH 25-48, MIDI REMOTE)

- The layer selected in the ST IN/FX RTN channel strip (ST IN 1-4, FX RTN 1-4, MIDI REMOTE)

- The layer shown by the DCA channel strip (DCA, A–F, GEQ)

- If the DCA channel strip is controlling GEQ, the GEQ module number and band

- The encoder mode selected by ENCODER MODE (SEND, PAN, HA, ATT, ALT)

- The FADER FLIP status

- The currently selected MIX send

- The mode selected in the MIX section (MIX SEND, MIX MASTER)

- The source selected in the METER section (CH 1-24 ST IN, CH 25-48 ST IN, MIX/MATRIX)

*4. The output port and MIDI channel can be speciﬁed in the MIDI SETUP screen.

*5. This parameter speciﬁes the PM5D Editor window that you want to control. If the speciﬁed window is closed or inactive, the window

will be opened and made active. If the speciﬁed window is already open and active, the window will be closed. This function can be

selected if the system software supports PM5D Editor. For details on the most recent system software version, refer to the website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com

FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Explanation

UTILITY function

192 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can save PM5D scenes and library data on a

memory card inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot. This

cannot be used while in PREVIEW mode.

A MODE

Choose one of the following as the mode in which files

will be saved: BASIC, ADVANCED, CSV EXPORT.

The left side of the screen will change according to the

mode you select.

❏ BASIC mode

In BASIC mode you can save all scene memory and library

data (or just a selected portion of data) to a card. If BASIC

is selected, the left side of the screen will show the items

listed in the following table.

B Select the items to save

Choose one of the following to specify the data that will

be saved.

If the SCENE MEMORY, HA, INPUT PATCH, or

OUTPUT PATCH button is on, you can use the box at

the right to specify the starting number and ending

number of the scenes or library items that will be saved.

Hint

If the specified range of numbers includes empty scenes or

library items, the correspondingly-numbered scenes or library

items will be empty when that data is loaded.

C TOTAL SIZE

Indicates the file size of the currently selected item(s)

(common to all modes).

SAVE screen

SAVE

BASIC button

Button Content

ALL DATA

All items of each type, and the con-

tents of the current scene

SCENE MEMORY Contents of scene memory

LINKED LIBRARY

Libraries linked to the scene (avail-

able only if the SCENE MEMORY

button is on)

HA Contents of the HA library

INPUT PATCH Contents of the input patch library

OUTPUT PATCH Contents of the output patch library

INPUT CH Contents of the input channel library

OUTPUT CH Contents of the output channel library

INPUT EQ Contents of the input EQ library

OUTPUT EQ Contents of the output EQ library

GATE Contents of the gate library

COMP Contents of the compressor library

EFFECT Contents of the effect library

GEQ Contents of the GEQ library

SETUP Various settings not saved in a scene

USER DEFINED

KEY

User Deﬁned key settings

DCA FADER MODE Fader mode settings

MIDI REMOTE MIDI remote settings

MIDI PGM TABLE

Contents of the list in the MIDI PGM

CHANGE screen

MIDI CTRL TABLE

Contents of the list in the MIDI CTRL

CHANGE screen

EVENT LIST

Contents of the list in the EVENT

LIST screen

Starting number Ending number

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 193

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ ADVANCED mode

In this mode you can select either scene memory or a

library, specify a starting number and ending number, and

save the specified range of data on a card. If desired, you

can also specify that the starting number be shifted for-

ward or backward when the data is saved. If ADVANCED

is selected, the left side of the screen will show the follow-

ing items.

D CATEGORY

Indicates the category of data that is selected for sav-

ing; scene memories or library data. Click the /

buttons at left and right to change the category.

E SOURCE (save-source numbers)

This area shows the starting and ending number (and

the corresponding scene names or library titles) of the

scene memories or library items that will be saved on

the card. Click the / buttons at the left and right of

each box to change the number.

F DESTINATION (save-destination number)

This area shows the starting and ending number (and

the corresponding scene names or library titles) with

which the data will be saved on the card. If you want to

save the data to the card with a different range of num-

bers, click the / buttons at the left and right of the

starting number box. (The value in the ending number

box will change automatically as the starting number is

edited.)

❏ CSV EXPORT mode

In this mode you can select items such as scene memory or

library titles, or channel names, and write them to a card as

a separate CSV format file for each item. If CSV EXPORT

is selected, the left side of the screen will show the items

listed in the following table.

G LIBRARY TITLE

H CHANNEL NAME

From the following table, select the parameters that will

be written (e.g., library title, channel name).

Hint

Files saved in CSV format can be edited using a word proces-

sor or spreadsheet software on a computer, and loaded back

into the PM5D. However be aware that it will not be possible

to reload the file back into the PM5D if you change the syn-

tax, file format, or file name.

ADVANCED button

011

012

013

014

015

AAA

BBB

CCC

DDD

EEE

001

002

003

004

005

006

AAA

BBB

CCC

DDD

EEE

FFF

➠

Memory card

Starting

number

Ending

number

Button Content

LIBRARY

TITLE

SCENE MEMORY Scene memory names

HA HA library titles

INPUT PATCH Input patch library titles

OUTPUT PATCH Output patch library titles

INPUT CH

Input channel library

titles

OUTPUT CH

Output channel library

titles

INPUT EQ Input EQ library titles

OUTPUT EQ Output EQ library titles

GATE Gate library titles

COMP Compressor library titles

EFFECT Effect library titles

GEQ GEQ library titles

CHANNEL

NAME

INPUT 1-48 Input channel names

ST IN ST IN channel names

FX RTN FX RTN channel names

DCA DCA names

PATCH

INPUT PATCH

Input patch connection

status

OUTPUT PATCH

Output patch connection

status

CSV EXPORT button

UTILITY function

194 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

If you use Microsoft Excel to edit these files, use the Data

menu to import the CSV file, and use the Text File Wizard to

delete the character string quotation ("). (If you fail to do so,

symbols such as “–” and “+” will not be displayed correctly.)

I SET ALL

Selects all LIBRARY TITLE / CHANNEL NAME items.

J CLEAR ALL

De-selects all items.

K FILE PATH

Indicates the directory (folder) that is currently selected

on the memory card inserted in the MEMORY CARD

slot, and the location of the file. (The directory name is

delineated by “\” characters.)

L SCAN

This scans the directory that is currently selected on the

memory card, and displays the contents in the file list

(

M).

M File list

This area shows the files/directories contained in the

current directory. The currently selected file/directory

is always shown in the middle line. (The TYPE and

DATE SIZE fields will be highlighted.)

The list is divided into four columns; FILE NAME,

TYPE, DATE/SIZE, and COMMENT. (To see the

COMMENT field, use the scroll bar to scroll the list

toward the right.)

The headings at the top of each column of the list also

function as buttons to sort the list. When you click

these buttons, the list will be sorted in ascending or

descending order for that item. The text of the cur-

rently selected button will change to red, and an arrow

indicating ascending (↑) or descending (↓) order will

appear.

These columns display the following content.

• FILE NAME

These are the names of the files/directories saved in the

currently selected directory. If a lower directory is

selected, you can move to that directory by clicking the

directory name shown in this column.

If a higher directory is selected, this column will show a

“. .” symbol. You can click this symbol to return to that

directory.

• TYPE

This indicates the type of data that is saved. In the case

of a directory, this column will indicate [DIR]. Data

that cannot be used by the PM5D is indicated as

UNKNOWN.

• DATE / SIZE

This shows the date on which the file was last saved,

and its size. In the case of a directory, only the date of

creation is displayed.

• COMMENT

This displays comments (up to 32 characters) stored

for the files on the memory card. To create or edit a

comment, click the COMMENT field of the file

selected in the list to open the FILE COMMENT EDIT

window.

P Q R N

➠ ➠

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 195

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

N Number of files / Free area

This displays the number of files and directories in the

current directory, and the free area on the memory

card.

Note

A maximum of 99 files and directories can be displayed in the

file list. If there are more than 99, a blinking message of “Too

Many Files” will be displayed. In this case, please delete

unneeded files or move files to another directory.

O SAVE

This saves the data selected in the left side of the screen

to the currently selected directory. When you click this

button, the FILE NAME EDIT window will appear,

allowing you to assign a filename of up to eight charac-

ters and save the file.

Note

• If an identically-named file exists in that directory, a mes-

sage will warn you that you will be overwriting the file. If you

don’t want to overwrite the existing file, you can either

change the filename or select a different directory in which to

save the file.

• When you execute the Save operation in CSV EXPORT

mode, a new directory will be created within the current

directory of the memory card, and a CSV file for each

selected item will be created in the new directory.

• The name of the CSV file is fixed for each type of data, and

cannot be changed. The newly created directory will have

the name you specified when saving.

P RENAME

This button lets you rename the currently selected file

or directory. When you click this button, the FILE

NAME EDIT window will appear, allowing you to edit

the name.

Q MAKE DIR (Make directory)

This button creates a new sub-directory within the cur-

rently selected directory. When you click this button,

the DIR NAME EDIT popup window will appear,

allowing you to specify a name for the new directory.

R DELETE

This button deletes the currently selected file or direc-

tory. When you click this button, the FILE DELETE

window will appear, asking you to confirm the

deletion.

Note

•A deleted file cannot be recovered.

• If you attempt to delete a directory that contains files, a

warning message will appear, and the operation cannot be

executed. Before deleting a directory, you must first delete

any files it contains.

Note

• As memory cards, the PM5D can use either PCMCIA

Type II flash ATA cards or CompactFlash media inserted in

a PC card adaptor (power supply voltage of 3.3V/5V in

either case). Operation is not guaranteed for any other type

of media.

• Normally, the above cards are sold in an already-formatted

state, so formatting will not be necessary. If you need to for-

mat a card, use a computer or other external device to

format the card in FAT16 format.

In this screen, scene or library data from a memory card

inserted in the MEMORY CARD can be loaded into the

PM5D. This cannot be used while in PREVIEW mode.

A FILE PATH

Indicates the location of the directory (folder) or file

that is currently selected on the memory card. (The

directory name is delineated by “\” characters.)

B SCAN

This scans the directory that is currently selected on the

memory card, and displays the contents in the file list

(

3).

C File list

This area shows the files/directories contained in the

current directory. The currently selected file/directory

is always shown in the middle line. (The TYPE and

DATE SIZE fields will be highlighted.)

The list is divided into four columns; FILE NAME,

TYPE, DATE/SIZE, and COMMENT. (To see the

COMMENT field, use the scroll bar to scroll the list

toward the right.) The contents of each column are the

same as in the SAVE screen (➥ p.194).

LOAD screen

LOAD

1 2

UTILITY function

196 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

D Mode

Here you can select the mode in which files will be

loaded. If a file other than CSV is selected in the file list,

you will be able to select BASIC mode or ADVANCED

mode. (The CSV button will be grayed-out and

unavailable.)

If a CSV file or directory is selected in the file list, CSV

IMPORT mode will be selected automatically. (The

BASIC and ADVANCED buttons will be grayed-out

and unavailable.)

The right side of the screen will change as follows

according to the currently selected mode.

❏ BASIC mode

In BASIC mode you can load all scene memory and

library data (or just a selected portion of data) from a

card. If BASIC is selected, the right side of the screen

will show the following items.

E Select the data to be loaded

Here you can select the data that will be loaded. The

contents of each item are the same as in BASIC mode

of the SAVE screen (➥ p.192). However, the items that

can be selected will depend on the currently selected

file. Buttons for items that cannot be loaded will be

grayed-out and unavailable.

If the SCENE MEMORY, HA, INPUT PATCH, or

OUTPUT PATCH button is on, you restrict the scenes

or library items that will be loaded by using the box at

the right to specify the starting number and ending

number.

Hint

If the data saved on the card includes empty scenes or library

items, the corresponding scenes or library items will be empty

when the data is loaded.

F LOAD

This button loads the data selected in the left side of the

screen into the parameters you specify. When you click

this button, a message will ask you to confirm the Load

operation. (This is common to all modes.)

❏ ADVANCED mode

In this mode you can select either scene memory or a

library, specify a starting number and ending number, and

load the specified range of data from the card.

G CATEGORY

This indicates the type of data (scene memory or

library) saved in the currently selected file.

H SOURCE (load-source)

This area shows the starting and ending number (and

the corresponding scene names or library titles) of the

scene memories or library items that will be loaded

from the card. Click the / buttons at the left and

right of each box to change the number.

I DESTINATION (load-destination)

If you’ve changed the starting number of the load-des-

tination, this area shows the starting and ending

number (and the corresponding scene names or library

titles) of the PM5D’s internal scene memories or

library items into which the data selected in the

SOURCE area will be loaded. To edit the setting, click

the / buttons located at the left and right of the

starting number box. (The ending number value will

change automatically as you edit the starting number.)

Hint

• Even if you’ve selected data that was saved in BASIC mode,

you can switch to ADVANCED mode and load only specific

numbers.

• However, an exception is that if the selected data was saved

as ALL DATA or SCENE MEMORY+LINKED LIBRARY in

BASIC mode, the ADVANCED button will be grayed-out,

and you will not be able to switch to ADVANCED mode.

BASIC button

ADVANCED button

002

003

004

005

006

BBB

CCC

DDD

EEE

FFF

011

012

013

014

BBB

CCC

DDD

EEE

➠

Memory card

Starting

number

Ending

number

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 197

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ CSV IMPORT mode

If a CSV file or directory is selected, CSV IMPORT

mode will be selected automatically. The selected CSV

file (or CSV files in the selected directory) will be

searched, and the following items will appear in the

right of the screen.

J LIBRARY TITLE

K CHANNEL NAME

Use these buttons to select the data you want to load

(e.g., library titles or channel names). (The contents of

each item are the same as in the SAVE screen.)

However, you will only be able to select items that

match the CSV file (or the CSV files in the directory)

selected in the list for loading. The buttons for other

items will be grayed-out and unavailable.

L SET ALL

This button selects all available items for loading.

M CLEAR ALL

De-selects all items.

Note

Note that the screen will automatically switch to CSV IMPORT

mode even if the directory selected in the list does not contain

an appropriate CSV file. (In this case, all buttons will be

grayed-out.)

Here you can assign the desired input channels / output

channels to the eight faders in the DCA section of the

panel.

A FADER MODE

Indicates the currently selected

fader mode (DCA, layer A–F).

You can also click the buttons to

switch the fader mode directly.

B Faders 1–8

The parameter assigned to each

fader of the DCA fader section is

shown here. This will depend on

the FADER MODE (

1) and

channel selection (

3). You can

also operate the fader directly by

dragging it upward or downward.

C Channel selection

This indicates the channel that is

assigned to each fader in layers A–

F, and its name (only for input

channels). Click the / but-

tons at left and right to change the

assignment. You can choose from

CH 1–48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 4R, FXRTN 1L–FXRTN 4R,

MATRIX 1–8, MIX 1–24, and DCA 1–8.

FADER ASSIGN screen

FADER ASSIGN

UTILITY function

198 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

In this screen you can prohibit console operation (Console

Lock) or prohibit editing for specific parameters (Parame-

ter Lock). Two passwords of differing levels can be

specified to allow locking and unlocking.

A SYSTEM PASSWORD

This is a permanent password (maximum of eight

characters) for the entire system. The password you

specify here is valid for the PARAMETER LOCK but-

ton (

2) and for the CONSOLE LOCK button (3).

However, you can perform the Lock operation even

without specifying a password.

If no password has been specified, this box will indi-

cate “--FREE--”. If a password has been specified,

asterisks (*) will be displayed to represent the charac-

ters of the password.

To set or change the password, click the button to

open the SYSTEM PASSWORD CHANGE window.

When setting the password for the first time, you will

input the same password twice for confirmation. To

change the password, you will input both the old pass-

word and the new password. By specifying a blank

entry as the new password, you can restore the state to

a condition in which no password has been set.

Note

The system password is remembered even when the power is

turned off. This means that if you forget the password, you will

be unable to defeat Parameter Lock or Console Lock except

by initializing the entire memory of the PM5D (

➥

p.147).

Please be careful not to lose the system password.

B PARAMETER LOCK

This button sets/defeats Parameter Lock for the param-

eters selected in the LOCK PARAMETER SELECT area

(

4). If not even one parameter is selected, these but-

tons will be grayed-out and cannot be turned on. If the

system password has been set, clicking this button will

open the SYSTEM PASSWORD CHECK window,

where you will need to input the system password.

C CONSOLE LOCK

This button locks the console operations. If the system

password has been set, clicking this button will open

the SYSTEM PASSWORD CHECK window, where

you will need to input the system password.

D LOCK PARAMETER SELECT

If the PARAMETER LOCK button (2) is on, parame-

ters for which editing will be disabled can be selected

from the following table. As long as the PARAMETER

LOCK button (

2) is on, these parameters cannot be

edited.

E CONSOLE PASSWORD

This is a temporary password (maximum of eight char-

acters) that is separate from the system password. The

password you specify here is valid for the CONSOLE

LOCK button (

6). The method for setting or chang-

ing the password is the same as for the system

password.

Hint

The Console Password is cleared when the PM5D’s power is

turned off, and will return to the unset state (the box will indi-

cate “--FREE--”).

F CONSOLE LOCK

This button locks the console operations. If the con-

sole password has been set, clicking this button will

open the CONSOLE PASSWORD CHECK window,

where you will need to input the console password.

SECURITY screen

SECURITY

SYSTEM CONFIGU-

RATION

Changes to the settings of the

MIXER SETUP screen and the CAS-

CADE screen

WORD CLOCK

SETUP

Changes in the word clock setting

DITHER Changes in dither-related settings

INPUT PATCH

Changes to the input patch (and

NAME) settings

OUTPUT PATCH Changes to the output patch settings

INPUT CH ON/OFF Input channel on/off operations

OUTPUT CH ON/

OFF

Output channel on/off operations

MIX TO ST ON/OFF

MIX channel [TO STEREO] key

operations

DCA MUTE ON

DCA [MUTE] key On operations

(Off operations are not included)

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 199

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

SYS/W.CLOCK function

Here you can select the word clock on which the PM5D

will operate. You can also view and edit settings for cards

installed in slots 1–4.

A MASTER CLOCK SELECT

As the master clock to use, you can select the internal

clock or an external clock input from a connector or

slot. This setting determines the sampling frequency at

which the PM5D will operate. You can select the fol-

lowing items.

The operational status of each clock is shown by the

color of the symbol at the left of each button. Each

color has the following significance.

• LOCK (blue)

This indicates that a clock synchronized with the

source selected in (

2) is being input. If an external

device is connected to the corresponding connector or

slot, input/output is occurring normally between that

device and the PM5D. If the sampling frequency is

close, this status may be displayed even if not

synchronized.

• UNLOCK (red)

A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is

connected to the corresponding connector, input/out-

put cannot occur correctly between that device and the

PM5D.

• LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (orange)

A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized

with the clock source selected in (

2). If an external

device is connected to the corresponding connector,

input/output cannot occur correctly between that

device and the PM5D.

• UNKNOWN (yellow)

This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected

because no external device is connected or because

there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select

this connector/slot, but successful synchronization can-

not occur until a valid connection is established.

• SRC ON (green)

This is a special status only for SLOT 1–4 and 2TR IN

2TR IN D1–3, indicating that the corresponding chan-

nel’s SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This

means that even if the signal is not synchronized, nor-

mal input/output with the PM5D is occurring.

Note

• Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock

setting is changed. In order to protect your speaker system,

be sure to turn down the power amp output before changing

the word clock setting.

• If you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the

word clock master, a message will appear, warning you that

the sampling rate converter will be disabled.

B Fs (Sampling frequency)

This indicates the sampling frequency at which the

PM5D is operating. This will indicate “UNLOCKED”

while synchronization is lost (such as immediately after

switching the master clock).

Display Content

INT 96k

The PM5D’s internal clock

(sampling rate= 96 kHz)

INT 88.2k

The PM5D’s internal clock

(sampling rate= 88.2 kHz)

INT 48 k

The PM5D’s internal clock

(sampling rate= 48 kHz)

INT 44.1 k

The PM5D’s internal clock

(sampling rate= 44.1 kHz)

W.CLOCK IN

The word clock supplied from the rear panel

WORD CLOCK IN connector

CASCADE IN

The word clock supplied via the CASCADE

IN connector from another cascade-con-

nected PM5D

2TR IN D1

The clock data of the digital audio signal

supplied from 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 1

2TR IN D2

The clock data of the digital audio signal

supplied from 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 2

2TR IN D3

The clock data of the digital audio signal

supplied from 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 3

SLOT 1–4

The clock data of the digital audio signal

supplied via a digital I/O card in slot 1–4

(selectable in two-channel units)

WORD CLOCK screen

WORD CLOCK

SYS/W.CLOCK function

200 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

C Slot number / Card type

This area shows the type of digital I/O card installed in

slots 1–4.

D INPUT FORMAT (Input signal format)

E OUTPUT FORMAT (Output signal format)

Select one of the following as the method by which sig-

nals will be exchanged with a digital I/O card installed

in the slot when the PM5D is operating at a high sam-

pling rate (88.2/96 kHz).

• SINGLE

This setting allows transmission/reception of the nor-

mal number of channels when existing equipment that

operates at 44.1/48 kHz is connected. The sampling

rate will be converted for each channel of the digital I/

O card, and transmitted/received at half the sampling

frequency (44.1/48 kHz) of the PM5D. (This setting

can be selected only for slots in which a digital I/O card

that does not support 96 kHz is installed.)

• DOUBLE SPEED

This setting allows high sampling rate audio signals to

be transmitted/received without change when equip-

ment that operates at a high sampling rate (88.2/96

kHz) is connected. (This setting can be connected only

for slots in which a digital I/O card that supports 96

kHz is installed.)

• DOUBLE CHANNEL

This setting allows high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz)

audio signals to be handled when existing equipment

that operates at 44.1/48 kHz is connected. Two chan-

nels of signals at half the PM5D’s sampling frequency

(44.1/48 kHz) are transmitted/received together as a

high sampling rate monaural signal. (The number of

usable channels will be half.)

F FREQUENCY (Sampling frequency)

This indicates the sampling frequency of the signal

being input to each channel of the digital I/O card, in

sets of two channels.

G SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)

This button switches the Sampling Rate Converter on/

off, in sets of two channels. This is available only for

slots in which a digital I/O card with a built-in sam-

pling rate converter is installed.

H EMPHASIS STATUS

This indicates whether emphasis is applied to the input

signal, in sets of two channels. This is available only for

slots in which a digital I/O card is installed.

Here you can make settings that apply to the entire PM5D

system.

A PAIR MODE

Select one of the following two methods by which

input channels will be paired.

• HORIZONTAL PAIR

If this button is on, input channels of adjacent num-

bers (1/2, 3/4 ...) will be paired.

• VERTICAL PAIR

If this button is on, input channels of different layers

that share the same fader (1/25, 2/26 ...) will be paired.

This setting lets you use the faders of the INPUT chan-

nel strip to control up to 24 pairs (48 channels).

Hint

The graphic below the buttons will change according to the

pair mode you select.

When you switch from horizontal pair mode to verti-

cal pair mode, new numbers will be assigned to the

input channels as follows.

Channel 1 → no change

Channel 2 → Channel 25

Channel 3 → Channel 2

Channel 4 → Channel 26

Channel 47 → Channel 24

Channel 48 → no change

MIXER SETUP screen

MIXER SETUP

1 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 201

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

(If you again switch back to horizontal pair mode, the

channels will return to their previous number.) How-

ever, please note that this simply means the input

channel that was previously called “channel 2” is now

called “channel 25”; the name and parameter settings

of that channel have not changed.

In the various screens of the display (except for the

TRACKING RECALL screen and the FADER VIEW

screen), switching the pair mode will only change the

displayed numbers; the arrangement of the input chan-

nels will not change.

B PAN NOMINAL POSITION

Here you can specify whether a signal will be at nomi-

nal level when panned to center, or at nominal level

when panned far left or far right. Choose one of the fol-

lowing two settings. You can choose independently for

monaural channels and paired channels.

• CENTER

The signal will be at nominal level (+0 dB) when

panned to the center, and will rise +3 dB when panned

to far left or far right.

•L ↔ R

The signal will be at nominal level (+0 dB) when

panned to far left or far right, and will decrease

–3 dB when panned to the center.

Hint

The current setting is also shown by the graph below the

buttons.

C BUS SETUP

This area indicates the MIX bus mode (VARI/FIXED)

for every two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered

MIX buses. You can edit the setting by clicking the /

buttons at the left and right.

D STEREO B

Select one of the following two choices to specify how

the STEREO B bus will function.

• USE AS STEREO BUS

If this button is on, the STEREO B bus will function as

a conventional stereo bus; the same signal as the STE-

REO A bus will be sent to it.

• USE AS CENTER BUS

If this button is on, the STEREO B bus will function as

the CENTER bus of LCR mode. When you turn this

on, the CENTER bus output signal will be added to the

L/R channels of the STEREO A bus, allowing LCR

playback (three-channel playback). (The monitor sig-

nal will also be played back from the three MONITOR

OUT connectors L/C/R.

Note

If the USE AS STEREO BUS button is on, LCR mode is

disabled.

E SURROUND BUS ALLOCATION

Choose which of the following two ranges of MIX bus

will be used as surround buses.

MIX 1-8 . . . . . MIX bus 1–8

MIX 9-16 . . . . MIX bus 9–16

F SURROUND MODE

Choose one of the following as the surround mode

when using the Surround Pan function (➥ p.132).

• STEREO

This is conventional stereo mode.

• 3-1ch

This mode uses four channels: L (front left), C (front

center), R (front right), and S (surround).

• 5.1ch

This mode uses six channels: L (front left), C (front

center), R (front right), Ls (rear left), Rs (rear right),

and LFE (subwoofer).

365

(front left)

(front center)

(front right)

(surround)

LFE

(subwoofer)

(rear left)

(rear right)

(front left)

(front center)

(front right)

SYS/W.CLOCK function

202 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• 6.1ch

This mode uses seven channels: 5.1ch with the addi-

tion of Bs (rear center).

Hint

The graphic below the buttons will change according to the

mode you select.

G CASCADE FROM (Source when cascade-

connected)

Select one of the following as the external device that is

sending audio signals to the PM5D via a cascade

connection.

H CASCADE IN PORT SELECT

Select one of the following as the port that will receive

the audio signals from the cascade-connected device.

Hint

• If you select a choice other than CASCADE IN, the signal

from the slot will be assigned to the cascade input, and the

signal from the CASCADE IN connector will be assigned to

the corresponding slot input.

• The signal assigned from the CASCADE IN connector to the

slot input can be used as a patch source in the IN PATCH

screen.

• CASCADE IN

Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received

from another PM5D via the rear panel CASCADE IN

connector. If PM5D is selected as the cascade source

(

7), control signals for parameter linkage will also be

transmitted and received.

• SLOT 4

Up to 16 channels of audio signals can be received via

input channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slot 4 of

the rear panel. If you choose this setting, the signals

from the CASCADE IN connector (channels 1–16) will

be assigned to channels 1–16 of the SLOT IN 4 port

instead.

• SLOT 3/4

Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received via

input channels 1–16 of I/O cards installed in slots 3 and

4. (Since channels 15/16 of SLOT 4 are not used, only

30 channels are actually available.) If you choose this

setting, the signals from the CASCADE IN connector

(channels 1–32) will be assigned to channels 1–16 of

the SLOT IN 3/4 ports instead.

Display Source device

Available cas-

cade input port

Parame-

ter linkage

— Cascade disabled

CASCADE IN,

SLOT 3/4,

SLOT 1-4

[CH1-8], SLOT

1-4 [CH9-16]

Not

possible

PM5D another PM5D CASCADE IN Possible

*1. Linked parameters are speciﬁed in the CASCADE

screen.

DM2000

/02R96

YAMAHA DM2000

or 02R96

CASCADE IN

Not

possible

MIXER

[30BUS]

A mixer other than

the above (maxi-

mum 30 bus)

SLOT 3/4,

SLOT 1-4

[CH1-8], SLOT

1-4 [CH9-16]

MIXER

[16BUS]

A mixer other than

the above (maxi-

mum 16 bus)

SLOT 4

LFE

(subwoofer)

(rear left)

(rear right)

(front left)

(front center)

(front right)

(rear center)

97 M LK

8 J N

CASCADE IN

CH 1-16

SLOT 4

SLOT IN 1 (CH 1–16)

SLOT IN 2 (CH 1–16)

SLOT IN 3 (CH 1–16)

CH 1-16

SLOT 1-3

SLOT IN 4 (CH 1–16)

CASCADE IN

CH 1-16

16 channels

CASCADE IN

CH 1-16

SLOT 3/4

CH 1-16

SLOT 1/2

CASCADE IN

CH 1-32

SLOT IN 1 (CH 1–16)

SLOT IN 2 (CH 1–16)

SLOT IN 3 (CH 1–16)

SLOT IN 4 (CH 1–16)

30 channels

32 channels

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 203

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

• SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8]

Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received via

input channels 1–8 of I/O cards installed in slots 1–4.

(Since channels 7/8 of SLOT 4 are not used, only 30

channels are actually available.) If you choose this set-

ting, the signals from the CASCADE IN connector

(channels 1–32) will be assigned to channels 1–8 of the

SLOT IN 1–4 ports instead.

• SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16]

Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received via

input channels 9–16 of I/O cards installed in slots 1–4.

(Since channels 15/16 of SLOT 4 are not used, only 30

channels are actually available.) If you choose this set-

ting, the signals from the CASCADE IN connector

(channels 1–32) will be assigned to channels 9–16 of

the SLOT IN 1–4 ports instead.

I CASCADE TO (Transmission destination

when cascade-connected)

As the external device to which audio signals will be

transmitted and control signals exchanged over the cas-

cade connection, you can select either PM5D (i.e., a

different PM5D unit) or “----” (transmission disabled).

J CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT

Select one of the following as the signal source that will

be output from the CASCADE OUT connector.

Hint

If you select a setting other than CASCADE OUT, the same

signals will be output both to the corresponding slots and to

the CASCADE OUT connector.

• CASCADE OUT

The audio signals sent by the cascade function will be

output from the CASCADE OUT connector. If PM5D

is selected as the transmission destination (

9), con-

trol signals for parameter linkage will also be

transmitted and received. The type of signals that are

output can be selected in the CASCADE screen.

• SLOT 3/4

The same audio signals (up to 32 channels) as are out-

put from output channels 1–16 of slots 3/4 will be

output in parallel from the CASCADE OUT connector.

• SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8]

The same audio signals (up to 32 channels) that are

output from output channels 1–8 of slots 1–4 will also

be output in parallel from the CASCADE OUT

connector.

• SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16]

The same audio signals (up to 32 channels) that are

output from output channels 9–16 of slots 1–4 will also

be output in parallel from the CASCADE OUT

connector.

K CASCADE MODE

Choose one of the following two modes of operation

when multiple PM5D units are cascade-connected.

• MASTER

If the Cascade function is enabled, control signals will

be sent to an external PM5D.

• SLAVE

If the Cascade function is enabled, control signals will

be received from an external PM5D.

L BI-DIRECTION (Bi-directional

communication)

When multiple PM5D units are connected, this button

selects whether they will mix each other’s audio signals.

Set the Cascade mode and the BI-DIRECTION button

according to the type of cascade connection, as dis-

cussed below.

If you cascade-connect two PM5D units in a “ring”

topology (i.e., connect the CASCADE IN connector of

each unit to the OUT connector of the other unit), set

the cascade mode to MASTER on one unit and SLAVE

on the other unit. Turn the BI-DIRECTION button

On for both units.

In this state, the SLAVE unit will follow when you

operate the MASTER unit. The same mix will be out-

put from both PM5D units.

CASCADE IN

CH 1-8

SLOT 1-4

CH 9-16

SLOT 1-4

SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 9–16)

SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 1–8)

CASCADE IN

CH 1-32

30 channels

32 channels

CASCADE IN

CH 9-16

SLOT 1-4

CH 1-8

SLOT 1-4

SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 1–8)

SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 9–16)

CASCADE IN

CH 1-32

30 channels

32 channels

PM5D A

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

PM5D B

CASCADE MODE= MASTER

BI-DIRECTION= ON

CASCADE MODE= SLAVE

BI-DIRECTION= ON

Audio signals of

A+B

Audio signals of

A+B

(Cascade master) (Cascade slave)

SYS/W.CLOCK function

204 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

If you daisy-chain two to four PM5D units (i.e., con-

nect the first unit’s CASCADE OUT → second unit’s

CASCADE IN, and the second unit’s CASCADE OUT

→ third unit’s CASCADE IN. Up to four units can be

connected.), set the PM5D located last in the chain to

MASTER, and the remaining PM5D units to SLAVE.

Turn the BI-DIRECTION button Off for all units.

In this state, the SLAVE units will follow when you

operate the MASTER unit. The final mix of all signals

will be output from the PM5D that is connected last in

the chain.

M CASCADE ENABLE/DISABLE

Turns the Cascade function on/off.

Note

If you edit the settings of the CASCADE CONNECTION

parameters (

–

), the cascade function will temporarily be

reset to Off.

N DME CONTROL

This button accesses the DME CONTROL screen

(➥ p.182).

Here you can make various settings related to cascade

connection.

A CASCADE ENABLE/DISABLE

Enables/disables cascade connection.

B CASCADE LINK

Here you can select the operations and parameters that

will be linked when multiple PM5D units are cascade-

connected. You can select the following items.

• SCENE RECALL

Scene recall operations / Recall undo operations

• SCENE STORE/EDIT

Scene store operations, store undo operations, title

editing, sorting

• CUE/SOLO LOGIC

Cue/Solo operations (however, all Cue settings are

cleared when linking occurs)

• DIMMER ON/OFF

Dimmer effect (including talkback dimmer)

• PAGE CHANGE

Switching the display screen

CASCADE MODE= SLAVE

BI-DIRECTION= OFF

PM5D C

CASCADE MODE= MASTER

BI-DIRECTION= OFF

PM5D D

CASCADE MODE= SLAVE

BI-DIRECTION= OFF

PM5D A

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE

OUT

CASCADE MODE= SLAVE

BI-DIRECTION= OFF

PM5D B

(Cascade slave)

Audio signals of

A+B+C+D

(Cascade slave)

(Cascade master)

Audio signals of

A+B+C

Audio signals of

A+B

Audio signals of A

CASCADE screen

CASCADE

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 205

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

• DCA FADER MODE

Switching the mode of the top panel FADER MODE

section

• ENCODER MODE

Switching the mode of the top panel ENCODER

MODE section

• PANEL/LCD BRIGHTNESS

BRIGHTNESS settings in the PREFERENCE 2 screen

(UTILITY function)

• INPUT METER POINT/OUTPUT METER POINT/

PEAK HOLD

Input channel / output channel metering point selec-

tion, and peak hold on/off

• DCA LEVEL/MUTE

DCA group 1–8 level, name, [CUE] key on/off opera-

tions, and [MUTE] key on/off operations

Hint

DCA and MUTE parameter values will be linked the instant

Link is turned on. Other parameters will be linked for the first

time only when that parameter is operated after Link is turned

on.

• MUTE MASTER

Mute group 1–8 on/off

Hint

• For details on the actual procedure of cascade-connecting

multiple PM5D units, refer to p.143.

• To enable cascade link, you must turn on linking for the cor-

responding parameters on the other cascade-connected

PM5D units as well.

• You can also turn linking off for the master PM5D. For

example if you’ve cascade-connected multiple PM5D units,

you can (for example) make settings so that DCA 1 is linked

only between the master and the second unit, DCA 2 is

linked for all PM5D units, and DCA 3 is linked only between

the second unit and third unit.

C CASCADE IN SOURCE (Cascade IN source I/

O assignment view)

Here you can view and select the signals that are sent to

the PM5D’s internal buses from the cascade-con-

nected external device. The type of signals received will

depend on the selection in the CASCADE FROM field

of the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK

function)

D CASCADE IN ON/OFF

For each of the PM5D’s internal buses, you can specify

whether signals from the cascade master will be input.

E CASCADE OUT ON/OFF

For each of the PM5D’s internal buses, you can specify

whether signals will be output to the cascade slave.

3 4 5

External device selected in the

CASCADE FROM ﬁeld

Destina-

tion bus

PM5D

DM2000/

02R96

MIXER

[30BUS]

MIXER

[16BUS]

MIX 1 BUS 1

SLOT4- 1 MIX 1

MIX 2 BUS 2 SLOT4-2 MIX 2

MIX 3 BUS 3 SLOT4-3 MIX 3

MIX 4 BUS 4 SLOT4-4 MIX 4

MIX 5 BUS 5 SLOT4-5 MIX 5

MIX 6 BUS 6 SLOT4-6 MIX 6

MIX 7 BUS 7 SLOT4-7 MIX 7

MIX 8 BUS 8 SLOT4-8 MIX 8

MIX 9 AUX 1 SLOT4-9 MIX 9

MIX10 AUX 2 SLOT4-10 MIX10

MIX11 AUX 3 SLOT4-11 MIX11

MIX12 AUX 4 SLOT4-12 MIX12

MIX13 AUX 5 SLOT4- 1 MIX13

MIX14 AUX 6 SLOT4- 2 MIX14

MIX15 AUX 7 SLOT4- 3 MIX15

MIX16 AUX 8 SLOT4- 4 MIX16

MIX17 AUX 9 SLOT4- 5 MIX17

MIX18 AUX10 SLOT4- 6 MIX18

MIX19 AUX11 SLOT4- 7 MIX19

MIX20 AUX12 SLOT4- 8 MIX20

MIX21 — SLOT4- 9 MIX21

MIX22 — SLOT4-10 MIX22

MIX23 — SLOT4-11 MIX23

MIX24 — SLOT4-12 MIX24

ST AL ST L SLOT4-13 ST AL

ST AR ST R SLOT4-14 ST AR

ST BL — SLOT4- 9 ST BL

ST BR — SLOT4-10 ST BR

CUE L CUE L SLOT4-15 CUE L

CUE R CUE R SLOT4-16 CUE R

*1. The signal assigned to each bus is ﬁxed; it cannot be

changed.

*2. You can enable/disable the assignment for each bus.

However, you cannot send the signal of the same slot

or same input channel to multiple buses. If a signal

already assigned to a bus is selected for a different bus,

the previous assignment will be cancelled.

*3. Assigned from the top in ascending numerical order of

slot number / channel number, according to the settings

of the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT area of the

MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). (this

cannot be changed.)

SYS/W.CLOCK function

206 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

In this screen you can make settings such as phantom

power (+48V), gain, and HPF for each of the internal head

amps (PM5D-RH model only), or for each channel of an

external head amp device that supports remote control via

the dedicated protocol (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or AD824).

A DISPLAY MODE

Select one of the following as the type of head amp dis-

played in the screen.

• INTERNAL HA (PM5D-RH model only)

The internal head amp channels (AD IN 1–48, AD

STIN 1–4) will be displayed.

• EXTERNAL HA 1-4

• EXTERNAL HA 5-8

The channels of an external head amp device (ID num-

ber= 1–4, or ID number= 5–8) connected via the [HA

REMOTE] connector will be displayed.

Hint

Up to eight external devices can be daisy-chained to the

PM5D’s [HA REMOTE] connector. In this case, an ID number

(1–8) is automatically assigned to each device, starting from

the device that is connected directly to the PM5D’s [HA

REMOTE] connector.

B Model name

For each ID number, this indicates the model name of

the external head amp device that is connected. If no

device is connected this will indicate “-----”. However

even in this case, you will be able to make the same set-

tings as when a Yamaha AD8HR is connected.

C Slot/Channel

Here you can view/select the slot and channels to

which the audio output of the external head amp

device is connected.

Note

If an external head amp device is connected to a PM5D slot,

you must specify the appropriate slot/channels manually.

Please note that if you specify an incorrect setting, the input

channel HA indication in screens such as the IN HA screen

may differ from the actual state.

D +48V MASTER

If an AD8HR is connected via the [HA REMOTE] con-

nector, this indicates the master phantom power on/off

status. (Otherwise, this indicates “---”.)

E +48V

Switches phantom power (+48V) on/off for each

channel.

F HPF (High Pass Filter)

Turns the HPF on/off for each channel.

G Cutoff frequency

Specifies the HPF cutoff frequency for each channel of

the AD8HR. Move the cursor to the box, and turn the

[DATA] encoder to adjust the cutoff frequency in a

range of 20–600 Hz.

H GAIN

Adjusts the gain for each channel. Move the cursor to

the knob, and turn the [DATA] encoder to adjust the

gain in a range of –62 dB to +10 dB. The current value

is shown in the box below.

I GANG

If this button is on, the gain settings of two adjacent

odd-numbered/even-numbered channels will change

in tandem, maintaining the current offset value.

J LIBRARY

This button displays the HA LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.208).

Note

When an external head amp device is connected for the first

time, the settings on the external head amp device are used. If

you subsequently recall a HA library item, the HA library set-

tings are used.

HA (Head Amp) screen

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 207

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

In this screen you can specify the amount of attenuation

for each output channel and for each output channel of an

I/O card.

A DISPLAY MODE

Select the channels that will appear in the display, from

the following choices.

• OUTPUT

The screen will show the amount of attenuation for

output channels (MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX chan-

nels 1–8, STEREO A L/R channels, STEREO B L/R

channels), CUE L/R channels, MONITOR L/R/C chan-

nels, and 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–3 L/R channels.

• SLOT 1-4

The screen will show the amount of attenuation for

each output channel of the I/O cards installed in slots

1–4.

B ATT (Attenuation)

Adjusts the amount of attenuation for each channel.

Move the cursor to the knob, and turn the [DATA]

encoder to adjust the attenuation in a range of

–9 dB to 0 dB. The current value is shown in the box

below each knob.

In this screen you can turn dithering on/off and specify the

bit depth for dithering. These settings are made individu-

ally for each digital output jack and each output channel of

the digital I/O cards.

A Digital output jack dither

settings

Specify the number of bits (16,

20, 24 bits) used when dither-

ing the output signals from 2TR

DIGITAL OUT jacks 1–3. If you

select OFF, dithering will not be

performed.

B Slots 1–4

This area shows the type of digital I/O card installed in

each slot.

C Digital I/O card dither settings

For each output channel of the digital I/O cards

installed in the slots, specify the number of bits used

when dithering.

OUTPUT PORT ATT (Output port

attenuation) screen

OUTPUT PORT ATT

DITHER screen

DITHER

2 3

SYS/W.CLOCK function

208 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

In this screen you can recall, store, rename, or delete items

in the HA library.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the HA screen will appear.

B DATA FORMAT

Indicates the model name (PM5D-RH or PM5D).

C EXTERNAL HA TYPE INFORMATION

This area shows the model names (AD8HR/AD824) of

the external head amp devices (ID numbers= 1–8)

connected to the PM5D’s [HA REMOTE] connector.

D RECALL

Recalls the HA library item selected in the list into

memory.

E STORE

Stores the current settings of the HA screen into the

location selected in the list. When you click this button

a window will appear, allowing you to name and save

the settings.

F TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

G CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

H DATA FORMAT

Indicates the data format (PM5D-RH or PM5D) of the

library item selected in the list.

I EXTERNAL HA TYPE INFORMATION

This area indicates the model name (AD8HR/AD824)

of the external head amps (ID numbers= 1–8) for

which data is stored in the library.

J Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

Note

• If PM5D format data is recalled to the PM5D-RH, the inter-

nal head amp settings will not change. If PM5D-RH format

data is recalled to the PM5D, the internal head amp settings

will be ignored.

• If the recall-source and recall-destination head amp devices

have the same ID number but are assigned to different slots/

channels, the data will not be recalled to head amps of those

ID numbers.

• AD8HR data can be recalled into an AD824, and AD824

data can be recalled into an AD8HR. However when AD8HR

data is recalled to an AD824, the gain settings of each chan-

nel will be converted into 6 dB units in order to match the

specifications of the AD824.

HA LIBRARY screen

HA LIBRARY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 209

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

METER function

This screen contains meters that show the input level of the

input channels (input channels 1–48, ST IN channels 1–4,

FXTRN channels 1–4).

A METERING POINT

Select one of the following as the point at which the

input level will be detected. This setting also applies to

the meters on the panel.

PRE ATT . . . . . . . . . Immediately before the

attenuator

PRE GATE . . . . . . . Immediately before the internal

gate

PRE FADER . . . . . . Immediately before the fader

POST FADER . . . . . Immediately after the fader

POST ON . . . . . . . . Immediately after the [ON] key

B CH METER ALWAYS PRE ATT

If this button is on, the input channel meters of the

panel will always show the pre-attenuator levels.

C PEAK HOLD

If this button is on, the peak level of each meter will be

held. When you turn this button off, the peak level

indication that had been held will be cleared. Peak hold

will be cleared when you change the metering point

(

1). This button is linked with the [PEAK HOLD] key

in the METER section of the top panel.

D Meters

These peak level meters indicate the input level of each

channel. The current fader value is shown in the box

below.

If clipping occurs at any point PRE ATT, POST EQ,

POST GATE, POST COMP, INSERT IN, or POST

FADER, the ∑ segment will light.

E Pair icon

This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered channels.

INPUT METER screen

INPUT METER

1 2 3

METER function

210 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

This screen contains meters that show the output level of

output channels (MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels

1–8, STEREO A/B channels), MONITOR (L/R/C), and

CUE (L/R).

A METERING POINT

Select one of the following as the point at which the

output level will be detected.

PRE EQ . . . . . . . . . . Immediately before the EQ

PRE FADER . . . . . . Immediately before the fader

POST FADER . . . . . Immediately after the fader

POST ON . . . . . . . . Immediately after the [ON] key

POST DELAY . . . . . Immediately after the internal

delay (of an output channel)

B CUE METERING POINT

Select one of the following as the point at which the

output level of the cue signal will be detected.

PRE DELAY . . . . . . Immediately before the internal

delay (of a monitor/cue

channel)

POST DELAY . . . . . Immediately after the internal

delay (of a monitor/cue

channel)

C PEAK HOLD

If this button is on, the peak level of each meter will be

held. When you turn this button off, the peak level

indication that had been held will be cleared. Peak hold

will be cleared when you change the metering point

(

1). This button is linked with the [PEAK HOLD] key

in the METER section of the top panel.

D Meters

These peak level meters indicate the output level of

each channel. The current master level value is shown

in the box below.

If clipping occurs at any point POST EQ, POST

COMP, POST ON, POST FADER, or INSERT IN, the

∑ segment will light.

E Pair icon

This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered channels.

OUTPUT METER screen

OUTPUT METER

1 2 3

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 211

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

This screen contains meters that show the amount of gain

reduction produced by the gate/compressor for each input

channel (input channels 1–48, ST IN channels 1–4).

A GATE/COMP (Gate / Compressor)

These buttons select either Gate or Compressor as the

processor whose gain reduction amount is shown by

the meters. The display at the left will change accord-

ing to your selection.

B Meters

These peak level meters indicate the amount of gain

reduction for each channel. The current fader value is

shown in the box below.

C Pair icon

This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered channels.

This screen contains meters that show the amount of gain

reduction produced by the compressor for each output

channel (MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, STE-

REO A/B channels).

A Meters

These peak level meters indicate the amount of gain

reduction for each channel. The current master level

value is shown in the box below.

B Pair icon

This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered channels.

INPUT GR (Input Gain Reduction)

screen

INPUT GR

OUTPUT GR (Output Gain Reduction)

screen

OUTPUT GR

MON/CUE function

212 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

MON/CUE function

In this screen you can switch talkback on/off, and select the

talkback destination.

A Level meter (TALKBACK jack level meter)

This level meter indicates the peak level of the signal

being input from the TALKBACK jack of the top panel.

B +48V (TALKBACK jack phantom power)

This button switches phantom power on/off for the

TALKBACK jack.

Note

The WITH ANALOG VOLUME icon below the button indi-

cates that the LEVEL volume in the TALKBACK section of the

panel will affect only the signal being input from the TALK-

BACK jack.

C Talkback input selection

If you want to use an input jack other than the TALK-

BACK jack for purposes of talkback, you can choose it

here from analog inputs AD IN 1–48. The talkback

input selection is not included in the input patch

library.

D HA (PM5D-RH model only)

Here you can switch phantom power on/off and adjust

the gain for the analog input selected in (

3). The

LEVEL volume in the TALKBACK section of the panel

does not affect the talkback input from the analog

input channel. The HA setting is included in the HA

library.

E Level meter (Analog input level meter)

This level meter indicates the peak level of the signal

being input from the analog input selected in (

3).

F ON/OFF (Analog input on/off)

This button switches the talkback input selected in (3)

on/off.

G ON/OFF (Talkback on/off)

This button switches Talkback on/off. This is linked

with the TALKBACK [ON] key in the TALKBACK sec-

tion of the panel.

H NEVER LATCH

This button selects one of the following as the mode in

which the TALKBACK ON/OFF button and the panel

TALKBACK [ON] key will behave.

• If the NEVER LATCH button is off

Talkback will be switched on/off (Latched operation)

each time you click the ON/OFF button or press the

TALKBACK [ON] key. However if you press and hold

down the TALKBACK [ON] key, talkback will stay on

only while you continue holding down the key; talk-

back will turn off when you release the key (Unlatched

operation).

• If the NEVER LATCH button is on

Talkback will be on only while you click and hold

down the ON/OFF button or press and hold down the

TALKBACK [ON] button; talkback will turn off when

you release the button or key (Unlatched operation).

TALKBACK screen

TALKBACK

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 213

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

I BUS ASSIGN

Here you can select the bus(es) or output jack(s) from

which the talkback signal will be sent. (Multiple selec-

tions are allowed.)

MIX 1–24 . . . . . . . . MIX bus 1–24

MATRIX 1–8 . . . . . MATRIX bus 1–8

ST A L/R . . . . . . . . . STEREO A bus L/R channels

ST B L/R . . . . . . . . . STEREO B bus L/R channels

J TALKBACK OUT (Talkback direct output)

This indicates the channel of the output jack / slot that

is selected as the output destination for direct output of

the talkback signal. If more than one output destina-

tion is patched, “...” will be displayed following the

name of the output destination that was found first. If

you want to change the output destination, click the

PATCH button to access the OUTPUT PATCH screen.

’Here you can make settings and perform operations

related to the internal oscillator.

A OSC ON/OFF (Oscillator on/off)

Turns the Oscillator on/off. This is linked with the

OSCILLATOR [ON] switch of the top panel.

B OSC MODE (Oscillator mode)

These buttons select the waveform or type of noise pro-

duced by the oscillator.

SINE WAVE 1CH . Sine wave x 1 channel

SINE WAVE 2CH . Sine wave x 2 channels

PINK NOISE . . . . . Pink noise

BURST NOISE . . . . Burst noise (repeated output of

pink noise)

C PARAMETERS

Here you can set various items according to the selec-

tion in (

2).

OSCILLATOR screen

OSCILLATOR

MON/CUE function

214 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• If SINE WAVE 1CH is selected

• If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected

• If PINK NOISE is selected

• If BURST NOISE is selected

D LEVEL

This knob adjusts the output level of the oscillator. The

range is –96 dB to 0 dB. The level meter beside the

knob indicates the output level.

E FREQ (Frequency)

This knob specifies the frequency of the sine wave pro-

duced by the oscillator. The range is 20 Hz–20 kHz (the

current setting is shown in the numerical box below).

You can use the 10 kHz /1 kHz / 100 Hz buttons to

select a preset frequency.

Hint

If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected, you can specify the level and

frequency of each channel independently.

F HPF (High Pass Filter)

G LPF (Low Pass Filter)

Here you can make settings for the HPF/LPF through

which the pink noise or burst noise is sent. The knob

above sets the cutoff frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz), and

the button below switches the filter on/off.

H WIDTH

I INTERVAL

If burst noise is selected, these knobs select the dura-

tion of the noise itself (WIDTH) and the duration of

silence between noise bursts (INTERVAL).

The range is 0.1–10 sec for WIDTH, and 1–30 sec for

INTERVAL. (The current setting is shown in the box

below each knob.)

J OSC OUT (Oscillator direct output)

This indicates the channel of the output jack / slot that

directly outputs the oscillator signal. If you want to

change the output destination, click the PATCH but-

ton to access the OUTPUT PATCH screen.

If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected, the L channel of the

oscillator is sent to the oscillator direct output.

K BUS ASSIGN

Here you can select the bus(es) or output jack(s) from

which the sine wave or noise will be sent. (Multiple

selections are allowed.)

MIX 1–24 . . . . . . . . MIX bus 1–24

MATRIX 1–8. . . . . . MATRIX bus 1–8

AL/AR . . . . . . . . . . . STEREO A bus L/R channels

BL/BR . . . . . . . . . . . STEREO B bus L/R channels

If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected, the L channel of the

oscillator is output to the odd-numbered bus or the L

jack, and the R channel of the oscillator is output to the

even-numbered bus or the R jack.

54 54

6 74

6 74 98

INTERVAL

WIDTH

Level

Time

Pink noise output

The BURST NOISE button is on

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 215

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

This screen contains various settings and indications for

2TR IN / 2TR OUT.

A Input level meters

These indicate the input level of 2TR IN DIGITAL

jacks 1–3 and 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1–2.

B FREQUENCY (Sampling frequency)

Indicates the sampling frequency of the input signal

from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3.

C SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)

These are on/off switches for the sampling rate con-

verters built into 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3.

(If turned off, this indicates “THROUGH.”)

D EMPHASIS STATUS

Indicates whether emphasis processing is being applied

to the input signal from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3.

E Output level meter

Indicates the output level of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks

1–3.

F SRC (Sampling Rate Converter)

These are on/off and output frequency select switches

for the sampling rate converters built into 2TR OUT

DIGITAL jacks 1–3. As the output frequency you can

select either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. The on/off button

selects either ON or THROUGH (off).

G Fs (Sampling frequency)

This indicates the sampling frequency at which the

PM5D is operating.

2TR I/O screen

2TR I/O

MON/CUE function

216 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can make settings and perform operations

related to monitoring.

A MONITOR SOURCE

Selects the source that will be monitored from the L/R/

C MONITOR OUT jacks. You can select one from 2TR

IN A1/A2, 2TR IN D1–D3, or DEFINE, and also simul-

taneously select one from STEREO A/B or LCR. These

buttons are linked with the various keys of the MONI-

TOR section in the top panel.

If a monitor source indicated by (*) is selected, the sig-

nal that is output will change depending on whether

the USE AS STEREO BUS button or the USE AS CEN-

TER BUS button is turned on in the STEREO B section

of the MIXER SETUP screen (➥ p.201).

❏ If the USE AS STEREO BUS button is on

❏ If the USE AS CENTER BUS button is on

B DEFINE

If “DEFINE” is selected in the MONITOR SOURCE

section, you can choose the signal that will be moni-

tored from the following.

MIX 1–24 . . . . . . . . MIX bus 1–24 output signal

MATRIX 1–8. . . . . . MATRIX bus 1–8 output signal

C MONITOR / CUE DELAY

Here you can make settings for the delay function pro-

vided on the MONITOR/CUE bus output. Use the

knob to specify the delay time (0–1000 msec), and use

the ON/OFF button to switch the delay on/off. If the

ON/OFF button is on, the monitor signal and cue sig-

nal will be delayed by the specified time. The delay time

units can be changed in the DELAY SCALE field found

in each screen of the INPUT DELAY/OUTPUT

DELAY function.

D DIMMER

When you turn this button on, the level of the signal

being monitored will be temporarily attenuated. The

knob adjusts the amount of attenuation that will occur

when the button is on. The range of adjustment is

–96 dB to 0 dB. While this button is on, the DIMM

indicator will appear in the upper right of the display.

Hint

You can also use an external switch connected to the GPI IN

connector to switch the dimmer on/off. To do so, assign the

MONITOR DIMMER ON function to the GPI IN port to which

the switch is connected. (

➥

p.177).

E TALKBACK DIMMER

This adjusts the amount by which the monitor signal

will be attenuated when talkback is on. The range of

adjustment is –96 dB to 0 dB. The talkback on/off sta-

tus is shown in the box below.

2TR IN A1 2TR IN ANALOG jack 1 input signal

2TR IN A2 2TR IN ANALOG jack 2 input signal

2TR IN D1 2TR IN DIGITAL jack 1 input signal

2TR IN D2 2TR IN DIGITAL jack 2 input signal

2TR IN D3 2TR IN DIGITAL jack 3 input signal

STEREO A STEREO A channel output signal (*)

STEREO B STEREO B channel output signal (*)

LCR LCR channel output signal (*)

DEFINE

The signal selected in the DEFINE section

(

) of this screen

MONITOR screen

MONITOR

Monitor

source

LRC

ST A STEREO A L STEREO A R

—ST B STEREO B L STEREO B R

LCR — —

Monitor

source

LRC

ST A STEREO A L STEREO A R —

ST B — —

STEREO B L

LCR STEREO A L STEREO A R

3 4 5

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 217

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

F Level meter

These peak level meters indicate the level of the output

signal from the MONITOR OUT jacks. You can select

the level detection point to be immediately before the

delay that is provided on the MONITOR/CUE bus

output (when the PRE DELAY button is on) or imme-

diately after the delay (when the POST DELAY button

is on).

G CUE INTERRUPTION

If this button is on, the cue/solo signal will also be out-

put from the MONITOR OUT jacks while the Cue/

Solo function is active. During this time, the monitor

source selected in the MONITOR SOURCE section

will be disabled.

If this button is off, the cue/solo signal will never be

output from the MONITOR OUT jacks.

H MONITOR MODE

Here you can select one of the following two ways in

which the signal will be output from the MONITOR

OUT jacks.

STEREO . . . . The L/R channels will be output in

stereo.

MONO . . . . . . The L/R channels will be mixed, and

output in monaural.

The status of these two buttons is linked with on/off

operations of the [MONO] key in the MONITOR sec-

tion of the panel.

I OUTPUT ON/OFF

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is output

from the MONITOR OUT jacks.

J MONITOR INSERT

This area shows the input jacks (and input channels of

the digital I/O card) that are inserted into the MONI-

TOR OUT L/C/R channels. The input level of the

inserted signal is shown by the level meter at the right.

If GEQ or EFFECT is inserted, the corresponding

information is shown here.

K INSERT ON/OFF

This button enables/disables insertion.

L PATCH

Displays the INSERT PATCH screen.

Here you can make settings and perform operations

related to the Cue/Solo function.

A SOLO ON/OFF

This button selects either

CUE mode or SOLO mode

as the type of monitoring

performed by the [CUE]

key. When you turn this

button on, a confirmation

message will appear. Each

mode operates as follows.

• CUE mode (SOLO ON/

OFF button is off)

The signal of the channel

whose [CUE] key is

pressed will be sent to the

dedicated CUE bus, and

monitored via the CUE

bus from the CUE OUT

jacks, MONITOR OUT

jacks (if CUE INTERRUP-

TION is on), and PHONE

jack. This mode lets you

monitor the signal of a

specific channel without

affecting other buses.

• SOLO mode (SOLO ON/OFF button is on)

When using Input Solo, the familiar “solo” function is

enabled; only the signal of the channel whose [CUE]

key is pressed will be sent to the MIX, MATRIX, and

STEREO A/B buses, and other channels will be muted.

When using Output Solo, only that channel will be on.

The signal of a channel whose [CUE] key is pressed can

also be monitored from the CUE OUT jacks, MONI-

TOR OUT jacks, and PHONES jack.

CUE/SOLO screen

CUE/SOLO

MON/CUE function

218 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

B CUE MODE

This button selects one of the following two possibili-

ties for when the [CUE] key of more than one channel

is pressed.

• MIX CUE mode

All channels / DCA groups whose [CUE] key is on will

be mixed for monitoring.

Note

As an exception to MIX CUE, turning on a CUE button in the

EFFECT PARAM screen or GATE PARAM screen or turning

on a CUE button in the DME CONTROL screen (EXTERNAL

CUE) will give priority to monitoring only the corresponding

signal. (Any [CUE] keys that had been on until then will be

forcibly defeated.)

• LAST CUE mode

Only the channel / DCA group whose [CUE] key was

pressed last will be monitored.

C CUE FUNCTION

These buttons let you turn on/off various functions

related to Cue. You can select the following functions.

• MIX CUE LINK

Specifies whether cue operations will be linked to MIX

channel selection. If this button is on, pressing the mix

key selected in the ENCODER MODE section of the

panel once again will simultaneously switch on the

[CUE] key of that channel.

• CUE/SEL LINK

Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with

cue operations. If this button is on, pressing the [CUE]

key of a channel will simultaneously select that chan-

nel and light its [SEL] key.

• FADER/CUE RELEASE

This specifies whether cue operations will be restricted

according to the fader position. If this button is on, cue

will be defeated if you raise the fader from the –∞ dB

position for a channel whose [CUE] key is lit. For a

channel whose fader is above the

–∞ dB position, cue operation will not be possible.

(Pressing the [CUE] key will do nothing.) This means

that cue can be turned on only when the fader is at the

–∞ dB position.

D CUE OUT

Turns the cue output on/off.

E INPUT

Here you can select the position from which an input

channel will be cued.

PFL (Pre-Fader Listen)

. . . . . . . Immediately before the fader

AFL (After-Fader Listen)

. . . . . . . Immediately after the fader

POST PAN . . . . . . . Immediately after pan

If you select PFL, you can also use the knob located at

the left to adjust the output level in a range of

–20 dB to +10 dB.

F DCA

Here you can make cue output settings for DCA

groups.

• DCA TRIM

Adjusts the level of cue output from a DCA group in a

range of –20 dB to +10 dB.

• DCA UNITY

If this button is on, pressing a DCA [CUE] key will

always monitor the corresponding DCA group at unity

gain (the same level at when the DCA fader is at 0 dB).

Hint

• If you leave the DCA UNITY button on, you will be able to

monitor the desired DCA group even if that DCA group is

muted or its fader is lowered.

• Even when the DCA UNITY button is on, the value specified

by the DCA TRIM knob is still valid. (In this case, the DCA

TRIM knob specifies an offset value relative to unity gain.)

• PRE PAN/POST PAN

This selects whether the pre-pan signal (PRE PAN but-

ton on) or the post-pan signal (POST PAN button is

on) will be monitored when the DCA [CUE] button is

turned on.

G OUTPUT

Here you can select the position from which an output

channel will be cued.

PFL (Pre-Fader Listen)

. . . . . . . . Immediately before the fader

POST ON . . . Immediately after the [ON] key

If you select PFL, you can also use the knob located at

the left to adjust the output level in a range of

–20 dB to +10 dB.

5 6 7

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 219

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

H INPUT SOLO SAFE

Here you can specify input channels that will be

excluded from Solo operations. (You can specify more

than one.) The buttons correspond to the following

input channels.

I OUTPUT SOLO SAFE

Here you can specify output channels that will be

excluded from Solo operations. (You can specify more

than one.) The buttons correspond to the following

output channels.

Hint

Solo Safe settings and Cue on/off operations are linked for

paired channels. Solo Safe operations can be performed inde-

pendently of the scene memory.

J Level meter

This is a peak level meter that indicates the level of the

signals output from the CUE OUT jacks. You can select

the level detection point to be immediately befor the

delay that is provided on the MONITOR/CUE bus

output (when the PRE DELAY button is on), or imme-

diately after the delay (when the POST DELAY button

is on).

K MONITOR / CUE DELAY

Here you can make settings for the delay function pro-

vided on the MONITOR/CUE bus output. Use the

knob to specify the delay time (0–1000 msec), and use

the DELAY button to switch the delay on/off. In gen-

eral, this is linked with the MONITOR/CUE DELAY

setting in the MONITOR screen. However, the differ-

ence is that in this screen, turning the AUTO BYPASS

button on lets you automatically bypass the delay when

you perform the Cue any input channels.

INPUT 1–48 Input channels 1–48

ST IN 1–4 ST IN channels 1–4

FX RTN 1–4 FX RTN channels 1–4

SET ALL

Sets all input channels to the Solo

Safe condition

CLEAR ALL

Defeats the Solo Safe setting for

all input channels

MIX 1–24 MIX channels 1–24

MATRIX 1–8 MATRIX channels 1–8

STEREO A/B STEREO A/B channels

SET ALL

Sets all output channels to the

Solo Safe condition

CLEAR ALL

Defeats the Solo Safe setting for

all output channels

Output functions

220 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

OUTPUT PATCH function

Here you can make patch settings to send output channel

signals to the outputs of I/O cards installed in the slots, to

the input of internal effects, and to the 2TR OUT DIGI-

TAL jacks.

A SELECTED PATCH

This indicates the output channel number and output

port of the grid at which the cursor is located.

B CH (Output channel)

This is the number of the output channel (MIX chan-

nel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel,

MONITOR L/C/R channel, TALKBACK OUT chan-

nel, OSC OUT channel) whose output destination will

be patched. The channel number at which the cursor is

located will be highlighted.

C ASSIGN

For each output channel, this indicates the number of

output ports that are currently assigned.

D Grid

This grid lets you patch output ports (horizontal rows)

to output channels (vertical columns). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking

a grid location you can set/cancel patching.

The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid loca-

tion to which you move the cursor.

Hint

• If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the PREFER-

ENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), a confirmation message

will appear each time you attempt to change a patch set-

ting. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on, a

confirmation message will also appear when you attempt to

make patch settings that would cause an existing patch to

be modified.

• To move the cursor location rapidly in or out of the grid, hold

down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [

√

]/[

[

†

] keys.

• To move rapidly to left or right inside the grid, turn the

[DATA] encoder. To move up or down, hold down the

[SHIFT] key and turn the [DATA] encoder.

Note

You can patch an output channel to more than one output

port, but you cannot patch multiple output channels to a sin-

gle output port.

E Output port

From the top, this area indicates the type of output

port, the ID number, the output channel number, and

the number of output channels assigned. The follow-

ing types of output port can be selected.

F LIBRARY button

This button accesses the OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.223), where you can store/recall patch

library settings for output channels.

Hint

• The signal from immediately after the delay and immedi-

ately before the output port attenuation will be sent to output

ports you patch in this screen. Subsequently, in the case of

SLOT OUT and 2TR OUT, the specified output port attenua-

tion will be applied respectively.

• The rear panel MIX OUT jacks 1–24, MATRIX OUT jacks 1–

8, and STEREO OUT jacks A/B always output the signal of

the corresponding output channel. They are not affected by

the settings in this screen.

Output functions

OUTPUT PATCH screen

OUTPUT PATCH

SLOT OUT

Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots

1–4

FX IN

L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8 (MIX chan-

nels are the only output channels that can be

selected)

2TR OUT L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 221

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

In this screen you can patch the input/output ports into

which external devices will be inserted. Select the output

port in the left side of the screen, and the input port in the

right side of the screen.

A SELECTED PATCH

This indicates the number of the output channel at

which the cursor is located in the grid.

B Insert in/out

This indicates the input/output ports that are patched

as insert in/out for the output channel at which the

cursor is located. If multiple ports are assigned for

insert-out, only the first port is displayed.

C CH (Output channel)

This area shows the numbers of the output channels

(MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO A/B

channels, MONITOR L/R/C channels). The channel

number at which the cursor is located will be

highlighted.

D ASSIGN

For each output channel, this indicates the number of

output ports that are currently assigned as insert-out.

E Grid

For each output channel (vertical column), this grid

lets you can patch one or more output ports (horizon-

tal row) to be used as insert-outs. Currently-patched

grids are indicated by a symbol.

By clicking a grid location you can set/cancel patching.

The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid loca-

tion to which you move the cursor.

Hint

Operations in the grid are the same for all of the patching

screens. For details, refer to the Hint on p.220.

F Output port

From the top, this area indicates the type of output

port, the ID number, the output channel number, and

the number of output channels assigned. The follow-

ing types of output port can be patched as insert-out.

Hint

If you select FX IN as an insert-out, the output of the same

internal effect will automatically be selected as the insert-in. If

you select GEQ IN, the output of the same GEQ module will

automatically be selected as the insert-in.

G ASSIGN

For each input channel, this indicates the number of

input ports that are currently assigned as insert-in.

H Input port

From the top, this area indicates the type of input port,

the ID number, the input channel number, and the

number of input channels assigned. The following

types of input port can be selected.

INSERT PATCH screen

INSERT PATCH

SLOT OUT

Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots

1–4

FX IN L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8

GEQ IN Inputs of internal GEQ modules 1–12

2TR OUT L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3

AD IN INPUT jacks 1–48

AD ST IN ST IN jacks 1–4 L/R

SLOT IN

Input channels of an I/O card installed in slots

1–4

FX OUT L/R outputs of internal effects 1–8

GEQ OUT Outputs of GEQ modules 1–12

2TR IN

L/R channels of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 and

2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2

OUTPUT PATCH function

222 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

I LIBRARY button

This button accesses the OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.223), where you can store/recall patch

library settings for output channels.

❏ Using the [SHIFT] key + CURSOR [√]/

[®] to move the cursor

When operating from the panel, you can move the cur-

sor from the right side of the screen to the left side (or

vice versa) by holding down the [SHIFT] key and using

the CURSOR [√]/[®] keys.

To quickly move the cursor in or out of the grid, hold

down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [√]/

[®]/[π]/[†] keys.

Note

To enable an insert-in assigned to an output channel in this

screen, you must turn on the ON/OFF button for the corre-

sponding output channel in the INSERT POINT screen

(OUTPUT PATCH function). (

➥

p.222) However, the insert-

out is always on, regardless of the state of the ON/OFF but-

ton. An exception to the above is that if you insert GEQ, its

insert-in will automatically be on.

In this screen you can select the position at which the

insert-in/out of each output channel will be patched. Here

you can also switch insert-in on/off.

A Insert view

When you move the cursor to the insert I/O point

(

4), the insert point for that output channel will be

shown graphically.

B OUTPUT CH (Output channel)

This is the number of the output channel you are edit-

ing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart

symbol shown at the left; settings 3–4 will be linked

for these channels. You can click this symbol to enable/

disable pairing.

C ON/OFF (Insert on/off)

This button switches insert on/off for each channel.

This is linked for paired channels.

Note

Be aware that if you turn on this button when either insert-in or

insert-out are unpatched, the signal will no longer be output

from the corresponding output channel.

D INSERT I/O (Insert I/O point)

Here you can select one of the following as the insert-

in/out location for each output channel.

➠

[SHIFT] key

CURSOR [®] key

Cursor

Cursor will move

PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ

POST EQ Immediately after the EQ

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key

INSERT POINT screen

INSERT POINT

2 34

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 223

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

output patch library.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the OUTPUT PATCH

screen will appear.

B Patch information for the current scene

This area shows the output patch settings for the cur-

rent scene.

C RECALL

Recalls the output patch library item selected in the list

into memory.

D STORE

Stores the current settings of the OUTPUT PATCH

screen into the location selected in the list. When you

click this button a window will appear, allowing you to

name and save the settings.

E TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

F CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

G Patch settings of the library item

Displays the settings of the library item selected in the

list.

H Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen

OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY

OUTPUT INSERT function

224 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

OUTPUT INSERT function

Here you can make settings for the internal HA (PM5D-

RH model only) or external HA assigned to the insert-in of

an output channel or MONITOR L/C/R channel.

A +48V

Switches phantom power (+48V) on/off for each

channel.

B HPF (High Pass Filter)

Turns the HPF on/off for each channel.

C Cutoff frequency

Specifies the HPF cutoff frequency for each channel.

Move the cursor to the box, and turn the [DATA]

encoder to adjust the cutoff frequency in a range of 20–

600 Hz.

D GAIN

Adjusts the gain for each channel. Move the cursor to

the knob, and turn the [DATA] encoder to adjust the

attenuation in a range of +10 dB to –62 dB. The cur-

rent value is shown in the box below each knob.

Note

Since settings

–

are for the patched input port, they are

linked for channels that are patched to the same port.

E Input port

This indicates the type and number of the input port

assigned to the insert-in of that channel.

Note

• Items

–

are not shown for channels to whose insert-in

nothing is patched, or for channels patched to an input port

that does not have a HA. Items

and

are not shown for

channels patched to a port that has no high pass filter.

• Use the INSERT PATCH screen (OUTPUT PATCH func-

tion) to patch an input port to an insert-in.

F Channel

This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two

paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol dis-

played between them.

Note

HA settings are not linked even if two channels are paired.

However, the GAIN knob setting is linked for HAs whose

GANG button is turned on in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK

function).

Hint

The HA settings you edit in this screen are also reflected in

the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function).

INSERT IN MIX 1-24 screen

INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONI-

TOR screen

INSERT IN MIX1-24

INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 225

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

This screen is shared with HA LIBRARY in the SYS/

W.CLOCK function (➥ p.208).

OUTPUT EQ function

Here you can edit the EQ parameters of the selected out-

put channel.

(If a MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel is selected)

(If a MATRIX channel is selected)

HA LIBRARY screen

HA LIBRARY

EQ PARAM (EQ Parameter) screen

EQ PARAM

OUTPUT EQ function

226 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

A Channel selection

Select the output channel that you want to edit. You

can use eight-band EQ (four UPPER bands + four

LOWER bands) for MIX channels and STEREO A/B

channels, and four-band EQ for MATRIX channels.

If a channel is paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is

selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For

MIX channels or MATRIX channels, you can click this

symbol to enable/disable pairing.

B EQ ON/OFF (EQ on/off)

Turns the EQ on/off for that channel.

C EQ LINK GROUP

Selects the EQ link group (A–H) to which the EQ of

that channel belongs. EQ parameters are linked for

output channels belonging to the same group.

Note

The EQ of MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels can be

assigned only to groups A–F, and the EQ of MATRIX chan-

nels can be assigned only to groups G/H.

D LIBRARY

This button accesses the OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.228), where you can store/recall EQ

library settings for output channels.

E EQ TYPE

Selects the type of EQ. Turning the TYPE I button on

selects the algorithm used in the 02R series. Turning

the TYPE II button on selects a newly developed algo-

rithm. TYPE II reduces the interference between bands.

F EQ graph

This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ

parameters. The colored vertical lines indicate the

FREQ (center frequency) of the band for the parame-

ter at which the cursor is located. (The color of each

line matches the knob markings for each band.) The

response curve will change when you edit the Q or

GAIN of each band.

G Level meter

These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and

after EQ. If the signal clips before EQ, the OVER seg-

ment will light.

H EQ FLAT

This button resets the GAIN parameters of all bands to

the default value (±0.0 dB). When you click this but-

ton, a confirmation message will appear.

I LOWER/UPPER (only for MIX channels and

STEREO A/B channels)

This indicator shows which four bands (LOWER or

UPPER) are selected in the SELECTED CHANNEL

section of the panel. The text label of the selected group

is displayed in yellow.

J Knobs

These knobs adjust the Q, FREQ (center frequency),

and GAIN (amount of boost/cut) for each band.

K BYPASS

These buttons bypass each band of the EQ.

L (LOW shelving)

If this button is on, the LOW EQ will function as a

shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear.

M HPF (High Pass Filter)

If this button is on, the LOW EQ will function as a

high-pass filter. The Q knob will disappear, and the

GAIN knob is used to switch the HPF on/off.

N (HIGH shelving)

If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a

shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear.

O LPF (Low Pass Filter)

If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a

low-pass filter. The Q knob will disappear, and the

GAIN knob is used to switch the LPF on/off.

1 2 4

8 7

L M N O

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 227

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

These screens list the EQ settings for all output channels.

Here you can also copy EQ settings between output

channels.

A EQ graph

This mini-graph shows the approximate EQ response

for each output channel.

When you click the graph at which the cursor is cur-

rently located, the EQ PARAM screen for that channel

will appear.

In this screen you can drag and drop the mini-graph

from the desired channel to copy its EQ settings.

(When you drag and drop the mini-graph, a message

will ask you to confirm the copy operation.)

You can also copy EQ settings between the MIX 1-24

screen and the MATRIX/STEREO screen. First drag the

mini-graph over the MIX 1-24 tab or MATRIX/STE-

REO tab in the screen (the screen will switch). Then

drag and drop the mini-graph onto the desired chan-

nel, and a message will ask you to confirm the copy

operation.

You can also copy settings between the eight-band EQ

of a MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel and the

four-band EQ of a MATRIX channel. In this case, only

the LOWER four bands will be copied for MIX chan-

nels or STEREO A/B channels.

B EQ ON/OFF (EQ on/off)

Turns the EQ on/off for that channel. This is linked for

paired channels.

C Channel

This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two

paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol dis-

played between them.

D Level meter

This meter indicates the peak level after EQ. If the sig-

nal clips, the OVER segment will light.

MIX 1-24 screen

MATRIX/STEREO screen

MIX 1-24

MATRIX/STEREO

4 1 2

OUTPUT EQ function

228 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

output EQ library.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the EQ PARAM screen for

the currently selected output channel will appear.

B Channel selection

Select the channel that you want to edit.

C EQ graph for the selected channel

This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ

for the currently selected channel.

D Level meter

These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and

after EQ. If the signal clips before EQ, the OVER seg-

ment will light.

E RECALL

Recalls the EQ library item selected in the list into

memory.

F STORE

Stores the EQ settings of the currently selected channel

into the location selected in the list. When you click

this button a window will appear, allowing you to

name and save the settings.

G TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

H CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

I Library EQ graph

This graph indicates the approximate response of the

EQ library item selected in the list. The LIBRARY

TYPE indication shows whether the item contains

eight-band EQ settings (MIX, STEREO A/B) or four-

band EQ settings (MATRIX).

J Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY screen

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 229

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

OUTPUT COMP function

Here you can edit the compressor parameters of the

selected output channel.

A Channel selection

Select the channel that you want to edit. If the corre-

sponding MIX channel or MATRIX channel is paired

(or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart sym-

bol is displayed at the right. For MIX channels or

MATRIX channels, you can click this symbol to

enable/disable pairing.

B COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off)

Turns the compressor on/off for that channel.

C COMP LINK GROUP (Compressor link

group)

Selects the compressor link group (A–H) to which that

channel belongs. Compressor parameters are linked for

output channels belonging to the same group.

D LIBRARY

This button accesses the COMP LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.232), where you can store/recall compressor

library settings for output channels.

E Level meters

These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction

(GR), the peak level before (PRE) and after (POST) the

compressor, and the peak level of the key-in signal

(KEY IN) that causes the compressor to operate. If the

signal clips, the OVER segment will light.

If stereo link is turned on for the corresponding MIX

channel or MATRIX channel (or if a STEREO A/B

channel is selected), level meters for two channels are

displayed.

Hint

If GR METER ON/OFF LINK is turned on in the PREFER-

ENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), the gain reduction meter

will not be displayed when the compressor is off.

F Type

Indicates the type of the currently selected compressor.

Hint

To change the compressor type, use the OUTPUT COMP

LIBRARY screen to recall a library item that has a different

type. You cannot change the compressor type in this screen.

G STEREO LINK

This specifies whether parameter settings and compres-

sor operation by a key-in signal will be linked

(STEREO LINK button on) for adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX channels or the

L/R channels of the STEREO A/B channels, or not

(STEREO LINK button off).

COMP PARAM (Compressor parame-

ter) screen

COMP PARAM

1 2 43

6 97 8

OUTPUT COMP function

230 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= On

❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= Off

Note

Stereo Link is fixed at On for paired channels and for STE-

REO A/B channels.

H Compressor graph

This graph displays the approximate response of the

compressor.

I KEY IN SOURCE

Select the desired key-in signal from the following

choices.

J THRESHOLD (Threshold level)

Specifies the threshold level at which the compressor

will operate. The input signal will start being com-

pressed when the key-in signal exceeds this level;

compression will be removed when the signal falls

below this level.

K RATIO

Specifies the ratio at which the input signal will be

compressed when the key-in signal exceeds the thresh-

old level.

L ATTACK (Attack time)

Specifies the time from when the key-in signal exceeds

the threshold level until compression begins.

M RELEASE (Release time)

Specifies the time from when the key-in signal falls

below the threshold level until compression is

removed.

N GAIN

Specifies the output level gain.

O KNEE

Select the sharpness at which the output level changes;

the range is HARD or 1–5. HARD produces the sharp-

est change, and 5 produces the most gradual change.

SELF PRE EQ

The pre-EQ signal of the currently

selected output channel

SELF POST EQ

The post-EQ signal of the currently

selected output channel

MIX1–24 POST EQ The post-EQ signal of the corre-

sponding output channel (however,

you can only select from the group

to which that channel belongs,

from the three groups MIX 1–12,

MIX 13–24, and MATRIX/ST)

MATRIX1–8 POST EQ

ST AL/AR POST EQ

ST BL/BR POST EQ

MIX21–24 OUT

The output signal of the corre-

sponding MIX channel immedi-

ately before the output port

attenuation

THR

LINK= ON

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

AT TACK

processing

AT TACK

processing

Detect the

maximum

level

THR

LINK= OFF

Key-in signal of odd-

numbered channel

Key-in signal of even-

numbered channel

AT TACK

processing

AT TACK

processing

Detect the

maximum level

Detect the

maximum level

J K L M N O

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 231

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

These screens show the compressor settings for all output

channels. Here you can also copy compressor settings

between output channels.

A Compressor graph

This mini-graph shows the approximate compressor

response for each output channel.

When you click the graph at which the cursor is cur-

rently located, the COMP PARAM screen for that

channel will appear.

In this screen you can drag and drop the mini-graph

from the desired channel to copy its compressor set-

tings. (When you drag and drop the mini-graph, a

popup window will ask you to confirm the copy

operation.)

You can also copy compressor settings between the

MIX 1-24 screen and the MATRIX/STEREO screen.

First drag the mini-graph over the MIX 1-24 tab or

MATRIX/STEREO tab in the screen (the screen will

switch). Then drag and drop the mini-graph onto the

desired channel, and a message will ask you to confirm

the copy operation.

B Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction pro-

duced by the compressor (at left), and the peak level of

the signal after passing through the compressor (at

right). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light.

C COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off)

Turns the compressor on/off for that channel.

D Channel

This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two

paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol dis-

played between them.

MIX 1-24 screen

MATRIX/STEREO screen

MIX 1-24

MATRIX/STEREO

OUTPUT COMP function

232 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

compressor library. The contents of this screen are in com-

mon with the COMP LIBRARY screen of the INPUT

GATE/COMP function.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the COMP PARAM screen

for the currently selected channel will appear.

B Channel selection

Select the channel that you want to edit.

C Compressor graph of the selected channel

This graph shows the approximate response of the

compressor for the currently selected channel.

D Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR),

and the peak levels before the compressor (PRE) and

after the compressor (POST). If the signal clips, the

OVER segment will light.

E RECALL

Recalls the compressor library item selected in the list

into memory.

F STORE

Stores the compressor settings of the currently selected

channel into the location selected in the list. When you

click this button a window will appear, allowing you to

name and save the settings.

G TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

H CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

I Compressor graph of the library item

This graph indicates the approximate response of the

compressor library item selected in the list.

J Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library)

screen

COMP LIBRARY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 233

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

OUTPUT DELAY function

Here you can edit the delay parameters of the selected out-

put channel.

A DELAY SCALE

The unit you select here is used to indicate the delay

time in the box below the delay time knob (

3) and in

other screens. You can choose one of the following

units.

• METER

The distance in meters, calculated as the speed of

sound at an air temperature of 20°C (343.59 m/s) x the

delay time (seconds).

• FEET

The distance in feet, calculated as the speed of sound at

an air temperature of 20°C (68°F) (1127.26 feet/s) x

the delay time (seconds).

• SAMPLE

The delay time is shown as a number of samples. If you

change the sampling frequency at which the PM5D

operates, the number of samples will change

accordingly.

• msec (milliseconds)

The delay time is shown in units of milliseconds. If this

button is on, the boxes above and below the delay time

knob (

3) will show the same values.

• BEAT

The delay time is shown in units relative to the note

length (considered as 1.0) specified by the tempo

(BPM) and note value (NOTE).

To specify the tempo, you can either use the /

buttons located immediately below the BEAT button,

or repeatedly tap (click) the TAP button, or repeatedly

click a User Defined key that is assigned to [TAP

TEMPO]-[CURRENT PAGE].

• FRAME

The delay time is shown in units of frames.

Use the six buttons located below the FRAME button

to select the number of frames per second.

Hint

• If you change the DELAY SCALE setting of the OUTPUT

DELAY function screen, the DELAY SCALE setting of the

INPUT DELAY function screen will change in tandem.

• The TAP button of the OUTPUT DELAY function is indepen-

dent from the TAP TEMPO button of the internal effect.

• The number of frames per second is linked with the TIME

CODE SETUP field in the EVENT LIST screen (SCENE

function).

B GANG

This button specifies whether the delay parameters will

be linked for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered

channels. This can be specified independently of pair-

ing. If the GANG button is turned on for channels of

differing delay times, turning the delay time knob (

will change the delay times of both channels while

maintaining the difference in their delay time.

C Delay time knob

This knob sets the delay time of each channel. The box

below the knob shows the delay time in the units you

selected in (

1). The box above the knob always shows

the delay time in millisecond units.

D DELAY ON/OFF

This button switches delay on/off. This is linked for

paired channels.

E Channel

This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two

paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol dis-

played between them. You can click this symbol to

enable/disable pairing.

MIX 1-24 screen

MATRIX/STEREO screen

MIX1-24

MATRIX/STEREO

OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function

234 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

OUTPUT DCA/GROUP func-

tion

Here you can specify the output channels that will be

assigned to DCA groups 7/8. You can use DCA faders 7/8

to uniformly adjust the levels of output channels belong-

ing to the same DCA group.

A DCA group

This is the number of the DCA group. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is

highlighted.

B Name

This is the name of the DCA group. You can also click

this area to edit the name.

C Grid

This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal

rows) to DCA groups (vertical columns). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the

cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key

(or click) to set/disable the assignment.

Hint

• You can also assign an output channel to both DCA groups

for multiple DCA control.

• DCA groups 1–6 are for input channels only, but DCA

groups 7/8 can be used with both input channels and output

channels. DCA groups 7/8 allow you to use both types of

channel in the identically-numbered group.

D SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key)

This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to

make/cancel DCA group assignments. While the DCA

group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE]

key of a channel that can be assigned to the corre-

sponding group will assign the channel to the group.

(Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the

assignment.)

Hint

• The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one DCA

group. This is automatically turned off when you change

screens or turn off the power.

• To turn on SET BY CUE from the panel, press the ASSIGN

MODE [DCA] key and then turn on the DCA group 7/8

[CUE] key.

E CLEAR

This button clears all output channels assigned to that

DCA group.

F MUTE

These buttons switch muting on/off for DCA groups 7/

8. They are linked with DCA [MUTE] keys 7/8 in the

DCA strip of the panel.

G DCA faders

These faders adjust the levels of DCA groups 7/8. They

are linked with DCA faders 7/8 in the DCA strip.

H CUE

These buttons cue-monitor DCA groups 7/8. They are

linked with DCA [CUE] keys 7/8 in the DCA strip of

the panel.

I DCA LEVEL SET

Use the following two buttons to operate DCA groups

7/8 together.

• ALL NOMINAL

Clicking this button will move DCA faders 7/8 to nom-

inal level (0 dB).

• ALL MINIMUM

Clicking this button will move DCA faders 7/8 to the

–∞ dB position.

DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

213

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 235

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can specify the output channels that will be

assigned to mute groups 1–8. Muting can be switched on/

off together for channels assigned to the same mute group.

A Mute group

This area shows the mute group number. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is

highlighted.

B MUTE (Mute master)

These buttons switch muting on/off for each mute

group. These buttons are linked with the SCENE

MEMORY [1]–[8] keys of the panel (if the MUTE

MASTER button is On in the constantly-shown area at

the bottom of the display).

Hint

When you turn muting on, channels belonging to that mute

group will behave just as though their panel [ON] key had

been turned off; no signal will be output. During this time, the

panel [ON] key LED will blink.

C Grid

This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal

rows) to mute groups (vertical columns). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the

cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key

(or click) to set/cancel the assignment.

D MUTE SAFE

These buttons temporarily defeat the muted state of a

channel. When a button is displayed as “–”, clicking it

will change its display to “ON,” and the corresponding

output channel will be excluded from mute groups.

Clicking the button once again restores the original

state.

Note

Normally, Mute Safe operations can be performed indepen-

dently of the scene memory.

Hint

Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and

output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the identi-

cally-numbered mute group.

E SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key)

This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to

make/cancel mute group assignments. While the mute

group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE]

key of a channel that can be assigned to the corre-

sponding group will assign the channel to the group.

(Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the

assignment.)

Hint

The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one mute

group. This is automatically turned off when you change

screens or turn off the power.

F CLEAR

This button clears all output channels assigned to that

mute group.

G DIRECT RECALL/MUTE MASTER

This is the same function as the DIRECT RECALL/

MUTE MASTER buttons located at the bottom of the

display (➥ p.151).

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

321

OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function

236 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can specify the output channels that will be

assigned to EQ link groups A–H. EQ parameters are linked

for channels belonging to the same group.

A EQ link group

These are the EQ link group numbers. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is

highlighted.

B Grid

This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal

rows) to EQ link groups (vertical columns). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the

cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key

(or click) to set/cancel the assignment.

Hint

• The MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels can be

assigned only to EQ link groups A–F, and MATRIX chan-

nels can be assigned only to EQ link groups G/H.

• Grey areas in the grid indicate combinations that cannot be

assigned.

• Input channels and output channels use separate EQ link

groups. Output channels use groups A–H, and input chan-

nels use groups 1–8.

C SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key)

This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to

make/cancel EQ link group assignments. While the EQ

link group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the

[CUE] key of a channel that can be assigned to the cor-

responding group will assign the channel to the group.

(Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the

assignment.)

Hint

The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one EQ

link group. This is automatically turned off when you change

screens or turn off the power.

D CLEAR

This button clears all output channels assigned to that

EQ link group.

EQ LINK ASSIGN screen

EQ LINK ASSIGN

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 237

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can specify the output channels that will be

assigned to compressor link groups A–H. Compressor

parameters are linked for channels belonging to the same

group.

A Compressor link group

This area shows the compressor link group number.

The number corresponding to the grid where the cur-

sor is located is highlighted.

B Grid

This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal

rows) to compressor link groups (vertical columns).

Currently-patched grids are indicated by a symbol.

Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the

[ENTER] key (or click) to set/cancel the assignment.

Hint

Input channels and output channels use separate compres-

sor link groups. Output channels use groups A–H, and input

channels use groups 1–8.

C SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key)

This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to

make/cancel compressor link group assignments.

While the compressor link group SET BY CUE button

is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel that can be

assigned to the corresponding group will assign the

channel to the group. (Press the [CUE] key once again

to cancel the assignment.)

Hint

The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one com-

pressor link group. This is automatically turned off when you

change screens or turn off the power.

D CLEAR

This button clears all output channels assigned to that

compressor link group.

COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link

assign) screen

COMP LINK ASSIGN

MATRIX/ST function

238 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

MATRIX/ST function

Here you can send the signal from MIX channels and STE-

REO A/B channels to the STEREO bus or the desired

MATRIX bus.

A MATRIX bus

This is the number of the MATRIX bus to which the

signal is sent. Paired MATRIX channels are indicated

by a heart symbol displayed between them. You can

click this symbol to enable/disable pairing.

B Send level

These knobs specify the send level of each signal that is

sent from the MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel

(vertical column) to the MATRIX buses (horizontal

row).

The knobs shown in this area will depend on how the

MATRIX channels are paired.

❏ If the MATRIX channels are used individually

MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen

MATRIX/ST ROUTING

MIX channel

STEREO A/B channel

LEVEL knobs

Adjust the send level of the signals sent

from the MIX channels and STEREO A/B

channels to each MATRIX bus.

MIX channel 2

↓

MATRIX bus 2

MIX channel 2

↓

MATRIX bus 1

MIX channel 1

↓

MATRIX bus 1

MIX channel 1

↓

MATRIX bus 2

……

MATRIX 1

MATRIX 2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 1

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 2

MATRIX1

LEVEL

MATRIX2

LEVEL

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 239

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ If the MATRIX channels are paired

C MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF

This button is an on/off switch for the signal sent from

each MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to the

MATRIX buses. If this button is off, no signal will be

sent from that channel to the MATRIX buses.

D PRE FADER/POST FADER/POST ON

These buttons select the position from which the sig-

nal is sent from the MIX channel or STEREO A/B

channel to the MATRIX buses, from the following

choices.

This parameter applies to the signal sent from the cor-

responding channel to all MATRIX buses.

E MIX TO STEREO ON/OFF

This button is an on/off switch for the signal sent from

each MIX channel to the STEREO bus. If this button is

off, no signal will be sent from that channel to the STE-

REO bus.

F PRE/POST (Pre-on/Post-on)

This button selects the position from which the signal

is sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus, from

the following choices.

G PAN (MIX→STEREO pan)

This knob specifies the panning of the signal sent from

the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. If a MIX chan-

nel is selected in the SELECTED CHANNEL section,

the STEREO [PAN] encoder is linked with this knob.

Hint

If the source is a STEREO A/B channel, parameters

–

are not displayed.

H MIX channel, STEREO A/B channel

This area indicates the MIX channel or STEREO A/B

channel from which the signal is being sent. Paired

MIX channels are indicated by a heart symbol dis-

played between them. You can click this symbol to

enable/disable pairing.

PAN knobs

Adjust the panning of the signals

sent from the MIX channels and

STEREO A/B channels to each

pair of adjacent odd-numbered/

even-numbered MATRIX buses.

MIX channel 2

↓

MATRIX buses 1/2

MIX channel 1

↓

MATRIX buses 1/2

LEVEL knobs

Adjust the send level of

the signals sent from

the MIX channels and

STEREO A/B channels

to each MATRIX bus.

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

……

MATRIX 1

MATRIX 2

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 1

PAN

to MATRIX 1/2

LEVEL

FADER

MIX CHANNEL 2

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST FADER Immediately after the fader

POST ON

Immediately after the MIX [ON] key / STE-

REO [ON] key

PRE

Immediately before the MIX [ON] key

(immediately after the fader)

POST Immediately after the MIX [ON] key

MATRIX/ST function

240 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

This screen lists the signals sent from the MIX channels to

the MATRIX buses. You can also edit the settings from

within this screen.

A MIX to MTRX/MTRX from MIX

Select one of the following two types of screen display.

❏ When the MIX to MTRX button is on

You can view the status of the signals sent from a spe-

cific MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to all

MATRIX buses.

❏ When the MTRX from MIX button is on

You can view the status of the signals sent from all MIX

channels or STEREO A/B channels to a specific

MATRIX bus.

B SEND LEVEL/SEND POINT

Select one of the following two parameters to view in

the grid.

❏ When the SEND LEVEL button is on

The send levels sent from the MIX channels or STE-

REO A/B channels to the MATRIX buses will be shown

as a bar graph in each grid. Channels for which the sig-

nal sent to the MATRIX bus is turned off are shown by

gray bars, and channels for which the signal is turned

on are shown by blue bars.

To edit the send level, move the cursor to the grid

where the MIX or STEREO A/B channel (vertical col-

umn) intersects the MATRIX bus (horizontal row),

and turn the [DATA] encoder.

To switch the signal sent from a specific MIX or STE-

REO A/B channel to the MATRIX buses on/off, move

the cursor to the vertical column for that channel, and

press the [ENTER] key.

Hint

• If the send level is set above nominal (0 dB), a red line indi-

cating nominal level is displayed.

• If the send-destination MATRIX channel is paired, the grid

for the odd-numbered MATRIX bus will show an orange line

indicating the pan value instead of a bar graph. (In MTRX

from MIX mode, upward indicates R, and downward indi-

cates L.)

If the SEND LEVEL button is on, you can select a

desired grid and copy its send level (pan) value to other

channels (horizontal direction) or to other MATRIX

buses (vertical direction), or switch all grids on/off

simultaneously.

To do so, move the cursor to the desired grid; then

hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER]

key. (Alternatively, hold down the [SHIFT] key and

click the desired grid.) When the JOB SELECT win-

MIX to MATRIX VIEW screen

MIX to MATRIX VIEW

1 2

Channels for which the

signal sent to the MATRIX

bus is turned on (blue bar

graph)

Channels for which the

signal sent to the MATRIX

bus is turned off (gray bar

graph)

Pan value (orange line)

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 241

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

dow appears, select one of the following choices to

copy, and click the OK button.

LEVEL COPY [ALL MATRIX ]

Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to

all send level (pan) settings of the corresponding MIX

(or STEREO A/B) channel in the vertical direction of

the grid.

Note

If the selected grid is a send level, only the send levels will be

copied. If the selected grid is a pan value, only the pan values

will be copied.

LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ]

Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to

all send level (pan) settings of the corresponding

MATRIX bus in the horizontal direction of the grid.

LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX x ALL MATRIX]

Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to

the send level (pan) settings of all MIX (and STEREO

A/B) channels and MATRIX buses.

ALL ON [ALL MIX ]

Turn on the signals sent from all channels (MIX,

STEREO A/B) to the corresponding MATRIX bus.

ALL OFF [ALL MIX ]

Turn off the signals sent from all channels (MIX,

STEREO A/B) to the corresponding MATRIX bus.

❏ When the SEND POINT button is on

The grid will show the position from which the signal is

sent from the MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels

to the MATRIX buses.

Each indication has the following significance.

(yellow) . . PRE FADER (immediately

before the fader)

(gray) . . . . POST FADER (immediately

after the fader)

(red) . . . . . POST ON (immediately after

the [ON] key)

To change the position from which the signal is sent,

move the cursor to the vertical column for the desired

channel, and press the [ENTER] key, click, or turn the

[DATA] encoder. (The position of all signals sent from

that channel to all MATRIX buses will change

simultaneously.)

If the SEND POINT button is on, the send position for

all grid locations can be changed simultaneously. To do

so, hold down the [SHIFT] key and click the desired

grid. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the desired

grid; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the

[ENTER] key.) When the JOB SELECT window

appears, select one of the following choices, and click

the OK button.

ALL PRE FADER [ALL MIX ]

All grids will be set to PRE FADER.

ALL POST FADER [ALL MIX ]

All grids will be set to POST FADER.

ALL POST ON [ALL MIX ]

All grids will be set to POST ON.

C Grid

The grid shows various settings for the signals sent

from the MIX or STEREO A/B channels (vertical col-

umns) to the MATRIX buses (horizontal rows). The

red lines shown in the upward, downward, left, and

right directions indicate the channel (MIX or STEREO

A/B) and MATRIX bus corresponding to the grid

where the cursor is located.

PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON

MATRIX/ST function

242 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

D SELECTED PARAMETER (currently selected

parameter)

This area indicates the channel (MIX or STEREO A/B)

and MATRIX bus corresponding to the grid where the

cursor is currently located. The four boxes at right

indicate the values for the grid where the cursor is cur-

rently located.

Here you can make settings for LCR mode, which allows

three-channel playback by adding a CENTER channel to

the L/R channels of the STEREO bus. This function can be

used only with MIX channels.

A Response graph

These graphs indicate the approximate LCR response

for each MIX channel. The graph will change as the

CSR knob (

2) is edited.

B CSR (Center Side Ratio)

This knob adjusts the proportional level of the CEN-

TER channel relative to the L/R channels. The range is

0–100%.

If the CSR knob is set to 0%, turning the PAN knob in

the MIX TO STEREO area of the MATRIX/ST ROUT-

ING screen (or the [PAN] encoder in the SELECTED

CHANNEL section) will change the signal levels of the

L/R channels as shown below.

In this case, MIX TO STEREO PAN will operate as a

conventional PAN control, and no signal will be sent to

the CENTER channel.

Send level

(di

aye

na-

tion MATRIX channel is

paired and an odd-numbered

MATRIX bus is selected)

Position from which

the signal is sent

On/off switch for the signal

sent to the MATRIX bus

LCR screen

LCR

CRL

Signal sent to the

R channel

[PAN] encoder

Signal sent to the

L channel

Signal level

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 243

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

If CSR is set to 100%, turning the PAN knob ([PAN]

encoder) will change the signal levels of the L/R chan-

nels as shown below.

When the PAN knob ([PAN] encoder) is in the center

position, the signal level of the CENTER channel will

be at maximum, and no signal will be sent to the L/R

channels.

C LCR (LCR mode on/off)

For each MIX channel, this turns LCR mode on/off.

For channels where LCR mode is turned on, the PAN

knob in the MIX TO STEREO area of the MATRIX/ST

ROUTING screen can be used to simultaneously con-

trol the levels of the L/R channels and the CENTER

channel.

If you have selected a MIX channel for which LCR is

on, you can also use the [PAN] encoder in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section of the top panel. In

this case, the peripheral LEDs will change as follows

when you operate the [PAN] encoder.

• When LCR = off

• When LCR = on

Note

In order to use the LCR function, the USE AS CENTER BUS

button must be turned On in the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/

W.CLOCK function) (

➥

p.201). Be aware that when this but-

ton is on, the CENTER channel signal is not sent to the

STEREO B bus, and will not play back appropriately. (In this

case, the STEREO B bus is sent the same signal as the STE-

REO A bus.)

D MIX channel

This is the number of the MIX channel you are edit-

ing. Paired MIX channels are indicated by a heart

symbol displayed at the right. You can click this sym-

bol to enable/disable pairing. The values of parameters

2–3 are linked for paired channels.

Hint

• The master level of the CENTER channel is controlled by

the STEREO B channel fader. You can also use the STE-

REO B channel EQ and compressor to process the signal.

• Use either one of the output jacks patched to the STEREO B

channel as the output jack for the CENTER channel. (When

the USE AS CENTER BUS button is On in the MIXER

SETUP screen, the L/R channels of the STEREO B bus out-

put the same signal.)

• By selecting LCR as the monitor source, you can monitor

the LCR signal from the MONITOR OUT jacks L/C/R.

CRL

[PAN] encoder

Signal sent to the

R channel

Signal sent to the

C channel

Signal sent to the

L channel

Signal level

RLRL RL

MATRIX/ST function

244 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can make various settings related to surround

functionality, such as selecting the surround mode, and

assigning MIX buses to surround channels.

A SURROUND MODE

Choose one of the follow-

ing as the surround mode

when using the Surround

Pan function (➥ p.132).

This is the same as the

SURROUND MODE in

the MIXER SETUP screen

(SYS/W.CLOCK func-

tion). The graphic below

the buttons will change

according to the mode you

select.

• STEREO

This is conventional stereo

mode.

• 3-1ch

This mode uses four chan-

nels: L (front left), C (front

center), R (front right),

and S (surround).

• 5.1ch

This mode uses six channels: L (front left), C (front

center), R (front right), Ls (rear left), Rs (rear right),

and LFE (subwoofer).

• 6.1ch

This mode uses seven channels: 5.1ch with the addi-

tion of Bs (rear center).

Hint

If 3-1ch, 5.1ch, or 6.1 ch is selected as the surround mode,

MIX buses 1–8 or 9–16 are used as surround buses, starting

with the earlier-numbered buses. (Buses not used as sur-

round buses can be used as conventional buses.) These MIX

buses cannot be used as conventional bus outputs until you

return to stereo mode.

B Bus assignments

This area indicates the surround channels assigned to

the MIX buses that are being used as surround buses.

You can edit these settings by clicking the / but-

tons at the left and right.

When you change the surround channel assignment,

the MIX bus whose channel assignment you changed

will be exchanged with the MIX bus that had been pre-

viously assigned to that channel.

Note

The MIX buses used are fixed for each surround mode.

For surround mode 3-1, MIX buses 1–4 or 9–13 can be used.

For surround mode 5.1, MIX buses 1–6 or 9–14 can be used.

For surround mode 6.1, MIX buses 1–7 or 9–15 can be used.

Other MIX buses can be used as conventional MIX buses.

However in the case of 6.1, MIX bus 8 or MIX bus 16 are

always handled as FIXED buses.

C INIT (Initialize)

For each surround mode, this restores the surround

channel assignments to the MIX buses to their initial

state.

D SURROUND BUS ALLOCATION

Select either MIX buses 1–8 or 9–16 as the range of

MIX buses used as surround buses.

SURR SETUP screen

SURR SETUP

2 3 4

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 245

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

E DELAY

This specifies the delay time for each surround channel

in a range of 0–1000 msec. The current value is shown

by the two boxes below the knob. (The upper box

shows the delay time in millisecond units, and the

lower box shows the delay time in the units selected in

the MIX 1-24 screen of the OUT DELAY function.)

F DELAY ON/OFF

Turns the delay on/off for each surround channel.

G FADER (Fader level)

Adjusts the level of the signal sent from the surround

channel to the corresponding MIX bus in a range of

–∞ to +10 dB. The current value is shown in the box

below.

H CUE

This button lets you cue-monitor the surround chan-

nel. This is linked with the [CUE] key of the

corresponding MIX channel.

I ON/OFF (Channel on/off)

Turns the surround channel on/off. This is linked with

the MIX [ON] key of the corresponding MIX channel.

J Level meter

Indicates the output level of the surround channel.

K Surround channel

This is the name of the surround channel.

OUTPUT VIEW function

This screen displays the mix parameters of the currently

selected MIX channel, MATRIX channel, or STEREO A/B

channel. In this screen you can also edit the principal

parameters and access other screens.

A Channel

This is the number of the channel you are editing. If

the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel is paired (or

if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart symbol is

displayed at the right. You can click this symbol to

enable/disable pairing for the MIX/MATRIX channel.

Note

The screen shown above is for when a paired channel is

selected. If the selected channel is not paired, the parameters

for only one channel are displayed, and pairing-related set-

tings are not displayed.

B EQ

This area shows the post-EQ level, the approximate EQ

response, and the EQ on/off status. You can click the

EQ ON/OFF button to switch EQ on/off in this screen.

5 7 8 J

CH VIEW (Channel view) screen

CH VIEW

OUTPUT VIEW function

246 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

If you click the mini-graph, the EQ PARAM screen for

that channel will appear.

C Compressor

This area shows the amount of gain reduction and the

output level of the compressor, a mini-graph showing

the approximate response of the compressor, and the

compressor on/off status. You can click the COMP

ON/OFF button to switch the compressor on/off in

this screen. If you click the mini-graph, the COMP

PARAM screen for that channel will appear.

D Insert in

This area indicates the insert point, the insert on/off

status, and the type and input level of the port that is

patched to insert-in. You can click the INSERT ON/

OFF button to switch insertion on/off in this screen.

If an internal effect is patched, the effect type and

BYPASS button are displayed. If a GEQ module is

patched, the GEQ ON/OFF button and a mini-graph

showing the GEQ response are displayed.

E DELAY

In this area you can view and edit the delay time of the

internal delay and its on/off status.

F TO MATRIX (only for MIX channels and

STEREO A/B channels)

This area shows the send level, send position, and on/

off status of the signals sent from the corresponding

MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to MATRIX

buses 1–8. You can also edit the send level, send posi-

tion, and on/off status in this screen. Here’s how to do

this.

• To edit the send level of signals sent to the MATRIX

bus

Move the cursor to the desired bar graph in the list,

and turn the [DATA] encoder.

• To edit the send position of signals sent to the

MATRIX bus

Click either the PRE FADER, the POST FADER, or the

POST ON button located below.

Alternatively, you can edit the setting by moving the

cursor to the PRE or POST indication in the list and

pressing the [ENTER] key or turning the [DATA]

encoder.

• To switch the signal sent to the MATRIX bus on/off

Click the ON/OFF button located below.

You can also switch this on/off by moving the cursor to

a bar graph in the list and pressing the [ENTER] key.

The bar graph is colored blue when on, and gray when

off.

G DCA group / Mute group

Here you can assign or cancel DCA group and MUTE

group assignments.

H RECALL SAFE / MUTE SAFE

Here you can enable or disable Recall Safe and Mute

Safe settings.

I TO STEREO (MIX channels only)

Here you can switch the signal sent from a MIX chan-

nel to the STEREO bus on/off, and edit its panning and

send position (pre-on / post-on) (➥ p.239).

J BALANCE (only for paired MIX/MATRIX

channels and STEREO A/B channels)

This adjusts the left/right volume balance of the signals

output from paired MIX channels or STEREO A/B

channels.

K LCR (MIX channels only)

Here you can switch LCR mode on/off, and adjust CSR

(the level of the CENTER channel relative to the L/R

channels) (➥ p.242).

L LIBRARY

This button accesses the OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.251), where you can store/recall library

settings for output channels.

M Level meter

This level meter indicates the output level of the

channel.

N Signal detection point

This is the point at which the signal level shown in the

level meter (

M) is detected (PRE EQ, PRE FADER,

POST FADER, POST DELAY, or POST ON). You can

edit this setting by clicking the / buttons at the left

and right.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 247

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

O Fader

This controls the output level of the channel.

P CUE

This button cue-monitors the signal of the channel.

This is linked with the [CUE] key of the corresponding

channel.

Q ON/OFF (Channel on/off)

This is an on/off switch for the signal that is output

from the channel. This is linked with the [ON] key of

that channel.

This screen shows the signal flow for adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX channels or for

STEREO A/B channels. In this screen you can also edit

some of the parameters, and access other screens. You can

also determine the location within the signal flow at which

clipping occurred.

A Channels

These are the numbers of the channels you are editing.

By clicking the / buttons at left and right, you can

switch the display in units of two channels.

If the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channels are

paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart

symbol is displayed at the right. You can click this sym-

bol to enable/disable pairing for the MIX/MATRIX

channels.

B Insert

This area displays insert-related information for the

two selected channels (insert point, the ports patched

to insert in/out, and insert on/off status).

Here you can also select the insert point (use the /

buttons at left and right), or switch insertion on/off

(use the ON/OFF button).

SIGNAL FLOW screen

SIGNAL FLOW

OUTPUT VIEW function

248 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

C Level meters

These meters indicate the levels within the signal flow.

Levels are detected at the following locations.

• EQ (immediately before and after the EQ)

• COMP (immediately before and after the

compressor)

• FADER (immediately before and after the fader)

• DELAY (immediately before and after the delay)

• INSERT IN (immediately after the insert point)

D Signal flow

This area indicates the signal flow of the selected chan-

nel. The following parameters are displayed.

• EQ (Equalizer)

This indicates the EQ on/off status and the approxi-

mate response curve. You can click the EQ button to

switch EQ on/off, or click the mini-graph to access the

EQ PARAM screen for the corresponding channel.

• COMP (Compressor)

This indicates the compressor on/off status and the

approximate response curve. You can click the COMP

button to switch the compressor on/off, or click the

mini-graph to access the COMP PARAM screen for the

corresponding channel.

• FADER

This indicates the output level of the channel. This is

linked with the encoder or fader of the corresponding

channel.

• ON/OFF (On/off)

Turns the channel on/off. This is linked with the [ON]

key of the corresponding channel.

• DELAY

Here you can switch the internal delay on/off and edit

the delay time.

Hint

• If insert is enabled, the currently selected insert point is

shown in this signal flow.

• If the signal clips, the signal flow (horizontal line) after clip-

ping is displayed in red. If an output is turned off so that the

signal does not flow any further, the subsequent flow is dis-

played in gray. If PEAK HOLD is on, the flow indication will

stay red if clipping occurs even once, making it easier to see

that clipping has occurred.

E TO MATRIX (only for MIX channels and

STEREO A/B channels)

This area shows the on/off status of the signal sent

from the MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to the

MATRIX buses, and the point from which the signal is

sent.

F TO STEREO (MIX channels only)

This area shows the pan, the send position, and the on/

off status of the signal sent from the MIX channel to

the STEREO bus.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 249

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

This screen shows the on/off status, level, and cue monitor

status of the output channels and DCA groups.

A ON/OFF (On/off)

Here you can switch output channels on/off, and

switch DCA group muting on/off. These settings are

linked with the [ON] keys of the corresponding chan-

nels and the [MUTE] keys of the DCA groups.

B Level

Here you can adjust the level of the output channels

and DCA groups. The current value is shown in the

box immediately below. These are linked with the

encoder or fader of the corresponding channel or DCA

group.

C Cue

Here you can switch cue monitoring on/off for output

channels and DCA groups. These are linked with the

[CUE] key of the corresponding channel or DCA

group.

In this screen you can copy the desired parameter(s) from

the selected output channel into a memory buffer, and

paste them to the same type of channel (you may select

more than one paste-destination).

A COPY

When you click this button, the settings of the cur-

rently selected channel will be copied to a temporary

memory buffer.

If the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel is paired

(or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart sym-

bol is displayed at the right.

B BUFFERED CH (Channel in the buffer)

This shows the channel that is currently copied into

buffer memory.

Note

• The same buffer memory is used to copy channel settings

for both input channels and output channels.

• If input channel settings have been copied to the buffer

memory, a message of “TYPE CONFLICT!” is displayed

below, and you cannot paste to an output channel.

• The contents of the buffer memory are erased when the

PM5D is powered-off.

FADER VIEW screen

FADER VIEW

CH COPY (Channel copy) screen

CH COPY

OUTPUT VIEW function

250 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

C PASTE

When you click this button, the specified parameters

will be copied from buffer memory to the specified

paste-destination channel.

If an input channel is copied to buffer memory, or if no

paste-destination has been specified, this is grayed-out

and the Paste operation is unavailable.

D PARAMETER SELECT

Here you can select the parameter(s) that will be

pasted. You can select the following parameters.

If the TO MTRX button is on, you can use the

MATRIX buttons (1–8) to select the applicable

MATRIX buses.

E CH SELECT (Channel selection)

Here you can select the paste-destination channel(s).

You can only select channels of the same type as the

copy-source.

Hint

If the copy-source MIX/MATRIX channel is paired, the odd-

numbered channel is copied to the odd-numbered channel(s),

and the even-numbered channel is copied to the even-num-

bered channel(s).

F SET ALL

Specifies the paste-destination as all channels of the

same type as the copy-source.

G CLEAR ALL

De-selects all channels.

ALL All parameters

EQ EQ function settings

COMP COMP function settings

DELAY DELAY function settings

FADER Fader level

ON CH [ON] key on/off status

BAL Balance settings

INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point

TO MTRX Send level to the desired MATRIX bus(es)

DCA Associated DCA group

MUTE Associated mute group

LCR LCR screen settings

WITHOUT

MIX SEND/

WITH MIX

SEND

Selects whether the send level sent from

input channels to the selected MIX bus will

be included (WITH...) or will not be included

(WITHOUT...) in the pasted data.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 251

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

output channel library.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the CH VIEW screen

(OUTPUT CH VIEW screen) for the currently selected

output channel will appear.

B Channel

This is the number of the channel you will store or

recall.

Note

• Channel library store/recall operations are performed in units

of one channel.

• If the channel selected by the [SEL] key is paired (or if a

STEREO A/B channel is selected), the operation will apply

to only one of the currently selected channels (in the case of

STEREO A/B, only the L or the R channel).

• When you recall a channel library item into one of a pair of

MIX/MATRIX channels (or into L or R of the STEREO A/B

channel), any linked parameters will be copied to the other

channel.

C LIBRARY TYPE (Channel type)

Indicates the type of the currently selected channel. If a

MIX or STEREO A/B channel is selected, the pairing

configuration of MATRIX buses 1–8 is shown immedi-

ately below.

D RECALL

Recalls the channel library item selected in the list into

memory.

If the channel selected in (

1) is of a different type than

the channel selected in the list, this button is grayed-

out and the Recall operation is unavailable. (However,

Initial Data can be recalled to any output channel.)

E STORE

Stores the settings of the currently selected output

channel into the location selected in the list. When you

click this button a window will appear, allowing you to

name and save the settings.

F TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

G CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

H LIBRARY TYPE

Displays the type of channel for the library item

selected in the list. If the channel selected in (

1) is of a

different type than the channel selected in the list, a

message of “CONFLICT!” is displayed at the right and

the Recall operation is unavailable.

If a MIX or STEREO A/B channel is selected, the pair-

ing configuration of MATRIX buses 1–8 is shown

immediately below.

I Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

OUTPUT CH LIBRARY screen

OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

Input functions

252 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

INPUT PATCH function

Here you can assign input ports (INPUT jacks, ST IN

jacks, 2TR IN DIGITAL/ANALOG jacks, input channels of

slots, outputs of internal effects) to input channels.

A SELECTED PATCH

This indicates the name and number of the input chan-

nel at which the cursor is located, and the input port.

B CH (Input channel)

This is the number and name of the input channel

(input channel, ST IN channel, FX RTN channel)

assigned to the input port. The channel number at

which the cursor is located will be highlighted. If you

click the name, a window will open allowing you to

assign a name to the channel.

C ASSIGN

For each channel, this indicates the number (1 or 0) of

input ports currently assigned.

D Grid

This grid lets you patch input ports (horizontal rows)

to input channels (vertical columns). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking

a grid location you can set/cancel patching.

The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid loca-

tion to which you move the cursor.

Hint

• If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the PREFER-

ENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), a confirmation message

will appear each time you attempt to change a patch set-

ting. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on, a

confirmation message will also appear when you attempt to

make patch settings that would cause an existing patch to

be modified.

• To move the cursor location rapidly in or out of the grid, hold

down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [

√

]/[

[

†

] keys.

• To move rapidly to left or right inside the grid, turn the

[DATA] encoder. To move up or down, hold down the

[SHIFT] key and turn the [DATA] encoder.

Note

You can patch multiple input channels to a single input port,

but you cannot patch multiple input ports to a single input

channel.

E Input port

From the top, this area indicates the type of input port,

the ID number, the input channel number, and the

number of input channels assigned. The following

types of input port can be selected.

Hint

• The port number is grayed-out for ports that are currently

unavailable.

• If the CASCADE connector is being used as a SLOT IN port,

the port number of the CASCADE connector is displayed in

yellow instead of the SLOT IN port number.

Input functions

INPUT PATCH screen

INPUT PATCH

3 4

AD IN INPUT jacks 1–48

AD STIN L/R channels of ST IN jacks 1–4

SLOT IN

Input channels of an I/O card installed in

slots 1–4

FX OUT L/R outputs of internal effects 1–8

2TR IN

L/R channels of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3

and 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 253

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

F PRESET

This button resets the input port → input channel

assignments to the following default settings.

G CLEAR ALL

This button clears all assignments of input ports to

input channels.

H LIBRARY

This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input

channel patch library settings.

Here you can patch an input channel to an output port so

that the input signal will be output directly from that port.

A SELECTED PATCH

This indicates the name and number of the input chan-

nel at which the cursor is located, and the output port.

B CH (Input channel)

This is the number and name of the input channel

(input channel, ST IN channel) for assignment to an

output port. The channel number at which the cursor

is located will be highlighted. If you click the name, a

window will open allowing you to assign a name to the

channel.

C ASSIGN

For each channel, this indicates the number of output

ports that are currently assigned.

D Grid

This grid lets you patch input channels (vertical col-

umns) to output ports (horizontal rows). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking

a grid location you can set/cancel patching.

The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid loca-

tion to which you move the cursor.

Hint

Operations in the grid are the same for all of the patching

screens. For details, refer to the Hint on p.252.

Channel Input port

Input channels 1–48 AD IN 1–48

ST IN channels 1–4 L/R AD STIN L/R

FX RTN channels 1–4 L/R FX OUT 1–4 L/R

6 7 8

DIRECT OUT PATCH screen

DIRECT OUT PATCH

3 4

INPUT PATCH function

254 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

E Output port

From the top, this area indicates the type of output

port, the ID number, the output channel number, and

the number of input channels assigned. The following

types of output port can be selected.

Hint

• The port number is grayed-out for ports that are currently

unavailable.

• For SLOT OUT ports that are also being output to the CAS-

CADE connector, the port number of the CASCADE

connector is displayed in yellow instead of the SLOT OUT

port number.

F LIBRARY button

This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input

channel patch library settings.

Note

To enable direct output from the selected port, you will need to

make settings in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen

(INPUT PATCH function) to turn on direct output for the corre-

sponding input channel (

➥

p.256.

In this screen you can patch the input/output ports by

which external devices will be inserted into each input

channel. Select the output port in the left side of the screen,

and the input port in the right side of the screen.

A SELECTED PATCH

This indicates the number and name of the input chan-

nel at which the cursor is located in the grid.

B Insert in/out

This indicates the input/output ports that are patched

as insert in/out for the input channel at which the cur-

sor is located.

C CH (Input channel)

This area shows the number and name of each input

channel (input channel, ST IN channel L/R). The

channel number at which the cursor is located will be

highlighted. If you click the name, a window will open

allowing you to assign a name to the channel.

D ASSIGN

For each input channel, this indicates the number of

output ports that are currently assigned as insert-out.

SLOT OUT

Output channels of an I/O card installed in

slots 1–4

2TR OUT

L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks

1–3

INSERT PATCH screen

INSERT PATCH

4 5

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 255

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

E Grid

For each input channel (vertical column), this grid lets

you can patch one or more output ports (horizontal

row) to be used as insert-outs. Currently-patched grids

are indicated by a symbol.

By clicking a grid location you can set/cancel patching.

The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid loca-

tion to which you move the cursor.

Hint

Operations in the grid are the same for all of the patching

screens. For details, refer to the Hint on p.252.

F Output port

From the top, this area indicates the type of output

port, the ID number, the output channel number, and

the number of input channels assigned. The following

types of output port can be patched as insert-out.

Hint

• The port number is grayed-out for ports that are currently

unavailable.

• For SLOT OUT ports that are also being output to the CAS-

CADE connector, the port number of the CASCADE

connector is displayed in yellow instead of the SLOT OUT

port number.

• If you select GEQ IN as an insert-out, the output of the same

GEQ module will automatically be selected as the insert-in.

G Input port

From the top, this area indicates the type of input port,

the ID number, L/R, the input channel number, and

the total number of input channels (including insert-

in) that are patched to each input port. You can select

the following input ports.

H LIBRARY button

This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input

channel patch library settings.

Note

To enable the insert ins/outs that you assigned to input chan-

nels in this screen, you need to turn Insert on for the

corresponding input channel in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT

POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function) (

➥

p.256). However,

insertion is automatically enabled if you assigned insert in/out

to a GEQ.

Hint

When operating from the panel, you can move the cursor from

the right side of the screen to the left side (or vice versa) by

holding down the [SHIFT] key and using the CURSOR [

√

[

] keys.

SLOT OUT

Output channels of an I/O card installed in

slots 1–4

FX IN L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8

GEQ IN Inputs of GEQ modules 1–12

2TR OUT

L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks

1–3

AD IN INPUT jacks 1–48

AD ST IN ST IN jacks 1–4 L/R

SLOT IN

Input channels of an I/O card installed in

slots 1–4

FX OUT L/R outputs of internal effects 1–8

GEQ OUT Outputs of GEQ modules 1–12

2TR IN

L/R channels of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3

or 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2

INPUT PATCH function

256 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

For each input channel, you can specify the point at which

insert in/out will be patched, and the point from which

direct output will be taken. Here you can also switch Insert

or Direct Output on/off.

A Insert view

When you move the cursor to an insert I/O point (4),

the insert and direct output locations for that input

channel will be shown graphically.

B INPUT CH (Input channel)

This is the number of the input channel you are edit-

ing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart

symbol shown at the left; settings

3–6 will be linked

for these channels. You can click this symbol to enable/

disable pairing.

C INSERT ON/OFF

This button switches insert on/off for each channel.

This is linked for two paired channels.

Note

Be aware that if you turn on this button when either insert-in or

insert-out are unpatched, the signal will no longer be output

from the corresponding input channel.

D INSERT I/O (Insert I/O point)

Here you can select one of the following as the insert-

in/out location for each channel.

E DIRECT OUT ON/OFF

These buttons switch direct output on/off for each

channel.

F DIRECT OUT

Here you can select one of the following as the direct

output location for each channel.

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

32 4

PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ

POST EQ Immediately after the EQ

PRE DELAY Immediately before the delay

POST FADER Immediately after the fader

PRE HPF Immediately before the high-pass ﬁlter

PRE EQ

Immediately before the EQ (immediately

after the PRE EQ of the INSERT I/O)

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

POST ON Immediately after the CH [ON] key

5 6

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 257

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can assign a name to each input channel and

DCA group.

A Channel

This area indicates the input channel (input channel,

ST IN channel) and DCA group numbers.

B Name

This area indicates the names currently assigned to

each input channel and DCA group. If you click the

name, a window will open allowing you to assign a

name to the channel.

C LIBRARY

This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY

screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input

channel patch (and name) library settings.

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

input patch library.

Except for the fact that these are patch settings for input

channels, display and operations are the same as in the

OUTPUT PATCH function OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY

screen. Refer to p.223.

NAME screen

NAME

1 2 3

INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen

INPUT PATCH LIBRARY

INPUT HA/INSERT function

258 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

INPUT HA/INSERT function

Here you can make settings for internal HAs (PM5D-RH

model only) or external HAs assigned to input channels.

A +48V

B HPF (High Pass Filter)

C Cutoff frequency

D GAIN

E Input port

These items are the same as in the OUTPUT INSERT

function INSERT IN MIX1-24 screen and INSERT IN

MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR screen (➥ p.224).

F Channel

This area shows the number and name of the channel

you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a

heart symbol displayed between them.

Note

• Items

–

are not shown for channels to which nothing is

patched, or for channels patched to an input port that does

not have a HA. Items

and

are not shown for channels

patched to a port that has no high pass filter.

• To assign input ports to input channels, use the INPUT

PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function).

• HA settings are not linked even if two channels are paired.

However, the GAIN knob setting is linked for HAs whose

GANG button is turned on in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK

function).

G LIBRARY button

This button displays the HA LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.208), where you can store/recall internal HA or

external HA settings as library items.

Hint

The HA settings you edit in this screen are also reflected in

the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function).

CH 1-24 (Input channel 1-24) screen

STIN/FXRTN (ST IN/FXRTN channel)

screen

CH 1-24

STIN/FXRTN

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 259

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can make settings for internal HAs (PM5D-RH

model only) or external HAs assigned to the insert-in of

input channels.

A +48V

B HPF (High Pass Filter)

C Cutoff frequency

D GAIN

E Input port

These items are the same as in the OUTPUT INSERT

function INSERT IN MIX1-24 screen and INSERT IN

MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR screen (➥ p.224).

F Channel

This area shows the number and name of the channel

you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a

heart symbol displayed between them.

Note

• Items

–

are not shown for channels to whose insert-in

nothing is patched, or for channels patched to an input port

whose insert-in does not have a HA. Items

and

are not

shown for channels patched to a port that has no high pass

filter.

• To assign an input port to an insert-in, use the INPUT

PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function).

• HA settings are not linked even if two channels are paired.

However, the GAIN knob setting is linked for HAs whose

GANG button is turned on in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK

function).

G LIBRARY button

This button displays the HA LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.208), where you can store/recall internal HA or

external HA settings as library items.

Hint

The HA settings you edit in this screen are also reflected in

the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function).

INSERT 1-24 screen

INSERT 25-48 screen

INSERT STIN screen

INSERT 1-24

STIN/FXRTN IN

INPUT ø/EQ function

260 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

This screen is the same as HA LIBRARY in the SYS/

W.CLOCK function (➥ p.208).

INPUT ø/EQ function

Here you can edit the EQ parameters of the selected input

channel.

A Channel selection

Selects the input channel (input channel 1–48, STIN

channel 1–4 L/R, FXRTN channel 1–4 L/R).

B Name

This is the name of the currently selected input chan-

nel. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel

or FX RTN channel is selected), a heart symbol is dis-

played at the right. For an input channel, you can click

this symbol to enable/disable pairing.

C EQ ON/OFF

Turns the EQ on/off for that channel.

D EQ LINK GROUP

Selects the EQ link group (1–8) to which the EQ of that

channel belongs. EQ parameters are linked for input

channels belonging to the same group.

Note

The input channel EQ link groups are independent from the

output channel EQ link groups.

E LIBRARY

This button accesses the INPUT EQ LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.263), where you can store/recall input channel

EQ library settings.

HA LIBRARY screen

HA LIBRARY

EQ PARAM (EQ parameter) screen

EQ PARAM

1 2 3 54

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 261

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

F ATT (Attenuation)

This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation/gain

immediately following AD conversion in a range of

–96 dB to +24 dB. This is linked with the ATT knob in

the ø/ATT 1-48 screen and ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN

screen. The current value is displayed in the box

located below the knob.

G EQ TYPE

Selects the type of EQ. Turning the TYPE I button on

selects the algorithm used in the 02R series. Turning

the TYPE II button on selects a newly developed algo-

rithm. TYPE II reduces the interference between bands.

H EQ graph

This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ

parameters. The colored vertical lines indicate the

FREQ (center frequency) of the band for the parame-

ter at which the cursor is located. (The color of each

line matches the knob markings for each band.) The

response curve will change when you edit the Q or

GAIN of each band.

I Level meters

These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and

after EQ. If the signal clips before or after EQ, the

OVER segment will light.

J EQ FLAT

This button resets the GAIN parameters of all bands to

the default value (±0.0 dB). When you click this but-

ton, a confirmation message will appear.

K HPF (High Pass Filter)

The high pass filter located after attenuation and before

EQ can be switched on/off, and you can adjust its cut-

off frequency. The cutoff frequency can be adjusted in

a range of 20–600 Hz.

L Knobs

These knobs adjust the Q, FREQ (center frequency),

and GAIN (amount of boost/cut) for each band.

M (LOW shelving)

If this button is on, the LOW EQ will function as a

shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear.

N (HIGH shelving)

If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a

shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear.

O LPF (Low Pass Filter)

If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a

low-pass filter. The Q knob will disappear, and the

GAIN knob is used to switch the LPF on/off.

These screens list the EQ settings for the input channels.

Here you can also copy EQ settings between input

channels.

Note

In some screens that include channel numbers as part of the

screen name, changing the Pair Mode to Vertical Pairing in

the MIXER SETUP screen will change the name of the

screen.

Example: EQ 1-24 screen → EQ 1,25- screen

987 6 J

MK NOL

EQ 1-24 screen

EQ 25-48 switch

EQ STIN/FXRTN screen

EQ 1-24

EQ STIN/FXRTN

INPUT ø/EQ function

262 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

A EQ graph

This mini-graph shows the approximate EQ response

for each input channel.

When you click the graph at which the cursor is cur-

rently located, the EQ PARAM screen for that channel

will appear.

In this screen you can drag and drop the mini-graph

from the desired channel to copy its EQ settings.

(When you drag and drop the mini-graph, a window

will appear, asking you to confirm the copy operation.)

You can also copy EQ settings between the three

screens EQ 1-24, EQ 25-48, and EQ STIN/FXRTN.

First drag the mini-graph over the EQ 1-24, EQ 25-48,

or EQ STIN/FXRTN tabs in the screen (the screen will

switch). Then drag and drop the mini-graph onto the

desired channel, and a window will appear, asking you

to confirm the copy operation.

B EQ ON/OFF

Turns the EQ on/off for that channel. This is linked for

two paired channels.

C Channel

This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two

paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol dis-

played between them.

D Level meter

This meter indicates the peak level after EQ. If the sig-

nal clips, the OVER segment will light.

Here you can adjust the amount of attenuation/gain

immediately following AD conversion, and reverse the

phase.

4 1 2

ø/ATT 1-48 (Phase/Attenuation

1-48) screen

ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN (Phase/Attenua-

tion STIN/FXRTN) screen

ø /ATT 1-48

ø /ATT STIN/FXRTN

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 263

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

A GANG

When you turn this button on, attenuation/gain set-

tings will be linked for adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered channels (or the L/R sides of an STIN/

FXRTN channel).

If the settings are different when you turned the but-

ton on, they will maintain their relative difference

while linked.

B ø (Phase)

This button inverts the phase of each channel’s signal

following AD conversion.

C Attenuation/gain

For each channel, you can adjust the amount of attenu-

ation/gain immediately following AD conversion over

a range of –96 dB to +24 dB. This is linked with the

ATT knob of the EQ PARAM screen. The current value

is displayed in the box located below the knob.

D Channel

This is the number and name of the channel. If two

adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels are

paired (or if a STIN channel or FXRTN channel is dis-

played), a heart symbol is displayed between the two

channels.

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

input EQ library.

Except for the fact that these are EQ settings for the input

channels, display and operations are the same as in the

OUTPUT EQ function OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY screen.

Refer to p.228.

INPUT EQ LIBRARY screen

INPUT EQ LIBRARY

INPUT GATE/COMP function

264 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

INPUT GATE/COMP function

Here you can edit the gate parameters of the selected input

channel.

A Channel selection

Select the input channel (input channel, ST IN chan-

nel) that you want to edit.

B Name

This is the name of the currently selected input chan-

nel. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel

is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For

an input channel, you can click this symbol to enable/

disable pairing.

C GATE ON/OFF

Turns the gate for that channel on/off.

D LIBRARY

This button accesses the GATE LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.268), where you can store/recall gate library set-

tings for input channels.

E Level meters

These meters indicate the

amount of gain reduction

(GR), the peak level before

(PRE) and after (POST)

the gate, and the peak level

of the key-in signal (KEY

IN) that causes the gate to

operate. If the signal clips,

the OVER segment will

light.

If stereo link is turned on

for the input channel (or if

a ST IN channel is

selected), level meters for

two channels are

displayed.

Hint

If GR METER ON/OFF LINK is turned on in the PREFER-

ENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), the gain reduction meter

will not be displayed when the gate is off.

F Type

Indicates the type of the currently selected gate.

Hint

To change the gate type, use the INPUT GATE LIBRARY

screen to recall a library item that has a different type. You

cannot change only the gate type in this screen.

G STEREO LINK

This specifies whether parameter settings and gate

operation by a key-in signal will be linked (STEREO

LINK button on) for adjacent odd-numbered/even-

numbered input channels and the L/R channels of ST

IN channels, or not (STEREO LINK button off).

❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= On

GATE PARAM (Gate parameter)

screen

GATE PARAM

1 2 3 4

THR

LINK= ON

Odd-numbered

channel key-in signal

Even-numbered

channel key-in signal

ATTACK

processing

ATTACK

processing

Detect

maximum

level

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 265

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= Off

Note

Stereo Link is fixed at On for paired channels.

H Gate graph

This graph displays the approximate response of the

gate.

I KEY IN SOURCE

Here you can select one of the following as the key-in

signal that will be used. (If an input channel is selected,

its name will be displayed at the right.)

J FILTER

Select the type of filter to be applied to the selected key-

in signal, from the following types.

• HPF (High Pass Filter)

Passes the portion of the signal above the specified fre-

quency (the cutoff frequency), and cuts the portion

below. If you select this filter, use the knob at the right

to adjust the cutoff frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz).

• BPF (Band Pass Filter)

Passes only the specified frequency region (the band

pass frequency), and cuts the rest of the signal. If you

select this filter, use the knobs at the right to adjust the

band pass frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz) and Q (10.0–

0.10).

• LPF (Low Pass Filter)

Passes the portion of the signal below the specified fre-

quency (the cutoff frequency), and cuts the portion

above. If you select this filter, use the knob at the right

to adjust the cutoff frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz).

K FILTER ON/OFF

This is an on/off switch for the filter applied to the key-

in signal.

L CUE

This button cue-monitors the currently selected key-in

signal.

Note

Even if the cue mode is set to MIX CUE (which lets you moni-

tor the mix of all channels whose [CUE] key is on), only the

corresponding signal will take priority for monitoring when you

turn on the CUE button in the GATE PARAM screen. (Any

[CUE] keys that had been on at that time will be forcibly turned

off.)

M THRESHOLD (Threshold level)

Specifies the level at which the gate will open and close.

The gate will open when the key-in signal exceeds this

level, and will close when the signal falls below this

level.

N ATTACK (Attack time)

Specifies the time from when the key-in signal exceeds

the threshold level until the gate opens.

O HOLD (Hold time)

Specifies the time that the gate will remain open after

the key-in signal falls below the threshold.

P DECAY (Decay time)

Specifies the time over which the gate will close after

the hold time has elapsed.

Q RANGE

Specifies the amount of attenuation while the gate is

closed.

SELF PRE EQ

The pre-EQ signal of the currently

selected input channel

SELF POST EQ

The post-EQ signal of the currently

selected input channel

CH 1–48 POST EQ The post-EQ signal of the corre-

sponding input channel (however,

you can only choose channels

belonging to the same group,

within the seven groups CH1–8,

CH9–16, CH17–24, CH25–32,

CH33–40, CH41–48, and ST IN

1L/1R–4L/4R)

ST IN 1L/1R–4L/4R

POST EQ

MIX 21–24 OUT

The output signal of the corre-

sponding MIX channel immedi-

ately before the output attenuation

THR

LINK= OFF

Odd-numbered

channel key-in signal

Even-numbered

channel key-in signal

ATTACK

processing

ATTACK

processing

Detect max-

imum level

Detect max-

imum level

M N O P Q

INPUT GATE/COMP function

266 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can edit the compressor parameters of the

selected input channel.

A Channel selection

Select the input channel (input channel, ST IN chan-

nel) that you want to edit.

B Name

This is the name of the currently selected input chan-

nel. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel

is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For

an input channel, you can click this symbol to enable/

disable pairing.

C COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off)

Turns the compressor on/off for that channel.

D COMP LINK GROUP (Compressor link

group)

Selects the compressor link group (1–8) to which that

channel belongs. Compressor parameters are linked for

input channels belonging to the same group.

Note

Input channel compressor link groups are independent from

output channel compressor link groups.

E LIBRARY

This button accesses the COMP LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.232), where you can store/recall compressor

library settings for input channels.

F Level meters

These meters indicate the

amount of gain reduction

(GR), the peak level before

(PRE) and after (POST)

the compressor, and the

peak level of the key-in

signal (KEY IN) that

causes the compressor to

operate. If the signal clips,

the OVER segment will

light.

G Type

Indicates the type of the currently selected compressor.

H STEREO LINK

This specifies whether compressor parameter settings

and key-in signal operation will be linked for adjacent

odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (STE-

REO LINK button on), or will be independent

(STEREO LINK button off). (For details on compres-

sor stereo link ➥ p.229)

I Compressor graph

This graph displays the approximate response of the

compressor.

COMP PARAM (Compressor parame-

ter) screen

COMP PARAM

1 2 3 54

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 267

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

J KEY IN SOURCE

Select the desired key-in signal from the following

choices.

K THRESHOLD (Threshold level)

L RATIO

M ATTACK (Attack time)

N RELEASE (Release time)

O GAIN

P KNEE

These parameters are the same as in the OUTPUT

COMP function COMP PARAM screen (➥ p.230).

These screens list the gate/compressor settings for the input

channels. Here you can also copy gate/compressor settings

between input channels.

SELF PRE EQ

The pre-EQ signal of the currently

selected input channel

SELF POST EQ

The post-EQ signal of the currently

selected input channel

CH 1–48 POST EQ The post-EQ signal of the corre-

sponding input channel (however,

you can only choose channels

belonging to the same group,

within the seven groups CH1–8,

CH9–16, CH17–24, CH25–32,

CH33–40, CH41–48, and ST IN

1L/1R–4L/4R)

ST IN 1L/1R–4L/4R

POST EQ

MIX 21–24 OUT

The output signal of the corre-

sponding MIX channel immedi-

ately before the output attenuation

K L M N O P

CH 1-12 (Input channel 1–12) screen

CH 13-24 (Input channel 13–24)

screen

CH 25-36 (Input channel 25–36)

screen

CH 37-48 (Input channel 37–48)

screen

ST IN (ST IN channel) screen

CH 1-12

ST IN

INPUT GATE/COMP function

268 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

A Gate graph

This mini-graph shows the approximate gate response

for each input channel. If you click the mini-graph, the

GATE PARAM screen for that channel will appear.

B Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction pro-

duced by the gate (at left), and the peak level of the

signal after passing through the gate (at right). If the

signal clips, the OVER segment will light.

C GATE ON/OFF

Turns the gate for that channel on/off.

D Compressor graph

This mini-graph shows the approximate compressor

response for each input channel. If you click the mini-

graph, the COMP PARAM screen for that channel will

appear.

E Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction pro-

duced by the compressor (at left), and the peak level of

the signal after passing through the compressor (at

right). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light.

F COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off)

Turns the compressor on/off for that channel.

G Channel

This area shows the number and name of the channel

you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a

heart symbol displayed between them.

In this screen, you can copy gate/compressor settings

by dragging and dropping the mini-graph of a desired

channel onto another channel. You can also copy gate/

compressor settings between different screens (for the

procedure ➥ p.231).

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

gate library.

A EDIT

When you click this button, the GATE PARAM screen

for the currently selected input channel will appear.

B Channel selection

Select the input channel that you want to edit. The

name of the channel is displayed at the right.

C Gate graph of the selected channel

This graph shows the approximate response of the gate

for the currently selected channel.

D Level meters

These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR),

and the peak levels before the gate (PRE) and after the

gate (POST). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will

light.

2 1 4

GATE LIBRARY screen

GATE LIBRARY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 269

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

E RECALL

Recalls the gate library item selected in the list into

memory.

F STORE

Stores the gate settings of the currently selected chan-

nel into the location selected in the list. When you click

this button a window will appear, allowing you to

name and save the settings.

G TITLE EDIT

Edits the title of the library item selected in the list.

When you click this button a window will appear,

allowing you to edit the title.

H CLEAR

Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you

click this button, a confirmation message will appear.

Note

Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the

list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored,

renamed, or deleted.

I Library gate graph

This graph indicates the approximate response of the

gate library item selected in the list.

J Library list

Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which

you want to perform an operation. The selected library

item will move to the center, and will be highlighted.

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

compressor library.

Except for the fact that these settings are for input chan-

nels, this is the same as the OUTPUT COMP function

COMP LIBRARY screen. Refer to p.232.

COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library)

screen

COMP LIBRARY

INPUT DELAY function

270 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

INPUT DELAY function

Here you can edit the delay parameters of the selected

input channel.

A DELAY SCALE

Here you can select the units in which the delay time is

displayed. The units that can be selected are the same

as in OUTPUT DELAY function DELAY SCALE

(➥ p.233). When you change the delay scale in the

INPUT DELAY function, the delay scale of the OUT-

PUT DELAY function will also change accordingly.

B GANG

C Delay time knob

D DELAY ON/OFF

These are the same as in the OUTPUT DELAY func-

tion (➥ p.233).

E Channel

This area shows the number and name of the input

channel you are editing. Two paired channels (or a ST

IN channel) are indicated by a heart symbol displayed

between them. You can click this symbol to enable/dis-

able pairing.

CH 1-24 (Input channel 1–24) screen

CH 25-48 (Input channel 25–48)

screen

ST IN (ST IN channel) screen

CH 1-24

ST IN

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 271

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

INPUT DCA/GROUP function

Here you can specify the input channels that will be

assigned to DCA groups 1–8. The level of input channels

belonging to the same DCA group can be adjusted as a

whole using DCA faders 1–8.

A DCA group

This is the number of the DCA group. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is

highlighted.

B Name

This is the name of the DCA group. You can also click

this area to edit the name.

C Grid

This grid lets you assign input channels (horizontal

rows) to DCA groups (vertical columns). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the

cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key

(or click) to set/disable the assignment.

Hint

You can also assign a single input channel to multiple DCA

groups for multiple DCA control.

Hint

DCA groups 1–6 are for input channels only, but DCA groups

7/8 can be used with both input channels and output chan-

nels. Both types of channel can exist in an identically-

numbered group.

D SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key)

This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to

make/cancel DCA group assignments. While the DCA

group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE]

key of an input channel that can be assigned to the cor-

responding group will assign the channel to the group.

(Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the

assignment.)

Hint

The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one DCA

group. This is automatically turned off when you change

screens or turn off the power.

E CLEAR

This button clears all input channels assigned to that

DCA group.

F MUTE

These buttons switch muting on/off for DCA groups

1–8. They are linked with DCA [MUTE] keys 1–8 in

the DCA strip of the panel.

G DCA faders

These faders adjust the levels of DCA groups 1–8. They

are linked with DCA faders 1–8 in the DCA strip.

H CUE

These buttons cue-monitor DCA groups 1–8. They are

linked with DCA [CUE] keys 1–8 in the DCA strip of

the panel.

I DCA LEVEL SET

Use the following two buttons to operate DCA groups

1–8 together.

• ALL NOMINAL

Clicking this button will move DCA faders 1–8 to

nominal level (0 dB).

• ALL MINIMUM

Clicking this button will move DCA faders 1–8 to the

–∞ dB position.

DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

21 3

INPUT DCA/GROUP function

272 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Here you can specify the input channels that will be

assigned to mute groups 1–8. Muting can be switched on/

off together for channels assigned to the same mute group.

Except for the fact that these settings apply to input chan-

nels, the display and operations are the same as in the

OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function MUTE GROUP

ASSIGN screen. Refer to p.235.

Hint

Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and

output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the identi-

cally-numbered mute group.

Here you can specify the input channels that will be

assigned to EQ link groups 1–8. EQ parameters are linked

for channels belonging to the same group.

A EQ link group

These are the EQ link group numbers. The number

corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is

highlighted.

B Grid

This grid lets you assign input channels (horizontal

rows) to EQ link groups (vertical columns). Currently-

patched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the

cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key

(or click) to set/disable the assignment.

Hint

Input channels and output channels use separate EQ link

groups. Input channels use groups A–H, and output channels

use groups 1–8.

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

EQ LINK ASSIGN screen

EQ LINK ASSIGN

1 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 273

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

C SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key)

This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to

make/cancel EQ link group assignments. While the EQ

link group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the

[CUE] key of a channel that can be assigned to the cor-

responding group will assign the channel to the group.

(Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the

assignment.)

Hint

The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one EQ

link group. This is automatically turned off when you change

screens or turn off the power.

D CLEAR

This button clears all input channels assigned to that

EQ link group.

Here you can specify the input channels that will be

assigned to compressor link groups 1–8. Compressor

parameters are linked for channels belonging to the same

group.

Except for the fact that these settings apply to input chan-

nels, the display and operations are the same as in the

OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function COMP LINK ASSIGN

screen. Refer to p.237.

Hint

Input channels and output channels use separate compres-

sor link groups. Input channels use groups A–H, and output

channels use groups 1–8.

COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link

assign) screen

COMP LINK ASSIGN

PAN/ROUTING function

274 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

PAN/ROUTING function

Here you can send signals from input channels to the

desired MIX bus. In this screen you can also switch the

type (VARI or FIXED) of each MIX bus, and specify the

location from which the signal will be sent.

A Type selection

Here you can select the mix bus type for every two

adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses.

You can choose one of the following types.

• FIXED

The send level of the MIX bus is fixed at nominal level

(0.0 dB). Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as

a group output or as a bus output for recording on a

multitrack recorder.

• VARI (Variable)

The send level of the MIX bus is adjustable. Choose

this if you want to use the MIX bus as an external effect

send or as a foldback output.

Hint

If surround mode is enabled, the type indication will change to

“SURROUND” for MIX buses used as surround buses. You

cannot change the mix bus type during this time.

B MIX bus

This is the number of the MIX bus to which the signal

is sent. Paired MIX buses are indicated by a heart sym-

bol displayed between them. You can click this symbol

to enable/disable pairing.

C POST ON/POST TO ST (Post on / Post to

stereo)

This button lets you specify in greater detail the loca-

tion from which post-fader signals will be sent from

input channels to this MIX bus. You can choose one of

the following two send locations.

❏ POST ON

The signal will be sent from immediately after the

[ON] key.

POST ON/POST TO ST=

❏ POST TO ST

The signal will be sent from immediately after the [TO

STEREO] key.

POST ON/POST TO ST=

Hint

This setting applies to the signals sent from all input channels

to the corresponding MIX bus.

D CH to MIX (Channel to mix)

In this area, the signals sent from input channels / ST

IN channels (vertical columns) to MIX buses (horizon-

tal rows) can be switched on/off and their level

adjusted.

The buttons and knobs displayed here will differ

depending on the type (FIXED or VARI) of the send-

destination MIX bus, and on whether the MIX buses

are paired.

CH to MIX (Channel to mix) screen

CH to MIX

1 2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

ON TO ST

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

ON TO ST

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 275

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Type = FIXED, Pairing = disabled ❏ Type = FIXED, Pairing = enabled

Input channel 1

↓

MIX bus 1

Input channel 1

↓

MIX bus 2

Input channel 2

↓

MIX bus 1

Input channel 2

↓

MIX bus 2

SEND ON/OFF button

On/off switch for the signal sent from

input channels to each MIX bus.

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1 (FIX)

MIX2 (FIX)

Input channel 1

↓

MIX buses 1/2

Input channel 2

↓

MIX buses 1/2

SEND ON/OFF button

On/off switch for the signal sent from

input channels to the two MIX buses.

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1/2 (FIX)

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 2

PAN

MIX1/2 (FIX)

PAN/ROUTING function

276 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ Type = VARI, Pairing = disabled ❏ Type = VARI, Pairing = enabled

SEND ON/OFF button

On/off switch for the signal sent from input

channels to each MIX bus.

PRE/POST button

Selects either PRE (pre-EQ or pre-fader) or

POST (post ON or post TO ST) as the loca-

tion from which the signal will be sent from

input channels to each MIX bus.

SEND LEVEL knob

Adjusts the level of the signal sent from

input channels to each MIX bus.

Input channel 1

↓

MIX bus 1

Input channel 1

↓

MIX bus 2

Input channel 2

↓

MIX bus 1

Input channel 2

↓

MIX bus 2

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

FADER

PAN

MIX1 (VARI)

LEVEL

MIX2 (VARI)

LEVEL

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

• PRE/POST button= PRE

• PRE/POST button= POST

Input channel 1

↓

MIX buses 1/2

Input channel 2

↓

MIX buses 1/2

SEND ON/OFF

button

On/off switch for

the signal sent

from input chan-

nels to the two

MIX buses.

PRE/POST button

Selects either PRE (pre-EQ or pre-fader) or POST

(post ON or post TO ST) as the location from which the

signal will be sent from input channels to each MIX bus.

MIX PAN/BALANCE knob

Speciﬁes the panning of the signal sent

from input channels to the two MIX

buses. If the PAN MODE (

9) of the

input channel is set to BALANCE, this

functions as a BALANCE knob that

adjusts the volume balance between

the two channels.

SEND LEVEL knob

Adjusts the level of the signal

sent from input channels to the

two MIX buses.

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

MIX1

MIX2

STEREO L

STEREO R

……

INPUT CHANNEL 1

FADER

INPUT CHANNEL 1

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

FADER

PAN

MIX1/2 (VARI)

LEVEL

• PRE/POST button= PRE

• PRE/POST button= POST

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 277

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

E PRE EQ/PRE FADER

These buttons let you specify in greater detail the loca-

tion from which the pre-fader signal will be sent from

an input channel to the MIX buses. You can choose

one of the following two send locations.

Hint

This setting applies to the signal sent from the corresponding

input channel to all MIX buses.

F FOLLOW PAN

These buttons specify how the TO ST PAN knob (8)

will affect the signal sent from the input channel to

MIX buses.

• VARI

If this button is on, the PAN knob displayed in the CH

to MIX area (

4) will be linked with the TO ST PAN

knob (

8) if VARI-type MIX buses are paired.

• FIXED

If this button is on, the signal from after the TO ST

PAN (

8) knob will be sent to FIXED-type MIX buses.

G TO ST (To stereo)

This button specifies whether the input channel / ST

IN channel will send its signal to the STEREO bus. This

is linked with the [TO STEREO] switch in the

SELECTED CHANNEL section.

H TO ST PAN (To stereo pan)

Here you can adjust the panning of the signal sent from

the input channel / ST IN channel to the STEREO bus.

(The current value is shown in the boxes immediately

below.) This is linked with the encoder if PAN is

selected as the encoder mode, and with the [PAN]

encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section.

I PAN MODE

Here you can select one of the following ways in which

pan settings will be linked between adjacent odd-num-

bered/even-numbered input channels (or the left/right

channels of a ST IN channel).

• INDIVIDUAL

The two pan settings will be independent.

• GANG PAN

The two pan settings will be linked in the same direc-

tion. If the two pan values are different when you turn

on this button, pan will be linked while preserving the

existing difference in values.

• INV. GANG (Inverted gang)

The two pan settings will operate in opposite

directions.

• BALANCE

The two PAN knobs will function as BALANCE knobs

that adjust the balance of the signal sent from the odd-

numbered/even-numbered channels (or the L/R chan-

nels of the ST IN channel) to the STEREO bus L/R. If

you choose this setting, the two knobs will be reset to

the center position, and will be linked in the same

direction. Also, the knob markings will change from

red to white.

Note

• Pan mode is always valid, even if the send-source input

channels are not paired.

• You will be unable to operate the TO ST PAN knobs if you

select GANG PAN mode when the two pan knobs are set to

far left and right, or if you select INV.GANG when both pan

knobs are turned all the way in the same direction.

J MIX MINUS

This function sends the same mix as the STEREO bus

— but with a specific input channel removed — to the

desired MIX bus. If you need to send a monitor mix to

a performer or announcer, this is a quick way to give

them the same mix as the STEREO bus but without

their own voice.

Access the desired source input channel in the screen,

and click the MIX MINUS button for that channel; a

window will appear, allowing you to select the MIX bus

for which to make Mix Minus settings.

Hint

As a shortcut to access the above window, you can simulta-

neously press the [SEL] key of the INPUT/ST IN channel strip

and the [SEL] key of the MIX section. However, be aware that

holding down either one of these keys by itself will access a

different shortcut.

In the above window, select the send-destination MIX

bus and click the OK button; the following parameters

will change in the CH to MIX screen.

• In the CH to MIX area of the send-destination MIX

bus, all ON/OFF buttons will turn on.

• In the CH to MIX area of the send-destination MIX

bus, all PRE/POST buttons will be set to POST.

• The send level of signals sent from the source input

channel to the destination MIX bus will be lowered

to –∞ dB.

• The send level of signals sent from all input chan-

nels other than the above to the destination MIX

bus will be set to nominal level (0.0 dB).

PRE FADER Immediately before the fader

PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ

J7 K

PAN/ROUTING function

278 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• The POST ON/POST TO ST button will be set to

POST TO ST for the destination MIX bus.

Note

• Mix Minus does not switch a “mode”; rather, it is a quick way

to make certain settings. This means that even after execut-

ing Mix Minus, you can freely edit the parameters of the CH

to MIX screen.

• When you execute the Mix Minus operation, only the input

channel you selected as the source will be removed from the

mix. If you want to remove more than one input channel

from the signal sent to a specific MIX bus, execute the Mix

Minus operation and then manually change the settings of

other channels.

• If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel is

selected), the send level of the signal sent from both chan-

nels to the target MIX bus will be set to –∞.

• The Mix Minus operation is valid even if the destination MIX

bus is paired. In this case, the PAN setting of the input chan-

nel will be reflected by the PAN settings of the paired MIX

buses.

K Input channel

This is the source input channel (or channels). Paired

input channels (or a ST IN channel) are indicated by a

heart symbol displayed between them. For an input

channel, you can click this symbol to enable/disable

pairing.

You can move the cursor to a parameter in the CH to

COPY area, and then hold down the [SHIFT] key and

click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to

copy the value of that parameter to another channel (in

the horizontal direction) or to another MIX bus (in the

vertical direction), or to switch all parameters on/off.

You can use this method to set the following

parameters.

• Mix send on/off

Move the cursor to the SEND ON/OFF button of the

CH to COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key

and click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to

access the following window.

To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA]

encoder to select one of the following items, and click

the OK button.

ALL OFF [ALL MIX ]

ALL ON [ALL MIX ]

Switch the signals sent from the selected input chan-

nel to all MIX buses on or off together.

ALL OFF [ALL CH ]

ALL ON [ALL CH ]

Switch the signals sent from all input channels to the

selected MIX bus on or off together.

ALL OFF [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

ALL ON [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

Switch the signals sent from all input channels to all

MIX buses on or off together.

• Mix send position

Move the cursor to a PRE/POST button in the CH to

COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and click

(or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to access

the following window.

To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA]

encoder to select one of the following items, and click

the OK button.

ALL POST [ALL MIX ]

ALL PRE [ALL MIX ]

Switch the send position of the signal sent from the

selected input channel to all MIX buses to either post-

fader or pre-fader.

ALL POST [ALL CH ]

ALL PRE [ALL CH ]

Switch the send position of the signal sent from all

input channels to the selected MIX bus to either post-

fader or pre-fader.

ALL POST [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

ALL PRE [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

Switch the send position of the signal sent from all

input channels to all MIX buses to either post-fader

or pre-fader.

Note

These “all-at-once” operations are ignored by FIXED-type MIX

buses.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 279

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

• Mix send level

Move the cursor to a SEND LEVEL knob in the CH to

COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and click

(or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to access

the following window.

To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA]

encoder to select one of the following items, and click

the OK button.

LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ]

The value of the selected SEND LEVEL knob will be

copied to the send level of the signals sent from that

input channel to all MIX buses.

LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ]

The value of the selected SEND LEVEL knob will be

copied to the send level of the signals sent from all

input channels to that MIX bus.

LEVEL COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

The value of the selected SEND LEVEL knob will be

copied to the send level of the signals sent from all

input channels to all MIX buses.

Note

These “all-at-once” operations are ignored by FIXED-type MIX

buses.

• Mix pan/balance

When the destination MIX bus is paired, move the cur-

sor to a MIX PAN/BALANCE knob displayed in the

CH to COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key

and click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to

access the following window.

To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA]

encoder to select one of the following items, and click

the OK button.

PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ]

The value of the selected MIX PAN/BALANCE knob

will be copied to the pan (balance) of signals sent

from that channel to all paired MIX buses.

PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ]

The value of the selected MIX PAN/BALANCE knob

will be copied to the pan (balance) of signals sent

from all channels to that MIX bus.

PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

The value of the selected parameter will be copied to

the pan (balance) of signals sent from all channels to

all paired MIX buses.

Note

• This operation is ignored by unpaired MIX buses and

FIXED-type MIX buses.

• You cannot copy PAN parameters to BALANCE parameters

(or vice versa).

• Copying is invalid for channels whose VARI button (in the

FOLLOW PAN area) is on.

PAN/ROUTING function

280 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

This screen lists the signals sent from the input channels to

the MIX buses. You can also edit the settings from within

this screen.

A CH to MIX/MIX from CH

Select one of the following two types of screen display.

❏ When the CH to MIX button is on

The screen shows the status of the signals sent from a

specific input channel (input channel / ST IN channel)

to all MIX buses. (Use the scroll bar to see input chan-

nels that are not currently shown.)

❏ When the MIX from CH button is on

The screen shows the status of the signals sent from all

input channels to a specific MIX bus.

B SEND LEVEL, PRE/POST (Send level / Send

point)

Select one of the following two parameters to view in

the grid.

❏ When the SEND LEVEL button is on

The send levels of the signals sent from input channels

to MIX buses are shown in the grid as bar graphs.

Except for the fact that the send-sources are input

channels and the send-destinations are MIX buses, the

bar graph display is the same as in the MIX to

MATRIX VIEW screen (MATRIX/ST function)

(➥ p.240).

To edit the send level of a signal, move the cursor to

the grid where the desired channel and MIX bus inter-

sect, and turn the [DATA] encoder. To switch a MIX

send on/off, click the grid where the desired channel

and MIX bus intersect.

If the SEND LEVEL button is on, you can select a

desired grid and copy its send level (pan) value to other

channels (horizontal direction) or to other MIX buses

(vertical direction), or switch all grids on/off

simultaneously.

To do so, move the cursor to the desired grid; then

hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER]

key. (Alternatively, hold down the [SHIFT] key and

click the desired grid.) When the following window

appears, select one of the following choices to copy,

and click the OK button.

LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ]

Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to

all MIX buses.

LEVEL COPY [ALL CH ]

Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to

all input channels.

LEVEL COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to

all input channels / all MIX buses.

ALL OFF [ALL MIX ]

Turn off the signals sent from the specified input

channel to all MIX buses.

ALL ON [ALL MIX ]

Turn on the signals sent from the specified input

channel to all MIX buses.

ALL OFF [ALL CH ]

Turn off the signals sent from all input channels to

the specified MIX bus.

MIX SEND VIEW screen

MIX SEND VIEW

1 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 281

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

ALL ON [ALL CH ]

Turn on the signals sent from all input channels to

the specified MIX bus.

ALL OFF [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

Turn off the signals sent from all input channels to all

MIX buses.

ALL ON [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

Turn on the signals sent from all input channels to all

MIX buses.

❏ When the PRE/POST button is on

This screen shows the send positions of the signals sent

from the input channels to the MIX buses.

Each indication has the following significance.

(green) . . . PRE EQ (immediately before

the EQ)

(yellow) . . PRE FADER (immediately

before the fader)

(gray) . . . . POST ON (immediately after

the [ON] key)

(red) . . . . . POST TO ST (immediately after

the [TO ST] key)

To change the send position of a signal, move the cur-

sor to the grid where the desired channel and MIX bus

intersect, and press the [ENTER] key, or click, or turn

the [DATA] encoder.

If the PRE/POST button is on, the send position for all

grid locations can be changed simultaneously. To do

so, hold down the [SHIFT] key and click the desired

grid. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the desired

grid; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the

[ENTER] key.) When the following window appears,

select one of the following choices and click the OK

button.

ALL PRE [ALL MIX ]

Specify pre-fader as the send position for signals sent

from the specified input channel to all MIX buses.

ALL POST [ALL MIX ]

Specify post-fader as the send position for signals sent

from the specified input channel to all MIX buses.

ALL PRE [ALL CH ]

Specify pre-fader as the send position for signals sent

from all input channels to the specified MIX bus.

ALL POST [ALL CH ]

Specify post-fader as the send position for signals sent

from all input channels to the specified MIX bus.

ALL PRE [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

Specify pre-fader as the send position for signals sent

from all input channels to all MIX buses.

ALL POST [ALL CH x ALL MIX]

Specify post-fader as the send position for signals sent

from all input channels to all MIX buses.

C Grid

This area shows various settings for the signals sent

from the input channels (horizontal rows) to the MIX

buses (vertical columns). The red lines extending

toward the left and upward indicate the corresponding

input channel and MIX bus for the grid at which the

cursor is now located.

D SELECTED PARAMETER (currently selected

parameter)

This indicates the input channel and MIX bus for the

grid where the cursor is currently located. The four

boxes at right indicate the values for the grid where the

cursor is currently located.

PAN/ROUTING function

282 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

This screen lists the signals sent from the input channels to

the buses and direct outputs. You can also set or cancel

these assignments from within this screen.

A Input channel

This area indicates the number and name of the input

channel you are editing.

B PAN

If this button is on, the input channel’s TO STEREO

PAN knob setting will also apply to the signal sent to

FIXED-type MIX buses. This is linked with the FOL-

LOW PAN FIXED button of the CH to MIX screen

(PAN/ROUTING function).

C Bus assignments

These buttons assign the corresponding input channel

to FIXED-type MIX buses. These are linked with the

SEND ON/OFF buttons of the CH to MIX screen

(PAN/ROUTING function). For VARI-type MIX

buses, the buttons are grayed-out and inoperable.

Note

If a surround mode other than STEREO is selected, the but-

tons for MIX buses used as surround buses will be named by

their surround channel (e.g., L, C, R) rather than by number.

D TO ST (To stereo)

If this button is on, the corresponding input channel is

assigned to the STEREO bus. This is linked with the

TO ST button of the CH to MIX screen (PAN/ROUT-

ING function).

E DIRECT

If this button is on, the signal of the corresponding

input channel will be sent to the output port selected as

the direct output. This is linked with the DIRECT OUT

ON/OFF button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

screen (IN PATCH function).

F Output port

This area indicates the output port that is patched in

the DIRECT OUT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH

function) to the direct output of this input channel

G ALL STEREO

Clicking this button enables the assignment of all input

channels to the STEREO bus.

H ALL BUS

Clicking this button enables the assignment of all input

channels to FIXED-type MIX buses.

I ALL CLEAR

Clicking this button cancels all assignments in the FIX

ASSIGN VIEW screen.

J SURROUND MODE

This indicates the currently selected surround mode.

FIX ASSIGN VIEW screen

FIX ASSIGN VIEW

8 9

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 283

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Here you can make settings for LCR mode, which allows

three-channel playback by adding a CENTER channel to

the L/R channels of the STEREO bus.

Except for the fact that the send-sources are input chan-

nels, the display and operations are the same as in the

MATRIX/ST function LCR screen. Refer to p.242.

Here you can perform realtime control of surround pan-

ning for the two currently selected input channels.

A Channel selection

Select the two adjacent odd-numbered/even-num-

bered input channels (or ST IN channel L/R) that you

want to control. The names of these channels are dis-

played at the right.

B DIVERGENCE

These controls specify the proportion at which the sig-

nals are sent to each surround bus when the input

channel is positioned in the center. Depending on the

currently selected surround mode, the displayed

parameters will differ as follows.

❏ If Surround Mode = 3-1ch/5.1ch

A knob for controlling the front

divergence is displayed. Use this

knob to specify the proportion (0–

100) at which a signal positioned

in the center will be sent to the

center bus (C) and the left/right

buses (L, R). With a setting of 0

the signal will be sent only to the

left/right buses, and with a setting

of 100 it will be sent only to the center bus. With a set-

ting of 50, the signal will be sent at the same level to the

left/right and center buses.

LCR screen

LCR

SURR PARAM (Surround parameter)

screen

SURR PARAM

PAN/ROUTING function

284 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ If Surround Mode = 6.1ch

An F knob for controlling the front divergence and an

R knob for controlling the rear divergence are dis-

played. Use these two knobs to specify the proportion

(0–100) at which a signal positioned in the center will

be sent to the center buses (C, S, Bs) and the left/right

buses (L, R, Ls, Rs).

In 6.1ch mode, a LINK button

that links the front and rear diver-

gence is displayed between the F

knob and R knob. When you turn

the LINK button on, the F knob

value will be copied to the R knob,

and the F knob and R knob values

will be linked.

C LFE (Low Frequency Effect)

This adjusts the output level of the signal sent from the

input channel to the LFE (Low Frequency Effect) bus

for a subwoofer. You can use the ON/OFF button to

switch the signal sent from the input channel to the

LFE bus on/off.

The LFE knob and ON/OFF button are displayed only

when the surround mode is 5.1ch or 6.1ch.

D Surround pan grid

This grid lets you control the surround panning, with

the listening point at the center. The current setting is

indicated by a O symbol.

E Position buttons

These buttons correspond to each surround bus. When

you click a button, the surround panning will move to

that position.

F SURROUND BUS ON/OFF buttons

These buttons are on/off switches for the signal sent

from the input channel to the corresponding surround

bus.

G Surround pan position

This indicates the coordinate locations of the O sym-

bol in the left/right direction and the front/rear

direction.

H STEREO LINK

This specifies whether sound image movement will be

linked between the two channels shown in the screen.

To link the movement of the two channels, use the /

buttons at left and right to select one of the eight link

patterns. (For details on how each pattern will operate,

refer to p.136)

I SURROUND MODE

This indicates the currently selected surround mode.

J Level meters

These meters show the master levels of the surround

buses.

5 6 7

8 9 J

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 285

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

This screen shows the surround settings for each input

channel. From this screen you can also jump to the SURR

PARAM screen for the desired channel.

A Surround pan grid

For each input channel, the approximate surround pan

position is shown by the O symbol. If you click this

area, the SURR PARAM screen for that channel will

appear.

B Surround pan position

This indicates the surround pan coordinate positions

in the left/right direction (L/R) and the front/rear

direction (F/R).

C Channel

This is the number and name of the input channel.

For two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input

channels (or ST IN channel L/R), these settings convert the

two-channel signal from an MS mic into L/R signals.

A S-GAIN knob

This knob sets the proportionate level of the S mic rela-

tive to the level of the M mic. The current value is

shown in the numerical box at the right.

At the MONO position, the S mic level will be at –∞, at

the STEREO position the M mic and S mic will be at

the same level, and at the EXP.ST position the S mic

level will be +10 dB.

B M/S DECODE ON/OFF

This button switches M/S decoding on/off for two

adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input chan-

nels (or ST IN channel L/R). M/S decoding can be

switched on even for channels that are not assigned as a

stereo pair.

C Channel

This is the number and name of the input channel.

Hint

M/S is a stereo recording technique in which two micro-

phones are used; a uni-directional M (Middle) mic and a bi-

directional S (Side) mic. The M mic captures the main signal

and the S mic captures the directional signal, and the sum

(M+S) and difference (M-S) of the two signals (this procedure

is known as “decoding”) is recorded on the L and R channels

respectively.

SURR VIEW (Surround view) screen

SURR VIEW

M/S screen

M/S

INPUT VIEW function

286 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

INPUT VIEW function

This screen lists the mix parameters of the currently

selected input channel. In this screen you can also edit the

principal parameters and access other screens.

A Channel

This is the number of the input channel you are edit-

ing. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel

is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right.

You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing for

the input channel.

B HA (Head Amp)

This area indicates the input port that is patched to the

input channel, the setting of the internal head amp

(PM5D-RH model only) or external head amp, and the

input level. In this screen you can also adjust the head

amp gain and switch phantom power (+48V) on/off.

C ATT (Attenuation)

This area shows the attenuation and ø (phase) settings.

You can also adjust the attenuation and switch the

phase from this screen.

D EQ

Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW func-

tion CH VIEW screen (➥ p.245).

E GATE

This area shows the amount of gain reduction and the

output level of the gate, a mini-graph showing the

approximate response of the gate, and the gate on/off

status. You can also switch the gate on/off from this

screen. If you click the mini-graph, the GATE PARAM

screen for that channel will appear.

F COMP (Compressor)

Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW func-

tion CH VIEW screen (➥ p.246).

G DELAY

In this area you can view and edit the delay time of the

internal delay and its on/off status.

H TO MIX

In this area you can specify the send level, output posi-

tion, and on/off status of the signals sent from the

corresponding input channel to MIX buses 1–24.

(Operation is the same as in the TO MATRIX area of

the OUTPUT VIEW function CH VIEW screen.) Refer

to p.246.

I TO STEREO

Here you can specify the on/off status, pan, and FOL-

LOW PAN settings of the signal sent from the

corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus.

CH VIEW (Channel view) screen

CH VIEW

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 287

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

J DCA group / Mute group

K Recall safe / Mute safe

Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW func-

tion CH VIEW screen (➥ p.246).

L DIRECT

Turns direct output on/off for the corresponding input

channel.

M INSERT

Turns insert on/off for the corresponding input

channel.

N SURROUND (Surround pan)

If surround mode is enabled, the surround pan posi-

tion of the corresponding input channel is indicated by

the O symbol in the surround pan grid and also as a

front/rear/left/right coordinate position. If you click

the surround pan grid, the SURR PARAM screen for

that channel will appear.

O LCR

Here you can switch LCR mode on/off, and adjust CSR

(the level of the CENTER channel relative to the L/R

channels) (➥ p.242).

P LIBRARY

This button accesses the INPUT CH LIBRARY screen

(➥ p.289), where you can store/recall input channel

library settings.

Q Level meter

This level meter indicates the input level of the channel.

R Signal detection point

This is the point at which the signal level shown in the

level meter (

S) is detected (PRE ATT, PRE GATE,

PRE FADER, POST FADER, or POST ON). You can

edit this setting by clicking the / buttons at the left

and right.

S Fader

This controls the input level of the channel.

T CUE

U ON/OFF (Channel on/off)

Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW func-

tion CH VIEW screen (➥ p.247).

This screen shows the signal flow for two adjacent odd-

numbered/even-numbered input channels or ST IN chan-

nels. In this screen you can also edit some of the

parameters, and access other screens. You can also deter-

mine the location within the signal flow at which clipping

occurred.

A Channel

B Insert

Except for the fact that this screen depicts input chan-

nels, the contents are the same as the OUTPUT VIEW

function SIGNAL FLOW screen. Refer to p.247.

C Direct out

This area displays information about the direct output

of the two selected channels (the signal output posi-

tion, the port patched to direct out, and the direct

output on/off status).

Here you can also select the signal output position (use

the / buttons at left and right), and switch direct

output on/off (use the ON/OFF button).

D Level meters

These meters indicate the levels at various points in the

signal flow. Levels are detected at the following

locations.

• PRE ATT (immediately before the attenuator)

• EQ (immediately before and after the EQ)

• GATE (immediately before and after the gate)

• COMP (immediately before and after the

compressor)

• FADER (immediately before and after the fader)

SIGNAL FLOW screen

SIGNAL FLOW

1 32

INPUT VIEW function

288 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• POST ON (immediately after the CH [ON] key)

• INSERT IN (immediately after the insert point)

E Signal flow

This area indicates the signal flow of the selected chan-

nel. The following parameters are displayed.

• ATT (Attenuation)

Specifies the amount of attenuation immediately after

AD conversion for the corresponding channel.

• HPF (High Pass Filter)

Specifies the high pass filter on/off and cutoff fre-

quency for the corresponding channel.

• EQ (Equalizer)

• GATE

• COMP (Compressor)

These areas show the approximate response of the

equalizer, gate, and compressor for the corresponding

channel. You can also switch these on/off in this screen,

or click a mini-graph to access the individual parame-

ter screen.

• DELAY

Here you can switch the internal delay on/off and edit

the delay time.

• FADER

This indicates the input level of the channel. This is

linked with the encoder or fader of the corresponding

channel.

• ON/OFF (On/off)

Turns the channel on/off. This is linked with the [ON]

key of the corresponding channel.

• TO STEREO

Here you can specify the on/off status and pan settings

of the signal sent from the corresponding channel to

the STEREO bus. These are linked with the [TO STE-

REO] key and STEREO [PAN] encoder of the

corresponding channel.

Hint

• If insert or direct out is turned on, the current insert point or

direct out point within the signal flow is shown.

• If the signal clips, the signal flow (horizontal line) after clip-

ping is displayed in red. If an output is turned off so that the

signal does not flow any further, the subsequent flow is dis-

played in gray. If PEAK HOLD is on, the flow indication will

stay red if clipping occurs even once, making it easier to see

that clipping has occurred.

This screen shows the on/off status, level, and cue monitor

status of the input channels and DCA groups.

Except for the fact that this screen is for input channels,

DCA groups, and STEREO A/B channels, this is the same

as the OUTPUT VIEW function FADER VIEW screen.

Refer to p.249.

FADER VIEW screen

FADER VIEW

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 289

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

In this screen you can copy the desired parameter(s) from

the selected input channel into a memory buffer, and paste

them to the same type of channel (you may select more

than one paste-destination).

Except for the fact that these settings are for input chan-

nels, this is the same as the OUTPUT VIEW function CH

COPY screen. Refer to p.249.

Note

• The same buffer memory is used to copy channel settings

for both input channels and output channels.

• If output channel settings have been copied to the buffer

memory, a message of “TYPE CONFLICT!” is displayed in

the box at the left, and you cannot paste to an input channel.

• The contents of the buffer memory are erased when the

PM5D is powered-off.

Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the

input channel library.

Except for the fact that these settings are for input chan-

nels, this is the same as the OUTPUT VIEW function CH

LIBRARY screen. Refer to p.251.

CH COPY screen

CH COPY

INPUT CH LIBRARY (Input channel

library) screen

INPUT CH LIBRARY

Appendices

290 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

EQ Library List

Appendices

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

Bass Drum

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 1.2 10 0.9 —

Bass Drum

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF

G +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON

F 80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 —

Snare

Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB

F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz

Q 1.2 4.5 0.11 —

Snare

Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q —100.7 0.1

05 Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB

F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz

Q 1.4 10 1.2 0.28

06 Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz

Q —80.9 —

07 High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB

F 95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q — 0.5 1 —

08 Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q — 4.5 0.56 —

09 E. Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q —54.5 —

10 E. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB

F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q 0.1 5 6.3 —

11 Syn. Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 0.1 8 4.5 —

12 Syn. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 1.6 8 2.2 —

13 Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz

Q —80.9 —

14 Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 5.6 10 0.7 —

15 E. G. Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 0.18 10 6.3 —

E. G.

Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q 8 4.5 0.63 9

E. G.

Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz

Q 8 0.4 0.16 —

18 E. G. Dist. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q —910—

19 E. G. Dist. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q —10 4 —

A. G.

Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz

Q 0.9 4.5 3.5 —

A. G.

Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz

Q —94.5 —

A. G.

Arpeg. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q — 4.5 4.5 0.12

A. G.

Arpeg. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz

Q —74.5 —

24 Brass Sec.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2 0.7 7

Male Vocal

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB

F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

Male Vocal

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB

F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q 0.11 10 5.6 —

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 291

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

GATE Library List

Female Vo.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB

F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz

Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

Female Vo.

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

Q — 0.16 0.2 —

Chorus &

Harmo

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

Q 2.8 2 0.7 7

30 Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB

F 95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz

Q 7 2.2 5.6 —

31 Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB

F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz

Q 7 2.8 5.6 —

32 Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz

Q — 0.28 0.7 —

Bass Drum

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz

Q 2100.4 0.4

Snare

Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz

Q — 4.5 2.8 0.1

35 Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz

Q — 4.5 1.2 —

36 Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB

F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q 8109—

37 Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q 10 6.3 2.2 —

38 Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz

Q 10 6.3 2.2 0.1

Fine-EQ

Cass

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB

F 75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

Q — 4.5 1.8 —

40 Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz

Q 470.63 —

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

#Title Type Parameter Value

1 Gate GATE

Threshold (dB) –26

Range (dB) –56

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 2.56

Decay (ms) 331

2 Ducking DUCKING

Threshold (dB) –19

Range (dB) –22

Attack (ms) 93

Hold (ms) 1.20 S

Decay (ms) 6.32 S

3 A. Dr. BD GATE

Threshold (dB) –11

Range (dB) –53

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 1.93

Decay (ms) 400

4 A. Dr. SN GATE

Threshold (dB) –8

Range (dB) –23

Attack (ms) 1

Hold (ms) 0.63

Decay (ms) 238

Compressor Library List

292 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Compressor Library List

#Title Type Parameter Value

1 Comp COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 60

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 250

2 Expand EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 70

Compander

(H)

COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 6

Release (ms) 250

Compander

(S)

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

5 A. Dr. BD COMP

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 5.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 58

6 A. Dr. BD COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –1.5

Width (dB) 7

Release (ms) 192

7 A. Dr. SN COMP

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 12

8 A. Dr. SN EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 151

9 A. Dr. SN COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 10

Release (ms) 128

10 A. Dr. Tom EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 5.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

A. Dr.

OverTop

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 38

Out gain (dB) –3.5

Width (dB) 54

Release (ms) 842

12 E. B. Finger COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 4.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 470

13 E. B. Slap COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 6

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 133

14 Syn. Bass COMP

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 3.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 250

15 Piano1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 17

Out gain (dB) 1.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 238

16 Piano2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 174

17 E. Guitar COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 261

18 A. Guitar COMP

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 5

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 238

19 Strings1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 33

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

20 Strings2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 93

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 1.35 S

#Title Type Parameter Value

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 293

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

21 Strings3 COMP

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 76

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 186

22 BrassSection COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 18

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 226

23 Syn. Pad COMP

Threshold (dB) –13

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 58

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 238

24 SamplingPerc COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 238

25 Sampling BD COMP

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 35

26 Sampling SN COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 8.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 354

27 Hip Comp COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 20

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 15

Release (ms) 163

28 Solo Vocal1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 31

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 342

29 Solo Vocal2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 26

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 3

Release (ms) 331

30 Chorus COMP

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 39

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 226

#Title Type Parameter Value

31 Click Erase EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –33

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 284

32 Announcer COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 180

33 Limiter1 COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 20

Out gain (dB) –3.0

Width (dB) 90

Release (ms) 3.90 s

34 Limiter2 COMP

Threshold (dB) 0

Ratio ( :1) ∞

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 319

35 Total Comp1 COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 94

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee hard

Release (ms) 447

36 Total Comp2 COMP

Threshold (dB) –16

Ratio ( :1) 6

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 180

#Title Type Parameter Value

Dynamics Parameters

294 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Dynamics Parameters

Each channel has a GATE section (input channels and ST IN channels only) and a COMP section. The Gate section includes

Gate and Ducking types. The Comp section includes Compressor, Expander, Compander Hard (COMP. (H)), and Com-

pander Soft (COMP. (S)) types.

❏ GATE

A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE).

❏ DUCKING

Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an

announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by

a specified amount (RANGE).

GATE section

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied.

RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec

88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec

96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms (160 points)

This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen

below the threshold.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points)

This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is

expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking.

RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered.

HOLD (ms)

44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec

48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec

88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec

96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms (160 points)

This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen

below the THRESHOLD level.

DECAY (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger sig-

nal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required

for the level to change by 6 dB.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics • Time Series Analysis

RANGE

THRESHOLD

RANGE

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK DECAY

HOLD

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 295

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Compressor (COMP)

The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also

be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level

never actually exceeds the threshold.

❏ Expander (EXPAND)

An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO.

COMP section

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level

relative to change in input signal level.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has

been triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger

signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration

required for the level to change by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the compressor’s output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)

This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee set-

tings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the speciﬁed threshold,

creating a more natural sound.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

• I/O Characteristics

(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB)

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points)

This determines the amount of expansion.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger

signal level exceeds the threshold.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below

the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change

by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the expander’s output signal level.

KNEE Hard, 1–5 (6 points)

This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings,

expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the speciﬁed threshold, creat-

ing a more natural sound.

Input Level Time Time

Output Level

Input Level

Output Level

• I/O Characteristics

(KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB)

• Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1)

RATIO

THRESHOLD

Input Signal Output Signal

ATTACK RELEASE

Dynamics Parameters

296 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ COMPANDER HARD (COMP.(H))

❏ COMPANDER SOFT (COMP.(S))

The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter.

The companders function differently at the following levels:

1 0 dB and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a limiter.

2 Exceeding the threshold . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a compressor.

3 Below the threshold and width . . . . Functions as an expander.

The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is

essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2.

* The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB.

* The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expan-

sion processes.

Parameter Range Description

THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied.

RATIO

1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1,

2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1,

8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, (15 points)

This determines the amount of compression.

ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points)

This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the com-

pander has been triggered.

RELEASE (ms)

44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec

48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec

88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec

96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points)

This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain

once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The

value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB.

OUT GAIN (dB) –18.0 to 0.0 (180 points) This sets the compander’s output signal level.

WIDTH (dB) 0–90 (91 points)

This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander

is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width.

0dB

Input Level

Output Level

THRESHOLD

WIDTH

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 297

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Effect Library List

This is a list of the built-in effects. By installing a separately sold Add-On Effects package you can add new effect types to num-

ber 49 and following.

* These library numbers are reserved for the installation of Add-On

Effects. Effects that are not installed are grayed-out and unavailable.

No. Title Type Description

001 Reverb Hall REVERB HALL

Concert hall reverberation

simulation with gate

002 Reverb Room REVERB ROOM

Room reverberation simula-

tion with gate

003 Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE

Reverb designed for vocals,

with gate

004 Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE

Plate reverb simulation with

gate

005 Early Ref. EARLY REF.

Early reﬂections without the

subsequent reverb

006 Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reﬂections

007 Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE

Gated reverse early reﬂec-

tions

008 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay

009 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay

010 Mod.Delay MOD.DELAY

Simple repeat delay with

modulation

011 Delay LCR DELAY LCR

3-tap (left, center, right)

delay

012 Echo ECHO

Stereo delay with crossed

left/right feedback

013 Chorus CHORUS Chorus

014 Flange FLANGE Flanger

015 Symphonic SYMPHONIC

Proprietary Yamaha effect

that produces a richer and

more complex modulation

than normal chorus

016 Phaser PHASER

16-stage stereo phase

shifter

017 Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner

018 Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo

019 HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH

Mono pitch shifter, produc-

ing stable results

020 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter

021 Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation

022 Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator

023 Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated ﬁlter

024 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion

025 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation

026 Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled ﬁlter

027 Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE

Dynamically controlled

ﬂanger

028 Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER

Dynamically controlled

phase shifter

029 Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS

Reverb and chorus in paral-

lel

030 Rev→Chorus REV→CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series

031 Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE

Reverb and ﬂanger in paral-

lel

032 Rev→Flange REV→FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in series

033 Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO.

Reverb and symphonic in

parallel

034 Rev→Sympho. REV→SYMPHO.

Reverb and symphonic in

series

035 Rev→Pan REV→PAN

Reverb and auto-pan in

series

036 Delay+Er. DELAY+ER.

Delay and early reﬂections

in parallel

037 Delay+Er. DELAY→ER.

Delay and early reﬂections

in series

038 Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel

039 Delay→Rev DELAY→REV Delay and reverb in series

040 Dist→Delay DIST→DELAY

Distortion and delay in

series

041 Multi.Filter MULTI.FILTER

3-band parallel ﬁlter (24 dB/

octave)

042 Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler

043 Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb

044 M.Band Dyna. M.BAND DYNA.

Multi-band dynamics pro-

cessor

045 M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor

046 REV-X Hall

REV-X HALL

New reverb algorithm that

delivers dense and rich

reverberation, smooth

decay, and provides a spa-

ciousness and depth that

enhances the original

sound. Choose from three

types depending on your

location and needs; REV-X

HALL, REV-X ROOM, and

REV-X PLATE.

047 REV-X Room

REV-X ROOM

048 REV-X Plate

REV-X PLATE

049 Comp276 * COMP276 * —

050 Comp276S * COMP276S * —

051 Comp260* COMP260* —

052 Comp260S * COMP260S * —

053 Equalizer601 * EQUALIZER601* —

054 OpenDeck * OPENDECK * —

No. Title Type Description

Effects Parameters

298 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Effects Parameters

❏ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB

STAGE, REVERB PLATE

One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb

simulations, all with gates.

❏ EARLY REF.

One input, two output early reflections.

❏ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early

reflections with reverse gate.

❏ MONO DELAY

One input, one output basic repeat delay.

❏ STEREO DELAY

Two input, two output basic stereo delay.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb

begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0

High-frequency reverb time

ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4

Low-frequency reverb time

ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right

reverb spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms

Delay between early reﬂec-

tions and reverb

E/R BAL. 0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections

and reverb

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all

early reﬂections)

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed

HOLD

*1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz),

0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

*2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz),

3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Gate closing speed

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection sim-

ulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay char-

acteristics (0 = dead, 10 =

live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms

Initial delay before reverb

begins

DIFF. 0–10

Reﬂection diffusion (left–

right reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0

High-frequency feedback

ratio

HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff fre-

quency

Parameter Range Description

TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay characteris-

tics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10

Reﬂection diffusion (left–right

reﬂection spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reﬂection density

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1. (

Max. value depends on tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values

for normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus val-

ues for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY

NOTE R 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 299

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ MOD. DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.

❏ DELAY LCR

One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).

❏ ECHO

Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback

loop.

❏ CHORUS

Two input, two output chorus effect.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

*1. (

Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY

MOD.NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level

LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level

LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1. (

Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY L

NOTE C 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY C

NOTE R 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY R

NOTE FB 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time

FB. G L –99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

FB. G R –99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase

feedback)

L→R FBG –99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback

gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

R→L FBG –99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback

gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY L

NOTE R 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY R

NOTE FBL 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. D L

NOTE FBR 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. D R

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters

300 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ FLANGE

Two input, two output flange effect.

❏ SYMPHONIC

Two input, two output symphonic effect.

❏ PHASER

Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.

❏ AUTOPAN

Two input, two output autopanner.

❏ TREMOLO

Two input, two output tremolo effect.

❏ HQ. PITCH

One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET 0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency

offset

PHASE

0.00–354.38

degrees

Left and right modulation phase

balance

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,

14, 16

Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift

FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift ﬁne

DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine DELAY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 301

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ DUAL PITCH

Two input, two output pitch shifter.

❏ ROTARY

One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.

❏ RING MOD.

Two input, two output ring modulator.

❏ MOD. FILTER

Two input, two output modulation filter.

❏ DISTORTION

One input, two output distortion effect.

❏ AMP SIMULATE

One input, two output guitar amp simulator.

❏ DYNA. FILTER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter.

Parameter Range Description

PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift

FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 1 –100 to +100%

Channel #1 level (plus values

for normal phase, minus values

for reverse phase)

PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan

DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time

FB. G 1 –99 to +99%

Channel #1 feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift

FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 2 –100 to +100%

Channel #2 level (plus values

for normal phase, minus values

for reverse phase)

PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan

DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time

FB. G 2 –99 to +99%

Channel #2 feedback gain (plus

values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for

reverse-phase feedback)

MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE 1

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine Channel

#1 delay

NOTE 2 1

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine Channel

#2 delay

Parameter Range Description

ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start

SPEED SLOW, FAST

Rotation speed (see SLOW and

FAST parameters)

SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level

ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes

LOW 0–100 Low-frequency ﬁlter

HIGH 0–100 High-frequency ﬁlter

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE OSC, SELF

Modulation source: oscillator or

input signal

OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz

Oscillator frequency modulation

speed

FM DEPTH 0–100%

Oscillator frequency modulation

depth

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE FM

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FM FREQ

Parameter Range Description

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees

Left-channel modulation and

right-channel modulation

phase difference

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF

Filter type: low pass, high pass,

band pass

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output level

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with

TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion,

OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

*1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-

DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion,

OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

BASS 0–100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control

TREBLE 0–100 High tone control

CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth

EQ F 100 Hz–8.0 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency

change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz),

3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Filter frequency change decay

speed

TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL 0–100 Output Level

Effects Parameters

302 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ DYNA. FLANGE

Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger.

❏ DYNA. PHASER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.

❏ REV+CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.

❏ REV→CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency

change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz),

3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE INPUT, MIDI

Control source: input signal or

MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity

DIR. UP, DOWN

Upward or downward frequency

change

DECAY

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz),

3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET 0–100

Lowest phase-shifted frequency

offset

FB.GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12,

14, 16

Number of phase shift stages

LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/CHO 0–100%

Reverb and chorus balance (0% =

all reverb, 100% = all chorus)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and chorused reverb bal-

ance (0% = all chorused reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 303

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ REV+FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in

parallel.

❏ REV→FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series.

❏ REV+SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in

parallel.

❏ REV→SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in

series.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/FLG 0–100%

Reverb and ﬂange balance (0% =

all reverb, 100% = all ﬂange)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and ﬂanged reverb bal-

ance (0% = all ﬂanged reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/SYM 0–100%

Reverb and symphonic balance

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all sym-

phonic)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and symphonic reverb bal-

ance (0% = all symphonic reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*1.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters

304 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ REV→PAN

One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in

parallel.

❏ DELAY+ER.

One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in

parallel.

❏ DELAY→ER.

One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in

series.

❏ DELAY+REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV.BAL 0–100%

Reverb and panned reverb bal-

ance (0% = all panned reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

*1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/ER 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂections bal-

ance (0% = all delay, 100% = all

early reﬂections)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Ran-

dom, Revers, Plate,

Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay characteris-

tics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and early reﬂected delay

balance (0% = all early reﬂected

delay, 100% = all delay)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Ran-

dom, Revers, Plate,

Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS 0–10

Early reﬂections decay characteris-

tics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback

ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/REV 0–100%

Delay and reverb balance (0% =

all delay, 100% = all reverb)

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB 1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 305

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ DELAY→REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.

❏ DIST→DELAY

One input, two output distortion and delay effects in

series.

❏ MULTI FILTER

Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave).

❏ FREEZE

One input, one output basic sampler.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI 0.1–1.0

Delay high-frequency feedback

ratio

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Delay and delayed reverb balance

(0% = all delayed reverb, 100% =

all delay)

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10 Spread

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

*1.

(Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine left channel DELAY L

NOTE R *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine right channel DELAY

NOTE FB *1

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FB. DLY

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion,

OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER 0–100 Master volume

TONE –10 to +10 Tone control

N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction

DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN –99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for

normal-phase feedback, minus

values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth

DLY.BAL 0–100%

Distortion and delay balance (0%

= all distortion, 100% = all

delayed distortion)

SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY.NOTE

*1. (

Maximum value depends on the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine DELAY

MOD.NOT

*2.

Used in conjunction with TEMPO

to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF

Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass,

band pass

FREQ. 1 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level

LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level

LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level

RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance

RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance

RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance

Parameter Range Description

REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT

In MANUAL mode, recording is

started by pressing the REC and

PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode,

Record-Ready mode is engaged by

pressing the REC button, and

actual recording is triggered by the

input signal.

REC DLY

–1000 to +1000

Recording delay. For plus values,

recording starts after the trigger is

received. For minus values, record-

ing starts before the trigger is

received.

TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB

Input trigger level (i.e., the signal

level required to trigger recording

or playback)

TRG MASK 0–1000 ms

Once playback has been triggered,

subsequent triggers are ignored for

the duration of the TRG MASK

time.

PLY MODE

MOMENT,

CONTI., INPUT

In MOMENT mode, the sample

plays only while the that the PLAY

button is pressed. In CONT mode,

playback continues once the PLAY

button has been pressed. The

number of times the sample plays

is set using the LOOP NUM param-

eter. In INPUT mode, playback is

triggered by the input signal.

START

*1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0–

2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.0 ms–2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz)

Playback start point in milliseconds

END 1 Playback end point in milliseconds

LOOP 1 Loop start point in milliseconds

LOOP

NUM

0–100 Number of times the sample plays

START

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Playback start point in samples

END

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Playback end point in samples

LOOP

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Loop start point in samples

PITCH

–12 to +12 semi-

tones

Playback pitch shift

FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift ﬁne

MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL

PLAY button can be triggered by

using MIDI Note on/off messages.

Effects Parameters

306 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ ST REVERB

Two input, two output stereo reverb.

❏ M. BAND DYNA.

Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with

individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.

❏ M.BAND COMP

Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individ-

ual solo and gain reduction metering for each band.

❏ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE

Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algo-

rithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth

decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that

enhances the original sound. Choose from three types

depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL,

REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE.

Other preset effects (COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260,

COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, OPENDECK) are sepa-

rately sold Add-On Effects. For details on these effects,

refer to the owner’s manual included with the Add-On

Effects package.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage,

Plate

Reverb type

INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb

spread)

DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density

E/R BAL. 0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and

reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% =

all early reﬂections)

HPF

THRU, 21.2 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE –10 to +10

For positive values, the thresh-

old of the high band is low-

ered and the threshold of the

low band is increased. For

negative values, the opposite

will occur. When set to 0, all

three bands are affected the

same.

CMP. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack

CMP. REL 1 Compressor release time

CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

CMP. BYP ON/OFF Compressor bypass

L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF

Speciﬁes the maximum output

level

EXP. THRE –54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Expander threshold

EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio

EXP. REL

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz),

3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Expander release time

EXP. BYP ON/OFF Expander bypass

LIM. THRE –12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold

LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack

LIM. REL 1 Limiter release time

LIM. BYP ON/OFF Limiter bypass

LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

L-M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M-H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF

Speciﬁes the maximum output

level

LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Low band threshold level

MID THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB

Mid band threshold level

HI. THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB

High band threshold level

RATIO 1:1 to 20:1

Compression ratio

ATTACK 0–120 ms

Compressor attack time

CMP. REL

*1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz),

3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz)

Compressor release time

KNEE 0–5

Compressor knee

BYPASS ON/OFF

Bypasses the compressor

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME

0.47–46.92 s

*1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the

ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type

and ROOM SIZE setting.

Reverb time

INI. DLY 0.0–120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz

Frequency point for LO.RATIO

setting

DIFF. 0–10

Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb

spread)

ROOM

SIZE

0–28

Size of room

DECAY 0–53 Gate closing speed

HPF

THRU, 22.0 Hz–

8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

1.00 kHz–18.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 307

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Some of the PM5D’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type

effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modula-

tion-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo.

• Parameters related to tempo synchronization

The following ﬁve parameters are related to tempo synchronization.

1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ.

SYNC: ............................ This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization.

NOTE and TEMPO:..... These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization.

DELAY and FREQ.: ...... DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the

way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is

relevant only for modulation-type effects.

• How the parameters are related

Te mpo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making

adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and

DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the

correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows.

If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set

If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.) → NOTE will be set

In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows.

NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO))

If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set

In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows.

DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)

Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note

DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO)

= (1/4) x 4 x (60/120)

= 0.5 (sec)

= 500 ms

Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms.

Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121

DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO)

= 250 x (120/121)

= 247.9 (ms)

Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms.

*a Rounded values are used for the calculation results.

• Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values

The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or

TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This lim-

itation also applies even when SYNC is OFF.

• Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter

The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters.

•It is a common value shared by all effects

•You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.)

This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is

an example.

Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60

Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were

changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way

between store and recall, the PM5D does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is

no longer the same as when that effect was stored.

* The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values.

Effects and tempo synchronization

= 1/48

= 2/1

= 1/16= 1/24 = 1/12

= 3/4= 3/16 = 1/2

= 3/32 = 1/6

= 1/4

= 1/8

= 1/1= 3/8

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

308 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 1 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 2

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

Scene

001 065

Scene

065

002 002 066 066

003 003 067 067

004 004 068 068

005 005 069 069

006 006 070 070

007 007 071 071

008 008 072 072

009 009 073 073

010 010 074 074

011 011 075 075

012 012 076 076

013 013 077 077

014 014 078 078

015 015 079 079

016 016 080 080

017 017 081 081

018 018 082 082

019 019 083 083

020 020 084 084

021 021 085 085

022 022 086 086

023 023 087 087

024 024 088 088

025 025 089 089

026 026 090 090

027 027 091 091

028 028 092 092

029 029 093 093

030 030 094 094

031 031 095 095

032 032 096 096

033 033 097 097

034 034 098 098

035 035 099 099

036 036 100 100

037 037 101 101

038 038 102 102

039 039 103 103

040 040 104 104

041 041 105 105

042 042 106 106

043 043 107 107

044 044 108 108

045 045 109 109

046 046 110 110

047 047 111 111

048 048 112 112

049 049 113 113

050 050 114 114

051 051 115 115

052 052 116 116

053 053 117 117

054 054 118 118

055 055 119 119

056 056 120 120

057 057 121 121

058 058 122 122

059 059 123 123

060 060 124 124

061 061 125 125

062 062 126 126

063 063 127 127

064 064 128 128

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

Scene

129 065

Scene

193

002 130 066 194

003 131 067 195

004 132 068 196

005 133 069 197

006 134 070 198

007 135 071 199

008 136 072 200

009 137 073 201

010 138 074 202

011 139 075 203

012 140 076 204

013 141 077 205

014 142 078 206

015 143 079 207

016 144 080 208

017 145 081 209

018 146 082 210

019 147 083 211

020 148 084 212

021 149 085 213

022 150 086 214

023 151 087 215

024 152 088 216

025 153 089 217

026 154 090 218

027 155 091 219

028 156 092 220

029 157 093 221

030 158 094 222

031 159 095 223

032 160 096 224

033 161 097 225

034 162 098 226

035 163 099 227

036 164 100 228

037 165 101 229

038 166 102 230

039 167 103 231

040 168 104 232

041 169 105 233

042 170 106 234

043 171 107 235

044 172 108 236

045 173 109 237

046 174 110 238

047 175 111 239

048 176 112 240

049 177 113 241

050 178 114 242

051 179 115 243

052 180 116 244

053 181 117 245

054 182 118 246

055 183 119 247

056 184 120 248

057 185 121 249

058 186 122 250

059 187 123 251

060 188 124 252

061 189 125 253

062 190 126 254

063 191 127 255

064 192 128 256

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 309

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 3 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 4

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

Scene

257 065

Scene

321

002 258 066 322

003 259 067 323

004 260 068 324

005 261 069 325

006 262 070 326

007 263 071 327

008 264 072 328

009 265 073 329

010 266 074 330

011 267 075 331

012 268 076 332

013 269 077 333

014 270 078 334

015 271 079 335

016 272 080 336

017 273 081 337

018 274 082 338

019 275 083 339

020 276 084 340

021 277 085 341

022 278 086 342

023 279 087 343

024 280 088 344

025 281 089 345

026 282 090 346

027 283 091 347

028 284 092 348

029 285 093 349

030 286 094 350

031 287 095 351

032 288 096 352

033 289 097 353

034 290 098 354

035 291 099 355

036 292 100 356

037 293 101 357

038 294 102 358

039 295 103 359

040 296 104 360

041 297 105 361

042 298 106 362

043 299 107 363

044 300 108 364

045 301 109 365

046 302 110 366

047 303 111 367

048 304 112 368

049 305 113 369

050 306 114 370

051 307 115 371

052 308 116 372

053 309 117 373

054 310 118 374

055 311 119 375

056 312 120 376

057 313 121 377

058 314 122 378

059 315 123 379

060 316 124 380

061 317 125 381

062 318 126 382

063 319 127 383

064 320 128 384

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

Preset#

001

Scene

385 065

Scene

449

002 386 066 450

003 387 067 451

004 388 068 452

005 389 069 453

006 390 070 454

007 391 071 455

008 392 072 456

009 393 073 457

010 394 074 458

011 395 075 459

012 396 076 460

013 397 077 461

014 398 078 462

015 399 079 463

016 400 080 464

017 401 081 465

018 402 082 466

019 403 083 467

020 404 084 468

021 405 085 469

022 406 086 470

023 407 087 471

024 408 088 472

025 409 089 473

026 410 090 474

027 411 091 475

028 412 092 476

029 413 093 477

030 414 094 478

031 415 095 479

032 416 096 480

033 417 097 481

034 418 098 482

035 419 099 483

036 420 100 484

037 421 101 485

038 422 102 486

039 423 103 487

040 424 104 488

041 425 105 489

042 426 106 490

043 427 107 491

044 428 108 492

045 429 109 493

046 430 110 494

047 431 111 495

048 432 112 496

049 433 113 497

050 434 114 498

051 435 115 499

052 436 116 500

053 437 117 000

054 438 118

No Assign

055 439 119

056 440 120

057 441 121

058 442 122

059 443 123

060 444 124

061 445 125

062 446 126

063 447 127

064 448 128

Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table

310 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 5

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 6

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 7

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 8

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 9

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 10

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 11

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 12

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 13

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 14

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 15

❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 16

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

No Assign

002

003

128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect1

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect2

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect3

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect4

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect5

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect6

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect7

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

Program Change# Scene/Effect Preset#

001

Effect8

001

002 002

003 003

128 128

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 311

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Bank/Ch# _

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

Program

Change#

Scene/

Effect

User#

001 044 087

002 045 088

003 046 089

004 047 090

005 048 091

006 049 092

007 050 093

008 051 094

009 052 095

010 053 096

011 054 097

012 055 098

013 056 099

014 057 100

015 058 101

016 059 102

017 060 103

018 061 104

019 062 105

020 063 106

021 064 107

022 065 108

023 066 109

024 067 110

025 068 111

026 069 112

027 070 113

028 071 114

029 072 115

030 073 116

031 074 117

032 075 118

033 076 119

034 077 120

035 078 121

036 079 122

037 080 123

038 081 124

039 082 125

040 083 126

041 084 127

042 085 128

043 086

Parameters that can be assigned to control changes

312 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Parameters that can be assigned to control changes

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

NO ASSIGN — —

FADER H

INPUT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

FADER L

INPUT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

CH ON

INPUT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

PHASE INPUT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

INSERT

INPUT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

DIRECT OUT ON

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

PAN/BALANCE INPUT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

TO STEREO ON

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

LCR

ON CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

MIX 1–MIX24

CSR

MIX SEND

PRE POINT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

MIX 1 ON–

MIX24 ON

MIX 1 PRE/POST–

MIX24 PRE/POST

MIX 1 LEVEL H–

MIX24 LEVEL H

MIX 1 LEVEL L–

MIX24 LEVEL L

MIX 1/ 2 PAN–

MIX23/24 PAN

FOLLOW PAN VARI

FOLLOW PAN FIXED

POST POINT MIX 1–MIX24

MIX TO STEREO

POINT

MIX 1–MIX24ON

PAN

MIX TO MATRIX

MATRIX 1 POINT–

MATRIX 8 POINT

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1 ON–

MATRIX 8 ON

MATRIX 1 LEVEL H–

MATRIX 8 LEVEL H

MATRIX 1 LEVEL L–

MATRIX 8 LEVEL L

MATRIX 1/2 PAN–

MATRIX 7/8 PAN

ST TO MATRIX

MATRIX 1 POINT–

MATRIX 8 POINT

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

MATRIX 1 ON–

MATRIX 8 ON

MATRIX 1 LEVEL H–

MATRIX 8 LEVEL H

MATRIX 1 LEVEL L–

MATRIX 8 LEVEL L

MATRIX 1/2 PAN–

MATRIX 7/8 PAN

IN DELAY

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

TIME HIGH

TIME MID

TIME LOW

OUT DELAY

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

TIME HIGH

TIME MID

TIME LOW

INPUT EQ

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

LOW Q

LOW FREQ

LOW GAIN

LOW MID Q

LOW MID FREQ

LOW MID GAIN

HIGH MID Q

HIGH MID FREQ

HIGH MID GAIN

HIGH Q

HIGH FREQ

HIGH GAIN

LPF ON

LOW TYPE

HIGH TYPE

INPUT ATT INPUT

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

INPUT HPF

ON CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

FREQ

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 313

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

OUTPUT EQ

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

L LOW BYPASS

L LOW Q

L LOW FREQ

L LOW GAIN

L LOW MID BYPASS

L LOW MID Q

L LOW MID FREQ

L LOW MID GAIN

L HIGH MID BYPASS

L HIGH MID Q

L HIGH MID FREQ

L HIGH MID GAIN

L HIGH BYPASS

L HIGH Q

L HIGH FREQ

L HIGH GAIN

U LOW BYPASS

MIX 1–MIX24

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

U LOW Q

U LOW FREQ

U LOW GAIN

U LOW MID BYPASS

U LOW MID Q

U LOW MID FREQ

U LOW MID GAIN

U HIGH MID BYPASS

U HIGH MID Q

U HIGH MID FREQ

U HIGH MID GAIN

U HIGH BYPASS

U HIGH Q

U HIGH FREQ

U HIGH GAIN

L LOW TYPE MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

L HIGH TYPE

U LOW TYPE

MIX 1–MIX24

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

U HIGH TYPE

L LOW HPF ON MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

L HIGH HPF ON

U LOW HPF ON

MIX 1–MIX24

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

U HIGH HPF ON

INPUT GATE

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RANGE

HOLD H

HOLD L

DECAY H

DECAY L

INPUT COMP

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RELEASE H

RELEASE L

RATIO

GAIN

KNEE/WIDTH

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

OUTPUT COMP

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

ATTACK

THRESHOLD

RELEASE H

RELEASE L

RATIO

GAIN

KNEE/WIDTH

SURROUND

LFE H

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

LFE L

DIVERGENCE F

DIVERGENCE R

LEFT-RIGHT PAN CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

ALT SEL CH

FRONT-REAR PAN

EFFECT

BYPASS

EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8

MIX BALANCE

PARAM 1 H–

PARAM32 L

GEQ

GEQ 1–GEQ12

GAIN 1–GAIN31

DCA

DCA 1–DCA 8FADER H

FADER L

MUTE MASTER ON MASTER 1–MASTER 8

RECALL SAFE ON

CH 1–CH48

STIN1L–STIN4R

FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R

MIX 1–MIX24

MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8

STEREO AL–STEREO BR

EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8

GEQ 1–GEQ12

DCA 1–DCA 8

MUTE MASTER

CUE DELAY

TIME HIGH

TIME MID

TIME LOW

MONITOR

DELAY

TIME HIGH

TIME MID

TIME LOW

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

314 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Control change parameter assignments

❏ PRESET CHANNEL1

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

FADER H

INPUT

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

OUTPUT

MIX 1

26 MIX 2

27 MIX 3

28 MIX 4

29 NO ASSIGN —

FADER H OUTPUT

STEREO AL

31 STEREO BL

FADER L

INPUT

CH 1

34 CH 2

35 CH 3

36 CH 4

37 CH 5

38 CH 6

39 CH 7

40 CH 8

41 CH 9

42 CH10

43 CH11

44 CH12

45 CH13

46 CH14

47 CH15

48 CH16

49 CH17

50 CH18

51 CH19

52 CH20

53 CH21

54 CH22

55 CH23

56 CH24

OUTPUT

MIX 1

58 MIX 2

59 MIX 3

60 MIX 4

61 NO ASSIGN —

FADER L OUTPUT

STEREO AL

63 STEREO BL

CH ON INPUT

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN —

PAN/BALANCE INPUT

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 315

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL2

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

FADER H

INPUT

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

OUTPUT

MIX 5

26 MIX 6

27 MIX 7

28 MIX 8

29 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

STEREO AL

31 STEREO BL

FADER L

INPUT

CH25

34 CH26

35 CH27

36 CH28

37 CH29

38 CH30

39 CH31

40 CH32

41 CH33

42 CH34

43 CH35

44 CH36

45 CH37

46 CH38

47 CH39

48 CH40

49 CH41

50 CH42

51 CH43

52 CH44

53 CH45

54 CH46

55 CH47

56 CH48

OUTPUT

MIX 5

58 MIX 6

59 MIX 7

60 MIX 8

61 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

STEREO AL

63 STEREO BL

CH ON INPUT

CH25

65 CH26

66 CH27

67 CH28

68 CH29

69 CH30

70 CH31

71 CH32

72 CH33

73 CH34

74 CH35

75 CH36

76 CH37

77 CH38

78 CH39

79 CH40

80 CH41

81 CH42

82 CH43

83 CH44

84 CH45

85 CH46

86 CH47

87 CH48

88 NO ASSIGN —

PAN/BALANCE INPUT

CH25

90 CH26

91 CH27

92 CH28

93 CH29

94 CH30

95 CH31

102 CH32

103 CH33

104 CH34

105 CH35

106 CH36

107 CH37

108 CH38

109 CH39

110 CH40

111 CH41

112 CH42

113 CH43

114 CH44

115 CH45

116 CH46

117 CH47

118 CH48

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

316 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ PRESET CHANNEL3

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ LOW GAIN

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

FADER H OUTPUT

MIX 9

26 MIX10

27 MIX11

28 MIX12

29 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX 1

31 MIX 3

NO ASSIGN —

FADER L OUTPUT

MIX 9

58 MIX10

59 MIX11

60 MIX12

61 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX 5

63 MIX 7

INPUT EQ LOW FREQ

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ LOW Q

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 317

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL4

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ LOW GAIN

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

FADER H OUTPUT

MIX13

26 MIX14

27 MIX15

28 MIX16

29 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX 9

31 MIX11

NO ASSIGN —

FADER L OUTPUT

MIX13

58 MIX14

59 MIX15

60 MIX16

61 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX13

63 MIX15

INPUT EQ LOW FREQ

CH25

65 CH26

66 CH27

67 CH28

68 CH29

69 CH30

70 CH31

71 CH32

72 CH33

73 CH34

74 CH35

75 CH36

76 CH37

77 CH38

78 CH39

79 CH40

80 CH41

81 CH42

82 CH43

83 CH44

84 CH45

85 CH46

86 CH47

87 CH48

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ LOW Q

CH25

90 CH26

91 CH27

92 CH28

93 CH29

94 CH30

95 CH31

102 CH32

103 CH33

104 CH34

105 CH35

106 CH36

107 CH37

108 CH38

109 CH39

110 CH40

111 CH41

112 CH42

113 CH43

114 CH44

115 CH45

116 CH46

117 CH47

118 CH48

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

318 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ PRESET CHANNEL5

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ

LOW MID

GAIN

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX 1

26 MIX 2

27 MIX 3

28 MIX 4

29 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX17

31 MIX18

NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX 5

58 MIX 6

59 MIX 7

60 MIX 8

61 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX19

63 MIX20

INPUT EQ LOW MID FREQ

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ LOW MID Q

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 319

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL6

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ

LOW MID

GAIN

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX 9

26 MIX10

27 MIX11

28 MIX12

29 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX21

31 MIX22

NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX13

58 MIX14

59 MIX15

60 MIX16

61 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MIX23

63 MIX24

INPUT EQ LOW MID FREQ

CH25

65 CH26

66 CH27

67 CH28

68 CH29

69 CH30

70 CH31

71 CH32

72 CH33

73 CH34

74 CH35

75 CH36

76 CH37

77 CH38

78 CH39

79 CH40

80 CH41

81 CH42

82 CH43

83 CH44

84 CH45

85 CH46

86 CH47

87 CH48

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ LOW MID Q

CH25

90 CH26

91 CH27

92 CH28

93 CH29

94 CH30

95 CH31

102 CH32

103 CH33

104 CH34

105 CH35

106 CH36

107 CH37

108 CH38

109 CH39

110 CH40

111 CH41

112 CH42

113 CH43

114 CH44

115 CH45

116 CH46

117 CH47

118 CH48

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

320 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ PRESET CHANNEL7

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ

HIGH MID

GAIN

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

FADER H OUTPUT

MIX17

26 MIX18

27 MIX19

28 MIX20

29 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX17

31 MIX19

NO ASSIGN —

FADER L OUTPUT

MIX17

58 MIX18

59 MIX19

60 MIX20

61 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MIX21

63 MIX23

INPUT EQ

HIGH MID

FREQ

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ HIGH MID Q

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 321

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL8

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ

HIGH MID

GAIN

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

FADER H OUTPUT

MIX21

26 MIX22

27 MIX23

28 MIX24

29 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MATRIX 1

31 MATRIX 3

NO ASSIGN —

FADER L OUTPUT

MIX21

58 MIX22

59 MIX23

60 MIX24

61 NO ASSIGN —

BALANCE OUTPUT

MATRIX 5

63 MATRIX 7

INPUT EQ

HIGH MID

FREQ

CH25

65 CH26

66 CH27

67 CH28

68 CH29

69 CH30

70 CH31

71 CH32

72 CH33

73 CH34

74 CH35

75 CH36

76 CH37

77 CH38

78 CH39

79 CH40

80 CH41

81 CH42

82 CH43

83 CH44

84 CH45

85 CH46

86 CH47

87 CH48

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ HIGH MID Q

CH25

90 CH26

91 CH27

92 CH28

93 CH29

94 CH30

95 CH31

102 CH32

103 CH33

104 CH34

105 CH35

106 CH36

107 CH37

108 CH38

109 CH39

110 CH40

111 CH41

112 CH42

113 CH43

114 CH44

115 CH45

116 CH46

117 CH47

118 CH48

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

322 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ PRESET CHANNEL9

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ HIGH GAIN

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

FADER H OUTPUT

MATRIX 1

26 MATRIX 2

27 MATRIX 3

28 MATRIX 4

29 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MATRIX 1

31 MATRIX 2

NO ASSIGN —

FADER L OUTPUT

MATRIX 1

58 MATRIX 2

59 MATRIX 3

60 MATRIX 4

61 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MATRIX 3

63 MATRIX 4

INPUT EQ HIGH FREQ

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ HIGH Q

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 323

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL10

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT EQ HIGH GAIN

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

FADER H OUTPUT

MATRIX 5

26 MATRIX 6

27 MATRIX 7

28 MATRIX 8

29 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MATRIX 5

31 MATRIX 6

NO ASSIGN —

FADER L OUTPUT

MATRIX 5

58 MATRIX 6

59 MATRIX 7

60 MATRIX 8

61 NO ASSIGN —

CH ON OUTPUT

MATRIX 7

63 MATRIX 8

INPUT EQ HIGH FREQ

CH25

65 CH26

66 CH27

67 CH28

68 CH29

69 CH30

70 CH31

71 CH32

72 CH33

73 CH34

74 CH35

75 CH36

76 CH37

77 CH38

78 CH39

79 CH40

80 CH41

81 CH42

82 CH43

83 CH44

84 CH45

85 CH46

86 CH47

87 CH48

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ HIGH Q

CH25

90 CH26

91 CH27

92 CH28

93 CH29

94 CH30

95 CH31

102 CH32

103 CH33

104 CH34

105 CH35

106 CH36

107 CH37

108 CH38

109 CH39

110 CH40

111 CH41

112 CH42

113 CH43

114 CH44

115 CH45

116 CH46

117 CH47

118 CH48

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

324 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ PRESET CHANNEL11

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT ATT INPUT

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH 1

26 CH 2

27 CH 3

28 CH 4

29 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH 5

31 CH 6

NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH 7

58 CH 8

59 CH 9

60 CH10

61 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH11

63 CH12

INPUT HPF ON

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ LPF ON

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 325

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL12

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

INPUT ATT INPUT

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH13

26 CH14

27 CH15

28 CH16

29 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH17

31 CH18

NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH19

58 CH20

59 CH21

60 CH22

61 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH23

63 CH24

INPUT HPF ON

CH25

65 CH26

66 CH27

67 CH28

68 CH29

69 CH30

70 CH31

71 CH32

72 CH33

73 CH34

74 CH35

75 CH36

76 CH37

77 CH38

78 CH39

79 CH40

80 CH41

81 CH42

82 CH43

83 CH44

84 CH45

85 CH46

86 CH47

87 CH48

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ LPF ON

CH25

90 CH26

91 CH27

92 CH28

93 CH29

94 CH30

95 CH31

102 CH32

103 CH33

104 CH34

105 CH35

106 CH36

107 CH37

108 CH38

109 CH39

110 CH40

111 CH41

112 CH42

113 CH43

114 CH44

115 CH45

116 CH46

117 CH47

118 CH48

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

326 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ PRESET CHANNEL13

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

SURROUND LFE H

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH25

26 CH26

27 CH27

28 CH28

29 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH29

31 CH30

SURROUND LFE L

CH 1

34 CH 2

35 CH 3

36 CH 4

37 CH 5

38 CH 6

39 CH 7

40 CH 8

41 CH 9

42 CH10

43 CH11

44 CH12

45 CH13

46 CH14

47 CH15

48 CH16

49 CH17

50 CH18

51 CH19

52 CH20

53 CH21

54 CH22

55 CH23

56 CH24

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH31

58 CH32

59 CH33

60 CH34

61 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH35

63 CH36

SURROUND DIVERGENCE F

CH 1

65 CH 2

66 CH 3

67 CH 4

68 CH 5

69 CH 6

70 CH 7

71 CH 8

72 CH 9

73 CH10

74 CH11

75 CH12

76 CH13

77 CH14

78 CH15

79 CH16

80 CH17

81 CH18

82 CH19

83 CH20

84 CH21

85 CH22

86 CH23

87 CH24

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ ON

CH 1

90 CH 2

91 CH 3

92 CH 4

93 CH 5

94 CH 6

95 CH 7

102 CH 8

103 CH 9

104 CH10

105 CH11

106 CH12

107 CH13

108 CH14

109 CH15

110 CH16

111 CH17

112 CH18

113 CH19

114 CH20

115 CH21

116 CH22

117 CH23

118 CH24

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 327

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL14

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

SURROUND LFE H

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH37

26 CH38

27 CH39

28 CH40

29 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH41

31 CH42

SURROUND LFE L

CH25

34 CH26

35 CH27

36 CH28

37 CH29

38 CH30

39 CH31

40 CH32

41 CH33

42 CH34

43 CH35

44 CH36

45 CH37

46 CH38

47 CH39

48 CH40

49 CH41

50 CH42

51 CH43

52 CH44

53 CH45

54 CH46

55 CH47

56 CH48

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH43

58 CH44

59 CH45

60 CH46

61 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT HPF FREQ

CH47

63 CH48

SURROUND DIVERGENCE F

CH25

65 CH26

66 CH27

67 CH28

68 CH29

69 CH30

70 CH31

71 CH32

72 CH33

73 CH34

74 CH35

75 CH36

76 CH37

77 CH38

78 CH39

79 CH40

80 CH41

81 CH42

82 CH43

83 CH44

84 CH45

85 CH46

86 CH47

87 CH48

88 NO ASSIGN —

INPUT EQ ON

CH25

90 CH26

91 CH27

92 CH28

93 CH29

94 CH30

95 CH31

102 CH32

103 CH33

104 CH34

105 CH35

106 CH36

107 CH37

108 CH38

109 CH39

110 CH40

111 CH41

112 CH42

113 CH43

114 CH44

115 CH45

116 CH46

117 CH47

118 CH48

119 NO ASSIGN —

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

328 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ PRESET CHANNEL15

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

SURROUND

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN

CH 1

2 CH 2

3 CH 3

4 CH 4

5 CH 5

6 CH 6

7 CH 7

8 CH 8

9 CH 9

10 CH10

11 CH11

12 CH12

13 CH13

14 CH14

15 CH15

16 CH16

17 CH17

18 CH18

19 CH19

20 CH20

21 CH21

22 CH22

23 CH23

24 CH24

DCA FADER H

DCA 1

26 DCA 2

27 DCA 3

28 DCA 4

29 NO ASSIGN —

MUTE MASTER ON

MASTER 1

31 MASTER 2

SURROUND

FRONT-REAR

PAN

CH 1

34 CH 2

35 CH 3

36 CH 4

37 CH 5

38 CH 6

39 CH 7

40 CH 8

41 CH 9

42 CH10

43 CH11

44 CH12

45 CH13

46 CH14

47 CH15

48 CH16

49 CH17

50 CH18

51 CH19

52 CH20

53 CH21

54 CH22

55 CH23

56 CH24

DCA FADER L

DCA 1

58 DCA 2

59 DCA 3

60 DCA 4

61 NO ASSIGN —

MUTE MASTER ON

MASTER 3

63 MASTER 4

NO ASSIGN —

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 329

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ PRESET CHANNEL16

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

SURROUND

LEFT-RIGHT

PAN

CH25

2 CH26

3 CH27

4 CH28

5 CH29

6 CH30

7 CH31

8 CH32

9 CH33

10 CH34

11 CH35

12 CH36

13 CH37

14 CH38

15 CH39

16 CH40

17 CH41

18 CH42

19 CH43

20 CH44

21 CH45

22 CH46

23 CH47

24 CH48

DCA FADER H

DCA5

26 DCA6

27 DCA7

28 DCA8

29 NO ASSIGN —

MUTE MASTER ON

MASTER5

31 MASTER6

SURROUND

FRONT-REAR

PAN

CH25

34 CH26

35 CH27

36 CH28

37 CH29

38 CH30

39 CH31

40 CH32

41 CH33

42 CH34

43 CH35

44 CH36

45 CH37

46 CH38

47 CH39

48 CH40

49 CH41

50 CH42

51 CH43

52 CH44

53 CH45

54 CH46

55 CH47

56 CH48

DCA FADER L

DCA 5

58 DCA 6

59 DCA 7

60 DCA 8

61 NO ASSIGN —

MUTE MASTER ON

MASTER 7

63 MASTER 8

NO ASSIGN —

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

Control change parameter assignments

330 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ CHANNEL _

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

Control

Change#

MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 331

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

NRPN parameter assignments

PARAMETER

FROM

(HEX)

FADER

CHANNEL 0000 003F

MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR 0060 007D

CH to Mix LEVEL

MIX9 SEND 007E 00BD

MIX10 SEND 00DE 011D

MIX11 SEND 013E 017D

MIX12 SEND 019E 01DD

MIX13 SEND 01FE 023D

MIX14 SEND 025E 029D

MIX15 SEND 02BE 02FD

MIX16 SEND 031E 035D

MIX17 SEND 037E 03BD

MIX18 SEND 03DE 041D

MIX19 SEND 043E 047D

MIX20 SEND 049E 04DD

MIX1-20, MATRIX1-

8, ST A LR to Matrix

LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 04FE 0513

MATRIX2 SEND 0514 0529

MATRIX3 SEND 052A 053F

MATRIX4 SEND 0540 0555

MATRIX5 SEND 0556 056B

MATRIX6 SEND 056C 0581

MATRIX7 SEND 0582 0597

MATRIX8 SEND 0598 05AD

MIX1-8 to ST LEVEL MIX TO ST 05AE 05B5

CHANNEL 05B6 05F5

MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR 0616 0633

CH to Mix ON

MIX9 SEND 0634 0673

MIX10 SEND 0694 06D3

MIX11 SEND 06F4 0733

MIX12 SEND 0754 0793

MIX13 SEND 07B4 07F3

MIX14 SEND 0814 0853

MIX15 SEND 0874 08B3

MIX16 SEND 08D4 0913

MIX17 SEND 0934 0973

MIX18 SEND 0994 09D3

MIX19 SEND 09F4 0A33

MIX20 SEND 0A54 0A93

MIX1-20, MATRIX1-

8, ST A LR to Matrix

LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 0AB4 0AC9

MATRIX2 SEND 0ACA 0AC9

MATRIX3 SEND 0AE0 0ADF

MATRIX4 SEND 0AF6 0AF5

MATRIX5 SEND 0B0C 0B0B

MATRIX6 SEND 0B22 0B21

MATRIX7 SEND 0B38 0B37

MATRIX8 SEND 0B4E 0B4D

MIX1-8 to ST ON MIX TO ST 0B64 0B6B

PHASE CHANNEL 0B6C 0BAB

INSERT ON

CHANNEL 0BCC 0C03

MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR 0C2C 0C49

CH to Mix PRE/

POST

MIX9 SEND 0C4A 0C89

MIX10 SEND 0CAA 0CE9

MIX11 SEND 0D0A 0D49

MIX12 SEND 0D6A 0DA9

MIX13 SEND 0DCA 0E09

MIX14 SEND 0E2A 0E69

MIX15 SEND 0E8A 0EC9

MIX16 SEND 0EEA 0F29

MIX17 SEND 0F4A 0F89

MIX18 SEND 0FAA 0FE9

MIX19 SEND 100A 1049

MIX20 SEND 106A 10A9

INPUT DELAY

ON 10CA 1101

TIME HIGH 112A 1161

TIME LOW 118A 11C1

MIX1-20,MATRIX1-

8,ST A LR OUTPUT

DELAY

ON 12AA 12C7

TIME HIGH 12C8 12E5

TIME LOW 12E6 1303

EQ CH & MIX1-20,

MATRIX1-8, ST A LR

OUTPUT(LOWER)

ON 1304 1381

Q LOW 1382 13FF

F LOW 1400 147D

G LOW 147E 14FB

Q LO-MID 14FC 1579

F LO-MID 157A 15F7

G LO-MID 15F8 1675

Q HI-MID 1676 16F3

F HI-MID 16F4 1771

G HI-MID 1772 17EF

Q HIGH 17F0 186D

F HIGH 186E 18EB

G HIGH 18EC 1969

ATT 196A 19A9

HPF ON 19E8 1A65

LPF ON 1A66 1AE3

GATE

ON 1AE4 1B1B

ATTACK 1B44 1B7B

THRESH 1BA4 1BDB

RANGE 1C04 1C3B

HOLD 1C64 1C9B

DECAY 1CC4 1CFB

COMP CH & MIX1-

20, MATRIX1-8, ST

A LR OUTPUT

ON 1D24 1DA1

ATTACK 1DA2 1E1F

THRESH 1E20 1E9D

RELEASE 1E9E 1F1B

RATIO 1F1C 1F99

GAIN 1F9A 2017

KNEE 2018 2095

PAN CHANNEL 2096 20D5

CH to MIX PAN

MIX9-10 20F6 2135

MIX11-12 2156 2195

MIX13-14 21B6 21F5

MIX15-16 2216 2255

MIX17-18 2276 22B5

MIX19-20 22D6 2315

MIX1-20, ST A LR to

Matrix PAN

MATRIX1,2 2336 234B

MATRIX3,4 234C 2361

MATRIX5,6 2362 2377

MATRIX7,8 2378 238D

MIX1-8 to ST PAN MIX TO ST 238E 2395

BALANCE MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR 2396 23B3

SURROUND

LFE 23B4 23F3

DIV (F) 2414 2453

LR 2474 24B3

FR 24D4 2513

PARAMETER

FROM

(HEX)

NRPN parameter assignments

332 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

EFFECT 1-8

BYPASS 26B4 26BB

MIX 26BC 26C3

PARAM1 26C4 26CB

PARAM2 26CC 26D3

PARAM3 26D4 26DB

PARAM4 26DC 26E3

PARAM5 26E4 26EB

PARAM6 26EC 26F3

PARAM7 26F4 26FB

PARAM8 26FC 2703

PARAM9 2704 270B

PARAM10 270C 2713

PARAM11 2714 271B

PARAM12 271C 2723

PARAM13 2724 272B

PARAM14 272C 2733

PARAM15 2734 273B

PARAM16 273C 2743

PARAM17 2744 274B

PARAM18 274C 2753

PARAM19 2754 275B

PARAM20 275C 2763

PARAM21 2764 276B

PARAM22 276C 2773

PARAM23 2774 277B

PARAM24 277C 2783

PARAM25 2784 278B

PARAM26 278C 2793

PARAM27 2794 279B

PARAM28 279C 27A3

PARAM29 27A4 27AB

PARAM30 27AC 27B3

PARAM31 27B4 27BB

PARAM32 27BC 27C3

GEQ 1-6

ON 27C4 27C9

GAIN1 27CA 27CF

GAIN2 27D0 27D5

GAIN3 27D6 27DB

GAIN4 27DC 27E1

GAIN5 27E2 27E7

GAIN6 27E8 27ED

GAIN7 27EE 27F3

GAIN8 27F4 27F9

GAIN9 27FA 27FF

GAIN10 2800 2805

GAIN11 2806 280B

GAIN12 280C 2811

GAIN13 2812 2817

GAIN14 2818 281D

GAIN15 281E 2823

GAIN16 2824 2829

GAIN17 282A 282F

GAIN18 2830 2835

GAIN19 2836 283B

GAIN20 283C 2841

GAIN21 2842 2847

GAIN22 2848 284D

GAIN23 284E 2853

GAIN24 2854 2859

GAIN25 285A 285F

GAIN26 2860 2865

GAIN27 2866 286B

GAIN28 286C 2871

GAIN29 2872 2877

GAIN30 2878 287D

GAIN31 287E 2883

SURROUND DIV R 2884 28C3

FADER MIX21-24,ST B LR 28E4 28E9

PARAMETER

FROM

(HEX)

CH to Mix LEVEL

MIX1 SEND 28EA 2929

MIX2 SEND 292A 2969

MIX3 SEND 296A 29A9

MIX4 SEND 29AA 29E9

MIX5 SEND 29EA 2A29

MIX6 SEND 2A2A 2A69

MIX7 SEND 2A6A 2AA9

MIX8 SEND 2AAA 2AE9

MIX21 SEND 2AEA 2B29

MIX22 SEND 2B2A 2B69

MIX23 SEND 2B6A 2BA9

MIX24 SEND 2BAA 2BE9

MIX21-24, ST B LR

to Matrix LEVEL

MATRIX1 SEND 2BEA 2BEF

MATRIX2 SEND 2BF0 2BF5

MATRIX3 SEND 2BF6 2BFB

MATRIX4 SEND 2BFC 2C01

MATRIX5 SEND 2C02 2C07

MATRIX6 SEND 2C08 2C0D

MATRIX7 SEND 2C0E 2C13

MATRIX8 SEND 2C14 2C19

MIX21-24 to ST

LEVEL

MIX TO ST 2C1A 2C29

ON MIX21-24,ST B LR 2C2A 2C2F

CH to Mix ON

MIX1 SEND 2C30 2C6F

MIX2 SEND 2C70 2CAF

MIX3 SEND 2CB0 2CEF

MIX4 SEND 2CF0 2D2F

MIX5 SEND 2D30 2D6F

MIX6 SEND 2D70 2DAF

MIX7 SEND 2DB0 2DEF

MIX8 SEND 2DF0 2E2F

MIX21 SEND 2E30 2E6F

MIX22 SEND 2E70 2EAF

MIX23 SEND 2EB0 2EEF

MIX24 SEND 2EF0 2F2F

MATRIX SEND 2F30 2F35

MIX TO ST 2F36 2F45

INSERT ON MIX21-24,ST B LR 2F46 2F4B

CH to Mix PRE/

POST

MIX1 SEND 2F4C 2F8B

MIX2 SEND 2F8C 2FCB

MIX3 SEND 2FCC 300B

MIX4 SEND 300C 304B

MIX5 SEND 304C 308B

MIX6 SEND 308C 30CB

MIX7 SEND 30CC 310B

MIX8 SEND 310C 314B

MIX21 SEND 314C 318B

MIX22 SEND 318C 31CB

MIX23 SEND 31CC 320B

MIX24 SEND 320C 324B

MIX1-20, ST B LR

OUTPUT DELAY

ON 324C 3251

TIME HIGH 3252 3257

TIME LOW 3258 325D

EQ MIX21-24, ST A

LR OUT-

PUT(LOWER)

ON 325E 3263

Q LOW 3264 3269

F LOW 326A 326F

G LOW 3270 3275

Q LO-MID 3276 327B

F LO-MID 327C 3281

G LO-MID 3282 3287

Q HI-MID 3288 328D

F HI-MID 328E 3293

G HI-MID 3294 3299

Q HIGH 329A 329F

F HIGH 32A0 32A5

G HIGH 32A6 32AB

HPF ON 32AC 32B1

LPF ON 32B2 32B7

PARAMETER

FROM

(HEX)

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 333

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

EQ OUTPUT

(HIGHER)

E Q 32B8 32D3

E F 32D4 32EF

E G 32F0 330B

F Q 330C 3327

F F 3328 3343

F G 3344 335F

G Q 3360 337B

G F 337C 3397

G G 3398 33B3

H Q 33B4 33CF

H F 33D0 33EB

H G 33EC 3407

E HPF ON/OFF 3408 3423

H LPF ON/OFF 3424 343F

INPUT EQ LOW TYPE(P/S/F) 3440 347F

INPUT EQ HIGH TYPE(P/S/F) 3480 34BF

OUTPUT EQ

A TYPE(P/S/F) 34C0 34E3

D TYPE(P/S/F) 34E4 3507

E TYPE(P/S/F) 3508 3523

H TYPE(P/S/F) 3524 353F

OUTPUT EQ

A BYPASS 3540 3563

B BYPASS 3564 3587

C BYPASS 3588 35AB

D BYPASS 35AC 35CF

E BYPASS 35D0 35EB

F BYPASS 35EC 3607

G BYPASS 3608 3623

H BYPASS 3624 363F

IN HPF F 3640 367F

COMP MIX21-24,

ST A LR OUTPUT

ON 3680 3685

ATTACK 3686 368B

THRESH 368C 3691

RELEASE 3692 3697

RATIO 3698 369D

GAIN 369E 36A3

KNEE 36A4 36A9

PAN MIX1-2 36AA 36E9

CH to MIX PAN

MIX3-4 36EA 3729

MIX5-6 372A 3769

MIX7-8 376A 37A9

MIX21-22 37AA 37E9

MIX23-24 37EA 3829

MIX21-24, ST B LR

to Matrix PAN

MATRIX1,2 382A 382F

MATRIX3,4 3830 3835

MATRIX5,6 3836 383B

MATRIX7,8 383C 3841

MIX9-24 to ST PAN MIX TO ST 3842 3851

PARAMETER

FROM

(HEX)

GEQ7-12

ON 3852 3857

GAIN1 3858 385D

GAIN2 385E 3863

GAIN3 3864 3869

GAIN4 386A 386F

GAIN5 3870 3875

GAIN6 3876 387B

GAIN7 387C 3881

GAIN8 3882 3887

GAIN9 3888 388D

GAIN10 388E 3893

GAIN11 3894 3899

GAIN12 389A 389F

GAIN13 38A0 38A5

GAIN14 38A6 38AB

GAIN15 38AC 38B1

GAIN16 38B2 38B7

GAIN17 38B8 38BD

GAIN18 38BE 38C3

GAIN19 38C4 38C9

GAIN20 38CA 38CF

GAIN21 38D0 38D5

GAIN22 38D6 38DB

GAIN23 38DC 38E1

GAIN24 38E2 38E7

GAIN25 38E8 38ED

GAIN26 38EE 38F3

GAIN27 38F4 38F9

GAIN28 38FA 38FF

GAIN29 3900 3905

GAIN30 3906 390B

GAIN31 390C 3911

LCR IN, MIX

ON/OFF 3912 3969

CSR 396A 39C1

DIRECT OUT ON/OFF 39C2 39F9

CH TO STEREO ON/OFF 3A02 3A41

DCA

ON/OFF 3A42 3A49

LEVEL 3A4E 3A55

MUTE MASTER ON/OFF 3A5A 3A61

RECALL SAFE ON/OFF 3A66 3AE6

GAIN1 3B06 3B14

GAIN2 3B16 3B24

GAIN3 3B26 3B34

GAIN4 3B36 3B44

GAIN5 3B46 3B54

GAIN6 3B56 3B64

GAIN7 3B66 3B74

GAIN8 3B76 3B84

+48v 1 3B86 3B94

+48v 2 3B96 3BA4

+48v 3 3BA6 3BB4

+48v 4 3BB6 3BC4

+48v 5 3BC6 3BD4

+48v 6 3BD6 3BE4

+48v 7 3BE6 3BF4

+48v 8 3BF6 3C04

HPF1 3C06 3C14

HPF2 3C16 3C24

HPF3 3C26 3C34

HPF4 3C36 3C44

HPF5 3C46 3C54

HPF6 3C56 3C64

HPF7 3C66 3C74

HPF8 3C76 3C84

*1. For EQ or COMP parameters that include INPUT CH and OUTPUT,

the OUTPUT is assigned starting at 96 (60h) after the ﬁrst number.

Thus, the numbers from immediately after INPUT CH until immedi-

ately before OUTPUT are unassigned.

PARAMETER

FROM

(HEX)

Channel Library List

334 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Channel Library List

This table lists the parameters that are saved in the channel library for INPUT/ST IN channels, MIX channels, MATRIX chan-

nels, and STEREO A/B channels.

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX STEREO A/B

LCR On/Off

LCR Center-Side Ratio

Fade Time On/Off

Fade Time Start Offset

Fade Time Fading Time

Insert In On/Off

Insert Point

Direct Out On/Off

Direct Out Point

Phase

On/Off

To Stereo Pan

Master Balance

Level Master Level

Attenuator

GATE On/Off

GATE Key In Filter

GATE Filter Type

GATE Filter Freq.

GATE Filter Q

GATE Type

GATE Attack

GATE Range

GATE Hold

GATE Decay

GATE Threshold

COMP LINK 1-8 COMP LINK A-H

COMP On/Off

COMP Key In Type

COMP Attack

COMP Release

COMP Ratio

COMP OutGain

COMP Knee/Width

COMP Threshold

EQ LINK 1-8 EQ LINK A-F EQ LINK G,H EQ LINK A-F

HPF On/Off

EQ HPF On/

Off x2

EQ HPF On/

Off

EQ HPF On/

Off x2

HPF Freq

EQ Type 1,2

EQ On/Off

EQ Filter Type x2

EQ Filter Type

EQ LPF On/Off

EQ Q x4 EQ Q x8 EQ Q x4 EQ Q x8

EQ Freq x4 EQ Freq x8 EQ Freq x4 EQ Freq x8

EQ Gain x4 EQ Gain x8 EQ Gain x4 EQ Gain x8

EQ Bypass x8 EQ Bypass x4 EQ Bypass x8

Delay On/Off

Delay Time

Surround LFE

Surround Div.

Surround Div.Rear

Surround LR Pan

Surround FR Pan

Surround Div.Link

Mute Group 1-8 On/Off

DCA Group 1-8

On/Off

DCA Group

7,8 On/Off

DCA Group

7,8 On/Off

DCA Group

7,8 On/Off

To Stereo On/Off

To Stereo

Point

Mix Send Pre

Point

Mix Send Post

Point

Mix Send Follow

Pan Vari

Mix Send Follow

Pan Fixed

Mix Send 1-24

On/Off

Mix Send 1-24

Pre/Post

Mix Send 1-24

Level

Mix Send 1-24

Pan

To Matrix On/

Off

To Matrix On/

Off

To Matrix

Point

To Matrix

Point

To Matrix 1-8

Level

To Matrix 1-8

Level

To Matrix 1-8

Pan

To Matrix 1-8

Pan

Selective Recall On

Selective Recall Parameter

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX STEREO A/B

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 335

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Channel parameter behavior when paired

This table lists the behavior of channel parameters when INPUT/ST IN channels, MIX channels, or MATRIX channels are

paired.

❏ Parameters that are copied when pair-

ing is enabled

❏ Parameters that are turned on when

pairing is enabled

❏ Parameters that are not modiﬁed when

pairing is enabled (reset if RESET BOTH

is selected)

❏ Parameters that are not modiﬁed when

pairing is enabled (not reset even if

RESET BOTH is selected)

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX

LCR On/Off

LCR Center-Side Ratio

Fade Time On/Off

Fade Time Start Offset

Fade Time Fading Time

Insert In On/Off

Insert Point

Direct Out On/Off

Direct Out Point

On/Off

Level Master Level

GATE On/Off

GATE Key In Source

GATE Key In Filter On

GATE Filter Type

GATE Filter Freq.

GATE Filter Q

GATE Type

GATE Attack

GATE Range

GATE Hold

GATE Decay

GATE Threshold

COMP LINK 1-8 COMP LINK A-H

COMP On/Off

COMP Key In Source

COMP Key In Type

COMP Attack

COMP Release

COMP Ratio

COMP OutGain

COMP Knee/Width

COMP Threshold

EQ LINK 1-8 EQ LINK A-F EQ LINK G,H

HPF On/Off EQ HPF On/Off x2 EQ HPF On/Off

HPF Freq

EQ Type 1,2

EQ On/Off

EQ Filter Type x2 EQ Filter Type x4 EQ Filter Type x2

EQ LPF On/Off EQ LPF On/Off x2 EQ LPF On/Off

EQ Q x4 EQ Q x8 EQ Q x4

EQ Freq x4 EQ Freq x8 EQ Freq x4

EQ Gain x4 EQ Gain x8 EQ Gain x4

EQ Bypass x8 EQ Bypass x4

Delay On/Off

Surround LFE

Surround Div.

Surround Div.Rear

Surround Div.Link

Mute Group 1-8 On/Off

DCA Group 1-8 On/Off DCA Group 7,8 On/Off

To Stereo On/Off

To Stereo Point

Mix Send Pre Point Mix Send Post Point

Mix Send Follow Pan Vari

Mix Send Follow Pan

Fixed

Mix Send 1-24 On/Off

Mix Send 1-24 Pre/Post

Mix Send 1-24 Level

To Matrix On/Off

To Matrix Point

Selective Recall On

Selective Recall Parameter

Recall Safe On

Recall Safe Parameter

Mute Safe On

Tracking On/Off

Tracking Level

Solo Safe On/Off

Cue/Solo On/Off

CH COPY CH SELECT

GLOBAL PASTE CH SELECT

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX

Attenuator Gang

Gate Stereo Link

Comp Stereo Link

Delay Gang

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX

Phase

To Stereo Pan

Master Balance

Attenuator

Delay Time

Surround LR Pan

Surround FR Pan

Mix Send 1-24 Pan

To Matrix 1-8 Level

To Matrix 1-8 Pan

Input Pan Mode

Surround Link On/Off

Surround Link Pattern

M-S Encode On/Off

M-S Encode S-Gain

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX

Mix Type

(VARI,FIX,SURR)

TB On/Off

OSC On/Off

MONITOR DEFINE On/Off

INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX

MIDI Data Format

336 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

MIDI Data Format

This section explains the format of the data that the PM5D is able to understand, send, and receive.

In addition to the messages described here, you can use the MIDI REMOTE function or the MIDI EVENT settings of the

SCENE function to transmit any type of command.

1 CHANNEL MESSAGE

1.1 NOTE OFF (8n)

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER ECHO] is ON.

They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.

1.2 NOTE ON (9n)

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER ECHO] is ON.

They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects.

1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

Tw o types of control change can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (Non-

Registered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (16CH x 110)

messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN].

Reception

These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [Control Change ECHO] is ON.

If [TABLE MULTI] is selected, these messages are received when [Control

Change Rx] is ON, and will control parameters according to the settings of the

[Control assign table]. If [TABLE SINGLE] is selected, these messages are

received when [Control Change Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will

control parameters according to the settings of the [Control assign table]. For

the parameters that can be assigned, refer to p.312.

If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [Control Change Rx] is

ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h,

63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the

speciﬁed parameter.

Transmission

If [TABLE MULTI] is selected, and if [Control Change Tx] is ON when you

operate a parameter that is assigned in the [Control assign table], these

messages will be transmitted. If [TABLE SINGLE] is selected, and if [Control

Change Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [Control

assign table], these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the

parameters that can be assigned, refer to p.312.

If [NRPN] is selected, and if [Control Change Tx] is ON when you operate a

speciﬁed parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and

DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH]

channel.

Control Change messages are not used for transmission to PM5D Editor

because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will

match. (Parameter Change messages are always used.)

Control Change numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks.

If [TABLE] is selected

Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data

paramSteps = paramMax - paramMin + 1;

add = paramWidth / paramSteps;

mod = paramWidth - add * paramSteps;

curValue = parm * add + mod / 2;

(1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps

paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value;

(2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than

16,384 steps

paramWidth = 16384;

(2-1) When High and Low data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low);

(2-2) When Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low);

(2-3) When High data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127);

(3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than

2,097,152 steps

paramWidth = 2097152;

(3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received

rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control

value(Low);

(3-2) When only Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low);

(3-3) When only Middle data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128;

(3-4) When only High data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384;

(3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control

value(Low);

(3-6) When only High and Low data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low);

(3-7) When only High and Middle data is received

rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle)

* 128;

if ( rxValue > paramWidth)

rxValue = paramWidth;

param = ( rxValue - mod / 2) / add;

If [NRPN] is selected

STATUS 1000nnnn 8n

Note off message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity(ignored)

STATUS 1001nnnn 9n

Note on message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 00

Control number (00)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 20

Control number (32)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Control number (1-31,33-95,102-119) *

0vvvvvvv vv

Control Value (0-127)

* Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used.

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 01100010 62

NRPN LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter number LSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 01100011 63

NRPN MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter number MSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 00000110 06

Data entry MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter data MSB

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *

DATA 00100110 26

Data entry LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Parameter data LSB

* The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not

be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly

whether or not the status byte is omitted.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 337

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

Reception

If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed

from MIDI OUT.

If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [Program Change RX]

is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are

received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene

memories are recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table].

Transmission

If [Program Change] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the

[Program Change Table] settings when a scene memory is recalled.

If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH]

channel.

If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the

lowest-numbered program number for each MIDI channel will be transmitted.

Program Change messages are not used for transmission to PM5D Editor

because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will

match. (Parameter Change messages are always used.)

You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH.

If SINGLE is selected

You can choose the RX CH, OMNI CH, and TX CH.

You can choose whether a bank select message will be added.

A bank of up to 16 can be speciﬁed.

If MULTI is selected

The RX and TX channels will be the same.

The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select

messages will not be added.

You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels.

2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

2.1 TIMING CLOCK (F8)

Reception

This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four

times per quarter note.

Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings.

2.2 ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

Reception

Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized

(e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of

400 ms.

This message is not subject to echoing.

2.3 SYSTEM RESET (FF)

Reception

When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g.,

Running Status will be cleared).

This message is not subject to echoing.

3 System Exclusive Message

3.1 Real Time System Exclusive

3.2 Bulk Dump

This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored

within the PM5D.

The basic format is as follows.

The PM5D uses the following data types for a bulk dump.

The unique header (Model ID) identiﬁes whether the device is a PM5D.

To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE

COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary

complement, and set bit 7 to 0.

CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F

Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time

when a Bulk Dump Request is received.

A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk

Dump Request.

In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of

7-bit data.

[Conversion from actual data to bulk data]

d[0. 6]: actual data

b[0. 7]: bulk data

b[0] = 0;

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

if( d[I]&0x80){

b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);

}

b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;

}

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn

Program change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Program number (0-127)

STATUS 11111000 F8

Timing clock

STATUS 11111110 FE

Active sensing

STATUS 11111111 FF

System reset

Command rx/tx function

F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC COMMAND tx

MMC

command

F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx

Full message

Command rx/tx function

F0 43 0n 3E BB BB 0F D0 D1 D2 …

EE F7 BULK DUMP DATA

rx/tx

BULK DUMP

DATA

F0 43 2n 3E 0F D0 D1 D2 … EE F7

BULK DUMP REQUEST

BULK DUMP

REQUEST

Data name

(D0)

Data Number

(D1,2)

tx/rx function

‘M’ 0-500

512 (current data)

tx/rx

Scene Memory & Request

‘S’ 512 (current data)

tx/rx

Setup Memory & Request

(current setup)

‘R’ 0–99

512 (current data)

tx/rx

Input patch library & Request

‘O’ 0–99

512 (current data)

tx/rx

Output patch library & Request

‘H’ 1–199

512– (channel

current data)

tx/rx

Input Channel library & Request

‘h’ 1–199

768– (channel

current data)

tx/rx

Output Channel library &

Request

‘G’ 1–199

512– (channel

current data)

tx/rx

Gate library & Request

‘Y’ 1–199

512– (channel

current data)

tx/rx

Compressor library & Request

‘Q’ 1–199

512– (channel

current data)

tx/rx

Input Equalizer library & Request

‘q’ 1–199

768 - (channel

current data)

tx/rx

Output Equalizer library &

Request

‘F’ 1–199

512– (GEQ 1-12

current data)

tx/rx

GEQ Equalizer library & Request

‘E’ 1–199

512– (Effect 1-8

current data)

tx/rx

Effect library & Request

‘W’ 1–199

512 (current data)

tx/rx

HA library & Request

‘P’ 512 (current data)

tx/rx

Program change table & Request

‘C’ 512 (current data)

tx/rx

Control change table & Request

‘N’ 512 (current data)

tx/rx

Plug-in Effect Card Data &

Request

‘A’ 512 (current data)

tx/rx

Event List & Request

MIDI Data Format

338 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

[Recovery from bulk data to actual data]

d[0. 6]: actual data

b[0. 7]: bulk data

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

b[0] <<= 1;

d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);

}

3.3 PARAMTER CHANGE

Reception

This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a parameter change is

received, the speciﬁed parameter will be controlled. When a parameter request

is received, the current value of the speciﬁed parameter will be transmitted as a

parameter change with its Device Number as the [Rx CH].

Transmission

If [Parameter change TX] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which control

change transmission has not been enabled, a parameter change will be

transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number.

In response to a parameter request, a parameter change will be transmitted with

[Rx CH] as its device number.

4. PARAMETER CHANGE details

4.1 Current Scene, Setup, Backup, Window control,

Input Patch, Output Patch, HA Data

– Parameter change –

4.1.1 Format

Reception

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When the message is received, the speciﬁed parameter will be edited.

Transmission

If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, this message is transmitted with the [Device

Number] speciﬁed by the [Tx CH] when you edit a parameter that is not

assigned in the [Control change assign table].

4.1.2 Data categories

4.2 Current Scene, Setup, Backup, Window control,

Input Patch, Output Patch, HA Data

– Parameter request –

4.2.1 Format

Reception

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the value of the speciﬁed parameter is transmitted as a

Parameter Change.

4.2.2 Data categories

4.3 Function Call – Library Store/Recall –

(Parameter change)

4.3.1 Format

Reception

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When the message is received, the speciﬁed parameter will be edited.

Transmission

If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, this message is transmitted with a [Device

Number] of the [Tx CH].

Command rx/tx function

F0 43 1n 3E 0F … F7

RARAMETER CHANGE

rx/tx

PM5D native parameter change

F0 43 3n 3E 0F … F7

PARAMETER REQUEST

rx/tx

PM5D native parameter request

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE) See 4.4.2

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

0fffffff ff

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.4.3

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0mmmmmmm mh

number -source start High

0mmmmmmm ml

number -source start Low

0mmmmmmm mh

number -source end High

0mmmmmmm ml

number -source end Low

0mmmmmmm mh

number -destination start High

0mmmmmmm ml

number -destination to start Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

FUNCTION NAME

Copy “LibCpy__”

Paste “LibPst__”

Clear “LibClr__”

Cut “LibCut__”

Insert “LibIns__”

MODULE NAME

Scene “SCENE___”

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MIDI Data Format

340 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

4.5.2 Title (Parameter request) format

Reception

When this is received, a parameter change is transmitted with [Rx CH] as the

device number.

4.5.3 Title module names

4.5.4 Protect (Parameter change) format

4.5.5 Protect (Parameter request) format

Reception

When this is received, a parameter change is transmitted with [Rx CH] as the

device number.

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01010100 "T"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

01101100 "l"

(ASCII CODE)

01011111 "_"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.5.3

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

0ddddddd dd

title 1

0ddddddd dd

title x

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01010100 "T"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

01101100 "l"

(ASCII CODE)

01011111 "_"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.5.3

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MODULE NAME number size

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 0-500,512 (0: response only) 16

INPATCH LIB “INPATCH_” 0-99 (0: response only) 16

OUTPATCH LIB “OUTPATCH” 0-99 (0: response only) 16

INPUT CHANNEL LIB “INCHNNL_” 0-199 (0-1: response only) 16

OUTPUT CHANNEL

LIB

“OUTCHNNL” 0-199 (0-1: response only) 16

INPUT EQ LIB “INEQ____” 1-199 (1-40: response only) 16

OUTPUT EQ LIB “OUTEQ___” 1-199 (1-3: response only) 16

GATE LIB “GATE____” 1-199 (1-4: response only) 16

COMP LIB “COMP____” 1-199 (1-36: response only) 16

GEQ LIB “GEQ_____” 1-199 (1-52: response only) 16

EFFECT LIB “EFFECT__” 0-199 (0: response only) 16

HA LIB “HA______” 0-199 (0: response only) 16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01010000 "P"

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 "r"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

01100011 "c"

(ASCII CODE)

01011111 "_"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.5.6

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

0ddddddd dd

data (unprotected:0, protected:1, read

only:2 )

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01010000 "P"

(ASCII CODE)

01110010 "r"

(ASCII CODE)

01110100 "t"

(ASCII CODE)

01100011 "c"

(ASCII CODE)

01011111 "_"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.5.6

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0mmmmmmm mh

number High

0mmmmmmm ml

number Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 341

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

4.5.6 Protect module names

4.5.7 Link format (Parameter change)

Reception

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When the message is received, the link settings of the speciﬁed memory/library

will be edited.

Transmission

In response to a request, a Parameter Change message is transmitted on the [Rx

CH].

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change.

4.5.8 Link format (Parameter request)

Reception

When this is received, a parameter change is transmitted with [Rx CH] as the

device number.

For the function and number, refer to the table in 4.5.7.

4.5.9 Library module names

4.5.10 Linked library module names

4.6 Function Call – Module –

4.6.1 Effect Trigger (Parameter change) format

Reception

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if

[Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, the corresponding effect function will operate

(depends on the effect type).

MODULE NAME number size

SCENE LIB “SCENE___” 0-500,512 (0:response only) 16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01010000 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01101110 "n"

(ASCII CODE)

01101011 "k"

(ASCII CODE)

01011111 "_"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.5.9

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss mh

library number High

0sssssss ml

library number Low

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 See 4.5.10

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mh

linked library number High *1

0mmmmmmm ml

linked library number Low *1

0ddddddd dd

data (unlinked:0, linked:1) *1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

*1 If this portion is repeated multiple times, this means that a single

packet contains link data for multiple libraries.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001100 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01100010 "b"

(ASCII CODE)

01010000 "L"

(ASCII CODE)

01101001 "i"

(ASCII CODE)

01101110 "n"

(ASCII CODE)

01101011 "k"

(ASCII CODE)

01011111 "_"

(ASCII CODE)

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.5.9

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0sssssss mh

library number High

0sssssss ml

library number Low

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 See 4.5.10

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

0mmmmmmm mm

linked library (ASCII CODE) *1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

*1 If this portion does not exist, it is assumed that all information for the

speciﬁed library and number is being requested.

MODULE NAME number

SCENE LIB "SCENE___" 0-500,512 (0:response only)

MODULE NAME number

INPATCH LIB "INPATCH_" 0- 99

OUTPATCH LIB "OUTPATCH" 0- 99

HA LIB "HA______" 0-199

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00000000 00

OTHER DATA

FUNCTION

NAME

01001101 "M"

01101111 "o"

01100100 "d"

01000110 "F"

01111000 "x"

01010100 "T"

01110010 "r"

01100111 "g"

MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE) See 4.6.2

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

0mmmmmmm mm

(ASCII CODE)

DATA 0eeeeeee ee

Effect number (0:Effect1 - 7:Effect8)

0ppppppp pp

Release:0, Press:1

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MIDI Data Format

342 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

4.6.2 Effect module names

Nothing will happen if the Effect Type is different.

4.7 Level Meter Data – Parameter change –

4.7.1 Format (Parameter change)

Once a Level Meter Request is received to enable transmission, the speciﬁed

meter data will be transmitted at 50 msec intervals for a duration of ten seconds.

If you want meter data to be transmitted continuously, you must transmit a

Request at intervals of no longer than ten seconds.

Reception

This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

Once transmission is enabled by a Request, the meter data speciﬁed in the

Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at a speciﬁc interval for a

speciﬁc duration. (The transmission interval and the duration of transmission

will differ between models of device.)

Tr ansmission is disabled when the power is cycled, or when PORT settings are

changed.

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change.

4.7.2 Format (Parameter request)

Reception

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if

[Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the meter data speciﬁed in the Address is transmitted on

the [Rx CH] channel at a speciﬁc interval for a speciﬁc duration.

If this is received with an Address UL = 0x7F, transmission of all meter data will

stop (will be disabled) immediately.

Transmission

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change.

4.8 Time Counter Data – Time Code –

4.8.1 Format (Parameter change)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Remote Time Counter request,

Time Counter data is transmitted at 50 ms intervals for a duration of ten

seconds. If you want counter data to be transmitted continuously, you must

transmit a Request at intervals of no longer than ten seconds.

Reception

This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When transmission is enabled by a request, Time Counter data is transmitted

for a speciﬁc duration.

Tr ansmission is disabled when the power is cycled, or when PORT settings are

changed.

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change.

4.8.2 Format (Parameter request)

Reception

This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches

the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if

[Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this message is received, Time Counter data is transmitted on the [Rx

CH] channel for a speciﬁc duration.

If a message is received with 0x7F as the second byte of the Address, data

transmission will be stopped (disabled) immediately.

Transmission

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change.

MODULE NAME channel

Freeze Play button "FRZPLAY_" 0:Effect1 - 7:Effect8

Freeze Record button "FRZREC__" 0:Effect1 - 7:Effect8

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00100001 21

REMOTE LEVEL METER

DATA 0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL (See 4.7.3)

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

0ddddddd dd

Data1 H (See 4.7.5) *1

0ddddddd dd

Data1 L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

*1 Two types of meter data are provided; data that uses the decay value

of the DSP as-is, and data that is converted via a table according to

the number of segments in the meter display.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00100001 21

REMOTE LEVEL METER

DATA 0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS UL (See 4.7.3)

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LU

0mmmmmmm mm

ADDRESS LL

0ccccccc ch

Request Ch Total Number H

0ccccccc cl

Request Ch Total Number L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00101011 2b

Time Counter TC

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Hour

0ddddddd dd

Minute

0ddddddd dd

Second

0ddddddd dd

Frame

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

Digital mixer

MODEL ID 00001111 0F

PM5D

DATA

CATEGORY

00101011 2b

Time Counter TC

DATA 0ddddddd dd

0: Request transmission

0x7F: Request stop transmission

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 343

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Warning Messages

These are messages displayed in the lower part of the screen. They will disappear after a certain duration has elapsed.

Message Meaning

#xxx of Scene is Empty!

No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it

cannot be recalled.

#xxx of Scene is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene.

#xxx of Scene is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene.

Cannot Undo! You pressed the SCENE MEMORY [UNDO] key when Undo was not available.

Cannot Assign!

You clicked an unavailable (grayed-out) grid in the patch screen, or pressed an invalid key on the panel

(e.g., a DCA/MUTE assign key that is unavailable due to the selected channel).

Cannot Drop! You attempted to drop a EQ/compressor/gate/EQ/effect mini-graph onto a location of a different type.

Pair Made. You used a panel operation to assign channel pairing.

Pair Broken. You used a panel operation to cancel channel pairing.

EFFECT CUE: Turned Off.

CUE was defeated because you switched to another screen from the EQ PARAM or EFFECT ASSIGN

screen, or because you switched the selected effect.

KEY IN CUE: Turned Off.

KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the GATE PRM/COMP PRM screen to a different

screen.

Overwrite Existing Event.

In the EVENT LIST screen you input an event at the same time as a previously-input event, so the exist-

ing event was overwritten.

Event List Full! Last Event cancelled.

In the EVENT LIST screen, the event list is full; the last event in the event list was pushed out and deleted

when you added a new event.

Interval from Previous Event is Too Short!

The event you are attempting to input in the EVENT LIST screen is too close to an existing event earlier

than that location, so it is possible that it may not be recalled at the time you intend.

TIME CODE: Frame Jump!

The time code that was input in the EVENT LIST screen has experienced a frame jump or is running

backward.

TIME CODE: Frame Mismatch!

The incoming time code has a frame rate that is different than the time code speciﬁed in the EVENT LIST

screen.

MIDI: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input to the MIDI IN connector.

MIDI: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input to the MIDI IN connector.

MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI IN connector.

MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the MIDI OUT connector.

USB: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.

USB: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port.

USB: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port.

USB: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the USB connector output port.

SLOT x: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port.

SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port.

RS422: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being received at the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector.

RS422: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being received at the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector.

RS422: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector.

RS422: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector.

CASCADE: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input to the CASCADE IN/OUT connector.

CASCADE: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input to the CASCADE IN/OUT connector.

CASCADE: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the CASCADE IN/OUT connector.

CASCADE: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the CASCADE IN/OUT connector.

DME Control: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input during communication with the DME.

DME Control: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input during communication with the DME.

DME Control: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received during communication with the DME.

DME Control: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted during communication with the DME.

Wrong Word Clock!

The PM5D cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD

CLOCK screen is not appropriate.

Sync Error! [xxxx] The xxxx signal is not synchronized with the PM5D.

xxxx No Signal Present! The xxxx signal is not being input.

Data Type Conﬂict! Canceled. You attempted to execute a library recall or channel copy operation on a different type of channel.

HA Type Conﬂict! Data Ignored. You attempted to recall a HA library of a different model (PM5D model or PM5D-RH model).

Conﬂicting GPI OUT Cancelled.

The parameter you assigned to the FADER START function or to a User Deﬁned key is the same as an

existing GPI OUT assignment, so the GPI OUT assignment was cancelled.

Conﬂicting USER DEFINED KEY

Cancelled.

The parameter you assigned to GPI OUT is the same as an existing User Deﬁned key assignment, so the

User Deﬁned key assignment was cancelled.

Conﬂicting FADER START Cancelled.

The parameter you assigned to GPI OUT is the same as an existing FADER START function, so the FADER

START assignment was cancelled.

Wrong Password! The system password or console password you input was incorrect.

System Password Changed. The system password has been changed.

Console Password Changed. The console password has been changed.

Error Messages

344 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Error Messages

These are messages displayed as popup windows in the center of the screen. After noting the content of the message, click the

OK button in the screen to close the popup window.

Parameter Locked. Parameter Lock has been enabled.

Parameter Unlocked. Parameter Lock has been defeated.

This Parameter is Locked. The parameter you attempted to control is locked.

Channel Copied. The selected channel settings were copied to the memory buffer.

Channel Pasted. The channel settings in the memory buffer were pasted to the selected channel.

Nothing to Paste! Paste cannot be performed because there is no data in the memory buffer.

Cannot Paste to Different Channel Type. Paste cannot be performed because you are attempting to paste channel settings of a different type.

No Card in Slot! No memory card is inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot.

File Already Exist!

The memory card already contain a ﬁle/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to

save, rename, or create.

Saving Aborted. Saving to memory card was aborted.

Loading Aborted. Loading from memory card was aborted.

No Controllable Gain. You attempted to operate a gain knob that is currently disabled on the panel.

Tap Operation Ignored. Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen.

Cascade Unit Disconnected. The connection with a cascade-connected external device was broken.

Additional Cascade Unit Detected. A cascade-connected external device was newly detected.

Incorrect Cascade Connection! The connection is not appropriate for the cascade settings.

Couldn’t Store Scene on Slave Console!

The cascade-connected slave console was unable to store the scene because the scene was protected on

the slave console, or for some other reason.

Couldn’t Edit Scene on Slave Console!

The cascade-connected slave console was unable to edit the scene because the scene was protected on

the slave console, or for some other reason.

DME Disconnected. The connection with an external DME was broken.

No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR or AD824.

Processing Aborted. A process was aborted.

Message Meaning

Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library.

Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library.

Memory Card Full! You attempted to save a ﬁle that was larger than the available capacity of the memory card.

File Not Found! The ﬁle/directory does not exist on the memory card.

Couldn’t Read File. Failed to read the ﬁle from the memory card.

Couldn’t Write File. Failed to write the ﬁle to the memory card.

Couldn’t Delete File. Failed to delete the memory card ﬁle.

Couldn’t Open File. Failed to open the ﬁle from the memory card.

Couldn’t Close File. Failed to close the ﬁle on the memory card.

Unsupported File Format! The ﬁle you attempted to load from the memory card is of an unsupported format.

No Files to Upload! Internal memory does not contain ﬁles to upload.

Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low.

Power Supply has Malfunctioned!

A problem has occurred with the PW800W power supply connected to the PM5D. Please contact your

Yamaha dealer.

Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded! The I/O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity.

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 345

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Troubleshooting

Power does not turn on, panel LEDs

and the LCD display do not light

❍ Are the PM5D and PW800W correctly connected by the special power cable?

❍ Is the PW800W’s POWER switch turned on?

❍ In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 2 screen, could the LED brightness have been turned down?

(➥ p.188)

❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact your Yamaha dealer.

Sound is not input

❍ Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (➥ p.30)

❍ Is a signal being input from the external device?

❍ Is the input port patched to an input channel? (➥ p.66)

❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (➥ p.36, 206)

❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (➥ p.260)

❍ Could insert be turned on even though it has not been speciﬁed correctly? (➥ p.70)

❍ Is the [ON] key indicator of the input channel lit?

❍ Is the fader of the input channel raised?

❍ In SOLO mode, could the [CUE] key be on for a channel that has no signal? (➥ p.96)

❍ Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised? Could MUTE be turned on? (➥ p.75)

Sound is not output

❍ Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (➥ p.30)

❍ Is the [ON] key indicator of the STEREO A/B channel lit?

❍ Is an output port patched to the output channel? (➥ p.67)

❍ Could LCR be on, and the CSR value be set to 1.0? (➥ p.242)

Sound is not output from

headphones or the MONITOR OUT

jacks

❍ Is the MONITOR section [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume?

Sound is not loud enough

❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (➥ p.36, 206)

❍ Is the fader of the input channel raised?

❍ Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting? (➥ p.65)

❍ Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an extreme setting? (➥ p.63, 64)

❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (➥ p.260)

❍ Is the fader of the output channel raised?

❍ Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels. (➥ p.209, 210)

❍ Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised?

Sound is distorted

❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (➥ p.31)

❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (➥ p.36, 206)

❍ Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high?

❍ Could the fader of the STEREO A/B channel be raised too high?

❍ Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely high setting? (➥ p.65)

Sound is output even though it is not

patched to an output channel

❍ Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out? (➥ p.72)

❍ Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out? (➥ p.70)

Paired channels are not heard in

stereo

❍ Are the pan mode setting and pan value correct? (➥ p.45)

The volume of a speciﬁc channel

rises and falls

❍ Could GATE/COMP be set to ducking? (➥ p.63, 64)

Operating a fader does not control

the level as you expect

❍ Have you used the layer keys ([CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys or [ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys) to select the

appropriate layer?

❍ Is the FADER [FLIP] key turned off?

Only the sound of a speciﬁc channel

is heard from the MONITOR OUT or

PHONES jack

❍ Could a [CUE] key be on?

Noise occurs from an externally

connected recorder or other device

❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (➥ p.31)

❍ Could the input signal be unsynchronized?

❍ Is the dither setting appropriate? (➥ p.207)

❍ Could oscillator or talkback be turned on? (➥ p.98, 99)

High frequency range is attenuated

❍ Could emphasis be applied? This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the empha-

sis data. (➥ p.200, 215)

❍ Could EQ be applied? (➥ p.65)

An input signal is being input, but

there’s no monitor output

❍ Could the CUE INTERRUPTION button be on? If this button is on, the cue/solo signal will also be output

from the MONITOR OUT jacks while the Cue/Solo function is active. (➥ p.217)

Some channels are always heard

even in SOLO mode

❍ Could those channels be set to SOLO SAFE? (➥ p.219, 219)

Not enough headroom, especially

when EQ boost is applied

❍ Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level. (➥ p.260)

Sound recorded via a 2TR OUT

DIGITAL jack or a digital I/O card is

gritty

❍ Check that the dither function matches the word length of the recording device. (➥ p.207)

Signal is delayed ❍ Check whether the delay setting for each channel is set correctly. (➥ p.58)

Turning a MIX encoder does not

change the send level to the MIX bus

❍ Is the [MIX SEND] key turned on?

❍ Is the MIX [ON] key turned on?

❍ Is the MIX bus set to VARI type? (➥ p.201)

❍ If the send point is set to POST, could the fader have been lowered?

Can’t save scene memory or library

data

❍ Are you attempting to save the data to a read-only scene/library or a protected scene? (➥ p.159)

Can’t save to a memory card

❍ Is the memory card protected?

❍ Does the memory card have enough free capacity to save the data?

❍ When formatting a memory card, format it in FAT16 format.

Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data

❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly? (➥ p.113, 115, 117)

❍ Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices? (➥ p.113, 115)

❍ Has an event been assigned for the program change? (➥ p.113)

The [ON] keys or [SEL] keys select

the wrong channels

❍ Have you used the layer keys ([CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys or [ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys) to select the

appropriate layer?

General Specifications

346 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

General Speciﬁcations

You paired input channels, but the

signal phase is incorrect

❍ Set the paired input channels to the same phase setting. Even when channels are paired, the phase set-

tings are not linked. (➥ p.45)

When you recall a scene, some

channels/parameters are not

updated

❍ Could those channels/parameters be set to Recall Safe or Selective Recall? (➥ p.84, 86)

You turn on a CUE button in the

EFFECT PARAM screen, but it is

automatically defeated

❍ This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display. (➥ p.152)

Can’t make boost settings with the

GEQ

❍ In the GEQ PARAM screen, could LIMIT be set to –24 dB? (➥ p.111)

When you recall a scene, it takes a

certain amount of time for the faders

to stop

❍ Could you have speciﬁed a fade time? (➥ p.87)

The panel LEDs or LCD display are

too dark / too bright

❍ In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 2 screen, use the BRIGHTNESS setting to adjust the brightness.

(➥ p.188)

Sampling Frequency

Internal: 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

External: 44.1 kHz (–10%) to 48 kHz (+6%)

88.2 kHz (–10%) to 96 kHz (+6%)

Signal Delay

PM5D: Less than 2.3 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 48 kHz)

Less than 1.15 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 96 kHz)

PM5D-RH: Less than 2.5 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 48 kHz)

Less than 1.25 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 96 kHz)

Fader 100mm motorized x38

Fader Resolution +10 to –138, –∞ dB (1024 steps/100 mm)

Maximum Voltage Gain

PM5D: 84 dB INPUT1-48 to Each Output

PM5D-RH: 86 dB INPUT1-48 to Each Output

Crosstalk (@1kHz) –80 dB Adjacent Input Channels (INPUT1-48)

Dimensions 1551 x 950 x 283 mm (W x D x H)

Net Weight

PM5D: 98 kg

PM5D-RH: 97 kg

Power Requirements

PM5D: 480W, DC 24V, 20A (Use PW800W Only)

PM5D-RH: 528W, DC 24V, 22A (Use PW800W Only)

Operation free-air Temperature Range +10 °C to +35 °C

Storage Temperature Range –20 °C to +60 °C

Included Accessories

Owner’s Manual

Gooseneck Lamps x 3

Power Supply PW800W Connection Cable

Studio Manager CD-ROM

Studio Manager Installation Guide

Optional Accessories

mini YGDAI cards

Power Supply PW800W

Power Supply Link Cable PSL120

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 347

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Analog Input (1-48)

❏ Analog Input (ST IN1-4 [L,R])

❏ Analog Input (2TR IN ANALOG1,2 [L,R])

❏ Digital Input (2TR IN DIGITAL1-3)

❏ Talkback Input

❏ Oscillator

❏ STEREO A,B [L,R], MIX1-24, MATRIX1-8

❏ MONITOR OUT [L,C,R], CUE OUT

❏ PHONES (x2)

❏ Digital Output (2TR OUT DIGITAL1-3)

Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x48

Phantom Power

PM5D: +48V DC is supplied to Input by individual mechanical switch

PM5D-RH: +48V DC is supplied to Input by individual software control

Pad Switch PM5D: 0/26 dB attenuation

Gain Control

PM5D: 44 dB detented

–60 dB to –16 dB (PAD=OFF), –34 to +10 dB (PAD=ON)

PM5D-RH: 72 dB by software control

–62 dB to 10 dB (1 dB step)

Peak Indicator Red LED is lit when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping

Signal Indicator Green LED is lit when post HA level reaches 14 dB below nominal

Insert (Pre AD converter) PM5D: Out, In (TRS Balanced)

Insert Switch PM5D: On/Off

AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x8

Phantom Power PM5D-RH: +48V DC is supplied to Input by individual software control

Gain Control

PM5D: 44 dB detented

–34 dB to +10 dB

PM5D-RH: 72 dB by software control

–62 dB to +10 dB (1 dB step)

Peak Indicator Red LED is lit when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping

Signal Indicator Green LED is lit when post HA level reaches 14 dB below nominal

AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x4

Gain Switch +24 dBu (default) / +18 dBu

AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Connector

AES/EBU XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x2 (DIGITAL

IN 1,2)

SPDIF RCA PIN (DIGITAL IN 3)

Sampling Rate

Converter

On/Off by software control (1:3 and 3:1 maxi-

mum input to output sample rate ratio)

Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)

Phantom Power +48V DC is supplied by software control

Gain 50 dB ﬁxed (pre level control)

AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Talkback Select

TALKBACK IN and selected INPUT1-48 can be

used simultaneously

Level 0 to –96dB (1dB step)

On/Off Dedicated switch and software control

Waveform

MODE: Sine Wave 1ch, Sine Wave 2ch, Pink

Noise, Burst Noise

Sine Waveform: 100Hz, 1kHz, 10kHz

Routing MIX1-24, MATRIX1-8, STEREO A,B (L,R)

Connector XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)

DA Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Connector XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)

DA Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling

Level Control Analog potentiometer

Connector TRS

Level Control Analog potentiometer

Connector

AES/EBU XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced) x2 (DIGITAL

OUT 1,2)

SPDIF RCA PIN (DIGITAL OUT 3)

Sampling Rate

Converter

On/Off by software control (1:3 and 3:1 maxi-

mum input to output sample rate ratio)

Input/output characteristics

348 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Input/output characteristics

❏ Analog Input Characteristics (PM5D)

❏ Analog Input Characteristics (PM5D-RH)

*1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dBu (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (All faders

and level controls are maximum position.)

*2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)

*3. Phone jacks are balanced. (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND )

*4. There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum input level.

* In these speciﬁcations, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.

* All input AD converters are 24bit linear, 128 times (@48 kHz) oversampling.

* PM5D: +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT (1-48) XLR type connectors via each individual switch, and TALKBACK XLR type connectors

via software switch.

PM5D-RH: +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT (1-48) and TALKBACK XLR type connectors via master mechanical switch and each individ-

ual software switch.

Input Terminals PAD GAIN

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

GAIN SW

Input Level

Connector

Sensitivity

Nominal

Max. Before

Clip

INPUT 1-48

–60dB

3kΩ

50-600Ω Mics

600Ω Lines

—

–80 dBu

(0.0775 mV)

–60 dBu

(0.775 mV)

–40 dBu

(7.75 mV)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

–16dB

–36 dBu

(12.3 mV)

–16 dBu

(123 mV)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

–10 dBu

(245 mV)

+10 dBu

(2.45 V)

+30 dBu

(24.51 V)

ST IN1-4 [L,R] —

–34dB

4kΩ 600Ω Lines —

–54 dBu

(1.55 mV)

–34 dBu

(15.5 mV)

–14 dBu

(155 mV)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

10dB

–10 dBu

(245 mV)

+10 dBu

(2.54 V)

+30 dBu

(24.51 V)

INSERT IN 1-48 — 10kΩ 600Ω Lines —

–16 dBu

(123 mV)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

Phone Jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

2TR IN ANALOG

1,2 [L,R]

— 10kΩ 600Ω Lines

+24 dB

(default)

–6 dBu

(388 mV)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

+18 dB

–12 dBu

(195 mV)

–2 dBu

(0.616 V)

+18 dBu

(6.16 V)

TALKBACK — 3kΩ

50-600Ω Mics

600Ω Lines

—

–60 dBu

(0.775 mV)

–50 dBu

(2.45 mV)

–30 dBu

(24.5 mV)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

Input Terminals GAIN

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

GAIN SW *4

Input Level

Connector

Sensitivity *1 Nominal

Max. Before

Clip

INPUT 1-48

–62dB

3kΩ

50-600Ω Mics

600Ω Lines

—

–82 dBu

(61.6 µV)

–62 dBu

(0.616 mV)

–42 dBu

(6.16 mV)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

+10dB

–10 dBu

(245 mV)

+10 dBu

(2.45 V)

+30 dBu

(24.5 V)

ST IN1-4 [L,R]

–62dB

3kΩ

50-600Ω Mics

600Ω Lines

—

–82dBu

(61.6 µV)

–62 dBu

(0.616 mV)

–42 dBu

(6.16 mV)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

+10dB

–10 dBu

(245 mV)

+10 dBu

(2.45 V)

+30 dBu

(24.5 V)

2TR IN ANALOG

1,2 [L,R]

— 10kΩ 600Ω Lines

+24 dB

(default)

–6 dBu

(388 mV)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

+18 dB

–12 dBu

(195 mV)

–2 dBu

(0.616 V)

+18 dBu

(6.16 V)

TALKBACK — 3kΩ

50-600Ω Mics

600Ω Lines

—

–60 dBu

(0.775 mV)

–50 dBu

(2.45 mV)

–30 dBu

(24.5 mV)

XLR-3-31 Type

(Balanced)

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 349

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Analog Output Characteristics

*1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)

*2. Phone jacks are balanced. (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND)

*3. PHONES stereo phone jacks are unbalanced. (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND)

*4. There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level.

*5. INSERT OUTs are only provided for PM5D.

*6. The position of the level control is 10 dB lowered from Max.

* In these speciﬁcations, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms.

* All output DA converters are 24bit, 128 times (@48 kHz) oversampling.

❏ Digital Input Characteristics

❏ Digital Output Characteristics

*1. The channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1,2 is described on page 350.

*2. The channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3 is described on page 350.

*3. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit

*4. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)

Output

Terminals

Actual Source

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

GAIN SW

Output Level

Connector

Nominal Max. Before Clip

STEREO A,B [L,R] 150Ω 600Ω Lines

+24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V)

XLR-3-32 Type

(Balanced)

+18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V)

MONITOR OUT

[L,R,C]

150Ω 600Ω Lines

+24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V)

XLR-3-32 Type

(Balanced)

+18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V)

CUE OUT [L,R] 150Ω 600Ω Lines

+24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V)

XLR-3-32 Type

(Balanced)

+18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V)

MATRIX OUT 1-8 150Ω 600Ω Lines

+24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V)

XLR-3-32 Type

(Balanced)

+18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V)

MIX OUT 1-24 150Ω 600Ω Lines

+24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V)

XLR-3-32 Type

(Balanced)

+18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V)

INSERT OUT 1-48 150Ω 10kΩ Lines — +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V)

Phone Jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

*2 *5

PHONES (x 2) 15Ω

8Ω Phones

—

75 mW

150 mW

Stereo Phone Jack

(TRS) (Unbalanced)

40Ω Phones

65 mW

150 mW

Terminal Format Data Length Level Connector

2TR IN DIGITAL

1 AES/EBU AES/EBU 24bit RS422

XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)

*1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD)

2 AES/EBU AES/EBU 24bit RS422

XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)

3 COAXIAL IEC-60958 24bit 0.5Vpp/75Ω RCA Pin Jack

CASCADE IN — RS422 D-Sub Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female)

Terminal Format Data Length Level Connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL

1 AES/EBU

AES/EBU

Professional Use

24bit

RS422

XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)

2 AES/EBU

AES/EBU

Professional Use

24bit

RS422

XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)

3 COAXIAL

IEC-60958

Consumer Use

24bit

0.5Vpp/75Ω RCA Pin Jack

CASCADE OUT — RS422 D-Sub Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female)

Input/output characteristics

350 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

• Channel Status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1,2

• Channel Status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3

byte bit ﬁeld name ﬁxed/variable data description

0 Block Format

ﬁxed

1 professional use

1 Mode 0 audio

2-4 Emphasis 0x4 off

5 Fs Lock 0 lock

6-7 Sampling Frequency variable

0x0 others

0x3 32kHz

0x2 44.1kHz

0x1 48kHz

0-3 Channel Mode

ﬁxed

0x1 2ch mode

4-7 Users Bit Management 0x0 —

0-2 Use of AUX

ﬁxed

0x1 24bits Audio Data

3-7 Source 0x00 —

3 0-7 Multi Channel ﬁxed 0x00 —

0-1 Digital Audio Reference Signal

ﬁxed

0x0

—

2— 0

3-6 Sampling Frequency variable

0x0 others

0x5 88.2kHz

0x4 96kHz

7 Sampling Frequency Scan Flag ﬁxed 0 —

byte bit ﬁeld name ﬁxed/variable data description

0 Block Format

ﬁxed

consumer use

1 Mode audio

2 Copy 1 enabled

3 Emphasis

off

——

1 0-7 Category Code ﬁxed 0x49 Digital Mixer (L=1:original)

0-3 Source Number

ﬁxed 0x0

4-7 Channel Number

0-3 Sampling Frequency variable

0xC 32kHz

0x0 44.1kHz

0x4 48kHz

0x8 —

0x1 88.2kHz

0x5 96kHz

4-5 Fs Accuracy

ﬁxed

0x0 Level II

—0—

40Maximum Audio Sample word length ﬁxed 1 24bits

1-3 Sample Word Length ﬁxed 0x5 24bits

4-7 Original Sampling Frequency variable

0x3 32kHz

0xF 44.1kHz

0xB 48kHz

0x0 —

0xE 88.2kHz

0xA 96kHz

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 351

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Control I/O Characteristics

*1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1/Sleeve=GND, 2/Tip=HOT, 3/Ring=COLD)

*2. 4pin=HOT, 3pin=COLD, Lamp rating 5 W, Voltage control by variable volume

*3. Inputs: 4 channels, Outputs: 12 channels

Input Pin: AD Converter (7bit, 128steps, Voltage Detection Range: 0-5V, Maximum Rating: 5V)

Output Pin: Open Collector (Vmax=12V, Imax/pin=75 mA, GPO1-8: Total Imax=300 mA, GPO9-12: Total Imax=300 mA)

Power Pin: Power Supply (Vp=5V, Imax/2 pin=500 mA)

❏ SLOT 1-4 Characteristics

Terminal Format Level Connector

TO HOST USB USB 1.1

—

B Type USB Connector

MIDI

MIDI DIN Connector 5PTHRU

OUT

TIME CODE IN SMPTE SMPTE 0.3Vpp(Min)/10.0Vpp(Max), 10kΩ

XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)

WORD CLOCK

—

TTL/75Ω (ON/OFF)

BNC Connector

OUT TTL/75Ω

GPI

—

D-Sub Connector 25P (Female)

HA REMOTE

RS422

D-Sub Connector 9P (Male)

RS422 REMOTE D-Sub Connector 9P (Female)

KEYBOARD

PS/2 — DIN Connector 6P

MOUSE

LAMP 1,2,3

—

2.5V - 11.5V

XLR-4-31 Type

MEMORY CARD — PCMCIA (Compact Flash)

Card Name Function Input Output

The Number Of

Usable Cards

MY8-AT ADAT

8 IN 8 OUT

MY8-TD TASCAM

MY8-AE AES/EBU

MY4-AD

ANALOG IN

4 IN

—

MY8-AD 8 IN

MY4-DA ANALOG OUT — 4 OUT

MY8-AD24

ANALOG IN 8 IN —

MY8-AD96

MY8-DA96 ANALOG OUT —

8 OUTMY8-AE96S

AES/EBU 8 IN

MY8-AE96

MY16-AT ADAT

16 IN 16 OUTMY16-AE AES/EBU

MY16-TD TASCAM

MY16-C CobraNet ™ 16 IN 16 OUT

Electrical characteristics

352 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Electrical characteristics

All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms

❏ Frequency Response Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz

Fs= 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz @20 Hz–40 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz

❏ Gain Error @1 kHz

❏ Total Harmonic Distortion Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz

* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave ﬁlter @80 kHz

❏ Total Harmonic Distortion Fs=88.2 kHz or 96 kHz

* Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave ﬁlter @80 kHz

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-48

STEREO A,B

600Ω

PM5D: GAIN: Max., PAD: Off

PM5D-RH: GAIN: Max.

–1.5

0.0 0.5 dB

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

MONITOR OUT

CUE OUT

PHONES 8Ω –3.0

2TR IN ANALOG 1,2

STEREO A,B

600Ω –1.5

MONITOR OUT

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-48 STEREO A,B 600Ω

PM5D: Input Level : –60 dBu, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off

PM5D-RH: Input Level : –62 dBu, GAIN: Max.

2.0 4.0 6.0

dBu

PM5D: Input Level : +10 dBu, GAIN: Min., PAD: On

PM5D-RH: Input Level : +10 dBu, GAIN: Min.

2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 STEREO A,B 600Ω Input Level: +4 dBu 2.0 4.0 6.0

Internal OSC

STEREO A,B

600Ω

Full Scale Output

23.5 24.0 24.5

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

MONITOR OUT Full Scale Output, MONITOR Level Control: Max.

CUE OUT Full Scale Output, CUE Level Control: Max.

PHONES 8Ω –30 dBFs, PHONES Level Control: Max. –0.5 0 0.5

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-48 STEREO A,B 600Ω

PM5D: +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off

PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Max.

0.1

PM5D: +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Min., PAD: On

PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Min.

0.05

2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 STEREO A,B 600Ω +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz 0.05

Internal OSC

STEREO A,B

600Ω

Full Scale Output @1 kHz

0.02

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

MONITOR OUT Full Scale Output @1 kHz, MONITOR Level Control : Max.

CUE OUT Full Scale Output @1 kHz, CUE Level Control: Max.

PHONES 8Ω Full Scale Output @1kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max. 0.2

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-48 STEREO A,B 600Ω

PM5D: +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off

PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Max.

0.1

PM5D: +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Min., PAD: On

PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Min.

0.05

2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 STEREO A,B 600Ω +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz 0.05

Internal OSC

STEREO A,B

600Ω

Full Scale Output @1 kHz

0.02

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

MONITOR OUT Full Scale Output @1 kHz, MONITOR Level Control : Max.

CUE OUT Full Scale Output @1 kHz, CUE Level Control: Max.

PHONES 8Ω Full Scale Output @1kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max. 0.2

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 353

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

❏ Hum & Noise EIN= Equivalent Input Noise

* Hum & Noise is measured with a 6 dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

❏ Dynamic Range

* Dynamic range is measured with a 6 dB/octave ﬁlter @12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz ﬁlter with inﬁnite dB/octave attenuation.

❏ Input Indicator Level

❏ Sampling Frequency

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-48

STEREO A,B 600Ω

Master fader at nominal level and one INPUT fader at nomi-

nal level.

–128

EIN

dBu

PM5D: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off –64

PM5D-RH: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Max. –62

Master fader at nominal level and one INPUT fader at nomi-

nal level.

PM5D: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min., PAD: On

PM5D-RH: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min.

–81 –76

All INPUT

Master fader at nominal level and all INPUT1-48 faders at

nominal level.

PM5D: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min., PAD: On

PM5D-RH: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min.

–64

2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 STEREO A,B 600Ω

Master fader at nominal level.

Rs= 150Ω

–81 –76

—

STEREO A,B

600Ω

Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off

–86

MIX OUT Residual Output Noise, MIX Master Off

MATRIX OUT Residual Output Noise, MATRIX Master Off

MONITOR OUT Residual Output Noise, MONITOR Level Control Min.

CUE OUT Residual Output Noise, CUE Level Control Min.

PHONES 8Ω Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level Control Min.

Input Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-48 STEREO A,B

600Ω

PM5D: AD + DA, GAIN: Min.,

PAD: On

Fs= 44.1/48 kHz 108

PM5D-RH: AD + DA, GAIN: Min. Fs= 88.2/96 kHz 106

—

STEREO A,B

DA Converter 110

MIX OUT

MATRIX OUT

MONITOR OUT

CUE OUT

Input Output Condition Min. Typ. Max. Unit

INPUT 1-48

INSERT OUT

PEAK Red LED: ON 19 21 23

dBu

SIGNAL Green LED: ON –12 –10 –8

ST IN 1-4

PEAK Red LED: ON 19 21 23

SIGNAL Green LED: ON –12 –10 –8

Parameter Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit

External Clock Frequency Range

Normal Rate 39.69 50.88

kHz

Double Rate 79.39 101.76

Internal Clock

Frequency

Word Clock : Int 44.1kHz 44.1

Word Clock : Int 48kHz 48

Word Clock : Int 88.2kHz 88.2

Word Clock : Int 96kHz 96

Accuracy

Word Clock : Int 44.1kHz

50 ppm

Word Clock : Int 48kHz

Word Clock : Int 88.2kHz

Word Clock : Int 96kHz

Jitter

Word Clock : Int 44.1kHz

5ns

Word Clock : Int 48kHz

Word Clock : Int 88.2kHz

Word Clock : Int 96kHz

Other Functions

354 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Other Functions

❏ Libraries

❏ Input Function

❏ Output Function

❏ Processor

Name Number Total

Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 500 501

Input Patch Library Preset 1 + User 99 100

Output Patch Library Preset 1 + User 99 100

Input Channel Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

Output Channel Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199

Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199

GATE Library Preset 4 + User 195 199

COMP Library Preset 36 + User 163 199

Effect Library Preset 54 + User 145 199

GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

HA Library Preset 1 + User 199 200

Function Parameter

Phase Normal/Reverse

MS Decode On, S-Gain

Attenuator –96 to +24 dB

HPF

Slope= 12 dB/Oct

Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz

4Band Equalizer

Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB

Q= 0.10 to 10.0

Low Shelving (Low Band)

High Shelving, LPF (High Band)

Type I/Type II

Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Delay/Post Fader

Direct Out

Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post

Noise Gate

Type: Gate/Ducking

Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Hold= 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec

Decay= 5 msec to 42.3 sec

Range= –70 dB to 0 dB

Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix21-24/

Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block)

Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF

Compressor

Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/

Compander S

Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec

Gain= 0 dB to +18 dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Input Delay Time= 0.0 msec to 1000 msec

Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

On On/Off

DCA Group 8 Groups

Mute Group 8 Groups

Mix Send

24 sends

Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes

Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On/Post

TO ST

Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100%

Surround Pan 3-1, 5.1, 6.1 panning support

Function Parameter

8Band Equalizer

(Matrix: 4band)

Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz

Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB

Q= 0.10 to 10.0

Low Shelving (Low Band)

High Shelving, LPF (High Band)

Type I/Type II

Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Fader/Post On

Compressor

Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Com-

pander S

Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB

Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1

Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec

Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec

Gain= 0 dB to +18 dB

Knee= Hard to 5 (soft)

Input Delay Time = 0.0 msec to 1000 msec

Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

On On/Off

DCA Group 2 Groups

Mute Group 8 Groups

Mix to Matrix

Stereo to Matrix

Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post Fader/Post On

Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB

Output Port Att 0 dB to –9 dB

Function Parameter

GEQ 31 bands x 12 systems

Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 355

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

Pin Assignment

❏ CASCADE IN ❏ CASCADE OUT

❏ HA REMOTE ❏ RS422 REMOTE

2 1334

68 3537 36

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GND 35 GND

2 Input 1-2(+) 36 Input 1-2(–)

3 Input 3-4(+) 37 Input 3-4(–)

4 Input 5-6(+) 38 Input 5-6(–)

5 Input 7-8(+) 39 Input 7-8(–)

6 Input 9-10(+) 40 Input 9-10(–)

7 Input 11-12(+) 41 Input 11-12(–)

8 Input 13-14(+) 42 Input 13-14(–)

9 Input 15-16(+) 43 Input 15-16(–)

10 DTR In(+) 44 DTR In(–)

11 RTS Out(+) 45 RTS Out(–)

12 GND 46 GND

13 Word Clock In(+) 47 Word Clock In(–)

14 Word Clock Out(+) 48 Word Clock Out(–)

15 Control In(+) 49 Control In(–)

16 Control Out(+) 50 Control Out(–)

17 GND 51 ID6 In

18 GND 52 ID6 Out

19 Input 17-18(+) 53 Input 17-18(–)

20 Input 19-20(+) 54 Input 19-20(–)

21 Input 21-22(+) 55 Input 21-22(–)

22 Input 23-24(+) 56 Input 23-24(–)

23 Input 25-26(+) 57 Input 25-26(–)

24 Input 27-28(+) 58 Input 27-28(–)

25 Input 29-30(+) 59 Input 29-30(–)

26 Input 31-32(+) 60 Input 31-32(–)

27 ID0 In 61 ID1 In

28 ID2 In 62 ID3 In

29 ID4 In 63 ID5 In

30 ID0 Out 64 ID1 Out

31 ID2 Out 65 ID3 Out

32 ID4 Out 66 ID5 Out

33 MSB In 67 2Ch/Line In

34 FG 68 FG

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GND 35 GND

2 Output 1-2(+) 36 Output 1-2(–)

3 Output 3-4(+) 37 Output 3-4(–)

4 Output 5-6(+) 38 Output 5-6(–)

5 Output 7-8(+) 39 Output 7-8(–)

6 Output 9-10(+) 40 Output 9-10(–)

7 Output 11-12(+) 41 Output 11-12(–)

8 Output 13-14(+) 42 Output 13-14(–)

9 Output 15-16(+) 43 Output 15-16(–)

10 DTR Out(+) 44 DTR Out(–)

11 RTS In(+) 45 RTS In(–)

12 GND 46 GND

13 Word Clock Out(+) 47 Word Clock Out(–)

14 Word Clock In(+) 48 Word Clock In(–)

15 Control Out(+) 49 Control Out(–)

16 Control In(+) 50 Control In(–)

17 GND 51 ID6 Out

18 GND 52 ID6 In

19 Output 17-18(+) 53 Output 17-18(–)

20 Output 19-20(+) 54 Output 19-20(–)

21 Output 21-22(+) 55 Output 21-22(–)

22 Output 23-24(+) 56 Output 23-24(–)

23 Output 25-26(+) 57 Output 25-26(–)

24 Output 27-28(+) 58 Output 27-28(–)

25 Output 29-30(+) 59 Output 29-30(–)

26 Output 31-32(+) 60 Output 31-32(–)

27 ID0 Out 61 ID1 Out

28 ID2 Out 62 ID3 Out

29 ID4 Out 63 ID5 Out

30 ID0 In 64 ID1 In

31 ID2 In 65 ID3 In

32 ID4 In 66 ID5 in

33 MSB Out 67 2Ch/Line Out

34 FG 68 FG

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1 GND 6 RX+

2 RX– 7 RTS

3 TX– 8 CTS

4 TX+ 9 GND

5 N.C

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1 GND 6 GND

2 RX– 7 RX+

3 TX+ 8 TX–

4 GND 9 GND

5 N.C

Dimensions

356 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

❏ GPI

* For information on maximum permissible current, refer to the

page 351.

❏ DC POWER INPUT

Dimensions

* Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right

to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options

may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.

European models

Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.

Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1 GPO1 14 GPO2

2 GPO3 15 GPO4

3 GPO5 16 GPO6

4 GPO7 17 GPO8

5 GND 18 GND

6 GND 19 GND

7 GND 20 GND

8 GND 21 +5V

9 +5V 22 GPI1

10 GPI2 23 GPI3

11 GPI4 24 GPO9

12 GPO10 25 GPO11

13 GPO12

12313

25 1416 15

Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name

1 +24V 13 GND

2 +24V 14 GND

3 +24V 15 GND

4 +24V 16 GND

5 +24V 17 GND

6 +24V 18 GND

7 +24V 19 CAUTION(+)

8 +24V 20 CAUTION(–)

9 +24V 21 DETECT A

10 GND 22 DETECT B

11 GND 23 DETECT GND

12 GND Frame GND

6789

10111213

17181920

283

271

260

283

271

260

1551

1450

950

865

1551

1450

950

865

PM5D-RHPM5D

Unit: mm

MIDI Implementation Chart

YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console] Date: 30-Apr-2004

Model: PM5D/PM5D-RH

MIDI Implementation Chart

Version: 1.0

Function... Transmitted Recognized Remarks

Basic

Channel

Default

Changed

1–16

Memorized

Mode

Default

Messages

Altered

**************

1, 3

Memorized

Note

Number

:True Voice

**************

0–127

Velocity

Note On

Note Off

Effect Control

After

Touch

Key’s

Ch’s

Pitch Bend X X

Control

Change

0,32

6,38

98,99

1-31,33-98,

102-119

Bank Select

Data Entry

NRPN LSB,MSB

Assignable Cntrl

Prog

Change :True#

O 0–127

**************

O 0–127

0–500

Assignable

System Exclusive O *1 O *1

System

Common

:Song Pos

:Song Sel

:Tune

System

Real Time

:Clock

:Commands

Effect Control

Aux

Messages

:All Sound Off

:Reset All Cntrls

:Local ON/OFF

:All Notes OFF

:Active Sense

:Reset

Notes

*1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC.

For MIDI remote and event, all messages can be

transmitted.

MTC quarter frame message is recognized.

Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY

Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY

Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO

Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO

O: Yes

X: No

Index

358 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Index

Symbols

ø ................................................... 59

ø/ATT 1-48

................................. 262

ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN

................... 262

Numerics

2TR I/O....................................... 215

Accessing a screen ......................... 23

AD IN section

............................... 35

Add-On Effects

........................... 109

Adjusting the input gain

(PM5D-RH)

............. 148

Adjusting the output gain

............ 148

ADVANCED mode

.............. 193, 196

Analog audio connections

............. 27

Analog output connections

............ 28

Appendices

.................................. 290

Assign

ASSIGN MODE section

............ 73

Assigning a name

...................... 26

Assigning MIDI messages

....... 117

GEQ ASSIGN

......................... 157

ATTENUATION

........................... 59

AUTO CAPTURE

....................... 162

Auto Store function

....................... 83

BASIC mode ........................ 192, 196

Basic operation

.............................. 19

BLANK SKIP

............................... 160

Block Diagram

.......... End of Manual

Boxes

............................................ 19

BPM

........................................... 153

BUSY indicator

........................... 150

Buttons

................................... 19, 25

Calibrating the GPI IN ports........ 125

Calibration

.................................. 147

Cascade

....................................... 204

BI-DIRECTION

..................... 203

Cascade connections

............... 143

CASCADE IN PORT SELECT

202

Cascade master

....................... 143

CASCADE MODE

................. 203

CASCADE OUT PORT

SOURCE SELECT

.... 203

Cascade slave

.......................... 144

Source when cascade connected

................................. 202

CASCADE FROM

....................... 205

CASCADE/Fs

.............................. 149

CH 1-12

...................................... 267

CH 1-24

............................... 258, 270

CH 1-24 layer

................................ 37

CH 13-24

.................................... 267

CH 25-36

.................................... 267

CH 25-48

.................................... 270

CH 25-48 layer

.............................. 37

CH 37-48

.................................... 267

CH COPY

............................ 249, 289

CH to MIX

........................... 104, 274

CH VIEW

............................ 245, 286

Channel Library List

.................... 334

Channel parameter behavior when

paired

....................... 335

CHANNEL SELECT

...................... 58

Channel strip

...................... 37, 39, 53

INPUT channel

........................ 37

ST IN/FX RTN channel

............ 39

STEREO A/B channel

............... 53

Channel structure

.......................... 12

Character palette

........................... 19

COMP LIBRARY

........... 63, 232, 269

COMP LINK ASSIGN

.... 77, 237, 273

COMP PARAM

.................... 229, 266

Compressor

........................... 60, 102

Operations

............................... 63

Compressor Library List

.............. 292

Compressor Link

........................... 77

Connecting to a computer

........... 146

Connections

.................................. 27

Analog audio connections

......... 27

Analog output connections

....... 28

Digital input/output connections

................................... 29

Console Lock

............................... 142

Control change parameter assign-

ments

........................ 314

Control changes

.......................... 115

CSV EXPORT mode

.................... 193

CSV IMPORT mode

................... 197

Cue

............................................... 91

Cue function

............................ 96

CUE mode

............................... 94

CUE section

....................... 91, 94

Cue/Solo functions

................... 94

Solo function

............................ 96

CUE FUNCTION

........................ 218

CUE/SOLO

................................. 217

CUE FUNCTION

................... 218

INPUT SOLO SAFE

............... 219

OUTPUT SOLO SAFE

........... 219

SOLO ON/OFF

...................... 217

Cursor

..................................... 19, 23

Daisy-chain connections................ 31

Data Entry

..................................... 20

DCA

.............................................. 73

DCA CUE indicator

.................... 150

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

......... 234, 271

DCA Groups

........................... 73, 74

DELAY

.......................................... 58

Digital input/output connections

... 29

Dimensions

................................. 356

DIMM indicator

.......................... 150

DIRECT OUT PATCH

.......... 72, 253

DIRECT RECALL

........................ 151

DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN

.......... 161

Direct Recall function

.................... 83

Directly outputting

........................ 72

DISPLAY ACCESS

.................. 20, 23

DISPLAY ACCESS section

........... 151

Distribution box

............................ 31

DITHER

...................................... 207

Divergence

.................................. 136

DME CONTROL

........................ 182

Drag and drop

............................... 22

Dynamics Parameters

.................. 294

Effect Library

Program Change Table

........... 308

Effects

......................................... 103

Add-On Effects

....................... 109

Basic operations

...................... 106

Editing

................................... 106

EFFECT ASSIGN

.................... 154

EFFECT CUE indicator

.......... 150

EFFECT functions

.................. 152

EFFECT LIBRARY

.................. 155

Effect Library List

................... 297

EFFECT PARAM

.......... 104, 105, 106, 152

Effects Parameters

.................. 298

Freeze effect

............................ 109

Inserting into a channel

.......... 105

Recalling

................................. 106

Storing

................................... 107

Tap Tempo function

............... 108

Using via a MIX bus

............... 104

Effects and tempo synchronization

................................. 307

Electrical characteristics

............... 352

Encoder function

........................... 41

Encoder mode

............................. 150

EQ (Equalizer)

...................... 61, 261

Operations

............................... 65

EQ Library List

............................ 290

EQ Link

......................................... 77

EQ LINK ASSIGN

.......... 77, 236, 272

EQ PARAM

......................... 225, 260

EQ STIN/FXRTN

........................ 261

Error Messages

............................ 344

EVENT indicator

......................... 150

EVENT LIST

............................... 161

AUTO CAPTURE

.................. 162

DISABLE

........................ 149, 161

ENABLE

......................... 149, 161

EVENT RECALL

.................... 162

EVENT TRIGGER

.................. 162

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 359

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

MOVE DOWN ...................... 163

MOVE UP

............................. 162

Events

.................................. 113, 115

Exchanging the fader and encoder

functions

.................... 41

EXTERNAL CUE indicator

......... 150

External user interface

................... 21

Fade function................................ 87

FADE TIME

........................... 87, 167

FADER ASSIGN

.......................... 197

Fader Assign function

.................. 139

Fader calibration

......................... 147

FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE

section

........................ 40

FADER MODE

.................... 150, 151

FADER MODE section

................ 139

FADER START

........................... 179

FADER VIEW

...................... 249, 288

Faders

...................................... 19, 25

FADING indicator

...................... 150

Features

........................................ 10

FIX ASSIGN VIEW

..................... 282

FIXED type MIX bus

..................... 44

FRAME RATE

............................. 163

Freeze effect

................................ 109

Front panel

................................... 18

Function Name

........................... 149

Function parameters

................... 150

FX RTN channels 1–4

.................... 34

FX RTN layer

......................... 39, 151

Gain.............................................. 59

Adjusting

............................... 148

Gain reduction

....................... 102

Gate

............................................ 102

Operations

............................... 64

GATE LIBRARY

..................... 64, 268

GATE Library List

....................... 291

GATE PARAM

............................ 264

GEQ

GEQ ASSIGN

......................... 157

GEQ function

......................... 156

GEQ LIBRARY

....................... 158

GEQ PARAM

.................. 110, 156

Global

............................ 20, 151, 152

EFFECT functions

.................. 152

GEQ function

......................... 156

METER function

.................... 209

MIDI REMOTE function

....... 171

MON/CUE function

.............. 212

SCENE function

..................... 159

SYS/W.CLOCK function

........ 199

UTILITY function

.................. 186

GLOBAL PASTE

.................... 89, 170

Global Paste function

.................... 89

GPI

............................................. 177

Calibrating

............................. 125

General Purpose Interface

...... 123

GPI IN

................................... 123

GPI IN MONITOR

................ 178

GPI indicator

......................... 150

GPI OUT

........................ 126, 178

TALLY

............................ 127, 179

USER DEFINED KEYS

........... 127

Graphic EQ

................................. 110

Patching

................................. 110

Group

........................................... 57

Cue and Solo

............................ 95

Grouping

...................................... 73

ASSIGN MODE section

............ 73

DCA

......................................... 73

HA (Head Amp) .................... 36, 206

HA indicator

............................... 150

HA LIBRARY

............... 208, 225, 260

HORIZONTAL PAIR

............. 45, 200

HPF (High Pass Filter)

.................. 61

Operations

............................... 65

I/O card ........................................ 29

Indicator

..................................... 150

Initializing

................................... 147

Input

.............................. 20, 151, 252

ø/ATT 1-48

............................ 262

ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN

.............. 262

ø/EQ function

........................ 260

CH 1-12

................................. 267

CH 1-24

.......................... 258, 270

CH 13-24

............................... 267

CH 25-36

............................... 267

CH 25-48

............................... 270

CH 37-48

............................... 267

CH COPY

.............................. 289

CH LIBRARY

......................... 289

CH to MIX

............................. 274

CH VIEW

.............................. 286

COMP LIBRARY

................... 269

COMP LINK ASSIGN

............ 273

COMP PARAM

...................... 266

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

........... 271

DCA/GROUP function

.......... 271

DELAY function

..................... 270

DIRECT OUT PATCH

........... 253

......................................... 261

EQ LIBRARY

......................... 263

EQ LINK ASSIGN

.................. 272

EQ PARAM

............................ 260

EQ STIN/FXRTN

................... 261

FADER VIEW

........................ 288

FIX ASSIGN VIEW

................ 282

GATE LIBRARY

..................... 268

GATE PARAM

....................... 264

GATE/COMP function

........... 264

HA LIBRARY

......................... 260

HA/INSERT function

............. 258

INSERT

.................................. 259

INSERT PATCH

.................... 254

INSERT STIN

........................ 259

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

................................. 256

LCR

....................................... 283

M/S

........................................ 285

MIX SEND VIEW

.................. 280

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

........ 272

NAME

.................................... 257

PAN/ROUTING function

....... 274

PATCH

.................................. 252

PATCH function

.................... 252

PATCH LIBRARY

.................. 257

SIGNAL FLOW

...................... 287

ST IN

.............................. 267, 270

STIN/FXRTN

......................... 258

SURR PARAM

....................... 283

SURR VIEW

........................... 285

VIEW function

....................... 286

Input a character

........................... 26

Assigning a name

...................... 26

INPUT CH layer

......................... 151

Input channel

....... 12, 33, 258, 267, 270

AD IN section

........................... 35

Channel strip

...................... 37, 39

FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE

section

........................ 40

FX RTN channels 1–4

............... 34

Input channels 1–48

................. 33

ST IN channels 1–4

................... 33

INPUT CUE indicator

................. 150

INPUT DCA/GROUP function

... 271

COMP LINK ASSIGN

............ 273

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

........... 271

EQ LINK ASSIGN

.................. 272

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

........ 272

INPUT DELAY function

............. 270

Input Gain Reduction

.................. 211

INPUT GATE/COMP function

... 264

COMP LIBRARY

.................... 269

COMP PARAM

...................... 266

GATE LIBRARY

..................... 268

GATE PARAM

....................... 264

Input channel

......................... 267

ST IN

..................................... 267

INPUT GR

........................... 102, 211

INPUT HA/INSERT function

...... 258

CH 1-24

................................. 258

HA LIBRARY

......................... 260

Input channel

......................... 258

INSERT

.................................. 259

STIN/FXRTN

......................... 258

INPUT METER

........................... 209

INPUT ø/EQ function

................. 260

ø/ATT 1-48

............................ 262

ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN

.............. 262

......................................... 261

EQ PARAM

............................ 260

EQ STIN/FXRTN

................... 261

INPUT EQ LIBRARY

............. 263

Input patch

................................... 66

INPUT PATCH function

............. 252

DIRECT OUT PATCH

........... 253

INPUT PATCH LIBRARY

...... 257

INSERT PATCH

.................... 254

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

................................. 256

NAME

.................................... 257

INPUT SOLO SAFE

.................... 219

Index

360 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

INPUT VIEW function ............... 286

CH COPY

.............................. 289

CH VIEW

.............................. 286

FADER VIEW

........................ 288

INPUT CH LIBRARY

............. 289

SIGNAL FLOW

...................... 287

Input/output characteristics

......... 348

INSERT

....................................... 259

INSERT IN MIX 1-24

.................. 224

INSERT PATCH

............ 70, 221, 254

INSERT POINT

.......................... 222

INSERT STIN

............................. 259

INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT

.............. 70, 72, 105, 256

Inserting

External device

......................... 69

Internal effect into a channel

... 105

Insert-out and insert-in

Patching

................................... 70

Internal memory

Initializing

.............................. 147

KEY IN CUE indicator ................ 150

Keyboard

...................................... 21

Knobs

..................................... 19, 25

LATCH....................................... 176

Layer

....................................... 37, 39

[CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys

...... 37

[ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys

INPUT CH

............................. 151

ST IN/FX RTN

....................... 151

LCR

..................................... 242, 283

LCR [B] indicator

........................ 150

LCR indicator

.............................. 150

LEARN

....................................... 176

Level Diagram

........... End of Manual

LFE

............................................. 136

Library

COMP LIBRARY

................... 269

EFFECT LIBRARY

................. 155

GATE LIBRARY

..................... 268

GEQ LIBRARY

....................... 158

HA LIBRARY

.................. 225, 260

INPUT CH LIBRARY

............. 289

INPUT EQ LIBRARY

............. 263

INPUT PATCH LIBRARY

...... 257

OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

......... 251

OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY

.. 223

Linking

......................................... 73

ASSIGN MODE section

............ 73

Compressor Link

...................... 77

EQ Link

.................................... 77

LOAD

......................................... 195

ADVANCED mode

................ 196

BASIC mode

.......................... 196

CSV IMPORT mode

.............. 197

....................................... 130

M/S............................................. 285

Manual organize

............................ 13

MATRIX channels 1–8

.................. 48

MATRIX section

........................... 55

MATRIX/ST function

.................. 238

LCR

........................................ 242

MATRIX/ST ROUTING

......... 238

MIX to MATRIX VIEW

......... 240

SURR SETUP

......................... 244

MATRIX/STEREO

....... 227, 231, 233

Memory cards

............................. 128

METER function

......................... 209

INPUT GR

............................. 211

INPUT METER

...................... 209

OUTPUT GR

......................... 211

OUTPUT METER

.................. 210

Meter section

........................ 100, 150

Meters

......................................... 100

Metering point

....................... 101

MIDI

........................................... 113

Assigning MIDI messages

....... 117

MIDI events

........................... 122

MIDI remote channels

............ 121

MIDI CTRL CHANGE

......... 115, 174

MIDI Data Format

...................... 336

MIDI EVENT

.............................. 159

MIDI Implementation Chart

....... 357

MIDI indicator

............................ 150

MIDI PGM CHANGE

.......... 113, 173

MIDI REMOTE

................... 117, 175

MIDI REMOTE function

............ 171

DME CONTROL

................... 182

FADER START

...................... 179

GPI

........................................ 177

LATCH

.................................. 176

LEARN

................................... 176

MMC

.............................. 180, 181

RS422

.............................. 180, 181

TALLY

................................... 179

TRANSPORT

......................... 181

MIDI SETUP

............................... 171

mini-YGDAI I/O cards

.................. 29

MIX 1-24

..................... 227, 231, 233

MIX channel output signals

........... 52

MIX channels 1–24

........................ 47

MIX section

........................... 49, 150

MIX SEND VIEW

....................... 280

MIX to MATRIX VIEW

.............. 240

MIXER SETUP

...................... 45, 200

PAIR MODE

.......................... 200

MMC

................................... 180, 181

MON/CUE function

.................... 212

2TR I/O

.................................. 215

CUE/SOLO

............................ 217

MONITOR

............................ 216

OSCILLATOR

........................ 213

TALKBACK

........................... 212

Monitor

........................... 91, 93, 216

CUE mode

............................... 94

SOLO mode

............................. 94

MONITOR sections

...................... 91

Mouse

........................................... 21

MOVE DOWN

........................... 163

MOVE UP

................................... 162

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

..... 235, 272

Mute Groups

........................... 73, 75

MUTE MASTER

......................... 151

NAME......................................... 257

NEXT SCENE/NEXT EVENT

..... 149

NOISE GATE

................................ 59

NRPN parameter assignments

..... 331

OFFSET TIME ............................ 163

Operating section

.......................... 10

Option card

................................... 30

types of I/O card

....................... 29

OSC indicator

............................. 150

OSCILLATOR

.................. 97, 99, 213

Output

........................... 20, 151, 220

CH COPY

.............................. 249

CH LIBRARY

......................... 251

CH VIEW

............................... 245

COMP function

...................... 229

COMP LIBRARY

.................... 232

COMP LINK ASSIGN

............ 237

COMP PARAM

...................... 229

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

........... 234

DCA/GROUP function

........... 234

DELAY function

..................... 233

EQ function

............................ 225

EQ LIBRARY

.......................... 228

EQ LINK ASSIGN

.................. 236

EQ PARAM

............................ 225

FADER VIEW

........................ 249

HA LIBRARY

......................... 225

INSERT function

.................... 224

INSERT IN MATRIX/STE-

REO/MONITOR

...... 224

INSERT IN MIX 1-24

............. 224

INSERT PATCH

.................... 221

INSERT POINT

..................... 222

LCR

........................................ 242

MATRIX/ST function

............. 238

MATRIX/ST ROUTING

......... 238

MATRIX/STEREO

.................. 227, 231, 233

MIX 1-24

................. 227, 231, 233

MIX to MATRIX VIEW

.......... 240

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

........ 235

PATCH

.................................. 220

PATCH function

.................... 220

PATCH LIBRARY

.................. 223

SIGNAL FLOW

...................... 247

SURR SETUP

......................... 244

VIEW function

....................... 245

Output channel

....................... 12, 47

Channel strip

............................ 53

MATRIX channels 1–8

............. 48

MATRIX section

....................... 55

MIX channels 1–24

................... 47

MIX section

.............................. 49

STEREO A/B channels

.............. 47

PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 361

Information shown

in the display

Function

Global

functions

Output

functions

Input

functions

Appendices

OUTPUT COMP function .......... 229

COMP LIBRARY

................... 232

COMP PARAM

..................... 229

MATRIX/STEREO

................. 231

MIX 1-24

............................... 231

OUTPUT CUE indicator

............. 150

OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function

................................. 234

COMP LINK ASSIGN

............ 237

DCA GROUP ASSIGN

........... 234

EQ LINK ASSIGN

.................. 236

MUTE GROUP ASSIGN

........ 235

OUTPUT DELAY function

......... 233

OUTPUT EQ function

................ 225

EQ PARAM

........................... 225

MATRIX/STEREO

................. 227

MIX 1-24

............................... 227

OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY

......... 228

Output Gain Reduction

............... 211

OUTPUT GR

....................... 102, 211

OUTPUT INSERT function

........ 224

HA LIBRARY

......................... 225

INSERT IN MIX 1-24

............. 224

OUTPUT METER

....................... 210

Output patch

................................ 67

OUTPUT PATCH function

......... 220

INSERT PATCH

.................... 221

INSERT POINT

..................... 222

OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY

.. 223

OUTPUT PORT ATT

................. 207

Output signals from MATRIX

channels

..................... 56

OUTPUT SOLO SAFE

................ 219

OUTPUT VIEW function

........... 245

CH COPY

.............................. 249

CH VIEW

.............................. 245

FADER VIEW

........................ 249

OUTPUT CH LIBRARY

......... 251

SIGNAL FLOW

...................... 247

Overview of the PM5D

.................. 10

PAIR MODE.......................... 45, 200

Pairing

Enabling/disabling

.................... 45

Pairing MIX channels

............... 51

PAN/ROUTING function

........... 274

CH to MIX

............................. 274

FIX ASSIGN VIEW

................ 282

LCR

....................................... 283

M/S

........................................ 285

MIX SEND VIEW

.................. 280

SURR PARAM

....................... 283

SURR VIEW

.......................... 285

Panels

........................................... 14

Parameter Lock

........................... 142

Parameters that can be assigned to

control changes

......... 312

PASTE MODE

.............................. 89

Patch

............................................. 66

Patching

Insert-out and insert-in

............ 70

Pattern

........................................ 136

Phantom power

............................ 36

Phase

............................................. 59

Pin Assignment

........................... 355

PM5D, PM5D-RH model

.............. 11

Pointer

.......................................... 19

PREFERENCE 1/2

....................... 186

PRESENT TIME

......................... 149

PREVIEW indicator

...................... 82

PREVIEW mode

........................... 82

Program changes

......................... 113

Rear panel ..................................... 16

RECALL SAFE

....................... 86, 166

Recall Safe function

....................... 86

Reference section

......................... 149

Remote control

........................... 113

Control changes

..................... 115

MIDI

...................................... 113

MIDI Remote

......................... 117

MIDI remote channels

............ 121

Program changes

.................... 113

Restoring to the default state

.......... 32

RS422

................................... 180, 181

RS422 indicator

........................... 150

SAVE ................................... 128, 192

ADVANCED mode

................ 193

BASIC mode

.......................... 192

CSV EXPORT mode

............... 193

Scene

...................................... 79, 159

Restoring to the default state

..... 32

Scene memory

........................ 79, 149

Auto Store function

.................. 83

Basic operation

......................... 81

BLANK SKIP

.......................... 160

DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN

..... 161

Direct Recall function

............... 83

EVENT LIST

.......................... 161

Fade function

........................... 87

FADE TIME

........................... 167

GLOBAL PASTE

.................... 170

Global Paste function

............... 89

GPI OUT CONTROL

............. 160

MIDI EVENT

......................... 159

PREVIEW mode

...................... 82

Program Change Table

........... 308

RECALL SAFE

........................ 166

Recall Safe function

.................. 86

Recalling

.................................. 82

REMOTE TRANSPORT

......... 160

SCENE

................................... 159

SCENE FUNCTION

............... 160

SCENE function

..................... 159

SCENE MEMORY section

........ 80

SELECTIVE RECALL

............. 164

Selective Recall function

........... 84

Storing

..................................... 81

TRACKING RECALL

............. 169

Tracking Recall function

........... 88

Scroll

............................................. 24

Scroll bar

....................................... 20

SECURITY

.................................. 198

Security functions

........................ 141

Console Lock

.......................... 142

Parameter Lock

...................... 142

Selected channel

.................... 57, 150

Editing parameters

................... 62

SELECTED CHANNEL section

Selecting the word clock master

..... 31

SELECTIVE RECALL

............ 84, 164

Selective Recall function

................ 84

Sending signals

from the MATRIX section to

output jacks

................ 55

from the STEREO A/B chan-

nels to MATRIX buses

from the STEREO A/B chan-

nels to output jacks

..... 54

to a MIX bus

............................ 43

to MATRIX buses

..................... 50

to the STEREO bus

............. 42, 51

Setup

............................................. 27

Word clock

............................... 31

Shown in the display

.................... 149

SIGNAL FLOW

.................... 247, 287

Signals sent

to a VARI type MIX bus

............ 52

to MATRIX buses

..................... 56

Solo function

................................. 96

SOLO indicator

........................... 150

SOLO mode

.................................. 94

SOLO ON/OFF

........................... 217

Specifications

.............................. 346

ST IN

................................... 267, 270

ST IN channels 1–4

........................ 33

ST IN layer

............................ 39, 151

START OFFSET button

............... 168

START TIME

.............................. 163

STEREO

........................................ 60

STEREO A/B channels

................... 47

STEREO B

................................... 201

STIN/FXRTN

.............................. 258

Surround

SURR PARAM

....................... 283

SURR SETUP

......................... 244

SURR VIEW

........................... 285

Surround mode

............ 132, 133, 201

Surround pan

....................... 132, 201

Divergence

............................. 136

LFE

........................................ 136

Notes

...................................... 137

Pattern

................................... 136

Surround buses

...................... 133

Synchronization

............................ 12

SYS/W.CLOCK function

............. 199

CASCADE

.............................. 204

DITHER

................................. 207

HA (Head Amp)

..................... 206

HA LIBRARY

......................... 208

MIXER SETUP

....................... 200

OUTPUT PORT ATT

............. 207

WORD CLOCK

..................... 199

Index

362 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section

Tabs ....................................... 19, 150

TALKBACK

..................... 97, 98, 212

TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections

................................... 97

TALLY

........................................ 179

TAP TEMPO

BPM

....................................... 153

Tap Tempo function

................... 108

Tapping

........................................ 22

TB indicator

................................ 150

TIME CODE

........................ 149, 163

TIME CODE SETUP

................... 163

Top panel

...................................... 14

TRACKING indicator

................. 150

TRACKING RECALL

............. 88, 169

Tracking Recall function

................ 88

TRANSPORT

.............................. 181

Troubleshooting

.......................... 345

USB

USB TO HOST connector

...... 146

USE AS CENTER BUS

......... 201, 216

USE AS STEREO BUS

.......... 201, 216

USER DEFINE

............................ 189

USER DEFINED KEY BANK

....... 151

USER DEFINED KEYS

......... 138, 179

USER DEFINED section

.............. 138

User interface

................................ 19

Using an internal effect via a MIX

bus

........................... 104

UTILITY function

....................... 186

FADER ASSIGN

..................... 197

LOAD

.................................... 195

PREFERENCE 1/2

.................. 186

SAVE

..................................... 192

SECURITY

............................. 198

USER DEFINE

....................... 189

VARI type MIX bus....................... 44

VERTICAL PAIR

................... 45, 200

Warning Messages....................... 343

Word clock

...................... 12, 31, 199

PM5D/PM5D-RH Block Diagram

CH 1(...48)

ATT

INPUT

DELAY

CUE

PreEQ/

PreFader/

PostON

DIRECT OUT

Keyin

Self Pre EQ/

Self Post EQ/

Mix21-24 OUT/

CH1-8 Post EQ/

CH9-16 Post EQ/

...

CH41-48 Post EQ

LINK ON/OFF

PAN

HPF

TO ST

MIX1-24

ST A

LEVEL/

DCA1-8

MIX1

MIX24

FIX

VARI

MIX2

Keyin

Self Pre EQ/

Self Post EQ/

Mix21-24 OUT/

CH1-8 Post EQ/

CH9-16 Post EQ/

...

CH41-48 Post EQ

LINK ON/OFF

MIX PAIR

FIXED MIX PAN

PFL/

AFL/

Post PAN

KEYIN CUE

INSERT

INSERT IN

INSERT OUT

PreEQ/

PostEQ/

PreDelay/

PostFader

[INPUT]

(1-48)

CUE R

PHONES

LEVEL

MONITOR

LEVEL

CUE L

CASCADE OUT

From CASCADE IN SELECT

MONITOR OUT

MONITOR SELECT

INPUT/

OUTPUT/

DCA

TRIM

2TR IN D1

STEREO B

STEREO A

22TR IN D3

22TR IN D2

22TR IN A1

2TR IN A2

MONITOR

DELAY

MONITOR

DELAY

GEQ 1(...12)

INSERT OUT

INSERT IN

31BAND

GEQ

METERMETER

ST IN 1-4

Pair configuration of Mono channel

METER

LEVEL/

DCA7-8

[STEREO A]

ONBAL

INSERT INSERT

INSERT

OUTPUT

DELAY

INSERT

to MATRIX

To OUTPUT PATCH

[STEREO B]

MONO

To OUTP UT PATCH

INSERT

PAN

MIX to STEREO

[MIX OUT]

(1~24)

LEVEL/

DCA7-8

PreFader/

PostFader/

PostON

INSERT INSERT

OUTPUT

DELAY

INSERT

Same as the mix master 1

to MATRIX

To OUTPUT PATCH

METER

CUE

PAN

TO ST

LEVEL/

DCA1-8

MIX1

MIX24

FIX

VARI

MIX2

MIX PAIR

FIXED MIX PAN

PFL/

AFL/

POST PAN

MATRIX3

MATRIX4

MATRIX5

MATRIX6

MATRIX7

MATRIX8

MATRIX2

MATRIX1

[MATRIX OUT]

(1~8)

INSERT

INSERT INSERT

INSERT

OUTPUT

DELAY

Same as the above

STEREO B-L

STEREO B-R

STEREO A-L

STEREO A-R

LEVEL

MIX 1

MIX24

Same as the matrix master 1

To OUTP UT PATCH

Pre EQ/

PreFader/

PostON

CUE OUT

LEVEL

CUE OUT

INPUT

+48V

INSERT OUT

INSERT IN

TO TALKBACK SELECT

SIGNAL

PEAK

GAIN

INSERT

PAD

INPUT 1-48

OFF

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1

2TR OUT DIGITAL 2

2TR OUT DIGITAL 3

SRC

SLOT1

DITHER

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

DITHER

STEREO B

MATRIX1-8

MIX1-24

DIRECT OUT 1-STIN-4R

INSERT OUT

OUTPUT PATCH

SLOT1 16

SLOT2 16

SLOT3

SLOT4 16

STEREO A

DITHER

OSC OUT(Lch)

TB OUT

MONITOR

DELAY

Same as the monaural input

Same as the stereo master A

TALKBACK

To OUTPUT PATCH

LEVEL

USE IN (1-48)

AS TALKBACK

To OUTP UT PATC H

Same as the above

IN 1-48

CUE OUT

DELAY

CUE OUT

DELAY

MONO

CUE

Same as the stereo master L

To OUTPUT PATCH

MONO

To MONITOR SELECT

DIM

CUE/SOLO LOGIC

AES/EBU

COAXIAL

METER

+48V

OFF

MATRIX1-8

MIX1-24

DEFINE

BYPASS

OUT ATT.

OSC(L)

OSC(R)

Pink Noise

MS-

DECODE

POST

TO ST

ST B

(C)

CU E

CUE

OUT ATT.

To OUTPUT PATCH

OUT ATT.

To OUTP UT PATCH

OUT ATT.

PAN

POST

TO ST

CUE

CSR

Keyin

Self Pre EQ/

Self Post EQ/

Mix21-24 OUT/

Stereo A,B,Matrix1-8 Post EQ

LINK ON/OFF

Keyin

Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix21-24 OUT/

Mix1-12 Post EQ/Mix13-24 Post EQ

LINK ON/OFF

Keyin

Self Pre EQ/

Self Post EQ/

Mix21-24 OUT/

Stereo A,B,Matrix1-8 Post EQ

LINK ON/OFF

PAN

BI DIRECTION

From

CASCADE IN

SELECT

BI DIRECTION

From

CASCADE IN

SELECT

Pre Fad er/

PostFader/

PostON

CSR

ATT

METER

HPF

OUT ATT.

PreATT

METER

InsertIn

METER

4BAND

OUT

METERMETER

GATE COMP

Keyin Filter

OUT

METER

OUT

METER

KEYIN

INSERT

METER

PostFader

PostON

4BAND

OUT

METERMETER

PreATT

METER

PostFader

PostON

TALKBACK

SELECT

SPECTRUM

ANALYZER

8BAND

OUT

METERMETER

METER

KEYIN

METER

OUT

COMP

8BAND

OUT

METERMETER

METER

KEYIN

METER

OUT

COMP

4BAND

OUT

METERMETER

KEYIN

METER

OUT

COMP

METER

PostFader

PostON

PostDelay

PostFader

PostON

PostDelay

METER

PostFader

PostON

PostDelay

CASCADE

OUT

ON/OFF

Lch

METER

Rch

METER

GAIN

ST IN 1-4 L

[ST IN]

(1-4)

GAIN

ST IN 1-4 R

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

ST IN L

ST IN R

PM5D(NonRecallable HA)

PM5D RH(Recallable HA)

INPUT

+48V

+48V TO TALKBACK

O TALKBACK SELECT

SIGNAL

PEAK

GAIN

OFF

+48V MASTER

OFF

INPUT 1-48

FX7 OUT L/R

FX8 OUT L/R

FX1 OUT L/R

FX4 OUT L/R

FX6 OUT L/R

FX2 OUT L/R

FX3 OUT L/R

FX5 OUT L/R

INPUT PATCH

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

FX7 IN L/R

FX8 IN L/R

FX1 IN L/R

FX4 IN L/R

FX6 IN L/R

FX2 IN L/R

FX3 IN L/R

FX5 IN L/R

EFFECT

1-8

EFFECT

MIX 1~24

INSERT OUT

SELECT

METER

SLOT1 1-16

SLOT2 1-16

SLOT3 1-16

SLOT4 1-16

2TR IN D1 L/R

2TR IN D2 L/R

2TR IN D3 L/R

2TR IN DIGITAL 1

SRC

2TR IN DIGITAL 2

SRC

2TR IN DIGITAL 3

SRC

AES/EBU

COAXIAL

2TR IN ANALOG 1 AD

2TR IN ANALOG 2

To MONITOR SELECT

2TR IN A1 L/R

2TR IN A2 L/R

To BUS SUMMING

CASCADE IN

CASCADE IN SELECT

SIGNAL

PEAK

GAIN

OFF

SIGNAL

PEAK

GAIN

OFF

ST IN L

ST IN R

ST IN 1-4 L

ST IN 1-4 R

x 48

x 4

[INPUT]

(1-48)

x 48

[ST IN]

(1-4)

x 4

INSERT

PreFader

LEVEL/

DCA7-8

PreFader

To METER

PreATT

PreGate

PreATT

To METER

To METE R

PreEQ

To METE R

PreEQ

To METER

PreEQ

INSERT

MONITOR L,R,C

To OUTPUT PATCH

INSERT OUT

PreEQ/

PostEQ/

PreFader/

PostOn

INSERT OUT

PreEQ/

PostEQ/

PreFader/

PostOn

INSERT OUT

PreEQ/

PostEQ/

PreFader/

PostOn

PreGate

TB OUT

OSC OUT

To OUTPUT PATCH

PreEQ

PreHPF

PreFader

PostON

To OUTPUT PATCH

From 2TR I N D IGITAL1 -3,

ANALOG1-2

Burst Noise

HPF LPF

OUT ATT.

DIM

INSERT

PFL/

PostON

PFL/

PostON

PreON/

PostON

PFL/

PostON

CASCADE

ON/OFF

FX RTN 1-4

Pair configuration of Mono channel

External CUE

SELECT

SLOT1-4(1-16)

External

CUE

SELECT

PM5D Level Diagram

Max. DSP Noise Floor

PHASE

GATEAD

CASCADE OUT

CASCADE IN

Digital Clipping Level

Max. Output

Digital

Bit

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

-170

-190

-200

-210

dBu

Analog

dBFS

-180

[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]

[0dBFS = Full Scale]

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

[+10dBu]

Nominal

Input

DigitalAnalog Digital Analog

ATT. INSERT ONCOMP DELAY PAN

DELAY

BUS

Adder

COMP

MASTER

LEVEL ON

MASTER

INSERT INSERT INSERT

INSERT INSERT BAL

OUTPUT

PATCH

INPUT

PATCH

[+4dBu]

HPF

DECDE

MS-

LEVEL

DCA

INSERT INSERT

dBu

Analog

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

Nominal Output

[+24dBu]

[+4dBu]

OUT

DCA

OUT

(x2)(x8/4)(x8)(x4)

INSERT IN

INININ

OUT OUT OUT

+30

Nominal Output

(75mW@8Ω)

(150mW@8Ω)

Max Output

[The position of the level

control is 10dB lowered

from Max]

PHONES

MONITOR OUT[L,R,C]

STEREO A,B[L,R]

CUE OUT[L,R]

MATRIX OUT1-8

MIX OUT1-24

default setting

INSERT OUT 1-48

GAIN

PAD

INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MIN.,PAD ON)

ST IN (GAIN MIN.)

InputMax. [+30dBu]1

InputMax. [+24dBu]2

Nominal

Input

InputMax. [-14dBu]3

[-34dBu]

NominalInput3

InputMax. [-40dBu]4

[-60dBu]

Nominal

Input

INSERT IN 1-48

2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 [L,R] (default setting)

ST IN (GAIN MAX.)

INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MAX.,PAD OFF)

TALKBACK

InputMax. [-30dBu]5

[-50dBu]

NominalInput5

PM5D-RH Level Diagram

Max. DSP Noise Floor

PHASE

GATEAD

CASCADE OUT

CASCADE IN

Digital Clipping Level

Max. Output

Digital

Bit

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

-170

-190

-200

-210

GAIN

dBu

Analog

dBFS

-180

[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]

[0dBFS = Full Scale]

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

Input

Max.

[+30dBu]

[+10dBu]

[-62dBu]

[-42dBu]

Nominal

Input

Nominal

Input

DigitalAnalog

InputMax.

Digital Analog

ATT. INSERT ONCOMP DELAY PAN

DELAY

BUS

Adder

COMP

MASTER

LEVEL ON

MASTER

INSERT INSERT INSERT

INSERT INSERT BAL

OUTPUT

PATCH

INPUT

PATCH

HPF

DECDE

MS-

LEVEL

DCA

INSERT INSERT

dBu

Analog

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

Nominal Output

[+24dBu]

[+4dBu]

STEREO A,B[L,R]

MONITOR OUT[L,R,C]

CUE OUT[L,R]

OUT

DCA

OUT

(x2)(x8/4)(x8)(x4)

INSERT IN

INININ

OUT OUT OUT

+30

MATRIX OUT1-8

MIX OUT1-24

default setting

Nominal Output

(75mW@8Ω)

(150mW@8Ω)

Max Output

PHONES

INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MIN.)

ST IN (GAIN MIN.)

2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 [L,R] (default setting)

INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MAX.)

ST IN (GAIN MAX.)

TALKBACK

InputMax. [+24dBu]

[+4dBu]

Nominal

Input

[-50dBu]

Nominal

Input

[-30dBu]InputMax.

[The position of the level

control is 10 dB lowered

from Max]

For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha

representative or the authorized distributor listed below.

Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou

au distributeur le plus proche de vous ﬁgurant dans la liste suivante.

Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten

Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen

Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.

Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana

o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: 416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: 714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V.

Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149,

Col. Guadalupe del Moral

C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México

Tel: 55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400

Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil

Tel: 011-3085-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Sucursal de Argentina

Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: 1-4371-7021

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella,

Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM

Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, England

Tel: 01908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Switzerland

Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland

Tel: 01-383 3990

AUSTRIA

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: 01-60203900

THE NETHERLANDS

Yamaha Music Central Europe,

Branch Nederland

Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: 0347-358 040

BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH,

Branch Belgium

Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels,

Belgium

Tel: 02-726 6032

FRANCE

Yamaha Musique France

BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France

Tel: 01-64-61-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.

Combo Division

Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy

Tel: 02-935-771

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A.

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230

Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain

Tel: 91-639-8888

SWEDEN

Yamaha Scandinavia AB

J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1

Box 30053

S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: 031 89 34 00

DENMARK

YS Copenhagen Liaison Ofﬁce

Generatorvej 8B

DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark

Tel: 44 92 49 00

NORWAY

Norsk ﬁlial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB

Grini Næringspark 1

N-1345 Østerås, Norway

Tel: 67 16 77 70

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

TURKEY/CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH

Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: 04101-3030

OTHER COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Gulf FZE

LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone

P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E.

Tel: +971-4-881-5868

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West),

Jingan, Shanghai, China

Tel: 021-6247-2211

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)

PT. Nusantik

Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: 21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong,

Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea

Tel: 02-3770-0660

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.

Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya,

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: 3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.

#03-11 A-Z Building

140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015

Tel: 747-4374

TAIWAN

Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd.

3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei.

Taiwan 104, R.O.C.

Tel: 02-2511-8688

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 ﬂoor

Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan

Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: 02-215-2626

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2317

AUSTRALIA

Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

Victoria 3006, Australia

Tel: 3-9693-5111

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yamaha Corporation,

Asia-Paciﬁc Music Marketing Group

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2313

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

HEAD OFFICE

Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division

Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2441

PA10

PM5D / PM5D-RHPM5D / PM5D-RH

Owner’s ManualOwner’s Manual

This document is printed on recycled

chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink.

U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation

Printed in Japan

WC42160 405IPAP2.2-01A0

Yamaha Manual Library

http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/

Transcripción de documentos

DIGITAL MIXING CONSOLE PM5D / PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B) Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The above warning is located on the rear of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 12 13 14 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as power-supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. (98-6500) ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (lithium caution) NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS • Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. • This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. • Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel. 030-2828425 • For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel : 030-2828425 • Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. • Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. (lithium disposal) This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (mercury) PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Use only the specified power supply (PW800W or an equivalent recommended by Yamaha). • Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place containers on it containing liquids which might spill into any openings. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. Do not open • Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. The device contains no user-serviceable parts. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. If you notice any abnormality • If the power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged, or if there is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device, or if any unusual smells or smoke should appear to be caused by it, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • If this device or the power supply should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Location • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • When transporting or moving the device, always use four or more people. • When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Avoid setting all equalizer controls and faders to their maximum. Depending on the condition of the connected devices, doing so may cause feedback and may damage the speakers. • Before moving the device, remove all connected cables. • Do not turn the PW800W POWER switch OFF and ON in rapid succession. Doing so can result in excessive current flow that can cause damage. Wait at least 5 seconds before turning the POWER switch ON after it has been turned OFF. • Do not expose the device to excessive dust or vibrations, or extreme cold or heat (such as in direct sunlight, near a heater, or in a car during the day) to prevent the possibility of panel disfiguration or damage to the internal components. • Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the front and rear to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. In particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down, or place it in any poorly-ventilated location, such as a bookcase or closet. • Do not use the device in the vicinity of a TV, radio, stereo equipment, mobile phone, or other electric devices. Otherwise, the device, TV, or radio may generate noise. (5)-1 1/2 Connections Backup battery • Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to minimum. Handling caution • This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, the internal data of current scene is retained. However, if the backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. When the backup battery is running low, the LCD display indicates “Low Battery!” during operation or “No Battery!” when starting up the system. In this case, have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery. • Do not insert your fingers or hand in any gaps or openings on the device (vents etc.). • Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. • Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. XLR-type connectors are wired as follows (IEC60268 standard): pin 1: ground, pin 2: hot (+), and pin 3: cold (-). Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the device is not in use. The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualifi ed Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components. (5)-1 2/2 Table of Contents — Operating section 1 Introduction ........................................ 10 Thank you................................................................... 10 An overview of the PM5D........................................... 10 Differences between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH model ............................................. 11 About the channel structure of the PM5D.......................... 12 Regarding word clock synchronization ....................... 12 How this manual is organized..................................... 13 Conventions in this manual ................................................. 13 2 Top, front, and rear panels................. 14 Top panel ................................................................... 14 Rear panel................................................................... 16 Front panel ................................................................. 18 3 Basic operation on the PM5D............. 19 About the various types of user interface .................... 19 User interface in the display.................................................. 19 DISPLAY ACCESS section ................................................... 20 Data Entry section ................................................................. 20 External user interface........................................................... 21 Basic operation ........................................................... 22 Click........................................................................................ 22 Drag ........................................................................................ 22 Drag and drop........................................................................ 22 Accessing a desired screen..................................................... 23 Moving the cursor ................................................................. 23 Scrolling the screen................................................................ 24 Operating the buttons ........................................................... 25 Adjusting the setting of a knob or fader .............................. 25 Assigning a name................................................................... 26 4 Connections and setup ....................... 27 Audio connections ...................................................... 27 Analog audio connections .................................................... 27 Analog output connections .................................................. 28 Digital input/output connections ........................................ 29 Installing an option card ....................................................... 30 Word clock connections and settings.......................... 31 About word clock .................................................................. 31 Selecting the word clock master ........................................... 31 Restoring the current scene to the default state .......... 32 5 Input channel operations ................... 33 About the input channels ........................................... 33 AD IN section.............................................................. 35 Items in the AD IN section ................................................... 35 Controlling the input sensitivity and phantom power (+48V) of the head amp .............................................. 36 INPUT channel strip .................................................... 37 Items in the INPUT channel strip........................................ 37 ST IN/FX RTN channel strip ........................................ 39 Items in the ST IN/FX RTN channel strip........................... 39 FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section ........................ 40 Items in the FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section...... 40 Various operations for input channels ......................... 41 Selecting the function of the encoders................................. 41 6 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Exchanging the fader and encoder functions ...................... 41 Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO bus ................................................................................. 42 Sending the signal from the input channel to a MIX bus ................................................................................. 43 Enabling/disabling pairing.................................................... 45 6 Output channel operations .................47 About the output channels..........................................47 MIX section .................................................................49 Items in the MIX section....................................................... 49 Operations in the MIX section ............................................. 49 STEREO A/B channel strip............................................53 Items in the STEREO A/B channel strip.............................. 53 Operations in the STEREO A/B channel strip .................... 54 MATRIX section...........................................................55 Items in the MATRIX section............................................... 55 Operations in the MATRIX section ..................................... 55 7 Using the Selected Channel section ...57 About the SELECTED CHANNEL section......................57 Items in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ...................57 GROUP................................................................................... 57 CHANNEL SELECT.............................................................. 58 DELAY.................................................................................... 58 GAIN/ATTENUATION/ø (Gain / Attenuation / Phase)... 59 NOISE GATE ......................................................................... 59 STEREO.................................................................................. 60 COMPRESSOR...................................................................... 60 HPF (High Pass Filter) .......................................................... 61 EQUALIZER .......................................................................... 61 Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section ..........62 Selecting a channel and editing its parameters.................... 62 Compressor operations......................................................... 63 Gate operations...................................................................... 64 EQ/HPF operations ............................................................... 65 8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations ..66 Changing the input patch settings..............................66 Changing the output patch settings ...........................67 Inserting an external device into a channel .................69 Connecting an external device for insertion........................ 69 Patching the insert-out and insert-in................................... 70 Directly outputting the signal of an input channel ......72 9 Grouping and linking ..........................73 About DCA Groups and Mute Groups.........................73 Items in the ASSIGN MODE section ............................73 Items in the DCA strip .................................................73 Using DCA Groups ......................................................74 Assigning channels to DCA groups...................................... 74 Controlling DCA groups....................................................... 75 Using mute groups......................................................75 Assigning channels to mute groups...................................... 75 Controlling mute groups ...................................................... 76 Using the Mute Safe function ............................................... 76 Using EQ Link and Compressor Link............................77 Table of Contents 10 Scene memory..................................79 About scenes .............................................................. 79 Items in the SCENE MEMORY section......................... 80 Using scene memories................................................ 81 Storing a scene ........................................................................81 Recalling a scene.....................................................................82 Using PREVIEW mode ................................................. 82 Using the Auto Store function .................................... 83 Using the Direct Recall function.................................. 83 Using the Selective Recall function ............................. 84 Using the Recall Safe function..................................... 86 Using the Fade function.............................................. 87 Using the Tracking Recall function.............................. 88 Using the Global Paste function.................................. 89 11 Monitor and Cue..............................91 About the MONITOR and CUE sections...................... 91 Using the Monitor function ........................................ 92 Items in the MONITOR section ...........................................92 Monitoring a signal................................................................93 Using the Cue/Solo functions ..................................... 94 Items in the CUE section.......................................................94 About CUE mode and SOLO mode.....................................94 Cue and Solo groups..............................................................95 Using the Cue function..........................................................96 Using the Solo function .........................................................96 12 Talkback and Oscillator....................97 About the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections .............. 97 Items in the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections..............97 Using talkback ............................................................ 98 Using the oscillator ..................................................... 99 13 Meters.............................................100 Items in the meter section ........................................ 100 Switching the meter display ..................................... 100 Switching the metering point................................... 101 Specifying the metering point for input channels ............ 101 Specifying the metering point for output channels.......... 101 Viewing the gain reduction of the internal gates and compressors .................................................. 102 Viewing the gain reduction for input channels ................ 102 Viewing the gain reduction for output channels.............. 102 14 Effects .............................................103 About the internal effects ......................................... 103 Using an internal effect via a MIX bus....................... 104 Inserting an internal effect into a channel................. 105 Basic operations in the effect screen ......................... 106 Recalling settings from the effect library ........................... 106 Editing the effect parameters.............................................. 106 Storing settings in the effect library ................................... 107 Using the Tap Tempo function ................................. 108 Using the Freeze effect ............................................. 109 Using optional Add-On Effects.................................. 109 15 Graphic EQ .....................................110 Patching the graphic EQ ...........................................110 Basic graphic EQ operations......................................111 Controlling the graphic EQ from the display ................... 111 Controlling the graphic EQ from the DCA section.......... 111 16 Remote control ..............................113 MIDI on the PM5D ...................................................113 Using program changes to control events.................113 Using control changes to control events ...................115 Using the MIDI Remote function...............................117 Assigning MIDI messages to controllers ........................... 117 Using MIDI remote channels............................................. 121 Transmitting MIDI events when you switch scenes ...122 Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) ......................123 Using GPI IN ....................................................................... 123 Calibrating the GPI IN ports .............................................. 125 Using GPI OUT................................................................... 126 17 Using memory cards......................128 Using memory cards with the PM5D ........................128 Saving files to a memory card ...................................128 Loading files from a memory card.............................130 18 Surround pan .................................132 About surround pan..................................................132 Bus configuration and operation in surround mode..133 About the surround buses .................................................. 133 How the MIX section will operate ..................................... 133 Basic settings for surround buses...............................134 Controlling surround pan..........................................135 Notes regarding surround pan..................................137 19 Other functions..............................138 Using the user defined keys.......................................138 Items in the USER DEFINED section................................ 138 Assigning functions to the User Defined keys................... 138 Executing functions assigned to the User Defined keys... 139 Using the Fader Assign function................................139 Items in the FADER MODE section.................................. 139 Assigning channels to DCA faders..................................... 139 Controlling the channels assigned to DCA faders ............ 140 Locking the PM5D (Security functions) .....................141 Setting the System Password or Console Password.......... 141 Using Parameter Lock or Console Lock............................ 142 Using cascade connections .......................................143 Making cascade connections .............................................. 143 Basic settings for cascade connection ................................ 143 Selecting the buses used for cascade connection .............. 144 Connecting the PM5D to a computer via USB ..........146 Caution when using the USB TO HOST connector ........ 146 Initializing the PM5D’s internal memory ...................147 Adjusting the faders and input/output gain (Calibration) ..................................................147 Calibrating the faders .......................................................... 148 Adjusting the analog input gain (PM5D-RH model only)............................................................................ 148 Adjusting the output gain................................................... 148 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Table of Contents 7 Table of Contents — Reference section Information shown in the display.......... 149 Output functions .................................... 220 Upper part of the display (always visible).................. 149 Main area of the display............................................ 150 Lower part of the display (always visible) .................. 150 OUTPUT PATCH function ..........................................220 OUTPUT PATCH screen ...................................................220 INSERT PATCH screen ......................................................221 INSERT POINT screen .......................................................222 OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen..................................223 OUTPUT INSERT function..........................................224 INSERT IN MIX 1-24 screen..............................................224 INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR screen ........224 HA LIBRARY screen ...........................................................225 OUTPUT EQ function ................................................225 EQ PARAM (EQ Parameter) screen ..................................225 MIX 1-24 screen...................................................................227 MATRIX/STEREO screen...................................................227 OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY screen..........................................228 OUTPUT COMP function ..........................................229 COMP PARAM (Compressor parameter) screen ............229 MIX 1-24 screen...................................................................231 MATRIX/STEREO screen...................................................231 COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library) screen ................232 OUTPUT DELAY function...........................................233 MIX 1-24 screen...................................................................233 MATRIX/STEREO screen...................................................233 OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function.................................234 DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen............................................234 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen.........................................235 EQ LINK ASSIGN screen....................................................236 COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link assign) screen .237 MATRIX/ST function..................................................238 MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen .........................................238 MIX to MATRIX VIEW screen ..........................................240 LCR screen ...........................................................................242 SURR SETUP screen ...........................................................244 OUTPUT VIEW function.............................................245 CH VIEW (Channel view) screen ......................................245 SIGNAL FLOW screen........................................................247 FADER VIEW screen ..........................................................249 CH COPY (Channel copy) screen......................................249 OUTPUT CH LIBRARY screen .........................................251 Function menu........................................ 151 Global functions...................................... 152 EFFECT functions ...................................................... 152 EFFECT PARAM (Effect parameter) screen ..................... 152 EFFECT ASSIGN screen ..................................................... 154 EFFECT LIBRARY screen................................................... 155 GEQ function............................................................ 156 GEQ PARAM (GEQ parameter) screen ............................ 156 GEQ ASSIGN screen ........................................................... 157 GEQ LIBRARY screen......................................................... 158 SCENE function ........................................................ 159 SCENE screen ...................................................................... 159 EVENT LIST screen ............................................................ 161 SELECTIVE RECALL screen.............................................. 164 RECALL SAFE screen.......................................................... 166 FADE TIME screen ............................................................. 167 TRACKING RECALL screen.............................................. 169 GLOBAL PASTE screen ...................................................... 170 MIDI REMOTE function............................................. 171 MIDI SETUP screen............................................................ 171 MIDI PGM CHANGE (MIDI program change) screen .. 173 MIDI CTRL CHANGE (MIDI control change) screen ... 174 MIDI REMOTE screen ....................................................... 175 GPI screen ............................................................................ 177 FADER START screen ........................................................ 179 TRANSPORT screen ........................................................... 181 DME CONTROL screen..................................................... 182 UTILITY function ....................................................... 186 PREFERENCE 1/2 screens.................................................. 186 USER DEFINE screen ......................................................... 189 SAVE screen ......................................................................... 192 LOAD screen........................................................................ 195 FADER ASSIGN screen....................................................... 197 SECURITY screen................................................................ 198 SYS/W.CLOCK function ............................................ 199 WORD CLOCK screen ....................................................... 199 MIXER SETUP screen......................................................... 200 CASCADE screen ................................................................ 204 HA (Head Amp) screen ...................................................... 206 OUTPUT PORT ATT (Output port attenuation) screen 207 DITHER screen.................................................................... 207 HA LIBRARY screen ........................................................... 208 METER function ........................................................ 209 INPUT METER screen........................................................ 209 OUTPUT METER screen ................................................... 210 INPUT GR (Input Gain Reduction) screen ...................... 211 OUTPUT GR (Output Gain Reduction) screen............... 211 MON/CUE function .................................................. 212 TALKBACK screen.............................................................. 212 OSCILLATOR screen.......................................................... 213 2TR I/O screen..................................................................... 215 MONITOR screen ............................................................... 216 CUE/SOLO screen............................................................... 217 8 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Table of Contents Input functions ........................................252 Appendices..............................................290 INPUT PATCH function............................................. 252 INPUT PATCH screen ....................................................... 252 DIRECT OUT PATCH screen ........................................... 253 INSERT PATCH screen...................................................... 254 INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen............................. 256 NAME screen....................................................................... 257 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen ..................................... 257 INPUT HA/INSERT function ...................................... 258 CH 1-24 (Input channel 1-24) screen ............................... 258 STIN/FXRTN (ST IN/FXRTN channel) screen ............... 258 INSERT 1-24 screen............................................................ 259 INSERT 25-48 screen.......................................................... 259 INSERT STIN screen .......................................................... 259 HA LIBRARY screen........................................................... 260 INPUT ø/EQ function................................................ 260 EQ PARAM (EQ parameter) screen.................................. 260 EQ 1-24 screen..................................................................... 261 EQ 25-48 switch .................................................................. 261 EQ STIN/FXRTN screen .................................................... 261 ø/ATT 1-48 (Phase/Attenuation 1-48) screen .................. 262 ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN (Phase/Attenuation STIN/FXRTN) screen .......................................................................... 262 INPUT EQ LIBRARY screen.............................................. 263 INPUT GATE/COMP function ................................... 264 GATE PARAM (Gate parameter) screen .......................... 264 COMP PARAM (Compressor parameter) screen............ 266 CH 1-12 (Input channel 1–12) screen............................... 267 CH 13-24 (Input channel 13–24) screen........................... 267 CH 25-36 (Input channel 25–36) screen........................... 267 CH 37-48 (Input channel 37–48) screen........................... 267 ST IN (ST IN channel) screen............................................ 267 GATE LIBRARY screen ...................................................... 268 COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library) screen................ 269 INPUT DELAY function.............................................. 270 CH 1-24 (Input channel 1–24) screen............................... 270 CH 25-48 (Input channel 25–48) screen........................... 270 ST IN (ST IN channel) screen............................................ 270 INPUT DCA/GROUP function ................................... 271 DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen ........................................... 271 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen ........................................ 272 EQ LINK ASSIGN screen ................................................... 272 COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link assign) screen. 273 PAN/ROUTING function ........................................... 274 CH to MIX (Channel to mix) screen................................. 274 MIX SEND VIEW screen ................................................... 280 FIX ASSIGN VIEW screen ................................................. 282 LCR screen ........................................................................... 283 SURR PARAM (Surround parameter) screen.................. 283 SURR VIEW (Surround view) screen ............................... 285 M/S screen............................................................................ 285 INPUT VIEW function................................................ 286 CH VIEW (Channel view) screen...................................... 286 SIGNAL FLOW screen ....................................................... 287 FADER VIEW screen .......................................................... 288 CH COPY screen................................................................. 289 INPUT CH LIBRARY (Input channel library) screen ..... 289 EQ Library List ...........................................................290 GATE Library List .......................................................291 Compressor Library List.............................................292 Dynamics Parameters................................................294 GATE section....................................................................... 294 COMP section ..................................................................... 295 Effect Library List .......................................................297 Effects Parameters .....................................................298 Effects and tempo synchronization.................................... 307 Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table .............................................................308 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes.312 Control change parameter assignments....................314 NRPN parameter assignments...................................331 Channel Library List ..................................................334 Channel parameter behavior when paired ................335 MIDI Data Format .....................................................336 Warning Messages ....................................................343 Error Messages ..........................................................344 Troubleshooting........................................................345 General Specifications ...............................................346 Input/output characteristics ......................................348 Electrical characteristics.............................................352 Other Functions ........................................................354 Pin Assignment .........................................................355 Dimensions ...............................................................356 MIDI Implementation Chart......................................357 Index.........................................................................358 PM5D/PM5D-RH Block Diagram.............. End of Manual PM5D Level Diagram ............................... End of Manual PM5D-RH Level Diagram ......................... End of Manual • The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your device. • The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Table of Contents 9 Operating section 1 Introduction Thank you Thank you for purchasing the Yamaha PM5D digital mixing console. In order to take full advantage of the PM5D’s superior functionality and enjoy years of trouble-free use, please read this manual before you begin using the product. After you have read the manual, keep it in a safe place. An overview of the PM5D The PM5D is a digital mixing console with the following features. ❏ Full digital SR mixing system ❏ Scene memories and libraries The PM5D is a full-digital SR mixing console that takes advantage of cutting-edge digital audio processing technology. 24-bit linear AD/DA converters are used to deliver up to 110 dB of dynamic range and amazing sound quality. As input channels, it provides 48 monaural channels, four stereo channels, and four stereo channels for effect return. As output channels, it provides 24 MIX channels, eight MATRIX channels, and two STEREO channels. The PM5D can be used in a wide range of applications. You can assign desired channels to be controlled by the eight DCA faders on the panel, and use them as group faders. Mix parameters and internal effect settings can be stored in memory as up to 500 scenes for immediate recall. Effects, input/output patching, input channel/output channel settings, internal head amp (PM5D-RH model only) or external head amp settings can be stored in various libraries, independently of scenes. ❏ PM5D model and PM5D-RH model In addition to the standard PM5D model that provides manual control of the head amp for each input, the PM5D-RH model is also available, providing programmable control of head amp input sensitivity and phantom power settings. You can choose the model appropriate for your situation and budget. ❏ Cutting-edge user interface For the input channels and STEREO A/B channels, dedicated channel strips are provided where you can operate the fader, pan, cue, and on/off controls. For MIX channels and MATRIX channels, encoders allow you to control the send level and master level. The PM5D allows quick and intuitive operation just as on an analog mixer. In addition, you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to manually control the principal parameters (delay, EQ, gate, compressor) of the desired channel. ❏ Eight effect modules / Twelve graphic EQ modules Eight high-quality multi-effect modules are built in. Effects such as reverb, delay, multiband compressor, and various modulation effects can be routed via internal buses or inserted into the desired channel. 31-band graphic EQ can also be inserted into any channel or any output. 10 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual ❏ Digital cascade connection Up to four PM5D units, or one PM5D and one Yamaha DM2000/02R96 unit, can be cascade-connected to share buses in the digital domain. In particular when PM5D units are cascaded together, operations such as scene saving and recall can also be linked. Compatible external devices can also be used as inserts or as extended signal processors via a cascade connection. ❏ Surround panning Surround pan functionality allows multi-channel playback systems to be used, letting you place the signal of an input channel in two-dimensional space, or move the sound image forward/backward and left/right. 3-1ch, 5.1ch, and 6.1ch surround modes are available. ❏ I/O card expansion The rear panel provides four slots in which separately sold mini-YGDAI cards can be installed. AD cards, DA cards, or digital I/O cards can be installed in these slots to add inputs and outputs. ❏ Add-On Effects provide additional effect types Separately sold Add-On Effects packages can be installed to add new effect types for the internal effects. The REV-X reverb effect sold as an Add-On Effect for the DM2000 or 02R96 is included as standard. Operating section 1 Introduction Differences between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH model The PM5D is available as the standard PM5D model or as the PM5D-RH model which allows internal head amp settings to be programmed. These models differ as follows. ❏ PM5D model ❏ PM5D-RH model • Head amp adjustments (input sensitivity settings, phantom power (+48V) on/off) for the analog inputs (INPUT jacks 1–48, ST IN jacks 1–4) are performed manually, using the controls of the top panel. • Insert jacks (INSERT IN/OUT jacks) for the monaural analog inputs (INPUT jacks 1–48) are provided on the rear panel, allowing external effect processors to be inserted in the analog domain. • ST IN jacks 1–4 are only for line level. • There is no +48V MASTER switch. ST IN jacks 1–4 INPUT jacks 1–48 • Head amp adjustments (input sensitivity settings, phantom power (+48V) on/off) for the analog inputs are controlled from within the screen via software. For this reason, the top panel does not have head amp controls; instead, indicators showing the presence or absence of a signal are provided. Head amp settings can be saved in a library and recalled at any time. • Insert jacks for the analog inputs are not provided. • ST IN jacks 1–4 support mic levels through line levels. Phantom power can also be supplied to ST IN jacks 1– 4. • The +48V MASTER switch turns all phantom power (+48V) on/off. ST IN jacks 1–4 INSERT IN/OUT jacks 1–48 INPUT jacks 1–48 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 11 2 Introduction About the channel structure of the PM5D The PM5D provides the following input channels and output channels. ❏ Input channels This section processes input signals and sends them to the STEREO bus or MIX buses. There are three types of input channel, as follows. • Input channels 1–48 These channels are used to process monaural signals. By default, the input signals from the monaural analog input jacks (INPUT jacks 1–48) are assigned to these channels. • ST IN channels 1–4 These channels are used to process stereo signals. By default, the input signals from the stereo analog input jacks (ST IN jacks 1–4) are assigned to these channels. • FX RTN channels 1–4 These channels are used mainly to process the return signals (stereo) from the internal effects. By default, the left/right output channels of internal effects 1 through 4 are assigned to these channels. Hint ❏ Output channels This section mixes the signals sent from input channels etc., and sends them to the corresponding output jacks or output buses. There are three types of output channel, as follows. • MIX channels 1–24 These process the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and output them from MIX OUT jacks 1 through 24. These channels are used mainly for foldback or as sends to external effects. The signals of MIX channels 1–24 can also be sent to the STEREO bus or MATRIX buses. • MATRIX channels 1–8 These process the signals sent from MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses, and output them from the MATRIX OUT jacks. This allows MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to be mixed at the desired balance for output. • STEREO A/B channels These process the signals sent from input channels or MIX channels, and output them to STEREO OUT jacks A/B. These channels are used as the main stereo outputs. Normally, the same signal is sent from the STEREO A and B channels. However, it is also possible to use the STEREO B channel as the center channel for three-channel L/C/R playback. Signal assignments to the input channels can be changed as desired. Regarding word clock synchronization The signal used to synchronize digital audio signal processing is called “word clock.” Normally, one device transmits a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive this word clock signal and synchronize to it. In order to transmit or receive digital audio signals to or from an external device via the PM5D’s digital input/output jacks or via a digital I/O card installed in a slot, the word clock must be synchronized between the devices. Be aware that if the word clock is not synchronized, the signals will not be transmitted correctly, and unpleasant noise will occur. Hint • For details on synchronizing the word clock of the PM5D and external devices, refer to the explanation of word clock in Operating section “Chapter 4. Connections and setup” (➥ p.31), and to the Reference Section “WORD CLOCK screen” (➥ p.199). • As an exception, digital signals that are not synchronized with the PM5D can be input via a digital I/O card that contains a sampling rate converter, or via the 2TR IN/OUT DIGITAL jacks. 12 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 1 Introduction How this manual is organized This owner’s manual is divided into the following three sections. ❏ Operating section This section explains the items on the front and rear panels, connections and setup, and how to operate the PM5D’s basic functionality. In particular if you have not operated a digital console before, we recommend that you read chapters 2 through 7 first. ❏ Reference section This section explains the functionality and operation for all of the PM5D’s screens. Refer to this section when you want to learn about the items in the screens. ❏ Appendices This contains various information such as library lists, parameter lists for the internal effects, the MIDI data format, and lists of warning messages and error messages. Conventions in this manual In this manual, non-locking panel switches that you press are called “keys,” and those that change their on/off status when you push them in (locking types) are called “switches.” Of the control knobs on the panel, those that turn from a minimum value to a maximum value are called “knobs,” while those that turn endlessly are called “encoders.” Controls located on the panel are enclosed in square brackets [ ] (e.g., [CUE] key, [PAD] switch) in order to distinguish them from the buttons and knobs displayed in the screen. For some controls, the section name is listed before the [ ] (e.g., CH [ON] key, EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder). Unless otherwise specified, references to the PM5D apply to both the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH model. If specifications differ between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH model, such differences will be noted each time they occur. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 13 2 Top, front, and rear panels 2 Top, front, and rear panels This chapter explains the names and functions of each part of the PM5D. Details for each section of the top panel are explained in subsequent chapters of this operating section; refer to the appropriate chapter for more information. Top panel 6 (PM5D model) 8 1 4 5 A AD IN section (PM5D model) 7 3 In this section you can adjust the sensitivity of the analog signals being input from the rear panel INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4, and switch pad, insert, and phantom power (+48 V) on/off (➥ p.35). C INPUT channel strip section This section controls the principal parameters for input channels 1–48 (➥ p.37). D FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section Here you can select the parameters controlled by the faders/encoders of the INPUT channel strip (3) (➥ p.40). E MIX section This section controls the on/off status and send level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and adjusts the master level of the MIX channels (➥ p.49). (PM5D-RH model) 2 F MATRIX section This section controls the send level of the signals sent from MIX channels to MATRIX buses, and adjusts the master level of the MATRIX channels (➥ p.55). G SELECTED CHANNEL section In this section you can view and control the mix parameters for the currently selected input channel or output channel (➥ p.57). B AD IN section (PM5D-RH model) This area indicates the presence, peak level, and phantom power (+48V) on/off status of the input signal from rear panel INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1– 4. H Meter section Hint For the PM5D-RH model, input sensitivity and phantom power on/off are controlled by operations in the display (➥ p.36). 14 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section This section contains peak level meters that indicate the input levels of input channels and the output levels of output channels and cue monitoring, as selected by key operations (➥ p.100). O CUE/MONITOR section This section selects the monitor source that is output from the MONITOR OUT jacks, and adjusts the levels. This section also determines the cue point and monitoring method that will be used when you press a [CUE] key for a channel (➥ p.91). Top, front, and rear panels 2 P OSCILLATOR/TALKBACK section This section switches the oscillator or talkback on/off, and adjusts the talkback level (➥ p.97). Q DISPLAY ACCESS section 8 This section selects the functions or screen shown in the display (➥ p.20). R USER DEFINED KEYS sections 9 N J K O This section executes the functions that have been assigned to the User Defined keys [1]–[25] (➥ p.138). P S Data entry section Q R This section lets you move the pointer (the arrow displayed in the screen) or cursor (the red frame indicating a selection) in the display and edit the parameter value (➥ p.20). R M L T T ASSIGN MODE section S This section lets you assign mute groups and DCA groups for control from the panel (➥ p.73). I Display This display shows the information you need to operate the PM5D, and lets you make system-wide settings and control mix parameters for input and output channels (➥ p.19). Hint You can adjust the angle of the display by moving the upper part of the display frame forward or backward. Note Before moving the PM5D, you must lower the display all the way back until it is fastened in place. J FADER MODE section Here you can select the combination of channels or DCA groups that will be controlled by the faders of the DCA strip section (K) (➥ p.73). K DCA strip section From this section you can control the channels assigned to DCA groups 1–8 (➥ p.73). L ST IN/FX RTN (Stereo in / Effect return) channel strip section This section controls the principal parameters of ST IN channels 1–4 or FX RTN channels 1–4 (➥ p.39). M STEREO strip section This section controls the principal parameters of the STEREO A/B channels (➥ p.53). N SCENE MEMORY section This section stores/recalls mix parameters as scene memories (➥ p.80). Mute operations for mute groups 1–8 are also performed in this section (➥ p.75). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 15 2 Top, front, and rear panels Rear panel 3 1 4 6 (PM5D-RH model) 2 (PM5D model) A INPUT jacks 1–48 (PM5D model) These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or microphones. Nominal input level is –60 dBu to +10 dBu. Male XLR plug 5 1 (ground) 3 (cold) D +48V MASTER switch (PM5D-RH model only) This is the master phantom power (+48V) switch for INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4. If this switch is off, the +48V buttons shown in the display are unavailable. 2 (hot) B INSERT IN/OUT jacks 1–48 (PM5D model only) These are balanced TRS phone type input/output jacks for inserting external effects or dynamics processors etc. into INPUT jacks 1–48. Nominal input/output level is +4 dBu. 1/4" TRS phone plug E INPUT jacks 1–48 (PM5D-RH model) These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or microphones. Nominal input level is –62 dBu to +10 dBu. Tip (hot) Ring (cold) Male XLR plug 1 (ground) 3 (cold) Sleeve (ground) 2 (hot) C ST IN (Stereo input) jacks 1–4 (PM5D model) These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for inputting analog audio signals from line level devices. Nominal input level is –34 dBu to +10 dBu. Male XLR plug F ST IN (Stereo input) jacks 1–4 (PM5D-RH model) 1 (ground) 3 (cold) These are balanced XLR-3-31 type input jacks for inputting analog audio signals from line level devices or microphones. Nominal input level is –62 dBu to +10 dBu. Male XLR plug 1 (ground) 3 (cold) 2 (hot) 2 (hot) 16 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section K STEREO OUT A/B jacks These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the analog signals of the STEREO A/B channels. Nominal output level is +4 dBu. 2 3 (cold) Top, front, and rear panels Female XLR plug 8 7 2 (hot) 1 (ground) L MATRIX OUT jacks These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the analog signals of MATRIX channels 1–8. Nominal output level is +4 dBu. G MIX OUT jacks These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the analog signals of MIX channels 1–24. Nominal output level is +4 dBu. 2 (hot) Female XLR plug 2 (hot) Female XLR plug 3 (cold) 3 (cold) 1 (ground) M DC POWER INPUT connector 1 (ground) This is a connector for connecting the PW800W power supply. Use the dedicated cable included with the PM5D to make the connection. H LAMP connector This is a four-pin female XLR output jack for supplying power to a gooseneck lamp. (These jacks are provided at three locations). The location of these jacks differs between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH model. N R L K 9 J M VUT R L 8 7 6 5 R L R L OUT IN 2 IN R L R L 4 3 2 1 SMPTE Y L 75 ON OFF C X COAXIAL USB THRU Q O RPS OUT 1 2 3 1 3 AES/EBU AES/EBU COAXIAL AES/EBU AES/EBU IN W Z a N 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 I MONITOR OUT jacks These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the monitor signal selected in the MONITOR section of the top panel. Nominal output level is +4 dBu. Female XLR plug 2 (hot) These are XLR-3-31 (balanced) jacks that input stereo analog signals from an external source. Nominal input level is +4 dBu. 1 (ground) Male XLR plug 3 (cold) 3 (cold) 2 (hot) 1 (ground) O TIME CODE INPUT jack Note Although the various output jacks and 2TR IN ANALOG jacks have a nominal input/output level of +4 dBu (maximum level is +24 dBu), an internal switch allows this to be changed to –2 dBu (maximum level +18 dBu) if necessary. For details, contact your Yamaha dealer. This is an XLR-3-31 (balanced) jack that receives SMPTE time code (LTC) from an external source. 1 (ground) Male XLR plug 3 (cold) J CUE OUT jacks 2 (hot) These are XLR-3-32 (balanced) jacks that output the cue monitor signal from the channel selected by its [CUE] key. Nominal output level is +4 dBu. Female XLR plug 2 (hot) 3 (cold) P TO HOST connector This is a USB (type B) connector that allows communication with a computer. Q GPI connector 1 (ground) This is a D-sub 25-pin female connector that allows communication with a GPI-equipped external device. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 17 2 Top, front, and rear panels R RS422 REMOTE connector Z CASCADE OUT connector This is a D-sub 9-pin female connector for remotely controlling an external device that supports the RS422 protocol. This is a D-sub half-pitch 68-pin female connector that can be connected to another PM5D for transmission/ reception of control signals and transmission of audio signals. S HA REMOTE connector This is a D-sub 9-pin male connector for remotely controlling an external head amp device (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or AD824) that supports a special protocol. a CASCADE IN connector This is a D-sub half-pitch 68-pin female connector that can be connected to another PM5D for transmission/ reception of control signals and reception of audio signals. T WORD CLOCK IN connector This is a BNC connector for supplying a word clock from an external device to the PM5D. U 75Ω ON/OFF switch This switch terminates the word clock connection. Normally you will leave this ON. If a device made by another manufacturer is connected and word clock cannot be received correctly, try turning this OFF. V WORD CLOCK OUT connector This is a BNC connector for supplying a word clock from the PM5D to an external device. W MIDI IN/THRU/OUT connectors These connectors are used to transmit and receive MIDI messages to and from external MIDI devices. The MIDI IN connector receives messages from an external device, and the MIDI OUT connector transmits messages from the PM5D. Messages received at the MIDI IN connector are retransmitted without change from the MIDI THRU connector. b b Fan grille This is an output grille for the fan that cools the interior of the console (two locations). Be careful not to obstruct the fan exhaust. X 2TR OUT DIGITAL (2 track out digital) jacks 1–3 These jacks digitally output the signals of the STEREO A/B channels. Two types are provided; AES/EBU (XLR-3-32) jacks (1/2) which output AES/EBU format signals, and a COAXIAL (RCA phono) jack (3) which outputs consumer format signals (IEC60958). c c SLOT 1–4 These slots allow separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards to be installed to expand the input/output ports. Y 2TR IN DIGITAL (2 track in digital) jacks 1–3 These jacks input digital audio from external devices such as CD players. Two types are provided; AES/EBU (XLR-3-31) jacks (1/2) which receive AES/EBU format signals, and a COAXIAL (RCA phono) jack (3) which receives consumer format signals (IEC60958). Front panel A MEMORY CARD slot 6 5 4 6 3 2 4 1 A memory card inserted in this slot can be used to save/load scene memories or library data. You can use PCMCIA Type II flash ATA cards, or CompactFlash cards inserted into a PC card adaptor. 5 3 2 1 MEMORY CARD MOUSE KEYBOARD PHONES 1 2 3 4 B MOUSE connector A PS/2 mouse can be connected to this connector and used to perform operations in the display. MEMORY CARD MOUSE KEYBOARD PHONES C KEYBOARD connector A PS/2 keyboard can be connected to this connector and used to input text or perform operations in the display. D PHONES (Headphone) jack This headphone jack lets you monitor the MONITOR OUT or CUE signals. 18 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 3 Basic operation on the PM5D This chapter explains the various types of user interface used to operate the PM5D. 3 Basic operation on the PM5D About the various types of user interface Basic parameters such as mixing and editing the sound of each channel can be controlled by the faders and encoders of the top panel. However to make more detailed settings, you will need to access the appropriate “function” and edit the parameter values in the display. The section below explains the various user interface components shown in the display, and how to use them. ❏ Knobs/Faders/Boxes User interface in the display The user interface in the PM5D’s display uses the following components. ❏ Pointer The arrow shown in the display is called the “pointer.” Use the pointer to select the parameter you want to control next. Knobs/faders in the display are used to edit parameter values. The current value is shown in the box. Boxes for which / buttons are displayed at left and right allow you to edit the parameter by using these buttons. (If editing is not possible, the buttons will be gray.) Knob Box Fader Box / buttons for editing the value ❏ Cursor Cursor If you want to assign a name to a channel or scene, input characters, numerals, and symbols into the box. The red frame shown in the display is called the “cursor.” If the cursor encloses a parameter on the screen, that parameter is selected for operation. ❏ Character palette ❏ Tabs This is a “virtual” keyboard used to input characters, numerals, and symbols into a text input box. Tab The screen names shown in the upper left of the display are called “tabs.” Tabs are used to switch between screens within the same function. ❏ Buttons Buttons in the display are used to switch parameters on/off or to select one of multiple choices. Buttons that are currently on are displayed in green (some buttons are displayed in red or blue); buttons that are turned off are displayed in gray. Buttons turned on (green) Buttons turned off (gray) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 19 3 Basic operation on the PM5D ❏ Scroll bar If the displayed items are too numerous to fit into a single screen, you can use the scroll bar to view the portion that is not currently displayed. Data Entry section Controllers used to edit settings and values in the display are gathered into the data entry section. Scroll bar 7 DISPLAY ACCESS section 1 The DISPLAY ACCESS section contains keys that access the desired function or screen in the display. 2 6 3 4 5 1 A [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] keys 2 Use these keys to increase or decrease the value of the parameter where the cursor is located. If the PM5D has displayed a window asking you to confirm an operation such as recall or store, these buttons can be used instead of the CANCEL button and OK button shown in the window. 3 A Global functions These keys access functions that affect the entire PM5D. B Output functions These keys access functions that are related to output channels. B CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys These keys are used to move the cursor to the desired parameter. C [SHIFT] key This key can be used in conjunction with the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys to move the cursor rapidly, or in conjunction with the [DATA] encoder or [DEC]/[INC] keys to change the parameter value rapidly. If you hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER] key, the JOB SELECT window will appear, allowing you to set multiple parameters in a single operation. (When you move the cursor to a parameter for which there is a JOB SELECT window, an indication of “Job Select = [SHIFT] + [ENTER]” will appear.) C Input functions These keys access functions that are related to input channels. When you press the key for the desired function, the screen for that function will appear in the display. By repeatedly pressing a key you can cycle through the screens included in that function. Hint If you hold down the [SHIFT] key and press a key in the DISPLAY ACCESS section, the screens included in that function will appear in the reverse order (Page Back function). You can also use the Page Back function by holding down a key in the DISPLAY ACCESS section. If you rapidly press a key twice, you will return to the first screen in that function. D [ENTER] key Use this key to switch a button at the cursor location on/off, or to open a window. E [DATA] encoder Use this to increase or decrease the value of the parameter where the cursor is located. The parameter value will change more rapidly if you turn the [DATA] encoder while holding down the [SHIFT] key. 20 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section F Track pad and left/right buttons These are used to move the pointer or select the desired parameter. To adjust a knob-type parameter in the display, hold down the left button or right track pad button while you operate the track pad. G PHONES (Headphone) jack 3 Basic operation on the PM5D This is a stereo phone jack for connecting a set of headphones. External user interface If desired, you can add the following external user interface components. ❏ Mouse A PS/2 compatible mouse can be connected to the MOUSE connector located on the front panel of the PM5D and used in the same way as the track pad. ❏ Keyboard A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected to the KEYBOARD connector located on the front panel of the PM5D and used in the same way as the character palette in the display to input characters, numerals, and symbols. The numeric key pad of the keyboard can be used to input numerical values or to recall scenes. Each key (or combination of keys) has the following function. Full keyboard Key Key Function <PageUp> Same function as the [INS/OK] key of the Data Entry section <PageDown> Same function as the [DEC/CANCEL] key of the Data Entry section <←>, <→>, <↑>, <↓> Same function as the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/ [†] keys <Alt> + <PageUp> Same function as moving the [DATA] encoder clockwise <Alt> + <PageDown> Same function as moving the [DATA] encoder counterclockwise <Enter> Same function as the [ENTER] key <Shift> Same function as the [SHIFT] key <Ctrl> + <←>, <Ctrl> + <→> Same function as the character palette <Ctrl> + <x> Function <Shift> + <Tab> Switches to the previous screen within the same function <Esc> Accesses the function menu (if the function menu is already displayed, recalls the last-displayed screen) <Alt> + <0>–<9> Switch screens within the same function Numeric key pad Key Function <0>–<9> Input a scene number (if the PREFERENCE 1 screen item USE NUMERIC-KEYPAD is on), input numerical values (if off) <.> Returns the scene selection number to the number of the scene that was last recalled or stored Copies the text string in the box and clears the copy-source character string (Cut) <+> Same function as the [π] key of the SCENE MEMORY section <Ctrl> + <c> Same function as the COPY button of the character palette <-> Same function as the [†] key of the SCENE MEMORY section <Ctrl> + <v> Same function as the PASTE button of the character palette </>, <*> Not used <Insert> Same function as the INS button of the character palette <Enter> <Delete> Same function as the DEL button of the character palette Same function as the [RECALL] key of the SCENE MEMORY section (if the PREFERENCE 1 screen item USE NUMERIC-KEYPAD is on), same function as the [ENTER] key (when off) <Home> Moves the input location in the box to the beginning <End> Moves the input location in the box to after the last-input character <BackSpace> Deletes the preceding character that was input in the box (Backspace) <Tab> Switches to the next screen within the same function buttons of the PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 21 3 Basic operation on the PM5D Basic operation This section explains the basic procedures you can perform in the PM5D’s display. In general, you will perform operations in the PM5D’s display by combining the operations described here. Click Drag Moving the pointer to a specific parameter in the screen and pressing the left/right track pad button (or the left/ right mouse button) is called “clicking.” Clicking is mainly used to turn an on-screen button on/off, to move the cursor, or to make fine adjustments to a value. • Track pad Moving the pointer to a specific parameter in the screen and then holding down the left/right track pad (or mouse) button while moving up/down/left/right is called “dragging.” Dragging is used mainly to adjust the value of a knob or fader. • Mouse • Track pad Click Drag • Mouse Drag Click While pressing Using the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys of the data entry section to move the cursor to a desired parameter and then pressing the [ENTER] key is equivalent to clicking. If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you can perform the same action using the arrow keys and the <Enter> key. Subsequently in this manual, this operation will simply be called “clicking.” Hint When using the track pad, you can move the pointer to the desired parameter and then tap the track pad to obtain the same result as if you pressed the left button. (This is called the Tapping function.) If you want to use the tapping function, you must enable it in the PREFERENCE 2 screen (UTILITY function) (➥ p.188). • Track pad Using the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys of the data entry section to move the cursor to a desired parameter and then turning the [DATA ] encoder (or pressing the [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] keys) is equivalent to dragging. If you are using a PS/2 keyboard, you can perform the same action using the arrow keys and the <PageUp>/ <PageDown> keys (or keys that have the same function). Subsequently in this manual, this operation will simply be called “dragging.” Drag and drop Tapping Moving the mouse pointer to a specific parameter in the screen, dragging to another location in the screen, and then releasing your finger is called “dragging and dropping.” Dragging and dropping is used to copy EQ or compressor settings to another channel. Dragging and dropping cannot be performed using the CURSOR keys or keyboard. Subsequently in this manual, this operation will be called “dragging and dropping.” 22 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 3 Accessing a desired screen A desired function/screen can be accessed in the display using either of the following two methods. Click a tab in the screen to select the desired screen. Click a tab ❏ Using the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section 2 If you want to switch to another screen within that function, press the same key you pressed in step 1. If you repeatedly press a key in the DISPLAY ACCESS section, or hold down the [SHIFT] key of the data entry section and press the same key as in step 1, you will return to the preceding screen of the same function. ❏ Using buttons within the display 1 3 Basic operation on the PM5D 1 From the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the key corresponding to the desired function. The most recently operated screen for that function will appear. Hint By clicking the buttons located below the function name area you can switch backward through the screens that had been previously displayed for at least two seconds (not including the function menu). Up to the eight most recent screens are remembered. Moving the cursor In any screen, click the function name area located in the upper left of the screen. When you click the function name area, the function menu screen will appear. This screen is the starting point from which you can access the desired screen via operations in the display. To select a parameter, use the data entry section’s controllers or a PS/2 keyboard to move the cursor (the red frame). Hint If you are using a mouse or the track pad, the cursor will move when you click on the button or knob of the desired parameter. Click the function name area 1 2 Use the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys to move the cursor. The cursor in the display will move in the direction of the key you pressed. However, it will not move if there is no parameter in the direction of that key. In the function menu screen, click the button corresponding to the desired function. The most recently operated screen for that function will appear. Move to the adjacent grid PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 23 3 Basic operation on the PM5D 2 To move quickly to the outer edge of the current window or to a different window, hold down the [SHIFT] key and use the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys. You will move from the scroll window in which the cursor is currently located, in the direction of the key you pressed. Scrolling the screen A scroll bar is displayed if there are more items than can be shown in a single screen. To scroll the screen, drag the box shown in the bar. ➠ Drag [SHIFT] key + CURSOR [®] key You can also scroll the screen by clicking the vacant portion of the scroll bar or the / buttons or / buttons located at the ends of the scroll bar. Hint If the cursor is located on a grid such as in a PATCH screen, turning the [DATA] encoder clockwise will move the cursor toward the right, and turning it counterclockwise will move the cursor toward the left. If you are holding down the [SHIFT] key, turning the [DATA] encoder clockwise will move the cursor downward, and turning it counterclockwise will move the cursor upward. Click these buttons to move the scroll bar box step-wise in the direction indicated. Clicking the / buttons will move in larger steps than clicking the / buttons. Click in these areas to make the scroll bar box move by a large step in the corresponding direction; the screen will scroll accordingly. If you move the cursor to the scroll bar and press the [DEC/CANCEL] key or turn the [DATA] encoder counterclockwise, the screen will scroll toward the left (or upward, in the case of vertical scrolling). If you press the [INC/OK] key or turn the [DATA] encoder clockwise, the screen will scroll toward the right (or downward, in the case of vertical scrolling). Hint If the cursor is located at the scroll bar box, holding down the [SHIFT] key and turning the [DATA] encoder will have the same result as clicking the button or button, depending on the direction in which you turn the encoder. 24 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Operating the buttons Buttons in the display are used to switch parameters on/off or to select one of multiple choices. Adjusting the setting of a knob or fader Knobs and faders in the display are used to adjust the value of specific parameters. 3 Basic operation on the PM5D Adjust the knob value Click Off 1 ➠ On Adjust the fader value Move the pointer to the desired button, and use the left/right buttons of the track pad (or mouse) to click the button. 1 Move the pointer to the desired knob/fader, and use the left/right buttons of the track pad (or mouse) to click the knob/fader. The cursor will move to that location. 2 To increase or decrease the value in steps of 1, click the right button or left button of the track pad (or mouse). Clicking the right button will raise the value by one step, and clicking the left button will lower the value by one step. 3 To raise or lower the value continuously, use the track pad (or mouse) to drag the knob/ fader. The value will change as you drag the knob or fader left/right or up/down. For a parameter whose knob has a wide range of adjustment, holding down the right button of the track pad (or mouse) as you drag will produce a larger range of change than when using the left button. The button will be switched on/off (or the corresponding button will be selected). Hint You can use the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys and the [ENTER] key (or the arrow keys and <Enter> key of a PS/2 keyboard) to perform the equivalent operation. Hint When using the track pad, you can also click by tapping the track pad if you have enabled tapping in the PREFERENCE 2 screen (UTILITY function ➥ p.188). In this case, the result will be the same as if you pressed the left button of the track pad (or mouse). Hint You can also adjust the value by using the [DEC/CANCEL]/ [INC/OK] keys, the [DATA] encoder, or the <PageUp>/<PageDown> keys of a PS/2 keyboard. When adjusting a parameter that has a wide range of adjustment, you can increase the rate of change by holding down the [SHIFT] key while you press the [DEC/CANCEL]/[INC/OK] keys (or turn the [DATA] encoder). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 25 3 Basic operation on the PM5D 3 Assigning a name On the PM5D you can assign a four-character name to each input channel or DCA group, and assign a title to scene and library data when saving it. For example, the screen shown below is the LIBRARY STORE window that appears when you assign a name to the INPUT EQ library. To input characters in this screen, use the following procedure. When you have finished inputting the name, click the STORE button. The name you input will be stored. Hint • In general, the same procedure applies in screens where you enter names for scenes or other library items. • If a PS/2 keyboard is connected, you can use it to enter characters. • If you move the cursor to the text input box and press the [ENTER] key (or click), the input position will move to that point. If the cursor is located at the text input box, you can step through the available characters by turning the [DATA] encoder. If the cursor is located elsewhere, turning the [DATA] encoder will move the selected position. The [INC]/ [DEC] keys move the selected position regardless of where the cursor is located. Note The number of characters that can be input will depend on the type of data (scene/library) you are saving. You cannot input more than the specified number of characters, or move the highlighted area beyond that range. 1 Use the character palette (or a PS/2 keyboard) to input a character. When you click the character palette, a character will be input in the box, and the highlighted area will move to the right. 2 Input the subsequent characters in the same way. When inputting characters, you can use the following buttons in the character palette. INS button Inserts a space (blank) at the highlighted position. Pressing the <Insert> key of a PS/2 keyboard will produce the same result. DEL button Deletes the character at the highlighted position. Pressing the <Delete> key of a PS/2 keyboard will produce the same result. CLEAR button Deletes all characters that have been input in the text input box. buttons Move the highlighted area to left or right. PASTE button Pastes the character string that was copied to buffer memory by the COPY button. Holding down the <Ctrl> key and pressing the <V> key of a PS/2 keyboard will produce the same result. COPY button Copies the character string in the box to a temporary buffer memory. Holding down the <Ctrl> key and pressing the <C> key of a PS/2 keyboard will produce the same result. CAPS LOCK button Switches between uppercase and lowercase alphabetical characters. Uppercase characters can be input while this button is on. Note Copy/paste operations are not possible in some screens. There are also cases in which the paste operation cannot be performed due to the type of character string copied to the buffer memory. 26 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 4 Connections and setup This chapter explains how to make audio input/output connections, and how to perform the setup required when starting the PM5D for the first time. Audio connections 4 PM5D model Connections and setup Analog audio connections PM5D-RH model Synthesizer Microphone Synthesizer Microphone Microphone Effect processor INPUT jacks 1–48 are used mainly to connect microphones or monaural line-level devices. ST IN jacks 1–4 are used mainly to connect stereo line-level devices. Input signal sensitivity, pad on/off, and phantom power (+48V) on/off are controlled from the top panel AD IN section (➥ p.36). INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4 can both be used to connect microphones or line-level devices. Input signal sensitivity and phantom power (+48V) on/off are controlled from within the display (➥ p.36). However, all phantom power can be switched on/off as a whole by the rear panel [+48V MASTER] switch. On either model, the default state is for the input signals from INPUT jacks 1–48 to be patched to input channels 1– 48 and the input signals from ST IN jacks 1–4 to be patched to the ST IN channels. However, this can be changed if desired. (For details on returning the patching to its default state ➥ p.32) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 27 4 Connections and setup Analog output connections Monitor speakers Monitor speakers PW800W power supply MONITOR OUT C CUE OUT R L R L R L R L 4 3 2 1 DC POWER INPUT LA 8 MIX OUT 7 6 5 MATRIX OUT STEREO OUT Recorder, relay vehicle, etc. Monitor speakers (foldback) Main speakers MIX OUT jacks 1–24, MATRIX OUT jacks 1–8, and STEREO OUT A/B jacks respectively output the signal from MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, and the STEREO A/B channels. The MONITOR OUT jacks output the monitor signal that is selected in the top panel MONITOR section. The CUE OUT jacks output the cue monitor signal of the channel that is currently selected by its [CUE] key. 28 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Digital input/output connections R L L OUT IN 2 N 75 ON OFF SMPTE COAXIAL USB THRU 2TR IN ANALOG OUT 1 2 3 1 3 AES/EBU AES/EBU COAXIAL AES/EBU AES/EBU IN 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2TR IN DIGITAL 4 SLOT Connections and setup R Digital I/O card DAT 00.00.00.00 CD player DAT recorder Digital MTR/HDR Use 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 to connect digital sources such as CD players or DAT recorders. (To input analog output signals from a CD player or DAT recorder, use 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2.) Use 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 to send the STEREO A/ B channel signals to a DAT recorder or other digital device. By installing separately sold mini-YGDAI I/O cards in slots 1–4 you can add analog input/output jacks to the PM5D or allow connection of digital devices such as digital MTR or HDR units. The following types of I/O card can be used. Card type Model MY4-AD AD card Number of channels 4 MY8-AD MY8-AD24 Digital format 8 MY4-DA 4 MY8-DA96 8 • In order to send or receive digital audio via the 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks, 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks, or slots 1–4, the word clock data of the respective signals must be synchronized (➥ p.31). • In order to assign input signals from the 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks, 2TR IN ANALOG jacks, or slots 1–4 to input channels or ST IN channels, you will need to change the input patching (➥ p.66). Bit depth 24 bit — 20 bit 24 bit MY8-AD96 DA card Note — 20 bit 24 bit MY8-AE MY8-AE96 8 MY8-AE96S Digital I/O card CobraNet card MY16-AE 16 MY8-AT 8 MY16-AT 16 MY8-TD 8 MY16-TD 16 MY16-C 16 AES/EBU 24 bit ADAT TASCAM CobraNet 24 bit Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio global website for the most recent information on I/O cards. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 29 4 Connections and setup Installing an option card Before installing a card, you must check the Yamaha website to make sure that this device is compatible with this card, and to verify the number of cards that can be installed in conjunction with other Yamaha or third-party cards. Yamaha website: http:www.yamahaproaudio.com To install an optional mini-YGDAI card, proceed as follows. 1 2 Make sure that the power is turned off. Loosen the screws that hold the slot cover in place, and remove the slot cover. Keep the removed slot cover in a safe place. 2 1 U 3 AE S/E BU 2 CO AX IAL 1 AE S/E BU AE S/E BU 3 Align the edges of the card with the guard rails inside the slot, and insert the card into the slot. Push the card all the way into the slot so that the connector at the end of the card is correctly mated with the connector inside the slot. 2 1 U 3 AE S/E BU 2 CO AX IAL 1 AE S/E BU AE S/E BU 4 30 Use the screws included with the card to fasten the card in place. Malfunctions or incorrect operation may occur if the card is not fastened. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Word clock connections and settings This section explains the word clock settings required in order to send or receive digital audio between the PM5D and an external digital device. When digital audio signals are being sent or received between multiple devices, the devices must process the audio signals at the matching timing. For example if the audio signal processing is not synchronized, the signals will not be transmitted correctly and unpleasant noise will occur even if both devices are set to the same sampling frequency. The signal used to synchronize digital audio signal processing is called “word clock.” Normally, one device transmits a reference word clock signal, and the other devices receive this word clock signal and synchronize to it. (The transmitting device is called the “word clock master” and the receiving devices are called “word clock slaves.”) The word clock can be synchronized between the PM5D and external devices in either of two ways; you can send/ receive a word clock signal by itself, or use the clock data that is included in a digital audio signal. The WORD CLOCK IN/OUT connectors on the rear panel of the PM5D are used to send/receive a word clock signal by itself. In general, word clock connections can be made in either of the following two ways. Using daisy-chain connections In this method, the signal is distributed sequentially; the WORD CLOCK OUT connector of the first device is connected to the WORD CLOCK IN connector of the second device, and so on. Turn ON all of the 75Ω ON/OFF switches. This method is not recommended for large systems. If an external device does not have WORD CLOCK IN/ OUT connectors, the clock data included in the digital audio signal is used. In this case, both the digital audio signal and the clock data are sent from the DIGITAL OUT jack of the word clock master to the DIGITAL IN jack of the word clock slave. 4 Digital audio signal + Clock data DIGITAL OUT Device A Word clock master Connections and setup About word clock DIGITAL IN Device B Word clock slave Selecting the word clock master When digitally connecting the PM5D to an external device, you must select the source that will be the word clock master for the system. 1 Repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the WORD CLOCK screen appears. WORD CLOCK MASTER CLOCK SELECT area Word clock master 75Ω ON/OFF= ON WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device A Word clock slave Device B Word clock slave Device C Word clock slave 75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON Using a word clock distribution box In this method, a special word clock distribution box is used to distribute the signal from the word clock master to multiple word clock slaves. Turn ON all of the 75Ω ON/ OFF switches. Word clock master 75Ω ON/OFF= ON WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) In this screen you can select the master clock, and check the input signal synchronization status for each slot or jack. Note When you switch the word clock source, noise may occur due to loss of synchronization. You must lower the level of your monitoring equipment before you perform the following operation. Word clock distribution box WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device A Word clock slave Device B Word clock slave Device C Word clock slave Device D Word clock slave 75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON 75Ω ON/OFF= ON PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 31 4 Connections and setup Use the MASTER CLOCK SELECT area located in the upper part of the screen to select the master clock source. You can choose one of the following sources. INT 96, INT 88.2, INT 48, INT 44.1 These settings select the PM5D’s internal clock. If you select one of these settings, the PM5D will operate as the word clock master. As necessary, make settings within your external devices so that they will operate as word clock slaves. W.CLOCK IN The PM5D will follow the word clock signal being input from the rear panel WORD CLOCK IN connector. CASCADE IN The PM5D will follow the clock data being sent from another PM5D connected to the CASCADE IN connector. 2TR IN D1–D3 The PM5D will follow the clock data included in the input signal from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3. SLOT 1–4 The PM5D will follow the clock data included in the input signal from a digital I/O card installed in slots 1–4. (You can select a specific pair of adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels.) 2 In the MASTER CLOCK SELECT area located in the upper part of the screen, click a button to select the desired master clock source. A window will appear, asking you to confirm that you want to switch the master clock. 3 Click the OK button. The selected word clock master will be enabled. The selected word clock master is remembered even if you turn off the power. As long as the connections have not been changed, you don’t have to make this setting again. Note • If a digital I/O card (such as the MY8-AE96S) that contains a built-in SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is installed in slots 1–4, you can switch the SRC on/off in groups of two channels. The input signals from channels for which the SRC is turned on do not need to be synchronized with the PM5D’s word clock. • If transferring high sampling rate (88.2 kHz/96 kHz) signals between the PM5D and an external device, you will need to select the transmission method. (For details, refer to p.200) Note Sources for which the symbol at the left of the button is red (UNLOCK) or yellow (UNKNOWN) cannot be selected, since a valid clock is not being input or the clock cannot be detected. Restoring the current scene to the default state When the PM5D is in its default state, the input signals from INPUT jacks 1–48 are patched to input channels 1– 48 and the input signals from ST IN jacks 1–4 are patched to the ST IN channels, and can then be output via the STEREO bus or MIX buses. However, if the PM5D’s internal mix parameter settings (referred to as the “current scene”) have been modified, the signal of a specific input may not be sent to an input channel, or the EQ or dynamics processors may be set to produce extreme effects. To initialize the mix parameters from such a state, proceed as follows. 1 2 Use the SCENE [π]/[†] keys of the SCENE MEMORY section to make the scene number indicator show “000”. Scene number “000” is a scene memory containing the default settings. Scene number indicator SCENE [π]/[†] keys 32 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Press the [RECALL] key of the SCENE MEMORY section. Scene number “000” will be loaded, and the current scene will return to the default state. Note Be aware that when scene number “000” is loaded, the input patch, output patch, internal effect, and HA (Head Amp) settings will also return to their default state. (However, the word clock master selection is not affected.) 5 Input channel operations This chapter explains the functions and operation of each section related to input channels. About the input channels The input channel section processes the signals that are input via the input patch section, and outputs them to the STEREO buses or MIX buses. There are three types of input channel, as follows. Input channels 1–48 5 Input channel operations These channels are used to process monaural signals. When the input patching is in the default state, the input signals from INPUT jacks 1–48 are assigned to these channels. ST IN channels 1–4 These channels are used to process stereo signals. When the input patching is in the default state, the input signals from ST IN jacks 1–4 are assigned to these channels. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 33 5 Input channel operations FX RTN channels 1–4 These channels are used mainly to process the return signals (stereo) from the internal effects. When the input patching is in the default state, the left/right channels of internal effects 1–4 are assigned to these channels. • INPUT PATCH This assigns an input signal to the input channel. • ø (Phase) Switches the phase of the input signal. • MS DECODE (Input channels / ST IN channels only) Switches MS decode processing on/off when an MS mic is connected. • ATT (Attenuator) Attenuates/boosts the level of the input signal. • HPF (High Pass Filter) This is a high pass filter that cuts the region below the specified frequency. • 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) A parametric EQ with four bands; HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, and LOW. • GATE (Input channels and ST IN channels only) This is a dynamics processor that can be used for gating or ducking. • COMP (Compressor) (Input channels and ST IN channels only) This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or limiter. • INPUT DELAY (Input channels and ST IN channels only) This delays the input signal. It can be used to make fine adjustments in the relative timing between channels. • LEVEL/DCA 1-8 Adjusts the input level of the effect. • ON (On/off) Turns the input channel on/off. If off, that channel is muted. 34 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual • PAN Adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus. If necessary, this pan setting can also be applied to signals sent to two paired MIX buses. • LCR (Left/Center/Right) Sends the three-channel signal (left/right channels and a center channel) to the STEREO bus. • MIX 1-24 (Mix send level 1–24) Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–24. As the position from which the signal is sent to the MIX bus, you can choose from the following; immediately before the 4-band EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. • INSERT (Input channels and ST IN channels only) Here you can patch the desired output port and input port to insert-out/insert-in, allowing an external effect processor or other device to be inserted. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations. • DIRECT OUT (Input channel and ST IN channels only) This can be patched to an output port, and the input signal sent directly from that output port. • METER This meters the level of the input channel. The level detection point can be switched. Note The signal assignments from input patch to input channel can be edited in the INPUT PATCH function INPUT PATCH screen. To edit the parameters of an input channel, you can either use the panel controllers (e.g., INPUT channel strip, ST IN/FX RTN channel strip, SELECTED CHANNEL section), or access the appropriate screen in the display and edit the parameters in the screen. Operating section AD IN section The AD IN section AD-converts the signals that are input from the rear panel INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4, and sends them to the input patch section. The structure of this section differs between the PM5D model and the PM5D-RH model. PM5D model Items in the AD IN section PM5D model 5 1 6 Input channel operations 2 3 4 5 8 7 PM5D-RH model A [+48V ON/OFF] switch If this switch is on, +48V is supplied to the condenser mic or direct box connected to the INPUT jack 1–48. B [PAD] switch If this switch is on, the input level is attenuated by 26 dB. C [GAIN] knob Adjusts the input sensitivity of the input channel. The range of adjustment is –34 dBu to +10 dBu (when the PAD switch is on) or –60 dBu to –16 dBu (when the PAD switch is off). D [PEAK]/[SIGNAL] LED The [SIGNAL] LED will light when the input level reaches 14 dB below nominal level (i.e., 34 dB below clipping level). The [PEAK] indicator will light when the signal reaches 3 dB below clipping level. E [INSERT ON/OFF] switch This switch enables/disables the INSERT IN/OUT jack located on the rear panel. F ST IN [GAIN] knob Adjusts the input sensitivity of the ST IN channel. The range of adjustment is –34 dBu to +10 dBu. G ST IN [PEAK]/ST IN [SIGNAL] LED The ST IN [SIGNAL] LED will light when the input level of the ST IN channel reaches 14 dB below nominal level (34 dB below clipping level). The ST IN [PEAK] indicator will light when the signal reaches 3 dB below clipping level. H [LAMP DIMMER] knob This adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 35 5 Input channel operations PM5D-RH model PM5D-RH model On the PM5D-RH model, head amp settings are made by operations within the display. 1 2 1 3 Repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the HA screen appears. HA A [+48V ON/OFF] LED This LED will light if phantom power (+48V) is being supplied to the corresponding INPUT jacks 1–48 or ST IN jacks 1–4. However, +48V will not be supplied unless the rear panel [+48V MASTER] switch is on. B [PEAK]/[SIGNAL] LED The [SIGNAL] LED will light when the input level reaches 14 dB below nominal level (i.e., 34 dB below clipping level). The [PEAK] indicator will light when the signal reaches 3 dB below clipping level. C [LAMP DIMMER] knob 2 In the screen, click the INTERNAL HA button. The internal head amp settings for INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4 will be displayed. 3 Use the buttons and knobs in the screen to edit the head amp settings. This adjusts the brightness of the lamp connected to the LAMP connector. 1 2 On the PM5D-RH model, the AD IN input signal sensitivity and phantom power (+48V) on/off setting for each channel are controlled from within the display. However, the rear panel [+48V MASTER] switch is the phantom power master switch. 3 A +48V button Controlling the input sensitivity and phantom power (+48V) of the head amp Click this button to switch phantom power (+48V) on/ off for that jack. B GAIN knob You can adjust the input sensitivity and switch phantom power (+48V) on/off for the signals being input from INPUT jacks 1–48 and ST IN jacks 1–4. These operations are performed differently on the PM5D model and PM5DRH model. Drag this knob to adjust the input sensitivity of that jack in a range of +10 dB to –62 dB. C GANG button Hint Even if input channels are paired, head amp settings must be made individually. If this button is on, the input sensitivity of two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels will change in tandem, maintaining the current offset value. When making these settings, the LEDs of the AD IN section of the panel will indicate the input signal level and the phantom power (+48V) on/off status. PM5D model Note For the PM5D model, head amp settings are made using the controls of the AD IN section of the panel (➥ p.35). • The input sensitivity is adjusted by the combination of the [GAIN] knob setting and [PAN] switch on/off setting for that jack. • To supply phantom power (+48V) to an INPUT jack 1–48, turn on the [+48V] switch corresponding to that jack. • To enable an external device that is inserted into the INSERT IN/OUT jacks, turn on the [INSERT] switch corresponding to that jack. • On the PM5D-RH model, head amp settings can also be made from the HA/INSERT function CH 1-24 screen, CH 25-48 screen, or ST IN/FX RTN screen (➥ p.258). • Settings for an external head amp device (AD8HR) can also be made from the screen in the same way as for the internal head amps. 36 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section INPUT channel strip The INPUT channel strip is the section where you can control the principal parameters of the input channels. This section is layered as shown in the following diagram; choose the CH 1-24 layer when you want to control input channels 1–24, or the CH 25-48 layer when you want to control input channels 25–48. CH 1-24 layer Input channel operations 5 CH 25-48 layer Items in the INPUT channel strip A [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys These keys select the layer (CH 1-24 or CH 25-48) controlled by the INPUT channel strip. The LED of the currently selected layer will light. B [PRE] key This selects the output location of the signal when send level to MIX bus 1–24 is selected as the encoder function. The pre-fader signal is sent to the corresponding MIX bus if this key is on, and the post-fader signal is sent if this key is off. 2 3 C ENCODER [ON] key 4 6 J K L 7 M 5 N O 1 This switches the function currently assigned to the encoder on/off. By default, this switches the signal sent from the input channel to MIX buses 1–24 on/off. D Encoder According to the selection in the ENCODER MODE section / FADER FLIP section (➥ p.40), this encoder adjusts the send level from the input channel to MIX buses 1–24, the panning of the input channel, or the level of the input channel in the layer that is not currently selected. By default, this adjusts the send level to MIX buses 1–24. E [SEL] key This selects the input channel that you will control from the SELECTED CHANNEL section or from within the display. F Name indicator P 8 9 This displays the name that has been assigned to the input channel. G CH [ON] key Switches the input channel on/off. If this key is off (LED dark), no signal will be sent from that input channel to the STEREO bus or MIX buses. H Fader This 100 mm fader adjusts the input level of the input channel. I [CUE] key This key lets you cue-monitor the signal of the input channel. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 37 5 Input channel operations J [TO ST] LED This LED will light when the signal sent from the input channel to the STEREO bus is on. K [COMP] LED This indicates the operational status of the compressor for the input channel. This will be dark when the gain reduction amount is 0 dB, dimly lit when it is 0–10 dB, and lit when it is greater than 10 dB. L [GATE] LED This indicates the operational status of the gate for the input channel. This will be dark when the gain reduction amount is 0 dB, dimly lit when it is 0–30 dB (or 0– 10 dB when ducking), and lit when greater than this. M Meter LEDs This is a six-point LED meter that indicates the input level of the input channel. OVER indicates clipping level, and –6 to –60 indicate the level of the signal relative to clipping level (0 dB). The level detection point can be switched. N DCA assign LEDs The LED of the DCA group to which that input channel is assigned will light. O MUTE assign LEDs The LED of the mute group to which that input channel is assigned will light. P [RCL SAFE]/[MUTE SAFE] LEDs The corresponding LED will light when recall safe or mute safe is enabled for the input channel. 38 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section ST IN/FX RTN channel strip In this section you can control the ST IN channels and FX RTN channels. This section is layered as shown in the diagram below; choose the ST IN layer when you want to control the ST IN channels, or the FX RTN layer when you want to control the FX RTN channels. 5 Input channel operations ST IN 1-4 layer FX RTN 1-4 layer Items in the ST IN/FX RTN channel strip A [ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys These keys select the layer that will be controlled by the ST IN/FX RTN channel strip. Press the [ST IN 1-4] key to control ST IN channels 1–4, or press the [FX RTN 14] key to control FX RTN channels 1–4. 3 2 1 4 6 J K L 7 M 5 N O Items 2–P below are the same as in the INPUT channel strip (➥ p.37). However since FX RTN channels do not have a gate or compressor, the [GATE] LED (L) and [COMP] LED (K) are not used. B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P [PRE] key ENCODER [ON] key Encoder [SEL] key Name indicator CH [ON] key Fader [CUE] key [TO ST] LED [COMP] LED [GATE] LED Meter LEDs DCA assign LEDs MUTE assign LEDs [RCL SAFE]/[MUTE SAFE] LEDs P 8 9 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 39 5 Input channel operations FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section In the FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section you can change the parameter that is assigned to the encoders, and exchange the parameters assigned to the faders and encoders. Items in the FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section A FADER [FLIP] key If this key is on, the parameters controlled by the faders and encoders will be exchanged. B Encoder mode indicator This indicates the number of the MIX bus (1–24) selected by the MIX SEND SELECT keys (6) or the encoder function selected by keys 3–5. C [PAN] key 2 3 4 5 1 This key selects pan (balance) as the parameter controlled by the encoders. The encoder mode indicator will indicate “Pn” while this key is on. D [GAIN/ATT] key This key selects input sensitivity to the internal head amp (PM5D-RH model only) or external head amp device (AD8HR or AD824) or attenuation immediately after AD conversion as the parameter controlled by the encoders. The encoder mode indicator will indicate “HA” (if input sensitivity to the head amp is selected) or “At” (if attenuator is selected) while this key is on. E [ALT LAYER] key This key selects “input level of the channel not included in the currently selected layer” as the parameter controlled by the encoders. The encoder mode indicator will indicate “AL” while this key is on. 6 F MIX SEND SELECT [1]–[24] keys These keys select the MIX bus (1–24) whose send level will be controlled by the encoders. When you press one of these keys, the LED of that key will light, and the encoder mode indicator will show the number of the MIX bus. Hint If you turn on any key 3–6, the remaining keys will automatically turn off. 40 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Various operations for input channels Selecting the function of the encoders Exchanging the fader and encoder functions When the PM5D is in the default state, the encoders of the INPUT channel strip and ST IN/FX RTN channel strip are assigned to control send levels to MIX buses 1–24. However you can use the various ENCODER MODE keys to select one of the following as the function of the encoders. Encoder function Display Send levels to MIX buses 1–24 1–24 [PAN] key Pan (balance) Pn [GAIN/ATT] key Head amp input sensitivity HA [GAIN/ATT] key Attenuator At [ALT LAYER] key Input level for the currently unselected layer*1 AL Control the send level and on/off status of the signal sent from the channel to the MIX buses *1. In the INPUT channel strip, the CH 1-24 layer and the CH 25-48 layer are in a “front/rear” relation. In the ST IN/FX RTN channel strip, the ST IN 1-4 layer and the FX RTN 1-4 layer are in a “front/rear” relation. The currently selected function is shown by the key that is lit and by the encoder mode indicator. Repeatedly pressing the [PAN] key or [ALT LAYER] key will alternate between the function selected by that key and the MIX bus send level. Repeatedly pressing the [GAIN/ ATT] key will alternate between the following three choices; input sensitivity to the internal head amp → attenuator → MIX bus send level. 5 Input channel operations Key MIX SEND SELECT [1]–[24] keys You can use the FADER [FLIP] key to exchange the functions assigned to the faders and encoders of the channel strip. For example with the default setting (FADER [FLIP] key off), the faders control the input channel input levels, and the encoders control the send levels to the MIX buses. If you then press the FADER [FLIP] key to make the LED light, the faders will control the send levels to the MIX buses and the encoders will control the input channel input levels. Control the channel input level and on/off status ➠ Hint Control the channel input level and on/off status If the FADER section [FLIP] key is on, the functions controlled by the encoders and faders will be exchanged. Control the send level and on/off status of the signal sent from the channel to the MIX buses The function assigned to the controls when the [FLIP] key is on (LED lit) will depend on the current encoder mode as follows. [FLIP] key Encoder mode Function of each control Encoder ENCODER [ON] key MIX SEND Send level from channel to MIX bus On/off status of signal sent from channel to MIX bus PAN Pan (balance) On/off status of signal sent from channel to STEREO bus GAIN/ATT Head amp input sensitivity / attenuator No function ALT LAYER Channel (currently unselected layer) input level Channel (currently unselected layer) on/off MIX SEND Channel (currently selected layer) input level Channel (currently selected layer) on/off Off On PAN GAIN/ATT ALT LAYER — Send level from channel (currently un-selected layer) to MIX bus Fader CH [ON] key Channel (currently selected layer) input level Channel (currently selected layer) on/off Send level from channel (currently selected layer) to MIX bus On/off status of signal sent from channel (currently selected layer) to MIX bus — — — On/off status of signal sent from channel (currently unselected layer) to MIX bus Send level from channel (currently selected layer) to MIX bus On/off status of signal sent from channel (currently selected layer) to MIX bus Note • The DCA channel strip and STEREO A/B channel strip are not affected by the on/off status of the [FLIP] key. • The Flip function cannot be used if PAN or GAIN/ATT is selected as the encoder mode. If you turn on the [FLIP] key in these modes, MIX SEND will automatically be selected as the encoder mode, and then the fader and encoder parameters will be exchanged. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 41 5 Input channel operations Sending a signal from an input channel to the STEREO bus Here’s how to use the INPUT channel strip or ST IN/FX RTN channel strip to send an input channel signal to the STEREO bus. The explanation here uses the example of an input channel, but the procedure is essentially identical when using a ST IN channel or FX RTN channel. 1 Make sure that an input source is correctly assigned to the input channel, and that the head amp gain is set appropriately. 2 Make sure that the appropriate CH [ON] key is turned on in the INPUT channel strip, and press the [SEL] key for that channel to make it light. The [SEL] keys are used to select the channel you want to control. 4 Raise the corresponding fader of the INPUT channel strip. The level of the input signal is shown by the level meter located at the right of the CH [ON] key. 5 Turn on the [PAN] key in the ENCODER MODE section. 6 Use the encoder in the INPUT channel strip to adjust the pan of the input channel. Note If you are sending the signal from a ST IN channel / FX RTN channel to the STEREO bus, you can repeatedly press the [SEL] key to switch between L/R channels, and make pan settings for each channel. 7 In the STEREO A/B channel strip, turn the STEREO A [ON] key and STEREO B [ON] key on (LED lit). STEREO A [ON] key STEREO B [ON] key STEREO A fader STEREO B fader [SEL] key Level meter CH [ON] key 3 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the [TO STEREO] key to make it light. In the SELECTED CHANNEL section you can make detailed parameters settings for the channel currently selected by its [SEL] key. (For details on the SELECTED CHANNEL section ➥ p.57.) When you turn on the [TO STEREO] key, the signal sent from that input channel to the STEREO bus will be turned on. At this time, the [TO ST] LED of the INPUT channel strip will light. [TO STEREO] key 8 STEREO [PAN] encoder 42 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section In the STEREO A/B channel strip, raise the [STEREO A]/[STEREO B] faders. The signal sent to the stereo bus will be routed through the STEREO A/B channels and output from the STEREO OUT A/B jacks. 3 Signals from input channels or ST IN/FX RTN channels can be sent to the desired MIX bus. This can be done either by specifying the send level sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus, or by specifying the send level sent from a specific input channel to all MIX buses. The explanation here uses an input channel as the sendsource, but the procedure is the same when using a ST IN channel or FX RTN channel. To send signals from all input channels to a specific MIX bus 1 2 Use MIX SEND SELECT [1]–[24] keys of the ENCODER MODE section to select the destination MIX bus. The selected key will light, and the encoder mode indicator will show the number of the destination MIX bus. In this state, the encoders of the channel strip adjust the send level to the MIX bus. Make sure that the FADER [FLIP] key is dark. To turn off the signal sent from a specific channel to the MIX bus, press the ENCODER [ON] key for that channel to turn it off. Press the same key once again to turn it back on. Note If the send-destination MIX bus is set to FIXED mode (➥ p.44), the encoders have no effect; the signal can only be switched on/off by the ENCODER [ON] key. 4 In the same way, select a different send-destination MIX bus, and use the encoders of the INPUT channel strip to adjust the send levels to it. 5 To send signals from a specific input channel to all MIX buses 1 Press a [SEL] key of the INPUT channel strip to select the send-source channel. 2 In the MIX section, press the [MIX SEND] key to make it light. The MIX section lets you control the signals sent to MIX buses 1–24 and the signals output from MIX channels 1–24. (For details, refer to ➥ p.49) When the [MIX SEND] key is lit, you can use the encoders of the MIX section to control the send levels from the currently selected input channel to MIX buses 1–24. Turn the encoders of the INPUT channel strip. When MIX SEND is selected as the encoder mode, you can use the encoders of the INPUT channel strip to adjust the level of the signal that is sent to the currently selected MIX bus from the corresponding input channel. The LEDs around the periphery of the encoder indicate the approximate send level. Input channel operations Sending the signal from the input channel to a MIX bus MIX bus [MIX SEND] key [MIX MASTER] key Hint When the [MIX MASTER] key of the MIX section is lit, you can hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel to make the [MIX SEND] key light (the [MIX MASTER] key will go dark). In this state, you can use the encoders of the MIX section to adjust the send levels from the selected channel to MIX buses 1–24. 3 Turn the MIX encoders to adjust the send levels to the MIX buses. The LEDs around the periphery of the encoder indicate the approximate send level. MIX [ON] key MIX encoder Input channels Switches the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX bus on/ off. Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX bus. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 43 Input channel operations 4 Switches the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX bus on/ off. Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX bus. MIX bus To turn off the signal sent from that channel to a MIX bus, press the MIX [ON] key to turn it off. Press the MIX [ON] key once again to turn it back on. Note MIX buses can be switched (in units of two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses) between VARI type (send levels are variable) and FIXED type (send levels are fixed). (For details on switching the type ➥ p.274) ❏ When sending a signal from an input channel to MIX1 MIX2 a VARI type MIX bus INPUT CHANNEL 1 FADER ON …… STEREO L STEREO R 5 …… PAN MIX1 (VARI) LEVEL ON LEVEL ON MIX2 (VARI) INPUT CHANNEL 2 FADER ON PAN MIX1 (VARI) LEVEL ON LEVEL ON Input channels MIX2 (VARI) MIX1 MIX2 a FIXED type MIX bus INPUT CHANNEL 1 FADER ON …… STEREO L STEREO R ❏ When sending a signal from an input channel to …… PAN ON MIX1 (FIX) ON MIX2 (FIX) INPUT CHANNEL 2 FADER ON PAN ON MIX1 (FIX) ON MIX2 (FIX) If the send-destination MIX bus is set to FIXED mode, the MIX encoders have no effect; the signal can only be switched on/ off by the MIX [ON] key. 44 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section ❏ Using horizontal pairing Enabling/disabling pairing Monaural input channels can be paired to link their principal parameters. There are two types of pairing; you can use only one type. • Horizontal pair mode This mode pairs adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels (default setting). Here’s how to enable or defeat pairing for adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered channels. 1 To enable pairing, hold down the [SEL] key of one of the adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels, and press the [SEL] key of the other channel. The parameters of the channel you pressed first will be copied to the subsequently-pressed channel. Hint The copy-source channel is determined by the order in which you press the [SEL] keys. For example if you hold down the channel 1 [SEL] key and press the channel 2 [SEL] key, the channel 1 parameters will be copied to channel 2. To defeat pairing, hold down the [SEL] key of one of the paired channels and press the [SEL] key of the other channel. Note Input channel operations 2 Horizontal pair 5 If you are unable to enable/defeat pairing by using the above procedure, make sure that PAIR SHORTCUT is turned on in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen (➥ p.187). ❏ Using vertical pairing • Vertical pair mode This mode pairs channels of different layers that share the same fader. Here’s how to enable or disable pairing for channels of different layers that share the same fader. 1 Repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the MIXER SETUP screen appears. MIXER SETUP VERTICAL PAIR button Vertical pair Hint Input channels that are paired will have their parameters linked except for head amp, delay, pan, attenuation, and phase. PAIR MODE area 2 Click the VERTICAL PAIR button in the PAIR MODE area to turn it on. A window will appear, asking you to confirm that you want to change the pair mode. 3 Click the OK button. Now you can use “vertical pair” mode. When you switch to “vertical pair” mode, new numbers will be assigned to the input channels. For details, refer to p.200. You can return to “horizontal pair mode” by clicking the HORIZONTAL PAIR button to turn it on. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 45 5 Input channel operations Hint When you switch between vertical pair mode and horizontal pair mode, the input channel numbers will change, but the channel names and parameter values will not change. 4 Hold down the [SHIFT] key of the data entry section, and press the [SEL] key of one of the channels you want to pair. A window will appear, allowing you to select how pairing will be handled. 5 Click the appropriate button to choose the source/destination for the parameters that will be copied. The channels will be paired as you specify. Hint If you click the RESET BOTH button, the parameters of both channels will be reset to their default value. 6 46 To defeat pairing, hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [SEL] key of one of the channels. A window will ask you to confirm that you want to defeat pairing. Click the OK button to defeat pairing. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 6 Output channel operations This chapter explains the functions and operation of each section related to output channels. About the output channels Output channels mix the signals sent from input channels etc., and send them to the corresponding output jacks or output buses. There are three types of output channel, as follows. MIX channels 1–24 The signals sent from input channels to MIX buses are sent via these channels to MIX OUT jacks 1–24 or the STEREO/ MATRIX buses. Output channel operations 6 STEREO A/B channels The signals sent from input channels or MIX channels are sent via these channels to STEREO OUT jacks A/B. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 47 6 Output channel operations MATRIX channels 1–8 The signals sent from MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses are sent via these channels to the MATRIX OUT jacks. • 8 BAND EQ (8 band equalizer) (MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels) This is an eight-band (four upper bands + four lower bands) parametric EQ. • 4 BAND EQ (4 band equalizer) (MATRIX channels) This is a four-band (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, LOW) parametric EQ. • COMP (Compressor) This is a dynamics processor that can be used as a compressor, expander, or limiter. • LEVEL This adjusts the output level of the channel. • ON (On/off) This switches the channel on/off. If this is off, that channel will be muted. • OUTPUT DELAY This delays the output signal. It can be used to make fine adjustments in the relative timing between channels. • OUT ATT. (Output attenuator) This attenuates or boosts the level of the channel’s output signal. • METER This meter indicates the output level of the output channel. The level detection point can be switched. 48 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual • MIX to STEREO (MIX channels) This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. • to MATRIX (MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels) This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the MATRIX bus. • PAN (MIX channels) This adjusts the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. • BAL (Balance) (STEREO channels) This adjusts the L/R volume balance of the STEREO channel. • LCR (Left/Center/Right) (MIX channels) This sends the three-channel signal (left/right channels and a center channel) to the STEREO bus. • INSERT Here you can patch the desired output port and input port to insert-out/insert-in, allowing an external effect processor or other device to be inserted. You can switch the insert-out and insert-in locations. Operating section Hint MIX channels 1–24, STEREO A/B channels, and MATRIX channels 1–8 are always connected to MIX OUT jacks 1–24, STEREO OUT jacks A/B, and MATRIX OUT jacks 1–8 respectively. However, you can also make output patch settings to send the signals of these output channels to slots 1–4 or the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks. MIX section The MIX section adjusts the send level of the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses, and adjusts the output level of the MIX channels. trols of the MIX section to edit the send level and on/ off status of the signal being sent from the currently selected input channel to the MIX buses. Controls other than 4–6 will have no effect. When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, you can use the controls of the MIX section to edit the output level and on/off status of the MIX channels. Items in the MIX section 3 4 12 5 6 9 J Operations in the MIX section 6 ❏ Sending signals from MIX channels to output jacks 7 8 A [TO ST] LED This LED will light when the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus is on. 1 Make sure that an appropriate signal is being sent from an input channel to the MIX bus. 2 Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX section. When this key is on, you can use the MIX section to control the signals being sent from the MIX channels to the MIX OUT jacks. 3 Turn on the MIX [ON] key for the MIX channel whose signal you want to output. 4 Turn the MIX encoder to adjust the output level of the corresponding MIX channel. The signal of the corresponding MIX channel will be sent from the corresponding MIX OUT jack. 5 If you want the meters of the panel to indicate the output level of the MIX channels, press the [MIX/MATRIX] key of the meter section. The output level of the MIX channels will be shown by the [INPUT/MIX] meters. B [TO MTRX] LED This LED will light when the signal sent from the MIX channel to the MATRIX bus is on. C DCA group LEDs The LED of the DCA group to which this MIX channel is assigned will light. D MIX [PAIR] LED This LED will light if adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MIX channels are paired. E MIX [ON] key Output channel operations Here’s how a signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus can be sent from the corresponding MIX OUT jack. INPUT/MIX meters If the [MIX SEND] key (9) is on, this switches the signal sent from the input channel to the MIX bus on/off. If the [MIX MASTER] key (J) is on, this switches the MIX channel on/off. F MIX encoder 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 If the [MIX SEND] key (9) is on, this adjusts the send level to the MIX bus. If the [MIX MASTER] key (J) is on, this adjusts the output level of the MIX channel. OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 CH 1-24 ST IN/ /ST IN MIX MATRIX PEAK HOLD [MIX/MATRIX] key G MIX [CUE] key This is used to monitor a MIX channel via the Cue Monitor/Solo function. H MIX [SEL] key This selects the MIX channel to which operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or in the display will apply. I [MIX SEND] key J [MIX MASTER] key These keys switch the operation of the MIX section. When the [MIX SEND] key is on, you can use the con- PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 49 6 Output channel operations 6 Hint The detection point (metering point) of the signal levels shown in the meters can be changed if desired. For details, refer to p.101. ❏ Sending signals from MIX channels to MATRIX buses Continuing to hold down the MATRIX [SEL] key, turn MIX encoders 1–24 to adjust the level of the signal sent from each MIX channel to the currently selected MATRIX bus. The LEDs around the periphery of the MIX encoder indicate the approximate level. When you take your hand off the MATRIX [SEL] key, the encoders will revert to their previous function. Here’s how a signal sent from an input channel to a MIX bus can be output to a MATRIX bus. This can be done either by specifying the send level sent from all MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus, or by specifying the send level sent from a specific MIX channel to all MATRIX buses. To send signals from all MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus 1 Make sure that appropriate signals are being sent from input channels to the MIX buses. 2 Repeatedly press the [MATRIX/ST] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section to access the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen shown below. Use the encoders of the MIX section to adjust the send levels MATRIX/ST ROUTING Hint You can fix the encoders in the above state by rapidly pressing the MATRIX [SEL] key twice. To return to the previous state, press any MIX [SEL] key or MATRIX [SEL] key. To send from a specific MIX channel to all MATRIX buses MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF buttons 3 MIX channels Use the left/right scroll bar to display the MIX channel that you want to send to the MATRIX bus, and click the MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF button to turn it on. The signal of the corresponding MIX channel is now sent to the MATRIX bus. Hint 1 Make settings so that a signal is sent from the desired MIX channel to a MATRIX bus, as described in steps 1–3 of “To send signals from all MIX channels to a specific MATRIX bus.” 2 Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX section. 3 Press and hold the MIX [SEL] key for the sendsource MIX channel. All MATRIX [SEL] keys will blink. As long as you continue to hold down the MIX [SEL] key, MATRIX encoders 1–8 will adjust the send levels sent from the selected MIX channel to each MATRIX bus. 4 Continuing to hold down the MIX [SEL] key, turn MATRIX encoders 1–8 to adjust the level of the signal sent from the currently selected MIX channel to the MATRIX buses. The LEDs around the periphery of the MATRIX encoder indicate the approximate send level. When you take your hand off the MIX [SEL] key, the encoders will revert to their previous function. You can use the PRE FADER/POST FADER buttons in the MIX TO MATRIX area to change the send point (pre-fader/ post-fader) of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the MATRIX bus. 4 Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX section. 5 Press and hold the MATRIX [SEL] key for the send-destination MATRIX bus. All MIX [SEL] keys will blink. As long as you hold down the MATRIX [SEL] key, the MIX encoders 1–24 will respectively adjust the send levels from the MIX channels to the currently selected MATRIX bus. 50 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Use the encoders of the MATRIX section to adjust the send level 5 To adjust the pan of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus, press the MIX [SEL] key of the desired MIX channel and turn the STEREO [PAN] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 6 Turn the MIX encoder to adjust the signal level that is sent to the STEREO bus. Hint You can also switch the output to the STEREO bus on/off and adjust the pan from within the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (MATRIX/ST function). If desired, the send position (post fader or post ON key) for the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus can also be changed in this screen (➥ p.239). In the STEREO A/B channel strip, turn the STEREO A [ON] key and STEREO B [ON] key on (LED lit). 8 In the STEREO A/B channel strip, raise the [STEREO A]/[STEREO B] faders. The signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus will be sent from STEREO OUT jacks A/B. The level of the signal output from the STEREO A/B channels is shown by the [MASTER] meters in the meter section. Hint You can fix the encoders in the above state by rapidly pressing the MIX [SEL] key twice. To return to the previous state, press any MIX [SEL] key or MATRIX [SEL] key. 5 If you want the meters of the panel to indicate the output level of the MIX channels, press the [MIX/MATRIX] key of the meter section. Hint The send levels from MIX channels to MATRIX buses can also be edited in the display. For details, refer to p.238. 6 Output channel operations 7 ❏ Pairing MIX channels ❏ Sending signals from MIX channels to the STEREO bus Adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX channels can be paired. If two MIX channels are paired, their parameters (with the exception of pan and delay) will be linked. Here’s how signals sent from input channels to MIX buses can be output to the STEREO bus. 1 Turn on the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX section. 1 Make sure that appropriate signals are being sent from input channels to the MIX buses. 2 2 Press the [MIX MASTER] key in the MIX section. 3 Turn on the MIX [ON] key for the MIX channels whose signals you want to send to the STEREO bus. 4 Press the MIX [SEL] key of the channel whose signal you want to send to the STEREO bus, and turn on the [TO STEREO] key of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Of the desired two adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered MIX channels, hold down the MIX [SEL] key of one, and press the MIX [SEL] key of the other. The [PAIR] LED will light, and the MIX channels will be paired. At this time, the parameters of the channel whose MIX [SEL] key you pressed first will be copied to the channel whose MIX [SEL] key you pressed later. For example if you pressed the keys in the order of MIX channel 1 → MIX channel 2, the parameters of MIX channel 1 will be copied to MIX channel 2. 3 To defeat pairing, hold down the MIX [SEL] key of one of the paired MIX channels and press the MIX [SEL] key of the other channel. When MIX channels are paired, the signal flow will change as follows. [TO STEREO] key STEREO [PAN] encoder PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 51 6 Output channel operations Signals sent from an input channel to a VARI type MIX bus MIX channel output signals • If the VARI type MIX bus is not paired When the [MIX SEND] key is on, the MIX encoders will adjust the send level of the signals sent to the corresponding MIX bus from the currently selected input channel. • If MIX channels are not paired When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, the MIX encoders will adjust the output level of the corresponding MIX channels. MIX channel 1 OUTPUT LEVEL MIX bus 2 SEND LEVEL INPUT CHANNEL FADER ON …… MIX CHANNEL STEREO L STEREO R MIX1 MIX2 MIX bus 1 SEND LEVEL MIX channel 2 OUTPUT LEVEL OUTPUT LEVEL ON MIX OUT 1 ON MIX OUT 2 MIX 1 …… PAN OUTPUT LEVEL MIX1 (VARI) LEVEL ON LEVEL ON MIX 2 MIX2 (VARI) LEVEL • If the VARI type MIX bus is paired When the [MIX SEND] key is on, MIX encoders of odd-numbered channels will adjust the pan of the signal sent to the two MIX buses. MIX encoders of evennumbered channels will adjust the shared send level for the two MIX buses. • If MIX channels are paired When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, the MIX encoders of odd-numbered channels will adjust the volume balance between paired MIX channels. The MIX encoders of even-numbered channels will adjust the shared level of the two paired channels. MIX channel 1/2 BALANCE MIX bus 1/2 SEND PAN MIX channel 1/2 OUTPUT LEVEL MIX bus 1/2 SEND LEVEL INPUT CHANNEL FADER ON …… STEREO L STEREO R MIX1 MIX2 MIX CHANNEL OUTPUT LEVEL BALANCE ON MIX OUT 1 MIX 1 …… PAN MIX OUT 2 MIX1/2 (VARI) LEVEL PAN MIX 2 ON Hint MIX channel pairing status and output level/balance settings can also be edited in the CH to MIX screen (➥ p.274) or MATRIX/ST screen (➥ p.238). 52 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section STEREO A/B channel strip The STEREO A/B channel strip lets you send the signal of the STEREO A/B channels to the MATRIX bus, and adjust the output level of the STEREO A/B channels. Items in the STEREO A/B channel strip A [TO MATRIX] LED This LED will light when the signal sent from the STEREO channel to the MATRIX bus is on. B [COMP] LED This indicates the operating status of the compressor for the STEREO channel. This will be dark when the gain reduction amount is 0 dB, dimly lit when it is 0– 10 dB, and lit when it is greater than 10 dB. 1 4 Output channel operations C STEREO A/B [SEL] key 3 2 6 This selects the STEREO A or STEREO B L/R channels for editing in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or display. The L/R channels will alternate each time you press the key. D STEREO [MONO] key 5 This switches the STEREO B channel to monaural. The status will alternate between monaural and stereo each time you press the key. E STEREO [ON] key This switches the STEREO channel on/off. If this key is off (LED dark), no signal will be output from that STEREO channel. F STEREO fader This 100 mm fader adjusts the output level of the STEREO channel. G STEREO [CUE] key This is used to monitor the STEREO A/B channel via the Cue Monitor/Solo function. 6 7 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 53 6 Output channel operations Operations in the STEREO A/B channel strip ❏ Sending signals from the STEREO A/B channels to output jacks ❏ Sending signals from the STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses Here’s how the signals sent from input channels or MIX channels to the STEREO bus can be output from STEREO OUT jacks A/B. Here’s how the signal of the STEREO A/B channels can be sent to the MATRIX buses. 1 Make sure that appropriate signals are being sent from the desired channels to the STEREO bus. 2 Turn on the STEREO [ON] key of the STEREO A/B channel strip. 3 Raise the [STEREO A]/[STEREO B] faders. The signal of the STEREO A/B channels will be output from STEREO OUT jacks A/B. The output level of the STEREO A/B channels is shown by the [MASTER] meters in the meter section. 1 Make sure that an appropriate signal is being input to the STEREO bus. 2 Repeatedly press the [MATRIX/ST] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section to access the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen. MATRIX/ST ROUTING MASTER meters MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF buttons Hint Normally, the same signal is output from the STEREO A and B channels. However you can also use the STEREO B channel as a Center channel for L/C/R three-channel playback (➥ p.201, 242). 3 Use the left/right scroll bar to display the STEREO A/B channels, and click the MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF button to turn it on. With these settings, the signal of the STEREO A/B channels will be sent to the MATRIX channels. 4 Make sure that the STEREO A/B [ON] keys are turned on in the STEREO A/B channel strip; then hold down the STEREO A [SEL] key or STEREO B [SEL] key. While you continue holding down the key, all MATRIX [SEL] keys will blink. In this condition, you can use the MATRIX encoders to adjust the signal levels sent from the STEREO A or B channel to the MATRIX buses. 5 While continuing to hold down the STEREO A [SEL] key or STEREO B [SEL] key, turn MATRIX encoders 1–8 to adjust the signal level sent to the MATRIX buses. The LEDs around the periphery of the MATRIX encoder indicate the approximate send level. When you take your hand off the STEREO A [SEL] key or STEREO B [SEL] key, the MATRIX encoders will revert to their previous function. Hint • You can also switch to the above state by rapidly pressing the STEREO A [SEL] key or STEREO B [SEL] key twice. To return to the previous state, press any [SEL] key. • Send levels from the STEREO A/B channels to the MATRIX buses can also be adjusted from within the display (➥ p.238). 54 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section MATRIX section In the MATRIX section you can adjust the send levels from MIX channels to MATRIX buses, and adjust the output level of the MATRIX channels. 2 1 2 In the MATRIX section, press the MATRIX [ON] buttons to turn the desired MATRIX channel(s) on. 3 Turn the encoders of the MATRIX section to adjust the output level of the MATRIX channels. The signals sent to the MATRIX bus(es) will be sent from the corresponding MATRIX OUT jack(s). 4 To check the output level of the MATRIX channels, press the [MIX/MATRIX] key in the meter section. The [ST IN/MATRIX] meters will show the output levels. 3 4 5 6 6 Output channel operations Items in the MATRIX section ST/IN MATRIX meters [MIX/MATRIX] key CH 1 -24 ST IN/ /ST IN MIX MATRIX PEAK HOLD 1 L 1R 2L 2R 3L 3R 4L 4R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 ST IN / / MATRIX Hint The detection point (metering point) of the signal levels shown in the meters can be changed if desired (➥ p.101). A DCA group LEDs The LED of the DCA group to which this MATRIX channel is assigned will light. ❏ Pairing the MATRIX section B MATRIX [PAIR] LED This LED will light if adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered MATRIX channels are paired. Adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MATRIX channels can be paired if desired. If two channels are paired, their parameters (with the exception of pan and delay) will be linked. C MATRIX [ON] key This switches the MATRIX channel on/off. D MATRIX encoder This adjusts the output level of the MATRIX channel. 1 In the MATRIX section, hold down the MATRIX [SEL] key for one of two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels, and press the MATRIX [SEL] key of the other channel. The [PAIR] LED will light, and the MATRIX channels will be paired. At this time, the parameters of the channel whose MATRIX [SEL] key you pressed first will be copied to the channel whose MATRIX [SEL] key you pressed later. For example if you pressed the keys in the order of MATRIX channel 1 → MATRIX channel 2, the parameters of MATRIX channel 1 will be copied to MATRIX channel 2. 2 To defeat pairing, hold down the [SEL] key of one of the paired MATRIX channels and press the [SEL] key of the other MATRIX channel. When MATRIX channels are paired, the signal flow will change as follows. E MATRIX [CUE] key This is used to monitor a MATRIX channel via the Cue Monitor/Solo function. F MATRIX [SEL] key This selects the MATRIX channel to which operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section or in the display will apply. Operations in the MATRIX section ❏ Sending signals from the MATRIX section to output jacks Here’s how the signals sent from MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses can be sent to the MATRIX OUT jacks. 1 Make sure that appropriate signals are being sent from the MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to the MATRIX buses. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 55 6 Output channel operations Signals sent from MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses • If MATRIX channels are not paired When you are holding down the [SEL] key of a specific MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel in order to adjust the send levels from that channel to all MATRIX buses, the MATRIX encoders will adjust the send level to the corresponding MATRIX bus. Output signals from MATRIX channels • If MATRIX channels are not paired The MATRIX encoders adjust the output level of the corresponding MATRIX channel. MATRIX channel 1 OUTPUT LEVEL encoder MATRIX 1 LEVEL encoder MATRIX channel 2 OUTPUT LEVEL encoder MATRIX 2 LEVEL encoder MATRIX CHANNEL MIX CHANNEL FADER ON to MATRIX1 LEVEL ON MATRIX 1 …… ON OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX1 MATRIX2 OUTPUT LEVEL OUTPUT LEVEL ON MATRIX 2 to MATRIX2 LEVEL ON • If MATRIX channels are paired When you are holding down the [SEL] key of a specific MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel in order to adjust the send levels from that channel to all MATRIX buses, the MATRIX encoder of the odd-numbered channel will adjust the pan of the signal sent to the two MATRIX buses. The MATRIX encoder of the evennumbered channel will adjust the send level shared by the two MATRIX buses. MATRIX 1/2 PAN encoder • If MATRIX channels are paired MIX encoders of odd-numbered channels adjust the volume balance between paired MATRIX channels. MATRIX encoders of even-numbered channels will adjust the shared level of the two paired channels. MATRIX1/2 LEVEL encoder MATRIX channel 1/2 BALANCE encoder MATRIX channel 1/2 OUTPUT LEVEL encoder MATRIX CHANNEL OUTPUT LEVEL BALANCE ON MIX CHANNEL FADER to MATRIX 1/2 PAN ON LEVEL …… ON MATRIX 2 OUTPUT PATCH MATRIX1 MATRIX2 MATRIX 1 ON Hint Hint For details on how to send the signal of a specific MIX channel to all MATRIX buses, refer to p.50. For details on how to send the signal from either the STEREO A or B channel to all MATRIX buses, refer to p.54. 56 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section You can access the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (MATRIX/ ST function) to see a list of the MATRIX channels in the display, and edit the pairing and other parameters. For details, refer to p.238 of the Reference section. 7 Using the Selected Channel section This chapter explains how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to control input channels and output channels. About the SELECTED CHANNEL section The SELECTED CHANNEL section lets you edit the mix parameters of the currently selected input channel or output channel; it corresponds to a channel module of a conventional analog mixer. This section controls the channel that was last selected by pressing its [SEL] key. (In the case of an ST IN channel, FX TRN channel, or STEREO A/B channel, you will select either the L or the R channel.) However, you will be able to edit essentially all of the mix parameters (head amp settings, EQ/compressor/gate settings, output to the STEREO bus, DCA group and mute group assignments, etc.) using panel controls. Items in the SELECTED CHANNEL section 7 Using the Selected Channel section GROUP Here you can assign the currently selected channel to DCA groups and mute groups. (For details on DCA groups and mute groups ➥ p.74, 75) A DCA [1]–[8] keys 3 4 These keys assign the selected channel to DCA groups 1–8. The key LED for the assigned DCA group(s) will light. Input channels can use DCA groups 1–8, and output channels can use DCA groups 7/8. For DCA groups 7/ 8, input channels and output channels can both exist in the same-numbered group. B MUTE [1]–[8] keys 5 These keys assign the selected channel to mute groups 1–8. The key LED for the assigned mute group(s) will light. Mute groups 1–8 allow you to mix input channels and output channels. C [RECALL SAFE] key 1 2 This key switches Recall Safe on/off for the selected channel. If this key is on, the parameters of the corresponding channel will not be affected when a scene is recalled. The applicable parameters can be specified in the RECALL SAFE screen (SCENE function) (➥ p.166). D [MUTE SAFE] key This key switches Mute Safe on/off for the selected channel. If this key is on, the corresponding channel will be temporarily excluded from mute groups. E Level meter This indicates the input/output level of the selected channel. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 57 7 Using the Selected Channel section F CH [DEC] key G CH [INC] key CHANNEL SELECT The CH [DEC] key decrements the currently selected channel number, and the CH [INC] key increments it. • Input channels 1–48 • ST IN channels 1L/1R–4L/4R • FX RTN channels 1L/1R–4L/4R • MIX channels 1–24 • MATRIX channels 1–8 • STEREO A channel L/R • STEREO B channel L/R Here you can select or copy channels. 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 DELAY Here you can edit delay-related parameters for the currently selected channel. 1 A INPUT/OUTPUT indicators 3 2 These indicators show whether an input channel or output channel is selected. B Name indicator This indicates the name of the selected channel. C Number indicator This is the number of the selected channel. For stereo channels (ST IN, FX TRN, STEREO A/B), the number and a character of “L” or “r” will appear, depending on whether the L or R channel is selected. If a channel is paired, the decimal point for the lowest place will light. For a FX RTN channel, the LED for the highest place will light. Channel Display ST IN channel 1L./1r. – 4L./4r. FX RTN channel 1.L./1.r. – 4.L./4.r. STEREO A channel AL./Ar. STEREO B channel BL./Br. A DELAY [TIME] indicator This indicates the currently specified delay time in msec units. However in the case of one second, the indicator will be “1...”. B DELAY [TIME] encoder This controls the delay time of the selected channel. D [PASTE] key E [COPY] key C DELAY [ON] key These keys are used to copy and paste channel data. When you press the [COPY] key, the data of the currently selected channel will be copied into a memory buffer; when you press the [PASTE] key, the data in the memory buffer will be pasted into the currently selected channel. You can specify the parameters that will be copied in the INPUT VIEW function CH COPY screen (for input channels) or the OUTPUT VIEW function CH COPY screen (for output channels). Note • If the buffer memory contains no data, or if the data in the buffer memory is of a different type than the selected channel, a warning message will appear and the Paste operation cannot be executed. • The data in the buffer memory is lost when the power is turned off. 58 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section This key switches delay on/off for the selected channel. GAIN/ATTENUATION/ø (Gain / Attenuation / Phase) NOISE GATE Here you can edit the head amp, post AD conversion attenuator, and phase parameters for the currently selected channel. This section is available only if an input channel is selected. Here you can edit noise gate parameters for the selected channel. This section is valid only if an input channel or ST IN channel is selected. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J 1 1 3 2 Using the Selected Channel section 7 A A[GAIN/ATT] key This key selects the parameter that is controlled by the [GAIN/ATT] encoder (2). • [GAIN/ATT] key lit (Gain) The encoder adjusts the input sensitivity of the internal head amp patched to the input channel (PM5DRH only) or of an external head amp that supports the dedicated protocol (Yamaha AD8HR, AD824, etc.). The range of adjustment is +10 to –62. • [GAIN/ATT] key dark (Attenuator) The encoder controls the post AD conversion attenuator of the input channel. The range of adjustment is –96 to +24. A GATE GR meter This meter indicates the amount of reduction produced by the gate of the selected channel. B GATE [ON] key Switches the gate on/off for the selected channel. C GATE [ATTACK] indicator Indicates the attack time of the gate in msec units. D GATE [ATTACK] encoder Note Gain cannot be selected for channels to which an internal/ external head amp is not patched. Specifies the attack time of the gate (the time from when the signal exceeds the threshold until the gate opens). B [GAIN/ATT] encoder According to the setting of the [GAIN/ATT] key (1), this encoder controls either the input sensitivity of the internal/external head amp patched to the input channel, or the attenuator following AD conversion. The LEDs around the periphery will change as follows. • [GAIN/ATT] key lit (Gain) E GATE [HOLD] indicator Indicates the hold time of the gate in msec units or sec units (the indicator for the displayed unit will light). F GATE [HOLD] encoder Specifies the hold time of the gate (the time from when the signal falls below the threshold until the gate closes). G GATE [DECAY] indicator ➠ Indicates the decay time of the gate in msec units or sec units. H GATE [DECAY] encoder Specifies the hold time of the gate (the time over which the gate will close after the hold time has elapsed). • [GAIN/ATT] key dark (Attenuator) ➠ – (attenuation) I GATE [THRESHOLD] encoder ➠ 0 + (boost) Specifies the threshold level of the gate (the level at which the gate will open or close). The gate will open when the signal exceeds this level, and will close when the signal falls below this level. J GATE [RANGE] encoder C [ø] key This switches the phase of the selected input channel. If this key is on, the phase will be reversed. Specifies the amount of attenuation while the gate is closed. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 59 7 Using the Selected Channel section STEREO COMPRESSOR Here you can switch the on/off status of the signal sent from the selected channel to the STEREO bus, and adjust the pan. Here you can edit compressor parameters for the selected channel. This section is available only if a channel other than an FX RTN channel is selected. 2 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 J 1 1 A STEREO [PAN] encoder The function of this encoder depends on the currently selected channel, as follows. Selected channel Function Input channel ST IN channel FX RTN channel Adjusts the panning of the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus. A COMP GR meter This meter indicates the amount of reduction produced by the compressor of the selected channel. MIX channel STEREO A/B channels Adjusts the left/right balance of the signal sent from the STEREO A/B channels. MATRIX channel No function. Switches the compressor on/off for the selected channel. B [TO STEREO] key The function of this key depends on the currently selected channel, as follows. Selected channel B COMP [ON] key Function C COMP [ATTACK] indicator Indicates the attack time of the compressor in msec units. D COMP [ATTACK] encoder Specifies the attack time of the compressor (the time from when the signal exceeds the threshold level until compression begins). Input channel ST IN channel FX RTN channel Functions as an on/off switch for the signal sent from that channel to the STEREO bus. MIX channel STEREO A/B channels MATRIX channel E COMP [RELEASE] indicator Indicates the release time of the compressor in msec units or sec units (the indicator for the displayed unit will light). No function. F COMP [RELEASE] encoder Specifies the release time of the compressor (the time from when the signal falls below the threshold level until compression is removed). G COMP [RATIO] indicator Indicates the compression ratio setting. H COMP [RATIO] encoder Specifies the compression ratio (the ratio at which the input signal will be compressed when the signal exceeds the threshold level). I COMP [THRESHOLD] encoder Specifies the threshold level of the compressor (the level at which the compressor will operate). The input signal will start being compressed when the signal exceeds this level; compression will be removed when the signal falls below this level. 60 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section J COMP [GAIN] encoder Hint Specifies the gain of the signal that has passed through the compressor. HPF (High Pass Filter) • Input channels also provide an HPF that is independent of the four-band EQ. • Output channels do not have an independent HPF, but instead allow you to switch the LOW band type to HPF. • Switching the equalizer type to HPF or LPF can be done in the EQ PARAM screen (➥ p.225) Here you can edit high pass filter parameters for the selected channel. This section is available only if an input channel is selected. 45 6 1 2 2 3 1 7 3 8 Using the Selected Channel section 7 9 A HPF [FREQUENCY] encoder Specifies the cutoff frequency of the high pass filter. B HPF [FREQUENCY] indicator Indicates the currently specified high pass filter cutoff frequency, in units of Hz. C HPF [ON] key Switches the high pass filter on/off. EQUALIZER Here you can edit equalizer parameters for the selected channel. The equalizer structure differs as follows between input channels and output channels. ❏ Input channels You can use a four-band peak/dip type EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, LOW). The HIGH band can be switched to an LPF or shelving type; the LOW band can be switched to a shelving type. ❏ Output channels If a MIX channel or STEREO A/B is selected, you can use an eight-band peak/dip type EQ. (Operation is divided into UPPER and LOWER groups of four bands each.) For MATRIX channels, you can use a four-band peak/dip type EQ. For any output channel, the HIGH band can be switched to shelving or LPF. The LOW band can be switched to shelving or HPF. For MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels, this can be specified for UPPER and LOWER, allowing you to apply shelving or filtering twice. A EQ [ON] key Switches the equalizer on/off for the selected channel. B EQ [UPPER] key C EQ [LOWER] key If a MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel is selected, these keys select the four-band group (UPPER or LOWER) that you will edit. (The LED of the currently selected key will light.) If any other channel is selected, the LEDs of both keys will be dark. Hint By simultaneously holding down the EQ [UPPER] key and EQ [LOWER] key, you can return the EQ GAIN settings of the selected channel to a flat state. D EQ [ ] key If this key is on, the corresponding HIGH band EQ type will be switched to shelving. In this case, the HIGH band EQ [Q] knob will have no function. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 61 7 Using the Selected Channel section E EQ [Q] encoder Adjusts the Q (steepness) of each band. This encoder does nothing for bands whose EQ type is set to shelving, LPF, or HPF. F EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder Adjusts the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) at which each band will be boosted or cut. G EQ [FREQUENCY] indicator Indicates the center frequency (or cutoff frequency) at which boost/cut will occur, in units of kHz or Hz. (The indicator for the displayed unit will light.) H EQ [GAIN] encoder Adjusts the amount of cut/boost for each band. I [ ] key If this key is on, the corresponding LOW band EQ will be switched to shelving type. In this case, the LOW band EQ [Q] knob will have no function. Operations in the SELECTED CHANNEL section The number shown in the number indicator is as follows. If a channel is paired, the decimal point for the lowest place will light. For a FX RTN channel, the decimal point for the highest place will light. Selecting a channel and editing its parameters The SELECTED CHANNEL section always controls the channel that was last selected by its [SEL] key. To select an input channel, press a [SEL] key in the INPUT channel strip or ST IN/FX RTN channel strip. (If necessary, switch the layer before pressing a [SEL] key.) To select an output channel, press a [SEL] key in the MIX section, MATRIX section, or STEREO A/B channel strip. 1 Selected channel Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control. The number and name of the currently selected channel is shown in the SELECTED CH area at the lower left of the display, and by the name indicator and number indicator in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Number of the selected channel Number indicator Input channels 1–48 1–48 ST IN/FX RTN channels 1–4 (L/R) 1L./1r. – 4L./4r. MIX channels 1–24 1–24 MATRIX channels 1–8 1–8 STEREO A/B channels (L/R) AL., Ar., BL., Br. Hint • In the case of stereo channels (ST IN/FX RTN channels, STEREO A/B channels), you can switch between L/R by pressing the same [SEL] key. • You can also switch the channel by using the CH [DEC] key / CH [INC] key of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. 2 Name of the selected channel Use the controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the parameters of the selected channel. When you select a channel in step 1, the parameter values of that channel will be shown by the LEDs and indicators of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. These parameters can be edited using the controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Hint Name indicator The name of the selected channel 62 CH 1 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Number indicator The number of the selected channel • Gate, compressor, and EQ/HPF operations are explained in the second half of this chapter; refer to the appropriate section for details. • For details on DCA group and mute group operations, refer to p.74, 75. • If you operate a parameter that is selected for AUTO DISPLAY in the PREFERENCE 1 screen, the screen associated with that parameter will appear automatically. 3 Operating section In the same way, select other channels and edit their parameters. Hint Compressor operations • The type of the currently selected compressor is shown in the COMP PARAM screen (➥ p.229, 266). • The COMP LIBRARY screen also provides other library settings suitable for a wide variety of instruments or purposes. Settings you edit can also be stored in the library. • For a detailed explanation of each type of compressor, refer to the Appendices (➥ p.295). Here’s how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to operate the internal compressor. Note The PM5D provides four types of built-in compressor; COMP (compressor), EXPANDER (expander), COMPANDER H (hard compander), and COMPANDER S (soft compander). These four operate in different ways. This means that if you want to use a compressor, you must load compressor settings of the desired type from the compressor library, and then edit the parameters as desired. 1 Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control. A compressor is available for all channels except for FX RTN channels. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the INPUT [GATE/COMP] key (for an input channel) or OUTPUT [COMP] key (for an output channel) several times to access the COMP LIBRARY screen. 4 After selecting a library item, click the RECALL button located at the lower left of the library list. The library item you selected in step 3 will be recalled to the channel you selected in step 1. 5 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the COMP [ON] key to make the LED light. The compressor of the selected channel will be activated. 7 COMP GR meter Using the Selected Channel section COMP LIBRARY COMP [ON] key 6 RECALL button Scroll bar In the COMP LIBRARY screen you can store compressor settings in the library, or recall existing data from the library. The operations described below are the same for the COMP LIBRARY screen of both output channels and input channels. 3 Move the cursor to the scroll bar of the library list in the lower right of the screen, and turn the [DATA] encoder to select the library item that you want to load. (The library item selected in the list is highlighted.) Numbers 001–036 for which an “R” is shown at the right of the list contain read-only preset library items. Numbers 001–004 contain preset library items of different types. It is convenient to use these library items when you want to select a specific type. Preset library items 001–004 are respectively of the following types. Number Name You can use the compressor controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the compressor parameters. The amount of gain reduction produced by the compressor is shown by the COMP GR meter in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Hint • For details on the function of the compressor controls, refer to p.60. • More detailed parameters for the compressor (selection of the key-in signal, stereo link on/off, assignment to a compressor link group) can be edited in the COMP PARAM screen of the INPUT GATE/COMP function or the OUTPUT COMP function (➥ p.229, 266). • You can also cause the COMP PARAM screen to appear automatically when you operate a compressor-related control. This setting is made in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen (➥ p.186). Type 001 Comp COMP (Compressor) 002 Expand EXPANDER 003 Compander (H) COMPANDER H (Hard compander) 004 Compander (S) COMPANDER S (Soft compander) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 63 7 Using the Selected Channel section Gate operations 4 After selecting a library item, click the RECALL button located at the lower left of the library list. The library item you selected in step 3 will be recalled to the channel you selected in step 1. 5 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the GATE [ON] key to make the LED light. The gate of the selected channel will be activated. 6 You can use the gate controls of the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the gate parameters. The amount of gain reduction produced by the gate is shown by the GATE GR meter in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Here’s how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to operate the internal gate. Note The PM5D provides two types of built-in gating; GATE and DUCKING. These operate in different ways. This means that if you want to use a gate, you must load gate settings of the desired type from the gate library, and then edit the parameters as desired. 1 Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control. Gate is available only for input channels or ST IN channels. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the INPUT [GATE/COMP] key several times to access the GATE LIBRARY screen. GATE GR meter GATE LIBRARY GATE [ON] key Hint RECALL button Scroll bar In the GATE LIBRARY screen you can store gate settings in the library, or recall existing data from the library. 3 Move the cursor to the scroll bar of the library list in the lower right of the screen, and turn the [DATA] encoder to select the library item that you want to load. (The library item selected in the list is highlighted.) Numbers 001–036 for which an “R” is shown at the right of the list contain read-only preset library items. Numbers 001–002 contain preset library items of different types. It is convenient to use these library items when you want to select a specific type. These numbers correspond to the different types as follows. Number Name Type 001 Gate GATE 002 Ducking DUCKING Hint • The type of the currently selected gate is shown in the GATE PARAM screen (➥ p.264). • The GATE LIBRARY screen also provides other library settings suitable for a wide variety of instruments or purposes. You can also save your own settings in the library. • For a detailed explanation of each type of gate, refer to the Appendices (➥ p.294). 64 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section • For details on the function of the gate controls, refer to p.59. • More detailed parameters for the gate (selection of key-in signal, stereo link on/off) can be edited in the INPUT GATE/ COMP function GATE PARAM screen (➥ p.264). • You can also cause the GATE PARAM screen to appear automatically when you operate a gate control. This setting is made in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen (➥ p.186). Hint EQ/HPF operations 1 2 3 Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to control. Four-band EQ (HIGH, HIGH MID, LOW MID, LOW) is provided on all input channels and on MATRIX channels. Eight-band EQ is provided on MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels. (Control is divided into UPPER and LOWER sections of four bands each.) In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, EQ [ON] key make sure that the EQ [ON] key is on. EQ [UPPER] If you selected a MIX key channel or STEREO A/ EQ [LOWER] B channel in step 1, key use the SELECTED CHANNEL section EQ [UPPER] key or EQ [LOWER] key to select the UPPER or LOWER group of four bands. For each band, use the EQ [Q] encoder, EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder, and [GAIN] encoder to edit the steepness, center frequency, and gain respectively. 4 If you want to restore the EQ of the currently operated channel to a flat state, simultaneously hold down the EQ [UPPER] and EQ [LOWER] keys of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. When you hold down these two keys simultaneously, the boost/cut amount of all bands will be reset to 0 dB. 5 If you want to use the HIGH band or LOW band as a shelving-type EQ, turn on the [ ] key or [ ] key for the corresponding band. 6 If you want to use HPF on an input channel, turn on the HPF [ON] key in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Input channels provide an HPF that is independent of the four-band EQ. Use the HPF [ON] key to switch the HPF on/off, and use the HPF [FREQUENCY] encoder to specify the cutoff frequency. HPF [FREQUENCY] encoder 7 Using the Selected Channel section Here’s how you can use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the EQ (equalizer) and HPF (High Pass Filter). EQ can be used on all input channels and all output channels. An HPF that is independent of the EQ is provided only for input channels. However even on output channels, you can switch the LOW band type to HPF. If the input signal of an input channel clips because of EQ boost, make the SELECTED CHANNEL section [GAIN/ATT] key go dark and use the [GAIN/ATT] encoder to lower the level. HPF [ON] key Hint EQ [ ] key EQ [FREQUENCY] encoder EQ [Q] encoder • Output channels do not provide an HPF that is independent of the EQ, but you can switch the LOW band type to HPF, or the HIGH band type to LPF. This change is made in the OUTPUT EQ function EQ PARAM screen (➥ p.225). • For input channels you can switch the HIGH band type to LPF. This change is made in the INPUT ø/EQ function EQ PARAM screen (➥ p.260). Hint EQ [GAIN] encoder EQ [ • You can cause the associated screen to appear automatically when you operate equalizer or HPF parameters in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. This setting is made in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen (➥ p.186). • In the same way as for compressor or noise gate settings, EQ settings can also be stored to or recalled from a dedicated EQ library. Preset library items suitable for a variety of instruments or situations are also provided. ] key PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 65 8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations 8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations This chapter explains how to edit the input patch and output patch settings, and how to use insert connections and direct output. Changing the input patch settings The input patch section lets you assign input ports to input channels. In the PM5D’s default state, the input patch settings assign the following signals to input channels. Input channels 1–48 Input signals from INPUT jacks 1–48 ST IN channels 1–4 Input signals from ST IN jacks 1–4 (L/R) FX RTN channels 1–4 Output signals of internal effects 1–4 (L/R) 2 Use the left/right scroll bar to display the patch-source input port. The horizontal direction of the screen shows the patch source’s input port type, ID number, port number, and the number of input channels that are assigned to it. To view input ports that are not currently visible, use the horizontal scroll bar or the [DATA] encoder. From the top, this shows the input port type and ID number, the port number, and the number of input channels currently assigned. However, you will need to edit the input patch settings if you want input signals from an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 or input signals from a 2TR IN DIGITAL jack to be assigned to an input channel. Here’s how to do this. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the INPUT PATCH screen. INPUT PATCH To patch an input port to an input channel, click this grid to display a “ ” symbol. Indicates the number of input ports assigned to the input channel. Indicates the name of the input channel. Indicates the number of the input channel. You can select the following input ports. The INPUT PATCH screen is where you can patch (assign) input ports (rear panel input jacks or input channels of I/O cards) to input channels. The horizontal direction of the screen shows the input ports (i.e., patch sources), and the vertical direction of the screen shows the input channels (i.e., patch destinations). If an input port is patched to an input channel, a symbol is displayed at the intersecting grid. 66 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual 3 Operating section AD IN 1–48 INPUT jacks 1–48 AD ST IN 1–4 ST IN jacks 1–4 (L/R) SLOT IN 1–4 Input channels (1–16) of slots 1–4 FX OUT 1–8 Outputs (L/R) of internal effects 1–8 2TR IN D1–D3 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R) 2TR IN A1/A2 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 Use the vertical scroll bar to display the patchdestination input channel. The vertical direction of the screen shows the patchdestination input channels. To see channels that are not currently visible, use the vertical scroll bar. Alternatively, you can hold down the [SHIFT] key and turn the [DATA] encoder. The following input channels can be selected. CH 1–48 Input channels 1–48 STIN1L/1R–STIN4L/4R ST IN channels 1–4 (L/R) FXRTN1L/1R–FXRTN4L/4R FX RTN channels 1–4 (L/R) 4 Click the grid where the desired patch-source and patch-destination intersect. The vertical and horizontal red lines indicate the grid position where the cursor is located. The SELECTED PATCH area in the upper left of the screen shows the input port and input channel for the grid at which the cursor is located. Input channel number Input channel name 5 Click the OK button in the window. The new patch will be finalized, and a “ ” symbol will appear at the corresponding grid. To cancel the patch, click the “ ” symbol once again. Hint • If you want to change the patch directly without having to respond to the confirmation window, go to the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen and turn PATCH CONFIRMATION off (➥ p.186). • To move the cursor location rapidly in or out of the grid, hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/ [†] keys. Input port Note You can patch a single input port to multiple input channels, but you cannot patch multiple input ports to a single input channel. When you click a grid, a window will ask you to confirm that you want to change the patch setting. Changing the output patch settings MIX channels 1–24 MIX OUT jacks 1–24 STEREO A/B channels STEREO OUT jacks A/B MATRIX channels 1–8 MATRIX OUT jacks 1–8 Monitor output L/C/R MONITOR OUT jacks L/R/C 2 Use the horizontal scroll bar to display the patch-destination output port. The horizontal direction of the screen shows the patch destination’s output port type, ID number, port number, and the number of output channels that are assigned to it. From the top, this area shows the output port type, ID number, port number, and number of assigned output channels. However you can edit the output patch settings so that the signals of these output channels are also sent from other output ports in parallel. Here’s how to do this. 1 8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations In the output patch section you can assign output channels to output ports. The PM5D’s output channels are always connected to the following output jacks. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the OUTPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the OUTPUT PATCH screen. OUTPUT PATCH To patch an output port to an output channel, click this grid to display a “ ” symbol. Indicates the number of output ports assigned to the output channel. Indicates the output channel number. You can select the following output ports. 3 In the OUTPUT PATCH screen you can patch (assign) output channels to output ports. The horizontal direction of the screen shows the output ports (i.e., patch destinations), and the vertical direction of the screen shows the output channels (i.e., patch sources). When the PM5D is in its default state, MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, and the STEREO A channel are patched to the output channels of slots 1–4 and the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks in addition to the output jacks that are always connected. However, you are free to change this patching. SLOT OUT 1–4 Output channels (1–16) of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX IN 1–8 Inputs (L/R) of internal effects 1–8 2TR OUT D1/D2 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–2 (L/R) Use the vertical scroll bar to display the patchsource output channel. The vertical direction of the screen shows the patchsource output channels. The following output channels can be selected. MIX 1–24 MIX channels 1–24 MATRIX 1–8 MATRIX channels 1–8 ST AL/AR STEREO A channel (L/R) ST BL/BR STEREO B channel (L/R) MONITOR L/R/C Monitor output (L/C/R) TALKBACK OUT Talkback output OSC OUT Oscillator output PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 67 8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations 4 Click the grid where the desired patch-source and patch-destination intersect. The SELECTED PATCH area in the upper left of the screen shows the output port and output channel for the grid at which the cursor is located. Output channel number Output port When you click a grid, a window will ask you to confirm that you want to change the patch setting. Hint If you want to change the patch directly without having to respond to the confirmation window, go to the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen and turn PATCH CONFIRMATION off (➥ p.186). 5 Click the OK button in the window. The new patch will be finalized, and a “ ” symbol will appear at the corresponding grid. To cancel the patch, click the “ ” symbol once again. Note You can patch an output channel to more than one output port, but you cannot patch multiple output channels to a single output port. 68 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Inserting an external device into a channel You can insert an effect processor or other external device into the signal route of an input channel or output channel. When doing so, you can specify for each channel the input/output port and insert I/O point that you want to use for insertion. Connecting an external device for insertion When inserting an external device into a desired channel, you can use the rear panel input/output jacks or the input/ output jacks of an I/O card installed in a slot as insert-out/ insert-in jacks. The following diagrams show typical examples of insert connections. Insert connection example 1 2 1 3 Insert connection example 3 2 8 1 3 AES/EBU COAXIAL AES/EBU AES/EBU COAXIAL AES/EBU AES/EBU DIGITAL IN (AES/EBU) DIGITAL OUT (AES/EBU) Input Patch / Output Patch operations MY8-AE Special AES/EBU cable for MY8-AE Effect processor Insert connection example 2 INPUT 1/2 OUTPUT 1/2 (female) (male) DIGITAL OUT (AES/EBU) DIGITAL IN (AES/EBU) Effect processor MY8-AD96 MY8-DA96 ANALOG OUT ANALOG IN Effect processor If you are inserting an external digital device via a digital I/ O card as shown in “Insert connection example 3,” you will need to synchronize the word clock of the PM5D and the external device. Normally, we recommend that you set the external device as a word clock slave, and make it follow the PM5D’s word clock. (For details on how to set your device as a word clock slave, refer to its manual.) Hint For the PM5D model, you can also use the rear panel INSERT IN/OUT jacks to insert an external device into an input signal, as an alternative to the method described above. In this case, the insert I/O point is fixed at immediately before AD conversion. Also, the steps described p.70 will not be necessary. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 69 8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations Patching the insert-out and insert-in 3 Here we will explain how to make insert connections, using an example in which an external device connected to an AD/DA card in a slot is inserted into an input channel. However, the procedure is the same when inserting into an output channel, the only difference being that you will be working in a screen for output channels. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the INSERT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function) shown below. In the left side of this screen you can select an output port to use as insert-out, and in the right side of the screen you can select an input port to use as insert-in. In the right side of the screen, click the grid at which the input port connected to your external device intersects the desired channel. You can select the following input ports. AD IN 1–48 INPUT jacks 1–48 AD ST IN 1–4 ST IN jacks 1–4 (L/R) SLOT IN 1–4 Input channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX OUT 1–8 Outputs (L/R) of internal effects 1–8 GEQ OUT 1–12 Outputs of GEQ modules 1–12 2TR IN D1–D3 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R) 2TR IN A1/A2 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 (L/R) The SELECTED PATCH area shows the channel corresponding to the grid at which the cursor is located. To the right of this are shown the input/output ports patched to insert-out/insert-in for this channel. INSERT PATCH Channel at which the cursor is located Port patched to insert-out Port patched to insert-in Hint To move the cursor rapidly between the grids in the left and right sides of the screen, you can hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [√]/[®] keys. Note With the steps you have taken so far, the external device has been patched to the insert-out/insert-in of the selected channel. However, please note that the insert connection is not actually enabled until you turn on the INSERT I/O ON/OFF button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen as described below. As an exception to this, the INSERT I/O ON/OFF button is automatically turned on if you patch a GEQ. If you want to insert into an output channel, press the OUTPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen. 2 In the left side of the screen, click the grid at which the output port connected to your external device intersects the desired channel. The procedure is the same as in the INPUT PATCH screen or OUTPUT PATCH screen. You can select the following output ports. SLOT OUT 1–4 Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX IN 1–8 L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8 GEQ IN 1–12 Inputs of GEQ modules 1–12 2TR OUT 1–3 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R) 4 Press the INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function) shown below. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function) you can switch insert on/off for each input channel. In this screen you can also select the insert I/O point (the location at which the external device will be inserted). INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT Hint If you select GEQ IN at the left side of the screen, the identically-numbered GEQ OUT will be automatically selected at the right side of the screen, inserting the correspondinglynumbered GEQ module into that channel. (For details on using the graphic EQ ➥ p.110) If you want to insert into an output channel, press the OUTPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen. 70 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 5 Select one of the following as the insert I/O point for each channel, and turn on the corresponding button. PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ POST EQ Immediately after the EQ PRE DELAY Immediately before the delay POST FADER Immediately after the fader The selected point is indicated by the graphic in the upper part of the screen. The INS symbol indicates the insert I/O point for the channel at which the cursor is located. Select the insert I/O point for each channel. These are the INSERT I/O ON/OFF buttons that switch insert on/off for each channel. 8 These indicate the names of the input channels. 6 Input Patch / Output Patch operations These indicate the channel numbers. Click the INSERT I/O ON/OFF button for the desired channel to turn it on. This enables the insert connection for the corresponding channel. If you selected AD IN as the insert-in, or if you selected a slot to which an external head amp supporting the special protocol (Yamaha AD8HR, AD824) is connected, make head amp settings as necessary (➥ p.36). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 71 8 Input Patch / Output Patch operations Directly outputting the signal of an input channel Here’s how the signal being input to an input channel or ST IN channel can be output directly from the desired output jack. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the DIRECT OUT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function) shown below. 3 DIRECT OUT PATCH Press the INPUT [PATCH] key several times to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function) shown below. In the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function) you can switch direct output on/off, and select the direct out point (the location from which the signal is taken for direct output). INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT In this screen you can select the output port that will directly output the input signal of an input channel or ST IN channel. You can select the following output ports. 2 SLOT OUT 1–4 Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 2TR OUT D1–D3 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 (L/R) 4 Click the grid at which the desired channel and output port intersect. The procedure is the same as in the INPUT PATCH screen or OUTPUT PATCH screen. The SELECTED PATCH area at the upper left of the screen shows the channel and output port corresponding to the grid at which the cursor is located. Choose the direct out point for each channel from the following choices, and turn on the appropriate button. PRE HPF Immediately before the HPF PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ (immediately after the PRE EQ of the INSERT I/O) PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key The selected point is indicated by the graphic in the upper part of the screen. Note With the procedure up to this point, the selected channel and output port are now patched. However, please note that direct output is not actually enabled until you turn on the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT screen described below. The “D” symbol indicates the direct out point for the channel at which the cursor is located Switch direct out on/off for each channel. Select the direct out point for each channel. These indicate the name of the input channels. These indicate the number of the input channels. 5 72 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Click the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button for the desired channel to turn it on. This enables direct output for the corresponding channel. 9 Grouping and linking This chapter explains DCA Groups and Mute Groups which let you control the level or muting of multiple channels simultaneously, and EQ Link and Compressor Link which let you link EQ or compressor parameters of multiple channels. You can use eight DCA groups and eight mute groups to control multiple channels simultaneously. DCA groups allow the level of multiple channels to be controlled together by the DCA faders 1–8 of the top panel DCA strip. A single DCA fader will control the level of channels belonging to the same DCA group while maintaining the level difference between the channels. This provides a convenient way in which drum mics can be grouped. DCA groups 1–6 are for input channels only, but DCA groups 7/8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in an identically-numbered group. Mute groups allow multiple channels to be switched on/off simultaneously by the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys in the SCENE MEMORY section of the top panel. You can use this to cut out multiple channels simultaneously. Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in an identically-numbered group. Items in the DCA strip The DCA strip is where you control DCA groups 1–8. 1 9 2 Grouping and linking About DCA Groups and Mute Groups 3 Items in the ASSIGN MODE section The ASSIGN MODE section lets you use the panel to assign channels to DCA groups or mute groups. 4 5 6 1 A Name indicator 2 This indicates the name assigned to each DCA group. B DCA [MUTE] key A ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key This key lets you assign channels to DCA groups 1–8. While this key is blinking, you can use the [CUE] key of each channel to assign that channel to the currently selected DCA group. This switches DCA group muting on/off. If you turn this key on (LED lit), channels assigned to that DCA group will be muted. C DCA [NOMINAL] LED This LED will light when the corresponding DCA fader is at the 0 dB position. D DCA fader B ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key This key lets you assign channels to mute groups 1–8. While this key is blinking, you can use the [CUE] key of each channel to assign that channel to the currently selected mute group. This fader adjusts the level of the DCA group. E DCA [RCL SAFE] LED If Recall Safe is enabled for a DCA group, the corresponding LED will light. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 73 9 Items in the DCA strip F DCA [CUE] key This key is used to cue-monitor all channels assigned to that DCA group. Using DCA Groups Here we explain how to assign channels to DCA groups and use the DCA faders to control them. Assigning channels to DCA groups From the panel, you can assign channels to DCA groups either by selecting a specific channel and specifying the DCA group to which it will belong, or by selecting a specific DCA group and specifying the channels that will belong to that DCA group. ❏ To select the DCA groups to which a specific channel will belong ❏ To select the channels that will belong to a specific DCA group 1 Press a [SEL] key to select the channel for which you want to make assignments. 1 2 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press a DCA [1]–[8] key to select the DCA group to which the channel will be assigned (you may select more than one DCA group). The LEDs will light for DCA [1]–[8] key(s) that are turned on. If an input channel is selected, its corresponding DCA assign LED(s) in the channel strip will also light. In the ASSIGN MODE section, press the ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key. The ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key will blink. The [DCA] key of the FADER MODE section will also blink. While this key is blinking, you can use the [CUE] key of each channel to assign that channel to a DCA group. 2 Press a DCA [CUE] key in the DCA strip to select the DCA group (1–8) to which you want to assign channels. 3 Press the [CUE] key of input channels / output channels (you may select more than one) to assign them to the selected DCA group. If a DCA group 1–6 is selected, you can select only input channels. If a DCA group 7/8 is selected, you can select input channels and output channels. If an input channel is selected, its corresponding DCA assign LED(s) in the channel strip will also light. 4 Assign channels to other DCA groups in the same way. 5 When you have finished making assignments, press the ASSIGN MODE section ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key to make its LED go dark. The FADER MODE section [DCA] key will also stop blinking, and return to its previous state. DCA assign LEDs Hint DCA [1]–[8] keys • You can also assign channels to DCA groups from within the display. Input channel DCA assignments are made in the INPUT DCA/GROUP function DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen (➥ p.271), and output channel DCA assignments are made in the OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen (➥ p.265). • DCA group settings are saved as part of the scene. 3 74 Select the DCA group(s) for other channels in the same way. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Controlling DCA groups Here’s how you can use the DCA strip to control DCA groups. 1 In the FADER MODE section, make sure that the FADER MODE [DCA] key LED is lit. The FADER MODE section selects the function of the DCA strip faders. When the FADER MODE [DCA] key LED is lit, you can use the faders of the DCA strip to control DCA groups 1–8. 2 Use the faders of the channel strip to adjust the relative levels between the channels belonging to the DCA group you want to use. 3 Operate the DCA fader for the DCA group you want to use. The level of the channels assigned to that DCA fader will change while preserving the level differences you established in step 2. 4 If you want to mute a DCA group, press the [MUTE] key for that DCA group in the DCA strip. The [MUTE] key will light, and muting will be turned on for channels belonging to that DCA group (the same state as if the faders were lowered to –∞ dB). At this time, the name indicator for that DCA group will be dimmed. FADER MODE [DCA] key Hint If desired, you can cause the DCA assign LEDs of the corresponding input channels to blink while the DCA group is muted. To do so, turn on the DCA/MUTE FLASH INDICATE setting in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY screen). 5 To un-mute a DCA group, press the lit [MUTE] key in the DCA strip. Using mute groups 9 Grouping and linking This section explains how to assign channels to mute groups and use the panel keys to control them. Assigning channels to mute groups From the panel, you can assign channels to mute groups either by selecting a specific channel and specifying the mute groups to which that channel will belong, or by selecting a specific mute group and specifying the channels that will belong to that mute group. ❏ To select the mute groups to which a specific channel will belong 1 Press a [SEL] key to select the channel for which you want to make assignments. 2 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, use the MUTE [1]–[8] keys to select the mute group to which the channel will be assigned (you may select more than one mute group). The LEDs will light for MUTE [1]–[8] key(s) that are turned on. If an input channel is selected, its corresponding mute assign LED(s) in the channel strip will also light. MUTE [1]–[8] keys Mute assign LEDs 3 Select the mute group(s) for other channels in the same way. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 75 9 Items in the DCA strip ❏ To select the channels that will belong to a specific mute group 1 2 3 In the ASSIGN MODE section, press the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key. The ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key will blink. In the SCENE MEMORY section, the MUTE MASTER LED will also blink. While this key is blinking, you can use the [CUE] key of each channel to assign that channel to a mute group. In the SCENE MEMORY section, use the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys to select the mute group (1–8) for which you want to make assignments. While the ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key is blinking, you can use the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys to select the mute group for which you will make assignments. Press one of these keys; the LED of that key will blink. Press the [CUE] key of input channels / output channels (you may select more than one) to assign them to the selected mute group. The [CUE] key will light, and that channel will be assigned to the selected mute group. Both input channels and output channels can be assigned to mute groups 1–8. 4 Assign channels to other mute groups in the same way. 5 When you have finished making assignments, press the ASSIGN MODE section ASSIGN MODE [MUTE] key to make its LED go dark. The SCENE MEMORY section MUTE MASTER/ DIRECT RECALL LED will also return to its previous state. Hint • You can also assign channels to mute groups from within the display. Input channel assignments are made in the INPUT DCA/GROUP function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (➥ p.272), and output channel assignments are made in the OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen (➥ p.235). • Mute group assignments are saved as part of the scene. • When the MUTE MASTER button is on The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will switch muting on/off for mute groups 1–8. DIRECT RECALL button MUTE MASTER button 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] key for the mute group you want to mute. The key LED will light, and all channels belonging to the selected mute group will be muted (the same state as when the [ON] key is turned off). You can turn on more than one key to mute multiple mute groups. 3 To un-mute a mute group, press a lit SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] key. Hint • The mute group mute on/off status is saved in the scene. However, you can also use the Recall Safe function to exclude the mute group status from scene recall. • If desired, you can cause the MUTE assign LEDs of the corresponding input channels to blink while the mute group is muted. To do so, turn on the DCA/MUTE FLASH INDICATE setting in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY screen). Using the Mute Safe function If necessary, channels belonging to a mute group can be temporarily excluded from mute group operations (Mute Safe). 1 Press a [SEL] key to select the channel you want to exclude from mute groups. 2 In the SELECTED CHANNEL section, press the [MUTE SAFE] key to make the LED light. Mute Safe will be enabled for the corresponding channel. (In the case of an input channel, the [MUTE SAFE] LED in the channel strip will light.) In this state, muting an applicable mute group will not affect that channel. 3 To defeat Mute Safe, press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [MUTE SAFE] key once again to make the LED go dark. Hint Controlling mute groups Here’s how you can use the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys of the SCENE MEMORY section to switch muting on/off for mute groups 1–8. 1 Turn on the MUTE MASTER button located in the lower right of the display. The DIRECT RECALL button and MUTE MASTER button located in the lower right of the display select the function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys. • When the DIRECT RECALL button is on The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will directly recall the scene that is assigned to each key. 76 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Mute Safe settings are not saved in the scene. They will remain effective until you manually defeat them. Using EQ Link and Compressor Link EQ Link and Compressor Link are functions that respectively link the EQ parameters or compressor parameters of multiple channels. Editing the EQ or compressor parameters of any channel belonging to a link group will similarly edit the other channels in that link group. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the INPUT [DCA/GROUP] key (for an input channel) or OUTPUT [GROUP] key (for an output channel) to access one of the following screens. • INPUT DCA/GROUP function EQ LINK ASSIGN screen Assign EQ link groups (1–8) for input channels • OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function EQ LINK ASSIGN screen Assign EQ link groups (A–F) for output channels EQ LINK ASSIGN EQ LINK ASSIGN 9 Grouping and linking • OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function COMP LINK ASSIGN screen Assign compressor link groups (A–F) for output channels COMP LINK ASSIGN • INPUT DCA/GROUP function COMP LINK ASSIGN screen Assign compressor link groups (1–8) for input channels COMP LINK ASSIGN In each screen, the channels (assignment source) are listed horizontally, and the link group number or alphabetical character (assignment destination) are listed vertically. Hint The EQ link groups and compressor link groups are independent for input channels and output channels. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 77 9 Items in the DCA strip 2 Click the grid at which the desired channel (assignment source) intersects the desired link group (assignment destination). A “ ” symbol will appear at the corresponding grid. To cancel the assignment, click the “ ” symbol once again. In the case of output channel EQ link groups, MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels can be assigned only to groups A–F, and MATRIX channels can be assigned only to groups G/H. (Unavailable grids are grayed-out.) If another channel is already assigned to the assignment-destination group, the EQ and compressor parameters of the previously-assigned channel will be copied to the channel that is added later, causing the settings to be the same. 3 If you want to use the [CUE] key of each channel to assign it to a link group, click the SET BY CUE button for the corresponding link group in the screen to turn it on. While the SET BY CUE button is on, you can use the channel [CUE] keys to set or cancel link group assignments. SET BY CUE button Note • The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one link group. • When you switch to a different screen, the SET BY CUE button that was turned on will automatically be defeated. 4 When you have finished making link group assignments, operate the EQ or compressor parameters of a channel belonging to a link group. The EQ or compressor parameters of channels belonging to the same link group will follow your editing. Hint Link group settings are saved as part of the scene. Note The STEREO LINK button and KEY IN SOURCE settings are not linked even for channels belonging to the same compressor link group. 78 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 10 Scene memory This chapter explains how to store and recall the PM5D’s mix parameters as “scenes.” About scenes The PM5D can store and recall the current state of its mix parameters as a “scene.” Scenes are assigned a scene number of 000–500. Scene 000 is read-only, and cannot be overwritten. Other scene numbers may be rewritten freely. However, input patch, output patch, and HA (head amp) settings are saved in the corresponding library, and the scene contains only a library number that links to these saved settings. For example if the input patch, output patch, and HA (head amp) settings have been edited when you store a scene, the changes will be stored in the corresponding library, and the library number of these stored library items will be stored in the scene. • Storing a scene Current scene Input patch settings Output patch settings Internal/external head amp settings Input patch library 010 Music #1 Scene memory You can choose how the changes will be stored in the library; they can either be stored in a new unused library number, or overwritten onto the existing library number (➥ p.81). When you recall a scene, the input patch, output patch, and HA (head amp) library numbers linked to that scene will be recalled simultaneously. • Recalling a scene Current scene Input patch settings Output patch settings Internal/external head amp settings Input patch library 00 Initial Data 10 InPatch #1 Output patch library 10 00 Initial Data 10 OutPatch #1 000 Initial Data 010 Music #1 00 Initial Data Scene memory HA library 00 Initial Data 10 HA #1 10 InPatch #1 Output patch library 00 Initial Data For each scene, you can specify whether to enable linking to these libraries (➥ p.159). For example if you turn off linking to the HA library for a certain scene, recalling that scene will not update the HA settings. Note 10 OutPatch #1 000 Initial Data Hint Scene memory A scene contains the settings of the panel controls (except for the TALKBACK section, CUE/MONITOR section, and the AD IN section of the PM5D model) as well as the settings of the functions and screens listed below. • INPUT function settings • OUTPUT function settings • EFFECT PARAM screen settings • GEQ PARAM screen settings • SELECTIVE RECALL screen (SCENE function) settings • FADE TIME screen (SCENE function) settings • MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function) settings • HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function) settings HA library By “head amp settings” we mean settings for the internal head amps of the PM5D-RH model and for an external head amp device that supports the special protocol (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or AD824). The settings of the AD IN section of the PM5D model are not included. 00 Initial Data 10 HA #1 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 79 10 Scene memory Items in the SCENE MEMORY section The SCENE MEMORY section lets you store and recall mix parameters as scene memories. Mute operations for mute groups 1–8 are also performed in this section. C SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] key 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 8 This key selects either NORMAL mode or PREVIEW mode as the operation when you recall a scene. PREVIEW mode is selected if this key LED is lit; NORMAL mode is selected if it is dark. Operation will differ as follows according to the selected mode. • NORMAL mode This mode lets you store and recall scenes as usual. When you recall a scene in this mode, the current scene will be overwritten by the settings of the newly recalled scene. • PREVIEW mode This mode lets you preview the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the mix parameter values of that scene will be shown in the PM5D’s panel, but the internal signal processing will remain as it was before the recall. When you operate the panel keys or encoders at this time, the panel display will change but internal signal processing will not be affected. If desired, you can save the edited content in the desired scene number or library number. D Scene number indicator This indicate shows the number (000–500) of the scene that is selected for store or recall. A SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys E SCENE MEMORY [UNDO] key The function of these keys will depend on the selection of the DIRECT RECALL button and MUTE MASTER button in the lower right of the display. This key cancels the most recently-executed scene recall operation. If you have accidentally recalled an unwanted scene, you can press this key to return to the state prior to recalling the scene. F SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key This key recalls the scene whose number is shown in the scene number indicator (4). DIRECT RECALL button G SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys These keys increment or decrement the number displayed in the scene number indicator (4). However if the SCENE screen BLANK SKIP button is turned on, you will only be able to select numbers in which a scene is actually stored. MUTE MASTER button • When the DIRECT RECALL button is on SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys operate as Direct Recall keys that directly recall the eight scenes assigned to these keys. • When the MUTE MASTER button is on SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys operate as Mute Master keys that switch muting on/off for mute groups 1–8. H SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key B [DIRECT RECALL]/[MUTE MASTER] indicators These indicators indicate the currently selected function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys (1). 80 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section This key stores the current scene into the number shown by the scene number indicator (4). Using scene memories As the default choice in which edited library settings will be stored when you store a scene, choose either NEW (select an unused library) or OVERWRITE (select the original library). Storing a scene Here’s how to store the current mix settings (the current scene) into a scene memory. Input Patch library list Note Output Patch library list HA library list Before you continue with the following procedure, make sure that the SCENE MEMORY section SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] key is off (dark). (If it is on, turn it off.) 1 Use the PM5D’s panel controls to set the mix parameters as desired. 2 Use the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys to select the store-destination scene number. When you select a new scene number, the scene number and name shown at the top of the display and the scene number shown in the scene number indicator of the SCENE MEMORY section will blink. This blinking indicates that the settings of the indicated scene differ from the currently-set mix parameters. SCENE TITLE area, where you can rename the scene. Scene number and name will blink An “EDIT” indicator appears here if the library settings have been modified from the state in which they were last stored. 4 Use the SCENE TITLE area to assign a name to the scene. (For details on how to input text ➥ p.26) 5 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. The SCENE STORE window will appear, allowing you to assign a title to the scene and store it. This window shows the following information. 6 Click the STORE button in the window. A message will ask you to confirm the store operation. 7 Click the OK button. The current settings will be stored to the scene number you selected in step 2, and the upper part of the screen and the scene number indicators will stop blinking. If any changes have been made to the input patch, output patch, and HA settings used by this scene, they will be stored in the corresponding library number. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 10 Scene memory Scene number will blink As desired, specify the library numbers in which the input patch, output patch, and HA settings will be stored. To specify a store-destination library number, scroll the input patch, output patch, or HA library list, and click the desired number. (The number currently selected as the store-destination is highlighted.) The library number you select here is saved as part of the scene. The default selection of store-destination will depend on the setting in the DEFAULT EDIT LIBRARY NO. area. • If the NEW button is on The lowest of the unused library numbers will be selected. • If the OVERWRITE button is on The number from which the library was originally recalled will be selected. (If this was a read-only library item, the lowest-numbered unused library number will be selected.) 81 10 Scene memory Recalling a scene 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall. When you select a new scene number, the scene number and name shown at the top of the display and the scene number shown in the scene number indicator of the SCENE MEMORY section will blink. 2 Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. A message in the display will ask you to confirm the recall operation. When you click the OK button, the scene number you selected in step 1 will be recalled. If input patch, output patch, and HA libraries are linked to that scene, the correspondingly numbered libraries will also be recalled. Here’s how to recall a stored scene from memory. Note Before you continue with the following procedure, make sure that the SCENE MEMORY section SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] key is off (dark). (If it is on, turn it off.) Hint If desired, you can disable the link between the scene and these libraries, so that specific libraries will not be updated when you recall that scene. Using PREVIEW mode Preview mode lets you check or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory without affecting the signal processing of the current scene. When you recall a scene in this mode, the settings of the newly recalled scene will appear on the PM5D’s panel, but the internal signal processing will remain as it was prior to the recall. During an actual performance, it can be convenient to use this to check the content of the scene you intend to recall next, or to make minor changes to a scene and then store it. 1 In the SCENE MEMORY section, turn on the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] key. The key LED will light, and the SCENE MEMORY section will operate in PREVIEW mode. At this time, the scene indicator at the top of the display will turn red, and the “PREVIEW” indicator will appear. 4 If desired, use the controls of the console to edit the settings. Operating a panel control in PREVIEW mode will edit the settings of the scene you recalled in step 3, but will not affect the PM5D’s internal signal processing. 5 If you want to store the changes you made in step 4, select the scene number in which you want to store the scene, and press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key. The settings you edited in step 4 will be stored into memory. 6 To return the SCENE MEMORY section to NORMAL mode operation, press the SCENE MEMORY [PREVIEW] key to make the key LED go dark. Note “PREVIEW” indicator While in PREVIEW mode, operating the knobs, encoders, and other controls (except for the TALKBACK section, CUE/MONITOR section, and the AD IN section of the PM5D model) will not affect the audio signal processing. 2 Use the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys to select the scene number that you want to recall. The scene number will light in the scene number indicator. 3 Press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] key. Only the setting values of the scene you selected in step 2 will be loaded and shown in the PM5D’s panel LEDs and display. However, the internal signal processing of the system will remain unchanged as it was prior to the Recall operation. If desired, you can access a specific channel in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, or access a specific screen in the display to examine the values in detail. 82 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section • PREVIEW mode applies to all parameters included in scene memory, all parameters included in the INPUT PATCH and OUTPUT PATCH functions, and HA parameters. PREVIEW mode does not apply to parameters other than these. • Even while you are in PREVIEW mode, recall operations in the EVENT LIST screen or via MIDI messages will apply to the current scene. While in PREVIEW mode, operations of parameters that can be edited in the USER DEFINED screen will generally apply to PREVIEW mode, not to the current scene. Using the Auto Store function With the PM5D’s default settings, pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key will open the SCENE STORE window where you can name the scene and store it. If you enable the Auto Store function, you can execute the Store operation simply by pressing the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key twice. Here’s the procedure. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [UTILITY] key several times to access the PREFERENCE 1 screen shown below. The PREFERENCE 1 screen is where you can make various default settings for the PM5D. PREFERENCE 1 2 AUTO STORE button In the STORE/RECALL area at the upper left of the screen, turn on the AUTO STORE button. The Auto Store function is now enabled. When you press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key once, the SCENE STORE window will appear as usual; press the key once again to execute the Store operation. If you rapidly press the key twice, the Store operation will be executed before the SCENE STORE window appears. Note Note that if the STORE CONFIRMATION button is turned on in the STORE/RECALL area of this PREFERENCE 1 screen, a window will ask you to confirm the Store operation even if Auto Store is enabled. If you don’t want any windows to appear, turn off the STORE CONFIRMATION button as well. 10 Using the Direct Recall function 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE] key several times to access the SCENE screen shown below. 2 SCENE Scene memory If you assign frequently-used scenes to the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys of the SCENE MEMORY section, you will be able to recall these scenes with a single keystroke. Use the DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list to assign a scene number to a SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] key. Move the cursor to the left-hand field of the DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list and turn the [DATA] encoder or click the / buttons to select a scene number; the scene name will appear in the field at right. Scene name is displayed DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list DIRECT RECALL button In the SCENE screen you can use the DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN list shown in the lower middle of the screen to assign scene numbers to the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys. 3 Assign scene numbers to other keys in the same way. 4 In the KEY MODE area at the right side (or lower right) of the screen, make sure that the DIRECT RECALL button is turned on. (If it is off, click the DIRECT RECALL button.) When the DIRECT RECALL button is on, the SCENE MEMORY section [DIRECT RECALL] LED will light, and the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will operate as Direct Recall keys. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 83 10 Scene memory 5 In the SCENE MEMORY section of the console, press one of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys. The LED of the corresponding key will light, and the scene assigned to that key will be recalled. Using the Selective Recall function “Selective Recall” is a function that lets you restrict the parameters or channels that will be updated when you recall a specific scene, or, conversely, specify for each scene parameters or channels that will be excluded from recall operations. ❏ Input channels / Output channels Hint As a function similar to Selective Recall, there is also a “Recall Safe” function that lets you select channels and parameters to be excluded from recall operations (➥ p.86). However it differs from Selective Recall in that Recall Safe settings apply to all scenes. 1 1 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE] key several times to access the SELECTIVE RECALL screen shown below. SELECTIVE RECALL SELECTION MODE area 3 4 A SAFE ON/OFF RECALL ON/OFF 2 In the SELECTION MODE area in the upper middle of the screen, choose one of the following two selection modes to specify how the SELECTIVE RECALL screen will operate. • SAFE PARAMETER mode Specify channels/parameters that will be excluded from Recall operations. • RECALL PARAMETER mode Specify channels/parameters that will be affected by Recall operations. When you click a button to change the mode, a confirmation window will appear. Immediately after you switch modes, all channels/parameters will be subject to recall. 3 84 Use the buttons in the screen to select the parameters/channels that will be subject to recall (or excluded from recall). The SELECTIVE RECALL screen is divided into three areas. From the left, these areas let you make settings for input channels, output channels, and other parameters. The buttons in the screen correspond to parameters and channels as follows. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual The functions and names of these buttons will depend on the currently-chosen SELECTION MODE. • SAFE PARAMETER mode The buttons will function as SAFE ON/OFF buttons to select the channels that will be excluded from Recall. • RECALL PARAMETER mode The buttons will function as RECALL ON/OFF buttons to select the channels that will be subject to Recall. B Parameter matrix grid Here you can select the parameters that will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall. If the ALL button is on, all parameters will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall. C SET ALL Turns on all buttons for all input channels/output channels or for the corresponding parameter. D CLEAR ALL Operating section Turns off all buttons for all input channels/output channels or for the corresponding parameter. ❏ Other parameters 1 4 In the upper left of the screen, switch the SELECTIVE RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE button to ENABLE. When this button is set to ENABLE, the Selective Recall function will apply to subsequently-stored scenes. 5 Store the current scene. The settings of the SELECTIVE RECALL screen will be saved as part of the scene. When you recall this scene, only the selected channels/parameters will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall. Note • If you edit the settings of the SELECTIVE RECALL screen, you must store that scene in order to make your changes effective. • Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together. Channels/parameters excluded from recall operations by either Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will not be recalled. 2 3 4 5 A DCA/GEQ/EFFECT These buttons specify whether DCA groups, GEQ modules, and internal effects will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall. B MUTE MASTER This button specifies whether the Mute Master key on/ off status will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall. C MIDI REMOTE These buttons specify whether MIDI remote layers A– D will be excluded from (or subject to) Recall. 10 D SET ALL Scene memory This button turns on all buttons for parameters 1–3. E CLEAR ALL This button turns off all buttons for parameters 1–3. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 85 10 Scene memory Using the Recall Safe function “Recall Safe” is a function that excludes only specific parameters/channels from Recall operations. This differs from the Selective Recall settings (➥ p.84) made for individual scenes in that Recall Safe settings are common to all scenes. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE] key several times to access the RECALL SAFE screen shown below. 3 RECALL SAFE If you want to use the panel to switch Recall Safe on/off for a channel, use the [SEL] key to select a channel and then press the SELECTED CHANNEL section [RECALL SAFE] key to make the key LED light. Recall Safe will be turned on for the corresponding channel. [RECALL SAFE] key 2 Use the buttons in the screen to select the parameters/channels that will be excluded from Recall operations. The function of the buttons in the screen and the procedures are the same as in the SELECTIVE RECALL screen (when SAFE PARAMETER mode is selected), except for the fact that HA (Head Amp) SAFE ON/ OFF button is added as a parameter in the INPUT SAFE PARAMETER area. The [RCL SAFE] indicator of the channel strip will light for input channels, STEREO A/B channels, and DCA groups for which Recall Safe is turned on. Hint • In the RECALL SAFE screen, clicking the parameter matrix grid will display a “ ” symbol with a “G” character in the center. This “G” indicates that the setting is global, and applies to all scenes. • If desired, you can copy and paste Selective Recall settings from the currently selected scene into the RECALL SAFE screen (➥ p.166). • If you scroll the scroll bar downward, you will see that the CH column of the SAFE PARAMETERS area shows not only input channels but also input ports. If you set the HA of a certain input port to Recall Safe, the HA of the corresponding channel will also be set to Recall Safe. Even if they are assigned to multiple channels, the HA Recall Safe settings for corresponding input ports/channels will be linked. 86 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Note By default, ALL is selected as the parameters that will be excluded from recall. This means that if you turn on Recall Safe from the panel, the Recall Safe setting will affect all parameters of the channel(s) for which it is turned on. After you have finished making Recall Safe settings and you recall a scene, only the selected channels/parameters will be excluded from the Recall operation. Note Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together. Channels/parameters excluded from recall operations by either Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will not be recalled. Using the Fade function “Fade” is a function that smoothly changes fader and pan to their new values over a specified duration when you recall a scene. The settings of the Fade function are made independently for each scene. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE] key several times to access the FADE TIME screen shown below. In this screen you can select the channels that will use the Fade function, and specify the fade time and start offset time. FADE TIME FADING ENABLE/ DISABLE button Fade time FADE TIME button Hint If the numerical value is displayed in light blue when you perform the above actions, this indicates that an offset time has been specified for the corresponding channel. In the upper left of the screen, click the FADING ENABLE/DISABLE button to select ENABLE. When the FADING ENABLE/DISABLE button is set to ENABLE, the Fade function will be enabled for the faders in the current scene. 3 In the upper right of the screen, make sure that the FADE TIME button is on. The FADE TIME/START OFFSET buttons in the upper right of the screen select the parameter that will be edited in the lower part of the FADE TIME screen. When this button is on, you can specify the fade time (the time over which fader and pan parameters will reach their new value) for each channel. 4 In the rows of buttons at the bottom of the screen, click to turn on the buttons of the channels for which you want to enable the Fade function. By clicking the SET ALL buttons located at the right of the screen, you can turn on the buttons of all input channels and all DCA groups, or the buttons of all output channels. By clicking the CLEAR ALL buttons located at the right of the screen, you can turn off the buttons of all input channels and all DCA groups, or the buttons of all output channels. 5 Move the cursor to the box located immediately below each button, and turn the [DATA] encoder to specify the fade time for that channel. (Alternatively, click the / buttons at the left and right of the box.) In the same way, specify the fade time for other channels as well. If desired, you can easily copy the fade time setting of a channel to another channel (➥ p.167). 7 In the upper right of the screen, click the START OFFSET button to turn it on. When the START OFFSET button is on, you can specify an offset time for each channel (the time from when the scene is recalled until the fader or pan parameter begins to change). 8 As you did in steps 4–6, specify an offset time for each channel. 9 If you want to enable the Fade function not only for faders but also for the PAN (BALANCE) parameters of input channels, set the INPUT CH PANNING ENABLE/DISABLE button (located in the upper middle of the screen) to ENABLE. 10 Scene memory 2 6 The FADING ENABLE/DISABLE button and INPUT CH PANNING ENABLE/DISABLE button can be set independently. Use the following two buttons to select the input channels to which this will apply. • When the ALL INPUT button is on The Fade function will apply to the pan (balance) parameter of all input channels. • When the SAME AS FADING button is on The Fade function will apply to the pan (balance) parameters of only the input channels selected in step 4. 10 When you have finished making settings, store the scene. The settings in the FADE TIME screen are saved independently for each scene. The Fade function will apply when you recall a scene for which this button is set to ENABLE. After recall, the fader and pan (balance) parameter values will begin changing when the specified Start Offset Time has elapsed, and will reach their new values over the specified Fade Time. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 87 10 Scene memory Using the Tracking Recall function “Tracking Recall” is a function that adds a specified offset value to each fader or level value when a scene is recalled. Tracking Recall settings are common to all scenes. For example if the original level of a certain sound source has changed, or if an actor was replaced by an understudy, this function provides a convenient way to adjust the level of that specific channel for all scenes. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE] key several times to access the TRACKING RECALL screen shown below. In this screen you can select the channels that will use the Tracking Recall function, and specify the offset value for each channel. TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE button DISPLAY SELECT area 2 TRACKING RECALL OFFSET LOCK button 4 In the row of buttons above the faders in the screen, click to turn on the buttons of the channels for which you want to enable the Tracking Recall function. Clicking the SET ALL button located in the upper right of the screen will turn on the buttons of all channels and DCA groups. Clicking the CLEAR ALL button located in the upper right of the screen will turn off the buttons of all channels and DCA groups. 5 To set the offset value for each channel, drag the fader upward or downward for a channel whose button you have turned on. When you turn on the setting for a channel in step 4, the offset value is set to 0. The offset value can be adjusted in a range of –15 dB to +15 dB. The current value is shown in the box immediately below the fader. In the upper left of the screen, click the TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE button to make it indicate ENABLE. When the TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE button is set to ENABLE, the Tracking Recall function will be enabled for all scenes. 3 Using the buttons of the DISPLAY SELECT area in the upper middle of the screen, select the type of channels for which you want to make settings. • If the INPUT button is on The screen will show the faders of input channels 1–48, ST IN channels 1–4, FX RTN channels 1–4, DCA groups 1–8, and STEREO A/B channels. Offset value 6 In the same way, specify the offset value for other channels as well. 7 When you have finished making settings, turn on the OFFSET LOCK button located in the upper right of the screen. When this button is on, the offset values currently specified for the channels will be fixed; this prevents the offset values from being unintentionally changed. When you recall a new scene in this state, the offset values will be added to the level of each channel when the scene is loaded. (However, the upper and lower level limits will not be exceeded.) • If the OUTPUT button is on The screen will show the faders of MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, DCA groups 7/8, and STEREO A/B channels. 88 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Note Channels that are excluded from Recall operations by the Recall Safe or Selective Recall functions will not change even if Tracking Recall is turned on. Using the Global Paste function “Global Paste” is a function that lets you copy and paste settings of the desired channel or parameter from the current scene to scene data in memory (multiple selections are allowed). This is a convenient way in which changes to the current scene can be applied to scenes that have already been stored. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE] key several times to access the GLOBAL PASTE screen shown below. In this screen you can select the copy-source channels/ parameters and specify the paste-destination scene data. • When PASTE MODE = INPUT Select input channels in the left area, and select parameters in the right area. (For details on the parameters ➥ p.170). DESTINATION SCENE area CURRENT SCENE area PASTE MODE area PASTE button GLOBAL PASTE 2 3 Use the buttons in the PASTE MODE area to select one of the following as the type of item you want to paste. INPUT Input channel parameters OUTPUT Output channel parameters DCA, GEQ, EFFECT DCA level or mute on/off status, GEQ settings, internal effect settings Scene memory 10 • When PASTE MODE = OUTPUT Select output channels in the left area, and select parameters in the right area. (For details on the parameters ➥ p.170). In the CURRENT SCENE area, select the copysource channels or parameters. The contents shown in the CURRENT SCENE area will depend on what you select in the PASTE MODE area (1). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 89 10 Scene memory • When PASTE MODE = DCA, GEQ, EFFECT Select DCA groups, GEQ modules, and internal effects. 5 Click the PASTE button. The selected items of the current scene will be pasted to the scene(s) in memory. Note • If the parameter settings differ between the copy-source and paste-destination, exception handling may be applied when the data is pasted (➥ p.171). • Only the parameters selected by PASTE MODE will be pasted. Note that even if you selected parameters in the CURRENT SCENE area, they will be excluded from the paste operation if you switch the PASTE MODE. Hint In either of these modes, you can click the SET ALL button to turn on all channels, or click the CLEAR ALL button to turn off all channels. 4 90 In the DESTINATION SCENE area, select the paste-destination scene(s). To select a single scene, click the desired line in the upper half of the list. To select multiple consecutive scenes, use the upper half of the list to click the scene number at which you want to begin pasting, and use the lower half of the list to click the scene number at which you want to stop pasting. The order in which the scenes are listed can be changed by clicking one of the buttons at the top of the list; the button (sort by number), SCENE TITLE button (sort by scene title), or TIME STAMP button (sort by the date on which the scene was saved). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 11 Monitor and Cue This chapter explains the PM5D’s Monitor and Cue functions. About the MONITOR and CUE sections The MONITOR section sends the signal selected as the monitor source to the MONITOR OUT jacks. You can select the following signals as the monitor source. • The input signal from 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 • The input signal from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 • The output signal of the STEREO A/B channels • The output signal of the LCR channels • The output signal of a pre-selected MIX channel 1–24 or MATRIX channel 1–8 The CUE section sends the cue signal of the channel/group selected by a panel [CUE] key to the CUE OUT jacks. Hint If the CUE INTERRUPTION button is turned on in the MONITOR screen (MON/CUE function), the Cue/Solo signal will also be sent from the MONITOR OUT jacks when Cue/Solo is active. Monitor and Cue 11 • MONITOR SELECT Selects the monitor source. • MONITOR DELAY Delays the monitor signal. • CUE OUT DELAY Delays the cue signal. • METER Switches the signal that is shown in the meter section or in the display. • DIM (Dimmer) Attenuates the monitor/cue signal by a fixed amount. • OUT ATT. (Output attenuator) Attenuates/boosts the monitor/cue signal. • ON (On/off) Switches the monitor signal on/off. • PHONES LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the top panel and front panel PHONES jacks. • MONITOR LEVEL Adjusts the monitor level. • CUE OUT LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the cue signal. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 91 11 Monitor and Cue Using the Monitor function Items in the MONITOR section 1 2 3 6 4 7 5 8 9 K J A [2TR IN A1] key B [2TR IN A2] key These keys select the input signals of 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 as the monitor source. C [2TR IN D1] key D [2TR IN D2] key E [2TR IN D3] key These keys select the input signals of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 as the monitor source. F [STEREO A] key G [STEREO B] key These keys select the output signals of STEREO A/B channels as the monitor source. By simultaneously pressing the [STEREO A] key and [STEREO B] key you can select the LCR channels as the monitor source. L H [DEFINE] key This key selects the output signal of the pre-selected MIX channel 1–24 or MATRIX channel 1–8 as the monitor source. This monitor source selected by this key can be specified in the MONITOR screen (MON/ CUE function). Hint The currently selected source is shown by the lit/dark state of keys 1–8. I MONITOR [LEVEL] knob This knob adjusts the output level of the signal being output from the MONITOR OUT L/R/C jacks. J MONITOR [ON] key This key turns the monitor output on/off. K MONITOR [PHONES] knob This analog volume adjusts the output level of the PHONES jacks. L [MONO] key If this key is on, the monitor output L/R channels will be mixed and output as a monaural signal. The signal will return to stereo when you turn this key off. 92 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 4 Monitoring a signal Use the keys of the MONITOR section to select the monitor source from the following. Here we explain how you can use the MONITOR section to monitor the desired source. [2TR IN A1]/[2TR IN A2] keys The input signal from 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 1 Make sure that your monitor system is connected to the rear panel MONITOR OUT jacks L/R/C. If you want to monitor through headphones, make sure they are connected to the top panel or front panel PHONES jack. [2TR IN D1]/[2TR IN D2]/[2TR IN D3] keys The input signal from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 [STEREO A]/[STEREO B] keys The output signal of the STEREO A/ B channels [STEREO A] key + [STEREO B] key The LCR channel output Note [DEFINE] key The signal pre-selected in the MONITOR screen (MON/CUE function) • MONITOR OUT jack C is a special jack used to monitor the center channel when LCR mode is active. Note that the appropriate signal will not be output from MONITOR OUT jack C unless the LCR channel is selected as the monitor source and the USE AS CENTER BUS button is turned on in the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function) (➥ p.201). • Turning on the [CUE] key of even one input channel, output channel, or DCA group will override the settings of the MONITOR section and cause the Cue signal to be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks. Make sure that the CUE section [INPUT]/[DCA]/[OUTPUT] LEDs are not lit. 2 To specify the channel that will be selected by the [DEFINE] key, press the DISPLAY ACCESS section [MON/CUE] key repeatedly to access the MONITOR screen shown below. MONITOR DEFINE area Hint • If you select STEREO A/B channel or LCR channel, you can also simultaneously select one other monitor source. • The monitor source can also be selected in the MONITOR screen (MON/CUE function). 5 Press the MONITOR [ON] key to turn it on. Hint A signal is always output from the PHONES jacks regardless of the on/off state of the MONITOR [ON] key. 6 Turn the MONITOR [LEVEL] knob to adjust the monitor level. If you are monitoring through headphones, turn the PHONES [LEVEL] knob to adjust the monitor level. 7 If you want to monitor the signal in monaural, turn the MONITOR section’s [MONO] key on. 3 Monitor and Cue 11 Click a button in the DEFINE area to select the channel that will be monitored when you press the [DEFINE] key. You can assign more than one channel to the [DEFINE] key. You can choose from the following sources. MIX 1–MIX24 Output signals of MIX channels 1–24 MATRIX1–MATRIX8 Output signals of MATRIX buses 1–8 Hint The MONITOR screen also lets you make settings for monitor signal delay, insert-out/in, and dimmer (➥ p.216). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 93 11 Monitor and Cue Using the Cue/Solo functions Items in the CUE section About CUE mode and SOLO mode 1 4 2 5 3 A [INPUT]/[DCA]/[OUTPUT] LEDs These LEDs indicate the monitoring status. If even one [CUE] key is on, the LED of the group to which that key belongs will light. If a special Cue signal such as KEY IN CUE or EFFECT CUE is active, all three LEDs will light. The PM5D lets you select either SOLO mode or CUE mode when using the [CUE] key to monitor signals. Use the [SOLO] key in the CUE section of the panel to switch the mode. In CUE mode, holding down the [SOLO] key will switch to SOLO mode; the [CUE] keys of all channels will go dark. Conversely in SOLO mode, pressing the [SOLO] key will immediately switch to CUE mode. These modes differ as follows. • CUE mode The cue signals of channels / DCA groups whose [CUE] key is on will be sent via the CUE bus and output from the CUE OUT jacks (Cue function). Choose this method when you want to monitor a signal without affecting other channels. When the PM5D is in the default state, the cue signal can also be monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks. • SOLO mode Only the channels / DCA groups whose [CUE] key is on will be output from the MIX/MATRIX/STEREO buses, and other channels / DCA groups will be muted (Solo function). The MONITOR OUT jacks also will output only the signal from these same channels / DCA groups. B [SOLO] key This selects how monitoring will occur when you use the [CUE] keys. If this key is on, monitoring will operate in SOLO mode. If this key is off, monitoring will operate in CUE mode. C [LAST CUE] key This selects the mode of operation when more than one [CUE] key is on. Turning the key on selects LAST CUE mode; turning the key off selects MIX CUE mode. When you switch this mode, Cue will be turned off for all channels. D CUE [LEVEL] knob This adjusts the signal level that is sent from the CUE OUT jacks. E [OUTPUT PFL] key This switches the location from which the signal is sent to the CUE bus when you turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel). If this key is on, the PFL (prefader) signal will be sent. If this key is off, the POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) signal will be sent. 94 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Note • If an input channel is soloed, the on/off setting of the output channels will remain unchanged; only the signal of the corresponding input channel will be sent to the buses. If an output channel is soloed, the on/off setting of the input channels will remain unchanged; the signal will be sent only to the corresponding bus. • If a DCA group is soloed, only the signals of input channels belonging to that DCA group will be output to the corresponding buses. However if output channels are assigned to DCA groups 7/8, signals will be sent only to buses belonging to that DCA group. Hint If desired, you can exclude specific channels from Solo operations (➥ p.219). Cue and Solo groups The PM5D’s cue and solo signals can be categorized into the following four groups. • INPUT CUE group The cue/solo signals of input channels make up this group. This group becomes active when a [CUE] key of an input channel, ST IN channel, or FX RTN channel is pressed to turn it on. Input channel [CUE] key ST IN/FX RTN channel [CUE] key • DCA CUE group The cue/solo signals of DCA groups make up this group. This group becomes active when a [CUE] key in the DCA strip is pressed to turn it on. It is not possible to simultaneously turn on Cue between different groups. Normally, the group to which the most recently pressed [CUE] key (CUE button) belongs will take priority, and the [CUE] keys of the previously selected group will be defeated. However if you have switched cue/solo signal groups in a certain order, the [CUE] key status of the previously selected group will be recovered when you turn off the [CUE] key (CUE button) to defeat the current cue/solo selection. The [CUE] key status can be recovered for the following combinations of groups. • OUTPUT CUE group → DCA CUE group • OUTPUT CUE group → INPUT CUE group • DCA CUE group → INPUT CUE group • INPUT CUE / OUTPUT CUE / DCA CUE group → Other CUE group For example if you switch groups in the order of OUTPUT CUE group → DCA CUE group → INPUT CUE group → Other CUE group, you can then successively defeat the [CUE] keys (CUE buttons) to recover the [CUE] key status of the previously selected group. DCA strip [CUE] key • OUTPUT CUE group The cue/solo signals of output channels make up this group. This group becomes active when a [CUE] key of a MIX channel, MATRIX channel, or STEREO A/B channel is pressed to turn it on. Monitor and Cue 11 MIX/MATRIX channel [CUE] key STEREO A/B channel [CUE] key • Other CUE group This group consists of the cue/solo signals operated by the CUE buttons in the display. This group becomes active when you click to turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT PARAM screen (EFFECT function) or GATE PARAM screen (INPUT GATE/COMP function). CUE button in the display PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 95 11 Monitor and Cue Using the Cue function This section explains how you can use the [CUE] key of a desired channel or DCA group to monitor the Cue signal. 3 Make sure that the [SOLO] key in the CUE section is turned off. 4 Press the [CUE] key of a desired channel or DCA group to turn it on. The cue signal of the corresponding channel will be output from the CUE OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks. 5 To defeat Cue, press the currently-on [CUE] key once again. Hint Note If you want the cue/solo signal to be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks as well, access the MONITOR screen (MON/ CUE function) and make sure that the CUE INTERRUPTION ON/OFF button is on before you continue with the following procedure (➥ p.217). MONITOR If you press the [LAST CUE] key to switch from LAST CUE mode to MIX CUE mode (or vice versa), all previouslyenabled Cue (Solo) signals will be defeated. For example if you have turned on multiple [CUE] keys in MIX CUE mode, you can quickly turn them all off by pressing the [LAST CUE] key twice. CUE INTERRUPTION Using the Solo function This section explains how to use the Solo function. 1 Use the [LAST CUE] key of the CUE section to specify the mode of operation when a [CUE] key is turned on (LAST CUE mode or MIX CUE mode). 2 In the CUE section, press and hold the [SOLO] key. When you press and hold the [SOLO] key, the key LED will blink and SOLO mode will be enabled. In SOLO mode, only the signal of the channel or DCA group whose [CUE] key is turned on will be sent to the MIX, MATRIX, and STEREO buses. The same signal can also be monitored from the MONITOR OUT jacks and CUE OUT jacks. 1 Using the [OUTPUT PFL] key of the CUE section, select one of the following as the output position of the signal sent to the CUE bus when an output channel [CUE] key is pressed. • PFL ([OUTPUT PFL] key is on) The signal from immediately before the fader will be sent to the CUE bus. • POST ON ([OUTPUT PFL] key is off) The signal from immediately after the [ON] key will be sent to the CUE bus. Hint If desired, you can exclude specific channels or groups from Solo operations (for details, refer to ➥ p.219). Hint The above setting can also be made in the CUE screen (MON/CUE function) (➥ p.217). In this screen you can also specify the output position of the signal sent from input channels and DCA groups to the CUE bus. 3 2 In the CUE section, use the [LAST CUE] key to specify the mode of operation when more than one [CUE] key within the same group is turned on. • LAST CUE mode ([LAST CUE] key is on) Only the channel/group whose [CUE] key was last turned on will be monitored. • MIX CUE mode ([LAST CUE] key is off) Channels/groups within the same group whose [CUE] key is turned on will be monitored. Note If you turn on the [CUE] key of an output channel, the signal will be sent only to the corresponding bus. 4 Note • [CUE] keys belonging to different groups cannot be turned on simultaneously. The group to which the last-pressed [CUE] key belongs will be turned on, allowing the signals of that group to be monitored. • If you press the [CUE] key of a paired channel, both channels will be turned on. 96 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Turn on the [CUE] key of a desired channel or DCA group. Only the corresponding channel or DCA group will be output to the buses and output jacks; the remaining channels and DCA groups will be muted. The same signal will also be output from the CUE OUT jacks and the MONITOR OUT jacks. Operating section To defeat Solo, press the [SOLO] key. If you press the [SOLO] key while in SOLO mode, you will immediately return to CUE mode. Note • Normally, the Cue/Solo functions can be operated independently of scene memories. • Even if you pair a Cued channel, the cue settings will not change in tandem at the moment you pair the channel. The setting will change in tandem when you subsequently switch Cue on/off. 12 Talkback and Oscillator This chapter explains how to use talkback and oscillator. About the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections The TALKBACK and OSCILLATOR sections let you send the signal of a mic connected to the TALKBACK jack or the signal of a test oscillator to the desired output jacks. Signal flow in the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections is as follows. Items in the TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections A TALKBACK jack 1 This is a balanced XLR-3-31 jack to which a talkback mic can be connected. You can make settings in the display to supply +48V phantom power to this jack. 12 B TALKBACK [LEVEL] knob Talkback and Oscillator 4 This adjusts the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack. C TALKBACK [ON] key 2 3 This switches the talkback signal on/off. When you press and hold the key, talkback will be on as long as you hold down the key. If you press and immediately release the key, talkback will remain on until you press the key once again. However if the NEVER LATCH button is turned on in the TALKBACK screen, talkback will be on only while you hold down the key, and will turn off when you release the key; i.e., talkback will not “latch” even if you press and immediately release the key. D OSCILLATOR [ON] key This is an on/off switch for the signal sent from the internal oscillator to the specified bus(es). Note If the OSCILLATOR [ON] key is off, and a screen other than the OSCILLATOR screen (TALKBACK function) is displayed, pressing this key will only display the OSCILLATOR screen; the key will not turn on. When you press the key once again, it will turn on. If the key is on, pressing it once again will turn it off regardless of the screen that is displayed. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 97 12 Talkback and Oscillator Using talkback Here’s how the talkback signal input from the TALKBACK jack can be sent to the desired bus(es). 1 Repeatedly press the [MON/CUE] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the TALKBACK screen appears. TALKBACK TALKBACK area BUS ASSIGN area 4 To enable talkback, press the TALKBACK [ON] key in the TALKBACK section of the panel to turn it on. The TALKBACK [ON] key can operate in either of the following two ways, depending on the setting of the NEVER LATCH button in the TALKBACK area. • If the NEVER LATCH button is off Talkback will be switched on/off each time you press the TALKBACK [ON] key (Latched). However if you press and hold down the TALKBACK [ON] key, talkback will remain on only while you continue holding down the key, and will turn off when you release the key (Unlatched). • If the NEVER LATCH button is on Talkback will be on only while you continue holding down the TALKBACK [ON] key, and will turn off when you release the key (Unlatched). Hint INPUT TO TALKBACK area 2 TALKBACK OUT area Turn the TALKBACK [LEVEL] knob to adjust the input sensitivity of the talkback mic. The meter in the TALKBACK IN area indicates the input level of the mic connected to the TALKBACK jack. If you want phantom power (+48V) to be supplied to the TALKBACK jack, turn on the +48V button located in the TALKBACK IN area. Hint The INPUT TO TALKBACK area also lets you use any INPUT jack 1–48 as a supplementary input for talkback. 3 Click a button in the BUS ASSIGN area to specify the bus(es) to which the talkback signal will be sent (multiple selections are allowed). These buttons correspond to the following buses. MIX 1–24 buttons MIX buses 1–24 MATRIX1–8 buttons MATRIX buses 1–8 STEREO AL/R STEREO A bus L/R channels STEREO BL/R STEREO B bus L/R channels Hint If desired, the talkback signal can also be output directly from an output channel of slot 1–4 or from 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3. To do so, click the PATCH button in the TALKBACK OUT area to access the OUTPUT PATCH screen, and patch talkback to the jack you want to use for direct output. 98 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section • The TALKBACK [ON] key of the panel and the TALKBACK ON/OFF button in the screen are linked. The setting of the NEVER LATCH button also affects both of these. However if the NEVER LATCH button is off, holding down the onscreen TALKBACK ON/OFF button will cause Latched operation. • When talkback is on, you can use the talkback dimmer to lower the monitor levels other than talkback (➥ p.216). • You can also assign the talkback function to a user-defined key (➥ p.189). Using the oscillator The PM5D contains a test oscillator. By outputting the oscillator signal to the desired bus you can check the operation of connected devices or test the acoustics of a hall. 1 4 Repeatedly press the [MON/CUE] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section until the OSCILLATOR screen appears. OSCILLATOR OSC MODE area BUS ASSIGN area Click a button in the BUS ASSIGN area to select the oscillator signal output destination from the following choices. MIX 1–24 MIX buses 1–24 MATRIX1–8 MATRIX buses 1–8 STEREO AL/R STEREO A bus L/R channels STEREO BL/R STEREO B bus L/R channels Hint • If you selected SINE WAVE 2CH as the oscillator type, the L-channel signal of the oscillator will be sent to odd-numbered buses (or the L output jack) and the R-channel signal of the oscillator will be sent to even-numbered buses (or the R output jack). • You can use the OSC OUT area to directly output the oscillator signal from an output jack or slot (➥ p.214). 5 OSC OUT area 3 Click a button in the OSC MODE section to select the type of oscillator to output, from the following choices. Hint The OSCILLATOR [ON] key of the panel and the OSC ON/ OFF button in the screen are linked. Note SINE WAVE 1CH button Sine wave x 1 channel SINE WAVE 2CH button Sine wave x 2 channels PINK NOISE button Pink noise BURST NOISE button Burst noise (repeated output of pink noise) If the OSCILLATOR [ON] key is off, and a screen other than the OSCILLATOR screen (TALKBACK function) is displayed, pressing this key will only display the OSCILLATOR screen; the key will not turn on. When you press the key once again, it will turn on. 12 Use the knobs and buttons of the PARAMETERS area to adjust the oscillator parameters. The parameters that can be adjusted will depend on the type of oscillator you selected in step 2. For example if you selected SINE WAVE 1CH as the oscillator type, the PARAMETERS area will contain the following parameters. Talkback and Oscillator 2 PARAMETERS area Press the OSCILLATOR [ON] key of the OSCILLATOR section. The oscillator signal will be sent to the bus you selected in step 4. When you press the key again, the oscillator will turn off. LEVEL knob Adjusts the output level of the oscillator. FREQ knob Adjusts the frequency of the sine wave output from the oscillator. You can choose preset frequencies by clicking the buttons below. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 99 13 Meters 13 Meters This chapter explains meter-related operations. Items in the meter section The meter section shows the input levels of the input channels and the output levels of the output channels. A INPUT/MIX meters Depending on the key you press, these meters indicate the input levels of input channels 1–24 or 25–48, or the output levels of MIX channels 1–24. 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 B [CH 1-24/ST IN/FX RTN] key When this key is on, the INPUT/MIX meters indicate the input levels of input channels 1–24 and the ST IN/ FX RTN/MATRIX meters indicate the output level of ST IN channels (or FX RTN channels, depending on the FOLLOW INPUT LAYER setting) 1–4. MIX MATRIX CH 1-24 ST IN/ PEAK HOLD /ST IN 23 45 C [CH 25-48/FX RTN/ST IN] key When this key is on, the INPUT/MIX meters indicate the input levels of input channels 25–48 and the ST IN/ FX RTN/MATRIX meters indicate the output level of FX RTN channels (or ST IN channels, depending on the FOLLOW INPUT LAYER setting) 1–4. D [MIX/MASTER] key When this key is on, the INPUT/MIX meters indicate the output levels of MIX channels 1–24 and the ST IN/ FX RTN/MATRIX meters indicate the output levels of MATRIX channels 1–8. 1L 1R 2L 2R 3L 3R 4L 4R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 L OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 / MATRIX ST IN / R L R L R OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 OVER -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 -18 -24 -30 -40 -50 -60 STEREO A STEREO B 6 E [PEAK HOLD] key Switches the peak hold function on/off for the meter display. F ST IN/FX RTN/MATRIX meters Depending on the key you press, these meters indicate the output levels of ST IN channels 1–4 or MATRIX channels 1–8. CUE 7 G MASTER meters These meters always indicate the output levels of the STEREO A/B channels and CUE bus. Switching the meter display You can use the keys of the meter section to specify the channels whose levels will be shown in the INPUT/MIX meters and ST IN/MATRIX meters. The following channels correspond to each key. [INPUT/MIX] meters [ST IN/MATRIX] meters [CH 1-24/ST IN/FX RTN] key Input channels 1–24 ST channels (or FX RTN channels) 1–4 [CH 25-48/FX RTN/ ST IN] key Input channels 25–48 FX RTN channels (or ST IN channels) 1–4 [MIX/MATRIX] key MIX channels 1–24 MATRIX channels 1–8 Key 100 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Hint • The type of channels shown in the meter section is also shown in the METER SECTION area in the upper right of the display. • The MASTER meters always indicate the output levels of the STEREO A/B channels and CUE bus. Switching the metering point The metering point for the level meters (i.e., the position at which the level is detected) can be specified separately for input channels and output channels. Specifying the metering point for input channels Specifying the metering point for output channels Here’s how to specify the metering point for input channels and ST IN/FX RTN channels. 1 Here’s how to specify the metering point for output channels, MONITOR channels, and the CUE bus. Hint In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [METER] key to access the INPUT METER screen. INPUT METER The metering point setting for the CUE bus is independent from the other output channels. 1 METERING POINT box In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [METER] key to access the OUTPUT METER screen. OUTPUT METER METERING POINT box Click the / buttons at the left and right of the METERING POINT box to choose one of the following metering points. PRE ATT Immediately before the attenuator PRE GATE Immediately before the internal gate PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST FADER Immediately after the fader POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key 2 3 To specify the metering point for output channels and MONITOR channels, click the / buttons at the left and right of the METERING POINT box to choose one of the following. PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST FADER Immediately after the fader POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key POST DELAY Immediately after the internal delay 13 Meters 2 CUE METERING POINT box To specify the metering point for the CUE bus, click the / buttons at the left and right of the CUE METERING POINT box to choose one of the following. PRE DELAY Immediately before the internal delay POST DELAY Immediately after the internal delay PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 101 13 Meters Viewing the gain reduction of the internal gates and compressors The amount of gain reduction produced by the gates/compressors of the input channels and the amount of gain reduction produced by the compressors of the output channels can be viewed in the display. Viewing the gain reduction for input channels Here’s how to view the amount of gain reduction produced by the gates/compressors provided on input channels 1–48 and ST IN channels 1–4. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [METER] key to access the INPUT GR screen. Viewing the gain reduction for output channels To view the amount of gain reduction produced by the compressors provided on the output channels, repeatedly press the [METER] key of the DISPLAY ACCESS section to access the OUTPUT GR screen. For an explanation of the items shown in the screen, refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT GR screen (➥ p.211) in the Reference section. INPUT GR GAIN button 2 102 OUTPUT GR COMP button Click the GATE button or COMP button to select the parameter that will be displayed. For an explanation of the items shown in the screen, refer to the explanation of the INPUT GR screen (➥ p.211) in the Reference section. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 14 Effects This chapter explains the functionality and operation of the PM5D’s internal effects. About the internal effects The PM5D contains eight internal effect modules. For each module, you can choose one of 48 effect types (not including AddOn Effects) for the module to use. Hint You can add effect types for the internal effects by installing an optional Add-On Effects package (➥ p.109). To use an internal effect via send/return, assign the output of a MIX channel to the input of the effect, and assign the output of the effect to an input channel. In this case, the corresponding MIX bus is used as an effect send AUX bus, and the input channel is used as an effect return channel. By default, the L/R outputs of effects 1–4 are assigned to L/ R of FX RTN channels 1–4. Input channel 1–48 inputs EFFECT 2 EFFECT 3 EFFECT 8 INPUT PATCH MIX channel 1–24 outputs OUTPUT PATCH EFFECT 1 ST IN channel 1–4 inputs INPUT L EFFECT L L RETURN INPUT R EFFECT R R RETURN FX RTN channel 1–4 inputs Insert-in of the desired channel INPUT L L RETURN EFFECT INPUT R R RETURN If a signal is assigned to only one input of an effect, it will be processed as mono-in/stereo-out regardless of whether a Stereo effect type or Mix effect type is selected. INPUT L or R L RETURN EFFECT R RETURN 14 Effects EFFECT • Stereo effect types • Mix effect types Alternatively, you can insert an internal effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the insert-out/insert-in of the desired channel. Insert-out of the desired channel The PM5D’s effect types fall into two categories; “stereo effect types” which process the L/R channel input signals independently, and “mix effect types” which mix the two channels before processing the signal. If signals are assigned to both the L and R inputs of an effect, the way in which the L/R channels are processed will depend on whether a Stereo effect type or a Mix effect type is selected, as follows. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 103 14 Effects Using an internal effect via a MIX bus This section explains how to use an internal effect via a MIX bus. As an example, we will choose effect 1 for our operations, assign MIX bus 1 to the effect input, and assign the effect output to FX RTN channels 1/2. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the INPUT [PAN/ROUTING] key to access the CH to MIX screen. CH to MIX 2 You can access the EFFECT ASSIGN screen (EFFECT function) to see all eight effect modules at once while you assign signal routes to the effect inputs and outputs, or operate Bypass and Cue (➥ p.154). 5 In the INPUT area, click the / buttons at the left and right of the L CH box to select MIX 1 (MIX channel 1); then press the [ENTER] key (or click within the box). This assigns the output of MIX channel 1 to the L input of the effect. If a signal route is already assigned, a window will appear when you press the [ENTER] key, asking you to confirm the assignment. Click the OK button to confirm the assignment. If you want to use the effect input in stereo, assign MIX channel 2 to the R CH box in the same way. 6 In the OUTPUT area, make sure that the L CH box indicates FX RTN1L and the R CH box indicates FX RTN1R. The L CH/R CH boxes in the OUTPUT area select the input channels that are assigned to the L/R outputs of the effect. By default, the L/R outputs of effect 1 are assigned to FX RTN channel 1 (L/R). If different channels are selected, use the / buttons at the left and right of the boxes to select FX RTN1L and FX RTN1R respectively. 7 Set the MIX BALANCE knob to about 100. The MIX BALANCE knob adjusts the balance between the original sound and effect sound included in the output signal from the effect. If this knob is at the 100 (%) position, only the effect sound will be output. 8 In the ENCODER MODE section, press the MIX SEND SELECT [1] key to make the encoder mode indicator show “1”. In this state you can use the input channel encoders to adjust the send level from each channel to MIX bus 1. 9 Turn the encoders of the INPUT channel strip and ST IN channel strip to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each channel to MIX bus 1. Make sure that the MIX bus 1 type selection box indicates “VARI.” If the box indicates “FIXED,” click the / buttons at left and right to change the indication to “VARI”; then press the [ENTER] key (or click inside the box) to finalize the change. This box selects the operation of the MIX bus (VARI or FIXED). If VARI is selected, the bus send levels will be adjustable. The VARI/FIXED selection is made for two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses. If the effect input is stereo, it is convenient to pair these two MIX buses. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT PARAM screen. EFFECT PARAM The effect module you are using INPUT area OUTPUT area MIX BALANCE knob Make sure that the box in the upper left of the screen indicates EFFECT 1. This box lets you select the effect module that you want to control. If a different effect module is selected, click the / buttons at left and right to select EFFECT 1. Hint Type selection box Hint 3 4 Don’t raise the encoder of the FX RTN channel you are using as the effect return. Doing so will send the output of the effect back to the input, possibly causing oscillation. Hint • The send position of the signals sent from input channels to the MIX bus can be specified for each channel (➥ p.43). • As an alternate way to adjust the send level, you can turn on the [MIX SEND] key of the MIX section, then use a [SEL] key to select an input channel and turn the corresponding MIX encoder (➥ p.43). 104 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 10 11 In the MIX section, press the [MIX MASTER] key to turn it on (LED lit). When the [MIX MASTER] key is on, you can use the controls of the MIX section to control MIX channels 1–24. 12 In the FX RTN channel strip, press the FX RTN channel 1 [ON] key to turn it on. 13 Use the FX RTN channel 1 fader to adjust the effect return level. Hint Press the MIX channel 1 MIX [ON] key to turn it on. Use the MIX encoder of that MIX channel to adjust the master send level of the signal sent to the effect. The input/output levels of the effect can be viewed in the meters shown in the EFFECT PARAM screen or EFFECT ASSIGN screen. Inserting an internal effect into a channel You can insert an internal effect into a channel by assigning the input/output of the internal effect to the insert-out/insert-in of the desired channel. As an example, here’s how to insert an effect into an input channel. 5 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT PARAM screen. EFFECT PARAM INSERT ON/OFF button The effect module you are using INPUT area OUTPUT area INSERT I/O area INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT MIX BALANCE knob 6 2 To select the effect module you want to use, click the / buttons at the left and right of the box in the upper left of the screen. 3 In the INPUT area, use the / buttons at the left and right of the L CH box to select the insert-out of the channel into which you want to insert the effect, and press the [ENTER] key. (If a signal route has already been assigned, a window will ask you to confirm the assignment change.) If you are inserting the effect into a stereo channel (or two paired channels), use the R CH box to assign the insert-out for the other channel in the same way. 4 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the INPUT [PATCH] key to access the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen. In the OUTPUT area, use the / buttons at the left and right of the L CH box to select the insert-in assigned to the L output of the effect. If you are inserting the effect into a stereo channel (or two paired channels), use the R CH box to assign the insert-in for the other channel in the same way. 7 Turn on the INSERT ON/OFF button for the channel into which you inserted the effect. This enables the effect insertion for the corresponding channel. 14 Use the buttons of the INSERT I/O area to specify the insert-out/in point. Effects 1 Hint For details on the INSERT I/O area, refer to INSERT/DIRECT POINT screen (➥ p.256) in the Reference section. 8 Turn on the [ON] key for the channel into which you inserted the effect, and use the fader to adjust the input level. 9 Access the EFFECT PARAM screen, and drag the MIX BALANCE knob to adjust the balance of the effect sound and original sound. The input/output levels of the effect can be viewed in the meters shown in the EFFECT PARAM screen or EFFECT ASSIGN screen. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 105 14 Effects Basic operations in the effect screen This section explains how to store or recall effect library data, and how to edit effect parameters. Recalling settings from the effect library 3 In the library list at the right of the screen, click to select the library item you want to recall When you click a library item in the library list, that line will be highlighted and move to the center of the list. The effect type of the currently selected library item will be shown above the library list. 4 Click the RECALL button. The selected library item will be loaded into the effect module you chose. Here’s how to recall existing settings from the effect library. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT PARAM screen. EFFECT PARAM LIBRARY button Hint The effect module you are controlling You can click the EDIT button in the upper right of the screen to access the EFFECT PARAM screen for the currently selected effect. Editing the effect parameters Here’s how to edit the parameters of an internal effect. 1 Note You cannot change the currently selected effect type in the EFFECT PARAM screen. To change the effect type, you must recall (load) a library item that uses the desired effect type. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT PARAM screen. The lower part of the screen will show knobs and buttons for editing the parameters of the currently selected effect. The content of the parameters will depend on the type of the currently selected effect. EFFECT PARAM Effect parameters The effect module you are controlling Click the / buttons at the left and right of the box in the left side of the screen to select the effect module you want to use, and then click the LIBRARY button. The EFFECT LIBRARY screen will appear, allowing you to recall or store settings in the effect library. EFFECT LIBRARY RECALL button 2 Use the box in the upper left of the screen to select the effect module you want to control. 3 Use the knobs and buttons in the lower part of the screen to edit the effect parameters. For details on the effect parameters, refer to the Appendices at the end of this manual. Hint Current effect type Library list Hint You can also access this screen by repeatedly pressing the [EFFECT] key. The effect module you are controlling can also be selected in this screen. 106 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section The parameter settings for internal effect modules 1–8 are saved in the scene. The settings of individual effects can also be stored in the effect library independently of scene memory. Storing settings in the effect library 3 Note Here’s how to store effect parameter settings in the effect library. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT PARAM screen. EFFECT PARAM In the library list, choose the store-destination number and click that line. Library items for which an “R” (read-only) appears in the right column of the list are factory preset library items. These numbers cannot be overwritten. 4 Click the STORE button. The EFFECT LIBRARY STORE window will appear, allowing you to name the library item you are saving. 5 Use the character palette to assign a name to the library item. For details on using the character palette, refer to p.26. 6 Click the STORE button. A window will ask you to confirm the Store operation. 7 To execute the Store operation, click the OK button. The data will be stored, and you will return to the previous screen. If you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, the Store operation will be aborted and you will return to the previous screen. LIBRARY button The effect module whose data you want to store Use the box in the upper left of the screen to select the effect module whose settings you want to store, and click the LIBRARY button. The EFFECT LIBRARY screen will appear, allowing you to recall or store settings in the effect library. EFFECT LIBRARY 14 Effects 2 “R” (read-only) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 107 14 Effects Using the Tap Tempo function This section explains how to use the Tap Tempo function. “Tap tempo” is a function that lets you specify the delay time of a delay effect or the modulation speed of a modulation effect by striking a key at the desired interval. 1 From the effect library, recall a library item whose effect type uses a TEMPO parameter (e.g., Delay+ER., Echo, Chorus). TEMPO is a parameter that specifies a time-related effect parameter (the DELAY parameter of Delay+ER. or Echo, or the FREQ. parameter of Chorus, etc.) in terms of a BPM value or a manual setting. The TEMPO parameter is included in delay-type effects or modulation-type effects, and is shown in the lower left of the EFFECT PARAM screen. 3 Move the cursor to the TAP TEMPO button, and repeatedly press the [ENTER] key at the desired tempo. (Alternatively, repeatedly click the TAP TEMPO button.) The average interval (BPM) at which you press the key will be calculated, and that value will be input for the TEMPO parameter. The average interval will be input (the average of a, b, and c) Hint For details on the parameters of each effect type, refer to the Appendices at the end of this manual (➥ p.298). 2 a b c In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT PARAM screen. The following illustration shows the screen when the “Delay→ER.” effect type is selected. First tap Second tap Third tap Fourth tap EFFECT PARAM Hint • The Tap Tempo function is valid only for the currently displayed internal effect. However, it is ignored if the selected effect type does not include a TEMPO parameter. • If the average value is outside the range of 20–300 BPM, it will be ignored. • If desired, an external switch connected to the GPI connector can be used to operate the Tap Tempo function of the current page (➥ p.123). TAP TEMPO button 108 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Using the Freeze effect Here’s how to use the “FREEZE” effect type, which provides the functionality of a simple sampler. When this effect type is selected, you can perform operations in the screen to record (sample) and play back a sound. 1 In the EFFECT LIBRARY screen, recall a library item that uses the FREEZE effect type. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [EFFECT] key to access the EFFECT PARAM screen. If the FREEZE effect type is selected, the lower left of the EFFECT PARAM screen will show a REC button, a PLAY button, and a progress bar. 3 To begin recording (sampling), click the REC button and then click the PLAY button. The signal being input to the effect will be recorded. The progress bar shows the current recording location. When a fixed time has elapsed, the buttons will automatically turn off. Hint You can adjust the parameters in the screen to make detailed settings for recording time, the way in which recording will begin, and the way in which the sample will play back. For more about the parameters, refer to the Appendices at the end of this manual (➥ p.305). EFFECT PARAM 4 To play back the recorded sample, click the PLAY button. Note Once you stop, the sampled content will be erased. REC button Progress bar PLAY button Using optional Add-On Effects EFFECT PARAM As of August 2004, the following Add-On Effects packages are available for purchase. • AE011 Channel Strip Package • AE021 Master Strip Package However, the Reverb Package sold as an Add-On Effects package for the DM2000 or 02R96 is already included on the PM5D as effect library numbers 046–048. Other Add-On Effects packages are expected to go on sale in the future, so please check the Yamaha website for the latest information. Yamaha Pro Audio Website: http://www.yamahaproaudio.com PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 14 Effects You can add effect types for the internal effects by installing an optional Add-On Effects package. The installed effect types can be recalled from effect library numbers 049 and following. For details on the installation procedure, refer to the installation guide included with the Add-On Effects package you purchased. 109 15 Graphic EQ 15 Graphic EQ The PM5D contains twelve 31-band graphic EQ modules. This chapter explains how to use the graphic EQ. Patching the graphic EQ The twelve GEQ (Graphic EQ) modules built into the PM5D can be inserted into the insert-out/in of the desired channel. As an example, here’s how to insert graphic EQ into the STEREO A channel. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [GEQ] key to access the GEQ PARAM screen. In this screen you can select a GEQ module, specify the channel into which it will be inserted, and edit its parameters. GEQ PARAM If an insert destination is already assigned, a window will appear when you click within the box, asking you to confirm the change. Click the OK button to execute. 4 In the upper left of the screen, click the / buttons at the left and right of the MODULE box to select another GEQ module, and assign it to ST AR [INS] (STEREO A R channel insertin) in the same way. 5 Click the GEQ ON/OFF button to turn it on. INSERT box MODULE box GEQ ON/OFF button Note When you insert a GEQ, the insert-in for the channel will be enabled automatically. 6 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the OUTPUT [PATCH] key to access the INSERT POINT screen. INSERT POINT 2 Click the / buttons at the left and right of the MODULE box in the upper left of the screen to select the GEQ module you want to operate. 3 Click the / buttons at the left and right of the INSERT box to select ST AL [INS] (STEREO A L channel insert-in/out) as the channel into which the GEQ module will be inserted, and press the [ENTER] key (or click within the box). You can choose one of the following insert destinations. 110 INS CH 1–INS CH48 Input channel 1–48 insert in/out INS STIN1L–INS STIN4R ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) insert in/ out INS MIX 1–INS MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 insert in/out INS MTRX1–INS MTRX8 MATRIX channel 1–8 insert in/out INS ST AL/INS ST AR STEREO A channel (L/R) insert in/out INS ST BL–INS ST BR STEREO B channel insert in/out INS MON L–INS MON C MONITOR channel (L/R/C) insert in/out PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual ON/OFF button 7 Operating section Insert point If desired, change the insert point for the STEREO A channel into which you inserted the graphic EQ. When you insert a GEQ, the insert-in point for that channel will be enabled automatically. Note • If you inserted a graphic EQ into an input channel, repeatedly press the INPUT [PATCH] key to access the INSERT/ DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function), and edit the settings in the same way. • You can also insert a graphic EQ into the desired channel’s insert-in/out by using the INSERT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function and OUTPUT PATCH function). Basic graphic EQ operations There are two ways to control a graphic EQ; using the virtual faders and buttons within the display, or using the DCA faders of the panel. Controlling the graphic EQ from the display Controlling the graphic EQ from the DCA section Here’s how to control the desired GEQ module by using the faders and buttons shown in the GEQ PARAM screen (GEQ function). Here’s how to control the graphic EQ using the keys and faders of the panel DCA strip. In this case, the corresponding GEQ module is divided into six regions for control. 1 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [GEQ] key to access the GEQ PARAM screen. GEQ PARAM GEQ PARAM Spectrum analyzer Faders MODULE box LIMIT area Click the / buttons at the left and right of the MODULE box to select the GEQ module you want to operate. At this time make sure that the GEQ ON/OFF button is on. Also make sure that the corresponding module is inserted into an appropriate channel, and that insertin/out is enabled for that channel. GEQ ON/OFF button ASSIGN TO FADERS area 2 Hint LIMIT area Click the / buttons at the left and right of the MODULE box to select the GEQ module you want to operate. At this time, make sure that the GEQ ON/OFF button is turned on. Also make sure that the corresponding module is inserted into an appropriate channel, and that insert is enabled for that channel. Hint • The upper part of the GEQ PARAM screen functions as a spectrum analyzer. If a signal is being input to the corresponding channel, the level of each frequency band is displayed in realtime. • As an alternate way to select the desired GEQ module, you can use the GEQ ASSIGN screen (GEQ function) (➥ p.157). 3 If desired, use the buttons of the LIMIT area to specify the variable range of the faders. The LIMIT area lets you select the maximum amount and direction of the change controlled by the faders. You can select ±15 dB/±12 dB/±6 dB (both boost and cut directions) or –24 dB (cut only). 4 Drag the faders in the lower part of the screen to adjust the amount of boost/cut. The value of each fader is shown by the box below it. Hint Clicking the EQ FLAT button below the LIMIT area will reset all faders to 0 dB. When the GEQ PARAM screen is displayed, pressing the [SEL] key of a channel in which a GEQ module is inserted will recall the corresponding GEQ module in the screen. 3 Use the buttons of the LIMIT area to select the maximum amount and direction of the change controlled by the faders. 4 In the lower part of the screen, click a button in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area to select the region you will control from the DCA faders. The buttons in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area correspond to the following frequency regions. A 20.0-100 button The eight bands 20.0 Hz–100 Hz B 63.0-315 button The eight bands 63.0 Hz–315 Hz C 200-1.00k button The eight bands 200 Hz–1.00 kHz D 630-3.15k button The eight bands 630 Hz–3.15 kHz E 2.00k-10.0k button The eight bands 2.00 kHz–10.0 kHz F 4.00k-20.0k button The eight bands 4.00 kHz–20.0 kHz PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 15 Graphic EQ MODULE box 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [GEQ] key to access the GEQ PARAM screen. 111 15 Graphic EQ When a button is clicked, you can use the DCA faders to control the faders of that frequency region. The faders of the selected region are indicated by a red line in the center of the fader. While any of the buttons in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area is on, you can use the FADER MODE section FADER MODE [A]–[F] keys to select the frequency region corresponding to these buttons. Even if all of the buttons in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area are off, you can hold down the [SHIFT] key and press one of the FADER MODE [A]–[F] keys to select the region to be controlled by the DCA faders. 4.00kHz–20.0kHz 2.00kHz–10.0kHz 20.0Hz–100Hz 63.0Hz–315Hz 5 630Hz–3.15kHz 200Hz–1.00kHz Operate DCA faders 1–8. The corresponding frequency region will be boosted or cut. Hint If the fader of a GEQ module is at the 0 dB position, the [NOMINAL] LED of the DCA fader will light. If it is at other than the 0 dB position, the DCA [MUTE] key will light. While the DCA [MUTE] key is lit, pressing the DCA [MUTE] key will reset the corresponding band to 0 dB. 6 If you want to use the DCA faders to control a different region, repeat steps 4–5. 7 When you have finished using the DCA faders to control the graphic EQ, either press the FADER MODE [DCA] key or click the OFF button in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area. When the [DCA] button is on, the FADER MODE keys and the DCA faders will return to their normal state. If you once again want to assign the graphic EQ to the DCA faders, either click a button in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area or hold down the [SHIFT] key and press a FADER MODE [A]–[F] key. Hint • GEQ settings are saved as part of the scene. The settings of a GEQ module can also be saved in the GEQ library. For details, refer to GEQ LIBRARY screen (➥ p.158) in the Reference section. • When you switch the display to a different screen, the DCA fader assignments will be forcibly defeated, and will no longer function even if you return to the GEQ screen. However if you turn on the AUTO ASSIGN button in the GEQ PARAM screen, the DCA faders will automatically be assigned to the most recently operated region when you access the GEQ PARAM screen. 112 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 16 Remote control This chapter explains how you can use MIDI or GPI to control the PM5D’s parameters from an external device, or conversely how you can use the PM5D to control external devices. MIDI on the PM5D The PM5D can use MIDI to perform the following operations. • Program Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (scene/effect library recall) on the PM5D, a program change message of the corresponding number can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, the corresponding events can be executed when program change messages are received from an external device. • Control Change transmission and reception When you execute a specific event (fader/encoder or key operation) on the PM5D, a control change message of the corresponding number can be transmitted to an external device. Conversely, events can be executed when control change messages are received from an external device. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later. System exclusive messages can also be used to transmit or receive bulk data (scene or library content) or parameters. • MIDI Remote function You can assign MIDI messages to the controls of the INPUT/ST IN channel strip, and transmit those MIDI messages by operating the controls. This capability can be used for remote control of external MIDI devices such as synthesizers, or to control the parameters of DAW software or a HDR unit. • MIDI Event transmission MIDI messages can be registered independently for each scene in scene memory, and transmitted when that scene is recalled. Note For each of the above functions, the MIDI port used to transmit/receive MIDI messages can be selected from the rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors, the rear panel USB connector, and an I/O card installed in slots 1 through 4. (If the USB connector or an I/O card is selected, you can additionally choose from ports 1 through 8.) However, MIDI Event transmission is fixed at the MIDI OUT connector. Using program changes to control events The PM5D lets you assign specific events (scene recall / effect library recall) to each MIDI program number, so that the correspondingly-numbered program change message will be transmitted to an external device when you execute that event on the PM5D. Conversely, the corresponding event can be executed when a program change message is received from an external device. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external device to the PM5D’s MIDI IN connector. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the PM5D to the MIDI IN connector of the external device. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI IN 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen shown below. MIDI PGM CHANGE MIDI OUT External device 16 Remote control 1 PM5D In the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen you can assign events to each program number, select the port at which MIDI messages will be transmitted and received, and select how program changes will be transmitted and received. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 113 16 Remote control 3 In the PROGRAM CHANGE SETUP area at the left of the screen, you can select the way in which program changes will be transmitted and received, and switch reception and transmission on/off. The MODE area of PROGRAM CHANGE SETUP lets you choose one of the following as the way in which program changes will be transmitted and received. • SINGLE If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode). • OMNI ON/OFF If this button is on, program changes of all MIDI channels will be received in Single mode (this is unavailable in Multi mode). • BANK ON/OFF If this button is on, bank select messages will be transmitted and received in Single mode (this is unavailable in Multi mode). • MULTI If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode). You can use the Tx (transmission) and Rx (reception) buttons to turn program change transmission and reception on/off separately. 4 In the MIDI SETUP area at the upper left of the screen, select the port at which program changes will be transmitted/received, and the MIDI channel that will be used for transmission and reception. You have the following choices. MIDI The rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors USB The rear panel USB connector SLOT 1–4 An I/O card installed in rear panel slot 1–4 5 The list contains the following columns. • CH/BANK (Channel/Bank) In Multi mode, or in Single mode when the BANK ON/OFF button is off, the value in this column indicates the MIDI channel on which program changes are transmitted and received. In Single mode when the BANK ON/OFF button is on, the value in this column indicates the bank number. • PGM No. (Program number) Indicates the program number 1–128. • LIBRARY NAME In this column you can view/select the type and the number of the event assigned to each channel (bank)/ program number. Use the scroll bar at the right to display the desired channel (bank) and program number, and click that line; the line you click will move to the center and will be highlighted. 6 Click the / buttons at the left and right of the Tx box (transmission) or Rx box (reception) to change the setting, and press the [ENTER] key (or click within the box) to finalize the setting. If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, use the box at the right to specify the port number (1–8) as well. If SINGLE (single mode) is selected as the program change transmission/reception mode, use the MIDI CH field to select the MIDI transmit channel and MIDI receive channel. Hint The MIDI port and MIDI channel used for program change transmission/reception can also be specified from the MIDI SETUP screen (➥ p.171). 114 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual In the list at the right side of the screen, display the MIDI channel (bank) and program number to which you want to assign an event, and click that line. This list lets you select the event (scene recall / effect library recall) assigned to each program number. Operating section Click the button in the LIBRARY NAME column of the currently selected line to open the MIDI PGM CHANGE window. In this window you can select the type of event (a scene, or a library item for effect 1–8) and its number. 7 When you have finished making settings, click the OK button in the MIDI PGM CHANGE window. 8 Assign events to other program numbers in the same way. With these settings, executing the specified event on the PM5D will cause a program change (or bank select + program change) message to be transmitted to the external device. When an external device transmits a program change (or bank select + program change) message on the appropriate channel, the event assigned to that program number will be executed. Hint Event type • You can use the CLEAR button above the list to erase all assignments to program numbers. The PRESET button will return all program number assignments to their default state. • The contents of the program change table are not saved in the scene. If desired, you can save this data on a memory card as a MIDI PGM TABLE. Scene/library number In the list at the left, select the type of event. In the list at the right, select the scene/library number that will be recalled. The following types of event can be selected in the list at the left. NO ASSIGN No event is assigned SCENE Scene memory recall EFFECT 1–8 Recall an effect library item into an internal effect module 1–8 Note If more than one program number is assigned to a single scene, only the lowest-numbered program change will be transmitted in Single mode, and in Multi mode the lowestnumbered program change for each channel will be transmitted. Using control changes to control events You can use MIDI control change messages to control specified events (fader/encoder operations, key on/off operations etc.) on the PM5D. This capability can be used to record fader and key operations on a MIDI sequencer or other external device, and play back this data later. 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external device to the PM5D’s MIDI IN connector. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the PM5D to the MIDI IN connector of the external device. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen shown below. MIDI CTRL CHANGE 16 Remote control You can use control changes to control events in either of the following two ways. • Using control change numbers 1–119 This method uses the common variety of control change messages. You can freely assign an event to each control number. • Using NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) This method uses a special type of control change messages called NRPN. NRPN uses control change numbers 99 and 98 to specify the MSB (Most Significant Byte) and LSB (Least Significant Byte) of the parameter number, and subsequently-transmitted control change messages of control change number 6 (or 6 and 38) to specify the value of that parameter. The event specified by each combination of MSB and LSB is fixed. In the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen you can select the port used to transmit/receive MIDI messages, and how control changes will be transmitted and received. If control change 1–119 is selected as the transmission/ reception method, you can assign the desired event to each control number. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 115 16 Remote control 3 In the CONTROL CHANGE SETUP area at the left of the screen, you can select the way in which control changes will be transmitted and received, and switch reception and transmission on/off. The MODE area of CONTROL CHANGE SETUP lets you choose one of the following as the way in which control changes will be transmitted and received. 5 If TABLE [SINGLE] or TABLE [MULTI] are selected as the control change transmission/ reception method, use the list in the right of the screen to display the MIDI channel and control number to which you want to assign an event, and click that line. In this list you can select the event (fader/encoder operation, key operation, etc.) that will be assigned to each control number. The list contains the following columns. • CH (Channel) Indicates the MIDI channel on which the control change is transmitted/received. Note NRPN If this button is on, PM5D parameters will be transmitted/received as NRPN messages. TABLE [SINGLE] If this button is on, PM5D parameters will be transmitted/received as control change messages on a single MIDI channel according to the assignments in the list at the right side of the screen. TABLE [MULTI] If this button is on, PM5D parameters will be transmitted/received as control change messages on multiple MIDI channels according to the assignments in the list at the right side of the screen. You can use the buttons in the Tx (transmission) area and Rx (reception) area to turn control change transmission/reception on/off. 4 In the MIDI SETUP area at the upper left of the screen, select the port used to transmit/ receive control changes, and the MIDI channel used for transmission and reception. In MIDI SETUP, the MIDI PORT settings let you select the port used for MIDI control change transmission/ reception; you have the following choices. MIDI The rear panel MIDI IN/OUT connectors USB The rear panel USB connector SLOT 1–4 An I/O card installed in rear panel slot 1–4 Click the / buttons at the left and right of the Tx box (transmission) or Rx box (reception) to change the setting, and press the [ENTER] key to finalize the setting. If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, use the box at the right to specify the port number (1–8) as well. If TABLE [SINGLE] or NRPN are selected as the control change transmission/reception method, use MIDI CH field to choose the MIDI channel used for transmission and reception. You can use this column to specify multiple MIDI channels even if TABLE [SINGLE] is selected as the transmission/ reception method. However in actuality, only the MIDI transmit/receive channel selected in the MIDI SETUP field will be valid. • CTRL No. (Control number) Indicates the control number 1–119. You cannot make settings for numbers 0, 32, or 96–101. • CTRL CHANGE EVENT (Library name) Indicates/selects the type of event assigned to the corresponding channel / control number. Use the scroll bar at the right to display the desired channel and control number, and click that line; the line you click will move to the center and will be highlighted. 6 Click the button in the CTRL CHANGE EVENT column of the currently selected line to open the MIDI CTRL CHANGE window, and specify the parameter that you want to assign. In this window you can specify the parameter in three levels (mode, parameters 1/2). 7 When you have finished making settings, click the OK button in the MIDI CTRL CHANGE window. 8 Assign events to other control numbers in the same way. When you operate the parameters you assigned on the PM5D, control change messages will be transmitted to external devices. Similarly, if the corresponding control change messages are sent from an external device on the appropriate channel, the parameters assigned to those control numbers will change. Hint The MIDI port and MIDI channel used for control change transmission/reception can also be specified from the MIDI SETUP screen (➥ p.171). 116 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Hint • You can use the CLEAR button above the list to erase all assignments to control numbers. The PRESET button will return all control number assignments to their default state. • The contents of the control change table are not saved in the scene. If desired, you can save this data on a memory card as a MIDI CTRL TABLE. Using the MIDI Remote function “MIDI Remote” allows you to assign MIDI messages to the controllers (faders, encoders, CH [ON] keys, ENCODER [ON] keys) of the INPUT/ST IN channel strips so that these MIDI messages will be transmitted when you operate these controllers. This capability can be used for remote control of external MIDI devices such as synthesizers, or to control the parameters of DAW software or a HDR unit. While the MIDI Remote function is active, INPUT channel strip 1–24 functions as MIDI remote channels 1–24, and ST IN channel strip 1–4 functions as MIDI remote channels 25–28. Assigning MIDI messages to controllers Here’s how to specify the MIDI port used by the MIDI Remote function, and assign a MIDI message to the desired MIDI remote channel. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the MIDI SETUP screen shown below. MIDI SETUP MIDI remote channels 1–24 MIDI remote channels 25–28 To each controller you can assign a MIDI message consisting of up to sixteen bytes of hexadecimal data. If desired, you can specify that a value within the message varies according to the movement of the controller. 2 In the MIDI REMOTE area at the right of the screen, select one of the following as the port from which MIDI messages will be output for each of the four MIDI Remote banks (BANK A– D). MIDI The rear panel MIDI OUT connector USB The rear panel USB connector SLOT 1–4 An I/O card installed in rear panel slot 1–4 Remote control 16 Click the / buttons at the left and right of each box to change the setting, and press the [ENTER] key (or click within the box) to finalize the setting. If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, use the box at the right to specify the port number (1–8) as well. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 117 16 Remote control 3 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the MIDI REMOTE screen shown below. LATCH button MIDI message box LEARN button MIDI REMOTE You can assign a MIDI message to a controller in any of the following three ways. A Directly inputting hexadecimal values In this method you directly input the message as hexadecimal values. To use this method, click the button at the left edge of the desired MIDI message box to open the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window. 4 In the BANK SELECT area at the upper right of the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the bank you want to use. The bank name is displayed above buttons A–D. You can change the name by clicking the button at the left of the bank name. TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE button BANK SELECT area Channel select area 5 6 In the upper left of the screen, set the TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE button to ENABLE. Transmission will be enabled for the selected bank. (You can enable/disable transmission for each of the four banks.) Use the channel select area at the left of the screen to select the MIDI remote channel to which you want to assign a MIDI message. These buttons correspond to the following channel strips. REMOTE CH 1–24 INPUT channel strip 1–24 REMOTE CH 25–28 ST IN channel strip 1–4 When you click the / buttons at the left and right of the box, the corresponding name is displayed in the box at the right. You can change the name of the MIDI remote channel by clicking the button of the box at right. 7 118 Use the MIDI message boxes in the lower part of the screen to specify a MIDI message for each controller of the channel. The lower part of the MIDI REMOTE screen contains MIDI message boxes that let you assign a MIDI message to the ENCODER [ON] key, encoder, CH [ON] key, and fader. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section In this window you can input a message by clicking the desired input box to select it (the box will be highlighted) and turning the [DATA] encoder. You can use the [INC]/[DEC] keys to move the selected position. You can input the following values. Value Available assignments Content 00(H)– FF(H) All The MIDI message that is transmitted (hexadecimal). All Indicates the end of the MIDI message. When you operate the corresponding controller, the MIDI message from the beginning until immediately before END will be transmitted. All Indicates the on/off status of the encoder [ON] key or the channel [ON] key. A value of 7F(H) is transmitted when the key turns on, and a value of 00(H) is transmitted when the key turns off. If this is assigned to an encoder or fader, the current value of the key will be transmitted when the encoder or fader is operated. ENCODER ON/ ENCODER Indicates the current position of the encoder. If assigned to an encoder, a value of 00–7F(H) is transmitted when the encoder is operated. If assigned to an encoder [ON] key, the current value of the encoder is transmitted when the key is switched on. CH ON/ FADER Indicates the current position of the fader. If the message is assigned to a fader, this value is transmitted as a value of 00–7F(H) when the fader is operated. If assigned to a CH [ON] key, the current value of the fader is transmitted when the key is switched on. END SW ENC FAD If you set a value to SW, ENC, or FAD, that value will be linked to the state of the controller. For example if you have made settings as shown in the following screen, the last value will be linked with the fader position, and will change in the range of 0–127. When you have finished inputting data in the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window, click the OK button. The hexadecimal values will be input in the MIDI message box of the MIDI REMOTE screen. Hexadecimal values that were input B Specifying the type of message In this method you specify the desired MIDI channel, type of message, and data value; these will be converted into the appropriate hexadecimal values. Access the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window in the same way as for method 1, and click the first box into which you want to input data. Next, click the / buttons at the left and right of the TYPE box to select the type of message. You can use the following buttons to input or edit the message in this window. buttons Move the highlighted area to left or right. INS button Inserts a space (blank) at the highlighted position. Pressing the <Insert> key of a PS/2 keyboard will produce the same result. DEL button Deletes the character at the highlighted position. Pressing the <Delete> key of a PS/2 keyboard will produce the same result. CLEAR button Erases the entire message that was input in the MIDI message input boxes. PASTE button Pastes the message that was copied to buffer memory by the COPY button. COPY button Copies the message from the MIDI message input box to temporary buffer memory. Use this in conjunction with the PASTE button to copy a message from one controller to another bank or controller. Type of message Then use the MIDI CH, DATA 1, and DATA 2 boxes to specify the MIDI channel and various values. The values that can be selected in the MIDI CH, DATA 1, and DATA 2 boxes will depend on the type of message you selected first. TYPE MIDI CH DATA 1 Note-off velocity (0–127) NOTE OFF Note number (0–127) NOTE ON KEY PRESSURE CONTROL CHANGE DATA 2 Note-on velocity (0–127) Pressure value (0–127) 1–16 Control number (0–127) PROGRAM CHANGE Program number CHANNEL PRESSURE Pressure value (0–127) PITCH BEND Pitch bend MSB (0–127) EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE Controller value (0–127) — 16 Remote control When you click a box in which a hexadecimal value has been input, the range of values that can be interpreted as a valid MIDI message (including that box) will turn red. The lower part of the screen shows the MIDI channel (MIDI CH), message type (TYPE), and data values (DATA 1, DATA 2) for this MIDI message, letting you verify that the appropriate MIDI message has been input. Pitch bend LSB (0–127) — If you set the DATA 1 or DATA 2 value to SWITCH, ENCODER (available only for encoders), or FADER (available only for faders), that value will be linked with the state of the controller. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 119 16 Remote control When you have specified all of the values, click the “ ” button in the screen; the hexadecimal values for that message will be input in the input box of the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window. As necessary, you can edit the message by clicking an input box and turning the [DATA] encoder. Hexadecimal values that were input C Using the LEARN button The LEARN button lets you assign a MIDI message to a controller by receiving that message from an external device. To use the Learn function, go to the MIDI REMOTE screen and click the LEARN button in for the controller to which you want to assign a message. Note • Only one LEARN button can be turned on simultaneously. • The LEARN button is valid only for the MIDI remote channel that is currently selected. Also, you cannot change the MIDI remote channel while this button is on. • The LEARN button is turned off automatically when you switch to a different screen. 8 Assign messages to other MIDI remote channels or other banks in the same way. If a specific byte is set to “SW” for the ENCODER [ON] key or CH [ON] key, use the LATCH button to select one of the following behaviors. • If the LATCH button is on The on/off status will change each time you press the key (Latched). If you press the key from the Off state, a MIDI message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be transmitted, and when you press the same key once again a MIDI message with 00(H) as the SW value will be transmitted. • If the LATCH button is off The switch will be on only while you are holding it down, and will turn off when you release it (Unlatched). The moment you press the key, a MIDI message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be transmitted; the moment you release the key, a MIDI message with a SW value of 00(H) will be transmitted. If a specific byte is set to “ENC” (or “FAD”) for the ENCODER [ON] key or CH [ON] key, use the LATCH button to select one of the following behaviors. • If the LATCH button is on If you press the key from the Off state, a MIDI message with the current value of the encoder (or fader) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted, and when you press the same key once again a MIDI message with 00(H) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted. • If the LATCH button is off The moment you press the key, a MIDI message with the current value of the encoder (or fader) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted, and the moment you release the key a MIDI message with 00(H) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted. If a MIDI message is received at a MIDI port available for the current bank while the LEARN button is on, the received message will be input to the MIDI input box. The following screen shows an example of when the modulation wheel (control change #1) of a synthesizer is operated. Hint • MIDI messages assigned using the LEARN button can be a maximum of 16 bytes long (the 17th and subsequent bytes are discarded). If the message is less than 16 bytes long, END will be placed immediately after the last data value. • If a control change is received, the third byte will automatically be replaced by FAD (if the assignment destination is a fader), ENC (if the assignment destination is an encoder), or SW (if the assignment destination is an encoder [ON] or CH [ON] key). • If multiple messages are received while the LEARN button is on, the last-received message will be used. If the status byte is omitted from the last message, the appropriate status byte will be supplied. 120 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Note If SW/ENC/FAD are not specified as the last byte of the MIDI message, the same MIDI message will be transmitted when the key is turned on or off. (The same message will be transmitted when the key is turned off.) Using MIDI remote channels Here’s how to recall banks A–D to which you assigned MIDI messages, and operate MIDI remote channels. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the following MIDI REMOTE screen. MIDI REMOTE BANK SELECT area 2 In the BANK SELECT area at the upper right of the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the bank you want to use. 3 In the upper middle of the screen, use the ASSIGN TO CH STRIP SECTION buttons to select the MIDI remote channel you want to control. (Multiple simultaneous selections are allowed.) INPUT CH INPUT channel strip 1–24 STIN/FXRTN ST IN/FX RTN channel strip 1–4 Operate the appropriate channel strip. MIDI messages will be transmitted from the corresponding MIDI port. 5 To disable the MIDI Remote function, turn off the ASSIGN TO CH STRIP SECTION buttons. Note • When the MIDI Remote function is enabled, the controllers will return to their normal state if you switch to another screen. However when you come back to the MIDI REMOTE screen, the remote function of the controllers will be enabled. • The controller values during MIDI Remote operation are included in the scene data. This means that when you recall a scene, the controller values will change and MIDI messages will be transmitted. Recall Safe settings can also be applied to the MIDI Remote function This setting applies to all four banks. Turning on a button will enable the MIDI Remote function; the corresponding channel strip will function as MIDI remote channels. (The usual function of the controllers will be disabled.) At this time, the lower part of the display will indicate “REMOTE” in the encoder/fader mode area. The INPUT CH layer and ST IN/FX RTN layer indications will change to the corresponding MIDI remote channel. 16 Encoder/fader mode area INPUT CH layer Remote control 1 4 ST IN/FX RTN layer PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 121 16 Remote control Transmitting MIDI events when you switch scenes You can register a desired MIDI message for each scene in scene memory so that this message will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector when you recall the scene. For example you can use this to switch programs on an external MIDI-compatible effect processor when the scene changes. 1 Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the PM5D to the MIDI IN connector of the external device. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [SCENE] key several times to access the SCENE screen shown below. 5 Click the button at the left edge of the MIDI EVENT column to open the MIDI EVENT SETUP window. 6 Use the MIDI EVENT SETUP window to specify the MIDI message that will be linked with that scene. The procedure for specifying a MIDI message in the MIDI EVENT SETUP window is the same as in the MIDI REMOTE screen MIDI REMOTE SETUP window, with the exceptions that you cannot select FAD, ENC, or SW for the DATA 1/DATA 2 boxes, and that there is no LEARN button. (For details, refer to ➥ p.118) When you have finished making settings, click the OK button in the MIDI EVENT SETUP window. 7 Click the Tx ON/OFF column located at the right of the MIDI EVENT column to turn it on. The MIDI event linked to the corresponding scene is now enabled. 8 In the same way, specify MIDI events for other scene numbers. 9 Recall a scene to which a MIDI event is linked. The MIDI message will be transmitted from the specified MIDI port. SCENE 3 Scroll the scene list upward or downward to select the scene number for which you want to assign a MIDI event. 4 Scroll the scene list toward the right to display the MIDI EVENT column. MIDI EVENT column In the MIDI EVENT column you will input the MIDI message that will be transmitted when you recall that scene. 122 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Using GPI (General Purpose Interface) The GPI connector on the rear panel can be used as a GPI (General Purpose Interface) input/output connector. This connector provides four GPI IN ports and twelve GPI OUT ports. For example you can use an external switch or joystick to control the PM5D’s parameters, or conversely use the PM5D’s keys and faders to send control signals to an external device. The following diagram is an example of an external circuit that can operate GPI via the GPI connector. (For specifications of the GPI connector pins, refer to the Appendices p.348 and p.355 at the end of the manual.) 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 GPO 1 9 GPO 2 1 21 3 21 24 9 GPO 5 9 16 9 12 21 10 21 4 21 25 9 23 1 Connect an external device to the PM5D’s GPI connector. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the GPI screen shown below. 15 GPI IN list 17 GPI GPO 12 GPI 3 6 You can use the GPI IN ports of the GPI connector to control PM5D parameters from an external device. For example you can use an external switch to turn the PM5D’s talkback on/off or to operate its Tap Tempo function, or you can use a joystick to control surround panning. GPO 8 GPO 11 GPI 2 18 GPO 4 2 GPO 7 GPO 10 GPI 1 22 9 GPO 6 GPO 9 21 GPO 3 14 Using GPI IN 13 GPI 4 19 11 7 This circuit uses four switches (GPI 1–GPI 4) to switch the GPI IN ports between active and inactive. If the polarity of a GPI OUT port is set to Low Active, and you operate the PM5D to make the GPI OUT port Active, the corresponding LED in the above circuit (GPO 1–GPO 12) will light. (If the polarity of the GPI OUT port is High Active, the LED will go dark.) GPI OUT list In this screen, the upper list is used to make GPI IN settings and the lower list is used to make GPI OUT settings. 3 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 16 Remote control In the POLARITY column of the GPI IN list, select the polarity of each GPI IN port. You can select one of the following as the polarity for a GPI IN port. • (Low active) When controlling an on/off switch-type parameter, the port will become active when the switch is grounded. When controlling a continuously-variable parameter, that parameter will be at its maximum value when the voltage is at low level (by default, 0V), and at its minimum value when the voltage is at high level (by default, approximately 5V). • (High active) When controlling an on/off switch-type parameter, the port will be active when the switch is opened or when a high-level voltage is input. 123 16 Remote control When controlling a continuously-variable parameter, that parameter will be at its minimum value when the voltage is at low level, and at its maximum value when the voltage is at high level. GPI IN status FUNCTION column PARAMETER column POLARITY column FUNCTION PARAMETER LATCH UNLATCH Switches the Talkback function on/off (unlatched operation) CH ONLATCH [channel name] Switches the channel on/off (latched operation) CH ONUNLATCH [channel name] Switches the channel on/off (unlatched operation) FADER LEVEL [channel name] Modifies the fader value (LEVEL parameter) according to the voltage FRONT-REAR PAN [SEL] Modifies the surround panning (front/rear) of the selected channel according to the voltage LEFT-RIGHT PAN [SEL] Modifies the surround panning (left/right) of the selected channel according to the voltage FRONT-REAR PAN [ODD] Modifies the surround panning (front/rear) of the selected odd-numbered channel according to the voltage LEFT-RIGHT PAN [ODD] Modifies the surround panning (left/right) of the selected odd-numbered channel according to the voltage FRONT-REAR PAN [EVEN] Modifies the surround panning (front/rear) of the selected even-numbered channel according to the voltage LEFT-RIGHT PAN [EVEN] Modifies the surround panning (left/right) of the selected even-numbered channel according to the voltage USER DEFINED KEY FUNCTION [User Defined key bank / key number] While the external input is active, executes the same operation as when the selected User Defined key is pressed USER DEFINED KEY LED [User Defined key bank / key number] While the external input is active, lights the LED of the selected User Defined key TALKBACK ON While the GPI screen is displayed, the GPI IN status column of the GPI IN area will show a yellow bar graph to indicate the approximate value of the voltage being input to each port. (If the bar is not shown, the voltage is grounded; if the bar is displayed all the way to the right edge, the voltage is at high level.) Hint The voltage value at which the PM5D detects High or Low level can be adjusted to suit the external controller (except for external switches) you are using (➥ p.125). 4 At the left edge of the FUNCTION column, click the button to open the GPI IN PORT ASSIGN window. SURROUND PAN PEAK HOLD ON In the GPI IN PORT ASSIGN window you can select the PM5D function that will be controlled by each GPI IN port. Use the FUNCTION column to select the type of function, and use the PARAMETER column to select the optional parameters. You can select the following functions and parameters. FUNCTION NO ASSIGN MONITOR 124 PARAMETER — PM5D operation No assignment DIMMER ON Switches the Dimmer function on/off SOURCE = [monitor source name] Switches the monitor source MONO ON Switches the Monitor section [MONO] key on PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section PM5D operation Switches the Talkback function on/off (latched operation) OSCILLATOR ON SOLO ON Switches the Peak Hold function on/off — Switches the Oscillator on/off Switches the Solo function on/off After you have specified the function and parameter, click the OK button. Note • If latched operation is selected, the port will change between active/inactive each time a trigger is input from an external switch. In this case, we recommend that you use a non-locking type of external switch. • If unlatched operation is selected, the port will be active only while the signal from the external switch stays at high level or low level. In this case, we recommend that you use either a non-locking or a locking type of external switch as appropriate for your situation. Specify the function and parameter for other GPI IN ports in the same way. With these settings when you operate an external device to make the GPI IN port active, the corresponding PM5D function will be executed. (If a continuously-variable parameter is assigned, the parameter value will vary according to the change in voltage.) 4 Turn on the CALIBRATION button. The red line (or red square) in the GPI IN monitor area will temporarily disappear, and only the yellow symbol will remain. 5 If you are calibrating only one GPI IN port, vary the voltage of the signal being input to the GPI IN port specified in step 3 from the maximum value to the minimum value. The yellow symbol will move up/down or left/right as the voltage changes. The red line will extend according to this change, and the maximum and minimum voltage values for the corresponding GPI IN port will be stored. 6 If you are calibrating a joystick, move the joystick through a 360-degree path. The yellow symbol will rotate. The red square will broaden accordingly, and the maximum and minimum voltage values of the GPI IN ports corresponding to the X-axis and Y-axis will be stored. 7 Turn off the CALIBRATION button. The maximum and minimum voltage values detected will be remembered as the reference values for the High and Low levels. (When controlling a continuously variable parameter, the maximum value and minimum value of that parameter will be aligned with these reference values.) Hint The settings in the GPI screen apply to all scenes. These settings can also be saved on a memory card as SETUP data. Calibrating the GPI IN ports If necessary, the voltage values at which the PM5D detects Low and High levels can be adjusted appropriately for the voltage of the signals being input from the GPI IN port. You can use this to set the variable range of a PM5D parameter to match the range of voltage change produced by a continuously-variable controller (such as a joystick). 1 Connect an external device to the PM5D’s GPI connector. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the GPI screen. 3 In the GPI IN MONITOR area at the upper right of the screen, select the GPI IN port that you want to calibrate. If you are calibrating a two-dimensional controller such as a joystick, click the / buttons at the left and right of the X-AXIS and Y-AXIS fields to specify the two GPI IN ports. If you are calibrating only one GPI IN port, set one of them to “----” (no assignment). Hint The results of calibration apply to all scenes. They are also preserved even when the PM5D is powered-off. When you specify a GPI IN port, the voltage from that GPI IN port is indicated by a yellow symbol in the GPI IN monitor area. In this case, the horizontal position (X-axis) corresponds to the voltage of the GPI IN port selected in the X-AXIS field, and the vertical position (Y-axis) corresponds to the voltage of the GPI IN port selected in the Y-AXIS field. The red line (or red square) displayed in the GPI IN monitor area indicates the range between High level and Low level for the GPI IN ports corresponding to the Y-axis and X-axis. 16 Remote control 5 Hint If necessary, you can click the REVERSE button to invert the Low level and High level of the input signal. (The result is the same as switching the POLARITY setting of the GPI IN port.) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 125 16 Remote control ❏ FADER START Using GPI OUT Here’s how you can use the GPI OUT ports of the GPI connector to control an external device from the PM5D’s faders or keys. 1 To the PM5D’s GPI connector, connect the external device that you want to control from the PM5D. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the GPI screen. 3 In the POLARITY column of the GPI OUT area, select the polarity of the signal that is output from each GPI OUT port. The POLARITY column of the GPI OUT area selects one of the following two settings as the polarity of the signal that is output when the GPI OUT port becomes active. • (Low active) Grounded when the GPI OUT port is active. • (High active) Open when the GPI OUT port is active. GPI OUT status TEST button USER DEFINED KEYS column A fader operation on the PM5D will be the trigger for outputting a signal from the GPI OUT port. To edit the setting, click the button at the left to open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select the fader mode (trigger detection method) and channel. You can select the following fader modes. • FADER START A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves from –60 dB or below to above –60 dB. • FADER STOP A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches –∞ dB. • FADER TALLY A control signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves from –60 dB or below to above –60 dB. This control signal will be held until the fader reaches –∞ dB (or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger). The following illustration shows how the output signal from the GPI OUT port changes when you operate a fader in each of the fader modes. (This illustration shows operation when is selected as the POLARITY of the GPI OUT port. If POLARITY is , the polarity of the output signal will be the opposite.) ➪ TALLY column ➪ ➪ ➠ In the GPI OUT area, use the FADER START, USER DEFINED KEYS, and TALLY columns to select the PM5D function for GPI OUT ports 1 through 12. When an operation selected here is executed on the PM5D, the corresponding GPI OUT port will become active, and a control signal will be output. For each GPI OUT port you can select the following three functions (multiple selections are allowed). ➠ ➠ POLARITY column 4 ➪ ➠ FADER START column ➪ FADER START 250 msec FADER STOP 250 msec FADER TALLY Note When the voltage is at High level, the output signal of the port will be open. If the receiving device requires High level, it can be taken from the +5 power supply pin. However in this case there is a limitation on the current flow; for details, refer to the Appendices at the end of this manual. 126 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section ❏ USER DEFINED KEYS ❏ TALLY (other) Operation of a User Defined key on the PM5D will be the trigger for outputting a signal from the GPI OUT port. To edit the setting, click the button at the left to open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window; from the list, select the User Defined key bank (A–D) and number (1–25), and choose the trigger mode (how the trigger will operate when the key is pressed). You can choose one of the following trigger modes. • LATCH Alternate between active and inactive each time the key is pressed. • UNLATCH Active only while the key remains pressed. The following illustration shows how the output signal from the GPI OUT port changes when you operate a User Defined key in each of the trigger modes. (This illustration shows operation when is selected as the POLARITY of the GPI OUT port. If POLARITY is , the polarity of the output signal will be the opposite.) Other operations on the PM5D will be the trigger for outputting a signal from the GPI OUT port. When the corresponding operation is executed on the PM5D, a control signal will be output. This control signal will be held until you defeat the above operation (or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger). To edit the settings, click the button at the left to open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select one of the following functions. UNLATCH PM5D operation NO ASSIGN No assignment POWER ON The PM5D’s power is turned on SOLO ON [SOLO] key is turned on GPI IN 1 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 1 becomes active GPI IN 2 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 2 becomes active GPI IN 3 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 3 becomes active GPI IN 4 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 4 becomes active PREVIEW ON SCENE MEMORY section [PREVIEW] key is turned on CUE ON [INPUT ONLY] Input channel [CUE] key is turned on CUE ON [DCA ONLY] DCA [CUE] key is turned on CUE ON [OUTPUT ONLY] Output channel [CUE] key is turned on CUE ON Any [CUE] key is turned on 5 Make settings for other GPI OUT ports in the same way. With these settings, executing an operation assigned to the GPI OUT port will output a control signal according to the POLARITY setting. You can use the TEST buttons in the GPI OUT area to check the operation of the GPI OUT ports. When a TEST button is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will become active, and a control signal will be output. The GPI OUT status column indicates the status of the output signal of the corresponding port. The characters L/H indicate the Low or High level of the signal. The background color is yellow when active, and gray when inactive. 16 Remote control LATCH Function PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 127 17 Using memory cards 17 Using memory cards This chapter explains how to save/load PM5D internal data using a memory card. Using memory cards with the PM5D You can insert a commercially available memory card into the memory card slot located on the front panel of the PM5D, and use it to save or load various types of data. MEMORY CARD You can use PCMCIA Type II PC flash ATA cards, or CompactFlash media inserted in a PC card adaptor. (In either case, media with a power supply voltage of 3.3V or 5V is supported.) Normally, these cards are sold in an already-formatted state. This means that you won’t need to format them before using them with the PM5D. If you do need to format a card, use a computer or other external device to format the card in FAT16 format. Note Operation is not guaranteed for any type of media other than described above. MEMORY CARD MOUSE KEYBOARD PHONES Saving files to a memory card Here’s how to save individual items of data (or all data) from the PM5D onto a memory card. 1 Insert the memory card into the memory card slot located on the front panel of the PM5D. You may insert or remove cards while the PM5D is powered-on. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key to access the SAVE screen. MODE area 3 In the MODE area, click the BASIC button to select BASIC as the save mode. If BASIC mode is selected, you can choose the desired item (or all items) and save them to a memory card. Hint The other save modes provided are ADVANCED mode which lets you save scene memories or libraries under different numbers, and CSV EXPORT mode which lets you save the names of scene memories or libraries as a CSV format file. For details, refer to the Reference section (➥ p.193). SAVE 4 Use the buttons below the MODE area to select the item you want to save. The item whose button is turned on is selected for saving. (You can turn on only one button.) By clicking the ALL DATA button you can select all items at once. These buttons correspond to the following items. Button SAVE button File list In the left side of the SAVE screen you can select the save mode and the item(s) that will be saved. The file list in the right side of the screen contains four columns; FILE NAME, TYPE, DATE/SIZE, and COMMENT. This list shows the files and directories on the memory card. (To see the COMMENT column, scroll the list toward the right.) 128 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Content ALL DATA All items, and the contents of the current scene SCENE MEMORY Contents of scene memory LINKED LIBRARY Libraries linked to the scene (available only if the SCENE MEMORY button is on) HA Contents of the HA library INPUT PATCH Contents of the input patch library OUTPUT PATCH Contents of the output patch library INPUT CH Contents of the input channel library OUTPUT CH Contents of the output channel library INPUT EQ Contents of the input EQ library OUTPUT EQ Contents of the output EQ library GATE Contents of the gate library COMP Contents of the compressor library EFFECT Contents of the effect library If the file list contains a directory above the current level, it will be shown as “. .” in the FILE NAME column and “[DIR]” in the TYPE column. Content GEQ Contents of the GEQ library SETUP Various settings not saved in a scene USER DEFINED KEY User Defined key settings DCA FADER MODE DCA fader mode settings MIDI REMOTE MIDI remote settings MIDI PGM TABLE Contents of the list in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen MIDI CTRL TABLE Contents of the list in the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen EVENT LIST Contents of the list in the EVENT LIST screen A directory above the current level To move to a higher directory, click the directory line to select it (that line will move to the center of the list), and click the “. .” shown in the FILE NAME column. If you select the SCENE MEMORY, HA, INPUT PATCH, or OUTPUT PATCH items, you can specify the starting number and ending number so that only the desired range of scenes or library items will be saved. The LINKED LIBRARY button is available only if the SCENE MEMORY button is on. Hint • The directory currently selected as the save destination is also shown in the FILE PATH field above the list • If you want to create a new directory in the current location, click the MAKE DIR button below the file list. Hint The TOTAL SIZE field at the bottom of the MODE area indicates the file size for the selected item(s). The available capacity of the inserted memory card is shown below the file list. 5 If you selected scenes or libraries for saving, use the boxes at the right of the button to specify the starting number and ending number. Starting number • The file list can display only up to one hundred items. • Saving is not possible if the FILE PATH field exceeds 60 characters (including the filename extension). 7 After specifying the item to be saved and the save-destination directory, click the SAVE button. The FILE NAME EDIT window will appear, allowing you to assign a name to the data that will be saved. 8 Use the character palette to input a filename, and click the OK button. A window will ask you to confirm the Save operation. Ending number Scene/library name 6 Note As necessary, use the file list to select the directory (folder) in which you will save the data. If the file list contains a directory below the current level, the TYPE column will indicate “[DIR].” Using memory cards Button Note • When assigning a name to a file on a memory card, lowercase alphabetical characters and some symbols in the character palette cannot be used. • If you paste text copied from another character palette when inputting the file name, all lowercase alphabetical characters will be converted to uppercase. 17 A directory below the current level To move to a lower directory, click the directory line to select it (that line will move to the center of the list), and click the directory name shown in the FILE NAME column. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 129 17 Using memory cards 9 To execute the Save operation, click the OK button. A window will appear, indicating the progress of the Save operation. When saving is completed, the previous screen will reappear. If you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, the Save operation will be aborted and you will return to the previous screen. Do not insert or remove the memory card while it is being accessed. A BUSY indicator at the upper right of the display will light while the card is being accessed. Loading files from a memory card Here’s how to load data from a memory card into the PM5D. 1 Insert the memory card containing the data you want to load into the memory card slot located on the front panel of the PM5D. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key to access the LOAD screen. LOAD MODE area The file list shows the following information. • FILE NAME column This column shows the names of the files saved on the memory card. If a directory is selected, the directory name is shown. • TYPE column This column shows the content that was saved. The indication in the TYPE column will be one of the following. ALL A file in which all items were saved [DIR] A directory UNKNOWN A file that cannot be loaded by the PM5D Other A file in which a specific item was saved Hint For scene memory data, the type can be either “SCENE” in which only scene memory data is saved, and “SCENE+LIB” in which linked libraries are included. File list 3 4 LOAD button As necessary, use the file list to specify the load-source directory. Navigation between directories is the same as in the file list of the SAVE screen (➥ p.129). The currently selected directory is also shown in the FILE PATH field above the list In the file list, click the line showing the file you want to load. That file will move to the center of the list, and will be highlighted. • DATE/SIZE column This shows the date on which the file was last saved, and its size. If a directory is selected, only the date is shown. • COMMENT column This shows the comment assigned when the file was saved. To input a comment, scroll the file list horizontally and click the COMMENT column for the currently selected file. Hint By clicking the headings at the top of the list, you can sort the list in ascending or descending order of that item. The text of the currently selected button will turn red, and an arrow indicating ascending (↑) or descending (↓) order will appear. 5 In the MODE area, click the BASIC button to select BASIC as the loading mode. Similarly to the Save mode in the SAVE screen, you can choose either BASIC, ADVANCED, or CSV IMPORT as the Load mode. If BASIC mode is selected, the item buttons appropriate for the currently selected file will turn on. Hint FILE NAME column 130 TYPE column DATE/SIZE column PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section • If ADVANCED mode is selected, you can specify the range of scenes or library numbers that will be loaded from a scene memory and/or library file saved in BASIC mode or ADVANCED mode. • If CSV IMPORT is selected, you can load CSV files that were saved in CSV EXPORT mode. For details on each mode, refer to the Reference section (➥ p.193). Note • If you select a directory in the file list, the Load mode will automatically switch to CSV IMPORT, and the screen will indicate whether that directory contains any CSV files. If you subsequently select any file readable by the PM5D other than a CSV file, the mode will automatically switch to BASIC. • If the type of file to be loaded is ALL DATA, the entire contents of the PM5D’s scene memories and libraries will be rewritten. Before loading, make sure you are not accidentally overwriting important scenes or library data. 6 When loading scenes or libraries, you can click the / buttons at the left and right of the boxes beside each button to select the scene or library numbers that will be loaded. 7 Click the LOAD button. A window will ask you to confirm the Load operation. 8 To execute the Load operation, click the OK button. A window will appear, indicating the progress of the Load operation. When loading is completed, the previous screen will reappear. If you click the CANCEL button instead of the OK button, the Load operation will be aborted and you will return to the previous screen. Using memory cards Do not insert or remove the memory card while it is being accessed. A BUSY indicator at the upper right of the display will light while the card is being accessed. 17 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 131 18 Surround pan 18 Surround pan This chapter explains how to use the surround pan functionality. About surround pan “Surround pan” is functionality that, when used with a multi-channel playback system, lets you place the signal of an input channel in two-dimensional space or move the sound image between front/back and left/right. (To move the surround pan image, you can use the mouse, the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys, or the MIX encoders etc.) The PM5D lets you choose from the following three surround modes, depending on the number of channels in your surround environment. • 3-1ch This mode uses four channels; left and right front, front center, and rear (surround). Front L Center • 6.1ch This mode uses seven channels; 5.1ch with the addition of rear center. Subwoofer Front R Front L Center Rear L Rear center Front R Rear (surround) Rear R • 5.1ch This mode uses six channels; left and right front, left and right rear, front center, and subwoofer. Hint Subwoofer Front L Center Rear L 132 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual The surround mode can be selected in the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function) or SURR SETUP screen (MATRIX/ST function). Front R Rear R Operating section Bus configuration and operation in surround mode When any of the three surround modes (3-1ch, 5.1ch, 6.1ch) are selected, the PM5D’s bus configuration and operation will change as follows. About the surround buses How the MIX section will operate While a surround mode is selected, MIX buses 1–8 or MIX buses 9–16 can be used as surround buses. (The choice of whether to use MIX buses 1–8 or MIX buses 9–16 is made in the MATRIX/ST function SURR SETUP screen.) When you switch the surround mode, the following surround channels will be assigned by default to each of the MIX buses. (You are free to change these assignments subsequently.) Surround mode MIX bus 3-1ch 5.1ch L (Front L) MIX bus 2/10 R (Front R) 1 MIX bus 3/11 C (Center) Ls (Rear L) MIX bus 4/12 S (Surround) Rs (Rear R) MIX bus 6/14 MIX bus 7/15 ❏ If the MIX section [MIX SEND] key is on 6.1ch MIX bus 1/9 MIX bus 5/13 When a surround mode is selected, the MIX encoders allocated to surround buses will operate differently than normal. For example if MIX buses 1–8 are being used as surround buses, you can use MIX encoders 1–8 of the MIX section to edit the following parameters. 4 5 Moves the surround pan of the selected channel between left and right. B F↔R Bs (Rear center) LFE (Subwoofer) MIX bus 8/16 Note MIX buses shaded in gray in this table can be used as conventional MIX buses. However in 6.1ch mode, the MIX 8/16 bus will operate only as FIXED type. For example when the surround mode is 6.1ch and you have chosen MIX 1–8 to use as the surround buses, the surround pan signal flow will be as follows. 3 A L↔R C (Center) LFE (Subwoofer) 2 Moves the surround pan of the selected channel between front and rear. C Front divergence (5.1ch and 6.1ch modes only) Adjusts the front divergence (the proportion at which a signal panned to the center will be sent to the front center bus and to the front LR buses) of the selected channel. Front divergence (the DIV F parameter) can be adjusted if 6.1ch mode is being used. D Rear divergence (6.1ch mode only) Adjusts the rear divergence (the proportion at which a signal panned to the rear will be sent to the rear center bus and to the rear LR buses) of the selected channel. E LFE (5.1ch and 6.1ch modes only) Adjusts the send level of the signal sent from the selected channel to the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) bus. Input channel 1 Hint Surround pan • For details on each of the surround pan parameters, refer to SURR PARAM screen (➥ p.283) in the Reference section. • If MIX buses 9–16 are being used as surround buses, you can use MIX encoders 9–16 to perform the above operations. Input channel 2 18 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 133 18 Surround pan ❏ If the MIX section [MIX MASTER] key is on A Output level The encoders adjust the output level of each surround channel. 1 Basic settings for surround buses Here’s how to choose either 3-1ch, 5.1ch, or 6.1ch as the surround mode, and make settings for the MIX buses you will use as surround buses. 1 According to the surround mode you intend to use, connect an appropriate playback system to MIX OUT jacks 1–8 or MIX OUT jacks 9–16. 2 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [MATRIX/ST] key to access the SURR SETUP screen. In order to use a surround mode, you will first choose a surround mode, and then specify the MIX buses that will be the surround output destinations. SURR SETUP SURROUND MODE area 3 Click the OK button to enable the surround mode you selected. For example if you switch to 6.1ch mode, the screen display will change as follows. SURR SETUP SURROUND BUS ALLOCATION area Bus assign area Click a button in the SURROUND MODE area to select the desired surround mode. When you click a button a window will appear, asking you to confirm that you want to switch the surround mode. 4 In the SURROUND BUS ALLOCATION area, press the MIX 1-8 button or the MIX 9-16 button to select the MIX buses you want to use as surround buses. You can select either MIX buses 1–8 or MIX buses 9– 16. When you click a button a window will appear, asking you to confirm that you want to change the MIX bus allocation. When you click the OK button, the selected MIX buses will be allocated as surround buses, and will be assigned to surround channels according to the current surround mode. 5 If you want to change the surround channel assignments, click the / buttons at the left and right of each field in the bus assign area, and press the [ENTER] key (or click within the box) to confirm the setting. When the setting is confirmed, the previously-selected bus and the newly-assigned bus will be exchanged. Hint You can initialize the surround channel assignments by clicking the INIT button located at the right of the bus assign area. 134 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 6 Use the knobs and buttons in the lower part of the screen to adjust the volume, delay, on/off status, and cue for each surround channel. For details on these knobs and buttons, refer to SURR PARAM screen (➥ p.283) in the Reference section. 7 In the MIX section, make the [MIX MASTER] key light, and turn on the MIX [ON] keys of all MIX buses that will be used as surround buses. The signal of each surround bus is now sent from the corresponding MIX OUT jack. Controlling surround pan Here’s how to control surround pan for two adjacent input channels (or ST IN/FX RTN channels L and R). Note • Before you continue with the following procedure, you must select the desired surround mode and connect MIX OUT jacks 1–8 or MIX OUT jacks 9–16 to an appropriate playback system, as described in “Basic settings for surround buses” (➥ p.134). • If you use 5.1ch or 6.1ch surround mode, connect the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) channel signal to a dedicated subwoofer for the low frequencies. However, simply switching the surround mode does not change the EQ (filter) settings. As necessary, use the EQ (LPF) of the MIX channel assigned to the LFE channel to cut the high-frequency portion of the signal according to the frequency response of the subwoofer you are using. Use the channel selection area to select the input channels whose surround pan settings you want to edit. Two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels (or ST IN/FX RTN channels L and R) will be displayed. 3 Use the SURROUND BUS ON/OFF buttons located around the surround pan grid to select the surround buses to which the input channel will be sent. The SURROUND BUS ON/OFF buttons are on/off switches for the signal sent from the input channel to each surround bus. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [PAN/ROUTING] key to access the SURR PARAM screen (PAN/ROUTING function). The SURR PARAM screen always shows surround pan settings for two channels. Channel selection SURR PARAM STEREO LINK button Pan buttons Surround pan grid SURROUND BUS ON/OFF buttons Hint You can do the same thing by pressing a [SEL] key to select an input channel, making the MIX section [MIX SEND] key light, and then turning on the MIX [ON] key for the desired surround buses. 4 Use any of the following methods to adjust the surround pan of the selected channel. • Using the mouse or track pad Move the pointer into the surround pan grid of the channel you want to control, and drag the yellow O symbol forward/backward/left/right. (The symbol will turn red while you are dragging it.) Alternatively, you can click a desired location within the surround pan grid to move the surround pan to that location. • Using the pan buttons around the surround pan area If you want to quickly move the channel signal to the location of a speaker, click one of the pan buttons (e.g., L, R, C) shown around the edge of the surround pan grid. • Using the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/[†] keys Move the cursor to the surround pan grid and press the [ENTER] key; the O symbol will turn red. In this condition, you can use the CURSOR [√]/[®] keys to move surround pan left/right, or the CURSOR [π]/[†] keys to move it forward/backward, in a range of eight steps. By performing this operation while holding down the [SHIFT] key, you can quickly move surround pan in a range of 32 steps. To finalize the surround pan adjustment, press the [ENTER] key once again. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Surround pan 1 2 18 135 18 Surround pan • Using the MIX encoders If you turn on the [MIX SEND] key of the MIX section, you can use MIX encoders 1 or 9 to adjust the left/right position of the input channel, and MIX encoders 2 or 10 to adjust the front/rear position. The SURR PARAM screen MIX SECTION ASSIGNMENT area shows the parameters assigned to each MIX encoder. • Using MIDI control changes or GPI If you assign surround pan parameters to MIDI control changes or GPI, you can use an external device to control surround pan. For details, refer to MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen (➥ p.174) and GPI screen (➥ p.177) in the Reference section. 5 136 6 Edit other parameters as desired. In the SURR PARAM screen you can also edit the following parameters. • Divergence These controls specify the proportion at which the signals are sent to each surround bus when the input channel is positioned in the center. The parameters that are displayed will depend on the surround mode that is currently selected. (For details, refer to p.283) • LFE This adjusts the output level of the signal sent from the input channel to the LFE (Low Frequency Effect) bus for a subwoofer. You can also use the ON/OFF button to switch the signal sent from the input channel to the LFE bus on/off. If you want surround pan operations to be linked for two adjacent channels, turn on the STEREO LINK button, and use the box at right to select the link pattern. When you turn on the STEREO LINK button, surround pan will be linked for the two channels shown in the SURR PARAM screen. To specify how they will be linked, select one of the following link patterns by clicking the / buttons at the left and right of the box located to the right of the STEREO LINK button. Pattern 1 The channels will move in the same direction for both the front/rear axis and the left/right axis. Pattern 2 The channels will move in opposite directions for the front/rear axis, and in the same direction for the left/right axis. Pattern 3 The channels will move in the same direction for the front/rear axis, and in opposite directions for the left/right axis. Pattern 4 Left↔right movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with rear↔front movement of the evennumbered channel. Front↔rear movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with left↔right movement of the even-numbered channel. Pattern 5 Left↔right movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with front↔rear movement of the evennumbered channel. Front↔rear movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with left↔right movement of the even-numbered channel. Pattern 6 Front/rear and left/right movement will both be linked in the opposite direction. Pattern 7 Left↔right movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with front↔rear movement of the evennumbered channel. Front↔rear movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with right↔left movement of the even-numbered channel. Pattern 8 Left↔right movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with rear↔front movement of the evennumbered channel. Front↔rear movement of the odd-numbered channel will be linked with left↔right movement of the even-numbered channel. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Hint • The master level of each surround bus is shown in the upper right of the screen. • You can use the SURR VIEW screen to see the surround pan settings of all channels at a glance. Notes regarding surround pan Here are some notes and limitations that you should be aware of when using surround pan. ❏ Scene recall operations • The surround mode selection and the surround pan settings of each channel are stored as part of the scene. • If you recall a scene whose surround mode differs from the current scene, the screen and panel display will change accordingly. The surround mode is recalled regardless of Selective Recall or Recall Safe settings. • If one channel (of a pair of channels) is excluded from recall, and you recall a scene in which the STEREO LINK button is on, the STEREO LINK button will remain on but only the other channel (of the pair) will be recalled. • SURROUND BUS SETUP settings (MIX bus 1-8/9-16 selection, and assignments to each surround channel) are not included in the scene data. ❏ Channel library recall operations • Surround pan related parameters for inputs are stored in the input channel library. • If the STEREO LINK button is on, and you recall input channel library settings, the STEREO LINK button will remain on, but only one channel will be recalled. Subsequent operation will be according to STEREO LINK. ❏ Channel copy • When you copy an input channel using panel operations, surround-related parameters will also be copied. • In order to copy surround-related parameters using the CH COPY screen (INPUT VIEW function), the ALL button must be turned on in the DESTINATION area. ❏ Global paste Surround pan • In order to paste surround-related parameters, the ALL button must be turned on in the CURRENT SCENE area of the GLOBAL PASTE screen (SCENE function). In addition, the settings of the STEREO LINK area will also be pasted if two adjacent channels are selected. 18 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 137 19 Other functions 19 Other functions This chapter explains other functionality of the PM5D not covered elsewhere. Using the user defined keys You can assign the desired functions to the User Defined keys in the USER DEFINED section of the top panel, and press these keys to execute the defined function. Items in the USER DEFINED section BANK SELECT area USER DEFINE 2 In this screen you can make User Defined key assignments for each of four banks; A–D. 2 In the BANK SELECT area at the upper left of the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the bank you want to use. To clear the assignments of the current bank, click the CLEAR BANK button located at the bottom of the BANK SELECT area. 3 Click the button located on the line of the User Defined key you want to assign. The USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN window will appear. In this window you can select a function to assign to the User Defined key, and select option parameters. 4 Select the desired function in the FUNCTION column, select parameters in the PARAMETER 1/2 columns, and click the OK button. For details on the available functions and parameters, refer to the Reference section (➥ p.189). 1 A USER DEFINED [1]–[24] keys B USER DEFINED [25] key These are User Defined keys that execute the assigned function. Assigning functions to the User Defined keys Here’s how to assign the functions that will be executed when the USER DEFINED [1]–[25] keys are pressed. 1 138 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [UTILITY] key repeatedly to access the USER DEFINE screen shown below. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 5 Assign functions to other keys and banks in the same way. Executing functions assigned to the User Defined keys Hint The User Defined key assignments are not saved in the scene. If desired, you can save the assignments on a memory card as USER DEFINED KEY data. Here’s how to use the USER DEFINED [1]–[25] keys to execute the functions that have been assigned to them. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key to access the USER DEFINE screen. 2 In the BANK SELECT area at the upper left of the screen, use the A–D buttons to select the bank (A–D) you want to use. 3 Press a USER DEFINED [1]–[25] key. The function assigned to that key will be executed. Using the Fader Assign function “Fader Assign” is a function that lets you assign the desired channels to the DCA faders 1–8 of the DCA strip in the top panel. For each of six layers A–F, you can specify the channel that is assigned to each fader. For example, you might use this to simultaneously control the send level and return level of an internal effect, or to use a fader as the master fader of a MIX bus or MATRIX bus. For each layer you can specify the channel that is assigned to each fader, and use the FADER MODE section to switch between layers while you operate the faders. Items in the FADER MODE section Assigning channels to DCA faders In the FADER MODE section you can select the combination of channels or DCA groups that will be controlled by DCA faders 1–8. Here’s how to assign the desired channels to the DCA faders 1–8 of the DCA strip section. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key to access the FADER ASSIGN screen. In this screen you can select the channel assigned to each fader in each layer A–F. FADER ASSIGN 1 2 A FADER MODE [A]–[F] keys Other functions If one of these buttons is on, DCA faders 1–8 will control the level of the channels assigned for that layer (A– F). B FADER MODE [DCA] key If this button is on, DCA faders 1–8 will control DCA groups 1–8. 19 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 139 19 Other functions 2 Use the channel selection boxes for the desired layer (A–F) to select the channel assigned to each fader 1–8. Controlling the channels assigned to DCA faders 1 In the FADER MODE section, use the FADER MODE [A]–[F] keys to select the layer you want to use. The key LED will light, and the corresponding layer will become active. If input channels are assigned to the DCA faders, the channel names will appear in the name indicators of the DCA strip. Hint You can also switch layers from within the FADER ASSIGN screen. This screen also shows the values of the DCA faders and their approximate positions. Channel selection box 2 To select a channel, click the / buttons located at the left and right of each box. You can choose from the following channels. Item Selected channel CH 1–CH48 Input channel 1–48 STIN1L/STIN1R–STIN4L/ STIN4R ST IN channel 1–4 L or R FXRTN1L/FXRTN1R– FXRTN4L/FXRTN4R FX RTN channel 1–4 L or R MIX 1–MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 MTRX1–MTRX8 MATRIX channel 1–8 DCA1–8 DCA fader 1–8 Hint • If an input channel or a DCA fader 1–8 is selected, the channel name is displayed immediately below the channel selection box. • Input channels and output channels can coexist in the same layer. 3 Assign channels to other layers in the same way. Hint Fader Assign settings are not saved in the scene. If desired, you can save these settings on a memory card as DCA FADER MODE data. 140 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Operate the faders of the DCA strip. The level of the corresponding channels will change. If a channel assigned to a DCA fader is paired (or if one side of a stereo channel is assigned), the level of the other paired channel (or the other side of the stereo channel) will follow. Note When a FADER MODE [A]–[F] key is on, and channels other than DCA channels are assigned to the DCA faders, the [MUTE] keys of the DCA channel strip are inactive. However, the [CUE] keys can be used to cue-monitor the corresponding channel. Locking the PM5D (Security functions) The PM5D lets you prohibit changes to certain parameters (Parameter Lock), or prohibit operation of the console (Console Lock). For example, this lets you prevent an unauthorized person from operating the console while the engineer is taking a break. You can also apply password protection to the lock function using a “system password” which is remembered even after power-off, or a “console password” which is cleared when the power is turned off. If you specify a system password, both Parameter Lock and Console Lock are available. If you specify a console password, only Console Lock is available. Note Setting the System Password or Console Password • If a password has already been input, you will be requested to input the old password. (The upper left of the window indicates “OLD PASSWORD”.) In this case, input the existing password and click the OK button before you continue to step 3. • If you want to return the system to a condition in which a password has not been specified, input the existing password, click the OK button, and then leave the new password field blank when you execute steps 3–5. Here’s how to set the password used for Parameter Lock and Console Lock. However, it is possible to apply the lock function even if a password has not been specified. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key to access the SECURITY screen. CONSOLE PASSWORD area 3 Use the character palette to input a password of up to eight characters in the NEW PASSWORD text box. The characters you input are displayed as “ * ” (asterisks). Any character of the character palette except for SPACE can be used in a password. (The password is case-sensitive; i.e., uppercase and lowercase alphabetical characters are distinguished.) When inputting a password, the COPY, PASTE, SPACE, INS, ←, and → keys of the character palette cannot be used. 4 Click the OK button. The indication in the upper left of the window will change to “RE-ENTER PASSWORD”. 5 Input the same password once again, and click the OK button. The password will be applied, and you will return to the SECURITY screen. SECURITY SYSTEM PASSWORD area In this screen you can use the SYSTEM PASSWORD and CONSOLE PASSWORD fields located at the left to specify the passwords. (If no password has been specified, the corresponding box will indicate “--FREE--”.) To set the system password, click the button for the SYSTEM PASSWORD field. To set the console password, click the button for the CONSOLE PASSWORD field. A window will appear, and you will be asked to input the new password. (The upper left of the window indicates “NEW PASSWORD.”) As an example, the illustration below shows the SYSTEM PASSWORD CHANGE window where you specify the system password. The console password will be cleared when the PM5D is powered-off. In contrast, the system password is remembered even after the power is turned off. This means that if you forget the system password, you will be unable to defeat Parameter Lock or Console Lock except by initializing the entire memory of the PM5D (➥ p.147). Please be careful not to lose the system password. Other functions 2 Note 19 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 141 19 Other functions Note Using Parameter Lock or Console Lock Here’s how to lock parameters or the console. You can also lock using the password you specified. 1 As long as the PARAMETER LOCK button is on, the above settings cannot be edited. You will need to defeat the lock function before editing them. 3 Depending on the items you want to lock, click either the PARAMETER LOCK button or one of the two CONSOLE LOCK buttons. If a password has been specified, a window will ask you to input the password. If you click the CANCEL button without inputting a password in this window, you will return to the previous screen. 4 Input the password you assigned beforehand, and click the OK button. If you clicked the PARAMETER LOCK button in step 3, a message of “Parameter Locked” will appear briefly, and then editing will be disabled for the selected parameters. If you clicked the CONSOLE LOCK button in step 3, an indication of “CONSOLE LOCKED” will appear on the screen, and all operations other than pressing the UNLOCK button will be disabled. 5 To defeat Parameter Lock, click the PARAMETER LOCK button. To defeat Console Lock, click the UNLOCK button. If a password has been specified, a window will ask you to input the password. Input the password and click the OK button to defeat the lock function. You will return to the screen in which you were prior to applying the security setting. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [UTILITY] key to access the SECURITY screen. LOCK PARAMETER SELECT area SECURITY 2 If you want to lock only specific parameters, use the buttons of the LOCK PARAMETER SELECT area to select the parameters for which you want to prohibit editing. When you click a button, a check mark will appear for the selected item. You can select the following items (multiple selections are allowed). Item 142 Content SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Changes to the settings of the MIXER SETUP screen and CASCADE screen WORD CLOCK SETUP Changes to the word clock setting DITHER Changes to dither-related settings INPUT PATCH Changes to the input patch settings (and names) OUTPUT PATCH Changes to the output patch settings INPUT CH ON/ OFF Input channel on/off operations OUTPUT CH ON/ OFF Output channel on/off operations MIX TO ST ON/ OFF MIX TO STEREO button on/off operations DCA MUTE ON DCA [MUTE] key On operations (Off operations are not included) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Note The console password will be cleared when the PM5D is powered-off. In contrast, the system password is remembered even after the power is turned off. This means that if you forget the system password, you will be unable to defeat Parameter Lock or Console Lock except by initializing the entire memory of the PM5D (➥ p.147). Please be careful not to lose the system password. Using cascade connections Buses can be shared by cascade-connecting multiple PM5D units (up to four) or the PM5D with an external mixer (such as the Yamaha DM2000/02R96). When multiple PM5D units are cascade-connected, operations such as scene store/recall, cue/ solo, and dimmer can also be linked. Making cascade connections Basic settings for cascade connection Here we will explain cascade connections and operation, using an example in which two PM5D units are cascadeconnected. To cascade-connect two PM5D units, connect the CASCADE IN connectors and CASCADE OUT connectors of the two units to each other. This allows the MIX bus, STEREO bus, and CUE bus output signals to be transmitted and received between the two units. ❏ Cascade master 1 Audio signals of units A+B Audio signals of units A+B CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT Here we will explain the basic settings required for a bidirectional cascade connection between two PM5D units; we will provide separate explanations for the cascade master and the cascade slave. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key until the MIXER SETUP screen appears. MIXER SETUP CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT PM5D A PM5D B (cascade master) (cascade slave) If you want operations such as scene store/recall and cue/ solo to be linked between the two PM5D units, specify one unit as the cascade master and the other as the cascade slave. (This setting is made in the SYS/W.CLOCK function MIXER SETUP screen.) The PM5D assigned as the cascade master will output control signals (operational signals) via its CASCADE IN connector, and the PM5D assigned as the cascade slave will receive these signals via its CASCADE OUT connector. Hint CASCADE MODE area • If you want to daisy-chain two to four PM5D units (i.e., connect the first unit’s CASCADE OUT → second unit’s CASCADE IN, and the second unit’s CASCADE OUT → third unit’s CASCADE IN. Up to four units can be connected.), you should assign the PM5D located last in the chain (the PM5D connected only via its CASCADE IN connector) as the cascade master, and the remaining PM5D units as cascade slaves (➥ p.204). • If you want to cascade-connect a PM5D with a Yamaha DM2000 or 02R96, connect the CASCADE OUT connector of the DM2000/02R96 to the CASCADE IN connector of the PM5D. However in this case, it is not possible to link operations. • If you want to cascade-connect the PM5D with any other external mixer, use I/O cards installed in slots 1–4 to send and receive the audio signals (➥ p.202). 2 In the CASCADE MODE area at the lower part of the screen, select “MASTER”. In addition, turn on the BI-DIRECTION button located immediately below it. CASCADE MODE area BI-DIRECTION button Other functions When multiple PM5D units are cascaded, the settings of the CASCADE MODE area specify whether the unit will operate as a cascade master (when “MASTER” is selected) or as a cascade slave (when “SLAVE” is selected). If you turn the BI-DIRECTION button on, the mixed audio signals of both cascade-connected PM5D units will be output from both units. 19 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 143 19 Other functions 3 Select “PM5D” in the CASCADE FROM field and in the CASCADE TO field. through which audio signals will be transmitted to and received from the cascade-connected external device. If “PM5D” or “DM2000/02R96” are selected as the other cascade-connected device, only “CASCADE IN” can be selected for the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field. In the CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT field, you can choose from the output channels of slots 1–4 as well as “CASCADE OUT” (➥ p.203). CASCADE FROM field Hint If you choose a setting other than “CASCADE OUT” in the CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT field, the same signal will be output from both the specified slot/channel and from the CASCADE OUT connector. ❏ Cascade slave 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key to access the MIXER SETUP screen. 2 In the CASCADE MODE area at the lower part of the screen, select “SLAVE”. In addition, turn on the BI-DIRECTION button located immediately below it. 3 Select “PM5D” in the CASCADE FROM field and in the CASCADE TO field. 4 Make sure that “CASCADE IN” is selected in the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field, and “CASCADE OUT” is selected in the CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT field. CASCADE TO field In the CASCADE FROM field, select one of the following as the type of the external device that is sending signals to the PM5D via the cascade connection. Selectable cascade input port Parameter linkage Cascade disabled CASCADE IN, SLOT 4, SLOT 3/4, SLOT1-4 [CH1-8], SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16] Not possible PM5D another PM5D CASCADE IN DM2000 /02R96 YAMAHA DM2000 or 02R96 CASCADE IN MIXER [30BUS] A mixer other than the above (maximum 30 bus) SLOT 3/4, SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8], SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16] MIXER [16BUS] A mixer other than the above (maximum 16 bus) Display — Source device Possible*1 Not possible Selecting the buses used for cascade connection Here we will explain how to select the buses used for the cascade connection, specify the items that will be linked, and enable the cascade connection. Perform the following steps on both the cascade master and cascade slave units. 1 SLOT 4 *1. Linked parameters are specified in the CASCADE screen. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [SYS/W.CLOCK] key until the CASCADE screen shown below appears. CASCADE In the CASCADE TO field, select either “PM5D” or “---” (transmission disabled) as the external device to which the signal will be sent from the PM5D via the cascade connection. 4 Make sure that “CASCADE IN” is selected for the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field, and “CASCADE OUT” is selected for the CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT field. CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT field The CASCADE IN PORT SELECT and CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT fields select the ports 144 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section In this combination you can enable/disable buses used for transmission/reception in the cascade connection, and select the operations that will be linked when multiple PM5D units are cascade-connected. 2 In the CASCADE LINK area at the left of the screen, turn on the buttons for the operations that you want to be linked. Hint DCA and MUTE parameter values will be linked as soon as linking is turned on. CUE/SOLO will be initialized as soon as linking is turned on. Other parameters will be linked only when that parameter is first operated after Link is turned on. 3 In the CASCADE I/O ASSIGN VIEW area, use the CASCADE IN and CASCADE OUT ON/OFF buttons to specify whether each bus will transmit or receive audio signals to or from the external cascade-connected device. CASCADE IN SOURCE area CASCADE IN ON/OFF buttons • • • • • • • • • • The CASCADE IN and CASCADE OUT ON/OFF buttons specify whether signals of each bus will be transmitted to or received from the cascade-connected external device. These settings are made independently for each bus; MIX buses 1–24, STEREO A bus L/R, STEREO B bus L/R, and CUE bus L/R. Buses whose CASCADE IN button is on will receive signals from the external device; buses whose CASCADE OUT button is on will send signals to the external device. The CASCADE IN SOURCE fields indicate each of the source buses. If the other cascade-connected device is a PM5D, these assignments are fixed and cannot be modified. Note • When two PM5D units are cascade-connected, signal transmission and reception is enabled if the CASCADE OUT button of the transmitting unit and the CASCADE IN button of the receiving unit are both turned on for the same bus. • If a device other than the PM5D is selected as the other cascade-connected device, the transmission source indication shown in the CASCADE IN SOURCE field will change (➥ p.205). 4 Set the CASCADE ENABLE/DISABLE button to ENABLE. The cascade connection will be enabled when the CASCADE ENABLE/DISABLE button is set to ENABLE on both the cascade master and the cascade slave. Other functions • The settings of the CASCADE LINK area select the operations that will be linked when multiple PM5D units are cascade-connected. You can select the following items. SCENE RECALL Scene recall operations / Recall undo operations SCENE STORE/EDIT Scene store operations, store undo operations, title editing, sorting CUE/SOLO LOGIC Cue/Solo operations DIMMER ON/OFF Dimmer effect (including talkback dimmer) PAGE CHANGE Switching the display screen DCA FADER MODE Switching the mode of the top panel FADER MODE section ENCODER MODE Switching the mode of the top panel ENCODER MODE section PANEL/LCD BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS settings in the PREFERENCE 2 screen (UTILITY function) INPUT METER POINT/OUTPUT METER POINT/ PEAK HOLD Input channel / output channel metering point selection, and peak hold on/off DCA LEVEL/MUTE DCA group 1–8 level, name, [CUE] key on/off operations, and [MUTE] key on/off operations MUTE MASTER Mute group 1–8 on/off CASCADE OUT ON/OFF buttons Note • Note that linking is enabled only if the LINK buttons for the same item are turned on for both the cascade master unit and the cascade slave unit. • If you have cascade-connected three or more PM5D units in a daisy-chain, you can also turn linking off for the cascade master but on between the cascade slaves. 19 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 145 19 Other functions Connecting the PM5D to a computer via USB The PM5D Editor application can be installed in a computer and used to control the PM5D’s parameters or to backup and restore the contents of the PM5D’s memory. Here we will explain the operations required in order to establish a USB connection between the PM5D and a computer. Note Note The following procedure assumes that the PM5D Editor program and USB driver have already been correctly installed in the computer. For details on installing the program and driver, refer to the Studio Manager installation guide. 1 In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, repeatedly press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key until the MIDI SETUP screen appears. Set the USB port number and PM5D ID number to match the settings in the PM5D Editor. For details, refer to the PM5D Editor owner’s manual. 3 MIDI SETUP Start up PM5D Editor on the computer, and use a USB cable to connect the computer to the PM5D. This enables communication between the computer and the PM5D. For details on operation, refer to the PM5D Editor owner’s manual. Note • If you disconnect or reconnect the USB cable, or powercycle the PM5D, you must close the PM5D Editor and shut down the computer. In some cases, it may not be possible to reconnect with the PM5D until the computer is restarted. • Use a USB cable no longer than 3 meters. Also, connect the PM5D directly to the USB connector of the computer; do not use a USB hub. Caution when using the USB TO HOST connector PM5D EDITOR area 2 In the PM5D EDITOR area at the lower right of the screen, select the port to which the computer is connected, and select the PM5D’s ID number. First use the PORT field to select the port that will be used to communicate with the computer. Click the / buttons located at the left and right of the left box to select the type of port, and press the [ENTER] key (or click inside the box) to finalize your selection. If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, use the box at the right to select a port number 1–8. Next, use the ID field to select an ID number in the range of 1–8 for the PM5D that you want to control. (This number is used to distinguish individual PM5D units when multiple units are being used together.) 146 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual You must observe the following points when connecting the PM5D to your computer via the USB TO HOST connector. If you fail to observe these points, your computer or the PM5D may stop operating (“hang up”), causing data to be corrupted or lost. If the computer or the PM5D stops working, turn the power off and then on again, and restart the computer. • Before connecting the computer via the USB TO HOST connector, disable the power management mode (suspend/sleep/standby/hibernate) on your computer. • Connect the USB TO HOST connector to the computer before you power-on the PM5D. • Close all application programs (such as PM5D Editor) before turning the PM5D’s power on or off, or connecting or disconnecting the USB cable. • Leave an interval of at least three seconds between powering the PM5D on and off, or between disconnecting and connecting the USB cable. Operating section Initializing the PM5D’s internal memory If an error occurs in the PM5D’s internal memory, or if you are unable to return to normal operation because you have forgotten the system password, use the following procedure to initialize the internal memory. 2 All of the content that had been saved in memory will be lost if you initialize the internal memory. You must use extreme caution when performing this operation. 1 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] key of the panel, turn on the power of the PW800W power supply. After the opening screen, the following initialization menu screen will appear. Click one of the following buttons to select the desired type of initialization. • INITIALIZE ALL MEMORIES All memories including scene memories and libraries will return to their factory-set condition. • INITIALIZE CURRENT MEMORIES Memories other than scene memories and libraries will return to their factory-set condition. • CANCEL The initialization procedure will be aborted, and the PM5D will start up in normal operating mode. Note Note If the voltage of the backup battery runs low, or if an error occurs in the internal memory, a warning message will appear at the bottom of the screen, and the initialization menu will appear “by force.” Please note that if the warning message is displayed, and you click the CANCEL button to start in normal operating mode, we cannot guarantee that the system will operate correctly. 3 A message will ask you to confirm that you really want to initialize; click the OK button. When the internal memory has been initialized, the PM5D will start up in normal operating mode. Adjusting the faders and input/output gain (Calibration) Depending on the conditions of use, discrepancies may occur in the behavior of the motor faders. you can use the Calibration function to correct such discrepancies. If necessary, you can also make fine adjustments to the analog input/output gain. While holding down the [ENTER] key of the panel, turn on the power of the PW800W power supply. After the opening screen, the following calibration menu screen will appear. 2 Click one of the following buttons to choose what you want to calibrate. A window for the calibration item you selected will appear. CALIBRATE FADER POSITION The FADER CALIBRATION window will appear, allowing you to calibrate the specified faders. CALIBRATE AD INPUT GAIN (make fine adjustments to the analog input gain; PM5D-RH model only) The AD INPUT TRIM window will appear, allowing you to make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified analog input port. CALIBRATE OUTPUT GAIN (make fine adjustments to the output ports) The OUTPUT TRIM window will appear, allowing you to make fine adjustments to the gain of the specified output port. 3 Make calibration settings as directed by the instructions that appear in the window. 4 Click the OK button in the window. The calibration settings will be applied, and the PM5D will start up in normal mode. Other functions 1 19 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section 147 19 Other functions Calibrating the faders Here you can execute a semi-automatic procedure for calibrating the faders of the specified channel strip (INPUT, DCA, STEREO A/B, ST IN/FX RTN). This window will also appear if a problem with the fader settings is detected when the PM5D is started up. Adjusting the analog input gain (PM5D-RH model only) If necessary, you can make fine adjustments in steps of 0.1 dB to the gain of the specified analog input port. Since the input levels of all ports are set to match each other when the PM5D is shipped from the factory, you will normally not need to change these settings. Note Since these are set to optimal values at the factory, the default values will differ between input ports. Initializing the internal memory will return these settings to their factory-set values. 1 Click a fader select button to add a check mark to the faders you want to calibrate. If problems with certain faders were detected during start-up, those buttons will be on (green), and check marks will already be shown for them. 2 Click the START CALIBRATION button; calibration will begin automatically. A progress bar will indicate the state of the process. 3 The automatic processing will end when the progress bar reaches 60%. Manually move all faders you specified for calibration to the positions listed below in the following order: 1 –∞ 2 –20 dB 3 0 dB 4 +10 dB 4 After you have set the faders to the correct position, press the [ENTER] key. Processing will proceed to the next fader position. 5 6 Repeat steps 3–4 for each fader position 1–4. To adjust the gain, click the / buttons located at the left and right of each box to specify the gain of each input port in 0.1 dB units. If you want to restore all input ports to their factory settings, click the FACTORY PRESET button. Click the OK button to apply the settings. Adjusting the output gain If necessary, you can make fine adjustments in steps of 0.01 dB to the gain of the specified output port. The factory setting is 0.00 dB. Verify that calibration has been completed and that all fader select buttons are now off. Then click the OK button. The calibration settings will be stored in internal memory. If a fader select button remains on (green), calibration has failed. Try executing calibration once again. Note The progress bar will indicate “Writing...” while the settings are being written to internal memory; do not turn off the power while this indication is visible. To adjust the gain, click the / buttons located at the left and right of each box to specify the gain of each output port in 0.01 dB units. If you want to reset all output ports to 0.00 dB, click the FACTORY PRESET button. Click the OK button to apply the settings. 148 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Operating section Information shown in the display Reference section The Reference section explains the functionality and operations for every screen of the PM5D, organized into four main areas; function menu, global functions, output functions, and input functions. The following illustration is a typical screen on the PM5D. Note • You can move the cursor to the scene number and turn the [DATA] encoder to select a scene. • If you click here while the number and title are blinking, the most recently stored or recalled scene will be displayed. Function menu Information shown in the display 1 2 Note 3 A Function Name Indication Displays the name of the function currently selected in the screen. By clicking the BACK/FORWARD buttons you can move through the eight most recent screens that were displayed for at least two seconds (with the exception of function menus). You can also access the Function menu by clicking this function name indication. When the Function menu is displayed, click once again to return to the previously-displayed screen. • The “MANUAL” indication means that the user must execute the Next Event operation in order to recall the next event. (Press a User Defined key assigned to the “NEXT EVENT RECALL” function, or click the NEXT button in the EVENT LIST screen.) • If a time is displayed, this indicates the remaining time until the next event is recalled automatically. • The “--------” indication means that there is no event to be recalled next. 4 Output functions Upper part of the display (always visible) Input functions This screen shows the following information. Appendices Indicates the scene/event that will be recalled next by the User Defined keys or the Event List function. The information shown here will differ as follows, depending on the settings in the EVENT LIST screen of the SCENE function. • If the DISABLE button is turned on in the EVENT LIST screen Indicates the number and name of the next scene (the scene that will be recalled when you press a User Defined key assigned to the “INC RECALL” function). Normally, this will be the scene of the number following the most recently recalled or stored scene. • If the ENABLE [ALL MANUAL] button or the [ENABLE] button is turned on in the EVENT LIST screen Indicates the number and name of the next event (the scene that will be recalled next by the Event List function). At the right is displayed the time until the next event will be recalled (or the condition upon which the event will be recalled). Global functions C NEXT SCENE/NEXT EVENT 5 B SCENE MEMORY Indicates the number and title of the last-stored or recalled scene memory. If you select a different scene, the number and title will blink. If you edit the contents of a scene after storing it, the EDIT indicator in the upper right will light. If the scene is write-protected, a lock icon is displayed at the right of the title, and readonly scenes are indicated as “R.” 6 7 8 9 J K D PRESENT TIME, TIME CODE, CASCADE/Fs Click this area to cycle through the following three items of information. This is linked with the UPPER PART DISPLAY setting in the PREFERENCE 2 screen (UTILITY function). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 149 Main area of the display • PRESENT TIME Indicates the present time. The time can be specified in the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1 screen. • TIME CODE Indicates the internal time code being generated by the PM5D, or the time code being received from an external device. This is the same as the time code shown in the SCENE function EVENT LIST screen. • CASCADE/Fs Indicates the master/slave status when using a cascade connection, and the sampling frequency at which the PM5D system is currently operating. Main area of the display 1 E METER SECTION Indicates the type of channels that are currently shown by the meters in the upper left and right of the panel. You can also click the / buttons to switch this directly. 2 F EVENT indicator The EVENT indicator is displayed here if the ENABLE [ALL MANUAL] or ENABLE button is turned on in the SCENE function EVENT LIST screen. G FADING/TRACKING indicator This area shows the FADING indicator while fade time is being executed, or the TRACKING indicator if Tracking Recall is available. If both are enabled, FADING takes priority. H LCR/LCR [B] indicator If there is at least one channel for which LCR is turned on, the LCR indicator is displayed here. If in the SYS/W.CLOCK function MIXER SETUP screen the BUS SETUP setting STEREO B is set to USE AS CENTER BUS, the LCR [B] indicator is displayed here. A Tabs Click this area to switch between screens within the selected function. B Function parameters This area shows parameters for the currently selected function or screen. Lower part of the display (always visible) 1 2 3 7 I TB/OSC/DIMM indicator If talkback, oscillator, or dimmer are on, the respective TB/OSC/DIMM indicator is displayed here. If more than one of these are enabled, the display priority is TB>OSC>DIMM. J SOLO/INPUT CUE/DCA CUE/OUTPUT CUE/ KEY IN CUE/EFFECT CUE/EXTERNAL CUE indicator If Solo or Cue Monitor is enabled, the corresponding indicator is shown here. If more than one Cue is selected, only the indicator for the currently-valid Cue is shown. 4 B MIX SECTION Indicates the encoder mode currently selected in the MIX section. In MIX SEND mode this indicates “SEND,” in MIX MASTER mode this indicates “MASTER,” and if a shortcut operation has been used to select TO MATRIX mode this indicates “TO MATRIX.” You can also click the / buttons to directly switch between “SEND” and “MASTER.” C Encoder/Fader mode In the case of MIDI signals, the indicator will light if signals are received at the MIDI connector, USB connector, or slots 1–4. However, active sensing, MIDI clock, and quarter time code messages will not cause the indicator to light. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual 8 Indicates the type and name of the channel currently selected by the [SEL] key. You can also click the / buttons to switch this directly. Note 150 6 A SELECTED CH (Selected channel) K BUSY/RS422/HA/GPI/MIDI indicator The BUSY indicator is shown here while internal memory or a PC card in the card slot is being accessed. When RS422/HA/GPI/MIDI signals are received (in the case of RS422, when Status is received to indicate a status change on a connected device), the appropriate indicator will appear briefly. If more than one of these conditions occur simultaneously, the display priority is BUSY>RS422>HA>GPI>MIDI. 5 Reference section Indicates the parameters that are assigned to the encoders/faders of the input channel strip. The encoders can be assigned to MIX SEND 1–24, GAIN, ATT, PAN/BAL, LEVEL, or REMOTE. The faders can be assigned to LEVEL, MIX SEND 1–24, or REMOTE. For both the encoders and the faders, you can click / to directly select parameters other than REMOTE. If you select LEVEL for the encoders, the faders will be flipped; the most recently selected of the MIX SEND 1– 24 parameters will be assigned to the faders. Similarly, the faders will also be flipped if you select MIX SEND Function menu D INPUT CH (Input channel) layer E FADER MODE This is linked with the FADER MODE section on the panel, and indicates the function that is assigned to the faders of the DCA strip. You can also click the / buttons to switch this directly. Here you can select the function that you want to view in the display. These operate in the same way as the keys of the DISPLAY ACCESS section. Function menu This is linked with the [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] key in the input channel strip of the panel, and indicates the layer that is selected for the input channel strip. (If the MIDI REMOTE layer is selected, this indicates REMOTE 1-24.) Layers other than MIDI REMOTE can also be switched directly by clicking the / buttons. Information shown in the display 1–24 for the faders; the LEVEL parameter will be assigned to the encoders. 1 2 F ST IN/FX RTN (ST IN channel / Effect return) layer This switches between the following two choices as the function of the [1]–[8] keys in the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel. • DIRECT RECALL Keys [1]–[8] of the SCENE MEMORY section will directly recall the scene that was assigned in the SCENE screen. • MUTE MASTER Keys [1]–[8] of the SCENE MEMORY section will switch mute groups 1–8 on/off. H USER DEFINED KEY BANK Global functions To access this screen from another function, click the Function Name area at the top of the display. A Global functions These buttons access functions that affect the entire PM5D. B Output-related functions These buttons access functions related to output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO A/B channels). C Input-related functions These buttons access functions related to input channels (input channels, ST IN channels, FX RTN channels). Appendices Indicates the currently selected bank of User Defined keys. You can also click the / buttons to switch this directly. Hint Output functions G DIRECT RECALL/MUTE MASTER 3 Input functions This is linked with the [ST IN] key and [FX RTN 1-4] key in the ST IN channel strip of the panel, and indicates the layer that is selected for the ST IN channel strip. (If the MIDI REMOTE layer is selected, this indicates REMOTE 25-28.) Layers other than MIDI REMOTE can also be switched directly by clicking the / buttons. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 151 Global functions Global functions EFFECT functions C Input patch This box lets you select the signal path that will be patched to the L/R input channels of the internal effect. Move the cursor to this box and turn the [DATA] encoder or click the / buttons at left or right to display the desired signal path, and then press the [ENTER] key to finalize the change. You can choose the following signal paths. EFFECT PARAM (Effect parameter) screen Here you can select the type of internal effect, edit its parameters, and perform input/output patching. EFFECT PARAM MIX1–MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 output INS CH1–INS CH48 Input channel 1–48 insert out INS STIN1 (L/R)–INS STIN4 (L/R) ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) insert out INS MIX1–INS MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 insert out INS MTRX1–INS MTRX8 MATRIX channel 1–8 insert out INS ST A (L/R) STEREO A channel (L/R) insert out INS ST B (L/R) STEREO B channel (L/R) insert out INS MON (L/R/C) MONITOR channel (L/R/C) insert out Note • If you move the cursor away without pressing the [ENTER] key, the setting will revert to its original state. • If you assign a signal to both input channels for a 1 IN/2 OUT effect type, the two will be mixed to monaural and then input. • If you assign a signal to only one input channel for a 2 IN/2 OUT effect type, the same signal will be sent to both channels of the effect. • If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), and you attempt to make patch settings that would cause an existing patch to be modified, a confirmation message will appear. 1 D Input meter Indicates the level of the signal being input to the effect. 2 3 4 A Effect selection Of the internal effects 1–8, select the effect for which you want to make settings. To switch between effects, place the cursor here and turn the [DATA] encoder, or click the / buttons at left or right. B Effect type Indicates the currently selected effect type, both by name and as a graphic. The number of input/output channels (1 IN/2 OUT or 2 IN/2 OUT) of this effect is also shown at the bottom of this area. Note You can’t switch the effect type in this screen. If you want to switch to a different effect type, recall an effect that uses the desired effect type from the effect library. 152 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 9 K J L Information shown in the display 8 5 6 This button temporarily bypasses the effect. G CUE This button cue-monitors the output of the effect shown in the screen. Cue is automatically defeated when you switch to a different screen. (However, cue will be held if you switch to the EFFECT ASSIGN screen.) H Output meter Indicates the level of the signal being output from the effect. I Output patch This box lets you select the signal path that will be patched to the L/R output channels of the internal effect. The selection method is the same as for Input Patch. You can choose the following signal paths. Note For some effect types, a parameter unique to the effect may be shown instead of the TEMPO parameter. For example if FREEZE is selected as the effect type, a button for recording/ playing the input signal is shown. The BPM value can be edited using the on-screen knob, or by repeatedly clicking the TAP TEMPO button. (In this case, the average interval between clicks is detected. If the average value is outside the range of 20– 300 BPM, it will be ignored.) The average of the intervals is input as the parameter value (average of a, b, and c) CH1–CH48 Input channel 1–48 input STIN1–STIN4 (L/R) ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) input FXRTN1–FXRTN4 (L/R) FX RTN channel 1–4 input INS CH1–INS CH48 Input channel 1–48 insert in INS ST1 (L/R)–INS ST4 (L/ R) ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) insert in INS MIX1–INS MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 insert in INS MTRX1–INS MTRX8 MATRIX channel 1–8 insert in INS ST A (L/R) STEREO A channel (L/R) insert in INS ST B (L/R) STEREO B channel (L/R) insert in INS MON (L/R/C) MONITOR channel (L/R/C) insert in a First tap b Second tap Global functions F BYPASS If a delay-type or modulation-type effect type is selected, the tempo parameter will be displayed here. The TEMPO parameter specifies time-related parameters in units of BPM (Beats Per Minute). For a delaytype effect it sets the DELAY (delay time), and for a modulation-type effect it sets the FREQ. (modulation frequency). Output functions K TEMPO parameter Adjusts the balance of the effect sound relative to the original sound. 0 (%) outputs only the original sound, and 100 (%) outputs only the effect sound. c Third tap Fourth tap Input functions E MIX BALANCE Function menu 7 Appendices If the MIDI CLK button is on, the TEMPO parameter will synchronize to the MIDI timing clock being received from the MIDI port. L Effect parameters This area shows parameters for the currently selected effect type. Note Even if you’ve patched multiple channels in the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen, changing the input/output patch in this screen will turn off patching to other channels. J LIBRARY This button accesses the EFFECT LIBRARY screen for the currently selected effect. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 153 EFFECT functions F Output patch EFFECT ASSIGN screen This screen lists the effect types used by internal effects 1–8, and shows their input levels.. Here you can also assign signals to input/output channels, and make settings for bypass and cue. EFFECT ASSIGN 1 2 3 4 5 6 A Level meter Indicates the input level to the effect. B Effect type Indicates the selected effect type, both by name and as a graphic. When you click this area, the EFFECT PARAM screen will appear. You can also drag and drop this area onto another effect in this screen to copy the effect settings. C BYPASS This button temporarily bypasses the effect. D CUE This button cue-monitors the effect output. Cue is automatically defeated when you switch to a different screen. (However, cue will be held if you switch to the EFFECT PARAM screen of the corresponding effect.) E Input patch This box indicates the signal path that is patched to the L/R input channels of the internal effect. You can also directly assign the signal path in this box. 154 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This box indicates the signal path that is patched to the L/R output channels of the internal effect. You can also directly assign the signal path in this box. Note Even if you’ve patched multiple channels in the INPUT PATCH/OUTPUT PATCH function INSERT PATCH screen, changing the input/output patch in this screen will turn off patching to other channels. 6 Information shown in the display EFFECT LIBRARY screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the effect library. Function menu EFFECT LIBRARY 7 8 9 K 1 2 F Library effect type Global functions J G RECALL Recalls the library item shown in the list into the currently selected effect. H STORE Stores the currently selected effect into the selected location of the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the effect. Output functions Indicates the effect type of the library item selected in the list. Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. J CLEAR 4 Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. 5 Note A EDIT Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. When you click this button, the EFFECT PARAM screen for the currently selected effect will appear. Appendices 3 Input functions I TITLE EDIT B Effect selection Of the internal effects 1–8, select the effect for which you want to make settings. C Input meter Indicates the input level of the effect. Indicates the effect type of the currently selected effect. Indicates the output level of the effect. Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. Note D Current effect type E Output meter K Library list • If the library item selected for operations is different than the last-stored/recalled library item, the last-stored/recalled library item will be shown with a blue background. • Library items 049 and later that are grayed-out are reserved for Add-On Effects. They will become available if you install a separately sold Add-On Effects package (➥ p.109). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 155 GEQ function GEQ function GEQ PARAM (GEQ parameter) screen Here you can adjust the boost/cut for a 31-band graphic EQ, specify the input/output patching, and assign a GEQ to faders. GEQ PARAM You can choose the following insertion destinations. • INS CH1–INS CH48 Input channel 1–48 insert in/out • INS STIN1 (L/R)–INS STIN4 (L/R) ST IN channel 1–4 (L/R) insert in/out • INS MIX1–INS MIX24 MIX channel 1–24 insert in/out • INS MTRX1–INS MTRX8 MATRIX channel 1–8 insert in/out • INS ST A (L/R) STEREO A channel (L/R) insert in/out • INS ST B (L/R) STEREO B channel (L/R) insert in/out • INS MON (L/R/C) MONITOR channel (L/R/C) insert in/out Note • When you select the insertion destination here, insert in/out will be patched simultaneously, and insertion will automatically be turned on for the channel into which the graphic EQ module was inserted. • If you move the cursor away without pressing the [ENTER] key, the setting will revert to its original state. D GEQ ON/OFF button Switches the currently selected graphic EQ module on/ off. 1 2 3 4 5 E SLOW/FAST 6 Switches the fall speed of the spectrum analyzer between slow or fast. This setting does not affect the meters in other screens or the meters on the panel. 7 F PEAK HOLD Switches the peak hold function on/off for the spectrum analyzer. The peak level for each band is held while this button is on. (To reset the peak level display, turn this button off and then on again). This setting does not affect the meters in other screens or the meters on the panel. 8 9 J A Module select Of the twelve graphic EQ modules (GEQ1–GEQ12), select the module that you want to operate. To switch between modules, place the cursor here and turn the [DATA] encoder, or click the / buttons at left or right. G Spectrum analyzer This is an analyzer that shows a realtime level display for each band of the input signal. H EQ graph Indicates the current frequency response of the graphic EQ. I Faders These faders cut/boost the frequency bands of the graphic EQ. The actual values are shown in the numerical boxes below. B LINK button This button links adjacent odd-numbered → evennumbered graphic EQ modules. When you turn this button on, a window will appear, allowing you to select whether the parameters will be copied from one module to the other, or whether both modules will be initialized. J ASSIGN TO FADERS C INSERT (Insert destination) Selects the location at which the graphic EQ module will be inserted. Move the cursor to this box and turn the [DATA] encoder or click the / buttons at left or right to display the desired insertion destination, and then press the [ENTER] key to finalize the change. 156 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section These buttons divide the 31 bands of the graphic EQ into six groups so that you can use the DCA faders to adjust the boost/cut amount of each band. Click one of the six buttons A (20.0-100), B (63.0-315), C (2001.00k), D (630-3.15k), E (2.00k-10.0k), F (4.00k20.0k). DCA faders 1–8 will be assigned to the corresponding region of frequency bands, allowing you to control them with the DCA faders. At this time, the divisions of the corresponding faders and the value in the numerical box screen will turn red in the screen. To return to the original state, press the DCA (OFF) button in the screen or the [DCA] button on the panel. GEQ ASSIGN screen This screen lists the approximate values of the graphic EQ settings, and shows the input/output levels. The signal path assignments and on/off status can also be edited in this screen. GEQ ASSIGN Information shown in the display • If the ASSIGN TO FADERS buttons A–F are off, you can hold down the [SHIFT] button on the panel and press a FADER MODE section button [A]–[F], and then use the DCA faders to control the corresponding region of the graphic EQ in the same way as if you had pressed a button A–F in the screen. • The currently selected DCA fader mode (DCA, A–F) is disabled while one of the ASSIGN TO FADERS buttons A–F is on. At this time, you can also use the FADER MODE section buttons [A]–[F] to switch between regions of the graphic EQ; the button for the selected region will blink, and the remaining buttons will light. • The setting in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area is defeated when you switch screens; the currently selected DCA fader mode will again be applied. Function menu Note Global functions K L 2 3 Output functions 1 M N K LIBRARY 5 A Level meter This button accesses the GEQ LIBRARY screen. This meter indicates the peak level before and after the graphic EQ. L Level meter This meter indicates the peak level before and after the graphic EQ. M LIMIT The range and direction of adjustment controlled by the faders can be selected from the following: ±15 dB, ±12 dB, ±6 dB (these are valid in both the boost and cut directions), or –24 dB (valid only in the cut direction). N EQ FLAT B Fader graph This indicates the approximate fader position for each band. When you click this area, the GEQ PARAM screen for the corresponding GEQ module will appear. You can also drag and drop this area onto another GEQ module to copy the GEQ settings. Input functions 4 Appendices O C GEQ ON/OFF button Switches the graphic EQ module on/off. D Insert destination Resets all faders to the 0 dB position. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. O AUTO ASSIGN This button automates assignments to the DCA faders. If this button is on, the most recently selected region of GEQ bands will be assigned to the DCA faders when you access the GEQ PARAM screen. Indicates the location at which the graphic EQ module is inserted. You can also specify the insert location from within this screen. E LINK button This button indicates the link status of adjacent oddnumbered → even-numbered graphic EQ modules. When you turn this button on, a window will appear, allowing you to select whether the parameters will be copied from one module to the other, or whether both modules will be initialized. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 157 GEQ function 9 GEQ LIBRARY screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the GEQ library. GEQ LIBRARY 5 6 7 8 J 1 2 3 E RECALL Recalls the library item selected in the list into the currently selected GEQ module. F STORE Stores the settings of the currently selected GEQ module into the selected location in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the GEQ module settings. G TITLE EDIT Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. H CLEAR Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. Note Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. 4 A EDIT When you click this button, the GEQ PARAM screen for the currently selected GEQ module will appear. I Library EQ graph Shows the response curve of the library selected in the list. J Library list B GEQ module select Of the GEQ modules 1–12, select the module for which you want to make settings. C Current EQ graph Indicates the approximate response of the currently selected GEQ module. D Level meter This meter indicates the peak level before and after the graphic EQ. 158 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. SCENE screen F Library link Here you can store/recall scenes. This area shows the number and title of the INPUT PATCH library, OUTPUT PATCH library, and HA library used by each scene. You can click the button at the left to access a window that lets you change the library number that is linked. The LINK button for each library determines whether library recall operations will be linked to scene recall operations. If the LINK button is on (this column indicates “LINK”), the library of the corresponding number will also be recalled when you recall that scene. A library whose LINK button is off will not change when you recall that scene. 7 45 6 G COMMENT In this column you can enter or view a comment for the scene. A text input window will appear when you move the cursor to the COMMENT field and press the [ENTER] key, or when you click the button at the left. 1 H TIME STAMP Indicates the time at which the scene was last stored, in the format of month/day/year/hours/minutes/seconds. A Scene list This is a list of the stored scenes. For each scene, the following items are displayed. (To view 7 COMMENT and subsequent items, scroll the list to the right.) B Output functions 3 9 J Input functions 2 8 Global functions SCENE Information shown in the display scenes are sorted in numerical order, a downward or upward arrow is displayed for scenes for which this is turned on; this makes it easy to see which was the original scene prior to selective recall. Function menu SCENE function (Scene number) This is the scene number 0–500. You can click this icon to reverse the order in which the scenes are sorted. This is the name assigned to each scene. You can click the TITLE button to sort the scenes in order of their titles. When you click the button at the left, a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. D (Protect) This button switches Protect on/off for each scene. A lock icon indicates scenes for which Protect is turned on; these scenes cannot be overwritten. Read-only scenes are indicated by a “R” displayed here. E SEL.RECALL (Selective recall) For each scene, you can specify whether the Selective Recall function will be used when recalling the scene. If the Selective Recall function is enabled (➥ p.164), scenes for which this button is turned on can recall only specific parameters. (Alternatively, you can exclude only specific parameters from the recall.) If the scenes are sorted in order of TITLE, a check mark is displayed for scenes for which this is turned on. If the Appendices C TITLE I MIDI EVENT Specifies a MIDI message that will be transmitted from the MIDI OUT connector when the scene is recalled. When you click the button at left a window will appear, allowing you to input a MIDI event in hexadecimal form (➥ p.118). J TX ON/OFF (MIDI event transmission on/ off) Specifies whether the assigned MIDI event will be transmitted. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 159 SCENE function K L • PREVIEW If this button is on, the PM5D will be in PREVIEW mode; this allows you to view or edit the settings of a scene stored in memory or the settings of a library item without affecting the internal signal processing. This is linked with the [PREVIEW] key in the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel (➥ p.80). Note • Monitor settings will apply to internal signal processing even during Preview mode. You can perform cue/monitor operations while Previewing. • EVENT LIST, MIDI, and GPI operations will apply to internal signal processing, but not to Preview. • Memory card save/load operations cannot be performed during Preview. • During Preview, user defined operations that affect internal signal processing are disabled; such operations include EVENT LIST, TALKBACK ASSIGN, MONITOR, MIDI DIRECT OUT, MACHINE CONTROL, and GPI OUT CONTROL. K GPI OUT CONTROL 1–12 Specifies the polarity and transmission method (tally/ trigger) of the signal that is sent from GPI OUT ports 1–12 when the scene is recalled. When you click a button corresponding to a port 1–12, the setting will change in the following order. Display Polarity None Transmission method Disabled High active Tally Low active Tally High active Trigger Low active Trigger N BLANK SKIP Specifies how scene numbers can be selected. If the BLANK SKIP button is off, all scene numbers can be selected consecutively regardless of whether they contain scene data. In contrast if the BLANK SKIP button is on, only numbers in which a scene is actually stored can be selected. This setting applies when you switch scenes using the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys in the SCENE MEMORY section of the panel, the [DATA] encoder, or the / buttons in the screen. Note • GPI OUT CONTROL settings are independent of the settings in the MIDI/REMOTE function GPI screen. • In the case of a Trigger type setting, the time interval between becoming active and returning to the inactive state is 250 msec. O EDIT L REMOTE TRANSPORT Selects the transport command (MMC or RS422 protocol) that will be transmitted when you recall the scene. If you click the button at the left a window will appear, allowing you to select the output destination and the type of command. • • M O P • Q N • M SCENE FUNCTION (Recall function) Here you can store/recall scenes. • RECALL Loads the scene currently selected in the scene list into the PM5D. • STORE Saves the current settings of the PM5D in the scene currently selected in the scene list. (This button is inoperable if the selected scene is read-only or protected.) • UNDO Cancels the preceding Recall or Store operation. You can click this once again (Redo) to return to the state prior to Undoing. 160 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual • • Reference section These buttons let you rearrange the order of the scenes in memory. CUT Cuts the scene selected in the list, and holds it in a temporary memory buffer. Subsequent scenes will be moved forward by one. COPY Copies the scene selected in the list into the memory buffer. The copy-source and other scenes will not be affected. INSERT Inserts the scene from the memory buffer at the number selected in the list. Scenes that follow the number at which you inserted will be moved backward by one. PASTE Overwrites the scene from the memory buffer onto the blank number selected in the list. Other scenes will not be affected. CLEAR Deletes the scene selected in the list. UNDO Cancels the operation that was last performed in the EDIT area. Note • A confirmation message will appear when you click one of these buttons. • If a read-only or protected scene is selected in the list, the CUT, INSERT, and CLEAR buttons are grayed-out, and cannot be used. • If an existing scene is selected in the list, the PASTE button is grayed-out, and cannot be used. • If the list is sorted by title, the CUT, INSERT, and UNDO buttons are displayed in gray. • If you modify the contents of a scene by operations in other than the EDIT section, the UNDO button is displayed in gray. This lets you select the scenes that will be directly recalled by the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys on the panel. This function is available if the DIRECT RECALL button is on. When you move the cursor to the field on the left and turn the [DATA] encoder, or when you click the / buttons to select a scene number, the scene name will appear in the field on the right. EVENT LIST screen The Event List function lets you register scenes in the order of use, so that these scenes can be recalled either manually or automatically according to the specified time code or interval. EVENT LIST Information shown in the display P DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN Q DIRECT RECALL/MUTE MASTER Global functions Function menu These are linked with the DIRECT RECALL/MUTE MASTER buttons shown at the bottom of the display. (➥ p.151) 2 Input functions Output functions 1 3 A EVENT LIST ENABLE/DISABLE Appendices Use the following three buttons to enable/disable the Event List function. • DISABLE The Event List function will not recall scenes registered in the event list. • ENABLE [ALL MANUAL] Scenes registered in the event list will be recalled only by manual operation. If the list contains events for which a time code has been specified, the candidate event for recall will change as time code progresses, but events will not actually be recalled unless the recall operation is performed manually. • ENABLE Scenes registered in the event list will be recalled according to the specified condition (time code, interval, or manual operation). B Event list In this list you can register the scenes to be recalled, and the conditions under which the scenes will be recalled. Click a line to select the event of that line for editing; it will be highlighted in the center of the list. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 161 SCENE function • No. Indicates the event number. • EVENT TRIGGER This column specifies the condition that will recall each event. Click the button, and in the window that appears, use the following three buttons to select the condition. MANUAL . . . . . The event can be recalled by the DIRECT button in the EVENT RECALL area (3) or by a User Defined key. The EVENT TRIGGER field will indicate “[MANUAL]”. INTERVAL . . . . The scene will be recalled when a specified time has elapsed after the preceding scene was recalled. If you select this button, specify the wait time in the lower part of the window. The EVENT TRIGGER field in the list shows a “ ” symbol and the wait time. TIME CODE . . . The scene will be recalled when the time code (LTC, MTC, internal time code) reaches the specified time. If you select this button, specify the time code location (hours/ minutes/seconds/frames) in the lower part of the window. The EVENT TRIGGER field in the list shows the time code. Event that will be recalled when the specified interval elapses after the previous recall operation Event that will be recalled manually • SCENE TITLE This is the number and title of the scene to be recalled. Click the button, and in the window that appears, click the number of a scene to select it. C EVENT RECALL Here you can recall events. The following three buttons are provided. • PREV When you click this button, the event of the line preceding the last-recalled event will be recalled and selected. • DIRECT When you click this button, the event currently selected in the event list will be recalled. This is used mainly to recall an event whose EVENT TRIGGER field is set to “[MANUAL]”. • NEXT When you click this button, the event of the line following the last-recalled event will be recalled and selected. 4 5 6 9 7 8 K L J M N Event that will be recalled when time code reaches the specified location O P Q Hint • As long as an event for which MANUAL is specified is selected in the list, the scene will not change until you manually execute a recall. • However, if a event for which TIME CODE is specified is registered later in the list, events set to MANUAL will be skipped when that time code arrives, and the corresponding scene will be recalled. • The condition for recalling the scene that will be recalled next is shown in the NEXT SCENE/NEXT EVENT fields in the upper part of the display. D AUTO CAPTURE This button lets you automatically register events in realtime while time code runs. If time code is running and this button is on, using the buttons of the panel SCENE MEMORY to recall a scene will cause the corresponding scene number and time code location to be captured, and this will be added as a new event. Note • If the list contains previously-recorded events, they will be sorted in descending order of their time code. • If an event already exists at the identical time code location, it will be overwritten by the new event. • Even if time code source is “OFF,” performing a recall operation while this button is on will register a new event in the list. In this case, the EVENT TRIGGER field will be registered as “[MANUAL]”. • If an offset value is specified, the sum of the offset value and the displayed time code is captured as the time code. Note • If time code source is OFF, events whose EVENT TRIGGER is set to TIME CODE will not be recalled unless you perform a manual recall. • In contrast, events whose EVENT TRIGGER is set to INTERVAL will be recalled automatically after the specified interval elapses from the previous recall operation, even if the time code source is OFF. • In the two-second interval after time code starts, events may not be executed because synchronization is being established. You must start time code at least two seconds earlier than an event you want to execute. E MOVE UP This button moves the currently selected event one position earlier in the event list. 162 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This button inserts a new event at the location selected in the event list. The EVENT TRIGGER field of the new event will be “[MANUAL],” and its SCENE TITLE field will be “no assignment.” You can change these as desired. H MANUAL OVERWRITE This button overwrites a new event onto the location currently selected in the event list. (If the line at the current location is blank, this button will be grayed-out and unavailable.) The EVENT TRIGGER field of the new event will be “[MANUAL].” J Time code display area This displays the value of the incoming time code (LTC or MTC) or the internal time code. If INTERNAL is selected as the time code source, transport buttons are shown immediately below the time code value; you can use these buttons to rewind, stop, or start the internal time code. I TIME CODE SETUP Here you can make settings for the time code received by the PM5D. • TC SOURCE (Time code source) Select one of the following as the time code source that will be used. OFF . . . . . . . . . . Time code will not be received. INTERNAL . . . . The time code generated within the PM5D will be used. TIME CODE . . . The time code (LTC) received via the rear panel TIME CODE connector will be used. MIDI . . . . . . . . . The MIDI time code (MTC) received via the rear panel MIDI IN connector will be used. USB . . . . . . . . . . The MIDI time code received from the specified port via the rear panel USB connector will be used. SLOT 1–4 . . . . . If a card that supports MIDI input is installed in one of the rear panel slots, the MIDI time code received from the specified port will be used. Note Information shown in the display STOP (stop the time code) RETURN TO START TIME (rewind the time code to the start time) In addition, if INTERNAL is selected you can click the button to access the TIME CODE window, and specify the time code directly. Note An offset value is not added to the displayed time code. K TIME CODE INSERT This button registers the time code data in the list in realtime. When the time code source is running, clicking this button will capture the time code value and add it as a new event. The captured time code is input in the EVENT TRIGGER field of the new event, and the SCENE TITLE field will be “no assignment.” At this time, the events within the list are sorted in descending order of time code. (If an event exists at the same time location, it will be overwritten by the new event.) Note • This setting does not affect the MIDI REMOTE function MIDI SETUP screen. • If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, you will need to specify the port number (1–8) in the field on the right (Depending on the card that is installed, some slots may have only one port.) • If you switch to INTERNAL, the time code will be set to the Start Time value. • FRAME RATE Select one of the following as the frame rate for the time code (LTC, MTC, internal time code) you are using. 30 . . . . . . . . . . 30 frames/second (non-drop) 30D . . . . . . . . . 30 frames/second (drop frame) 29.97 . . . . . . . . 29.97 frames/second (non-drop) 29.97D . . . . . . 29.97 frames/second (drop frame) 25 . . . . . . . . . . 25 frames/second 24 . . . . . . . . . . 24 frames/second START (start the time code from the current location) Function menu G MANUAL INSERT Global functions • The MOVE UP/DOWN buttons are available only for events whose EVENT TRIGGER field is shown as “[MANUAL]” or the “ ” symbol. • If the EVENT TRIGGER field of the selected event shows a time code, these buttons will be grayed-out and unavailable. Output functions Note • OFFSET TIME/START TIME If INTERNAL is selected as the time code source, use this field to specify the time at which internal time code will begin (START TIME). If any other time code source is selected, use this field to specify the offset (OFFSET TIME). The offset is the interval by which the timing at which scenes are recalled is adjusted backward or forward relative to the incoming time code (LTC or MTC). In either case, you can edit the value by clicking the button and specifying the value in hours/minutes/seconds/frames units in the window that appears. Input functions This button moves the currently selected event one position later in the event list. Appendices F MOVE DOWN If the time code source is OFF, the EVENT TRIGGER column will be “[MANUAL].” If the time code source is TIME CODE, MIDI, USB, or SLOT 1–4, the offset value has been added to the time code value of the newly added event. L TIME CODE OVERWRITE This button replaces the time code of the event selected in the list in realtime. When the time code source is running, clicking this button will write the current time location as the time code value of the currently selected event. (The SCENE TITLE field will not change.) At this time, the events within the list are sorted in descending order of time code. If a blank line is selected, this button is grayed-out. Note If the time code source is OFF, the EVENT TRIGGER column will be “[MANUAL].” If the time code source is TIME CODE, MIDI, USB, or SLOT 1–4, the offset value has been added to the rewritten time code value. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 163 SCENE function M SCENE INSERT This button inserts one or more consecutive scenes from scene memory into the event list. Use the FROM/ TO fields located at right to specify the starting and ending scene numbers, and click this button; the specified scenes will be inserted as new events for recall immediately before the currently selected event. The EVENT TRIGGER field is set to “[MANUAL]” for all of the new events. SELECTIVE RECALL screen In this screen you can make settings for the Selective Recall function, which, independently for each scene, lets you exclude specific parameters/channels from recall, or conversely recall only specific parameters/channels. SELECTIVE RECALL N SCENE OVERWRITE This button overwrites the scene assignments of consecutive events in the event list with multiple consecutive scenes from scene memory. Use the FROM/TO fields located at right to specify the starting and ending scene numbers, and click this button; starting at the currently selected line of the event list, the SCENE TITLE field of the corresponding number of subsequent events will be rewritten to the scenes you specified. (The EVENT TRIGGER field will not change.) If a blank line is selected, this button is grayed-out. O DELETE This button deletes the event selected in the event list. If a blank line is selected, this button is grayed-out. P UNDO 1 This button returns the event list to its state prior to the most recent editing operation. If undo cannot be executed, this button is grayed-out. 2 Q ALL DELETE This button deletes all events from the event list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. A SELECTIVE RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE Enables/disables Selective Recall for the currently selected scene. If this button is set to DISABLE, the Selective Recall function is disabled. Note If you edit the list (4–8, K–Q) or change the time code, the NEXT EVENT button in the constantly-displayed area will search from the current time code. However if the time code source is OFF, or if there is no time code setting in the EVENT TRIGGER field (only for [MANUAL] and [INTERVAL]), the NEXT EVENT will be the beginning of the list. Note • Unlike the RECALL SAFE screen (➥ p.166) which is common to all scenes, the settings in the SELECTIVE RECALL screen are independent for each scene. • If you edit the settings of the SELECTIVE RECALL screen, you must store that scene in order to make your changes effective. B SELECTION MODE Use the following two buttons to choose how you want to use the SELECTIVE RECALL screen. • SAFE PARAMETER button If this button is on, you can specify the channels/ parameters that will be excluded from recall operations. • RECALL PARAMETER button If this button is on, you can specify the channels/ parameters that will be recalled. Immediately after you switch buttons, all channels/ parameters will be subject to recall. 164 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 4 Information shown in the display 3 5 Function menu 8 If the SAFE PARAMETER button is on These buttons function as SAFE ON/OFF buttons that specify the channels excluded from recall operations. If the RECALL PARAMETER button is on I SET ALL These buttons function as RECALL ON/OFF buttons that specify the channels that will be recalled. D Parameter matrix grid This button turns on all buttons of the OTHER SAFE PARAMETERS area. J CLEAR ALL Here you can select the parameters that will be recalled (or excluded from recall). SAFE PARAMETER selections are shown in green, and RECALL PARAMETER selections are shown in blue. If the ALL button is on, all parameters other than CH to MIX will be recalled (or excluded from recall). Note • Matrix grids corresponding to combinations that cannot be selected are grayed-out. • Settings in the parameter matrix grid are ignored for channels whose SAFE ON/OFF button or RECALL ON/OFF button is switched off. E ASSIGN This area indicates the number of assigned channels for each parameter. F SET ALL These buttons turn on the buttons of all channels or all buttons of the corresponding parameter. G CLEAR ALL These buttons turn off the buttons of all channels or all buttons of the corresponding parameter. This button turns off all buttons of the OTHER SAFE PARAMETERS area. In the case of parameters (such as those listed below) for which two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels or modules share a single parameter, the parameter will be recalled (or excluded from recall) only if selective recall is specified for both channels/modules. • GATE STEREO LINK • COMP STEREO LINK • DELAY GANG • PAN MODE • GEQ LINK • ATT GANG • MS DECODE • FIXED/VARI Input functions The function of these buttons will depend on the SELECTION MODE (2) setting. By using these buttons, parameters other than those described above can be excluded from recall operations. If the SAFE PARAMETER button is turned on in the SELECTION MODE (2) area, these buttons specify the parameters that will be excluded from recall. If the RECALL PARAMETER button is turned on, these buttons specify the parameters that will be recalled. Output functions H OTHER SAFE/RECALL PARAMETERS C SAFE ON/OFF buttons RECALL ON/OFF buttons Appendices 6 7 Global functions 9 J Note • Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together. Channels/parameters excluded from recall operations by either Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will not be recalled. • Selective Recall applies when a scene is recalled in PREVIEW mode. • When you recall a scene, there may be cases in which a conflict in pairing settings between Recall Safe and Selective Recall causes the settings of a parameter to differ between L and R channels. In such cases, the parameter will be linked when it is next operated. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 165 SCENE function C Parameter matrix grid RECALL SAFE screen Here you can select the channel parameters that will be excluded from recall operations. If the ALL button is on, all parameters except for CH to MIX will be excluded. Recall Safe and Selective Recall can be used together. Channels/parameters excluded from recall operations by either Recall Safe or Selective Recall (or both) will not be recalled. Here you can specify parameters/channels that will be excluded from recall operations for all scenes. RECALL SAFE Note Settings in the parameter matrix grid are ignored for channels whose CH SAFE ON/OFF button is OFF. D ASSIGN This area indicates the number of assigned channels for each parameter. E SET ALL These buttons turn on the buttons of all channels or all buttons of the corresponding parameter. F CLEAR ALL These buttons turn off the buttons of all channels or all buttons of the corresponding parameter. 1 2 3 7 4 8 5 6 A HA SAFE ON/OFF (Head Amp safe on/off) buttons 9 J G SELECTIVE RECALL PARAMETERS PASTE This button copies parameter settings from the SELECTIVE RECALL screen, and pastes them into the RECALL SAFE screen. When you click the button, a confirmation message will appear. These buttons select the channels whose assigned HA (Head Amp) will be excluded from recall operations. Note If you scroll the scroll bar downward, you will see that the CH column of the SAFE PARAMETERS area shows not only input channels but also the following input ports. AD1-AD48 . . . . INPUT jacks 1-48 AD1L-AD4R . . L/R channels of ST IN jacks 1-4 ExHA1-1–ExHA8-8 . . . . Channels 1-8 of external head amps 1-8 (AD8HR or AD824) B CH SAFE ON/OFF (Channel safe on/off) buttons These buttons select the channels that will be excluded from recall operations. These are linked with the [RECALL SAFE] key of the panel. 166 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual H OTHER SAFE PARAMETERS By using these buttons, parameters other than those described above can be excluded from recall operations. I SET ALL This button turns on all buttons of the OTHER SAFE PARAMETERS area. J CLEAR ALL Reference section This button turns off all buttons of the OTHER SAFE PARAMETERS area. Here you can specify how fader and pan will change smoothly to their new values over a specified duration when the scene is recalled. Function menu FADE TIME Information shown in the display FADE TIME screen Note Global functions • Selective Recall applies when a scene is recalled in PREVIEW mode. • When you recall a scene, there may be cases in which a conflict in pairing settings between Recall Safe and Selective Recall causes the settings of a parameter to differ between L and R channels. In such cases, the parameter will be linked when it is next operated. 3 A FADING ENABLE/DISABLE Enables/disables the Fade function for fader levels. Note • The settings in the FADE TIME screen are independent for each scene. If you edit these settings, you must store that scene in order to make your changes effective. • The Fade function will apply when you recall a scene for which the ENABLE button is selected. B INPUT CH PANNING ENABLE/DISABLE (Input channel panning enable/disable) If the ENABLE button is selected, the Fade function will also apply to the PAN (BALANCE) parameter of input channels. This button is independent from the FADING ENABLE/DISABLE (1) setting. Use the following two buttons to select the input channels to which this will apply. • When the ALL INPUT button is on The Fade function will apply to the PAN (BALANCE) parameter of all input channels. • When the SAME AS FADING button is on The Fade function will apply to the PAN (BALANCE) parameter of only the input channels you select in 4. Output functions 2 Input functions 1 Appendices In the case of parameters (such as those listed below) for which two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels or modules share a single parameter, the parameter will be excluded from recall only if recall safe is specified for both channels/modules. • GATE STEREO LINK • COMP STEREO LINK • DELAY GANG • PAN MODE • GEQ LINK • ATT GANG • MS DECODE • FIXED/VARI C FADE TIME/START OFFSET Use the following two buttons to select the parameters that can be viewed/edited in the FADE TIME screen. The indication at the right shows which button is currently selected. • When the FADE TIME button is on Edit the time (fade time) over which the fader or pan parameter of the corresponding channel will reach the new value when you recall a scene for which the Fade function is enabled. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 167 SCENE function • When the START OFFSET button is on Edit the time (start offset time) after which the fader or pan parameter of the corresponding channel will begin changing when you recall a scene for which the Fade function is enabled. 4 E SET ALL This button enables the Fade function for all input channels or output channels. F CLEAR ALL 5 6 D Channel settings Here you can turn the Fade function on/off and specify the fade time (or the start offset time) for each input channel / output channel. Use the channel name buttons to switch the Fade function on/off. The box below each button lets you specify the fade time or start offset time. Move the cursor to a box, and turn the [DATA] encoder or click the / buttons at the left and right to edit the value. The color of the numerical value shown in the box will change as follows. • When the FADE TIME button is on The value is displayed in white for channels whose start offset time is “----” (unset), and in light blue for channels that are set to 0.1 or above. • When the START OFFSET button is on The value is displayed in red for channels whose start offset time is “----” (unset), and in yellow for channels that are set to 0.1 or above. If desired, you can copy the fade time / offset time value from one channel to another as follows. Move the cursor to the box that displays the value you want to copy; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER] key to access the JOB SELECT window. In this window, select the copy-destination item and click the OK button; the value of the selected channel will be copied. 168 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This button disables the Fade function for all input channels or output channels. 6 TRACKING RECALL 7 F ON (Tracking On) These buttons enable/disable tracking for each channel. If the TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE button is set to ENABLE, tracking is enabled on channels for which this button is ON. Information shown in the display Here you can make settings for the Tracking Recall function, which adds a specified offset value to the value of each fader when you recall a scene. Function menu TRACKING RECALL screen If OFFSET LOCK (5) is off, turning this button on will reset the tracking offset of the corresponding channel to 0 dB. If in this state you operate the fader of the corresponding channel, the relative amount of fader movement from the point at which this button was turned on will be memorized as the tracking offset. You can then turn OFFSET LOCK on to lock the offset. This offset value will be added whenever you subsequently recall a scene. 4 Global functions Note 3 1 2 Here you can specify the offset value applied to each channel if tracking is enabled. The range is ±15 dB. While OFFSET LOCK (5) is off, operating the panel faders will cause these values to change as well; however, adjusting the offset values in the screen will not cause the panel faders to move. 5 A TRACKING RECALL ENABLE/DISABLE Output functions G Tracking offset Enables/disables the Tracking Recall function. Hint Input functions The settings in the TRACKING RECALL screen apply to all scenes. B DISPLAY SELECT These buttons select the type of channels that are shown in the TRACKING RECALL screen; either INPUT (input channels) or OUTPUT (output channels). C SET ALL Appendices This button enables Tracking Recall for all channels (including channels not currently shown in the screen). D CLEAR ALL This button disables Tracking Recall for all channels (including channels not currently shown in the screen). E OFFSET LOCK If this button is on, the sliders of all channels (including channels not currently shown in the screen) will be grayed-out, and you will be unable to edit the offset value. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 169 SCENE function GLOBAL PASTE screen This screen lets you copy parameter settings of any desired channel or parameter in the current scene, and paste them into one or more scenes in scene memory. • If Paste Mode= INPUT Select input channels in the left area, and select parameters in the right area. You can select the following parameters. GLOBAL PASTE 1 All parameters except for HA, PATCH, and NAME ATT Attenuator EQ EQ function settings GATE GATE function settings COMP COMP function settings DELAY DELAY function settings FADER Fader level ON CH [ON] key on/off status PAN/BAL Pan/balance settings INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point SEND*1 Send level to the desired MIX bus(es) DCA Associated DCA group MUTE Associated mute group LCR LCR screen settings HA Settings for the head amp assigned to the corresponding input channel PATCH Settings for the input patch assigned to the corresponding input channel NAME Name assigned to the corresponding input channel *1. If the SEND button is on, use the MIX buttons (1–24) to select the applicable MIX bus. If the MIX bus is paired, SEND PAN is included in PAN/BAL if FOLLOW PAN “VARI” is on, or included in SEND if it is off. A PASTE MODE Select the type of copy-source parameter from the following choices. You cannot select more than one type simultaneously. INPUT . . . . . . Input channel parameters OUTPUT . . . . Output channel parameters DCA, GEQ, EFFECT . . . . DCA level or mute on/off status, GEQ settings, internal effect settings ALL • If Paste Mode= OUTPUT Select output channels in the left area, and select parameters in the right area. You can select the following parameters. 2 EQ EQ function settings COMP COMP function settings DELAY DELAY function settings FADER Fader level ON CH [ON] key on/off status BAL Balance settings INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point TO MTRX*1 Send level to the desired MATRIX bus(es) DCA Associated DCA group MUTE Associated mute group LCR LCR screen settings WITHOUT MIX SEND/ WITH MIX SEND Selects whether the send level sent from input channels to the selected MIX bus will be included (WITH...) or will not be included (WITHOUT...) in the pasted data. *1. If the TO MTRX button is on, use the MATRIX buttons (1–8) to select the applicable MATRIX bus. Note B CURRENT SCENE Here you can select the channels and parameters that will be copied from the currently selected scene. The contents shown in this area will depend on the paste mode (1) you choose. 170 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section • If Paste Mode= INPUT, and the parameter being pasted is NAME, the name library linked to the selected scene will be searched automatically and pasted. • Be aware that if other scenes link to this library, the paste operation will overwrite the library, meaning that other scenes may be affected. MIDI REMOTE function 4 MIDI SETUP screen Here you can select the types of MIDI message transmitted and received by the PM5D, and select the MIDI port that will be used. Information shown in the display 3 Global functions Function menu MIDI SETUP C DESTINATION SCENE (Paste-destination scene) This list lets you select the scenes to which the data will be pasted. If you want to select multiple consecutive scenes as the paste-destination, select the starting number in the upper list and the ending number in the lower list. (If you’re pasting to only one scene, select the same scene in the upper and lower lists.) You can change the order in which the list is sorted by clicking the buttons shown at the top of the scene number, SCENE TITLE, TIME STAMP, or COMMENT columns. 2 3 4 Output functions 1 Note • Paste is valid even in PREVIEW mode. • When you paste to a scene, there may be cases in which a conflict in pairing settings causes the settings of a parameter to differ between L and R channels. In such cases, the parameter will be recalled with those settings, and will be linked when it is next operated. A MODE Here you can select the way in which program changes and control changes will be transmitted/received. • PROGRAM CHANGE MODE In this area you can select the program change transmission/reception method. SINGLE If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on a single MIDI channel (Single mode). OMNI ON/OFF If this button is on, program changes of all MIDI channels will be received in Single mode (this is unavailable in Multi mode). BANK ON/OFF If this button is on, bank select messages will be transmitted and received in Single mode (this is unavailable in Multi mode). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Appendices This button executes the Global Paste operation. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. In the case of parameters such as those listed below, of which only one exists for each two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels or modules, the parameter will be pasted only if both channels/modules are specified for pasting. • GATE STEREO LINK • COMP STEREO LINK • DELAY GANG • PAN MODE • GEQ LINK • ATT GANG • MS DECODE • FIXED/VARI Input functions D PASTE 171 MIDI REMOTE function MULTI If this button is on, program changes will be transmitted/received on multiple MIDI channels (Multi mode). Hint • If program change reception is on, the PM5D’s scenes or effects will switch when the appropriate program change is received from an external device. Additionally, if transmission is on, program changes will be transmitted to an external device when scenes or effects are switched on the PM5D. • The scene/effect assignment for each program change number is made in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen (➥ p.173). • CONTROL CHANGE MODE In this area you can select the control change transmission/reception method. NRPN If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be transmitted/received as NRPN messages. TABLE [SINGLE] If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be transmitted/received as control change messages on a single MIDI channel. TABLE [MULTI] If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be transmitted/received as control change messages on multiple MIDI channels. Hint • If control change reception is on, the PM5D’s parameters will change when the appropriate control change is received from an external device. If transmission is on, a control change will be transmitted to an external device when you edit a parameter on the PM5D. • If NRPN is selected as the control change mode, the assignment of parameters to NRPN is pre-defined and cannot be changed. • If TABLE [SINGLE] or TABLE [MULTI] is selected as the control change mode, the parameter assignment for each control number can be edited in the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen (➥ p.174). Here you can make various settings for transmission of MIDI messages. • MIDI PORT Tx (MIDI transmission port) Select the port at which the PM5D will transmit MIDI messages. You have the following choices. MIDI . . . . . . . The rear panel MIDI IN connector USB . . . . . . . . The rear panel USB connector SLOT 1–4 . . . A card that supports serial transmission and is installed in rear panel slot 1–4 Move the cursor to this box and turn the [DATA] encoder or click the / buttons at left or right to change the setting; then press the [ENTER] key to finalize the change. If you select USB or SLOT 1–4, you will need to specify the port number (1–8) in the field on the right (Depending on the card that is installed, some slots may have only one port.) • SINGLE MODE MIDI CH Tx (MIDI transmission channel for Single mode) Select the MIDI channel on which the PM5D will transmit program changes, control changes, parameter changes, and bulk data. (This setting is valid only in Single mode.) Move the cursor to this box and turn the PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Hint Parameter changes are a method by which PM5D parameters are transmitted in the form of system exclusive messages. • MIDI THRU Tx (Thru output) Select the port from which messages input to MIDI THRU Rx will be output. The selection method is the same as for MIDI PORT Tx. C Rx (MIDI reception) • • • • • B Tx (MIDI transmission) 172 [DATA] encoder or click the / buttons at left or right to change the setting; then press the [ENTER] key to finalize the change. • PROGRAM CHANGE Tx (Program change transmission) • CONTROL CHANGE Tx (Control change transmission) • PARAMETER CHANGE Tx (Parameter change transmission) These buttons turn transmission on/off for program changes, control changes, and parameter changes respectively. • Here you can make various settings for reception of MIDI messages. MIDI PORT Rx (MIDI reception port) Select the port from which the PM5D will receive MIDI messages. SINGLE MODE MIDI CH Rx (MIDI reception channel for Single mode) Select the MIDI channel on which the PM5D will receive program changes, control changes, parameter changes, and bulk data. (This setting is valid only in Single mode.) PROGRAM CHANGE Rx (Program change reception) CONTROL CHANGE Rx (Control change reception) PARAMETER CHANGE Rx (Parameter change reception) These buttons turn transmission on/off for program changes, control changes, and parameter changes respectively. MIDI THRU Rx (Thru input) Here you can select the port that will “thru input” the received MIDI messages. D ECHO (MIDI message echo output) Reference section Here you can select whether received program changes, control changes, parameter changes, and other MIDI messages will be echoed out from the MIDI transmission port. 5 Information shown in the display MIDI PGM CHANGE (MIDI program change) screen In this screen you can select the scene or effect library assigned to each MIDI program number. MIDI PGM CHANGE Function menu 6 7 This selects the port that will transmit MMC (MIDI Machine Control). F MIDI REMOTE OUTPUT PORT (MIDI remote output port) Here you can select the port from which MIDI messages will be transmitted by the MIDI Remote function, for each of the four banks. Incoming messages used by the LEARN function of the MIDI REMOTE screen are also received at this port. 1 G PM5D EDITOR (PM5D EDITOR connection port) Here you can select the port and ID number (1–8) used to communicate with the PM5D EDITOR application, which controls the PM5D from a computer. Output functions Global functions E MMC OUTPUT PORT 3 Input functions 2 A MIDI SETUP Appendices Select the ports that the PM5D will use to transmit and receive MIDI messages, and the MIDI channels. This item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP screen. B PROGRAM CHANGE SETUP Here you can specify how program changes will be transmitted and received, and turn transmission and reception on/off. This item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP screen. C ECHO ON/OFF This selects whether program changes received from an external device are echoed-out from the MIDI transmission port. This item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP screen. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 173 MIDI REMOTE function 5 6 4 MIDI CTRL CHANGE (MIDI control change) screen Here you can select the PM5D parameter (fader operation, [ON] key operation, etc.) assigned to each control number. MIDI CTRL CHANGE D List In this list you can view and select the event (scene recall / effect library recall) assigned to each program number. • CH/BANK (Channel/Bank) Indicates the MIDI channel on which the program change is transmitted/received. In Single mode when the BANK ON/OFF button is on, this column is displayed as BANK, and the value shown corresponds to the bank number. • PGM No. (Program number) Indicates the program number 1–128. • LIBRARY NAME Here you can view/select the type and the number of the event (scene or effect) assigned to each channel/ program number. To make an assignment, click the desired line to select it. (That line will be highlighted in the center of the list.) Click the button shown at the left of the LIBRARY NAME field; the MIDI PGM CHANGE SETUP window will appear. In this window you can select the type of event (a scene, or a library item for effect 1–8) and its number. When a program change on the corresponding MIDI channel is received, the event assigned to that program number will be recalled. In addition, the corresponding program change will be transmitted when this event is recalled on the PM5D. E PRESET Clicking this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state. F CLEAR ALL Clicking this button will delete all event assignments in the list. 174 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual 1 2 3 A MIDI SETUP Select the ports that the PM5D will use to transmit and receive MIDI messages, and the MIDI channels. This item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP screen. B CONTROL CHANGE SETUP Here you can specify how control changes will be transmitted and received, and turn transmission and reception on/off. This item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP screen. You have the following choices of transmission/reception method. • NRPN If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be transmitted/received as NRPN messages. • TABLE [SINGLE] If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be transmitted/received as control change messages on a single MIDI channel according to the assignments in the list (4). • TABLE [MULTI] If this button is on, PM5D mix parameters will be transmitted/received as control change messages on Reference section C ECHO ON/OFF This selects whether control changes received from an external device are echoed-out from the MIDI transmission port. This item is linked with the settings in the MIDI SETUP screen. MIDI REMOTE screen Here you can assign MIDI messages to panel faders, CH [ON] keys, encoders, and ENCODER [ON] keys, and make settings for the MIDI Remote function used to control external devices. MIDI REMOTE 6 Global functions Function menu 5 Information shown in the display multiple MIDI channels according to the assignments in the list (4). 4 2 Output functions 1 D List Note This list is ignored if the control change mode is set to NRPN. A TRANSMIT ENABLE/DISABLE (Enable/disable transmission) Enables/disables the MIDI Remote function. You can enable/disable this function for each of the four banks (memories in which MIDI Remote settings are stored). B ASSIGN TO CH STRIP SECTION (Assign to channel strip) Input functions 3 You can choose the following two as the channel strip to which the MIDI Remote function is assigned (both can be selected simultaneously if desired). INPUT CH . . . . . . . INPUT channel strip 1–24 STIN/FXRTN . . . . . ST IN/FX RTN channel strip 1– 4 This setting applies to all four banks. Appendices In this list you can view/select the events assigned to each control number. • CH (Channel) Indicates the MIDI channel on which the control change is transmitted/received. • CTRL No. (Control number) Indicates the control number 0–119. Control numbers 0, 32, and 96–110 cannot be specified. • CTRL CHANGE EVENT (Control change event) Indicates/selects the type of event assigned to the corresponding channel / control number. To make an assignment, click the desired line (that line will be highlighted in the center of the list); then click the button at the left of the CTRL CHANGE EVENT field to open the MIDI CTRL CHANGE SETUP window. In this window you can specify the parameter in three levels (mode, parameters 1/2). When a control change on the corresponding MIDI channel is received, the event assigned to that control number will be edited. In addition, the corresponding control change will be transmitted when this event is edited on the PM5D. C Channel selection Select the MIDI Remote channel for which you want to make settings. When you click the / buttons at the left and right of the box, the corresponding name is displayed in the box at the right. You can change the name by clicking the button of the right box. Note E PRESET Clicking this button will restore all event assignments in the list to their default state. You cannot change the MIDI Remote channel you’re editing while any of the LEARN buttons (7) are on. You will have to turn off the LEARN button first. F CLEAR ALL Clicking this button will delete all event assignments in the list. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 175 MIDI REMOTE function G LEARN 5 Use this button to assign a received MIDI message to a controller. When you turn on one of the four LEARN buttons, the MIDI message received by the PM5D will be assigned to the corresponding controller. The LEARN function uses the MIDI messages received at the input port specified by the MIDI REMOTE OUTPUT PORT in the MIDI SETUP screen. 4 D BANK SELECT Of the four banks, select the bank for which you want to make settings. When you use the A–D buttons to select a bank, the name of that bank will be displayed in the field immediately above. You can click the button at the left to edit the name of the bank. Hint • MIDI messages assigned using the LEARN button can be a maximum of 16 bytes long (the 17th and subsequent bytes are discarded). If the message is less than 16 bytes long, END will be immediately after the last data value. • If a control change is received, the third byte will automatically be replaced by FAD (if the assignment destination is FADER), ENC (if the assignment destination is ENCODER), or SW (if the assignment destination is ENCODER ON or CH ON). • If more than one message is received while a LEARN button is on, the last message will be used. (If the status byte was omitted from the last message, the appropriate status byte will be added.) E CLEAR BANK This button erases the currently selected bank (all MIDI messages will be deleted). 6 7 8 H LATCH F MIDI message From the top, these fields assign MIDI messages to the ENCODER [ON] keys, encoders, CH [ON] keys, and faders. Click the to open the MIDI REMOTE SETUP window, and input the message as hexadecimal values. You can input the following values. Value Available Assignments Content 00(H)– FF(H) All The MIDI message that is transmitted (hexadecimal). All Indicates the end of the MIDI message. When you operate the corresponding controller, the MIDI message from the beginning until immediately before END will be transmitted. All Indicates the on/off status of the encoder [ON] key or the channel [ON] key. A value of 7F(H) is transmitted when the key turns on, and a value of 00(H) is transmitted when the key turns off. If this is assigned to an ENCODER or FADER, the current value of the key will be transmitted when the encoder or fader is operated. ENCODER ON/ ENCODER Indicates the current position of the encoder. If assigned to an ENCODER, a value of 00–7F(H) is transmitted when the encoder is operated. If assigned to an ENCODER [ON] key, the current value of the encoder is transmitted when the key is switched on. CH ON/ FADER Indicates the current position of the fader. If assigned to a FADER, a value of 00–7F(H) is transmitted when the fader is operated. If assigned to a CH [ON] key, the current value of the fader is transmitted when the key is switched on. END SW ENC FAD If a specific byte is set to “SW” in a message assigned to an ENCODER [ON] key or CH [ON] key, use the LATCH button to select one of the following behaviors. • If the LATCH button is on The on/off status will change each time you press the key (Latched). If you press the key from the Off state, a MIDI message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be transmitted, and when you press the same key once again a MIDI message with 00(H) as the SW value will be transmitted. • If the LATCH button is off The switch will be on only while you are holding it down, and will turn off when you release it (Unlatched). Immediately after you press the key, a MIDI message with 7F(H) as the SW value will be transmitted; immediately after you release the key, a MIDI message with a SW value of 00(H) will be transmitted. If a specific byte is set to “ENC” (or “FAD”) in a message assigned to an ENCODER [ON] key or a CH [ON] key, use the LATCH button to select one of the following behaviors. • If the LATCH button is on If you press the key from the Off state, a MIDI message with the current setting of the encoder (or fader) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted, and when you press the same key once again a MIDI message with a value of 00(H) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted. • If the LATCH button is off The moment you press the key, a MIDI message with the current setting of the encoder (or fader) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted; the moment you release the key, a MIDI message with 00(H) as the ENC (or FAD) value will be transmitted. Hint When you click a hexadecimal value, the region interpreted as a MIDI message that includes that value will be displayed in red. 176 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Note If SW/ENC/FAD is not specified as the last byte of the MIDI message, turning the key on or off will transmit the same MIDI message; i.e., the same message is transmitted when the key goes off. Switches the Dimmer function on/off SOURCE= [monitor source name] Switches the monitor source MONO ON Switches the monitor section [MONO] key on LATCH Switches the Talkback function on/off (latched operation) UNLATCH Switches the Talkback function on/off (unlatched operation) CH ONLATCH [channel name] Switches the channel on/ off (latched operation) CH ONUNLATCH [channel name] Switches the channel on/ off (unlatched operation) FADER LEVEL [channel name] Modifies the fader value (LEVEL parameter) according to the voltage FRONT-REAR PAN [SEL] according to the voltage. LEFT-RIGHT PAN [SEL] Modifies the surround panning (left/right) of the selected channel according to the voltage. FRONT-REAR PAN [ODD] Modifies the surround panning (front/rear) of the selected odd-numbered channel according to the voltage. LEFT-RIGHT PAN [ODD] Modifies the surround panning (left/right) of the selected odd-numbered channel according to the voltage. FRONT-REAR PAN [EVEN] Modifies the surround panning (front/rear) of the selected even-numbered channel according to the voltage. LEFT-RIGHT PAN [EVEN] Modifies the surround panning (left/right) of the selected even-numbered channel according to the voltage. USER DEFINED KEY FUNCTION [User Defined key bank / key number] While the external input is active, executes the same operation as when the selected User Defined key is pressed USER DEFINED KEY LED [User Defined key bank / key number] While the external input is active, lights the LED of the selected User Defined key MONITOR GPI TALKBACK ON 3 4 5 SURROUND PAN 1 2 A GPI IN port These are the numbers of the GPI IN ports for which you can make settings. B GPI IN status The yellow bar indicates the input signal voltage state of the corresponding port. If the bar is not shown, the signal is in the grounded state; if the bar is displayed to the right edge, the signal is at the high level state. Use the POLARITY (3) field to select whether the signal is active when low or high. C POLARITY This selects how GPI IN on/off will be detected. You can choose Low Active (active when the key is grounded) or High Active (active when key is open, or when a high level signal is input). D FUNCTION E PARAMETER These fields indicate the function that is executed when the corresponding GPI IN port becomes active (or the function that is controlled by the voltage value being input from the GPI IN port), and option parameters for that function. To edit the settings, click the button at the left to open the GPI IN PORT ASSIGN window, and select the function and parameter from the following table. PEAK HOLD ON OSCILLATOR ON Information shown in the display DIMMER ON Function menu Here you can make settings for GPI (General Purpose Interface) input/output, used to transfer control signals between the PM5D and an external device. PM5D operation No assignment Global functions — Output functions PARAMETER Input functions FUNCTION NO ASSIGN Appendices GPI screen Switches the Peak Hold function on/off — SOLO ON PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Switches the Oscillator on/ off Switches the Solo function on/off Reference section 177 MIDI REMOTE function ❏ GPI IN MONITOR ❏ GPI OUT MN O P Q 8 6 9 7 J KL F GPI IN monitor The voltage from the GPI IN port selected by the XAXIS field (8) and Y-AXIS field (9) is respectively indicated by a yellow in the X-axis (horizontal) and Y-axis (vertical) dimensions of the graph. The range of voltage variation used to determine the active/inactive status is shown as a red rectangle. K GPI OUT port These are the numbers of the GPI OUT ports for which you can make settings. L GPI OUT status This indicates the state of the output signal for the corresponding port. The L/H character indicates whether the signal level is Low (the output level is grounded) or High (the output level is high). The background color is yellow when active, and gray when inactive. Use the POLARITY (L) field to select whether the signal is active when low or high. G CALIBRATION This button calibrates the range of voltage variation used by the PM5D to determine active/inactive status, so that the range will be appropriate for the voltages being input from the GPI PORT. (For details on using calibration ➥ p.125) When you turn this button on, the range of voltage variation will be temporarily cleared; the range will be updated every time the GPI IN voltage changes. When you turn this button off, the range of variation will be memorized, and this range of variation will subsequently be used to determine the active/inactive state. M POLARITY Selects the polarity of the signal that is output when the GPI OUT port becomes active. You can select either Low Active (grounded when active) or High Active (high level when active). N TEST This button tests the operation of each GPI OUT port. While this button is on, the corresponding GPI OUT port will temporarily become active, and a signal will be output according to the POLARITY (L) setting. H X-AXIS I Y-AXIS These fields select the GPI IN port for which calibration will be performed. You can click the / buttons at left and right to change the port. If you are using a two-dimensional controller such as a joystick, specify a port for both the X-axis and Y-axis. If you want to perform calibration for only one direction, set one of the ports to “-----.” J REVERSE This button inverts the low/high level of the input, changing the displayed direction of the graph. This is equivalent to switching the POLARITY (3) of the selected GPI IN port. 178 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual O FADER START Indicates the channel of the fader assigned as a trigger to each GPI OUT port, and the fader mode (trigger detection method) of that fader. To edit the settings, click the button at the left to open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select the fader mode and channel. You can select the following fader modes. • FADER START A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves from –60 dB or below to exceed –60 dB. • FADER STOP A control signal (trigger signal) 250 msec long will be output when the fader of the selected channel reaches –∞ dB. • FADER TALLY A control signal will be output when the fader of the selected channel moves from –60 dB or below to exceed –60 dB. This control signal will be held until the fader reaches –∞ dB (or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger). The setting of the GPI screen’s FADER START field is linked with the GPI-related settings of the FADER START screen (➥ p.179). Reference section Here you can make settings for the Fader Start function which lets you use input channel faders to control GPI OUT ports or external devices. FADER START Q TALLY Global functions This area indicates the state of other Tally output functions assigned as triggers to each port. When you execute the corresponding operation on the PM5D, a control signal will be output from the corresponding GPI OUT port. This control signal will be held until you defeat the above operation (or until that GPI OUT port receives a different trigger). To edit the settings, click the button at the left to open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window, and select one of the following functions. PM5D operation 1 2 No assignment POWER ON The PM5D’s power is turned on SOLO ON [SOLO] key is turned on GPI IN 1 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 1 becomes active GPI IN 2 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 2 becomes active GPI IN 3 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 3 becomes active GPI IN 4 FUNCTION The function assigned to GPI IN port 4 becomes active PREVIEW ON SCENE MEMORY section [PREVIEW] key is turned on CUE ON [INPUT ONLY] Input channel [CUE] key is turned on CUE ON [DCA ONLY] DCA [CUE] key is turned on CUE ON [OUTPUT ONLY] Output channel [CUE] key is turned on B OUTPUT TYPE CUE ON Any [CUE] key is turned on C PARAMETER 3 4 Output functions NO ASSIGN A INPUT CH (Input channel) This area shows the number and name of the channels (input channels, ST IN channels) for which you can make settings. When you click a line to select it, that line will be highlighted in the center of the list. Indicates the type of signal that will be output when you operate the corresponding fader, and option parameters for it. To edit the setting, click the button at the left of the OUTPUT TYPE field to open the FADER START ASSIGN window. You can select the following output types and parameters. • NO ASSIGN No assignment. • GPI A trigger will be sent to the specified GPI OUT port according to the fader operation of the corresponding channel, and a control signal will be output. (The polarity of the control signal will be as specified by the settings in the GPI screen.) If this output type is selected, you can choose from the following two option parameters. FADER START . . . GPI OUT port from which the trigger is sent when the fader changes from below –60 dB to exceed –60 dB. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Appendices Function Information shown in the display FADER START screen Function menu This area indicates the User Defined keys that are assigned as triggers to each GPI OUT port, and their operations. To edit the setting, click the button at the left to open the GPI OUT PORT ASSIGN window; from the list, select the User Defined key bank (A–D) and number (1–25), and how the trigger signal will be transmitted. As the transmission method for the trigger signal, you can select either Latch (switch between active/inactive each time the key is pressed) or Unlatch (active only while the key is pressed). Input functions P USER DEFINED KEYS 179 MIDI REMOTE function FADER STOP . . . . . GPI OUT port from which the trigger is sent when the fader reaches –∞ dB. Note that the GPI-related settings you make in the FADER START screen are linked with the FADER START field of the GPI screen. For example, if in the FADER START screen you specify different ports for the FADER START parameter and FADER STOP parameter of a certain channel, the FADER START field of the GPI screen will be assigned to the corresponding channel (Fader Mode= FADER START/FADER STOP) of those ports. (The opposite also applies.) • MMC An MMC command will be sent from the currentlyenabled MIDI port according to the fader operation of the corresponding channel. (The MIDI transmit port is selected in the MIDI SETUP screen.) An MMC PLAY command is transmitted when the fader changes from below –60 dB to –60 dB or higher, and an MMC STOP command is transmitted when the fader reaches –∞ dB. If this output type is selected, you can use an option parameter to specify the MMC device ID number (1– 127 or ALL). • RS422 An RS422 protocol command will be sent from the RS422 REMOTE connector according to the fader operation of the corresponding channel. An RS422 protocol PLAY command is transmitted when the fader changes from below –60 dB to –60 dB or higher, and an RS422 protocol STOP command is transmitted when the fader reaches –∞ dB. ⇔ D CLEAR ALL Clears the Output Type field assignments of all channels. ⇔ If the same port is specified for the FADER START parameter and the FADER STOP parameter, the GPI screen FADER START field will be assigned to the channel corresponding to that port (Fader Mode= FADER TALLY). (The opposite is also true.) 180 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section TRANSPORT screen Information shown in the display 3 Here you can use MMC/RS422 protocol commands to remotely control transport/locate operations on a recorder or other external device from the PM5D. C Transport A MMC DEVICE No. These buttons operate the transport of an external device. When you click a button, the corresponding MMC/RS422 command (from the left, REWIND, FAST FORWARD, STOP, PLAY, REC) will be transmitted. There is an indicator above each RS422 transport button; the indicator will light as follows according to the status of the external device being controlled. • P2 1 Indicates the device ID number of the external device to be controlled via MMC. To change this setting, click the / buttons at left and right to choose from the range 1–127 or ALL (applies to all device ID numbers). B RS422 DATA FORMAT 2 Select the format (P2 or DENON) of the RS422 commands sent from the RS422 REMOTE connector. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. Playing lit Fast-forwarding lit Rewinding lit Stopped lit Recording and lit • DENON Note The RS422 command format you specify in this screen also applies to the RS422 commands issued by the Fader Start function or the User Defined keys. Playing lit Paused blinking Standby lit Stopped Note Output functions 6 Input functions 5 All dark Recording and Recording paused lit, Appendices 4 Global functions Function menu TRANSPORT lit blinking DENON format is a set of commands used in devices such as Denon’s professional CD (DN-C680) and MD (DN-M1050R) players. On the CD or MD player, set the settings to 9600 bps and RS422. If you are using DENON format, clicking the button during Play will enter Pause mode; clicking the button during Standby will Stop. While stopped, click the button once again if you want to Standby. Clicking the button will return to the previous track, and clicking the button will advance to the next track. Use a D-sub 9-pin straight cable to connect the REMOTE RS422 connector to the device you wish to control using P2 or DENON format. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 181 MIDI REMOTE function D LOCATE POINT These buttons correspond to each locate point. Twenty locate points can be specified for MMC-compatible devices, and another twenty locate points can be separately specified for RS422-compatible devices. When you click buttons 1–20, an MMC command or RS422 command for moving to that locate point will be transmitted. DME CONTROL screen Here you can remotely control various functions of a Yamaha DME series digital mixing engine. Hint As of this writing (August 2004), this function can be used with the DME series models DME64N and DME24N. (This function cannot be used with the DME32.) E Time code This field indicates the time code that is specified for each locate point. To edit the time code, click the button located at the left to open the MMC/RS422 LOCATE POINT window, and specify the new time code in hours/minutes/seconds/frames. (In the case of DENON format, use track/minute/second/frame units to specify the value.) You can also use the CAPTURE button located at the right to capture the time code being received by the PM5D. 1 2 3 4 5 F CAPTURE This button captures the time code currently being received by the PM5D, and inputs it in the time code field. In the case of MMC, the time code source, frame rate, and offset time can be specified in the EVENT LIST screen (SCENE function). (➥ p.161) In the case of RS422, the time data at that moment for the external device being controlled will be captured. 6 A Component type selection area • • • • • • • • Here you can select the type of DME series component that you want to control from the PM5D. When you click the / buttons at the left and right to select the type of component, the display in the central area of the screen will change accordingly. The following types of component can be selected. SETUP Select the port connecting the PM5D and the DME series unit, and initiate or terminate communication. GEQ Control the DME series unit’s graphic EQ from the PM5D. PEQ Control the DME series unit’s parametric EQ from the PM5D. CROSS OVER An internal signal within the DME series unit is divided into six bands, and the output level, filter slope and type, and cutoff frequency etc. can be controlled for each band. This screen also lets you specify the crossover frequency at which the bands are divided. LONG DELAY SHORT DELAY Control the long delay and short delay functions of the DME series unit from the PM5D. MATRIX Specify the level of the signals sent from a specific input of the DME series unit to all outputs, or from all inputs to a specific output. SLOT OUTPUT For each slot of the DME series unit, specify the output level, delay time, and phase setting of each port. B Component selection area From the type of component you selected in 1, select the component that you want to control. 182 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section D STORE/RECALL These buttons save (overwrite) the settings of the DME series unit edited in the PM5D’s screen into the scene selected in the SCENE area, or recall the scene selected in the SCENE area into the DME. Note • When storing a DME scene from the PM5D’s screen, you can only store by overwriting an existing scene on the DME; you cannot store the settings as a new scene or edit the scene name. • If SETUP is selected, items 3, 4, and 6 are not shown. OUT connectors (DME64N only) In this connection method, the CASCADE IN connector and CASCADE OUT connector of the PM5D and the DME64N are connected to each other, allowing bi-directional transfer of audio signals. Since the DME24N does not have CASCADE IN/OUT connectors, it cannot use this method. CASCADE IN connector CASCADE OUT connector CASCADE IN connector CASCADE OUT connector DME64N E Parameter display area 3 Uni-directional connection using the CASCADE IN/ The parameters that can be assigned to DCA faders will depend on the component. This function may not be available for some components. CASCADE OUT connector CASCADE IN connector DME64N Output functions Note ❏ Connecting the PM5D with a DME series unit Various methods for connecting the PM5D with a DME series unit to transmit and receive audio signals and control signals are shown below. Note If characters other than alphabetical characters and symbols (e.g., double-byte characters such as Japanese) are used on the DME series unit in a component name or scene name, such characters may not be displayed correctly. 1 Bi-directional connection via CobraNet This connection method uses CobraNet (a format for transmitting multi-channel audio signals and control signals over Ethernet). Install an MY16-C CobraNet format compliant digital I/O card in a slot on both the PM5D and the DME series unit, and use an Ethernet cable to connect the two MY16-C cards. This method allows bi-directional transfer of audio signals over a single cable. For example, signals can be sent via the PM5D’s MIX bus to the DME for processing, and then returned to a PM5D input channel. MY16-C MY16-C Slot DME64N DME24N PM5D 4 Uni-directional connection using the CASCADE IN/ OUT connectors — 2 (DME64N only) This method is a uni-directional connection that sends audio signals from the PM5D via its CASCADE OUT connector to the DME64N. CASCADE IN connector CASCADE OUT connector Input functions You can use DCA faders 1–8 to control the parameters of the component currently shown in the screen. OUT connectors — 1 (DME64N only) This method is a uni-directional connection that sends audio signals from the DME64N to the PM5D via its CASCADE IN connector. DME64N Appendices F ASSIGN TO FADERS (DCA fader assignments) Global functions PM5D This area displays the parameters of the currently selected component. The displayed contents will depend on the component. Slot Function menu This area indicates/selects the scene that will be stored/ recalled on the DME series unit. When you click the / buttons located at left and right to select a number, the name of that scene is shown in the field at right. Information shown in the display 2 Bi-directional connection using the CASCADE IN/ C SCENE PM5D Note When using the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors to make connections, the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors are used as the connectors, but the settings will be the same as when using slot input/output. In the CASCADE CONNECTION area of the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function), you will need to make settings so that the CASCADE IN connector is assigned to the SLOT IN port (if using the CASCADE IN connector) or the SLOT OUT port is assigned to the CASCADE OUT connector (if using the CASCADE OUT connector). Hint PM5D If desired, you can control the DME series unit from the PM5D without transmitting or received audio signals. In this case, simply make one of the connections shown in examples 2– 4; control signals will be sent from the PM5D to the DME. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 183 MIDI REMOTE function ❏ Initiating communication between the PM5D and the DME series unit 4 To select the port used for audio signal transmission/reception between the PM5D and the DME series unit, and to initiate communication, proceed as follows. 1 2 Connect the PM5D and the DME series unit. 3 In the component selection area at the upper left of the screen, select SETUP. A screen like the following will appear. In the DISPLAY ACCESS section, press the [MIDI/REMOTE] key several times to access the DME CONTROL screen. 1 2 In the INPUT PORT area located at the lower left of the screen, select the PM5D port that will receive audio signals from the DME series unit. The types of port that can be selected here will depend on the port that is currently selected for cascade input (MIXER SETUP screen CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field), as follows. Setting in the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT field (MIXER SETUP screen) Items available in the INPUT PORT field CASCADE IN ----, SLOT1–SLOT4 SLOT4 ----, CASCADE IN, SLOT1–SLOT3 SLOT3/4 ----, CASCADE IN, SLOT1–SLOT2 SLOT1-4 [CH1-8] ----, CASCADE IN SLOT1-4 [CH9-16] ----, CASCADE IN Note You cannot switch the cascade input port setting from the DME CONTROL screen. If necessary, click the MIXER SETUP button to access the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/ W.CLOCK function), and change the port you will use for cascade input. 5 3 4 6 5 In the MONITOR PORT field, select the PM5D port that will receive monitor signals from the DME series unit. The following ports can be selected. ---- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .No assignment SLOT1-1–SLOT4-16 . . .The desired port of slot 1–4 CASCADE 1–32 . . . . . . .CASCADE IN ports 1–32 6 In the OUTPUT PORT field located in the lower right of the screen, select the PM5D port that will transmit audio signals to the DME. The types of port that can be selected here will depend on the port that is currently selected for cascade output (MIXER SETUP screen CASCADE OUT PORT SELECT field), as follows. The SETUP screen contains the following items. A CONNECT This button initiates or terminates the connection between the PM5D and the DME series unit. B MIDI PGM CHANGE (MIDI program change) If this button is on, a program change message will be transmitted to the DME via the I/O card (MY16-C) or via the CASCADE IN/OUT connectors when a scene is recalled on the PM5D. This allows scenes to be recalled on the DME in tandem with scene recall operations on the PM5D. C INPUT PORT Here you can select the PM5D port that will receive audio signals from the DME. D MONITOR PORT Here you can select the PM5D port that will receive monitor signals from the DME. Since this monitor signal is sent to the PM5D’s CUE bus, the DME’s monitor function can be controlled from the PM5D just like the PM5D’s own cue function (EXTERNAL CUE function). E MIXER SETUP (show the MIXER SETUP screen) This button displays the SYS/W.CLOCK function MIXER SETUP screen. F OUTPUT PORT Here you can select the PM5D port that will output audio signals to the DME. 184 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Setting in the CASCADE OUT PORT SELECT field (MIXER SETUP screen) Items available in the OUTPUT PORT field CASCADE OUT ----, SLOT1–SLOT4 SLOT3/4 SLOT1-4 [CH1-8] ----, SLOT1–SLOT4, CASCADE OUT SLOT1-4 [CH9-16] Note You cannot switch the cascade output port setting from the DME CONTROL screen. If necessary, click the MIXER SETUP button to access the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/ W.CLOCK function), and change the port you will use for cascade output. Hint Hint • The above program change message is always transmitted via the MY16-C card or the CASCADE IN/OUT connector. This is not affected by MIDI PGM CHANGE or by the MIDI program change transmission port or transmission on/off setting selected in the MIDI SETUP screen. • The program number assignment for each scene can be specified in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen. 8 To initiate communication between the PM5D and the DME series unit, click the CONNECT button to turn it on. While the CONNECT button is on, parameter operations and scene store/recall operations on the DME can be remotely controlled from the PM5D. To terminate communication, click the CONNECT button once again to turn it off. If you want to use DCA faders 1–8 to control the parameters of the component, click an A–F button in the ASSIGN TO FADERS area. When you click a button A–F, the corresponding parameters will be assigned to DCA faders 1–8, and can be controlled by the faders. To return to the previous state, click the DCA button. Information shown in the display 4 As an alternative to clicking the A–F buttons, you can obtain the same result by holding down the top panel [SHIFT] key and pressing the [A]–[F] keys of the FADER MODE section. 5 If you want to store your changes in a scene of the DME series unit, use the SCENE field in the upper right of the screen to select the storedestination, and click the STORE button. The edited settings will be stored as a scene in the DME. To recall this scene, use the SCENE field in the upper right of the screen to select the scene, and click the RECALL button. Note When storing a DME scene from the PM5D’s screen, you can only store by overwriting an existing scene on the DME; you cannot store the settings as a new scene or edit the scene name. Function menu If you want scene changes on the PM5D to be linked with scene changes on the DME series unit, turn on the MIDI PGM CHANGE button in the center of the screen. If the MIDI PGM CHANGE button is on, switching the scene on the PM5D will cause a program change message of a number corresponding to that scene to be sent to the DME. Global functions 7 ❏ Controlling DME parameters 2 In the upper left of the screen, use the component type / component selection areas to select the component you want to control. If a component other than SETUP is selected, internal parameters of the DME can be controlled from the PM5D screen. The following illustration is an example of when the SLOT OUTPUT component is selected. 3 Use the knobs, sliders, and buttons in the screen to control the parameters of the DME series unit. Knob, slider, and button operation methods are the same as for the PM5D’s internal parameters. For details on the parameters that can be operated for each component, refer to the owner’s manual of the DME series unit. Input functions In the DME CONTROL screen, choose SETUP, and turn on the CONNECT button to initiate communication. Appendices 1 Output functions Here’s how the parameters of the DME series unit can be controlled from the PM5D. If desired, the changes you make can be saved in the scene of the DME series unit. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 185 UTILITY function UTILITY function PREFERENCE 1/2 screens Preference settings for the PM5D are divided into two screens. PREFERENCE 1 • AUTO STORE Turns the Auto Store function on/off. If this button is on, pressing the [STORE] button (SCENE MEMORY section) of the panel twice in succession will store the current scene in the currently selected scene number. • LINKED LIBRARY PROTECTION If this button is on, you will be unable to overwrite or delete library items that are linked to a protected scene. This option prevents a protected scene from being modified by having an associated library item edited. • USE NUMERIC-KEYPAD If this button is on, the numeric keypad of a PS/2 keyboard connected to the KEYBOARD connector (or a numeric keypad connected to the KEYBOARD connector) can be used to specify the scene number directly. • STORE CONFIRMATION • RECALL CONFIRMATION If these buttons are on, a confirmation message will appear when you perform a Store or Recall operation respectively. B PATCH These buttons let you turn on/off options related to patch operations. You can select the following options. • PATCH CONFIRMATION If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch. • STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear when you edit an input patch or output patch item that is already patched. PREFERENCE 2 C GATE/COMP (Gate / Compressor) These buttons let you turn on/off options related to gating and compression. • GR METER ON/OFF LINK If this button is on, the GR meter will not show the reduction amount for gates/compressors that are currently off. D METER SECTION 1 2 3 4 A STORE/RECALL These buttons let you turn on/off options related to scene store/recall operations. You can select the following options. 186 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Here you can set the following meter-related options. • FOLLOW INPUT LAYER This option lets you specify how the [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys (INPUT channel strip) and [STIN 1-4]/ [FXRTN 1-4] keys will select the layer that is shown by the meters in the center of the panel and the meters in the upper right of the panel. Click the / buttons at left and right to make your choice. OFF . . . . . . . . Operating the [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys will not affect the content shown by the meters in the center of the panel. Pressing the [STIN 1-4]/ [FXRTN 1-4] keys will not affect the content shown by the meters in the upper right of the panel. SAME . . . . . . . When you press the [CH 1-24] or [CH 25-48] key, the corresponding layer will be shown by the meters in the center of the panel (if an input channel is selected in the meter section). When you press the [STIN 1-4] or [FXRTN 1-4] key, the corresponding layer will be shown by the meters in the upper right of the panel. Reference section Input channel phase/attenuator INPUT EQ function ø/ ATT screen EQUALIZER EQ-related parameters INPUT EQ/OUTPUT EQ function EQ PARAM screen DYNAMICS Gate/compressorrelated parameters INPUT GATE/COMP function or OUTPUT COMP function GATE PARAM or COMP PARAM screen DELAY Delay-related parameters INPUT DELAY/OUTPUT DELAY function screens DCA group / Mute group / Recall saferelated parameters INPUT DCA/GROUP function or OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function DCA GROUP ASSIGN, MUTE GROUP ASSIGN or RECALL SAFE screen TO MIX/STEREO TO MIX/TO STEREO-related parameters PAN/ROUTING function CH to MIX screen or SURR PARAM screen, or MATRIX/ST function MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen TO MATRIX Send level to MATRIX bus MATRIX/ST function MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen 5 6 7 OUTPUT MASTER MIX/MATRIX channel output level OUTPUT VIEW function FADER VIEW screen E PANEL OPERATION Here you can set the following options for panel operation. • AUTO CHANNEL SELECT This specifies whether the corresponding channel will be selected when you operate a channel’s [ON] key, fader, or encoder. INPUT CH (input channels) and OUTPUT CH (output channels) can be turned on/off separately. • AUTO DISPLAY For each of the following items, you can individually specify whether the related screen will automatically appear when you use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to operate a specific parameter. The following table shows the parameters corresponding to each button and the screen that will appear. DCA/MUTE/ SAFE • MAKE PAIR ON PANEL If this button is on, you can use the [SEL] keys to set/ defeat pairing. In Horizontal Pair mode, you can set/ defeat pairing by simultaneously pressing the [SEL] keys of two pairable channels. In Vertical Pair mode, you can set/defeat pairing by holding down the [SHIFT] key and pressing the [SEL] key of one of the channels. (For more about pair modes ➥ p.45) • DCA/MUTE FLASH INDICATE If this button is on, the DCA [MUTE] key LED and the DCA assign LED for channels belonging to that DCA group will blink when you turn on a DCA [MUTE] key (DCA section). • MIX MINUS CONFIRMATION If this button is on, a confirmation message will appear when you execute the Mix Minus setting (hold down the [SEL] key of an input channel and press the [SEL] key of a MIX channel) from the panel. • SCENE UP/DOWN KEY This specifies what the SCENE MEMORY [π]/[†] keys will do when pressed in the SCENE screen. You can choose one of the following two operations. SCENE +1/–1 . . . . . Pressing the SCENE MEMORY [π] key will select the next highest-numbered scene, and pressing the SCENE MEMORY [†] key will select the next lowest-numbered scene. (Key presses will increment/decrement the scene number.) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display PHASE/ATT Function menu INPUT HA/INSERT function screens Global functions Input channel head amp gain Output functions • FOLLOW MIX MASTER MODE If this button is on, pressing the MIX section [MIX MASTER] key will cause the meters in the center of the panel and the meters in the upper right of the panel to show the MIX/MATRIX channel levels. Press the MIX section [MIX SEND] key to return to the original input channel level display. Screen that appears HA Note • If this is set to SAME or ALTERNATIVE, the meters in the center of the panel and the meters in the upper right can be switched independently. • If the selected layer is switched from the panel, the layer shown by the meters will also change. However if you switch the METER SECTION field in the constantly-displayed area in the upper part of the screen, the layer selected on the panel will not change. Corresponding parameters Input functions Button name Appendices ALTERNATIVE . . . When you press the [CH 1-24] or [CH 25-48] key, the opposite layer will be shown by the meters in the center of the panel (if an input channel is selected in the meter section). When you press the [STIN 1-4] or [FXRTN 1-4] key, the opposite layer will be shown by the meters in the upper right of the panel. 187 UTILITY function LIST UP/DOWN . . Pressing the SCENE MEMORY [π] key will scroll the list upward, and pressing the SCENE MEMORY [†] key will scroll the list downward. (Key presses will scroll the list upward/downward.) • LIST ORDER This specifies the order in which scene memories and library items will appear in the screen. NORMAL . . . . . . . . Show the list in ascending numerical order. REVERSE . . . . . . . . Show the list in descending numerical order. F INTERNAL CLOCK This indicates the date (DATE) and time (TIME) of the internal clock. To edit the setting, click the SET button. G BATTERY This indicates the voltage of the internal battery. I TRACK PAD/MOUSE Here you can make settings for the built-in track pad or a PS/2 mouse connected to the MOUSE connector. • TRACK PAD TAPPING This enables/disables the Tapping function (a function that lets you perform the track pad left-click operation by tapping quickly on the track pad). • MOVING SPEED This selects the speed at which the cursor in the screen will move when you operate the built-in track pad or a PS/2 mouse connected to the MOUSE connector. Choose one of three speeds; FAST, MID, or SLOW. J SCREEN TIPS • SHOW SCREEN TIPS If this button is on, moving the cursor onto an item in the screen and waiting for a short time will (in some cases) display a “screen tip” reminding you of the operation. The screen tip is displayed when you open the JOB SELECT window by holding down the [SHIFT] key and pressing the [ENTER] key, or when you need to press the [ENTER] key to finalize an edited value. ❏ PREFERENCE screen 2 K 8 L 9 M J K UPPER PART DISPLAY H BRIGHTNESS • • • • • 188 Here you can make settings for the brightness of the panel LED and LCD displays. PANEL UNITY POINT If this button is on, LEDs corresponding to a specific reference value (e.g., 0 dB or CENTER) will light more brightly than usual. However, this is valid only if PANEL BRIGHTNESS is set to 5 or less. PANEL ASSISTANCE If this button is on, even LEDs that should be off will stay dimly lit so that you can tell their location even in a dark environment. However, this is valid only if PANEL BRIGHTNESS is set to 5 or less. PANEL BRIGHTNESS This adjusts the brightness of all panel LEDs in a range of 1–8. LCD BRIGHTNESS You can adjust the brightness of the LCD display in a three-step range: HIGH, MID, or LOW. LCD BACK LIGHT You can adjust the brightness of the LCD display backlight in a two-step range: HIGH or LOW. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual These buttons select the item that is shown in the center right (to the right of the scene memory indication) of the upper part of the display (the constantly displayed area). • PRESENT TIME Indicates the present time. • TIME CODE Indicates the internal time code being generated by the PM5D, or the time code being received from an external device. This is the same as the time code shown in the SCENE function EVENT LIST screen. • CASCADE/Fs Indicates the master/slave status when using a cascade connection, and the sampling frequency at which the PM5D system is currently operating. Hint You can also cycle through these choices by clicking in this display section. L NAME DISPLAY ([NAME] indicator display) Reference section Choose one of the following as the content that will be shown by the [NAME] indicators of the INPUT channel strip and DCA strip. Here you can assign functions to the User Defined keys (USER DEFINED [1]–[25] keys). M WARNING DISPLAY Here you can select whether a warning will be displayed when the following problems occur. • TIME CODE DROP When time code (LTC, MTC) being received from an external device is dropped. • DIGITAL I/O ERROR When a DIO error is detected. • MIDI I/O ERROR When a MIDI error is detected. 1 3 2 A BANK Select a bank A–D (groups of functions assigned to the User Defined keys). Global functions Function menu USER DEFINE Information shown in the display USER DEFINE screen Output functions • NAME The indicators will show the names assigned to the input channels / DCA groups in the NAME screen (INPUT PATCH function). (➥ p.257) • PORT For input channels, the indicators will show the name of the currently assigned port. For DCA groups, the indicators will show the ID number. • ID For both input channels and DCA groups, the indicators will show the fixed ID number. B CLEAR BANK C List Appendices This area lists the functions and option parameters assigned to the User Defined keys in the currently selected bank. To edit the settings, click the button at the left to open the USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN window, and select the function and parameter from the following table. Input functions Clears the currently selected bank. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 189 UTILITY function FUNCTION PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 — — No assignment INC RECALL — Recall the scene of the next existing number. DEC RECALL — NO ASSIGN SCENE DIRECT RECALL SCENE #000–#500 TIME CODE [RTN TO START] Explanation Recall the scene of the previous existing number. Directly recall the scene of the specified number The same functions as the RETURN TO START TIME, STOP, and PLAY buttons displayed when INTERNAL is selected as the time code source in the EVENT LIST screen TIME CODE [STOP] TIME CODE [PLAY] — TIME CODE [INSERT] The same function as the TIME CODE INSERT button in the EVENT LIST screen AUTO CAPTURE ON The same function as the AUTO CAPTURE button in the EVENT LIST screen EVENT LIST DIRECT EVENT RECALL EVENT #000–#999 Recall the specified event registered in the EVENT LIST screen NEXT EVENT RECALL Recall the next-numbered event PREV EVENT RECALL Recall the previous-numbered event — ENABLE/DISABLE Switch the ENABLE button and DISABLE button in the EVENT LIST screen ENABLE [ALL MANUAL]/DISABLE Switch the ENABLE [ALL MANUAL] button and DISABLE button in the EVENT LIST screen INC RECALL DIRECT RECALL → EFFECT DEC RECALL 1–8 LIBRARY #001–#199 Recall the next-numbered library item into effect 1–8 EFFECT LIBRARY EFFECT BYPASS EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 Bypass the specified effect BYPASS ON Recall the previous-numbered library item into effect 1–8 Recall the library item of the specified number into effect 1–8 INPUT CH LIBRARY LIBRARY #000–#199 OUTPUT CH LIBRARY GATE LIBRARY COMP LIBRARY LIBRARY #001–#199 INPUT EQ LIBRARY OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY DIRECT RECALL Recall the library item of the specified number into the selected channel/GEQ module INPUT PATCH LIBRARY LIBRARY #00–#99 OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY HA LIBRARY GEQ LIBRARY DIRECT RECALL → GEQ 1– 12 LIBRARY #000–#199 The same function as the ENABLE/DISABLE button in the TRACKING RECALL screen ENABLE/DISABLE TRACKING RECALL OFFSET LOCK — Switch the Tracking Recall function on/off for the currently selected channel SELECTED CH ON SELECTED CH ASSIGN TALKBACK ASSIGN MONITOR TAP TEMPO SURROUND PAN — MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8, STEREO A L/R, STESend the talkback signal to the specified output channel REO B L/R DIRECT ASSIGN MIX 1–24, MATRIX 1–8 DIMMER ON — CURRENT PAGE — EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 GRAB SELECTED CH, ODD CH, EVEN CH — UNLATCH Switch on the monitor dimmer function Control the Tap Tempo function in the displayed screen Control the Tap Tempo function of the specified effect Use a joystick assigned to GPI to begin controlling the surround pan of the corresponding channel Each time you press the key, the [NAME] indicator for each fader will cycle through the channel name → port name → ID (channel number) The [NAME] indicator for each fader will show the port name only while you hold down the key The [NAME] indicator for each fader will show the channel name only while you hold down the key NAME PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Monitor the desired MIX/MATRIX channel *1 The [NAME] indicator for each fader will show the ID (channel number) only while you hold down the key ID PORT 190 When an output channel is selected, turn talkback transmission on/off for that channel DIRECT ASSIGN NAME → PORT → ID NAME DISPLAY The same function as the OFFSET LOCK button in the TRACKING RECALL screen Reference section PAGE BACK PAGE FORWARD — PAGE BOOKMARK GEQ PARAM PAGE GEQ 1–12 Display the GEQ PARAM screen EFFECT PARAM PAGE EFFECT 1–8 Display the EFFECT PARAM screen — — LATCH Switch the function of the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys (DIRECT RECALL / MUTE MASTER) each time you press the User Defined key UNLATCH The SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys will function as DIRECT RECALL while you hold down the User Defined key MODE CHANGE DIRECT SELECT BANK A–D Switch to the desired bank of User Defined key assignments MIDI NOTE C-2–G 8 When you press the key, transmit a note-on message with the specified note number and a velocity of 127 When you release the key, transmit a note-on message of the same note number with a velocity of 0 (= note-off)*4 MIDI PGM CHANGE 1–128 When you press the key, transmit a program change message with the specified number *4 0–119 When you press the key, transmit a control change message with the specified control number and a value of 127 When you release the key, transmit a control change message of the same control number with a value of 0*4 MIDI CTRL CHANGE SET LOCATION, RS-422 REC, RS-422 PLAY, RS-422 — STOP, RS-422 FF, RS-422 REW, RS-422 LOCATE 1–20 MACHINE CONTROL MMC REC, MMC PLAY, MMC STOP, MMC FF, MMC REW, MMC ID= 1–127, ALL MMC LOCATE 1–20 PM5D EDITOR CONTROL Switch to the previous bank of User Defined key assignments LATCH Switch the specified GPI OUT port between active/inactive each time you press the key UNLATCH Switch the specified GPI OUT port to inactive while you hold down the key *5 Switch windows in PM5D Editor on a PC PORT 1–12 *5 Transmit the specified RS422/MMC command from the RS422 REMOTE connector or the currently-valid MIDI port (the SET LOCATION command is common to RS422 and MMC) *1. The corresponding channel will be selected in the DEFINE field of the MONITOR screen, and the monitor source will switch to DEFINE. *2. The LED will light for User Defined keys for which a screen has been memorized. The column in the right of the list in the USER DEFINE screen shows the name of the memorized screen. *3. Layers that can be memorized include the following items. - The layer selected in the INPUT channel strip (CH 1-24, CH 25-48, MIDI REMOTE) - The layer selected in the ST IN/FX RTN channel strip (ST IN 1-4, FX RTN 1-4, MIDI REMOTE) - The layer shown by the DCA channel strip (DCA, A–F, GEQ) - If the DCA channel strip is controlling GEQ, the GEQ module number and band - The encoder mode selected by ENCODER MODE (SEND, PAN, HA, ATT, ALT) - The FADER FLIP status - The currently selected MIX send - The mode selected in the MIX section (MIX SEND, MIX MASTER) - The source selected in the METER section (CH 1-24 ST IN, CH 25-48 ST IN, MIX/MATRIX) *4. The output port and MIDI channel can be specified in the MIDI SETUP screen. *5. This parameter specifies the PM5D Editor window that you want to control. If the specified window is closed or inactive, the window will be opened and made active. If the specified window is already open and active, the window will be closed. This function can be selected if the system software supports PM5D Editor. For details on the most recent system software version, refer to the website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com Global functions Switch to the next bank of User Defined key assignments — Output functions NEXT BANK USER DEFINED KEY PREVIOUS BANK BANK GPI OUT CONTROL Memorize the state of the layer assigned to the panel (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the lastmemorized layer (press and release the key within two seconds)*3 Input functions LAYER SNAPSHOT MIDI DIRECT OUT Display the screen that you used immediately after the current screen Memorize the currently selected screen (hold down the key for two seconds or longer), or display the last-memorized screen (press and release the key within two seconds)*2 PAGE CHANGE DIRECT RECALL/ MUTE MASTER Explanation Display the screen that you used immediately prior to the current screen Information shown in the display PARAMETER 2 Function menu PARAMETER 1 Appendices FUNCTION Note During PREVIEW mode, the following USER DEFINE functions that affect internal signal processing are disabled; EVENT LIST, TALKBACK ASSIGN, MONITOR, MIDI DIRECT OUT, MACHINE CONTROL, and GPI OUT CONTROL. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 191 UTILITY function B Select the items to save SAVE screen Choose one of the following to specify the data that will be saved. Here you can save PM5D scenes and library data on a memory card inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot. This cannot be used while in PREVIEW mode. Button SAVE 1 A MODE Choose one of the following as the mode in which files will be saved: BASIC, ADVANCED, CSV EXPORT. The left side of the screen will change according to the mode you select. Content ALL DATA All items of each type, and the contents of the current scene SCENE MEMORY Contents of scene memory LINKED LIBRARY Libraries linked to the scene (available only if the SCENE MEMORY button is on) HA Contents of the HA library INPUT PATCH Contents of the input patch library OUTPUT PATCH Contents of the output patch library INPUT CH Contents of the input channel library OUTPUT CH Contents of the output channel library INPUT EQ Contents of the input EQ library OUTPUT EQ Contents of the output EQ library GATE Contents of the gate library COMP Contents of the compressor library EFFECT Contents of the effect library GEQ Contents of the GEQ library SETUP Various settings not saved in a scene USER DEFINED KEY User Defined key settings DCA FADER MODE Fader mode settings MIDI REMOTE MIDI remote settings MIDI PGM TABLE Contents of the list in the MIDI PGM CHANGE screen MIDI CTRL TABLE Contents of the list in the MIDI CTRL CHANGE screen EVENT LIST Contents of the list in the EVENT LIST screen If the SCENE MEMORY, HA, INPUT PATCH, or OUTPUT PATCH button is on, you can use the box at the right to specify the starting number and ending number of the scenes or library items that will be saved. ❏ BASIC mode In BASIC mode you can save all scene memory and library data (or just a selected portion of data) to a card. If BASIC is selected, the left side of the screen will show the items listed in the following table. Starting number Ending number BASIC button 3 Hint If the specified range of numbers includes empty scenes or library items, the correspondingly-numbered scenes or library items will be empty when that data is loaded. C TOTAL SIZE 2 192 Indicates the file size of the currently selected item(s) (common to all modes). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section ❏ CSV EXPORT mode In this mode you can select either scene memory or a library, specify a starting number and ending number, and save the specified range of data on a card. If desired, you can also specify that the starting number be shifted forward or backward when the data is saved. If ADVANCED is selected, the left side of the screen will show the following items. In this mode you can select items such as scene memory or library titles, or channel names, and write them to a card as a separate CSV format file for each item. If CSV EXPORT is selected, the left side of the screen will show the items listed in the following table. CSV EXPORT button Information shown in the display ❏ ADVANCED mode Function menu ADVANCED button 4 5 8 6 Global functions 7 D CATEGORY Indicates the category of data that is selected for saving; scene memories or library data. Click the / buttons at left and right to change the category. E SOURCE (save-source numbers) H CHANNEL NAME From the following table, select the parameters that will be written (e.g., library title, channel name). This area shows the starting and ending number (and the corresponding scene names or library titles) with which the data will be saved on the card. If you want to save the data to the card with a different range of numbers, click the / buttons at the left and right of the starting number box. (The value in the ending number box will change automatically as the starting number is edited.) Button LIBRARY TITLE Memory card PM5D 001 002 003 004 005 006 AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE FFF Starting number ➠ Ending number 011 012 013 014 015 AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE CHANNEL NAME Content SCENE MEMORY Scene memory names HA HA library titles INPUT PATCH Input patch library titles OUTPUT PATCH Output patch library titles INPUT CH Input channel library titles OUTPUT CH Output channel library titles INPUT EQ Input EQ library titles OUTPUT EQ Output EQ library titles GATE Gate library titles COMP Compressor library titles EFFECT Effect library titles GEQ GEQ library titles INPUT 1-48 Input channel names ST IN ST IN channel names FX RTN FX RTN channel names DCA DCA names INPUT PATCH Input patch connection status OUTPUT PATCH Output patch connection status PATCH Input functions F DESTINATION (save-destination number) G LIBRARY TITLE Appendices This area shows the starting and ending number (and the corresponding scene names or library titles) of the scene memories or library items that will be saved on the card. Click the / buttons at the left and right of each box to change the number. Output functions 9 J Hint Files saved in CSV format can be edited using a word processor or spreadsheet software on a computer, and loaded back into the PM5D. However be aware that it will not be possible to reload the file back into the PM5D if you change the syntax, file format, or file name. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 193 UTILITY function If you use Microsoft Excel to edit these files, use the Data menu to import the CSV file, and use the Text File Wizard to delete the character string quotation ("). (If you fail to do so, symbols such as “–” and “+” will not be displayed correctly.) I SET ALL Selects all LIBRARY TITLE / CHANNEL NAME items. J CLEAR ALL De-selects all items. ➠ K L M O If a higher directory is selected, this column will show a “. .” symbol. You can click this symbol to return to that directory. P Q R N K FILE PATH Indicates the directory (folder) that is currently selected on the memory card inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot, and the location of the file. (The directory name is delineated by “\” characters.) ➠ L SCAN This scans the directory that is currently selected on the memory card, and displays the contents in the file list (M). M File list This area shows the files/directories contained in the current directory. The currently selected file/directory is always shown in the middle line. (The TYPE and DATE SIZE fields will be highlighted.) The list is divided into four columns; FILE NAME, TYPE, DATE/SIZE, and COMMENT. (To see the COMMENT field, use the scroll bar to scroll the list toward the right.) The headings at the top of each column of the list also function as buttons to sort the list. When you click these buttons, the list will be sorted in ascending or descending order for that item. The text of the currently selected button will change to red, and an arrow indicating ascending (↑) or descending (↓) order will appear. These columns display the following content. • FILE NAME These are the names of the files/directories saved in the currently selected directory. If a lower directory is selected, you can move to that directory by clicking the directory name shown in this column. 194 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual • TYPE This indicates the type of data that is saved. In the case of a directory, this column will indicate [DIR]. Data that cannot be used by the PM5D is indicated as UNKNOWN. • DATE / SIZE This shows the date on which the file was last saved, and its size. In the case of a directory, only the date of creation is displayed. • COMMENT This displays comments (up to 32 characters) stored for the files on the memory card. To create or edit a comment, click the COMMENT field of the file selected in the list to open the FILE COMMENT EDIT window. Reference section This displays the number of files and directories in the current directory, and the free area on the memory card. Note LOAD screen Information shown in the display N Number of files / Free area In this screen, scene or library data from a memory card inserted in the MEMORY CARD can be loaded into the PM5D. This cannot be used while in PREVIEW mode. A maximum of 99 files and directories can be displayed in the file list. If there are more than 99, a blinking message of “Too Many Files” will be displayed. In this case, please delete unneeded files or move files to another directory. LOAD O SAVE Function menu This saves the data selected in the left side of the screen to the currently selected directory. When you click this button, the FILE NAME EDIT window will appear, allowing you to assign a filename of up to eight characters and save the file. Note Global functions • If an identically-named file exists in that directory, a message will warn you that you will be overwriting the file. If you don’t want to overwrite the existing file, you can either change the filename or select a different directory in which to save the file. • When you execute the Save operation in CSV EXPORT mode, a new directory will be created within the current directory of the memory card, and a CSV file for each selected item will be created in the new directory. • The name of the CSV file is fixed for each type of data, and cannot be changed. The newly created directory will have the name you specified when saving. 1 2 Output functions P RENAME This button lets you rename the currently selected file or directory. When you click this button, the FILE NAME EDIT window will appear, allowing you to edit the name. Q MAKE DIR (Make directory) This button creates a new sub-directory within the currently selected directory. When you click this button, the DIR NAME EDIT popup window will appear, allowing you to specify a name for the new directory. Input functions 3 R DELETE This button deletes the currently selected file or directory. When you click this button, the FILE DELETE window will appear, asking you to confirm the deletion. • A deleted file cannot be recovered. • If you attempt to delete a directory that contains files, a warning message will appear, and the operation cannot be executed. Before deleting a directory, you must first delete any files it contains. A FILE PATH Appendices Note Indicates the location of the directory (folder) or file that is currently selected on the memory card. (The directory name is delineated by “\” characters.) B SCAN Note • As memory cards, the PM5D can use either PCMCIA Type II flash ATA cards or CompactFlash media inserted in a PC card adaptor (power supply voltage of 3.3V/5V in either case). Operation is not guaranteed for any other type of media. • Normally, the above cards are sold in an already-formatted state, so formatting will not be necessary. If you need to format a card, use a computer or other external device to format the card in FAT16 format. This scans the directory that is currently selected on the memory card, and displays the contents in the file list (3). C File list This area shows the files/directories contained in the current directory. The currently selected file/directory is always shown in the middle line. (The TYPE and DATE SIZE fields will be highlighted.) The list is divided into four columns; FILE NAME, TYPE, DATE/SIZE, and COMMENT. (To see the COMMENT field, use the scroll bar to scroll the list toward the right.) The contents of each column are the same as in the SAVE screen (➥ p.194). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 195 UTILITY function this button, a message will ask you to confirm the Load operation. (This is common to all modes.) 4 ❏ ADVANCED mode D Mode Here you can select the mode in which files will be loaded. If a file other than CSV is selected in the file list, you will be able to select BASIC mode or ADVANCED mode. (The CSV button will be grayed-out and unavailable.) If a CSV file or directory is selected in the file list, CSV IMPORT mode will be selected automatically. (The BASIC and ADVANCED buttons will be grayed-out and unavailable.) The right side of the screen will change as follows according to the currently selected mode. In this mode you can select either scene memory or a library, specify a starting number and ending number, and load the specified range of data from the card. ADVANCED button 7 8 ❏ BASIC mode 9 In BASIC mode you can load all scene memory and library data (or just a selected portion of data) from a card. If BASIC is selected, the right side of the screen will show the following items. G CATEGORY BASIC button This indicates the type of data (scene memory or library) saved in the currently selected file. H SOURCE (load-source) This area shows the starting and ending number (and the corresponding scene names or library titles) of the scene memories or library items that will be loaded from the card. Click the / buttons at the left and right of each box to change the number. 5 I DESTINATION (load-destination) If you’ve changed the starting number of the load-destination, this area shows the starting and ending number (and the corresponding scene names or library titles) of the PM5D’s internal scene memories or library items into which the data selected in the SOURCE area will be loaded. To edit the setting, click the / buttons located at the left and right of the starting number box. (The ending number value will change automatically as you edit the starting number.) 6 E Select the data to be loaded Here you can select the data that will be loaded. The contents of each item are the same as in BASIC mode of the SAVE screen (➥ p.192). However, the items that can be selected will depend on the currently selected file. Buttons for items that cannot be loaded will be grayed-out and unavailable. If the SCENE MEMORY, HA, INPUT PATCH, or OUTPUT PATCH button is on, you restrict the scenes or library items that will be loaded by using the box at the right to specify the starting number and ending number. Hint If the data saved on the card includes empty scenes or library items, the corresponding scenes or library items will be empty when the data is loaded. F LOAD This button loads the data selected in the left side of the screen into the parameters you specify. When you click 196 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Memory card 002 003 004 005 006 BBB CCC DDD EEE FFF PM5D Starting number ➠ 011 012 013 014 BBB CCC DDD EEE Ending number Hint • Even if you’ve selected data that was saved in BASIC mode, you can switch to ADVANCED mode and load only specific numbers. • However, an exception is that if the selected data was saved as ALL DATA or SCENE MEMORY+LINKED LIBRARY in BASIC mode, the ADVANCED button will be grayed-out, and you will not be able to switch to ADVANCED mode. If a CSV file or directory is selected, CSV IMPORT mode will be selected automatically. The selected CSV file (or CSV files in the selected directory) will be searched, and the following items will appear in the right of the screen. FADER ASSIGN screen Here you can assign the desired input channels / output channels to the eight faders in the DCA section of the panel. Function menu FADER ASSIGN Information shown in the display ❏ CSV IMPORT mode K Global functions J L M Indicates the currently selected fader mode (DCA, layer A–F). You can also click the buttons to switch the fader mode directly. Use these buttons to select the data you want to load (e.g., library titles or channel names). (The contents of each item are the same as in the SAVE screen.) However, you will only be able to select items that match the CSV file (or the CSV files in the directory) selected in the list for loading. The buttons for other items will be grayed-out and unavailable. 1 Input functions L SET ALL This button selects all available items for loading. M CLEAR ALL B Faders 1–8 De-selects all items. Note Note that the screen will automatically switch to CSV IMPORT mode even if the directory selected in the list does not contain an appropriate CSV file. (In this case, all buttons will be grayed-out.) The parameter assigned to each fader of the DCA fader section is shown here. This will depend on the FADER MODE (1) and channel selection (3). You can also operate the fader directly by dragging it upward or downward. 2 Appendices J LIBRARY TITLE K CHANNEL NAME Output functions A FADER MODE C Channel selection 3 This indicates the channel that is assigned to each fader in layers A– F, and its name (only for input channels). Click the / buttons at left and right to change the assignment. You can choose from CH 1–48, ST IN 1L–ST IN 4R, FXRTN 1L–FXRTN 4R, MATRIX 1–8, MIX 1–24, and DCA 1–8. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 197 UTILITY function open the SYSTEM PASSWORD CHECK window, where you will need to input the system password. SECURITY screen In this screen you can prohibit console operation (Console Lock) or prohibit editing for specific parameters (Parameter Lock). Two passwords of differing levels can be specified to allow locking and unlocking. C CONSOLE LOCK This button locks the console operations. If the system password has been set, clicking this button will open the SYSTEM PASSWORD CHECK window, where you will need to input the system password. SECURITY 4 D LOCK PARAMETER SELECT If the PARAMETER LOCK button (2) is on, parameters for which editing will be disabled can be selected from the following table. As long as the PARAMETER LOCK button (2) is on, these parameters cannot be edited. 1 2 3 A SYSTEM PASSWORD This is a permanent password (maximum of eight characters) for the entire system. The password you specify here is valid for the PARAMETER LOCK button (2) and for the CONSOLE LOCK button (3). However, you can perform the Lock operation even without specifying a password. If no password has been specified, this box will indicate “--FREE--”. If a password has been specified, asterisks (*) will be displayed to represent the characters of the password. To set or change the password, click the button to open the SYSTEM PASSWORD CHANGE window. When setting the password for the first time, you will input the same password twice for confirmation. To change the password, you will input both the old password and the new password. By specifying a blank entry as the new password, you can restore the state to a condition in which no password has been set. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Changes to the settings of the MIXER SETUP screen and the CASCADE screen WORD CLOCK SETUP Changes in the word clock setting DITHER Changes in dither-related settings INPUT PATCH Changes to the input patch (and NAME) settings OUTPUT PATCH Changes to the output patch settings INPUT CH ON/OFF Input channel on/off operations OUTPUT CH ON/ OFF Output channel on/off operations MIX TO ST ON/OFF MIX channel [TO STEREO] key operations DCA MUTE ON DCA [MUTE] key On operations (Off operations are not included) 5 6 E CONSOLE PASSWORD This is a temporary password (maximum of eight characters) that is separate from the system password. The password you specify here is valid for the CONSOLE LOCK button (6). The method for setting or changing the password is the same as for the system password. Note The system password is remembered even when the power is turned off. This means that if you forget the password, you will be unable to defeat Parameter Lock or Console Lock except by initializing the entire memory of the PM5D (➥ p.147). Please be careful not to lose the system password. Hint The Console Password is cleared when the PM5D’s power is turned off, and will return to the unset state (the box will indicate “--FREE--”). B PARAMETER LOCK This button sets/defeats Parameter Lock for the parameters selected in the LOCK PARAMETER SELECT area (4). If not even one parameter is selected, these buttons will be grayed-out and cannot be turned on. If the system password has been set, clicking this button will 198 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual F CONSOLE LOCK Reference section This button locks the console operations. If the console password has been set, clicking this button will open the CONSOLE PASSWORD CHECK window, where you will need to input the console password. WORD CLOCK • • • 2 • 1 As the master clock to use, you can select the internal clock or an external clock input from a connector or slot. This setting determines the sampling frequency at which the PM5D will operate. You can select the following items. Content • Noise may occur at the output jacks when the word clock setting is changed. In order to protect your speaker system, be sure to turn down the power amp output before changing the word clock setting. • If you attempt to select a channel whose SRC is on as the word clock master, a message will appear, warning you that the sampling rate converter will be disabled. Input functions Note A MASTER CLOCK SELECT B Fs (Sampling frequency) INT 96k The PM5D’s internal clock (sampling rate= 96 kHz) INT 88.2k The PM5D’s internal clock (sampling rate= 88.2 kHz) INT 48 k The PM5D’s internal clock (sampling rate= 48 kHz) INT 44.1 k The PM5D’s internal clock (sampling rate= 44.1 kHz) W.CLOCK IN The word clock supplied from the rear panel WORD CLOCK IN connector CASCADE IN The word clock supplied via the CASCADE IN connector from another cascade-connected PM5D 2TR IN D1 The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied from 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 1 2TR IN D2 The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied from 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 2 2TR IN D3 The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied from 2TR IN DIGITAL connector 3 SLOT 1–4 The clock data of the digital audio signal supplied via a digital I/O card in slot 1–4 (selectable in two-channel units) This indicates the sampling frequency at which the PM5D is operating. This will indicate “UNLOCKED” while synchronization is lost (such as immediately after switching the master clock). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Appendices Display Information shown in the display Here you can select the word clock on which the PM5D will operate. You can also view and edit settings for cards installed in slots 1–4. Function menu • Global functions WORD CLOCK screen The operational status of each clock is shown by the color of the symbol at the left of each button. Each color has the following significance. LOCK (blue) This indicates that a clock synchronized with the source selected in (2) is being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector or slot, input/output is occurring normally between that device and the PM5D. If the sampling frequency is close, this status may be displayed even if not synchronized. UNLOCK (red) A valid clock is not being input. If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the PM5D. LOCK, BUT NOT SYNC’ED (orange) A valid clock is being input, but is not synchronized with the clock source selected in (2). If an external device is connected to the corresponding connector, input/output cannot occur correctly between that device and the PM5D. UNKNOWN (yellow) This indicates that the clock status cannot be detected because no external device is connected or because there is no valid clock input. You will be able to select this connector/slot, but successful synchronization cannot occur until a valid connection is established. SRC ON (green) This is a special status only for SLOT 1–4 and 2TR IN 2TR IN D1–3, indicating that the corresponding channel’s SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) is enabled. This means that even if the signal is not synchronized, normal input/output with the PM5D is occurring. Output functions SYS/W.CLOCK function 199 SYS/W.CLOCK function 34 5 MIXER SETUP screen Here you can make settings that apply to the entire PM5D system. MIXER SETUP 67 8 C Slot number / Card type This area shows the type of digital I/O card installed in slots 1–4. D INPUT FORMAT (Input signal format) E OUTPUT FORMAT (Output signal format) Select one of the following as the method by which signals will be exchanged with a digital I/O card installed in the slot when the PM5D is operating at a high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz). • SINGLE This setting allows transmission/reception of the normal number of channels when existing equipment that operates at 44.1/48 kHz is connected. The sampling rate will be converted for each channel of the digital I/ O card, and transmitted/received at half the sampling frequency (44.1/48 kHz) of the PM5D. (This setting can be selected only for slots in which a digital I/O card that does not support 96 kHz is installed.) • DOUBLE SPEED This setting allows high sampling rate audio signals to be transmitted/received without change when equipment that operates at a high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz) is connected. (This setting can be connected only for slots in which a digital I/O card that supports 96 kHz is installed.) • DOUBLE CHANNEL This setting allows high sampling rate (88.2/96 kHz) audio signals to be handled when existing equipment that operates at 44.1/48 kHz is connected. Two channels of signals at half the PM5D’s sampling frequency (44.1/48 kHz) are transmitted/received together as a high sampling rate monaural signal. (The number of usable channels will be half.) F FREQUENCY (Sampling frequency) This indicates the sampling frequency of the signal being input to each channel of the digital I/O card, in sets of two channels. G SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) This button switches the Sampling Rate Converter on/ off, in sets of two channels. This is available only for slots in which a digital I/O card with a built-in sampling rate converter is installed. 1 A PAIR MODE Select one of the following two methods by which input channels will be paired. • HORIZONTAL PAIR If this button is on, input channels of adjacent numbers (1/2, 3/4 ...) will be paired. • VERTICAL PAIR If this button is on, input channels of different layers that share the same fader (1/25, 2/26 ...) will be paired. This setting lets you use the faders of the INPUT channel strip to control up to 24 pairs (48 channels). H EMPHASIS STATUS This indicates whether emphasis is applied to the input signal, in sets of two channels. This is available only for slots in which a digital I/O card is installed. 200 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual 2 Reference section Hint The graphic below the buttons will change according to the pair mode you select. When you switch from horizontal pair mode to vertical pair mode, new numbers will be assigned to the input channels as follows. Channel 1 → no change Channel 2 → Channel 25 Channel 3 → Channel 2 Channel 4 → Channel 26 : Channel 47 → Channel 24 Channel 48 → no change Here you can specify whether a signal will be at nominal level when panned to center, or at nominal level when panned far left or far right. Choose one of the following two settings. You can choose independently for monaural channels and paired channels. • CENTER The signal will be at nominal level (+0 dB) when panned to the center, and will rise +3 dB when panned to far left or far right. • L↔R The signal will be at nominal level (+0 dB) when panned to far left or far right, and will decrease –3 dB when panned to the center. If the USE AS STEREO BUS button is on, LCR mode is disabled. E SURROUND BUS ALLOCATION Choose which of the following two ranges of MIX bus will be used as surround buses. MIX 1-8 . . . . . MIX bus 1–8 MIX 9-16 . . . . MIX bus 9–16 F SURROUND MODE Choose one of the following as the surround mode when using the Surround Pan function (➥ p.132). • STEREO This is conventional stereo mode. • 3-1ch This mode uses four channels: L (front left), C (front center), R (front right), and S (surround). L (front left) C (front center) R (front right) Information shown in the display Note Function menu B PAN NOMINAL POSITION nal will also be played back from the three MONITOR OUT connectors L/C/R. Global functions (If you again switch back to horizontal pair mode, the channels will return to their previous number.) However, please note that this simply means the input channel that was previously called “channel 2” is now called “channel 25”; the name and parameter settings of that channel have not changed. In the various screens of the display (except for the TRACKING RECALL screen and the FADER VIEW screen), switching the pair mode will only change the displayed numbers; the arrangement of the input channels will not change. 3 5 S (surround) 6 • 5.1ch This mode uses six channels: L (front left), C (front center), R (front right), Ls (rear left), Rs (rear right), and LFE (subwoofer). LFE (subwoofer) L (front left) C (front center) R (front right) Input functions The current setting is also shown by the graph below the buttons. Output functions Hint Appendices 4 C BUS SETUP This area indicates the MIX bus mode (VARI/FIXED) for every two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses. You can edit the setting by clicking the / buttons at the left and right. Ls (rear left) Rs (rear right) D STEREO B Select one of the following two choices to specify how the STEREO B bus will function. • USE AS STEREO BUS If this button is on, the STEREO B bus will function as a conventional stereo bus; the same signal as the STEREO A bus will be sent to it. • USE AS CENTER BUS If this button is on, the STEREO B bus will function as the CENTER bus of LCR mode. When you turn this on, the CENTER bus output signal will be added to the L/R channels of the STEREO A bus, allowing LCR playback (three-channel playback). (The monitor sig- PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 201 SYS/W.CLOCK function • 6.1ch This mode uses seven channels: 5.1ch with the addition of Bs (rear center). H CASCADE IN PORT SELECT Select one of the following as the port that will receive the audio signals from the cascade-connected device. Hint LFE (subwoofer) L (front left) C (front center) Ls (rear left) • If you select a choice other than CASCADE IN, the signal from the slot will be assigned to the cascade input, and the signal from the CASCADE IN connector will be assigned to the corresponding slot input. • The signal assigned from the CASCADE IN connector to the slot input can be used as a patch source in the IN PATCH screen. R (front right) Bs (rear center) Rs (rear right) Hint The graphic below the buttons will change according to the mode you select. 8 J • CASCADE IN Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received from another PM5D via the rear panel CASCADE IN connector. If PM5D is selected as the cascade source (7), control signals for parameter linkage will also be transmitted and received. • SLOT 4 Up to 16 channels of audio signals can be received via input channels 1–16 of an I/O card installed in slot 4 of the rear panel. If you choose this setting, the signals from the CASCADE IN connector (channels 1–16) will be assigned to channels 1–16 of the SLOT IN 4 port instead. N 16 channels CASCADE IN CH 1-16 SLOT 4 SLOT IN 1 (CH 1–16) SLOT IN 2 (CH 1–16) SLOT IN 3 (CH 1–16) CH 1-16 7 K M L SLOT 1-3 9 16 channels G CASCADE FROM (Source when cascadeconnected) Select one of the following as the external device that is sending audio signals to the PM5D via a cascade connection. Display — Source device Available cascade input port Parameter linkage Cascade disabled CASCADE IN, SLOT 3/4, SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8], SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16] Not possible Possible*1 PM5D another PM5D CASCADE IN DM2000 /02R96 YAMAHA DM2000 or 02R96 CASCADE IN MIXER [30BUS] A mixer other than the above (maximum 30 bus) SLOT 3/4, SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8], SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16] MIXER [16BUS] A mixer other than the above (maximum 16 bus) SLOT 4 CASCADE IN • SLOT 3/4 Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received via input channels 1–16 of I/O cards installed in slots 3 and 4. (Since channels 15/16 of SLOT 4 are not used, only 30 channels are actually available.) If you choose this setting, the signals from the CASCADE IN connector (channels 1–32) will be assigned to channels 1–16 of the SLOT IN 3/4 ports instead. 30 channels CASCADE IN CH 1-16 SLOT 3/4 Not possible SLOT IN 1 (CH 1–16) SLOT IN 2 (CH 1–16) CH 1-16 SLOT 1/2 32 channels CH 1-32 CASCADE IN *1. Linked parameters are specified in the CASCADE screen. 202 SLOT IN 4 (CH 1–16) CH 1-16 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section SLOT IN 3 (CH 1–16) SLOT IN 4 (CH 1–16) 32 channels SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 9–16) CH 9-16 SLOT 1-4 • SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16] Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received via input channels 9–16 of I/O cards installed in slots 1–4. (Since channels 15/16 of SLOT 4 are not used, only 30 channels are actually available.) If you choose this setting, the signals from the CASCADE IN connector (channels 1–32) will be assigned to channels 9–16 of the SLOT IN 1–4 ports instead. 30 channels CH 9-16 CASCADE IN SLOT 1-4 SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 1–8) CH 1-8 L BI-DIRECTION (Bi-directional communication) When multiple PM5D units are connected, this button selects whether they will mix each other’s audio signals. Set the Cascade mode and the BI-DIRECTION button according to the type of cascade connection, as discussed below. If you cascade-connect two PM5D units in a “ring” topology (i.e., connect the CASCADE IN connector of each unit to the OUT connector of the other unit), set the cascade mode to MASTER on one unit and SLAVE on the other unit. Turn the BI-DIRECTION button On for both units. SLOT 1-4 Audio signals of A+B 32 channels CH 1-32 SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 9–16) CASCADE IN I CASCADE TO (Transmission destination when cascade-connected) As the external device to which audio signals will be transmitted and control signals exchanged over the cascade connection, you can select either PM5D (i.e., a different PM5D unit) or “----” (transmission disabled). J CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT Select one of the following as the signal source that will be output from the CASCADE OUT connector. CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT Information shown in the display Function menu SLOT IN 1–4 (CH 1–8) CH 1-32 CASCADE IN Choose one of the following two modes of operation when multiple PM5D units are cascade-connected. • MASTER If the Cascade function is enabled, control signals will be sent to an external PM5D. • SLAVE If the Cascade function is enabled, control signals will be received from an external PM5D. Global functions K CASCADE MODE SLOT 1-4 Output functions CASCADE IN Audio signals of A+B CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT PM5D A PM5D B (Cascade master) (Cascade slave) CASCADE MODE= MASTER BI-DIRECTION= ON CASCADE MODE= SLAVE BI-DIRECTION= ON Input functions 30 channels CH 1-8 • SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8] The same audio signals (up to 32 channels) that are output from output channels 1–8 of slots 1–4 will also be output in parallel from the CASCADE OUT connector. • SLOT 1-4 [CH9-16] The same audio signals (up to 32 channels) that are output from output channels 9–16 of slots 1–4 will also be output in parallel from the CASCADE OUT connector. In this state, the SLAVE unit will follow when you operate the MASTER unit. The same mix will be output from both PM5D units. Appendices • SLOT 1-4 [CH1-8] Up to 30 channels of audio signals can be received via input channels 1–8 of I/O cards installed in slots 1–4. (Since channels 7/8 of SLOT 4 are not used, only 30 channels are actually available.) If you choose this setting, the signals from the CASCADE IN connector (channels 1–32) will be assigned to channels 1–8 of the SLOT IN 1–4 ports instead. Hint If you select a setting other than CASCADE OUT, the same signals will be output both to the corresponding slots and to the CASCADE OUT connector. • CASCADE OUT The audio signals sent by the cascade function will be output from the CASCADE OUT connector. If PM5D is selected as the transmission destination (9), control signals for parameter linkage will also be transmitted and received. The type of signals that are output can be selected in the CASCADE screen. • SLOT 3/4 The same audio signals (up to 32 channels) as are output from output channels 1–16 of slots 3/4 will be output in parallel from the CASCADE OUT connector. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 203 SYS/W.CLOCK function If you daisy-chain two to four PM5D units (i.e., connect the first unit’s CASCADE OUT → second unit’s CASCADE IN, and the second unit’s CASCADE OUT → third unit’s CASCADE IN. Up to four units can be connected.), set the PM5D located last in the chain to MASTER, and the remaining PM5D units to SLAVE. Turn the BI-DIRECTION button Off for all units. CASCADE screen Here you can make various settings related to cascade connection. CASCADE Audio signals of A CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT PM5D A (Cascade slave) CASCADE MODE= SLAVE BI-DIRECTION= OFF Audio signals of A+B CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT PM5D B (Cascade slave) CASCADE MODE= SLAVE BI-DIRECTION= OFF 1 Audio signals of A+B+C CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT PM5D C (Cascade slave) CASCADE MODE= SLAVE BI-DIRECTION= OFF 2 Audio signals of A+B+C+D CASCADE CASCADE IN OUT PM5D D (Cascade master) CASCADE MODE= MASTER BI-DIRECTION= OFF In this state, the SLAVE units will follow when you operate the MASTER unit. The final mix of all signals will be output from the PM5D that is connected last in the chain. A CASCADE ENABLE/DISABLE Enables/disables cascade connection. B CASCADE LINK M CASCADE ENABLE/DISABLE Turns the Cascade function on/off. • Note If you edit the settings of the CASCADE CONNECTION parameters (7–L), the cascade function will temporarily be reset to Off. N DME CONTROL • • This button accesses the DME CONTROL screen (➥ p.182). • • 204 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Here you can select the operations and parameters that will be linked when multiple PM5D units are cascadeconnected. You can select the following items. SCENE RECALL Scene recall operations / Recall undo operations SCENE STORE/EDIT Scene store operations, store undo operations, title editing, sorting CUE/SOLO LOGIC Cue/Solo operations (however, all Cue settings are cleared when linking occurs) DIMMER ON/OFF Dimmer effect (including talkback dimmer) PAGE CHANGE Switching the display screen Destination bus MIX 1 BUS 1 SLOT4- 1 MIX 1 MIX 2 BUS 2 SLOT4-2 MIX 2 MIX 3 BUS 3 SLOT4-3 MIX 3 MIX 4 BUS 4 SLOT4-4 MIX 4 MIX 5 BUS 5 SLOT4-5 MIX 5 MIX 6 BUS 6 SLOT4-6 MIX 6 MIX 7 BUS 7 SLOT4-7 MIX 7 MIX 8 BUS 8 SLOT4-8 MIX 8 MIX 9 AUX 1 SLOT4-9 MIX 9 MIX10 AUX 2 SLOT4-10 MIX10 MIX11 AUX 3 SLOT4-11 MIX11 MIX12 AUX 4 SLOT4-12 MIX12 MIX13 AUX 5 SLOT4- 1 MIX13 MIX14 AUX 6 SLOT4- 2 MIX14 MIX15 AUX 7 SLOT4- 3 MIX15 MIX16 AUX 8 SLOT4- 4 MIX16 *3 MIX17 AUX 9 SLOT4- 5 MIX17 Hint MIX18 AUX10 SLOT4- 6 MIX18 • For details on the actual procedure of cascade-connecting multiple PM5D units, refer to p.143. • To enable cascade link, you must turn on linking for the corresponding parameters on the other cascade-connected PM5D units as well. • You can also turn linking off for the master PM5D. For example if you’ve cascade-connected multiple PM5D units, you can (for example) make settings so that DCA 1 is linked only between the master and the second unit, DCA 2 is linked for all PM5D units, and DCA 3 is linked only between the second unit and third unit. MIX19 AUX11 SLOT4- 7 MIX19 MIX20 AUX12 SLOT4- 8 MIX20 MIX21 — SLOT4- 9 MIX21 MIX22 — SLOT4-10 MIX22 MIX23 — SLOT4-11 MIX23 MIX24 — SLOT4-12 MIX24 3 4 5 C CASCADE IN SOURCE (Cascade IN source I/ O assignment view) Here you can view and select the signals that are sent to the PM5D’s internal buses from the cascade-connected external device. The type of signals received will depend on the selection in the CASCADE FROM field of the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function) ST AL ST L SLOT4-13 ST AL ST AR ST R SLOT4-14 ST AR ST BL — SLOT4- 9 ST BL ST BR — SLOT4-10 ST BR CUE L CUE L SLOT4-15 CUE L CUE R CUE R SLOT4-16 CUE R *1. The signal assigned to each bus is fixed; it cannot be changed. *2. You can enable/disable the assignment for each bus. However, you cannot send the signal of the same slot or same input channel to multiple buses. If a signal already assigned to a bus is selected for a different bus, the previous assignment will be cancelled. *3. Assigned from the top in ascending numerical order of slot number / channel number, according to the settings of the CASCADE IN PORT SELECT area of the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). (this cannot be changed.) Information shown in the display MIXER [16BUS]*2 Function menu MIXER [30BUS] Global functions • MUTE MASTER Mute group 1–8 on/off DM2000/ 02R96*1 Output functions DCA and MUTE parameter values will be linked the instant Link is turned on. Other parameters will be linked for the first time only when that parameter is operated after Link is turned on. PM5D*1 Input functions Hint External device selected in the CASCADE FROM field Appendices • DCA FADER MODE Switching the mode of the top panel FADER MODE section • ENCODER MODE Switching the mode of the top panel ENCODER MODE section • PANEL/LCD BRIGHTNESS BRIGHTNESS settings in the PREFERENCE 2 screen (UTILITY function) • INPUT METER POINT/OUTPUT METER POINT/ PEAK HOLD Input channel / output channel metering point selection, and peak hold on/off • DCA LEVEL/MUTE DCA group 1–8 level, name, [CUE] key on/off operations, and [MUTE] key on/off operations D CASCADE IN ON/OFF For each of the PM5D’s internal buses, you can specify whether signals from the cascade master will be input. E CASCADE OUT ON/OFF For each of the PM5D’s internal buses, you can specify whether signals will be output to the cascade slave. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 205 SYS/W.CLOCK function C Slot/Channel HA (Head Amp) screen Here you can view/select the slot and channels to which the audio output of the external head amp device is connected. In this screen you can make settings such as phantom power (+48V), gain, and HPF for each of the internal head amps (PM5D-RH model only), or for each channel of an external head amp device that supports remote control via the dedicated protocol (e.g., Yamaha AD8HR or AD824). Note If an external head amp device is connected to a PM5D slot, you must specify the appropriate slot/channels manually. Please note that if you specify an incorrect setting, the input channel HA indication in screens such as the IN HA screen may differ from the actual state. HA D +48V MASTER If an AD8HR is connected via the [HA REMOTE] connector, this indicates the master phantom power on/off status. (Otherwise, this indicates “---”.) E +48V Switches phantom power (+48V) on/off for each channel. F HPF (High Pass Filter) Turns the HPF on/off for each channel. G Cutoff frequency Specifies the HPF cutoff frequency for each channel of the AD8HR. Move the cursor to the box, and turn the [DATA] encoder to adjust the cutoff frequency in a range of 20–600 Hz. H GAIN 1 3 2 5 6 7 8 Adjusts the gain for each channel. Move the cursor to the knob, and turn the [DATA] encoder to adjust the gain in a range of –62 dB to +10 dB. The current value is shown in the box below. I GANG If this button is on, the gain settings of two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels will change in tandem, maintaining the current offset value. 9 4 A DISPLAY MODE J Select one of the following as the type of head amp displayed in the screen. • INTERNAL HA (PM5D-RH model only) The internal head amp channels (AD IN 1–48, AD STIN 1–4) will be displayed. • EXTERNAL HA 1-4 • EXTERNAL HA 5-8 The channels of an external head amp device (ID number= 1–4, or ID number= 5–8) connected via the [HA REMOTE] connector will be displayed. J LIBRARY Hint Up to eight external devices can be daisy-chained to the PM5D’s [HA REMOTE] connector. In this case, an ID number (1–8) is automatically assigned to each device, starting from the device that is connected directly to the PM5D’s [HA REMOTE] connector. B Model name For each ID number, this indicates the model name of the external head amp device that is connected. If no device is connected this will indicate “-----”. However even in this case, you will be able to make the same settings as when a Yamaha AD8HR is connected. 206 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This button displays the HA LIBRARY screen (➥ p.208). Note When an external head amp device is connected for the first time, the settings on the external head amp device are used. If you subsequently recall a HA library item, the HA library settings are used. DITHER screen In this screen you can specify the amount of attenuation for each output channel and for each output channel of an I/O card. In this screen you can turn dithering on/off and specify the bit depth for dithering. These settings are made individually for each digital output jack and each output channel of the digital I/O cards. DITHER Global functions Function menu OUTPUT PORT ATT Information shown in the display OUTPUT PORT ATT (Output port attenuation) screen 1 Specify the number of bits (16, 20, 24 bits) used when dithering the output signals from 2TR DIGITAL OUT jacks 1–3. If you select OFF, dithering will not be performed. 1 2 Output functions A Digital output jack dither settings A DISPLAY MODE Appendices Input functions Select the channels that will appear in the display, from the following choices. • OUTPUT The screen will show the amount of attenuation for output channels (MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, STEREO A L/R channels, STEREO B L/R channels), CUE L/R channels, MONITOR L/R/C channels, and 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–3 L/R channels. • SLOT 1-4 The screen will show the amount of attenuation for each output channel of the I/O cards installed in slots 1–4. B ATT (Attenuation) Adjusts the amount of attenuation for each channel. Move the cursor to the knob, and turn the [DATA] encoder to adjust the attenuation in a range of –9 dB to 0 dB. The current value is shown in the box below each knob. 2 3 B Slots 1–4 This area shows the type of digital I/O card installed in each slot. C Digital I/O card dither settings For each output channel of the digital I/O cards installed in the slots, specify the number of bits used when dithering. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 207 SYS/W.CLOCK function HA LIBRARY screen In this screen you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the HA library. HA LIBRARY 8 9 J 4 5 6 7 D RECALL Recalls the HA library item selected in the list into memory. E STORE 1 Stores the current settings of the HA screen into the location selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the settings. F TITLE EDIT Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. 2 G CLEAR Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. 3 Note Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. A EDIT When you click this button, the HA screen will appear. H DATA FORMAT Indicates the data format (PM5D-RH or PM5D) of the library item selected in the list. B DATA FORMAT Indicates the model name (PM5D-RH or PM5D). C EXTERNAL HA TYPE INFORMATION This area shows the model names (AD8HR/AD824) of the external head amp devices (ID numbers= 1–8) connected to the PM5D’s [HA REMOTE] connector. I EXTERNAL HA TYPE INFORMATION This area indicates the model name (AD8HR/AD824) of the external head amps (ID numbers= 1–8) for which data is stored in the library. J Library list Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. Note • If PM5D format data is recalled to the PM5D-RH, the internal head amp settings will not change. If PM5D-RH format data is recalled to the PM5D, the internal head amp settings will be ignored. • If the recall-source and recall-destination head amp devices have the same ID number but are assigned to different slots/ channels, the data will not be recalled to head amps of those ID numbers. • AD8HR data can be recalled into an AD824, and AD824 data can be recalled into an AD8HR. However when AD8HR data is recalled to an AD824, the gain settings of each channel will be converted into 6 dB units in order to match the specifications of the AD824. 208 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section INPUT METER screen This screen contains meters that show the input level of the input channels (input channels 1–48, ST IN channels 1–4, FXTRN channels 1–4). 4 Information shown in the display METER function D Meters These peak level meters indicate the input level of each channel. The current fader value is shown in the box below. If clipping occurs at any point PRE ATT, POST EQ, POST GATE, POST COMP, INSERT IN, or POST FADER, the ∑ segment will light. E Pair icon This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered channels. 2 3 Output functions 1 Global functions 5 Function menu INPUT METER A METERING POINT Input functions Select one of the following as the point at which the input level will be detected. This setting also applies to the meters on the panel. PRE ATT . . . . . . . . . Immediately before the attenuator PRE GATE . . . . . . . Immediately before the internal gate PRE FADER . . . . . . Immediately before the fader POST FADER . . . . . Immediately after the fader POST ON . . . . . . . . Immediately after the [ON] key B CH METER ALWAYS PRE ATT Appendices If this button is on, the input channel meters of the panel will always show the pre-attenuator levels. C PEAK HOLD If this button is on, the peak level of each meter will be held. When you turn this button off, the peak level indication that had been held will be cleared. Peak hold will be cleared when you change the metering point (1). This button is linked with the [PEAK HOLD] key in the METER section of the top panel. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 209 METER function OUTPUT METER screen This screen contains meters that show the output level of output channels (MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, STEREO A/B channels), MONITOR (L/R/C), and CUE (L/R). 4 OUTPUT METER 5 D Meters These peak level meters indicate the output level of each channel. The current master level value is shown in the box below. If clipping occurs at any point POST EQ, POST COMP, POST ON, POST FADER, or INSERT IN, the ∑ segment will light. E Pair icon This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered channels. 1 2 3 A METERING POINT Select one of the following as the point at which the output level will be detected. PRE EQ . . . . . . . . . . Immediately before the EQ PRE FADER . . . . . . Immediately before the fader POST FADER . . . . . Immediately after the fader POST ON . . . . . . . . Immediately after the [ON] key POST DELAY . . . . . Immediately after the internal delay (of an output channel) B CUE METERING POINT Select one of the following as the point at which the output level of the cue signal will be detected. PRE DELAY . . . . . . Immediately before the internal delay (of a monitor/cue channel) POST DELAY . . . . . Immediately after the internal delay (of a monitor/cue channel) C PEAK HOLD If this button is on, the peak level of each meter will be held. When you turn this button off, the peak level indication that had been held will be cleared. Peak hold will be cleared when you change the metering point (1). This button is linked with the [PEAK HOLD] key in the METER section of the top panel. 210 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section OUTPUT GR (Output Gain Reduction) screen This screen contains meters that show the amount of gain reduction produced by the gate/compressor for each input channel (input channels 1–48, ST IN channels 1–4). This screen contains meters that show the amount of gain reduction produced by the compressor for each output channel (MIX channels 1–24, MATRIX channels 1–8, STEREO A/B channels). Information shown in the display INPUT GR (Input Gain Reduction) screen INPUT GR Global functions Function menu OUTPUT GR These buttons select either Gate or Compressor as the processor whose gain reduction amount is shown by the meters. The display at the left will change according to your selection. 1 2 A Meters These peak level meters indicate the amount of gain reduction for each channel. The current master level value is shown in the box below. 2 Input functions A GATE/COMP (Gate / Compressor) Output functions 1 Appendices B Pair icon This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered channels. 3 B Meters These peak level meters indicate the amount of gain reduction for each channel. The current fader value is shown in the box below. C Pair icon This indicates the pairing status of two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered channels. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 211 MON/CUE function MON/CUE function 3 TALKBACK screen 5 In this screen you can switch talkback on/off, and select the talkback destination. 4 TALKBACK 6 C Talkback input selection If you want to use an input jack other than the TALKBACK jack for purposes of talkback, you can choose it here from analog inputs AD IN 1–48. The talkback input selection is not included in the input patch library. D HA (PM5D-RH model only) Here you can switch phantom power on/off and adjust the gain for the analog input selected in (3). The LEVEL volume in the TALKBACK section of the panel does not affect the talkback input from the analog input channel. The HA setting is included in the HA library. E Level meter (Analog input level meter) This level meter indicates the peak level of the signal being input from the analog input selected in (3). 2 1 F ON/OFF (Analog input on/off) This button switches the talkback input selected in (3) on/off. A Level meter (TALKBACK jack level meter) 7 This level meter indicates the peak level of the signal being input from the TALKBACK jack of the top panel. 8 B +48V (TALKBACK jack phantom power) This button switches phantom power on/off for the TALKBACK jack. G ON/OFF (Talkback on/off) This button switches Talkback on/off. This is linked with the TALKBACK [ON] key in the TALKBACK section of the panel. Note The WITH ANALOG VOLUME icon below the button indicates that the LEVEL volume in the TALKBACK section of the panel will affect only the signal being input from the TALKBACK jack. H NEVER LATCH This button selects one of the following as the mode in which the TALKBACK ON/OFF button and the panel TALKBACK [ON] key will behave. • If the NEVER LATCH button is off Talkback will be switched on/off (Latched operation) each time you click the ON/OFF button or press the TALKBACK [ON] key. However if you press and hold down the TALKBACK [ON] key, talkback will stay on only while you continue holding down the key; talkback will turn off when you release the key (Unlatched operation). • If the NEVER LATCH button is on Talkback will be on only while you click and hold down the ON/OFF button or press and hold down the TALKBACK [ON] button; talkback will turn off when you release the button or key (Unlatched operation). 212 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section ’Here you can make settings and perform operations related to the internal oscillator. OSCILLATOR Function menu 9 Information shown in the display OSCILLATOR screen J Here you can select the bus(es) or output jack(s) from which the talkback signal will be sent. (Multiple selections are allowed.) MIX 1–24 . . . . . . . . MIX bus 1–24 MATRIX 1–8 . . . . . MATRIX bus 1–8 ST A L/R . . . . . . . . . STEREO A bus L/R channels ST B L/R . . . . . . . . . STEREO B bus L/R channels 1 2 Global functions I BUS ASSIGN This indicates the channel of the output jack / slot that is selected as the output destination for direct output of the talkback signal. If more than one output destination is patched, “...” will be displayed following the name of the output destination that was found first. If you want to change the output destination, click the PATCH button to access the OUTPUT PATCH screen. 3 A OSC ON/OFF (Oscillator on/off) Turns the Oscillator on/off. This is linked with the OSCILLATOR [ON] switch of the top panel. Input functions Output functions J TALKBACK OUT (Talkback direct output) B OSC MODE (Oscillator mode) Appendices These buttons select the waveform or type of noise produced by the oscillator. SINE WAVE 1CH . Sine wave x 1 channel SINE WAVE 2CH . Sine wave x 2 channels PINK NOISE . . . . . Pink noise BURST NOISE . . . . Burst noise (repeated output of pink noise) C PARAMETERS Here you can set various items according to the selection in (2). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 213 MON/CUE function H WIDTH I INTERVAL • If SINE WAVE 1CH is selected 4 5 If burst noise is selected, these knobs select the duration of the noise itself (WIDTH) and the duration of silence between noise bursts (INTERVAL). The range is 0.1–10 sec for WIDTH, and 1–30 sec for INTERVAL. (The current setting is shown in the box below each knob.) Level INTERVAL • If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected 4 5 4 Pink noise output WIDTH 5 Time The BURST NOISE button is on • If PINK NOISE is selected 4 6 7 J J OSC OUT (Oscillator direct output) This indicates the channel of the output jack / slot that directly outputs the oscillator signal. If you want to change the output destination, click the PATCH button to access the OUTPUT PATCH screen. If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected, the L channel of the oscillator is sent to the oscillator direct output. • If BURST NOISE is selected 4 6 7 8 9 D LEVEL K This knob adjusts the output level of the oscillator. The range is –96 dB to 0 dB. The level meter beside the knob indicates the output level. E FREQ (Frequency) This knob specifies the frequency of the sine wave produced by the oscillator. The range is 20 Hz–20 kHz (the current setting is shown in the numerical box below). You can use the 10 kHz /1 kHz / 100 Hz buttons to select a preset frequency. K BUS ASSIGN Hint If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected, you can specify the level and frequency of each channel independently. F HPF (High Pass Filter) G LPF (Low Pass Filter) Here you can make settings for the HPF/LPF through which the pink noise or burst noise is sent. The knob above sets the cutoff frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz), and the button below switches the filter on/off. 214 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Here you can select the bus(es) or output jack(s) from which the sine wave or noise will be sent. (Multiple selections are allowed.) MIX 1–24 . . . . . . . . MIX bus 1–24 MATRIX 1–8. . . . . . MATRIX bus 1–8 AL/AR . . . . . . . . . . . STEREO A bus L/R channels BL/BR . . . . . . . . . . . STEREO B bus L/R channels If SINE WAVE 2CH is selected, the L channel of the oscillator is output to the odd-numbered bus or the L jack, and the R channel of the oscillator is output to the even-numbered bus or the R jack. 5 2TR I/O 6 E Output level meter Indicates the output level of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3. F SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) These are on/off and output frequency select switches for the sampling rate converters built into 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3. As the output frequency you can select either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. The on/off button selects either ON or THROUGH (off). G Fs (Sampling frequency) This indicates the sampling frequency at which the PM5D is operating. Output functions 1 Function menu 7 Global functions This screen contains various settings and indications for 2TR IN / 2TR OUT. Information shown in the display 2TR I/O screen 2 3 4 A Input level meters Input functions These indicate the input level of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 and 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1–2. B FREQUENCY (Sampling frequency) Indicates the sampling frequency of the input signal from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3. C SRC (Sampling Rate Converter) Appendices These are on/off switches for the sampling rate converters built into 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3. (If turned off, this indicates “THROUGH.”) D EMPHASIS STATUS Indicates whether emphasis processing is being applied to the input signal from 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 215 MON/CUE function ❏ If the USE AS STEREO BUS button is on MONITOR screen Here you can make settings and perform operations related to monitoring. MONITOR Monitor source L R ST A STEREO A L STEREO A R ST B STEREO B L STEREO B R LCR — — C — ❏ If the USE AS CENTER BUS button is on Monitor source L R C ST A STEREO A L STEREO A R — ST B — — LCR STEREO A L STEREO A R STEREO B L B DEFINE If “DEFINE” is selected in the MONITOR SOURCE section, you can choose the signal that will be monitored from the following. MIX 1–24 . . . . . . . . MIX bus 1–24 output signal MATRIX 1–8. . . . . . MATRIX bus 1–8 output signal 3 2 1 4 5 C MONITOR / CUE DELAY Here you can make settings for the delay function provided on the MONITOR/CUE bus output. Use the knob to specify the delay time (0–1000 msec), and use the ON/OFF button to switch the delay on/off. If the ON/OFF button is on, the monitor signal and cue signal will be delayed by the specified time. The delay time units can be changed in the DELAY SCALE field found in each screen of the INPUT DELAY/OUTPUT DELAY function. A MONITOR SOURCE Selects the source that will be monitored from the L/R/ C MONITOR OUT jacks. You can select one from 2TR IN A1/A2, 2TR IN D1–D3, or DEFINE, and also simultaneously select one from STEREO A/B or LCR. These buttons are linked with the various keys of the MONITOR section in the top panel. 2TR IN A1 2TR IN ANALOG jack 1 input signal 2TR IN A2 2TR IN ANALOG jack 2 input signal 2TR IN D1 2TR IN DIGITAL jack 1 input signal 2TR IN D2 2TR IN DIGITAL jack 2 input signal 2TR IN D3 2TR IN DIGITAL jack 3 input signal STEREO A STEREO A channel output signal (*) STEREO B STEREO B channel output signal (*) LCR LCR channel output signal (*) DEFINE The signal selected in the DEFINE section (2) of this screen D DIMMER When you turn this button on, the level of the signal being monitored will be temporarily attenuated. The knob adjusts the amount of attenuation that will occur when the button is on. The range of adjustment is –96 dB to 0 dB. While this button is on, the DIMM indicator will appear in the upper right of the display. Hint You can also use an external switch connected to the GPI IN connector to switch the dimmer on/off. To do so, assign the MONITOR DIMMER ON function to the GPI IN port to which the switch is connected. (➥ p.177). E TALKBACK DIMMER If a monitor source indicated by (*) is selected, the signal that is output will change depending on whether the USE AS STEREO BUS button or the USE AS CENTER BUS button is turned on in the STEREO B section of the MIXER SETUP screen (➥ p.201). 216 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This adjusts the amount by which the monitor signal will be attenuated when talkback is on. The range of adjustment is –96 dB to 0 dB. The talkback on/off status is shown in the box below. Here you can make settings and perform operations related to the Cue/Solo function. 6 8 CUE/SOLO 9 Information shown in the display CUE/SOLO screen 7 F Level meter Function menu These peak level meters indicate the level of the output signal from the MONITOR OUT jacks. You can select the level detection point to be immediately before the delay that is provided on the MONITOR/CUE bus output (when the PRE DELAY button is on) or immediately after the delay (when the POST DELAY button is on). I OUTPUT ON/OFF This is an on/off switch for the signal that is output from the MONITOR OUT jacks. L J K J MONITOR INSERT This area shows the input jacks (and input channels of the digital I/O card) that are inserted into the MONITOR OUT L/C/R channels. The input level of the inserted signal is shown by the level meter at the right. If GEQ or EFFECT is inserted, the corresponding information is shown here. Output functions Here you can select one of the following two ways in which the signal will be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks. STEREO . . . . The L/R channels will be output in stereo. MONO . . . . . . The L/R channels will be mixed, and output in monaural. The status of these two buttons is linked with on/off operations of the [MONO] key in the MONITOR section of the panel. This button selects either 1 CUE mode or SOLO mode as the type of monitoring performed by the [CUE] 2 key. When you turn this button on, a confirmation message will appear. Each mode operates as follows. • CUE mode (SOLO ON/ OFF button is off) The signal of the channel 3 whose [CUE] key is pressed will be sent to the dedicated CUE bus, and monitored via the CUE bus from the CUE OUT jacks, MONITOR OUT 4 jacks (if CUE INTERRUPTION is on), and PHONE jack. This mode lets you monitor the signal of a specific channel without affecting other buses. • SOLO mode (SOLO ON/OFF button is on) When using Input Solo, the familiar “solo” function is enabled; only the signal of the channel whose [CUE] key is pressed will be sent to the MIX, MATRIX, and STEREO A/B buses, and other channels will be muted. When using Output Solo, only that channel will be on. The signal of a channel whose [CUE] key is pressed can also be monitored from the CUE OUT jacks, MONITOR OUT jacks, and PHONES jack. Input functions H MONITOR MODE A SOLO ON/OFF Appendices If this button is on, the cue/solo signal will also be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks while the Cue/ Solo function is active. During this time, the monitor source selected in the MONITOR SOURCE section will be disabled. If this button is off, the cue/solo signal will never be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks. Global functions G CUE INTERRUPTION K INSERT ON/OFF This button enables/disables insertion. L PATCH Displays the INSERT PATCH screen. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 217 MON/CUE function B CUE MODE 5 This button selects one of the following two possibilities for when the [CUE] key of more than one channel is pressed. • MIX CUE mode All channels / DCA groups whose [CUE] key is on will be mixed for monitoring. Note As an exception to MIX CUE, turning on a CUE button in the EFFECT PARAM screen or GATE PARAM screen or turning on a CUE button in the DME CONTROL screen (EXTERNAL CUE) will give priority to monitoring only the corresponding signal. (Any [CUE] keys that had been on until then will be forcibly defeated.) Here you can select the position from which an input channel will be cued. PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) . . . . . . . Immediately before the fader AFL (After-Fader Listen) . . . . . . . Immediately after the fader POST PAN . . . . . . . Immediately after pan If you select PFL, you can also use the knob located at the left to adjust the output level in a range of –20 dB to +10 dB. C CUE FUNCTION D CUE OUT F DCA Here you can make cue output settings for DCA groups. • DCA TRIM Adjusts the level of cue output from a DCA group in a range of –20 dB to +10 dB. • DCA UNITY If this button is on, pressing a DCA [CUE] key will always monitor the corresponding DCA group at unity gain (the same level at when the DCA fader is at 0 dB). Hint • If you leave the DCA UNITY button on, you will be able to monitor the desired DCA group even if that DCA group is muted or its fader is lowered. • Even when the DCA UNITY button is on, the value specified by the DCA TRIM knob is still valid. (In this case, the DCA TRIM knob specifies an offset value relative to unity gain.) • PRE PAN/POST PAN This selects whether the pre-pan signal (PRE PAN button on) or the post-pan signal (POST PAN button is on) will be monitored when the DCA [CUE] button is turned on. G OUTPUT Turns the cue output on/off. 218 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual 7 E INPUT • LAST CUE mode Only the channel / DCA group whose [CUE] key was pressed last will be monitored. These buttons let you turn on/off various functions related to Cue. You can select the following functions. • MIX CUE LINK Specifies whether cue operations will be linked to MIX channel selection. If this button is on, pressing the mix key selected in the ENCODER MODE section of the panel once again will simultaneously switch on the [CUE] key of that channel. • CUE/SEL LINK Specifies whether channel selection will be linked with cue operations. If this button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel will simultaneously select that channel and light its [SEL] key. • FADER/CUE RELEASE This specifies whether cue operations will be restricted according to the fader position. If this button is on, cue will be defeated if you raise the fader from the –∞ dB position for a channel whose [CUE] key is lit. For a channel whose fader is above the –∞ dB position, cue operation will not be possible. (Pressing the [CUE] key will do nothing.) This means that cue can be turned on only when the fader is at the –∞ dB position. 6 Here you can select the position from which an output channel will be cued. PFL (Pre-Fader Listen) . . . . . . . . Immediately before the fader POST ON . . . Immediately after the [ON] key If you select PFL, you can also use the knob located at the left to adjust the output level in a range of –20 dB to +10 dB. Reference section Here you can specify input channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. (You can specify more than one.) The buttons correspond to the following input channels. J Level meter INPUT 1–48 Input channels 1–48 ST IN 1–4 ST IN channels 1–4 FX RTN 1–4 FX RTN channels 1–4 SET ALL Sets all input channels to the Solo Safe condition CLEAR ALL Defeats the Solo Safe setting for all input channels This is a peak level meter that indicates the level of the signals output from the CUE OUT jacks. You can select the level detection point to be immediately befor the delay that is provided on the MONITOR/CUE bus output (when the PRE DELAY button is on), or immediately after the delay (when the POST DELAY button is on). K MONITOR / CUE DELAY Here you can make settings for the delay function provided on the MONITOR/CUE bus output. Use the knob to specify the delay time (0–1000 msec), and use the DELAY button to switch the delay on/off. In general, this is linked with the MONITOR/CUE DELAY setting in the MONITOR screen. However, the difference is that in this screen, turning the AUTO BYPASS button on lets you automatically bypass the delay when you perform the Cue any input channels. 9 Information shown in the display Function menu Global functions K H INPUT SOLO SAFE Output functions J Input functions 8 Appendices I OUTPUT SOLO SAFE Here you can specify output channels that will be excluded from Solo operations. (You can specify more than one.) The buttons correspond to the following output channels. MIX 1–24 MIX channels 1–24 MATRIX 1–8 MATRIX channels 1–8 STEREO A/B STEREO A/B channels SET ALL Sets all output channels to the Solo Safe condition CLEAR ALL Defeats the Solo Safe setting for all output channels Hint Solo Safe settings and Cue on/off operations are linked for paired channels. Solo Safe operations can be performed independently of the scene memory. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 219 Output functions Output functions OUTPUT PATCH function The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid location to which you move the cursor. Hint OUTPUT PATCH screen • If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), a confirmation message will appear each time you attempt to change a patch setting. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on, a confirmation message will also appear when you attempt to make patch settings that would cause an existing patch to be modified. • To move the cursor location rapidly in or out of the grid, hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/ [†] keys. • To move rapidly to left or right inside the grid, turn the [DATA] encoder. To move up or down, hold down the [SHIFT] key and turn the [DATA] encoder. Here you can make patch settings to send output channel signals to the outputs of I/O cards installed in the slots, to the input of internal effects, and to the 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks. OUTPUT PATCH Note You can patch an output channel to more than one output port, but you cannot patch multiple output channels to a single output port. E Output port From the top, this area indicates the type of output port, the ID number, the output channel number, and the number of output channels assigned. The following types of output port can be selected. SLOT OUT Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX IN L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8 (MIX channels are the only output channels that can be selected) 2TR OUT L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 1 5 6 2 3 4 A SELECTED PATCH This indicates the output channel number and output port of the grid at which the cursor is located. F LIBRARY button B CH (Output channel) This is the number of the output channel (MIX channel, MATRIX channel, STEREO A/B channel, MONITOR L/C/R channel, TALKBACK OUT channel, OSC OUT channel) whose output destination will be patched. The channel number at which the cursor is located will be highlighted. C ASSIGN For each output channel, this indicates the number of output ports that are currently assigned. D Grid This grid lets you patch output ports (horizontal rows) to output channels (vertical columns). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking a grid location you can set/cancel patching. 220 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This button accesses the OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.223), where you can store/recall patch library settings for output channels. Hint • The signal from immediately after the delay and immediately before the output port attenuation will be sent to output ports you patch in this screen. Subsequently, in the case of SLOT OUT and 2TR OUT, the specified output port attenuation will be applied respectively. • The rear panel MIX OUT jacks 1–24, MATRIX OUT jacks 1– 8, and STEREO OUT jacks A/B always output the signal of the corresponding output channel. They are not affected by the settings in this screen. In this screen you can patch the input/output ports into which external devices will be inserted. Select the output port in the left side of the screen, and the input port in the right side of the screen. INSERT PATCH For each output channel (vertical column), this grid lets you can patch one or more output ports (horizontal row) to be used as insert-outs. Currently-patched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking a grid location you can set/cancel patching. The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid location to which you move the cursor. Information shown in the display E Grid INSERT PATCH screen Hint From the top, this area indicates the type of output port, the ID number, the output channel number, and the number of output channels assigned. The following types of output port can be patched as insert-out. SLOT OUT Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX IN L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8 GEQ IN Inputs of internal GEQ modules 1–12 2TR OUT L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 Hint If you select FX IN as an insert-out, the output of the same internal effect will automatically be selected as the insert-in. If you select GEQ IN, the output of the same GEQ module will automatically be selected as the insert-in. 2 A SELECTED PATCH This indicates the number of the output channel at which the cursor is located in the grid. 8 Output functions 1 Global functions F Output port Function menu Operations in the grid are the same for all of the patching screens. For details, refer to the Hint on p.220. B Insert in/out Input functions This indicates the input/output ports that are patched as insert in/out for the output channel at which the cursor is located. If multiple ports are assigned for insert-out, only the first port is displayed. 7 G ASSIGN 6 Appendices For each input channel, this indicates the number of input ports that are currently assigned as insert-in. H Input port 3 From the top, this area indicates the type of input port, the ID number, the input channel number, and the number of input channels assigned. The following types of input port can be selected. 4 5 C CH (Output channel) This area shows the numbers of the output channels (MIX channels, MATRIX channels, STEREO A/B channels, MONITOR L/R/C channels). The channel number at which the cursor is located will be highlighted. D ASSIGN AD IN INPUT jacks 1–48 AD ST IN ST IN jacks 1–4 L/R SLOT IN Input channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX OUT L/R outputs of internal effects 1–8 GEQ OUT Outputs of GEQ modules 1–12 2TR IN L/R channels of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 and 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 For each output channel, this indicates the number of output ports that are currently assigned as insert-out. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 221 OUTPUT PATCH function 9 INSERT POINT screen In this screen you can select the position at which the insert-in/out of each output channel will be patched. Here you can also switch insert-in on/off. INSERT POINT I LIBRARY button This button accesses the OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.223), where you can store/recall patch library settings for output channels. ❏ Using the [SHIFT] key + CURSOR [√]/ [®] to move the cursor When operating from the panel, you can move the cursor from the right side of the screen to the left side (or vice versa) by holding down the [SHIFT] key and using the CURSOR [√]/[®] keys. To quickly move the cursor in or out of the grid, hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [√]/ [®]/[π]/[†] keys. 1 Cursor A Insert view When you move the cursor to the insert I/O point (4), the insert point for that output channel will be shown graphically. ➠ [SHIFT] key + CURSOR [®] key 2 3 4 B OUTPUT CH (Output channel) This is the number of the output channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol shown at the left; settings 3–4 will be linked for these channels. You can click this symbol to enable/ disable pairing. Cursor will move C ON/OFF (Insert on/off) Note This button switches insert on/off for each channel. This is linked for paired channels. To enable an insert-in assigned to an output channel in this screen, you must turn on the ON/OFF button for the corresponding output channel in the INSERT POINT screen (OUTPUT PATCH function). (➥ p.222) However, the insertout is always on, regardless of the state of the ON/OFF button. An exception to the above is that if you insert GEQ, its insert-in will automatically be on. Note Be aware that if you turn on this button when either insert-in or insert-out are unpatched, the signal will no longer be output from the corresponding output channel. D INSERT I/O (Insert I/O point) Here you can select one of the following as the insertin/out location for each output channel. 222 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ POST EQ Immediately after the EQ PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST ON Immediately after the [ON] key 7 Information shown in the display OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the output patch library. Function menu OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY 3 4 5 8 C RECALL 1 Global functions 6 Recalls the output patch library item selected in the list into memory. Stores the current settings of the OUTPUT PATCH screen into the location selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the settings. E TITLE EDIT Output functions D STORE F CLEAR Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. Note A EDIT Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. When you click this button, the OUTPUT PATCH screen will appear. Input functions Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. 2 B Patch information for the current scene G Patch settings of the library item Appendices This area shows the output patch settings for the current scene. Displays the settings of the library item selected in the list. H Library list Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 223 OUTPUT INSERT function OUTPUT INSERT function 1 INSERT IN MIX 1-24 screen 2 3 INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR screen 4 Here you can make settings for the internal HA (PM5DRH model only) or external HA assigned to the insert-in of an output channel or MONITOR L/C/R channel. 5 6 INSERT IN MIX1-24 A +48V Switches phantom power (+48V) on/off for each channel. B HPF (High Pass Filter) Turns the HPF on/off for each channel. C Cutoff frequency Specifies the HPF cutoff frequency for each channel. Move the cursor to the box, and turn the [DATA] encoder to adjust the cutoff frequency in a range of 20– 600 Hz. D GAIN Adjusts the gain for each channel. Move the cursor to the knob, and turn the [DATA] encoder to adjust the attenuation in a range of +10 dB to –62 dB. The current value is shown in the box below each knob. Note INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR Since settings 1–4 are for the patched input port, they are linked for channels that are patched to the same port. E Input port This indicates the type and number of the input port assigned to the insert-in of that channel. Note • Items 1–4 are not shown for channels to whose insert-in nothing is patched, or for channels patched to an input port that does not have a HA. Items 2 and 3 are not shown for channels patched to a port that has no high pass filter. • Use the INSERT PATCH screen (OUTPUT PATCH function) to patch an input port to an insert-in. F Channel This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. Note HA settings are not linked even if two channels are paired. However, the GAIN knob setting is linked for HAs whose GANG button is turned on in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). Hint The HA settings you edit in this screen are also reflected in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). 224 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Here you can edit the EQ parameters of the selected output channel. Global functions Function menu EQ PARAM (If a MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel is selected) Output functions EQ PARAM Input functions HA LIBRARY EQ PARAM (EQ Parameter) screen (If a MATRIX channel is selected) Appendices This screen is shared with HA LIBRARY in the SYS/ W.CLOCK function (➥ p.208). Information shown in the display OUTPUT EQ function HA LIBRARY screen PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 225 OUTPUT EQ function 1 2 3 6 4 LM NO J 5 9 8 7 A Channel selection K J Knobs Select the output channel that you want to edit. You can use eight-band EQ (four UPPER bands + four LOWER bands) for MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels, and four-band EQ for MATRIX channels. If a channel is paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For MIX channels or MATRIX channels, you can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. These knobs adjust the Q, FREQ (center frequency), and GAIN (amount of boost/cut) for each band. K BYPASS These buttons bypass each band of the EQ. L M HPF (High Pass Filter) B EQ ON/OFF (EQ on/off) If this button is on, the LOW EQ will function as a high-pass filter. The Q knob will disappear, and the GAIN knob is used to switch the HPF on/off. Turns the EQ on/off for that channel. C EQ LINK GROUP Selects the EQ link group (A–H) to which the EQ of that channel belongs. EQ parameters are linked for output channels belonging to the same group. Note The EQ of MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels can be assigned only to groups A–F, and the EQ of MATRIX channels can be assigned only to groups G/H. N O LPF (Low Pass Filter) This button accesses the OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY screen (➥ p.228), where you can store/recall EQ library settings for output channels. E EQ TYPE Selects the type of EQ. Turning the TYPE I button on selects the algorithm used in the 02R series. Turning the TYPE II button on selects a newly developed algorithm. TYPE II reduces the interference between bands. F EQ graph This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ parameters. The colored vertical lines indicate the FREQ (center frequency) of the band for the parameter at which the cursor is located. (The color of each line matches the knob markings for each band.) The response curve will change when you edit the Q or GAIN of each band. G Level meter These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and after EQ. If the signal clips before EQ, the OVER segment will light. H EQ FLAT This button resets the GAIN parameters of all bands to the default value (±0.0 dB). When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. I LOWER/UPPER (only for MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels) This indicator shows which four bands (LOWER or UPPER) are selected in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the panel. The text label of the selected group is displayed in yellow. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual (HIGH shelving) If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear. D LIBRARY 226 (LOW shelving) If this button is on, the LOW EQ will function as a shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear. Reference section If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a low-pass filter. The Q knob will disappear, and the GAIN knob is used to switch the LPF on/off. 1 2 Information shown in the display 4 MIX 1-24 screen MATRIX/STEREO screen These screens list the EQ settings for all output channels. Here you can also copy EQ settings between output channels. 3 MIX 1-24 Global functions This mini-graph shows the approximate EQ response for each output channel. When you click the graph at which the cursor is currently located, the EQ PARAM screen for that channel will appear. In this screen you can drag and drop the mini-graph from the desired channel to copy its EQ settings. (When you drag and drop the mini-graph, a message will ask you to confirm the copy operation.) Function menu A EQ graph Input functions You can also copy EQ settings between the MIX 1-24 screen and the MATRIX/STEREO screen. First drag the mini-graph over the MIX 1-24 tab or MATRIX/STEREO tab in the screen (the screen will switch). Then drag and drop the mini-graph onto the desired channel, and a message will ask you to confirm the copy operation. Output functions MATRIX/STEREO Appendices You can also copy settings between the eight-band EQ of a MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel and the four-band EQ of a MATRIX channel. In this case, only the LOWER four bands will be copied for MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels. B EQ ON/OFF (EQ on/off) Turns the EQ on/off for that channel. This is linked for paired channels. C Channel This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. D Level meter This meter indicates the peak level after EQ. If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 227 OUTPUT EQ function 9 OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the output EQ library. OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY 5 6 7 8 J E RECALL 1 Recalls the EQ library item selected in the list into memory. F STORE Stores the EQ settings of the currently selected channel into the location selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the settings. 2 G TITLE EDIT Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. 3 H CLEAR Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. 4 Note Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. A EDIT When you click this button, the EQ PARAM screen for the currently selected output channel will appear. B Channel selection I Library EQ graph Select the channel that you want to edit. This graph indicates the approximate response of the EQ library item selected in the list. The LIBRARY TYPE indication shows whether the item contains eight-band EQ settings (MIX, STEREO A/B) or fourband EQ settings (MATRIX). C EQ graph for the selected channel This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ for the currently selected channel. D Level meter These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and after EQ. If the signal clips before EQ, the OVER segment will light. 228 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual J Library list Reference section Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. Information shown in the display OUTPUT COMP function COMP PARAM (Compressor parameter) screen Here you can edit the compressor parameters of the selected output channel. 5 Function menu COMP PARAM 2 3 4 Hint If GR METER ON/OFF LINK is turned on in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), the gain reduction meter will not be displayed when the compressor is off. Select the channel that you want to edit. If the corresponding MIX channel or MATRIX channel is paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For MIX channels or MATRIX channels, you can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. 6 7 8 9 Input functions A Channel selection Output functions 1 These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction (GR), the peak level before (PRE) and after (POST) the compressor, and the peak level of the key-in signal (KEY IN) that causes the compressor to operate. If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. If stereo link is turned on for the corresponding MIX channel or MATRIX channel (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), level meters for two channels are displayed. Global functions E Level meters B COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off) Turns the compressor on/off for that channel. C COMP LINK GROUP (Compressor link group) Appendices Selects the compressor link group (A–H) to which that channel belongs. Compressor parameters are linked for output channels belonging to the same group. D LIBRARY This button accesses the COMP LIBRARY screen (➥ p.232), where you can store/recall compressor library settings for output channels. F Type Indicates the type of the currently selected compressor. Hint To change the compressor type, use the OUTPUT COMP LIBRARY screen to recall a library item that has a different type. You cannot change the compressor type in this screen. G STEREO LINK This specifies whether parameter settings and compressor operation by a key-in signal will be linked (STEREO LINK button on) for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX channels or the L/R channels of the STEREO A/B channels, or not (STEREO LINK button off). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 229 OUTPUT COMP function ❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= On J K L M N O LINK= ON Key-in signal of odd- THR numbered channel Key-in signal of even- THR numbered channel Detect the maximum level ATTACK processing GR ATTACK processing GR J THRESHOLD (Threshold level) ❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= Off Specifies the threshold level at which the compressor will operate. The input signal will start being compressed when the key-in signal exceeds this level; compression will be removed when the signal falls below this level. LINK= OFF Key-in signal of odd- THR Detect the numbered channel maximum level ATTACK processing GR Detect the Key-in signal of even- THR maximum level numbered channel ATTACK processing GR K RATIO Specifies the ratio at which the input signal will be compressed when the key-in signal exceeds the threshold level. Note Stereo Link is fixed at On for paired channels and for STEREO A/B channels. H Compressor graph This graph displays the approximate response of the compressor. L ATTACK (Attack time) Specifies the time from when the key-in signal exceeds the threshold level until compression begins. M RELEASE (Release time) Specifies the time from when the key-in signal falls below the threshold level until compression is removed. I KEY IN SOURCE Select the desired key-in signal from the following choices. SELF PRE EQ The pre-EQ signal of the currently selected output channel SELF POST EQ The post-EQ signal of the currently selected output channel MIX1–24 POST EQ MATRIX1–8 POST EQ ST AL/AR POST EQ ST BL/BR POST EQ MIX21–24 OUT 230 N GAIN Specifies the output level gain. O KNEE The post-EQ signal of the corresponding output channel (however, you can only select from the group to which that channel belongs, from the three groups MIX 1–12, MIX 13–24, and MATRIX/ST) The output signal of the corresponding MIX channel immediately before the output port attenuation PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Select the sharpness at which the output level changes; the range is HARD or 1–5. HARD produces the sharpest change, and 5 produces the most gradual change. Information shown in the display MIX 1-24 screen MATRIX/STEREO screen These screens show the compressor settings for all output channels. Here you can also copy compressor settings between output channels. Global functions You can also copy compressor settings between the MIX 1-24 screen and the MATRIX/STEREO screen. First drag the mini-graph over the MIX 1-24 tab or MATRIX/STEREO tab in the screen (the screen will switch). Then drag and drop the mini-graph onto the desired channel, and a message will ask you to confirm the copy operation. Function menu MIX 1-24 B Level meters These meters show the amount of gain reduction produced by the compressor (at left), and the peak level of the signal after passing through the compressor (at right). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. C COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off) Turns the compressor on/off for that channel. D Channel This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. Appendices 1 Input functions Output functions MATRIX/STEREO 2 3 4 A Compressor graph This mini-graph shows the approximate compressor response for each output channel. When you click the graph at which the cursor is currently located, the COMP PARAM screen for that channel will appear. In this screen you can drag and drop the mini-graph from the desired channel to copy its compressor settings. (When you drag and drop the mini-graph, a popup window will ask you to confirm the copy operation.) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 231 OUTPUT COMP function 9 COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library) screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the compressor library. The contents of this screen are in common with the COMP LIBRARY screen of the INPUT GATE/COMP function. COMP LIBRARY 5 6 7 8 J E RECALL Recalls the compressor library item selected in the list into memory. F STORE 1 Stores the compressor settings of the currently selected channel into the location selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the settings. 2 G TITLE EDIT Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. 3 H CLEAR Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. Note Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. 4 I Compressor graph of the library item A EDIT When you click this button, the COMP PARAM screen for the currently selected channel will appear. This graph indicates the approximate response of the compressor library item selected in the list. J Library list B Channel selection Select the channel that you want to edit. C Compressor graph of the selected channel This graph shows the approximate response of the compressor for the currently selected channel. D Level meters These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR), and the peak levels before the compressor (PRE) and after the compressor (POST). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. 232 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. MIX1-24 Hint • If you change the DELAY SCALE setting of the OUTPUT DELAY function screen, the DELAY SCALE setting of the INPUT DELAY function screen will change in tandem. • The TAP button of the OUTPUT DELAY function is independent from the TAP TEMPO button of the internal effect. • The number of frames per second is linked with the TIME CODE SETUP field in the EVENT LIST screen (SCENE function). MATRIX/STEREO 2 Input functions 3 Information shown in the display Here you can edit the delay parameters of the selected output channel. Function menu MATRIX/STEREO screen Global functions MIX 1-24 screen • SAMPLE The delay time is shown as a number of samples. If you change the sampling frequency at which the PM5D operates, the number of samples will change accordingly. • msec (milliseconds) The delay time is shown in units of milliseconds. If this button is on, the boxes above and below the delay time knob (3) will show the same values. • BEAT The delay time is shown in units relative to the note length (considered as 1.0) specified by the tempo (BPM) and note value (NOTE). To specify the tempo, you can either use the / buttons located immediately below the BEAT button, or repeatedly tap (click) the TAP button, or repeatedly click a User Defined key that is assigned to [TAP TEMPO]-[CURRENT PAGE]. • FRAME The delay time is shown in units of frames. Use the six buttons located below the FRAME button to select the number of frames per second. Output functions OUTPUT DELAY function 4 5 B GANG 1 A DELAY SCALE Appendices This button specifies whether the delay parameters will be linked for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels. This can be specified independently of pairing. If the GANG button is turned on for channels of differing delay times, turning the delay time knob (3) will change the delay times of both channels while maintaining the difference in their delay time. C Delay time knob The unit you select here is used to indicate the delay time in the box below the delay time knob (3) and in other screens. You can choose one of the following units. • METER The distance in meters, calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20°C (343.59 m/s) x the delay time (seconds). • FEET The distance in feet, calculated as the speed of sound at an air temperature of 20°C (68°F) (1127.26 feet/s) x the delay time (seconds). This knob sets the delay time of each channel. The box below the knob shows the delay time in the units you selected in (1). The box above the knob always shows the delay time in millisecond units. D DELAY ON/OFF This button switches delay on/off. This is linked for paired channels. E Channel This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 233 OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen Here you can specify the output channels that will be assigned to DCA groups 7/8. You can use DCA faders 7/8 to uniformly adjust the levels of output channels belonging to the same DCA group. 4 5 D SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key) This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to make/cancel DCA group assignments. While the DCA group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel that can be assigned to the corresponding group will assign the channel to the group. (Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the assignment.) DCA GROUP ASSIGN Hint • The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one DCA group. This is automatically turned off when you change screens or turn off the power. • To turn on SET BY CUE from the panel, press the ASSIGN MODE [DCA] key and then turn on the DCA group 7/8 [CUE] key. E CLEAR This button clears all output channels assigned to that DCA group. 6 9 1 2 3 7 A DCA group This is the number of the DCA group. The number corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is highlighted. 8 F MUTE These buttons switch muting on/off for DCA groups 7/ 8. They are linked with DCA [MUTE] keys 7/8 in the DCA strip of the panel. B Name This is the name of the DCA group. You can also click this area to edit the name. C Grid This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal rows) to DCA groups (vertical columns). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key (or click) to set/disable the assignment. Hint • You can also assign an output channel to both DCA groups for multiple DCA control. • DCA groups 1–6 are for input channels only, but DCA groups 7/8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. DCA groups 7/8 allow you to use both types of channel in the identically-numbered group. 234 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual G DCA faders These faders adjust the levels of DCA groups 7/8. They are linked with DCA faders 7/8 in the DCA strip. H CUE These buttons cue-monitor DCA groups 7/8. They are linked with DCA [CUE] keys 7/8 in the DCA strip of the panel. I DCA LEVEL SET Use the following two buttons to operate DCA groups 7/8 together. • ALL NOMINAL Clicking this button will move DCA faders 7/8 to nominal level (0 dB). • ALL MINIMUM Clicking this button will move DCA faders 7/8 to the –∞ dB position. Reference section Here you can specify the output channels that will be assigned to mute groups 1–8. Muting can be switched on/ off together for channels assigned to the same mute group. MUTE GROUP ASSIGN These buttons temporarily defeat the muted state of a channel. When a button is displayed as “–”, clicking it will change its display to “ON,” and the corresponding output channel will be excluded from mute groups. Clicking the button once again restores the original state. Note Information shown in the display D MUTE SAFE MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen Hint Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the identically-numbered mute group. 5 6 Output functions 3 E SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key) 4 A Mute group This area shows the mute group number. The number corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is highlighted. B MUTE (Mute master) These buttons switch muting on/off for each mute group. These buttons are linked with the SCENE MEMORY [1]–[8] keys of the panel (if the MUTE MASTER button is On in the constantly-shown area at the bottom of the display). Hint When you turn muting on, channels belonging to that mute group will behave just as though their panel [ON] key had been turned off; no signal will be output. During this time, the panel [ON] key LED will blink. C Grid This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to make/cancel mute group assignments. While the mute group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel that can be assigned to the corresponding group will assign the channel to the group. (Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the assignment.) Input functions 2 Hint The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one mute group. This is automatically turned off when you change screens or turn off the power. Appendices 1 Global functions 7 Function menu Normally, Mute Safe operations can be performed independently of the scene memory. F CLEAR This button clears all output channels assigned to that mute group. G DIRECT RECALL/MUTE MASTER This is the same function as the DIRECT RECALL/ MUTE MASTER buttons located at the bottom of the display (➥ p.151). This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal rows) to mute groups (vertical columns). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key (or click) to set/cancel the assignment. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 235 OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function EQ LINK ASSIGN screen Here you can specify the output channels that will be assigned to EQ link groups A–H. EQ parameters are linked for channels belonging to the same group. EQ LINK ASSIGN 3 4 C SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key) This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to make/cancel EQ link group assignments. While the EQ link group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel that can be assigned to the corresponding group will assign the channel to the group. (Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the assignment.) Hint The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one EQ link group. This is automatically turned off when you change screens or turn off the power. D CLEAR This button clears all output channels assigned to that EQ link group. 1 2 A EQ link group These are the EQ link group numbers. The number corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is highlighted. B Grid This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal rows) to EQ link groups (vertical columns). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key (or click) to set/cancel the assignment. Hint • The MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels can be assigned only to EQ link groups A–F, and MATRIX channels can be assigned only to EQ link groups G/H. • Grey areas in the grid indicate combinations that cannot be assigned. • Input channels and output channels use separate EQ link groups. Output channels use groups A–H, and input channels use groups 1–8. 236 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link assign) screen Here you can specify the output channels that will be assigned to compressor link groups A–H. Compressor parameters are linked for channels belonging to the same group. 4 C SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key) This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to make/cancel compressor link group assignments. While the compressor link group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel that can be assigned to the corresponding group will assign the channel to the group. (Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the assignment.) Hint The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one compressor link group. This is automatically turned off when you change screens or turn off the power. D CLEAR Function menu 3 Global functions COMP LINK ASSIGN Output functions This button clears all output channels assigned to that compressor link group. 2 Input functions 1 A Compressor link group This area shows the compressor link group number. The number corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is highlighted. B Grid Appendices This grid lets you assign output channels (horizontal rows) to compressor link groups (vertical columns). Currently-patched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key (or click) to set/cancel the assignment. Hint Input channels and output channels use separate compressor link groups. Output channels use groups A–H, and input channels use groups 1–8. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 237 MATRIX/ST function ❏ If the MATRIX channels are used individually MATRIX/ST function LEVEL knobs Adjust the send level of the signals sent from the MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels to each MATRIX bus. MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen Here you can send the signal from MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels to the STEREO bus or the desired MATRIX bus. MATRIX/ST ROUTING MIX channel 1 ↓ MATRIX bus 1 MIX channel 2 ↓ MATRIX bus 2 MIX channel 2 ↓ MATRIX bus 1 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 2 MIX channel 1 ↓ MATRIX bus 2 MIX CHANNEL 1 FADER ON 1 2 to MATRIX1 LEVEL ON to MATRIX2 LEVEL ON to MATRIX1 LEVEL ON to MATRIX2 LEVEL ON MIX CHANNEL 2 FADER ON MIX channel STEREO A/B channel A MATRIX bus This is the number of the MATRIX bus to which the signal is sent. Paired MATRIX channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. B Send level These knobs specify the send level of each signal that is sent from the MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel (vertical column) to the MATRIX buses (horizontal row). The knobs shown in this area will depend on how the MATRIX channels are paired. 238 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section …… 3 LEVEL knobs Adjust the send level of the signals sent from the MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels to each MATRIX bus. 4 5 7 6 8 C MIX TO MATRIX ON/OFF MIX channel 1 ↓ MATRIX buses 1/2 This button is an on/off switch for the signal sent from each MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to the MATRIX buses. If this button is off, no signal will be sent from that channel to the MATRIX buses. MIX channel 2 ↓ MATRIX buses 1/2 Information shown in the display PAN knobs Adjust the panning of the signals sent from the MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels to each pair of adjacent odd-numbered/ even-numbered MATRIX buses. Function menu ❏ If the MATRIX channels are paired to MATRIX 1/2 PAN ON LEVEL ON ON Immediately before the fader POST FADER Immediately after the fader POST ON Immediately after the MIX [ON] key / STEREO [ON] key This parameter applies to the signal sent from the corresponding channel to all MATRIX buses. E MIX TO STEREO ON/OFF MIX CHANNEL 2 FADER ON to MATRIX 1/2 LEVEL PAN ON ON This button is an on/off switch for the signal sent from each MIX channel to the STEREO bus. If this button is off, no signal will be sent from that channel to the STEREO bus. Global functions PRE FADER Output functions FADER …… F PRE/POST (Pre-on/Post-on) This button selects the position from which the signal is sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus, from the following choices. PRE Immediately before the MIX [ON] key (immediately after the fader) POST Immediately after the MIX [ON] key Input functions MIX CHANNEL 1 These buttons select the position from which the signal is sent from the MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to the MATRIX buses, from the following choices. G PAN (MIX→STEREO pan) This knob specifies the panning of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. If a MIX channel is selected in the SELECTED CHANNEL section, the STEREO [PAN] encoder is linked with this knob. Appendices MATRIX 1 MATRIX 2 D PRE FADER/POST FADER/POST ON Hint If the source is a STEREO A/B channel, parameters 5–7 are not displayed. H MIX channel, STEREO A/B channel This area indicates the MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel from which the signal is being sent. Paired MIX channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 239 MATRIX/ST function ❏ When the MTRX from MIX button is on MIX to MATRIX VIEW screen You can view the status of the signals sent from all MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to a specific MATRIX bus. This screen lists the signals sent from the MIX channels to the MATRIX buses. You can also edit the settings from within this screen. MIX to MATRIX VIEW B SEND LEVEL/SEND POINT Select one of the following two parameters to view in the grid. ❏ When the SEND LEVEL button is on 1 2 The send levels sent from the MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to the MATRIX buses will be shown as a bar graph in each grid. Channels for which the signal sent to the MATRIX bus is turned off are shown by gray bars, and channels for which the signal is turned on are shown by blue bars. Pan value (orange line) A MIX to MTRX/MTRX from MIX Select one of the following two types of screen display. ❏ When the MIX to MTRX button is on You can view the status of the signals sent from a specific MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to all MATRIX buses. Channels for which the signal sent to the MATRIX bus is turned off (gray bar graph) Channels for which the signal sent to the MATRIX bus is turned on (blue bar graph) To edit the send level, move the cursor to the grid where the MIX or STEREO A/B channel (vertical column) intersects the MATRIX bus (horizontal row), and turn the [DATA] encoder. To switch the signal sent from a specific MIX or STEREO A/B channel to the MATRIX buses on/off, move the cursor to the vertical column for that channel, and press the [ENTER] key. Hint • If the send level is set above nominal (0 dB), a red line indicating nominal level is displayed. • If the send-destination MATRIX channel is paired, the grid for the odd-numbered MATRIX bus will show an orange line indicating the pan value instead of a bar graph. (In MTRX from MIX mode, upward indicates R, and downward indicates L.) If the SEND LEVEL button is on, you can select a desired grid and copy its send level (pan) value to other channels (horizontal direction) or to other MATRIX buses (vertical direction), or switch all grids on/off simultaneously. To do so, move the cursor to the desired grid; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER] key. (Alternatively, hold down the [SHIFT] key and click the desired grid.) When the JOB SELECT win- 240 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display Global functions LEVEL COPY [ALL MATRIX ] Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to all send level (pan) settings of the corresponding MIX (or STEREO A/B) channel in the vertical direction of the grid. Function menu To change the position from which the signal is sent, move the cursor to the vertical column for the desired channel, and press the [ENTER] key, click, or turn the [DATA] encoder. (The position of all signals sent from that channel to all MATRIX buses will change simultaneously.) If the SEND POINT button is on, the send position for all grid locations can be changed simultaneously. To do so, hold down the [SHIFT] key and click the desired grid. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the desired grid; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER] key.) When the JOB SELECT window appears, select one of the following choices, and click the OK button. dow appears, select one of the following choices to copy, and click the OK button. Note ALL PRE FADER [ALL MIX ] All grids will be set to PRE FADER. ALL POST FADER [ALL MIX ] All grids will be set to POST FADER. ALL POST ON [ALL MIX ] All grids will be set to POST ON. 3 Input functions LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ] Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to all send level (pan) settings of the corresponding MATRIX bus in the horizontal direction of the grid. LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX x ALL MATRIX] Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to the send level (pan) settings of all MIX (and STEREO A/B) channels and MATRIX buses. ALL ON [ALL MIX ] Turn on the signals sent from all channels (MIX, STEREO A/B) to the corresponding MATRIX bus. ALL OFF [ALL MIX ] Turn off the signals sent from all channels (MIX, STEREO A/B) to the corresponding MATRIX bus. Output functions If the selected grid is a send level, only the send levels will be copied. If the selected grid is a pan value, only the pan values will be copied. ❏ When the SEND POINT button is on Appendices The grid will show the position from which the signal is sent from the MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels to the MATRIX buses. C Grid PRE FADER POST FADER POST ON The grid shows various settings for the signals sent from the MIX or STEREO A/B channels (vertical columns) to the MATRIX buses (horizontal rows). The red lines shown in the upward, downward, left, and right directions indicate the channel (MIX or STEREO A/B) and MATRIX bus corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located. Each indication has the following significance. (yellow) . . PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) (gray) . . . . POST FADER (immediately after the fader) (red) . . . . . POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 241 MATRIX/ST function Send level Pan (displayed if the destination MATRIX channel is paired and an odd-numbered MATRIX bus is selected) Position from which the signal is sent On/off switch for the signal sent to the MATRIX bus 4 LCR screen Here you can make settings for LCR mode, which allows three-channel playback by adding a CENTER channel to the L/R channels of the STEREO bus. This function can be used only with MIX channels. LCR D SELECTED PARAMETER (currently selected parameter) This area indicates the channel (MIX or STEREO A/B) and MATRIX bus corresponding to the grid where the cursor is currently located. The four boxes at right indicate the values for the grid where the cursor is currently located. 1 2 3 4 A Response graph These graphs indicate the approximate LCR response for each MIX channel. The graph will change as the CSR knob (2) is edited. B CSR (Center Side Ratio) This knob adjusts the proportional level of the CENTER channel relative to the L/R channels. The range is 0–100%. If the CSR knob is set to 0%, turning the PAN knob in the MIX TO STEREO area of the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen (or the [PAN] encoder in the SELECTED CHANNEL section) will change the signal levels of the L/R channels as shown below. Signal level Signal sent to the L channel Signal sent to the R channel L C R [PAN] encoder In this case, MIX TO STEREO PAN will operate as a conventional PAN control, and no signal will be sent to the CENTER channel. 242 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Signal sent to the L channel Signal sent to the R channel L C R [PAN] encoder When the PAN knob ([PAN] encoder) is in the center position, the signal level of the CENTER channel will be at maximum, and no signal will be sent to the L/R channels. This is the number of the MIX channel you are editing. Paired MIX channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed at the right. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. The values of parameters 2–3 are linked for paired channels. Hint • The master level of the CENTER channel is controlled by the STEREO B channel fader. You can also use the STEREO B channel EQ and compressor to process the signal. • Use either one of the output jacks patched to the STEREO B channel as the output jack for the CENTER channel. (When the USE AS CENTER BUS button is On in the MIXER SETUP screen, the L/R channels of the STEREO B bus output the same signal.) • By selecting LCR as the monitor source, you can monitor the LCR signal from the MONITOR OUT jacks L/C/R. Information shown in the display Signal level Signal sent to the C channel D MIX channel Function menu If CSR is set to 100%, turning the PAN knob ([PAN] encoder) will change the signal levels of the L/R channels as shown below. C LCR (LCR mode on/off) R L R L R L R L R Output functions Input functions L Global functions For each MIX channel, this turns LCR mode on/off. For channels where LCR mode is turned on, the PAN knob in the MIX TO STEREO area of the MATRIX/ST ROUTING screen can be used to simultaneously control the levels of the L/R channels and the CENTER channel. If you have selected a MIX channel for which LCR is on, you can also use the [PAN] encoder in the SELECTED CHANNEL section of the top panel. In this case, the peripheral LEDs will change as follows when you operate the [PAN] encoder. • When LCR = off • When LCR = on L R Appendices Note In order to use the LCR function, the USE AS CENTER BUS button must be turned On in the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/ W.CLOCK function) (➥ p.201). Be aware that when this button is on, the CENTER channel signal is not sent to the STEREO B bus, and will not play back appropriately. (In this case, the STEREO B bus is sent the same signal as the STEREO A bus.) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 243 MATRIX/ST function SURR SETUP screen Here you can make various settings related to surround functionality, such as selecting the surround mode, and assigning MIX buses to surround channels. 2 3 4 B Bus assignments SURR SETUP This area indicates the surround channels assigned to the MIX buses that are being used as surround buses. You can edit these settings by clicking the / buttons at the left and right. When you change the surround channel assignment, the MIX bus whose channel assignment you changed will be exchanged with the MIX bus that had been previously assigned to that channel. Note The MIX buses used are fixed for each surround mode. For surround mode 3-1, MIX buses 1–4 or 9–13 can be used. For surround mode 5.1, MIX buses 1–6 or 9–14 can be used. For surround mode 6.1, MIX buses 1–7 or 9–15 can be used. Other MIX buses can be used as conventional MIX buses. However in the case of 6.1, MIX bus 8 or MIX bus 16 are always handled as FIXED buses. C INIT (Initialize) For each surround mode, this restores the surround channel assignments to the MIX buses to their initial state. A SURROUND MODE • • • • Choose one of the following as the surround mode when using the Surround Pan function (➥ p.132). This is the same as the 1 SURROUND MODE in the MIXER SETUP screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). The graphic below the buttons will change according to the mode you select. STEREO This is conventional stereo mode. 3-1ch This mode uses four channels: L (front left), C (front center), R (front right), and S (surround). 5.1ch This mode uses six channels: L (front left), C (front center), R (front right), Ls (rear left), Rs (rear right), and LFE (subwoofer). 6.1ch This mode uses seven channels: 5.1ch with the addition of Bs (rear center). D SURROUND BUS ALLOCATION Hint If 3-1ch, 5.1ch, or 6.1 ch is selected as the surround mode, MIX buses 1–8 or 9–16 are used as surround buses, starting with the earlier-numbered buses. (Buses not used as surround buses can be used as conventional buses.) These MIX buses cannot be used as conventional bus outputs until you return to stereo mode. 244 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Select either MIX buses 1–8 or 9–16 as the range of MIX buses used as surround buses. CH VIEW (Channel view) screen This screen displays the mix parameters of the currently selected MIX channel, MATRIX channel, or STEREO A/B channel. In this screen you can also edit the principal parameters and access other screens. CH VIEW K Function menu 6 9 Information shown in the display OUTPUT VIEW function 7 8J E DELAY Global functions This specifies the delay time for each surround channel in a range of 0–1000 msec. The current value is shown by the two boxes below the knob. (The upper box shows the delay time in millisecond units, and the lower box shows the delay time in the units selected in the MIX 1-24 screen of the OUT DELAY function.) F DELAY ON/OFF Turns the delay on/off for each surround channel. G FADER (Fader level) Adjusts the level of the signal sent from the surround channel to the corresponding MIX bus in a range of –∞ to +10 dB. The current value is shown in the box below. H CUE This button lets you cue-monitor the surround channel. This is linked with the [CUE] key of the corresponding MIX channel. 1 I ON/OFF (Channel on/off) 2 Output functions 5 Turns the surround channel on/off. This is linked with the MIX [ON] key of the corresponding MIX channel. J Level meter This is the name of the surround channel. 4 Appendices K Surround channel Input functions 3 Indicates the output level of the surround channel. A Channel This is the number of the channel you are editing. If the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel is paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing for the MIX/MATRIX channel. Note The screen shown above is for when a paired channel is selected. If the selected channel is not paired, the parameters for only one channel are displayed, and pairing-related settings are not displayed. B EQ This area shows the post-EQ level, the approximate EQ response, and the EQ on/off status. You can click the EQ ON/OFF button to switch EQ on/off in this screen. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 245 OUTPUT VIEW function If you click the mini-graph, the EQ PARAM screen for that channel will appear. C Compressor This area shows the amount of gain reduction and the output level of the compressor, a mini-graph showing the approximate response of the compressor, and the compressor on/off status. You can click the COMP ON/OFF button to switch the compressor on/off in this screen. If you click the mini-graph, the COMP PARAM screen for that channel will appear. • To switch the signal sent to the MATRIX bus on/off Click the ON/OFF button located below. You can also switch this on/off by moving the cursor to a bar graph in the list and pressing the [ENTER] key. The bar graph is colored blue when on, and gray when off. L D Insert in 7 This area indicates the insert point, the insert on/off status, and the type and input level of the port that is patched to insert-in. You can click the INSERT ON/ OFF button to switch insertion on/off in this screen. If an internal effect is patched, the effect type and BYPASS button are displayed. If a GEQ module is patched, the GEQ ON/OFF button and a mini-graph showing the GEQ response are displayed. M 8 9 N O J 5 K P Q G DCA group / Mute group Here you can assign or cancel DCA group and MUTE group assignments. H RECALL SAFE / MUTE SAFE Here you can enable or disable Recall Safe and Mute Safe settings. 6 I TO STEREO (MIX channels only) Here you can switch the signal sent from a MIX channel to the STEREO bus on/off, and edit its panning and send position (pre-on / post-on) (➥ p.239). J BALANCE (only for paired MIX/MATRIX channels and STEREO A/B channels) E DELAY This adjusts the left/right volume balance of the signals output from paired MIX channels or STEREO A/B channels. In this area you can view and edit the delay time of the internal delay and its on/off status. F TO MATRIX (only for MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels) This area shows the send level, send position, and on/ off status of the signals sent from the corresponding MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to MATRIX buses 1–8. You can also edit the send level, send position, and on/off status in this screen. Here’s how to do this. • To edit the send level of signals sent to the MATRIX bus Move the cursor to the desired bar graph in the list, and turn the [DATA] encoder. • To edit the send position of signals sent to the MATRIX bus Click either the PRE FADER, the POST FADER, or the POST ON button located below. Alternatively, you can edit the setting by moving the cursor to the PRE or POST indication in the list and pressing the [ENTER] key or turning the [DATA] encoder. 246 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual K LCR (MIX channels only) Here you can switch LCR mode on/off, and adjust CSR (the level of the CENTER channel relative to the L/R channels) (➥ p.242). L LIBRARY This button accesses the OUTPUT CH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.251), where you can store/recall library settings for output channels. M Level meter This level meter indicates the output level of the channel. N Signal detection point Reference section This is the point at which the signal level shown in the level meter (M) is detected (PRE EQ, PRE FADER, POST FADER, POST DELAY, or POST ON). You can edit this setting by clicking the / buttons at the left and right. SIGNAL FLOW screen This controls the output level of the channel. P CUE This button cue-monitors the signal of the channel. This is linked with the [CUE] key of the corresponding channel. Q ON/OFF (Channel on/off) SIGNAL FLOW 1 2 Output functions Global functions Function menu This is an on/off switch for the signal that is output from the channel. This is linked with the [ON] key of that channel. This screen shows the signal flow for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX/MATRIX channels or for STEREO A/B channels. In this screen you can also edit some of the parameters, and access other screens. You can also determine the location within the signal flow at which clipping occurred. Information shown in the display O Fader These are the numbers of the channels you are editing. By clicking the / buttons at left and right, you can switch the display in units of two channels. If the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channels are paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing for the MIX/MATRIX channels. Input functions A Channels B Insert PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Appendices This area displays insert-related information for the two selected channels (insert point, the ports patched to insert in/out, and insert on/off status). Here you can also select the insert point (use the / buttons at left and right), or switch insertion on/off (use the ON/OFF button). 247 OUTPUT VIEW function 3 5 6 C Level meters These meters indicate the levels within the signal flow. Levels are detected at the following locations. • EQ (immediately before and after the EQ) • COMP (immediately before and after the compressor) • FADER (immediately before and after the fader) • DELAY (immediately before and after the delay) • INSERT IN (immediately after the insert point) E TO MATRIX (only for MIX channels and STEREO A/B channels) This area shows the on/off status of the signal sent from the MIX channel or STEREO A/B channel to the MATRIX buses, and the point from which the signal is sent. F TO STEREO (MIX channels only) This area shows the pan, the send position, and the on/ off status of the signal sent from the MIX channel to the STEREO bus. 4 D Signal flow • • • • • This area indicates the signal flow of the selected channel. The following parameters are displayed. EQ (Equalizer) This indicates the EQ on/off status and the approximate response curve. You can click the EQ button to switch EQ on/off, or click the mini-graph to access the EQ PARAM screen for the corresponding channel. COMP (Compressor) This indicates the compressor on/off status and the approximate response curve. You can click the COMP button to switch the compressor on/off, or click the mini-graph to access the COMP PARAM screen for the corresponding channel. FADER This indicates the output level of the channel. This is linked with the encoder or fader of the corresponding channel. ON/OFF (On/off) Turns the channel on/off. This is linked with the [ON] key of the corresponding channel. DELAY Here you can switch the internal delay on/off and edit the delay time. Hint • If insert is enabled, the currently selected insert point is shown in this signal flow. • If the signal clips, the signal flow (horizontal line) after clipping is displayed in red. If an output is turned off so that the signal does not flow any further, the subsequent flow is displayed in gray. If PEAK HOLD is on, the flow indication will stay red if clipping occurs even once, making it easier to see that clipping has occurred. 248 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section CH COPY (Channel copy) screen This screen shows the on/off status, level, and cue monitor status of the output channels and DCA groups. FADER VIEW In this screen you can copy the desired parameter(s) from the selected output channel into a memory buffer, and paste them to the same type of channel (you may select more than one paste-destination). Global functions Function menu CH COPY Information shown in the display FADER VIEW screen 1 2 Output functions 1 2 3 Here you can switch output channels on/off, and switch DCA group muting on/off. These settings are linked with the [ON] keys of the corresponding channels and the [MUTE] keys of the DCA groups. B Level Here you can adjust the level of the output channels and DCA groups. The current value is shown in the box immediately below. These are linked with the encoder or fader of the corresponding channel or DCA group. C Cue Here you can switch cue monitoring on/off for output channels and DCA groups. These are linked with the [CUE] key of the corresponding channel or DCA group. When you click this button, the settings of the currently selected channel will be copied to a temporary memory buffer. If the corresponding MIX/MATRIX channel is paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. B BUFFERED CH (Channel in the buffer) This shows the channel that is currently copied into buffer memory. Appendices A ON/OFF (On/off) Input functions A COPY Note • The same buffer memory is used to copy channel settings for both input channels and output channels. • If input channel settings have been copied to the buffer memory, a message of “TYPE CONFLICT!” is displayed below, and you cannot paste to an output channel. • The contents of the buffer memory are erased when the PM5D is powered-off. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 249 OUTPUT VIEW function E CH SELECT (Channel selection) Here you can select the paste-destination channel(s). You can only select channels of the same type as the copy-source. 3 6 7 Hint If the copy-source MIX/MATRIX channel is paired, the oddnumbered channel is copied to the odd-numbered channel(s), and the even-numbered channel is copied to the even-numbered channel(s). F SET ALL 4 5 Specifies the paste-destination as all channels of the same type as the copy-source. G CLEAR ALL De-selects all channels. C PASTE When you click this button, the specified parameters will be copied from buffer memory to the specified paste-destination channel. If an input channel is copied to buffer memory, or if no paste-destination has been specified, this is grayed-out and the Paste operation is unavailable. D PARAMETER SELECT Here you can select the parameter(s) that will be pasted. You can select the following parameters. ALL All parameters EQ EQ function settings COMP COMP function settings DELAY DELAY function settings FADER Fader level ON CH [ON] key on/off status BAL Balance settings INSERT Insert on/off status and insert point TO MTRX Send level to the desired MATRIX bus(es) DCA Associated DCA group MUTE Associated mute group LCR LCR screen settings WITHOUT MIX SEND/ WITH MIX SEND Selects whether the send level sent from input channels to the selected MIX bus will be included (WITH...) or will not be included (WITHOUT...) in the pasted data. If the TO MTRX button is on, you can use the MATRIX buttons (1–8) to select the applicable MATRIX buses. 250 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 8 Information shown in the display OUTPUT CH LIBRARY screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the output channel library. Function menu OUTPUT CH LIBRARY 4 5 6 Recalls the channel library item selected in the list into memory. If the channel selected in (1) is of a different type than the channel selected in the list, this button is grayedout and the Recall operation is unavailable. (However, Initial Data can be recalled to any output channel.) 2 E STORE Stores the settings of the currently selected output channel into the location selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the settings. 3 F TITLE EDIT Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. A EDIT When you click this button, the CH VIEW screen (OUTPUT CH VIEW screen) for the currently selected output channel will appear. G CLEAR Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. Output functions D RECALL 1 Input functions 9 Global functions 7 Note B Channel Note • Channel library store/recall operations are performed in units of one channel. • If the channel selected by the [SEL] key is paired (or if a STEREO A/B channel is selected), the operation will apply to only one of the currently selected channels (in the case of STEREO A/B, only the L or the R channel). • When you recall a channel library item into one of a pair of MIX/MATRIX channels (or into L or R of the STEREO A/B channel), any linked parameters will be copied to the other channel. Appendices Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. This is the number of the channel you will store or recall. H LIBRARY TYPE Displays the type of channel for the library item selected in the list. If the channel selected in (1) is of a different type than the channel selected in the list, a message of “CONFLICT!” is displayed at the right and the Recall operation is unavailable. If a MIX or STEREO A/B channel is selected, the pairing configuration of MATRIX buses 1–8 is shown immediately below. I Library list C LIBRARY TYPE (Channel type) Indicates the type of the currently selected channel. If a MIX or STEREO A/B channel is selected, the pairing configuration of MATRIX buses 1–8 is shown immediately below. Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 251 Input functions Input functions INPUT PATCH function D Grid This grid lets you patch input ports (horizontal rows) to input channels (vertical columns). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking a grid location you can set/cancel patching. The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid location to which you move the cursor. INPUT PATCH screen Here you can assign input ports (INPUT jacks, ST IN jacks, 2TR IN DIGITAL/ANALOG jacks, input channels of slots, outputs of internal effects) to input channels. Hint • If PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), a confirmation message will appear each time you attempt to change a patch setting. If STEAL PATCH CONFIRMATION is turned on, a confirmation message will also appear when you attempt to make patch settings that would cause an existing patch to be modified. • To move the cursor location rapidly in or out of the grid, hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the CURSOR [√]/[®]/[π]/ [†] keys. • To move rapidly to left or right inside the grid, turn the [DATA] encoder. To move up or down, hold down the [SHIFT] key and turn the [DATA] encoder. INPUT PATCH Note You can patch multiple input channels to a single input port, but you cannot patch multiple input ports to a single input channel. E Input port From the top, this area indicates the type of input port, the ID number, the input channel number, and the number of input channels assigned. The following types of input port can be selected. 1 5 2 AD IN INPUT jacks 1–48 AD STIN L/R channels of ST IN jacks 1–4 SLOT IN Input channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX OUT L/R outputs of internal effects 1–8 2TR IN L/R channels of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 and 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 Hint 3 • The port number is grayed-out for ports that are currently unavailable. • If the CASCADE connector is being used as a SLOT IN port, the port number of the CASCADE connector is displayed in yellow instead of the SLOT IN port number. 4 A SELECTED PATCH This indicates the name and number of the input channel at which the cursor is located, and the input port. B CH (Input channel) This is the number and name of the input channel (input channel, ST IN channel, FX RTN channel) assigned to the input port. The channel number at which the cursor is located will be highlighted. If you click the name, a window will open allowing you to assign a name to the channel. C ASSIGN For each channel, this indicates the number (1 or 0) of input ports currently assigned. 252 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 7 8 DIRECT OUT PATCH screen Here you can patch an input channel to an output port so that the input signal will be output directly from that port. This button resets the input port → input channel assignments to the following default settings. Channel Input port Input channels 1–48 AD IN 1–48 ST IN channels 1–4 L/R AD STIN L/R FX RTN channels 1–4 L/R FX OUT 1–4 L/R DIRECT OUT PATCH Function menu F PRESET Information shown in the display 6 G CLEAR ALL This button clears all assignments of input ports to input channels. H LIBRARY 1 5 Output functions Global functions This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input channel patch library settings. 3 4 A SELECTED PATCH This indicates the name and number of the input channel at which the cursor is located, and the output port. Input functions 2 B CH (Input channel) Appendices This is the number and name of the input channel (input channel, ST IN channel) for assignment to an output port. The channel number at which the cursor is located will be highlighted. If you click the name, a window will open allowing you to assign a name to the channel. C ASSIGN For each channel, this indicates the number of output ports that are currently assigned. D Grid This grid lets you patch input channels (vertical columns) to output ports (horizontal rows). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking a grid location you can set/cancel patching. The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid location to which you move the cursor. Hint Operations in the grid are the same for all of the patching screens. For details, refer to the Hint on p.252. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 253 INPUT PATCH function E Output port From the top, this area indicates the type of output port, the ID number, the output channel number, and the number of input channels assigned. The following types of output port can be selected. SLOT OUT Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 2TR OUT L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 INSERT PATCH screen In this screen you can patch the input/output ports by which external devices will be inserted into each input channel. Select the output port in the left side of the screen, and the input port in the right side of the screen. INSERT PATCH Hint • The port number is grayed-out for ports that are currently unavailable. • For SLOT OUT ports that are also being output to the CASCADE connector, the port number of the CASCADE connector is displayed in yellow instead of the SLOT OUT port number. 6 1 2 F LIBRARY button This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input channel patch library settings. A SELECTED PATCH This indicates the number and name of the input channel at which the cursor is located in the grid. Note To enable direct output from the selected port, you will need to make settings in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function) to turn on direct output for the corresponding input channel (➥ p.256. B Insert in/out This indicates the input/output ports that are patched as insert in/out for the input channel at which the cursor is located. 6 3 4 5 C CH (Input channel) This area shows the number and name of each input channel (input channel, ST IN channel L/R). The channel number at which the cursor is located will be highlighted. If you click the name, a window will open allowing you to assign a name to the channel. D ASSIGN For each input channel, this indicates the number of output ports that are currently assigned as insert-out. 254 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section For each input channel (vertical column), this grid lets you can patch one or more output ports (horizontal row) to be used as insert-outs. Currently-patched grids are indicated by a symbol. By clicking a grid location you can set/cancel patching. The red lines at the left and top indicate the grid location to which you move the cursor. 8 Information shown in the display E Grid H LIBRARY button F Output port From the top, this area indicates the type of output port, the ID number, the output channel number, and the number of input channels assigned. The following types of output port can be patched as insert-out. SLOT OUT Output channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX IN L/R inputs of internal effects 1–8 GEQ IN Inputs of GEQ modules 1–12 2TR OUT L/R channels of 2TR OUT DIGITAL jacks 1–3 Hint This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input channel patch library settings. Note To enable the insert ins/outs that you assigned to input channels in this screen, you need to turn Insert on for the corresponding input channel in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (INPUT PATCH function) (➥ p.256). However, insertion is automatically enabled if you assigned insert in/out to a GEQ. Hint When operating from the panel, you can move the cursor from the right side of the screen to the left side (or vice versa) by holding down the [SHIFT] key and using the CURSOR [√]/ [®] keys. Input functions Output functions • The port number is grayed-out for ports that are currently unavailable. • For SLOT OUT ports that are also being output to the CASCADE connector, the port number of the CASCADE connector is displayed in yellow instead of the SLOT OUT port number. • If you select GEQ IN as an insert-out, the output of the same GEQ module will automatically be selected as the insert-in. Global functions Operations in the grid are the same for all of the patching screens. For details, refer to the Hint on p.252. Function menu Hint Appendices 7 G Input port From the top, this area indicates the type of input port, the ID number, L/R, the input channel number, and the total number of input channels (including insertin) that are patched to each input port. You can select the following input ports. AD IN INPUT jacks 1–48 AD ST IN ST IN jacks 1–4 L/R SLOT IN Input channels of an I/O card installed in slots 1–4 FX OUT L/R outputs of internal effects 1–8 GEQ OUT Outputs of GEQ modules 1–12 2TR IN L/R channels of 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks 1–3 or 2TR IN ANALOG jacks 1/2 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 255 INPUT PATCH function INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen D INSERT I/O (Insert I/O point) Here you can select one of the following as the insertin/out location for each channel. For each input channel, you can specify the point at which insert in/out will be patched, and the point from which direct output will be taken. Here you can also switch Insert or Direct Output on/off. INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ POST EQ Immediately after the EQ PRE DELAY Immediately before the delay POST FADER Immediately after the fader 5 6 E DIRECT OUT ON/OFF These buttons switch direct output on/off for each channel. F DIRECT OUT Here you can select one of the following as the direct output location for each channel. 1 A Insert view When you move the cursor to an insert I/O point (4), the insert and direct output locations for that input channel will be shown graphically. 2 3 4 B INPUT CH (Input channel) This is the number of the input channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol shown at the left; settings 3–6 will be linked for these channels. You can click this symbol to enable/ disable pairing. C INSERT ON/OFF This button switches insert on/off for each channel. This is linked for two paired channels. Note Be aware that if you turn on this button when either insert-in or insert-out are unpatched, the signal will no longer be output from the corresponding input channel. 256 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section PRE HPF Immediately before the high-pass filter PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ (immediately after the PRE EQ of the INSERT I/O) PRE FADER Immediately before the fader POST ON Immediately after the CH [ON] key INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the input patch library. Here you can assign a name to each input channel and DCA group. INPUT PATCH LIBRARY 2 Except for the fact that these are patch settings for input channels, display and operations are the same as in the OUTPUT PATCH function OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen. Refer to p.223. 3 Input functions Output functions 1 Global functions Function menu NAME Information shown in the display NAME screen A Channel This area indicates the input channel (input channel, ST IN channel) and DCA group numbers. B Name Appendices This area indicates the names currently assigned to each input channel and DCA group. If you click the name, a window will open allowing you to assign a name to the channel. C LIBRARY This button accesses the INPUT PATCH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.257), where you can store/recall input channel patch (and name) library settings. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 257 INPUT HA/INSERT function INPUT HA/INSERT function 1 CH 1-24 (Input channel 1-24) screen 2 3 STIN/FXRTN (ST IN/FXRTN channel) screen 4 Here you can make settings for internal HAs (PM5D-RH model only) or external HAs assigned to input channels. 5 6 CH 1-24 A +48V B HPF (High Pass Filter) C Cutoff frequency D GAIN E Input port These items are the same as in the OUTPUT INSERT function INSERT IN MIX1-24 screen and INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR screen (➥ p.224). F Channel This area shows the number and name of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. Note • Items 1–4 are not shown for channels to which nothing is patched, or for channels patched to an input port that does not have a HA. Items 2 and 3 are not shown for channels patched to a port that has no high pass filter. • To assign input ports to input channels, use the INPUT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function). • HA settings are not linked even if two channels are paired. However, the GAIN knob setting is linked for HAs whose GANG button is turned on in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). STIN/FXRTN 7 G LIBRARY button This button displays the HA LIBRARY screen (➥ p.208), where you can store/recall internal HA or external HA settings as library items. Hint The HA settings you edit in this screen are also reflected in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). 258 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 1 INSERT 25-48 screen 2 3 Information shown in the display INSERT 1-24 screen INSERT STIN screen 4 Here you can make settings for internal HAs (PM5D-RH model only) or external HAs assigned to the insert-in of input channels. 5 Function menu 6 INSERT 1-24 A +48V B HPF (High Pass Filter) C Cutoff frequency E Input port These items are the same as in the OUTPUT INSERT function INSERT IN MIX1-24 screen and INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR screen (➥ p.224). F Channel This area shows the number and name of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. 7 Input functions • Items 1–4 are not shown for channels to whose insert-in nothing is patched, or for channels patched to an input port whose insert-in does not have a HA. Items 2 and 3 are not shown for channels patched to a port that has no high pass filter. • To assign an input port to an insert-in, use the INPUT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function). • HA settings are not linked even if two channels are paired. However, the GAIN knob setting is linked for HAs whose GANG button is turned on in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). Output functions Note Appendices STIN/FXRTN IN Global functions D GAIN G LIBRARY button This button displays the HA LIBRARY screen (➥ p.208), where you can store/recall internal HA or external HA settings as library items. Hint The HA settings you edit in this screen are also reflected in the HA screen (SYS/W.CLOCK function). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 259 INPUT ø/EQ function INPUT ø/EQ function HA LIBRARY screen This screen is the same as HA LIBRARY in the SYS/ W.CLOCK function (➥ p.208). HA LIBRARY EQ PARAM (EQ parameter) screen Here you can edit the EQ parameters of the selected input channel. EQ PARAM 1 2 3 4 5 A Channel selection Selects the input channel (input channel 1–48, STIN channel 1–4 L/R, FXRTN channel 1–4 L/R). B Name This is the name of the currently selected input channel. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel or FX RTN channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For an input channel, you can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. C EQ ON/OFF Turns the EQ on/off for that channel. D EQ LINK GROUP Selects the EQ link group (1–8) to which the EQ of that channel belongs. EQ parameters are linked for input channels belonging to the same group. Note The input channel EQ link groups are independent from the output channel EQ link groups. E LIBRARY This button accesses the INPUT EQ LIBRARY screen (➥ p.263), where you can store/recall input channel EQ library settings. 260 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section EQ 25-48 switch 6 8 J 9 F ATT (Attenuation) This knob adjusts the amount of attenuation/gain immediately following AD conversion in a range of –96 dB to +24 dB. This is linked with the ATT knob in the ø/ATT 1-48 screen and ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN screen. The current value is displayed in the box located below the knob. G EQ TYPE Selects the type of EQ. Turning the TYPE I button on selects the algorithm used in the 02R series. Turning the TYPE II button on selects a newly developed algorithm. TYPE II reduces the interference between bands. EQ STIN/FXRTN screen These screens list the EQ settings for the input channels. Here you can also copy EQ settings between input channels. Note In some screens that include channel numbers as part of the screen name, changing the Pair Mode to Vertical Pairing in the MIXER SETUP screen will change the name of the screen. Example: EQ 1-24 screen → EQ 1,25- screen EQ 1-24 Global functions H EQ graph This graph shows the approximate response of the EQ parameters. The colored vertical lines indicate the FREQ (center frequency) of the band for the parameter at which the cursor is located. (The color of each line matches the knob markings for each band.) The response curve will change when you edit the Q or GAIN of each band. Output functions I Level meters These meters indicate the peak levels before EQ and after EQ. If the signal clips before or after EQ, the OVER segment will light. J EQ FLAT NO Appendices M L EQ STIN/FXRTN Input functions This button resets the GAIN parameters of all bands to the default value (±0.0 dB). When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. K Function menu 7 Information shown in the display EQ 1-24 screen K HPF (High Pass Filter) The high pass filter located after attenuation and before EQ can be switched on/off, and you can adjust its cutoff frequency. The cutoff frequency can be adjusted in a range of 20–600 Hz. L Knobs These knobs adjust the Q, FREQ (center frequency), and GAIN (amount of boost/cut) for each band. M (LOW shelving) If this button is on, the LOW EQ will function as a shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear. N (HIGH shelving) If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a shelving-type EQ. The Q knob will disappear. O LPF (Low Pass Filter) If this button is on, the HIGH EQ will function as a low-pass filter. The Q knob will disappear, and the GAIN knob is used to switch the LPF on/off. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 261 INPUT ø/EQ function 4 1 2 ø/ATT 1-48 (Phase/Attenuation 1-48) screen ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN (Phase/Attenuation STIN/FXRTN) screen 3 Here you can adjust the amount of attenuation/gain immediately following AD conversion, and reverse the phase. A EQ graph This mini-graph shows the approximate EQ response for each input channel. When you click the graph at which the cursor is currently located, the EQ PARAM screen for that channel will appear. In this screen you can drag and drop the mini-graph from the desired channel to copy its EQ settings. (When you drag and drop the mini-graph, a window will appear, asking you to confirm the copy operation.) You can also copy EQ settings between the three screens EQ 1-24, EQ 25-48, and EQ STIN/FXRTN. First drag the mini-graph over the EQ 1-24, EQ 25-48, or EQ STIN/FXRTN tabs in the screen (the screen will switch). Then drag and drop the mini-graph onto the desired channel, and a window will appear, asking you to confirm the copy operation. B EQ ON/OFF Turns the EQ on/off for that channel. This is linked for two paired channels. C Channel This is the number of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. D Level meter This meter indicates the peak level after EQ. If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. 262 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section ø /ATT 1-48 ø /ATT STIN/FXRTN 2 Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the input EQ library. INPUT EQ LIBRARY 3 Information shown in the display INPUT EQ LIBRARY screen 1 A GANG When you turn this button on, attenuation/gain settings will be linked for adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered channels (or the L/R sides of an STIN/ FXRTN channel). If the settings are different when you turned the button on, they will maintain their relative difference while linked. B ø (Phase) C Attenuation/gain For each channel, you can adjust the amount of attenuation/gain immediately following AD conversion over a range of –96 dB to +24 dB. This is linked with the ATT knob of the EQ PARAM screen. The current value is displayed in the box located below the knob. Except for the fact that these are EQ settings for the input channels, display and operations are the same as in the OUTPUT EQ function OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY screen. Refer to p.228. Output functions This button inverts the phase of each channel’s signal following AD conversion. Global functions Function menu 4 D Channel Appendices Input functions This is the number and name of the channel. If two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered channels are paired (or if a STIN channel or FXRTN channel is displayed), a heart symbol is displayed between the two channels. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 263 INPUT GATE/COMP function INPUT GATE/COMP function E Level meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction (GR), the peak level before (PRE) and after (POST) the gate, and the peak level of the key-in signal (KEY IN) that causes the gate to operate. If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. If stereo link is turned on for the input channel (or if a ST IN channel is selected), level meters for two channels are displayed. GATE PARAM (Gate parameter) screen Here you can edit the gate parameters of the selected input channel. GATE PARAM 5 Hint If GR METER ON/OFF LINK is turned on in the PREFERENCE 1 screen (UTILITY function), the gain reduction meter will not be displayed when the gate is off. 6 1 2 3 7 4 8 A Channel selection Select the input channel (input channel, ST IN channel) that you want to edit. B Name This is the name of the currently selected input channel. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For an input channel, you can click this symbol to enable/ disable pairing. F Type Indicates the type of the currently selected gate. Hint To change the gate type, use the INPUT GATE LIBRARY screen to recall a library item that has a different type. You cannot change only the gate type in this screen. C GATE ON/OFF Turns the gate for that channel on/off. G STEREO LINK D LIBRARY This button accesses the GATE LIBRARY screen (➥ p.268), where you can store/recall gate library settings for input channels. This specifies whether parameter settings and gate operation by a key-in signal will be linked (STEREO LINK button on) for adjacent odd-numbered/evennumbered input channels and the L/R channels of ST IN channels, or not (STEREO LINK button off). ❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= On LINK= ON THR Odd-numbered channel key-in signal Even-numbered THR channel key-in signal 264 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Detect maximum level ATTACK processing GR ATTACK processing GR ❏ Key-in signal flow when Link= Off THR Detect maxOdd-numbered channel key-in signal imum level ATTACK processing GR Even-numbered THR Detect maximum level channel key-in signal ATTACK processing GR L CUE This button cue-monitors the currently selected key-in signal. Note Note Stereo Link is fixed at On for paired channels. H Gate graph This graph displays the approximate response of the gate. Even if the cue mode is set to MIX CUE (which lets you monitor the mix of all channels whose [CUE] key is on), only the corresponding signal will take priority for monitoring when you turn on the CUE button in the GATE PARAM screen. (Any [CUE] keys that had been on at that time will be forcibly turned off.) M N O P Q Function menu This is an on/off switch for the filter applied to the keyin signal. LINK= OFF Information shown in the display K FILTER ON/OFF M THRESHOLD (Threshold level) Specifies the level at which the gate will open and close. The gate will open when the key-in signal exceeds this level, and will close when the signal falls below this level. L I KEY IN SOURCE Here you can select one of the following as the key-in signal that will be used. (If an input channel is selected, its name will be displayed at the right.) SELF PRE EQ The pre-EQ signal of the currently selected input channel SELF POST EQ The post-EQ signal of the currently selected input channel CH 1–48 POST EQ ST IN 1L/1R–4L/4R POST EQ MIX 21–24 OUT The post-EQ signal of the corresponding input channel (however, you can only choose channels belonging to the same group, within the seven groups CH1–8, CH9–16, CH17–24, CH25–32, CH33–40, CH41–48, and ST IN 1L/1R–4L/4R) N ATTACK (Attack time) Specifies the time from when the key-in signal exceeds the threshold level until the gate opens. O HOLD (Hold time) Specifies the time that the gate will remain open after the key-in signal falls below the threshold. P DECAY (Decay time) Specifies the time over which the gate will close after the hold time has elapsed. Q RANGE Specifies the amount of attenuation while the gate is closed. Input functions K Output functions J Global functions 9 The output signal of the corresponding MIX channel immediately before the output attenuation Appendices J FILTER Select the type of filter to be applied to the selected keyin signal, from the following types. • HPF (High Pass Filter) Passes the portion of the signal above the specified frequency (the cutoff frequency), and cuts the portion below. If you select this filter, use the knob at the right to adjust the cutoff frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz). • BPF (Band Pass Filter) Passes only the specified frequency region (the band pass frequency), and cuts the rest of the signal. If you select this filter, use the knobs at the right to adjust the band pass frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz) and Q (10.0– 0.10). • LPF (Low Pass Filter) Passes the portion of the signal below the specified frequency (the cutoff frequency), and cuts the portion above. If you select this filter, use the knob at the right to adjust the cutoff frequency (20 Hz–20 kHz). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 265 INPUT GATE/COMP function COMP PARAM (Compressor parameter) screen F Level meters These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction (GR), the peak level before (PRE) and after (POST) the compressor, and the peak level of the key-in signal (KEY IN) that causes the compressor to operate. If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. Here you can edit the compressor parameters of the selected input channel. COMP PARAM 7 1 2 3 4 6 8 9 5 A Channel selection Select the input channel (input channel, ST IN channel) that you want to edit. B Name G Type This is the name of the currently selected input channel. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. For an input channel, you can click this symbol to enable/ disable pairing. Indicates the type of the currently selected compressor. H STEREO LINK This specifies whether compressor parameter settings and key-in signal operation will be linked for adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (STEREO LINK button on), or will be independent (STEREO LINK button off). (For details on compressor stereo link ➥ p.229) C COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off) Turns the compressor on/off for that channel. D COMP LINK GROUP (Compressor link group) I Compressor graph Selects the compressor link group (1–8) to which that channel belongs. Compressor parameters are linked for input channels belonging to the same group. Note Input channel compressor link groups are independent from output channel compressor link groups. E LIBRARY This button accesses the COMP LIBRARY screen (➥ p.232), where you can store/recall compressor library settings for input channels. 266 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This graph displays the approximate response of the compressor. CH 25-36 (Input channel 25–36) screen Select the desired key-in signal from the following choices. SELF PRE EQ The pre-EQ signal of the currently selected input channel SELF POST EQ The post-EQ signal of the currently selected input channel CH 1–48 POST EQ The post-EQ signal of the corresponding input channel (however, you can only choose channels belonging to the same group, within the seven groups CH1–8, CH9–16, CH17–24, CH25–32, CH33–40, CH41–48, and ST IN 1L/1R–4L/4R) ST IN 1L/1R–4L/4R POST EQ These screens list the gate/compressor settings for the input channels. Here you can also copy gate/compressor settings between input channels. CH 1-12 M N O P Output functions L ST IN (ST IN channel) screen The output signal of the corresponding MIX channel immediately before the output attenuation MIX 21–24 OUT K CH 37-48 (Input channel 37–48) screen Global functions J KEY IN SOURCE Information shown in the display CH 13-24 (Input channel 13–24) screen Function menu CH 1-12 (Input channel 1–12) screen J K THRESHOLD (Threshold level) M ATTACK (Attack time) ST IN N RELEASE (Release time) O GAIN P KNEE Appendices These parameters are the same as in the OUTPUT COMP function COMP PARAM screen (➥ p.230). Input functions L RATIO PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 267 INPUT GATE/COMP function 2 1 4 GATE LIBRARY screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the gate library. GATE LIBRARY 3 5 6 7 A Gate graph This mini-graph shows the approximate gate response for each input channel. If you click the mini-graph, the GATE PARAM screen for that channel will appear. B Level meters These meters show the amount of gain reduction produced by the gate (at left), and the peak level of the signal after passing through the gate (at right). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. 1 C GATE ON/OFF Turns the gate for that channel on/off. D Compressor graph This mini-graph shows the approximate compressor response for each input channel. If you click the minigraph, the COMP PARAM screen for that channel will appear. E Level meters These meters show the amount of gain reduction produced by the compressor (at left), and the peak level of the signal after passing through the compressor (at right). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. 2 3 F COMP ON/OFF (Compressor on/off) Turns the compressor on/off for that channel. 4 G Channel This area shows the number and name of the channel you are editing. Two paired channels are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. In this screen, you can copy gate/compressor settings by dragging and dropping the mini-graph of a desired channel onto another channel. You can also copy gate/ compressor settings between different screens (for the procedure ➥ p.231). A EDIT When you click this button, the GATE PARAM screen for the currently selected input channel will appear. B Channel selection Select the input channel that you want to edit. The name of the channel is displayed at the right. C Gate graph of the selected channel This graph shows the approximate response of the gate for the currently selected channel. D Level meters These meters show the amount of gain reduction (GR), and the peak levels before the gate (PRE) and after the gate (POST). If the signal clips, the OVER segment will light. 268 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section COMP LIBRARY (Compressor library) screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the compressor library. Function menu COMP LIBRARY Information shown in the display 9 5 6 7 Global functions 8 J E RECALL Except for the fact that these settings are for input channels, this is the same as the OUTPUT COMP function COMP LIBRARY screen. Refer to p.232. Recalls the gate library item selected in the list into memory. F STORE Output functions Stores the gate settings of the currently selected channel into the location selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to name and save the settings. G TITLE EDIT Edits the title of the library item selected in the list. When you click this button a window will appear, allowing you to edit the title. Input functions H CLEAR Deletes the library item selected in the list. When you click this button, a confirmation message will appear. Note Library items with an “R” displayed in the right column of the list are read-only. Read-only items cannot be stored, renamed, or deleted. Appendices I Library gate graph This graph indicates the approximate response of the gate library item selected in the list. J Library list Use the scroll bar to select the library item on which you want to perform an operation. The selected library item will move to the center, and will be highlighted. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 269 INPUT DELAY function INPUT DELAY function 2 CH 1-24 (Input channel 1–24) screen 3 CH 25-48 (Input channel 25–48) screen 4 ST IN (ST IN channel) screen 5 Here you can edit the delay parameters of the selected input channel. B GANG CH 1-24 C Delay time knob D DELAY ON/OFF These are the same as in the OUTPUT DELAY function (➥ p.233). E Channel This area shows the number and name of the input channel you are editing. Two paired channels (or a ST IN channel) are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. ST IN 1 A DELAY SCALE Here you can select the units in which the delay time is displayed. The units that can be selected are the same as in OUTPUT DELAY function DELAY SCALE (➥ p.233). When you change the delay scale in the INPUT DELAY function, the delay scale of the OUTPUT DELAY function will also change accordingly. 270 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display INPUT DCA/GROUP function DCA GROUP ASSIGN screen Here you can specify the input channels that will be assigned to DCA groups 1–8. The level of input channels belonging to the same DCA group can be adjusted as a whole using DCA faders 1–8. D SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key) This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to make/cancel DCA group assignments. While the DCA group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of an input channel that can be assigned to the corresponding group will assign the channel to the group. (Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the assignment.) Hint The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one DCA group. This is automatically turned off when you change screens or turn off the power. Function menu 5 Global functions 4 DCA GROUP ASSIGN E CLEAR Output functions This button clears all input channels assigned to that DCA group. 6 7 2 3 8 A DCA group This is the number of the DCA group. The number corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is highlighted. B Name This is the name of the DCA group. You can also click this area to edit the name. C Grid This grid lets you assign input channels (horizontal rows) to DCA groups (vertical columns). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key (or click) to set/disable the assignment. F MUTE These buttons switch muting on/off for DCA groups 1–8. They are linked with DCA [MUTE] keys 1–8 in the DCA strip of the panel. Appendices 1 Input functions 9 G DCA faders These faders adjust the levels of DCA groups 1–8. They are linked with DCA faders 1–8 in the DCA strip. H CUE These buttons cue-monitor DCA groups 1–8. They are linked with DCA [CUE] keys 1–8 in the DCA strip of the panel. I DCA LEVEL SET Hint You can also assign a single input channel to multiple DCA groups for multiple DCA control. Hint DCA groups 1–6 are for input channels only, but DCA groups 7/8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in an identicallynumbered group. Use the following two buttons to operate DCA groups 1–8 together. • ALL NOMINAL Clicking this button will move DCA faders 1–8 to nominal level (0 dB). • ALL MINIMUM Clicking this button will move DCA faders 1–8 to the –∞ dB position. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 271 INPUT DCA/GROUP function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen EQ LINK ASSIGN screen Here you can specify the input channels that will be assigned to mute groups 1–8. Muting can be switched on/ off together for channels assigned to the same mute group. Here you can specify the input channels that will be assigned to EQ link groups 1–8. EQ parameters are linked for channels belonging to the same group. MUTE GROUP ASSIGN EQ LINK ASSIGN Except for the fact that these settings apply to input channels, the display and operations are the same as in the OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function MUTE GROUP ASSIGN screen. Refer to p.235. Hint Mute groups 1–8 can be used with both input channels and output channels. Both types of channel can exist in the identically-numbered mute group. 1 2 A EQ link group These are the EQ link group numbers. The number corresponding to the grid where the cursor is located is highlighted. B Grid This grid lets you assign input channels (horizontal rows) to EQ link groups (vertical columns). Currentlypatched grids are indicated by a symbol. Move the cursor to the desired grid and press the [ENTER] key (or click) to set/disable the assignment. Hint Input channels and output channels use separate EQ link groups. Input channels use groups A–H, and output channels use groups 1–8. 272 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Here you can specify the input channels that will be assigned to compressor link groups 1–8. Compressor parameters are linked for channels belonging to the same group. Information shown in the display COMP LINK ASSIGN (Compressor link assign) screen COMP LINK ASSIGN 4 Function menu 3 C SET BY CUE (Assign by [CUE] key) Global functions This specifies whether the [CUE] key will be used to make/cancel EQ link group assignments. While the EQ link group SET BY CUE button is on, pressing the [CUE] key of a channel that can be assigned to the corresponding group will assign the channel to the group. (Press the [CUE] key once again to cancel the assignment.) Hint The SET BY CUE button can be turned on for only one EQ link group. This is automatically turned off when you change screens or turn off the power. This button clears all input channels assigned to that EQ link group. Except for the fact that these settings apply to input channels, the display and operations are the same as in the OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function COMP LINK ASSIGN screen. Refer to p.237. Hint Appendices Input functions Input channels and output channels use separate compressor link groups. Input channels use groups A–H, and output channels use groups 1–8. Output functions D CLEAR PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 273 PAN/ROUTING function ❏ POST ON PAN/ROUTING function The signal will be sent from immediately after the [ON] key. CH to MIX (Channel to mix) screen INPUT CHANNEL 1 FADER ON CH to MIX …… PAN TO ST MIX1 (VARI) LEVEL …… STEREO L STEREO R POST ON/POST TO ST= MIX1 MIX2 Here you can send signals from input channels to the desired MIX bus. In this screen you can also switch the type (VARI or FIXED) of each MIX bus, and specify the location from which the signal will be sent. ON ON MIX2 (VARI) LEVEL ❏ POST TO ST The signal will be sent from immediately after the [TO STEREO] key. INPUT CHANNEL 1 2 FADER ON 3 TO ST MIX1 (VARI) ON LEVEL 4 ON Here you can select the mix bus type for every two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered MIX buses. You can choose one of the following types. • FIXED The send level of the MIX bus is fixed at nominal level (0.0 dB). Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as a group output or as a bus output for recording on a multitrack recorder. • VARI (Variable) The send level of the MIX bus is adjustable. Choose this if you want to use the MIX bus as an external effect send or as a foldback output. MIX2 (VARI) LEVEL Hint This setting applies to the signals sent from all input channels to the corresponding MIX bus. D CH to MIX (Channel to mix) Hint If surround mode is enabled, the type indication will change to “SURROUND” for MIX buses used as surround buses. You cannot change the mix bus type during this time. B MIX bus This is the number of the MIX bus to which the signal is sent. Paired MIX buses are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. C POST ON/POST TO ST (Post on / Post to stereo) This button lets you specify in greater detail the location from which post-fader signals will be sent from input channels to this MIX bus. You can choose one of the following two send locations. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual …… PAN A Type selection 274 …… STEREO L STEREO R 1 MIX1 MIX2 POST ON/POST TO ST= Reference section In this area, the signals sent from input channels / ST IN channels (vertical columns) to MIX buses (horizontal rows) can be switched on/off and their level adjusted. The buttons and knobs displayed here will differ depending on the type (FIXED or VARI) of the senddestination MIX bus, and on whether the MIX buses are paired. Input channel 2 ↓ MIX bus 2 Input channel 1 ↓ MIX bus 2 Input channel 1 ↓ MIX bus 1 ❏ Type = FIXED, Pairing = enabled Input channel 2 ↓ MIX buses 1/2 Input channel 1 ↓ MIX buses 1/2 Input channel 2 ↓ MIX bus 1 Information shown in the display ❏ Type = FIXED, Pairing = disabled INPUT CHANNEL 1 FADER ON …… INPUT CHANNEL 1 FADER ON …… …… PAN …… PAN STEREO L STEREO R MIX1 MIX2 STEREO L STEREO R MIX1 MIX2 SEND ON/OFF button On/off switch for the signal sent from input channels to each MIX bus. Global functions Function menu SEND ON/OFF button On/off switch for the signal sent from input channels to the two MIX buses. ON MIX1/2 (FIX) Output functions ON MIX1 (FIX) ON INPUT CHANNEL 2 MIX2 (FIX) FADER ON PAN INPUT CHANNEL 2 FADER PAN ON MIX1 (FIX) ON Input functions ON MIX1/2 (FIX) MIX2 (FIX) Appendices ON PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 275 PAN/ROUTING function ❏ Type = VARI, Pairing = disabled Input channel 2 ↓ MIX bus 2 Input channel 1 ↓ MIX bus 2 Input channel 2 ↓ MIX bus 1 SEND ON/OFF button On/off switch for the signal sent from input channels to the two MIX buses. SEND LEVEL knob Adjusts the level of the signal sent from input channels to each MIX bus. PRE/POST button Selects either PRE (pre-EQ or pre-fader) or POST (post ON or post TO ST) as the location from which the signal will be sent from input channels to each MIX bus. FADER • PRE/POST button= PRE INPUT CHANNEL 1 FADER …… PAN MIX1 (VARI) LEVEL ON LEVEL ON MIX PAN/BALANCE knob Specifies the panning of the signal sent from input channels to the two MIX buses. If the PAN MODE (9) of the input channel is set to BALANCE, this functions as a BALANCE knob that adjusts the volume balance between the two channels. ON …… PAN MIX1/2 (VARI) LEVEL PAN …… STEREO L STEREO R …… STEREO L STEREO R MIX1 MIX2 • PRE/POST button= PRE INPUT CHANNEL 1 SEND LEVEL knob Adjusts the level of the signal sent from input channels to the two MIX buses. PRE/POST button Selects either PRE (pre-EQ or pre-fader) or POST (post ON or post TO ST) as the location from which the signal will be sent from input channels to each MIX bus. SEND ON/OFF button On/off switch for the signal sent from input channels to each MIX bus. ON Input channel 2 ↓ MIX buses 1/2 Input channel 1 ↓ MIX buses 1/2 MIX1 MIX2 Input channel 1 ↓ MIX bus 1 ❏ Type = VARI, Pairing = enabled ON FADER ON …… INPUT CHANNEL 1 …… PAN MIX1 (VARI) LEVEL ON LEVEL ON PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual ON Reference section …… PAN MIX1/2 (VARI) LEVEL PAN MIX2 (VARI) 276 FADER …… ON STEREO L STEREO R INPUT CHANNEL 1 • PRE/POST button= POST MIX1 MIX2 MIX1 MIX2 • PRE/POST button= POST STEREO L STEREO R MIX2 (VARI) J Note K E PRE EQ/PRE FADER These buttons let you specify in greater detail the location from which the pre-fader signal will be sent from an input channel to the MIX buses. You can choose one of the following two send locations. PRE FADER Immediately before the fader PRE EQ Immediately before the EQ Information shown in the display • BALANCE The two PAN knobs will function as BALANCE knobs that adjust the balance of the signal sent from the oddnumbered/even-numbered channels (or the L/R channels of the ST IN channel) to the STEREO bus L/R. If you choose this setting, the two knobs will be reset to the center position, and will be linked in the same direction. Also, the knob markings will change from red to white. 9 Hint This setting applies to the signal sent from the corresponding input channel to all MIX buses. F FOLLOW PAN These buttons specify how the TO ST PAN knob (8) will affect the signal sent from the input channel to MIX buses. • VARI If this button is on, the PAN knob displayed in the CH to MIX area (4) will be linked with the TO ST PAN knob (8) if VARI-type MIX buses are paired. • FIXED If this button is on, the signal from after the TO ST PAN (8) knob will be sent to FIXED-type MIX buses. • Pan mode is always valid, even if the send-source input channels are not paired. • You will be unable to operate the TO ST PAN knobs if you select GANG PAN mode when the two pan knobs are set to far left and right, or if you select INV.GANG when both pan knobs are turned all the way in the same direction. Function menu 7 8 J MIX MINUS This function sends the same mix as the STEREO bus — but with a specific input channel removed — to the desired MIX bus. If you need to send a monitor mix to a performer or announcer, this is a quick way to give them the same mix as the STEREO bus but without their own voice. Access the desired source input channel in the screen, and click the MIX MINUS button for that channel; a window will appear, allowing you to select the MIX bus for which to make Mix Minus settings. Global functions 5 Output functions 6 G TO ST (To stereo) Input functions This button specifies whether the input channel / ST IN channel will send its signal to the STEREO bus. This is linked with the [TO STEREO] switch in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. H TO ST PAN (To stereo pan) I PAN MODE Here you can select one of the following ways in which pan settings will be linked between adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (or the left/right channels of a ST IN channel). • INDIVIDUAL The two pan settings will be independent. • GANG PAN The two pan settings will be linked in the same direction. If the two pan values are different when you turn on this button, pan will be linked while preserving the existing difference in values. • INV. GANG (Inverted gang) The two pan settings will operate in opposite directions. Hint Appendices Here you can adjust the panning of the signal sent from the input channel / ST IN channel to the STEREO bus. (The current value is shown in the boxes immediately below.) This is linked with the encoder if PAN is selected as the encoder mode, and with the [PAN] encoder of the SELECTED CHANNEL section. As a shortcut to access the above window, you can simultaneously press the [SEL] key of the INPUT/ST IN channel strip and the [SEL] key of the MIX section. However, be aware that holding down either one of these keys by itself will access a different shortcut. In the above window, select the send-destination MIX bus and click the OK button; the following parameters will change in the CH to MIX screen. • In the CH to MIX area of the send-destination MIX bus, all ON/OFF buttons will turn on. • In the CH to MIX area of the send-destination MIX bus, all PRE/POST buttons will be set to POST. • The send level of signals sent from the source input channel to the destination MIX bus will be lowered to –∞ dB. • The send level of signals sent from all input channels other than the above to the destination MIX bus will be set to nominal level (0.0 dB). PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 277 PAN/ROUTING function • The POST ON/POST TO ST button will be set to POST TO ST for the destination MIX bus. Note • Mix Minus does not switch a “mode”; rather, it is a quick way to make certain settings. This means that even after executing Mix Minus, you can freely edit the parameters of the CH to MIX screen. • When you execute the Mix Minus operation, only the input channel you selected as the source will be removed from the mix. If you want to remove more than one input channel from the signal sent to a specific MIX bus, execute the Mix Minus operation and then manually change the settings of other channels. • If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel is selected), the send level of the signal sent from both channels to the target MIX bus will be set to –∞. • The Mix Minus operation is valid even if the destination MIX bus is paired. In this case, the PAN setting of the input channel will be reflected by the PAN settings of the paired MIX buses. ALL OFF [ALL CH ] ALL ON [ALL CH ] Switch the signals sent from all input channels to the selected MIX bus on or off together. ALL OFF [ALL CH x ALL MIX] ALL ON [ALL CH x ALL MIX] Switch the signals sent from all input channels to all MIX buses on or off together. • Mix send position Move the cursor to a PRE/POST button in the CH to COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to access the following window. K Input channel This is the source input channel (or channels). Paired input channels (or a ST IN channel) are indicated by a heart symbol displayed between them. For an input channel, you can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing. You can move the cursor to a parameter in the CH to COPY area, and then hold down the [SHIFT] key and click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to copy the value of that parameter to another channel (in the horizontal direction) or to another MIX bus (in the vertical direction), or to switch all parameters on/off. You can use this method to set the following parameters. • Mix send on/off Move the cursor to the SEND ON/OFF button of the CH to COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to access the following window. To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA] encoder to select one of the following items, and click the OK button. ALL POST [ALL MIX ] ALL PRE [ALL MIX ] Switch the send position of the signal sent from the selected input channel to all MIX buses to either postfader or pre-fader. ALL POST [ALL CH ] ALL PRE [ALL CH ] Switch the send position of the signal sent from all input channels to the selected MIX bus to either postfader or pre-fader. ALL POST [ALL CH x ALL MIX] ALL PRE [ALL CH x ALL MIX] Switch the send position of the signal sent from all input channels to all MIX buses to either post-fader or pre-fader. Note These “all-at-once” operations are ignored by FIXED-type MIX buses. To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA] encoder to select one of the following items, and click the OK button. ALL OFF [ALL MIX ] ALL ON [ALL MIX ] Switch the signals sent from the selected input channel to all MIX buses on or off together. 278 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display • Mix pan/balance When the destination MIX bus is paired, move the cursor to a MIX PAN/BALANCE knob displayed in the CH to COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to access the following window. Note Note • This operation is ignored by unpaired MIX buses and FIXED-type MIX buses. • You cannot copy PAN parameters to BALANCE parameters (or vice versa). • Copying is invalid for channels whose VARI button (in the FOLLOW PAN area) is on. Output functions Appendices These “all-at-once” operations are ignored by FIXED-type MIX buses. To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA] encoder to select one of the following items, and click the OK button. PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ] The value of the selected MIX PAN/BALANCE knob will be copied to the pan (balance) of signals sent from that channel to all paired MIX buses. PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL MIX ] The value of the selected MIX PAN/BALANCE knob will be copied to the pan (balance) of signals sent from all channels to that MIX bus. PAN (BAL) COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX] The value of the selected parameter will be copied to the pan (balance) of signals sent from all channels to all paired MIX buses. Input functions To set multiple parameters at once, use the [DATA] encoder to select one of the following items, and click the OK button. LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ] The value of the selected SEND LEVEL knob will be copied to the send level of the signals sent from that input channel to all MIX buses. LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ] The value of the selected SEND LEVEL knob will be copied to the send level of the signals sent from all input channels to that MIX bus. LEVEL COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX] The value of the selected SEND LEVEL knob will be copied to the send level of the signals sent from all input channels to all MIX buses. Global functions Function menu • Mix send level Move the cursor to a SEND LEVEL knob in the CH to COPY area; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and click (or press the [SHIFT] key + [ENTER] key) to access the following window. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 279 PAN/ROUTING function B SEND LEVEL, PRE/POST (Send level / Send point) MIX SEND VIEW screen This screen lists the signals sent from the input channels to the MIX buses. You can also edit the settings from within this screen. MIX SEND VIEW 1 2 Select one of the following two parameters to view in the grid. ❏ When the SEND LEVEL button is on The send levels of the signals sent from input channels to MIX buses are shown in the grid as bar graphs. Except for the fact that the send-sources are input channels and the send-destinations are MIX buses, the bar graph display is the same as in the MIX to MATRIX VIEW screen (MATRIX/ST function) (➥ p.240). To edit the send level of a signal, move the cursor to the grid where the desired channel and MIX bus intersect, and turn the [DATA] encoder. To switch a MIX send on/off, click the grid where the desired channel and MIX bus intersect. If the SEND LEVEL button is on, you can select a desired grid and copy its send level (pan) value to other channels (horizontal direction) or to other MIX buses (vertical direction), or switch all grids on/off simultaneously. To do so, move the cursor to the desired grid; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER] key. (Alternatively, hold down the [SHIFT] key and click the desired grid.) When the following window appears, select one of the following choices to copy, and click the OK button. 3 A CH to MIX/MIX from CH Select one of the following two types of screen display. ❏ When the CH to MIX button is on The screen shows the status of the signals sent from a specific input channel (input channel / ST IN channel) to all MIX buses. (Use the scroll bar to see input channels that are not currently shown.) ❏ When the MIX from CH button is on The screen shows the status of the signals sent from all input channels to a specific MIX bus. 280 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section LEVEL COPY [ALL MIX ] Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to all MIX buses. LEVEL COPY [ALL CH ] Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to all input channels. LEVEL COPY [ALL CH x ALL MIX] Copy the send level (pan) value of the selected grid to all input channels / all MIX buses. ALL OFF [ALL MIX ] Turn off the signals sent from the specified input channel to all MIX buses. ALL ON [ALL MIX ] Turn on the signals sent from the specified input channel to all MIX buses. ALL OFF [ALL CH ] Turn off the signals sent from all input channels to the specified MIX bus. C Grid Each indication has the following significance. (green) . . . PRE EQ (immediately before the EQ) (yellow) . . PRE FADER (immediately before the fader) (gray) . . . . POST ON (immediately after the [ON] key) (red) . . . . . POST TO ST (immediately after the [TO ST] key) 4 Information shown in the display Function menu D SELECTED PARAMETER (currently selected parameter) This indicates the input channel and MIX bus for the grid where the cursor is currently located. The four boxes at right indicate the values for the grid where the cursor is currently located. Appendices To change the send position of a signal, move the cursor to the grid where the desired channel and MIX bus intersect, and press the [ENTER] key, or click, or turn the [DATA] encoder. If the PRE/POST button is on, the send position for all grid locations can be changed simultaneously. To do so, hold down the [SHIFT] key and click the desired grid. (Alternatively, move the cursor to the desired grid; then hold down the [SHIFT] key and press the [ENTER] key.) When the following window appears, select one of the following choices and click the OK button. This area shows various settings for the signals sent from the input channels (horizontal rows) to the MIX buses (vertical columns). The red lines extending toward the left and upward indicate the corresponding input channel and MIX bus for the grid at which the cursor is now located. Global functions This screen shows the send positions of the signals sent from the input channels to the MIX buses. Output functions ❏ When the PRE/POST button is on ALL PRE [ALL MIX ] Specify pre-fader as the send position for signals sent from the specified input channel to all MIX buses. ALL POST [ALL MIX ] Specify post-fader as the send position for signals sent from the specified input channel to all MIX buses. ALL PRE [ALL CH ] Specify pre-fader as the send position for signals sent from all input channels to the specified MIX bus. ALL POST [ALL CH ] Specify post-fader as the send position for signals sent from all input channels to the specified MIX bus. ALL PRE [ALL CH x ALL MIX] Specify pre-fader as the send position for signals sent from all input channels to all MIX buses. ALL POST [ALL CH x ALL MIX] Specify post-fader as the send position for signals sent from all input channels to all MIX buses. Input functions ALL ON [ALL CH ] Turn on the signals sent from all input channels to the specified MIX bus. ALL OFF [ALL CH x ALL MIX] Turn off the signals sent from all input channels to all MIX buses. ALL ON [ALL CH x ALL MIX] Turn on the signals sent from all input channels to all MIX buses. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 281 PAN/ROUTING function D TO ST (To stereo) FIX ASSIGN VIEW screen If this button is on, the corresponding input channel is assigned to the STEREO bus. This is linked with the TO ST button of the CH to MIX screen (PAN/ROUTING function). This screen lists the signals sent from the input channels to the buses and direct outputs. You can also set or cancel these assignments from within this screen. E DIRECT FIX ASSIGN VIEW If this button is on, the signal of the corresponding input channel will be sent to the output port selected as the direct output. This is linked with the DIRECT OUT ON/OFF button in the INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT screen (IN PATCH function). F Output port This area indicates the output port that is patched in the DIRECT OUT PATCH screen (INPUT PATCH function) to the direct output of this input channel J 7 8 9 G ALL STEREO Clicking this button enables the assignment of all input channels to the STEREO bus. 1 2 H ALL BUS Clicking this button enables the assignment of all input channels to FIXED-type MIX buses. I ALL CLEAR Clicking this button cancels all assignments in the FIX ASSIGN VIEW screen. 3 J SURROUND MODE This indicates the currently selected surround mode. 4 5 6 A Input channel This area indicates the number and name of the input channel you are editing. B PAN If this button is on, the input channel’s TO STEREO PAN knob setting will also apply to the signal sent to FIXED-type MIX buses. This is linked with the FOLLOW PAN FIXED button of the CH to MIX screen (PAN/ROUTING function). C Bus assignments These buttons assign the corresponding input channel to FIXED-type MIX buses. These are linked with the SEND ON/OFF buttons of the CH to MIX screen (PAN/ROUTING function). For VARI-type MIX buses, the buttons are grayed-out and inoperable. Note If a surround mode other than STEREO is selected, the buttons for MIX buses used as surround buses will be named by their surround channel (e.g., L, C, R) rather than by number. 282 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Here you can make settings for LCR mode, which allows three-channel playback by adding a CENTER channel to the L/R channels of the STEREO bus. SURR PARAM (Surround parameter) screen Here you can perform realtime control of surround panning for the two currently selected input channels. LCR 1 Output functions Except for the fact that the send-sources are input channels, the display and operations are the same as in the MATRIX/ST function LCR screen. Refer to p.242. Global functions Function menu SURR PARAM Information shown in the display LCR screen 2 A Channel selection Select the two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (or ST IN channel L/R) that you want to control. The names of these channels are displayed at the right. Input functions 3 B DIVERGENCE Appendices These controls specify the proportion at which the signals are sent to each surround bus when the input channel is positioned in the center. Depending on the currently selected surround mode, the displayed parameters will differ as follows. ❏ If Surround Mode = 3-1ch/5.1ch A knob for controlling the front divergence is displayed. Use this knob to specify the proportion (0– 100) at which a signal positioned in the center will be sent to the center bus (C) and the left/right buses (L, R). With a setting of 0 the signal will be sent only to the left/right buses, and with a setting of 100 it will be sent only to the center bus. With a setting of 50, the signal will be sent at the same level to the left/right and center buses. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 283 PAN/ROUTING function ❏ If Surround Mode = 6.1ch An F knob for controlling the front divergence and an R knob for controlling the rear divergence are displayed. Use these two knobs to specify the proportion (0–100) at which a signal positioned in the center will be sent to the center buses (C, S, Bs) and the left/right buses (L, R, Ls, Rs). In 6.1ch mode, a LINK button that links the front and rear divergence is displayed between the F knob and R knob. When you turn the LINK button on, the F knob value will be copied to the R knob, and the F knob and R knob values will be linked. 8 This adjusts the output level of the signal sent from the input channel to the LFE (Low Frequency Effect) bus for a subwoofer. You can use the ON/OFF button to switch the signal sent from the input channel to the LFE bus on/off. The LFE knob and ON/OFF button are displayed only when the surround mode is 5.1ch or 6.1ch. H STEREO LINK This specifies whether sound image movement will be linked between the two channels shown in the screen. To link the movement of the two channels, use the / buttons at left and right to select one of the eight link patterns. (For details on how each pattern will operate, refer to p.136) I SURROUND MODE J Level meters 4 7 D Surround pan grid This grid lets you control the surround panning, with the listening point at the center. The current setting is indicated by a O symbol. E Position buttons These buttons correspond to each surround bus. When you click a button, the surround panning will move to that position. F SURROUND BUS ON/OFF buttons These buttons are on/off switches for the signal sent from the input channel to the corresponding surround bus. G Surround pan position This indicates the coordinate locations of the O symbol in the left/right direction and the front/rear direction. 284 J This indicates the currently selected surround mode. C LFE (Low Frequency Effect) 5 6 9 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section These meters show the master levels of the surround buses. M/S screen This screen shows the surround settings for each input channel. From this screen you can also jump to the SURR PARAM screen for the desired channel. For two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (or ST IN channel L/R), these settings convert the two-channel signal from an MS mic into L/R signals. M/S Global functions Function menu SURR VIEW Information shown in the display SURR VIEW (Surround view) screen Output functions 1 1 2 3 2 A Surround pan grid This indicates the surround pan coordinate positions in the left/right direction (L/R) and the front/rear direction (F/R). C Channel This is the number and name of the input channel. A S-GAIN knob This knob sets the proportionate level of the S mic relative to the level of the M mic. The current value is shown in the numerical box at the right. At the MONO position, the S mic level will be at –∞, at the STEREO position the M mic and S mic will be at the same level, and at the EXP.ST position the S mic level will be +10 dB. Input functions B Surround pan position 3 Appendices For each input channel, the approximate surround pan position is shown by the O symbol. If you click this area, the SURR PARAM screen for that channel will appear. B M/S DECODE ON/OFF This button switches M/S decoding on/off for two adjacent odd-numbered/even-numbered input channels (or ST IN channel L/R). M/S decoding can be switched on even for channels that are not assigned as a stereo pair. C Channel This is the number and name of the input channel. Hint M/S is a stereo recording technique in which two microphones are used; a uni-directional M (Middle) mic and a bidirectional S (Side) mic. The M mic captures the main signal and the S mic captures the directional signal, and the sum (M+S) and difference (M-S) of the two signals (this procedure is known as “decoding”) is recorded on the L and R channels respectively. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 285 INPUT VIEW function INPUT VIEW function D EQ Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW function CH VIEW screen (➥ p.245). CH VIEW (Channel view) screen E GATE This area shows the amount of gain reduction and the output level of the gate, a mini-graph showing the approximate response of the gate, and the gate on/off status. You can also switch the gate on/off from this screen. If you click the mini-graph, the GATE PARAM screen for that channel will appear. This screen lists the mix parameters of the currently selected input channel. In this screen you can also edit the principal parameters and access other screens. CH VIEW F COMP (Compressor) Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW function CH VIEW screen (➥ p.246). 7 8 1 2 9 3 G DELAY In this area you can view and edit the delay time of the internal delay and its on/off status. 4 H TO MIX In this area you can specify the send level, output position, and on/off status of the signals sent from the corresponding input channel to MIX buses 1–24. (Operation is the same as in the TO MATRIX area of the OUTPUT VIEW function CH VIEW screen.) Refer to p.246. 5 6 I TO STEREO A Channel This is the number of the input channel you are editing. If the input channel is paired (or if a ST IN channel is selected), a heart symbol is displayed at the right. You can click this symbol to enable/disable pairing for the input channel. B HA (Head Amp) This area indicates the input port that is patched to the input channel, the setting of the internal head amp (PM5D-RH model only) or external head amp, and the input level. In this screen you can also adjust the head amp gain and switch phantom power (+48V) on/off. C ATT (Attenuation) This area shows the attenuation and ø (phase) settings. You can also adjust the attenuation and switch the phase from this screen. 286 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Here you can specify the on/off status, pan, and FOLLOW PAN settings of the signal sent from the corresponding input channel to the STEREO bus. SIGNAL FLOW screen This screen shows the signal flow for two adjacent oddnumbered/even-numbered input channels or ST IN channels. In this screen you can also edit some of the parameters, and access other screens. You can also determine the location within the signal flow at which clipping occurred. J Q K L R Information shown in the display P SIGNAL FLOW S O T U Global functions N Function menu M J DCA group / Mute group K Recall safe / Mute safe Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW function CH VIEW screen (➥ p.246). 2 3 Turns insert on/off for the corresponding input channel. N SURROUND (Surround pan) If surround mode is enabled, the surround pan position of the corresponding input channel is indicated by the O symbol in the surround pan grid and also as a front/rear/left/right coordinate position. If you click the surround pan grid, the SURR PARAM screen for that channel will appear. O LCR Here you can switch LCR mode on/off, and adjust CSR (the level of the CENTER channel relative to the L/R channels) (➥ p.242). P LIBRARY This button accesses the INPUT CH LIBRARY screen (➥ p.289), where you can store/recall input channel library settings. A Channel B Insert Except for the fact that this screen depicts input channels, the contents are the same as the OUTPUT VIEW function SIGNAL FLOW screen. Refer to p.247. C Direct out This area displays information about the direct output of the two selected channels (the signal output position, the port patched to direct out, and the direct output on/off status). Here you can also select the signal output position (use the / buttons at left and right), and switch direct output on/off (use the ON/OFF button). Q Level meter Input functions 1 M INSERT Appendices Turns direct output on/off for the corresponding input channel. Output functions L DIRECT 4 This level meter indicates the input level of the channel. R Signal detection point This is the point at which the signal level shown in the level meter (S) is detected (PRE ATT, PRE GATE, PRE FADER, POST FADER, or POST ON). You can edit this setting by clicking the / buttons at the left and right. S Fader This controls the input level of the channel. T CUE U ON/OFF (Channel on/off) Refer to the explanation of the OUTPUT VIEW function CH VIEW screen (➥ p.247). D Level meters These meters indicate the levels at various points in the signal flow. Levels are detected at the following locations. • PRE ATT (immediately before the attenuator) • EQ (immediately before and after the EQ) • GATE (immediately before and after the gate) • COMP (immediately before and after the compressor) • FADER (immediately before and after the fader) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 287 INPUT VIEW function • POST ON (immediately after the CH [ON] key) • INSERT IN (immediately after the insert point) FADER VIEW screen This screen shows the on/off status, level, and cue monitor status of the input channels and DCA groups. 5 FADER VIEW E Signal flow • • • • • • • • • This area indicates the signal flow of the selected channel. The following parameters are displayed. ATT (Attenuation) Specifies the amount of attenuation immediately after AD conversion for the corresponding channel. HPF (High Pass Filter) Specifies the high pass filter on/off and cutoff frequency for the corresponding channel. EQ (Equalizer) GATE COMP (Compressor) These areas show the approximate response of the equalizer, gate, and compressor for the corresponding channel. You can also switch these on/off in this screen, or click a mini-graph to access the individual parameter screen. DELAY Here you can switch the internal delay on/off and edit the delay time. FADER This indicates the input level of the channel. This is linked with the encoder or fader of the corresponding channel. ON/OFF (On/off) Turns the channel on/off. This is linked with the [ON] key of the corresponding channel. TO STEREO Here you can specify the on/off status and pan settings of the signal sent from the corresponding channel to the STEREO bus. These are linked with the [TO STEREO] key and STEREO [PAN] encoder of the corresponding channel. Except for the fact that this screen is for input channels, DCA groups, and STEREO A/B channels, this is the same as the OUTPUT VIEW function FADER VIEW screen. Refer to p.249. Hint • If insert or direct out is turned on, the current insert point or direct out point within the signal flow is shown. • If the signal clips, the signal flow (horizontal line) after clipping is displayed in red. If an output is turned off so that the signal does not flow any further, the subsequent flow is displayed in gray. If PEAK HOLD is on, the flow indication will stay red if clipping occurs even once, making it easier to see that clipping has occurred. 288 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section In this screen you can copy the desired parameter(s) from the selected input channel into a memory buffer, and paste them to the same type of channel (you may select more than one paste-destination). INPUT CH LIBRARY (Input channel library) screen Here you can recall, store, rename, or delete items in the input channel library. INPUT CH LIBRARY Global functions Function menu CH COPY Information shown in the display CH COPY screen Except for the fact that these settings are for input channels, this is the same as the OUTPUT VIEW function CH LIBRARY screen. Refer to p.251. Output functions Except for the fact that these settings are for input channels, this is the same as the OUTPUT VIEW function CH COPY screen. Refer to p.249. Note Appendices Input functions • The same buffer memory is used to copy channel settings for both input channels and output channels. • If output channel settings have been copied to the buffer memory, a message of “TYPE CONFLICT!” is displayed in the box at the left, and you cannot paste to an input channel. • The contents of the buffer memory are erased when the PM5D is powered-off. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 289 Appendices Appendices EQ Library List # 01 Parameter Title Bass Drum 1 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 02 Bass Drum 2 1.2 10 0.9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF G +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON F 80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 03 Snare Drum 1 Snare Drum 2 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz 1.2 4.5 0.11 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz — 10 0.7 0.1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz — 8 0.9 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB F 95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz 290 1 — PEAKING H.SHELF –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz — 4.5 0.56 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz — 5 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz 0.1 5 6.3 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB F 85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz 0.1 8 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 13 Piano 1 0.5 PEAKING F Q 12 Syn. Bass 2 — L.SHELF G Q 11 Syn. Bass 1 0.28 H.SHELF 106 Hz Q 10 E. Bass 2 1.2 PEAKING –2.0 dB Q 09 E. Bass 1 10 PEAKING F Q 08 Percussion 1.4 L.SHELF G Q 07 High Hat — H.SHELF –0.5 dB Q 06 Cymbal 2.2 PEAKING F Q 05 Tom-tom 1 4.5 PEAKING G Q 04 1.4 PEAKING 1.6 8 2.2 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz Q — 8 0.9 — PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual # Parameter Title 14 Piano 2 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 15 E. G. Clean 5.6 10 0.7 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 16 E. G. Crunch 1 E. G. Crunch 2 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz 8 4.5 0.63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz A. G. Stroke 1 A. G. Stroke 2 A. G. Arpeg. 1 A. G. Arpeg. 2 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz Male Vocal 1 Reference section Male Vocal 2 10 — PEAKING H.SHELF +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz — 10 4 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz 0.9 4.5 3.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz — 9 4.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz — 4.5 4.5 0.12 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz — 7 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz 2.8 2 0.7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 26 9 PEAKING F Q 25 — L.SHELF G Q 24 Brass Sec. — H.SHELF 355 Hz Q 23 0.16 PEAKING +5.0 dB Q 22 0.4 PEAKING F Q 21 8 L.SHELF G Q 20 — PEAKING +4.5 dB Q 19 E. G. Dist. 2 6.3 PEAKING F Q 18 E. G. Dist. 1 10 PEAKING G Q 17 0.18 PEAKING 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 0.11 10 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz 30 Total EQ 1 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q — 0.16 0.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 2.8 2 0.7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB F 95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz Q 31 Total EQ 2 32 Total EQ 3 33 Bass Drum 3 7 2.2 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz Q 7 2.8 5.6 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz Q — 0.28 0.7 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz Q 34 Snare Drum 3 2 10 0.4 0.4 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz Q 35 Tom-tom 2 — 4.5 2.8 0.1 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz Q 36 Piano 3 — 4.5 1.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 37 Piano Low 8 10 9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 38 Piano High 10 6.3 2.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz Q 39 Fine-EQ Cass 6.3 2.2 0.1 PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB F 75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 40 Narrator 10 L.SHELF — 4.5 1.8 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 4 7 0.63 — # 1 2 3 4 Title Gate Ducking A. Dr. BD A. Dr. SN Type GATE GATE PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Value –26 Range (dB) –56 Attack (ms) DUCKING GATE Parameter Threshold (dB) 0 Hold (ms) 2.56 Decay (ms) 331 Threshold (dB) –19 Range (dB) –22 Attack (ms) 93 Hold (ms) 1.20 S Decay (ms) 6.32 S Threshold (dB) –11 Range (dB) –53 Attack (ms) 0 Hold (ms) 1.93 Decay (ms) 400 Threshold (dB) –8 Range (dB) –23 Attack (ms) Information shown in the display PEAKING GATE Library List Function menu Chorus & 29 Harmo HIGH 1 Hold (ms) 0.63 Decay (ms) 238 Global functions Female Vo. 2 H-MID G Q 28 L-MID Output functions Female Vo. 27 1 LOW Input functions Parameter Title Appendices # Reference section 291 Compressor Library List Compressor Library List # 1 Title Comp Type COMP Parameter 3 Expand Compander (H) EXPAND COMPAND-H COMPAND-S 6 A. Dr. BD A. Dr. BD COMP COMPAND-H 8 A. Dr. SN A. Dr. SN COMP EXPAND 2 Attack (ms) 60 Attack (ms) 38 Out gain (dB) 0.0 10 A. Dr. Tom COMPAND-S EXPAND COMPAND-S Out gain (dB) –3.5 Width (dB) 54 250 Release (ms) 842 Threshold (dB) –23 Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 1 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 4.5 Out gain (dB) 3.5 12 E. B. Finger COMP Knee 2 Knee Release (ms) 70 Release (ms) 470 Threshold (dB) –10 Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 1 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 0.0 13 E. B. Slap COMP 6 250 2 6 Out gain (dB) 4.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 133 Threshold (dB) –8 Threshold (dB) –10 Ratio ( :1) 4 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) 25 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 0.0 14 Syn. Bass COMP 9 Out gain (dB) 3.0 Width (dB) 24 Knee hard Release (ms) 180 Release (ms) 250 Threshold (dB) –24 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 3 Attack (ms) 9 Out gain (dB) 5.5 15 Piano1 COMP Attack (ms) 17 Out gain (dB) 1.0 Knee 2 Knee hard Release (ms) 58 Release (ms) 238 Threshold (dB) –11 Threshold (dB) –18 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) 1 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) –1.5 16 Piano2 COMP Out gain (dB) Knee 7 7 6.0 2 Release (ms) 192 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –17 Threshold (dB) –8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) 8 Out gain (dB) 3.5 17 E. Guitar COMP Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 174 7 2.5 Knee 2 Knee Release (ms) 12 Release (ms) 261 Threshold (dB) 4 –23 Threshold (dB) –10 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 0 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 0.5 18 A. Guitar COMP Out gain (dB) Knee 2 151 5 1.5 2 Release (ms) 238 –11 Threshold (dB) –8 Threshold (dB) Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 11 Attack (ms) 33 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Out gain (dB) 1.5 Width (dB) 10 Knee Release (ms) 128 Release (ms) 749 Threshold (dB) –20 19 Strings1 COMP 2 Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) 1.5 Attack (ms) 2 Attack (ms) 93 Out gain (dB) 1.5 Out gain (dB) Knee PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual 5.0 20 2 Release (ms) 292 A. Dr. OverTop –24 Release (ms) Release (ms) A. Dr. SN 11 2 Knee 9 Value Ratio ( :1) Width (dB) 7 Parameter 2.5 Ratio ( :1) 5 Type Ratio ( :1) Release (ms) 4 Title Threshold (dB) Width (dB) Compander (S) # –8 Knee 2 Value Threshold (dB) 749 Reference section Strings2 COMP Knee Release (ms) 4 1.35 S COMP Syn. Pad COMP 25 26 27 28 SamplingPerc Sampling BD Sampling SN Hip Comp Solo Vocal1 COMPAND-S COMP COMP COMPAND-S COMP 2 Attack (ms) 76 Attack (ms) 1 Out gain (dB) 2.5 COMP COMP EXPAND Out gain (dB) 2 Knee 2.0 2 186 Release (ms) 284 Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) –14 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 18 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 4.0 32 Announcer COMPAND-H 1 Out gain (dB) 1 –2.5 Width (dB) 18 Release (ms) 226 Release (ms) 180 Threshold (dB) –13 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) 3 Attack (ms) 58 Attack (ms) 20 Out gain (dB) 2.0 33 Limiter1 COMPAND-S 1 Out gain (dB) Width (dB) –3.0 90 Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) 0 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Ratio ( :1) ∞ Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 8 –2.5 34 Limiter2 COMP Attack (ms) 3.90 s 0 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 18 Knee hard Release (ms) 238 Release (ms) 319 Threshold (dB) –14 Threshold (dB) –18 3.5 Ratio ( :1) 2 Ratio ( :1) Attack (ms) 2 Attack (ms) 94 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Out gain (dB) 35 3.5 Total Comp1 COMP Knee 4 Knee hard Release (ms) 35 Release (ms) 447 Threshold (dB) –18 Threshold (dB) –16 Ratio ( :1) 4 Ratio ( :1) 6 Attack (ms) 8 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 6.0 36 Total Comp2 COMP Out gain (dB) 8.0 Knee hard Knee Release (ms) 354 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) –23 Ratio ( :1) 20 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 15 Release (ms) 163 Threshold (dB) –20 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 31 Out gain (dB) 2.0 1 –8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 26 Out gain (dB) 1.5 3 331 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 39 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Knee Release (ms) 1 180 342 Threshold (dB) Release (ms) Chorus Click Erase Release (ms) Knee 30 31 –33 Information shown in the display Ratio ( :1) Release (ms) Solo Vocal2 Value 1.5 Knee 29 Parameter Ratio ( :1) Knee 24 Type Threshold (dB) Knee 23 Title Function menu BrassSection # –17 Knee 22 Value Global functions COMP Parameter Threshold (dB) Output functions Strings3 Type Input functions 21 Title Appendices # 2 226 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 293 Dynamics Parameters Dynamics Parameters Each channel has a GATE section (input channels and ST IN channels only) and a COMP section. The Gate section includes Gate and Ducking types. The Comp section includes Compressor, Expander, Compander Hard (COMP. (H)), and Compander Soft (COMP. (S)) types. GATE section ❏ GATE A gate attenuates signals below a set THRESHOLD level by a specified amount (RANGE). Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when the gate closes. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how fast the gate opens when the signal exceeds the threshold level. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec 88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec 96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms (160 points) This determines how long the gate stays open once the trigger signal has fallen below the threshold. DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how fast the gate closes once the hold time has expired. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. • Time Series Analysis Output Level Input Signal Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics This determines the level at which the gate effect is applied. THRESHOLD Output Signal HOLD ATTACK DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level Time Time ❏ DUCKING Ducking is commonly used for voice-over applications in which the background music level is reduced automatically when an announcer speaks. When the KEY IN source signal level exceeds the specified THRESHOLD, the output level is attenuated by a specified amount (RANGE). Parameter Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) RANGE (dB) –70 to 0 (71 points) This determines the amount of attenuation when ducking is activated. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is ducked once the ducker has been triggered. HOLD (ms) 44.1kHz: 0.02 ms – 2.13 sec 48kHz: 0.02 ms – 1.96 sec 88.2kHz: 0.01 ms – 1.06 sec 96kHz: 0.01 ms – 981 ms (160 points) This determines how long ducking remains active once the trigger signal has fallen below the THRESHOLD level. DECAY (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the ducker returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. • Time Series Analysis Output Level Input Signal Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics This determines the level of trigger signal (KEY IN) required to activate ducking. THRESHOLD Output Signal HOLD ATTACK DECAY THRESHOLD RANGE RANGE Input Level 294 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Time Reference section Time ❏ Compressor (COMP) The COMP processor attenuates signals above a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. The COMP processor can also be used as a limiter, which, with a RATIO of ∞:1, reduces the level to the threshold. This means that the limiter’s output level never actually exceeds the threshold. Description –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the compressor. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of compression, that is, the change in output signal level relative to change in input signal level. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal will be compressed once the compressor has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the compressor’s output signal level. Hard, 1–5 (6 points) This determines how compression is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, compression is applied gradually as the signal exceeds the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) THRESHOLD RATIO Input signal Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE Output functions Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN=0.0dB) Output Level KNEE Function menu Range THRESHOLD (dB) Global functions Parameter Information shown in the display COMP section THRESHOLD Input Level Time Time ❏ Expander (EXPAND) Range Description THRESHOLD (dB) –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level of input signal required to trigger the expander. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, ∞:1 (16 points) This determines the amount of expansion. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the expander returns to its normal gain once the trigger signal level exceeds the threshold. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the signal is expanded once the signal level drops below the threshold. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) 0.0 to +18.0 (180 points) This sets the expander’s output signal level. Hard, 1–5 (6 points) This determines how expansion is applied at the threshold. For higher knee settings, expansion is applied gradually as the signal falls below the specified threshold, creating a more natural sound. • Time Series Analysis (RATIO= ∞:1) THRESHOLD Input Level Output Level • I/O Characteristics (KNEE= hard, OUT GAIN= 0.0dB) Input Signal Output Level KNEE Appendices Parameter Input functions An expander attenuates signals below a specified THRESHOLD by a specified RATIO. Output Signal ATTACK RELEASE THRESHOLD RATIO Input Level Time PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Time Reference section 295 Dynamics Parameters ❏ COMPANDER HARD (COMP.(H)) ❏ COMPANDER SOFT (COMP.(S)) Output Level The hard and soft companders combine the effects of the compressor, expander and limiter. THRESHOLD WIDTH 0dB Input Level The companders function differently at the following levels: 1 0 dB and higher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a limiter. 2 Exceeding the threshold . . . . . . . . . . Functions as a compressor. 3 Below the threshold and width . . . . Functions as an expander. The hard compander has an expansion ratio of 5:1, while the soft compander has an expansion ratio of 1.5:1. The expander is essentially turned off when the width is set to maximum. The compressor has a fixed knee setting of 2. * The gain is automatically adjusted according to the ratio and threshold values, and can be increased by up to 18 dB. * The OUT GAIN parameter enables you to compensate for the overall level change caused by the compression and expansion processes. Parameter Description –54.0 to 0.0 (541 points) This determines the level at which compression is applied. RATIO 1.0:1, 1.1:1, 1.3:1, 1.5:1, 1.7:1, 2.0:1, 2.5:1, 3.0:1, 3.5:1, 4.0:1, 5.0:1, 6.0:1, 8.0:1, 10:1, 20:1, (15 points) This determines the amount of compression. ATTACK (ms) 0–120 (121 points) This determines how soon the signal is compressed or expanded once the compander has been triggered. RELEASE (ms) 44.1kHz: 6 ms – 46.0 sec 48kHz: 5 ms – 42.3 sec 88.2kHz: 3 ms – 23.0 sec 96kHz: 3 ms – 21.1 sec (160 points) This determines how soon the compressor or expander returns to the normal gain once the trigger signal level drops below or exceeds the threshold respectively. The value is expressed as the duration required for the level to change by 6 dB. OUT GAIN (dB) –18.0 to 0.0 (180 points) This sets the compander’s output signal level. 0–90 (91 points) This determines how far below the threshold expansion will be applied. The expander is activated when the level drops below the threshold and width. WIDTH (dB) 296 Range THRESHOLD (dB) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 001 Reverb Hall 002 Reverb Room Type Description No. REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate Title Type Description 041 Multi.Filter MULTI.FILTER 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/ octave) 042 Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler 043 Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb M.BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate 044 M.Band Dyna. 004 Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate 045 M.Band Comp M.BAND COMP Multi-band compressor 005 Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb 046 REV-X Hall REV-X HALL 006 Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections 007 Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections 047 REV-X Room REV-X ROOM 008 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay 009 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation 048 REV-X Plate REV-X PLATE 010 Mod.Delay 011 Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay 049 Comp276 * COMP276 * 050 Comp276S * COMP276S * — 051 Comp260* COMP260* — 052 Comp260S * COMP260S * — ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback 013 Chorus CHORUS Chorus 014 Flange FLANGE Flanger 015 Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus 016 Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter 017 Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner 018 Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo 019 HQ. Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results 020 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter 021 Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation 022 Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator 023 Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter 024 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion 025 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation 026 Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter 027 Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger 028 Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter 029 Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel 030 Rev→Chorus REV→CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series 031 Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel 032 Rev→Flange REV→FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel 033 Rev+Sympho. 034 Rev→Sympho. REV→SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series 035 Rev→Pan REV→PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series 036 Delay+Er. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel 037 Delay+Er. DELAY→ER. Delay and early reflections in series 038 Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel 039 Delay→Rev DELAY→REV Delay and reverb in series 040 Dist→Delay DIST→DELAY Distortion and delay in series — 053 Equalizer601 * EQUALIZER601* — 054 OpenDeck * — * OPENDECK * These library numbers are reserved for the installation of Add-On Effects. Effects that are not installed are grayed-out and unavailable. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Input functions 012 Echo New reverb algorithm that delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. Appendices 003 Reverb Stage Information shown in the display Title Function menu No. Global functions This is a list of the built-in effects. By installing a separately sold Add-On Effects package you can add new effect types to number 49 and following. Output functions Effect Library List Reference section 297 Effects Parameters Effects Parameters ❏ REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter REV TIME INI. DLY Range Description Parameter TYPE Range Type-A, Type-B Description Type of early reflection simulation Reverb time ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) 0–100% Reverb density 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in E/R DLY One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. 0.3–99.0 s HI. RATIO DENSITY ❏ GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE ❏ MONO DELAY One input, one output basic repeat delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD *1 Gate open time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% DECAY *2 Gate closing speed HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency *1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz), 0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz) *2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) ❏ EARLY REF. One input, two output early reflections. Parameter Range S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring TYPE Type of early reflection simulation LIVENESS Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left– right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY *1. Reflection spacing INI. DLY OFF/ON *1 Description ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 0–10 SYNC ( Max. value depends on tempo setting) ❏ STEREO DELAY Two input, two output basic stereo delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) –99 to +99% Feedback gain 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY HI. RATIO *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 298 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time Parameter DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB.DLY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB.DLY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) L→R FBG –99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) R→L FBG –99 to +99% Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD.NOTE *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ *1. ( Range Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *2. ❏ DELAY LCR One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right). Parameter Range Description Description SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FBL 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L NOTE FBR 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off FREQ. NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain NOTE C NOTE R NOTE FB 1 1 1 *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ❏ CHORUS Two input, two output chorus effect. Parameter Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY *1. ( Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Function menu FB. GAIN Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop. Description Range 0.05–40.00 Hz Description Modulation speed SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. Input functions DELAY Range Appendices Parameter Global functions One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation. Information shown in the display ❏ ECHO Output functions ❏ MOD. DELAY *1. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 299 Effects Parameters ❏ FLANGE ❏ AUTOPAN Two input, two output flange effect. Parameter Range Two input, two output autopanner. Description Parameter Range 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time DIR. *1 Panning direction FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain Low shelving filter frequency EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ (peaking type) bandwidth LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz 0.05–40.00 Hz Description FREQ. Modulation speed LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ G EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH G HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain NOTE *2 SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R *2. *1. ❏ TREMOLO ❏ SYMPHONIC Two input, two output tremolo effect. Two input, two output symphonic effect. Parameter Range Parameter Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. NOTE High shelving filter gain *1. Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. ❏ HQ. PITCH One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. ❏ PHASER Parameter Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Pitch shift precision Parameter Range Description Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1–10 OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. *1. 300 Range PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth LEVEL 1 –100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset –99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output level SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ FB. G 1 PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine LEVEL 2 –100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) *1. PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time ❏ DISTORTION –99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G 2 NOTE MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay 1 *1. ❏ ROTARY One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Parameter ROTATE SPEED Range One input, two output distortion effect. Range Description DST TYPE Parameter DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction ❏ AMP SIMULATE One input, two output guitar amp simulator. Parameter (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) Description Modulation speed Range Description AMP TYPE *1 Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume STOP, START Rotation stop, start BASS 0–100 Bass tone control SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0–100 High tone control CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ F 100 Hz–8.0 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0–100 Low-frequency filter HIGH 0–100 High-frequency filter *1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMBDX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT ❏ RING MOD. Two input, two output ring modulator. Parameter Range ❏ DYNA. FILTER Description Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. SOURCE OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency SOURCE INPUT, MIDI FM FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DECAY *1 Filter frequency change decay speed *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output Level NOTE FM *1. Function menu Description Global functions Two input, two output modulation filter. Range Appendices Parameter Output functions Two input, two output pitch shifter. Information shown in the display ❏ MOD. FILTER Input functions ❏ DUAL PITCH Parameter Range Description Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 301 Effects Parameters ❏ DYNA. FLANGE ❏ REV+CHORUS Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. Parameter Range Description One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Description Reverb time SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density High-pass filter cutoff frequency DECAY *1 OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. Decay speed Modulation speed *1. ❏ DYNA. PHASER Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. Parameter Range Description ❏ REV→CHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s 0–100 Sensitivity INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DECAY *1 Decay speed DIFF. 0–10 Spread 0–100% Reverb density OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset DENSITY HPF High-pass filter cutoff frequency FB.GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages REV.BAL 0–100% LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SOURCE SENSE INPUT, MIDI *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) Parameter PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Description Reverb time Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. 302 Range Reference section INI. DLY HI. RATIO Description Parameter Range Description Reverb time REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) REV/SYM 0–100% FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MOD. DLY FB. GAIN WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. High-pass filter cutoff frequency WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. Reverb time *1. *1. ❏ REV→SYMPHO. ❏ REV→FLANGE One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Parameter Range Description Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Description Reverb time REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV.BAL 0–100% REV.BAL 0–100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. FB. GAIN WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. NOTE Information shown in the display Range 0.3–99.0 s Function menu Parameter REV TIME Global functions One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. Output functions One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Input functions ❏ REV+SYMPHO. Appendices ❏ REV+FLANGE *1. *1. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 303 Effects Parameters ❏ REV→PAN ❏ DELAY→ER. One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s INI. DLY HI. RATIO Description Parameter Range Description Reverb time DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density FB. GAIN –99 to +99% HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) High-pass filter cutoff frequency HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Low-pass filter cutoff frequency 0–100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) LPF REV.BAL 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DIR. *1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections NOTE *1. L↔R, L→R, L←R, Turn L, Turn R *2. ❏ DELAY+ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) *1. FB. GAIN HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency ❏ DELAY+REV LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Parameter Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY/REV 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DLY/ER 0–100% S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring TYPE Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Range Description SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY NOTE R NOTE FB 1 *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 304 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave). Description Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms FB. GAIN Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass Feedback delay time TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 1 DELAY HI FREQ. 2 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency FREQ. 3 28.0 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level 0–100 Filter 3 level DLY.BAL 0–100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) LEVEL 3 RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off LPF ❏ FREEZE One input, one output basic sampler. Parameter NOTE L *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT *1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ❏ DIST→DELAY One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series. Parameter Range Description DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) Description In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal. REC DLY –1000 to +1000 ms Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received. TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback) TRG MASK 0–1000 ms DST TYPE FB. GAIN Range Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time. PLY MODE MOMENT, CONTI., INPUT In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal. START *1 Playback start point in milliseconds END 1 Playback end point in milliseconds HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio LOOP 1 Loop start point in milliseconds FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed 0–100 Number of times the sample plays DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth LOOP NUM START [SAMPLE] Playback start point in samples 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) 0–262000 DLY.BAL Playback end point in samples OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off END [SAMPLE] 0–262000 SYNC DLY.NOTE *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY LOOP [SAMPLE] 0–262000 Loop start point in samples PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine OFF, C1–C6, ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages. MOD.NOT E *2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. *1. ( Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) MIDI TRG *2. Global functions 0.0–1000.0 ms Output functions DELAY L Input functions Range Appendices Parameter Information shown in the display ❏ MULTI FILTER Function menu ❏ DELAY→REV *1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0– 2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.0 ms–2729.2 ms (fs=96 kHz) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 305 Effects Parameters ❏ ST REVERB ❏ M.BAND COMP Two input, two output stereo reverb. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb time Reverb type INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 LO. RATIO Two input, two output 3-band compressor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level High-frequency reverb time ratio L-M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio M-H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency Lookup delay LOW THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Low band threshold level MID THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB Mid band threshold level HI. THRE –54.0 dB to 0.0 dB High band threshold level RATIO 1:1 to 20:1 Compression ratio ATTACK 0–120 ms Compressor attack time ❏ M. BAND DYNA. CMP. REL *1 Compressor release time Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee BYPASS ON/OFF Bypasses the compressor Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level –10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. PRESENCE ❏ REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, REV-X PLATE Newly-developed two input, two output reverb algorithm. Delivers dense and rich reverberation, smooth decay, and provides a spaciousness and depth that enhances the original sound. Choose from three types depending on your location and needs; REV-X HALL, REV-X ROOM, and REV-X PLATE. CMP. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold Parameter CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio REV TIME 0.47–46.92 s*1 CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack INI. DLY 0.0–120.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins CMP. REL 1 Compressor release time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay CMP. BYP ON/OFF Compressor bypass LO.FREQ 22.0 Hz–18.0 kHz Frequency point for LO.RATIO setting L–M XOVR DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) ROOM SIZE 0–28 Size of room DECAY 0–53 Gate closing speed HPF THRU, 22.0 Hz– 8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 1.00 kHz–18.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE –6 dB, –12 dB Filter slope CEILING Specifies the maximum output –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF level EXP. THRE –54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Expander threshold EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio EXP. REL *1 Expander release time EXP. BYP ON/OFF Expander bypass LIM. THRE –12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack LIM. REL 1 Limiter release time LIM. BYP ON/OFF Limiter bypass LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) 306 *1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Range Description Reverb time *1. These values are for when the effect type is REV-X HALL and the ROOM SIZE=28. The range will differ depending on the effect type and ROOM SIZE setting. Other preset effects (COMP276, COMP276S, COMP260, COMP260S, EQUALIZER601, OPENDECK) are separately sold Add-On Effects. For details on these effects, refer to the owner’s manual included with the Add-On Effects package. Reference section • Parameters related to tempo synchronization The following five parameters are related to tempo synchronization. 1) SYNC 2) NOTE 3) TEMPO 4) DELAY 5) FREQ. SYNC: ............................ This is the on/off switch for tempo synchronization. NOTE and TEMPO:..... These are the basic parameters for tempo synchronization. DELAY and FREQ.: ...... DELAY is the delay time, and FREQ. is the frequency of the modulation signal. These directly affect the way in which the effect sound will change. DELAY is relevant only for delay-type effects, and FREQ. is relevant only for modulation-type effects. • How the parameters are related Tempo synchronization uses TEMPO and NOTE to calculate a value that will be the basis for the tempo, and continues making adjustments so that this tempo basis stays essentially the same as the DELAY (or FREQ.). This means that when TEMPO, NOTE, and DELAY (or FREQ.) are synchronized, and you change any of these values, the other parameters will be re-set in order to maintain the correct relationship. The parameters that are re-set and the calculation method(*a) used are as follows. • Ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values The ranges of the NOTE and TEMPO values are limited by the ranges of the DELAY or FREQ. values. You cannot set NOTE or TEMPO values that would cause DELAY or FREQ. to exceed their maximum possible values when synchronized to tempo. This limitation also applies even when SYNC is OFF. Input functions If you edit TEMPO → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = original DELAY (or FREQ.) x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO) Example 1: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, TEMPO=120, you change NOTE from 8th note to quarter note DELAY= new NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) = (1/4) x 4 x (60/120) = 0.5 (sec) = 500 ms Thus, the DELAY will change from 250 ms to 500 ms. Example 2: When SYNC=ON, DELAY=250 ms, NOTE=8th note, you change TEMPO from 120 to 121 DELAY= original DELAY x (previous TEMPO/new TEMPO) = 250 x (120/121) = 247.9 (ms) Thus, the TEMPO will change from 250 ms to 247.9 ms. *a Rounded values are used for the calculation results. Appendices If you edit NOTE → DELAY (or FREQ.) will be set In this case, the DELAY (or FREQ.) value is calculated as follows. DELAY (or FREQ.) = NOTE x 4 x (60/TEMPO) Output functions Global functions If you turn SYNC on → NOTE will be set If you edit DELAY (or FREQ.) → NOTE will be set In this case, the NOTE value is calculated as follows. NOTE = DELAY (or FREQ.)/(4 x (60/TEMPO)) Information shown in the display Some of the PM5D’s effects allow you to synchronize the effect with the tempo. There are two such types of effect; delay-type effects and modulation-type effects. For delay-type effects, the delay time will change according to the tempo. For modulation-type effects, the frequency of the modulation signal will change according to the tempo. Function menu Effects and tempo synchronization • Special characteristics of the TEMPO parameter The TEMPO parameter has the following characteristics that are unlike other parameters. • It is a common value shared by all effects • You cannot stored it to or recall it from the Effects Library. (You can store it to and recall it from a Scene.) This means that the TEMPO value may not necessarily be the same when an effect is recalled as when that effect was stored. Here is an example. Store the effect: TEMPO=120 → Change TEMPO to 60 → Recall the effect: TEMPO=60 Normally when you change the TEMPO, the DELAY (or FREQ.) will be re-set accordingly. However if the DELAY (or FREQ.) were changed, the effect would sound differently when recalled than when it was stored. To prevent the effect from changing in this way between store and recall, the PM5D does not update the DELAY (or FREQ.) value when an effect is recalled, even if the TEMPO is no longer the same as when that effect was stored. * The NOTE parameter is calculated based on the following values. = 1/48 = 1/24 = 1/16 = 1/12 = 3/32 = 1/8 = 1/6 = 3/16 = 1/4 = 3/8 = 1/2 = 3/4 = 1/1 = 2/1 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 307 Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 1 Program Change# 308 Scene/ Effect ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 2 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Scene Preset# PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Scene/ Effect Scene Preset# Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Reference section Scene/ Effect Scene Preset# Scene/ Effect Preset# 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 Scene 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 Program Change# Scene 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383 384 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 Scene/ Effect Preset# Scene 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Scene/ Effect Preset# Scene 449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462 463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476 477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490 491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 000 Information shown in the display Preset# Function menu Scene 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 Scene/ Effect Global functions Preset# ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 4 Program Change# 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072 073 074 075 076 077 078 079 080 081 082 083 084 085 086 087 088 089 090 091 092 093 094 095 096 097 098 099 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 Output functions 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 020 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 031 032 033 034 035 036 037 038 039 040 041 042 043 044 045 046 047 048 049 050 051 052 053 054 055 056 057 058 059 060 061 062 063 064 Scene/ Effect Input functions Program Change# Appendices ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 3 No Assign Reference section 309 Scene Memory/Effect Library to Program Change Table ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 13 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 5 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Preset# No Assign Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 9 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Effect1 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 10 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Effect2 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 11 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Effect3 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 12 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 310 Scene/Effect Effect4 Scene/Effect Effect6 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect Effect7 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 16 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 8 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Effect5 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 15 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 7 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Scene/Effect ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 14 ❏ Preset Bank/Ch# 6 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Program Change# 001 002 003 : 128 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Scene/Effect Effect8 Preset# 001 002 003 : 128 User# Program Change# 001 044 087 002 045 088 003 046 089 004 047 090 005 048 091 006 049 092 007 050 093 008 051 094 009 052 095 010 053 096 011 054 097 012 055 098 013 056 099 014 057 100 015 058 101 016 059 102 017 060 103 018 061 104 019 062 105 020 063 106 021 064 107 022 065 108 023 066 109 024 067 110 025 068 111 026 069 112 027 070 113 028 071 114 029 072 115 030 073 116 031 074 117 032 075 118 033 076 119 034 077 120 035 078 121 036 079 122 037 080 123 038 081 124 039 082 125 040 083 126 041 084 127 042 085 128 043 086 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Scene/ Effect User# Reference section Function menu Scene/ Effect Global functions Program Change# Output functions User# Input functions Scene/ Effect Appendices Program Change# Information shown in the display ❏ Bank/Ch# _ 311 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes Parameters that can be assigned to control changes MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 — — NO ASSIGN INPUT CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR INPUT CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR FADER H FADER L MODE ST TO MATRIX MATRIX 1 LEVEL H– MATRIX 8 LEVEL H MATRIX 1/2 PAN– MATRIX 7/8 PAN ON IN DELAY TIME HIGH TIME MID OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR INPUT CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R TIME LOW LOW Q INPUT CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R LOW GAIN OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR ON CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R PAN/BALANCE INPUT CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R BALANCE OUTPUT MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR ON CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R INSERT DIRECT OUT TO STEREO ON LCR CSR CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R MIX 1–MIX24 ON OUT DELAY MIX SEND MIX 1 LEVEL L– MIX24 LEVEL L LOW MID Q LOW MID FREQ LOW MID GAIN INPUT EQ HIGH FREQ HIGH GAIN LPF ON LOW TYPE HIGH TYPE INPUT ATT INPUT ON INPUT HPF CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R MIX 1–MIX24 POINT MIX 1–MIX24 PAN MATRIX 1 POINT– MATRIX 8 POINT MATRIX 1 ON– MATRIX 8 ON MATRIX 1 LEVEL H– MATRIX 8 LEVEL H HIGH MID FREQ MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1 LEVEL L– MATRIX 8 LEVEL L MATRIX 1/2 PAN– MATRIX 7/8 PAN PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R HIGH Q FOLLOW PAN FIXED MIX TO MATRIX HIGH MID Q HIGH MID GAIN FOLLOW PAN VARI MIX TO STEREO ON TIME MID MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR LOW FREQ MIX 1/ 2 PAN– MIX23/24 PAN POST POINT TIME HIGH ON MIX 1 PRE/POST– MIX24 PRE/POST MIX 1 LEVEL H– MIX24 LEVEL H CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R TIME LOW PRE POINT MIX 1 ON– MIX24 ON STEREO AL–STEREO BR MATRIX 1 LEVEL L– MATRIX 8 LEVEL L INPUT PHASE PARAMETER 2 MATRIX 1 ON– MATRIX 8 ON CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R CH ON 312 PARAMETER 1 MATRIX 1 POINT– MATRIX 8 POINT Reference section FREQ CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R L LOW BYPASS ATTACK L LOW Q THRESHOLD OUTPUT COMP L LOW GAIN RELEASE L RATIO L LOW MID Q GAIN L LOW MID GAIN L HIGH MID BYPASS KNEE/WIDTH MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR LFE H LFE L L HIGH MID Q DIVERGENCE F L HIGH MID FREQ SURROUND L HIGH BYPASS FRONT-REAR PAN L HIGH Q L HIGH FREQ EFFECT U LOW BYPASS MIX BALANCE U LOW FREQ GEQ U LOW GAIN ON GAIN 1–GAIN31 DCA U LOW MID Q FADER H MIX 1–MIX24 STEREO AL–STEREO BR MUTE MASTER ON MASTER 1–MASTER 8 ON CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 GEQ 1–GEQ12 DCA 1–DCA 8 MUTE MASTER U HIGH MID Q U HIGH MID FREQ RECALL SAFE U HIGH MID GAIN U HIGH BYPASS U HIGH Q U HIGH FREQ U HIGH GAIN U LOW TYPE U HIGH TYPE L LOW HPF ON L HIGH HPF ON U LOW HPF ON U HIGH HPF ON DCA 1–DCA 8 FADER L U LOW MID FREQ L HIGH TYPE GEQ 1–GEQ12 ON U LOW MID BYPASS L LOW TYPE EFFECT 1–EFFECT 8 PARAM 1 H– PARAM32 L U LOW Q U HIGH MID BYPASS CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R ALT SEL CH BYPASS L HIGH GAIN U LOW MID GAIN DIVERGENCE R LEFT-RIGHT PAN L HIGH MID GAIN CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R FXRTN1L–FXRTN4R Global functions L LOW MID FREQ MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR RELEASE H L LOW MID BYPASS PARAMETER 2 Function menu L LOW FREQ OUTPUT EQ PARAMETER 1 ON Information shown in the display MODE PARAMETER 2 Output functions PARAMETER 1 ON ON MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR CUE DELAY TIME MID L R TIME LOW MIX 1–MIX24 STEREO AL–STEREO BR MIX 1–MIX24 MATRIX 1–MATRIX 8 STEREO AL–STEREO BR TIME HIGH ON MONITOR DELAY TIME HIGH TIME MID L R C TIME LOW Input functions MODE MIX 1–MIX24 STEREO AL–STEREO BR ON Appendices ATTACK THRESHOLD INPUT GATE RANGE HOLD H CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R HOLD L DECAY H DECAY L ON ATTACK THRESHOLD INPUT COMP RELEASE H RELEASE L CH 1–CH48 STIN1L–STIN4R RATIO GAIN KNEE/WIDTH PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 313 Control change parameter assignments Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL1 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 11 CH11 74 CH11 12 CH12 75 CH13 76 CH14 77 CH14 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 25 MIX 1 88 MIX 2 89 CH 1 MIX 3 90 CH 2 MIX 4 91 CH 3 92 CH 4 STEREO AL 93 CH 5 STEREO BL 94 CH 6 33 CH 1 95 CH 7 34 CH 2 102 CH 8 35 CH 3 103 CH 9 36 CH 4 104 CH10 37 CH 5 105 CH11 38 CH 6 106 39 CH 7 107 40 CH 8 108 CH14 41 CH 9 109 CH15 42 CH10 110 CH16 43 CH11 111 CH17 44 CH12 112 CH18 CH13 113 CH19 CH14 114 CH20 CH15 115 CH21 48 CH16 116 CH22 49 CH17 117 CH23 50 CH18 118 51 CH19 119 52 CH20 53 CH21 54 CH22 55 CH23 INPUT 13 14 15 FADER H 26 OUTPUT 27 28 29 30 31 NO ASSIGN FADER H 46 47 — OUTPUT INPUT 45 FADER L 56 CH24 57 MIX 1 58 MIX 2 OUTPUT 59 MIX 3 60 61 62 63 314 PARAMETER 2 MIX 4 NO ASSIGN FADER L — OUTPUT PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual STEREO AL STEREO BL Reference section CH ON CH12 INPUT CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN PAN/BALANCE — CH12 INPUT CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH25 64 CH25 2 CH26 65 CH26 3 CH27 66 CH27 4 CH28 67 CH28 5 CH29 68 CH29 6 CH30 69 CH30 7 CH31 70 CH31 8 CH32 71 CH32 9 CH33 72 CH33 10 CH34 73 CH34 11 CH35 74 CH35 12 CH36 75 CH37 76 CH38 77 CH38 CH39 78 CH39 16 CH40 79 CH40 17 CH41 80 CH41 18 CH42 81 CH42 19 CH43 82 CH43 20 CH44 83 CH44 21 CH45 84 CH45 22 CH46 85 CH46 23 CH47 86 CH47 24 CH48 87 25 MIX 5 88 INPUT 13 14 15 FADER H CH ON CH36 INPUT CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN — MIX 6 89 CH25 MIX 7 90 CH26 MIX 8 91 CH27 92 CH28 STEREO AL 93 CH29 STEREO BL 94 CH30 33 CH25 95 CH31 34 CH26 102 CH32 35 CH27 103 CH33 36 CH28 104 CH34 37 CH29 105 CH35 38 CH30 106 39 CH31 107 40 CH32 108 CH38 41 CH33 109 CH39 42 CH34 110 CH40 43 CH35 111 CH41 44 CH36 112 CH42 CH37 113 CH43 CH38 114 CH44 CH39 115 CH45 48 CH40 116 CH46 49 CH41 117 CH47 50 CH42 118 51 CH43 119 52 CH44 53 CH45 54 CH46 55 CH47 26 OUTPUT 27 28 29 30 31 NO ASSIGN CH ON 47 OUTPUT INPUT 45 46 — FADER L 56 CH48 57 MIX 5 58 62 63 CH36 INPUT CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN — MIX 7 60 61 PAN/BALANCE MIX 6 OUTPUT 59 Function menu Control Change# Global functions PARAMETER 2 Output functions PARAMETER 1 Input functions MODE Appendices Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL2 MIX 8 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT STEREO AL STEREO BL PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 315 Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL3 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Control Change# PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 11 CH11 74 CH11 12 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 25 MIX 9 88 13 INPUT EQ LOW GAIN INPUT EQ CH12 LOW FREQ CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MIX10 89 CH 1 MIX11 90 CH 2 MIX12 91 CH 3 92 CH 4 MIX 1 93 CH 5 MIX 3 94 CH 6 33 95 CH 7 34 102 CH 8 35 103 CH 9 36 104 CH10 37 105 CH11 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH14 41 109 CH15 42 110 CH16 43 111 CH17 44 112 CH18 113 CH19 46 114 CH20 47 115 CH21 48 116 CH22 49 117 CH23 50 118 51 119 26 27 FADER H OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 MIX 9 58 MIX10 59 FADER L OUTPUT MIX11 60 61 62 63 316 MODE MIX12 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual MIX 5 MIX 7 Reference section INPUT EQ CH12 LOW Q CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH25 64 CH25 2 CH26 65 CH26 3 CH27 66 CH27 4 CH28 67 CH28 5 CH29 68 CH29 6 CH30 69 CH30 7 CH31 70 CH31 8 CH32 71 CH32 9 CH33 72 CH33 10 CH34 73 CH34 11 CH35 74 CH35 12 CH36 75 CH37 76 14 CH38 77 CH38 15 CH39 78 CH39 16 CH40 79 CH40 17 CH41 80 CH41 18 CH42 81 CH42 19 CH43 82 CH43 20 CH44 83 CH44 21 CH45 84 CH45 22 CH46 85 CH46 23 CH47 86 CH47 24 CH48 87 25 MIX13 88 13 INPUT EQ LOW GAIN INPUT EQ CH36 LOW FREQ CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN — MIX14 89 CH25 MIX15 90 CH26 MIX16 91 CH27 92 CH28 MIX 9 93 CH29 MIX11 94 CH30 33 95 CH31 34 102 CH32 35 103 CH33 36 104 CH34 37 105 CH35 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH38 41 109 CH39 42 110 CH40 43 111 CH41 44 112 CH42 113 CH43 46 114 CH44 47 115 CH45 48 116 CH46 49 117 CH47 50 118 51 119 26 27 FADER H OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — Function menu Control Change# Global functions PARAMETER 2 INPUT EQ CH36 LOW Q CH37 Output functions PARAMETER 1 Input functions MODE Appendices Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL4 CH48 NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 MIX13 FADER L MIX14 OUTPUT MIX15 60 61 62 63 MIX16 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT MIX13 MIX15 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 317 Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL5 PARAMETER 2 Control Change# 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 CH11 74 CH11 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 25 MIX 1 88 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 11 12 13 INPUT EQ LOW MID GAIN INPUT EQ PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 LOW MID FREQ CH12 CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MIX 2 89 CH 1 MIX 3 90 CH 2 MIX 4 91 CH 3 92 CH 4 MIX17 93 CH 5 MIX18 94 CH 6 33 95 CH 7 34 102 CH 8 35 103 CH 9 36 104 CH10 37 105 CH11 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH14 41 109 CH15 42 110 CH16 43 111 CH17 44 112 CH18 113 CH19 46 114 CH20 47 115 CH21 48 116 CH22 49 117 CH23 50 118 51 119 26 27 CH ON OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 MIX 5 CH ON MIX 6 OUTPUT MIX 7 60 61 62 63 318 MODE MIX 8 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual MIX19 MIX20 Reference section INPUT EQ CH12 LOW MID Q CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — 1 CH25 64 CH25 2 CH26 65 CH26 3 CH27 66 CH27 4 CH28 67 CH28 5 CH29 68 CH29 6 CH30 69 CH30 7 CH31 70 CH31 8 CH32 71 CH32 9 CH33 72 CH33 10 CH34 73 CH34 11 CH35 74 CH35 CH36 75 CH37 76 14 CH38 77 CH38 15 CH39 78 CH39 16 CH40 79 CH40 17 CH41 80 CH41 18 CH42 81 CH42 19 CH43 82 CH43 20 CH44 83 CH44 21 CH45 84 CH45 22 CH46 85 CH46 23 CH47 86 CH47 24 CH48 87 25 MIX 9 88 INPUT EQ PARAMETER 2 LOW MID FREQ CH36 CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN — MIX10 89 CH25 MIX11 90 CH26 MIX12 91 CH27 92 CH28 MIX21 93 CH29 MIX22 94 CH30 33 95 CH31 34 102 CH32 35 103 CH33 36 104 CH34 37 105 CH35 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH38 41 109 CH39 42 110 CH40 43 111 CH41 44 112 CH42 113 CH43 46 114 CH44 47 115 CH45 48 116 CH46 49 117 CH47 50 118 51 119 26 27 CH ON OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — INPUT EQ CH36 LOW MID Q CH37 Output functions INPUT EQ PARAMETER 1 Input functions 13 LOW MID GAIN MODE Appendices 12 PARAMETER 1 Function menu Control Change# MODE Global functions PARAMETER 2 Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL6 CH48 NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 MIX13 CH ON MIX14 OUTPUT MIX15 60 61 62 63 MIX16 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT MIX23 MIX24 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 319 Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL7 PARAMETER 2 Control Change# 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 CH11 74 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 25 MIX17 88 MIX18 89 CH 1 MIX19 90 CH 2 MIX20 91 CH 3 92 CH 4 MIX17 93 CH 5 MIX19 94 CH 6 33 95 CH 7 34 102 CH 8 35 103 CH 9 36 104 CH10 37 105 CH11 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH14 41 109 CH15 42 110 CH16 43 111 CH17 44 112 CH18 113 CH19 46 114 CH20 47 115 CH21 48 116 CH22 49 117 CH23 50 118 51 119 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 11 12 13 26 27 INPUT EQ FADER H HIGH MID GAIN OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 MIX17 FADER L MIX18 OUTPUT MIX19 60 61 62 63 320 MIX20 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual MIX21 MIX23 Reference section MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 CH11 INPUT EQ CH12 HIGH MID FREQ CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN INPUT EQ — CH12 HIGH MID Q CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — 1 CH25 64 CH25 2 CH26 65 CH26 3 CH27 66 CH27 4 CH28 67 CH28 5 CH29 68 CH29 6 CH30 69 CH30 7 CH31 70 CH31 8 CH32 71 CH32 9 CH33 72 CH33 10 CH34 73 CH34 11 CH35 74 CH36 75 CH37 76 14 CH38 77 CH38 15 CH39 78 CH39 16 CH40 79 CH40 17 CH41 80 CH41 18 CH42 81 CH42 19 CH43 82 CH43 20 CH44 83 CH44 21 CH45 84 CH45 22 CH46 85 CH46 23 CH47 86 CH47 24 CH48 87 25 MIX21 88 MIX22 89 CH25 MIX23 90 CH26 MIX24 91 CH27 92 CH28 MATRIX 1 93 CH29 MATRIX 3 94 CH30 33 95 CH31 34 102 CH32 35 103 CH33 36 104 CH34 37 105 CH35 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH38 41 109 CH39 42 110 CH40 43 111 CH41 44 112 CH42 113 CH43 46 114 CH44 47 115 CH45 48 116 CH46 49 117 CH47 50 118 51 119 27 FADER H OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — PARAMETER 2 CH35 INPUT EQ CH36 HIGH MID FREQ CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN INPUT EQ — CH36 HIGH MID Q CH37 Output functions 26 INPUT EQ PARAMETER 1 Input functions 13 HIGH MID GAIN MODE Appendices 12 PARAMETER 1 Function menu Control Change# MODE Global functions PARAMETER 2 Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL8 CH48 NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 MIX21 FADER L MIX22 OUTPUT MIX23 60 61 62 63 MIX24 NO ASSIGN BALANCE — OUTPUT MATRIX 5 MATRIX 7 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 321 Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL9 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Control Change# PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 11 CH11 74 CH11 12 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 25 MATRIX 1 88 13 INPUT EQ HIGH GAIN INPUT EQ CH12 HIGH FREQ CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MATRIX 2 89 CH 1 MATRIX 3 90 CH 2 MATRIX 4 91 CH 3 92 CH 4 MATRIX 1 93 CH 5 MATRIX 2 94 CH 6 33 95 CH 7 34 102 CH 8 35 103 CH 9 36 104 CH10 37 105 CH11 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH14 41 109 CH15 42 110 CH16 43 111 CH17 44 112 CH18 113 CH19 46 114 CH20 47 115 CH21 48 116 CH22 49 117 CH23 50 118 51 119 26 27 FADER H OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 MATRIX 1 FADER L MATRIX 2 OUTPUT MATRIX 3 60 61 62 63 322 MODE MATRIX 4 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual MATRIX 3 MATRIX 4 Reference section INPUT EQ CH12 HIGH Q CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH25 64 CH25 2 CH26 65 CH26 3 CH27 66 CH27 4 CH28 67 CH28 5 CH29 68 CH29 6 CH30 69 CH30 7 CH31 70 CH31 8 CH32 71 CH32 9 CH33 72 CH33 10 CH34 73 CH34 11 CH35 74 CH35 12 CH36 75 CH37 76 14 CH38 77 CH38 15 CH39 78 CH39 16 CH40 79 CH40 17 CH41 80 CH41 18 CH42 81 CH42 19 CH43 82 CH43 20 CH44 83 CH44 21 CH45 84 CH45 22 CH46 85 CH46 23 CH47 86 CH47 24 CH48 87 25 MATRIX 5 88 13 INPUT EQ HIGH GAIN INPUT EQ CH36 HIGH FREQ CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN — MATRIX 6 89 CH25 MATRIX 7 90 CH26 MATRIX 8 91 CH27 92 CH28 MATRIX 5 93 CH29 MATRIX 6 94 CH30 33 95 CH31 34 102 CH32 35 103 CH33 36 104 CH34 37 105 CH35 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH38 41 109 CH39 42 110 CH40 43 111 CH41 44 112 CH42 113 CH43 46 114 CH44 47 115 CH45 48 116 CH46 49 117 CH47 50 118 51 119 26 27 FADER H OUTPUT 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT NO ASSIGN — Function menu Control Change# Global functions PARAMETER 2 INPUT EQ CH36 HIGH Q CH37 Output functions PARAMETER 1 Input functions MODE Appendices Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL10 CH48 NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 MATRIX 5 FADER L MATRIX 6 OUTPUT MATRIX 7 60 61 62 63 MATRIX 8 NO ASSIGN CH ON — OUTPUT MATRIX 7 MATRIX 8 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 323 Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL11 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Control Change# PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 11 CH11 74 CH11 12 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 25 CH 1 88 CH 2 89 CH 1 CH 3 90 CH 2 CH 4 91 CH 3 92 CH 4 CH 5 93 CH 5 CH 6 94 CH 6 33 95 CH 7 34 102 CH 8 35 103 CH 9 36 104 CH10 37 105 CH11 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH14 41 109 CH15 42 110 CH16 43 111 CH17 44 112 CH18 113 CH19 46 114 CH20 47 115 CH21 48 116 CH22 49 117 CH23 50 118 51 119 13 26 27 INPUT ATT INPUT HPF INPUT FREQ 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF — FREQ NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 CH 7 INPUT HPF CH 8 FREQ CH 9 60 61 62 63 324 MODE CH10 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF — FREQ PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual CH11 CH12 Reference section INPUT HPF CH12 ON CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN INPUT EQ — CH12 LPF ON CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH25 64 CH25 2 CH26 65 CH26 3 CH27 66 CH27 4 CH28 67 CH28 5 CH29 68 CH29 6 CH30 69 CH30 7 CH31 70 CH31 8 CH32 71 CH32 9 CH33 72 CH33 10 CH34 73 CH34 11 CH35 74 CH35 12 CH36 75 CH37 76 14 CH38 77 CH38 15 CH39 78 CH39 16 CH40 79 CH40 17 CH41 80 CH41 18 CH42 81 CH42 19 CH43 82 CH43 20 CH44 83 CH44 21 CH45 84 CH45 22 CH46 85 CH46 23 CH47 86 CH47 24 CH48 87 25 CH13 88 13 INPUT ATT INPUT INPUT HPF CH36 ON CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN — CH14 89 CH25 CH15 90 CH26 CH16 91 CH27 92 CH28 CH17 93 CH29 CH18 94 CH30 33 95 CH31 34 102 CH32 35 103 CH33 36 104 CH34 37 105 CH35 38 106 39 107 40 108 CH38 41 109 CH39 42 110 CH40 43 111 CH41 44 112 CH42 113 CH43 46 114 CH44 47 115 CH45 48 116 CH46 49 117 CH47 50 118 51 119 26 27 INPUT HPF FREQ 28 29 30 31 45 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF — FREQ NO ASSIGN — Function menu Control Change# Global functions PARAMETER 2 INPUT EQ CH36 LPF ON CH37 Output functions PARAMETER 1 Input functions MODE Appendices Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL12 CH48 NO ASSIGN — 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 CH19 INPUT HPF CH20 FREQ CH21 60 61 62 63 CH22 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF — FREQ CH23 CH24 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 325 Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL13 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH 1 64 CH 1 2 CH 2 65 CH 2 3 CH 3 66 CH 3 4 CH 4 67 CH 4 5 CH 5 68 CH 5 6 CH 6 69 CH 6 7 CH 7 70 CH 7 8 CH 8 71 CH 8 9 CH 9 72 CH 9 10 CH10 73 CH10 11 CH11 74 CH11 12 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 CH14 15 CH15 78 CH15 16 CH16 79 CH16 17 CH17 80 CH17 18 CH18 81 CH18 19 CH19 82 CH19 20 CH20 83 CH20 21 CH21 84 CH21 22 CH22 85 CH22 23 CH23 86 CH23 24 CH24 87 25 CH25 88 CH26 89 CH 1 CH27 90 CH 2 CH28 91 CH 3 92 CH 4 CH29 93 CH 5 CH30 94 CH 6 33 CH 1 95 CH 7 34 CH 2 102 CH 8 35 CH 3 103 CH 9 36 CH 4 104 CH10 37 CH 5 105 CH11 38 CH 6 106 39 CH 7 107 40 CH 8 108 CH14 41 CH 9 109 CH15 42 CH10 110 CH16 43 CH11 111 CH17 44 CH12 112 CH18 CH13 113 CH19 46 CH14 114 CH20 47 CH15 115 CH21 48 CH16 116 CH22 49 CH17 117 CH23 50 CH18 118 51 CH19 119 52 CH20 53 CH21 54 CH22 55 CH23 56 CH24 57 CH31 13 26 27 SURROUND INPUT HPF LFE H FREQ 28 29 30 31 45 58 59 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF SURROUND INPUT HPF — FREQ LFE L CH32 FREQ CH33 60 61 62 63 326 PARAMETER 2 CH34 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF — FREQ PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual CH35 CH36 Reference section SURROUND CH12 DIVERGENCE F CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN INPUT EQ — CH12 ON CH13 CH24 NO ASSIGN — MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 1 CH25 64 CH25 2 CH26 65 CH26 3 CH27 66 CH27 4 CH28 67 CH28 5 CH29 68 CH29 6 CH30 69 CH30 7 CH31 70 CH31 8 CH32 71 CH32 9 CH33 72 CH33 10 CH34 73 CH34 11 CH35 74 CH35 12 CH36 75 CH37 76 14 CH38 77 CH38 15 CH39 78 CH39 16 CH40 79 CH40 17 CH41 80 CH41 18 CH42 81 CH42 19 CH43 82 CH43 20 CH44 83 CH44 21 CH45 84 CH45 22 CH46 85 CH46 23 CH47 86 CH47 24 CH48 87 25 CH37 88 CH38 89 CH25 CH39 90 CH26 CH40 91 CH27 92 CH28 CH41 93 CH29 CH42 94 CH30 33 CH25 95 CH31 34 CH26 102 CH32 35 CH27 103 CH33 36 CH28 104 CH34 37 CH29 105 CH35 38 CH30 106 39 CH31 107 40 CH32 108 CH38 41 CH33 109 CH39 42 CH34 110 CH40 43 CH35 111 CH41 44 CH36 112 CH42 CH37 113 CH43 46 CH38 114 CH44 47 CH39 115 CH45 48 CH40 116 CH46 49 CH41 117 CH47 50 CH42 118 51 CH43 119 52 CH44 53 CH45 54 CH46 55 CH47 56 CH48 57 CH43 13 26 27 SURROUND INPUT HPF LFE H FREQ 28 29 30 31 45 58 59 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF SURROUND INPUT HPF — FREQ LFE L 62 63 CH36 DIVERGENCE F CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN INPUT EQ — CH36 ON CH37 CH48 NO ASSIGN — CH44 FREQ CH45 60 61 SURROUND Function menu Control Change# Global functions PARAMETER 2 Output functions PARAMETER 1 Input functions MODE Appendices Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL14 CH46 NO ASSIGN INPUT HPF — FREQ CH47 CH48 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 327 Control change parameter assignments ❏ PRESET CHANNEL15 Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 Control Change# 1 CH 1 64 2 CH 2 65 3 CH 3 66 4 CH 4 67 5 CH 5 68 6 CH 6 69 7 CH 7 70 8 CH 8 71 9 CH 9 72 10 CH10 73 11 CH11 74 CH12 75 CH13 76 14 CH14 77 15 CH15 78 16 CH16 79 17 CH17 80 18 CH18 81 19 CH19 82 20 CH20 83 21 CH21 84 22 CH22 85 23 CH23 86 24 CH24 87 25 DCA 1 88 26 DCA 2 89 DCA 3 90 DCA 4 91 12 13 27 SURROUND DCA LEFT-RIGHT PAN FADER H 28 29 30 31 NO ASSIGN MUTE MASTER 92 — ON MASTER 1 93 MASTER 2 94 33 CH 1 95 34 CH 2 102 35 CH 3 103 36 CH 4 104 37 CH 5 105 38 CH 6 106 39 CH 7 107 40 CH 8 108 41 CH 9 109 42 CH10 110 43 CH11 111 44 CH12 112 CH13 113 46 CH14 114 47 CH15 115 48 CH16 116 49 CH17 117 50 CH18 118 51 CH19 119 52 CH20 53 CH21 54 CH22 55 CH23 45 SURROUND FRONT-REAR PAN 56 CH24 57 DCA 1 58 59 DCA DCA 2 FADER L DCA 3 60 61 62 63 328 PARAMETER 2 DCA 4 NO ASSIGN MUTE MASTER — ON PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual MASTER 3 MASTER 4 Reference section MODE NO ASSIGN PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 — 1 CH25 64 2 CH26 65 3 CH27 66 4 CH28 67 5 CH29 68 6 CH30 69 7 CH31 70 8 CH32 71 9 CH33 72 10 CH34 73 11 CH35 74 CH36 75 CH37 76 14 CH38 77 15 CH39 78 16 CH40 79 17 CH41 80 18 CH42 81 19 CH43 82 20 CH44 83 21 CH45 84 22 CH46 85 23 CH47 86 24 CH48 87 25 DCA5 88 26 DCA6 89 DCA7 90 DCA8 91 12 13 27 SURROUND DCA LEFT-RIGHT PAN FADER H 28 29 30 31 NO ASSIGN MUTE MASTER MASTER5 93 MASTER6 94 33 CH25 95 34 CH26 102 35 CH27 103 36 CH28 104 37 CH29 105 38 CH30 106 39 CH31 107 40 CH32 108 41 CH33 109 42 CH34 110 43 CH35 111 44 CH36 112 CH37 113 46 CH38 114 47 CH39 115 48 CH40 116 49 CH41 117 50 CH42 118 51 CH43 119 52 CH44 53 CH45 54 CH46 55 CH47 45 SURROUND FRONT-REAR PAN 56 CH48 57 DCA 5 58 59 DCA 62 63 PARAMETER 2 NO ASSIGN — DCA 6 FADER L DCA 7 60 61 PARAMETER 1 92 — ON MODE Function menu Control Change# Global functions PARAMETER 2 Output functions PARAMETER 1 Input functions MODE Appendices Control Change# Information shown in the display ❏ PRESET CHANNEL16 DCA 8 NO ASSIGN MUTE MASTER — ON MASTER 7 MASTER 8 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 329 Control change parameter assignments ❏ CHANNEL _ Control Change# MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 Control Change# 1 64 2 65 3 66 4 67 5 68 6 69 7 70 8 71 9 72 10 73 11 74 12 75 13 76 14 77 15 78 16 79 17 80 18 81 19 82 20 83 21 84 22 85 23 86 24 87 25 88 26 89 27 90 28 91 29 92 30 93 31 94 33 95 34 102 35 103 36 104 37 105 38 106 39 107 40 108 41 109 42 110 43 111 44 112 45 113 46 114 47 115 48 116 49 117 50 118 51 119 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 330 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section MODE PARAMETER 1 PARAMETER 2 MIX1-20, MATRIX18, ST A LR to Matrix LEVEL MIX1-8 to ST LEVEL ON CH to Mix ON MIX1-20, MATRIX18, ST A LR to Matrix LEVEL MIX1-8 to ST ON PHASE INSERT ON 0C4A 0CAA 0D0A 0D6A 0DCA 0E2A 0E8A 0EEA 0F4A 0FAA 100A 106A 10CA 112A 118A 0C89 0CE9 0D49 0DA9 0E09 0E69 0EC9 0F29 0F89 0FE9 1049 10A9 1101 1161 11C1 CH to Mix PRE/ POST INPUT DELAY EQ CH & MIX1-20, MATRIX1-8, ST A LR OUTPUT(LOWER) *1 GATE RANGE HOLD DECAY ON ATTACK THRESH RELEASE RATIO GAIN KNEE CHANNEL MIX9-10 MIX11-12 MIX13-14 MIX15-16 MIX17-18 MIX19-20 1C04 1C64 1CC4 1D24 1DA2 1E20 1E9E 1F1C 1F9A 2018 2096 20F6 2156 21B6 2216 2276 22D6 1C3B 1C9B 1CFB 1DA1 1E1F 1E9D 1F1B 1F99 2017 2095 20D5 2135 2195 21F5 2255 22B5 2315 COMP CH & MIX120, MATRIX1-8, ST A LR OUTPUT *1 PAN CH to MIX PAN MIX1-20, ST A LR to Matrix PAN MATRIX1,2 MATRIX3,4 MATRIX5,6 MATRIX7,8 MIX TO ST MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR LFE DIV (F) LR FR 2336 234C 2362 2378 238E 2396 23B4 2414 2474 24D4 234B 2361 2377 238D 2395 23B3 23F3 2453 24B3 2513 MIX1-8 to ST PAN BALANCE SURROUND PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MIX17 SEND MIX18 SEND MIX19 SEND MIX20 SEND ON TIME HIGH TIME LOW MIX1-20,MATRIX18,ST A LR OUTPUT DELAY Function menu CH to Mix LEVEL ON TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON Q LOW F LOW G LOW Q LO-MID F LO-MID G LO-MID Q HI-MID F HI-MID G HI-MID Q HIGH F HIGH G HIGH ATT HPF ON LPF ON ON ATTACK THRESH TO (HEX) 12C7 12E5 1303 1381 13FF 147D 14FB 1579 15F7 1675 16F3 1771 17EF 186D 18EB 1969 19A9 1A65 1AE3 1B1B 1B7B 1BDB Global functions FADER FROM (HEX) 12AA 12C8 12E6 1304 1382 1400 147E 14FC 157A 15F8 1676 16F4 1772 17F0 186E 18EC 196A 19E8 1A66 1AE4 1B44 1BA4 PARAMETER Output functions TO (HEX) 003F 007D 00BD 011D 017D 01DD 023D 029D 02FD 035D 03BD 041D 047D 04DD 0513 0529 053F 0555 056B 0581 0597 05AD 05B5 05F5 0633 0673 06D3 0733 0793 07F3 0853 08B3 0913 0973 09D3 0A33 0A93 0AC9 0AC9 0ADF 0AF5 0B0B 0B21 0B37 0B4D 0B6B 0BAB 0C03 0C49 Input functions CHANNEL MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MIX17 SEND MIX18 SEND MIX19 SEND MIX20 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX TO ST CHANNEL MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR MIX9 SEND MIX10 SEND MIX11 SEND MIX12 SEND MIX13 SEND MIX14 SEND MIX15 SEND MIX16 SEND MIX17 SEND MIX18 SEND MIX19 SEND MIX20 SEND MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND MIX TO ST CHANNEL CHANNEL MIX1-20,MATRIX1-8,ST A LR FROM (HEX) 0000 0060 007E 00DE 013E 019E 01FE 025E 02BE 031E 037E 03DE 043E 049E 04FE 0514 052A 0540 0556 056C 0582 0598 05AE 05B6 0616 0634 0694 06F4 0754 07B4 0814 0874 08D4 0934 0994 09F4 0A54 0AB4 0ACA 0AE0 0AF6 0B0C 0B22 0B38 0B4E 0B64 0B6C 0BCC 0C2C PARAMETER Appendices NRPN parameter assignments 331 NRPN parameter assignments PARAMETER EFFECT 1-8 GEQ 1-6 SURROUND FADER 332 BYPASS MIX PARAM1 PARAM2 PARAM3 PARAM4 PARAM5 PARAM6 PARAM7 PARAM8 PARAM9 PARAM10 PARAM11 PARAM12 PARAM13 PARAM14 PARAM15 PARAM16 PARAM17 PARAM18 PARAM19 PARAM20 PARAM21 PARAM22 PARAM23 PARAM24 PARAM25 PARAM26 PARAM27 PARAM28 PARAM29 PARAM30 PARAM31 PARAM32 ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 DIV R MIX21-24,ST B LR PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual FROM (HEX) 26B4 26BC 26C4 26CC 26D4 26DC 26E4 26EC 26F4 26FC 2704 270C 2714 271C 2724 272C 2734 273C 2744 274C 2754 275C 2764 276C 2774 277C 2784 278C 2794 279C 27A4 27AC 27B4 27BC 27C4 27CA 27D0 27D6 27DC 27E2 27E8 27EE 27F4 27FA 2800 2806 280C 2812 2818 281E 2824 282A 2830 2836 283C 2842 2848 284E 2854 285A 2860 2866 286C 2872 2878 287E 2884 28E4 TO (HEX) 26BB 26C3 26CB 26D3 26DB 26E3 26EB 26F3 26FB 2703 270B 2713 271B 2723 272B 2733 273B 2743 274B 2753 275B 2763 276B 2773 277B 2783 278B 2793 279B 27A3 27AB 27B3 27BB 27C3 27C9 27CF 27D5 27DB 27E1 27E7 27ED 27F3 27F9 27FF 2805 280B 2811 2817 281D 2823 2829 282F 2835 283B 2841 2847 284D 2853 2859 285F 2865 286B 2871 2877 287D 2883 28C3 28E9 CH to Mix LEVEL MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX21 SEND MIX22 SEND MIX23 SEND MIX24 SEND FROM (HEX) 28EA 292A 296A 29AA 29EA 2A2A 2A6A 2AAA 2AEA 2B2A 2B6A 2BAA TO (HEX) 2929 2969 29A9 29E9 2A29 2A69 2AA9 2AE9 2B29 2B69 2BA9 2BE9 MIX21-24, ST B LR to Matrix LEVEL MATRIX1 SEND MATRIX2 SEND MATRIX3 SEND MATRIX4 SEND MATRIX5 SEND MATRIX6 SEND MATRIX7 SEND MATRIX8 SEND 2BEA 2BF0 2BF6 2BFC 2C02 2C08 2C0E 2C14 2BEF 2BF5 2BFB 2C01 2C07 2C0D 2C13 2C19 MIX TO ST 2C1A 2C29 MIX21-24,ST B LR MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX21 SEND MIX22 SEND MIX23 SEND MIX24 SEND MATRIX SEND MIX TO ST MIX21-24,ST B LR 2C2A 2C30 2C70 2CB0 2CF0 2D30 2D70 2DB0 2DF0 2E30 2E70 2EB0 2EF0 2F30 2F36 2F46 2C2F 2C6F 2CAF 2CEF 2D2F 2D6F 2DAF 2DEF 2E2F 2E6F 2EAF 2EEF 2F2F 2F35 2F45 2F4B MIX1 SEND MIX2 SEND MIX3 SEND MIX4 SEND MIX5 SEND MIX6 SEND MIX7 SEND MIX8 SEND MIX21 SEND MIX22 SEND MIX23 SEND MIX24 SEND 2F4C 2F8C 2FCC 300C 304C 308C 30CC 310C 314C 318C 31CC 320C 2F8B 2FCB 300B 304B 308B 30CB 310B 314B 318B 31CB 320B 324B ON TIME HIGH TIME LOW ON Q LOW F LOW G LOW Q LO-MID F LO-MID G LO-MID Q HI-MID F HI-MID G HI-MID Q HIGH F HIGH G HIGH HPF ON LPF ON 324C 3252 3258 325E 3264 326A 3270 3276 327C 3282 3288 328E 3294 329A 32A0 32A6 32AC 32B2 3251 3257 325D 3263 3269 326F 3275 327B 3281 3287 328D 3293 3299 329F 32A5 32AB 32B1 32B7 PARAMETER MIX21-24 to ST LEVEL ON CH to Mix ON INSERT ON CH to Mix PRE/ POST MIX1-20, ST B LR OUTPUT DELAY EQ MIX21-24, ST A LR OUTPUT(LOWER) Reference section OUTPUT EQ OUTPUT EQ IN HPF 3685 368B 3691 3697 369D 36A3 36A9 36E9 3729 3769 37A9 37E9 3829 COMP MIX21-24, ST A LR OUTPUT PAN CH to MIX PAN MIX21-24, ST B LR to Matrix PAN MATRIX1,2 MATRIX3,4 MATRIX5,6 MATRIX7,8 MIX TO ST 382A 3830 3836 383C 3842 382F 3835 383B 3841 3851 MIX9-24 to ST PAN LCR IN, MIX DIRECT OUT CH TO STEREO DCA MUTE MASTER RECALL SAFE HA Information shown in the display 3680 3686 368C 3692 3698 369E 36A4 36AA 36EA 372A 376A 37AA 37EA Function menu ON ATTACK THRESH RELEASE RATIO GAIN KNEE MIX1-2 MIX3-4 MIX5-6 MIX7-8 MIX21-22 MIX23-24 GEQ7-12 TO (HEX) 3857 385D 3863 3869 386F 3875 387B 3881 3887 388D 3893 3899 389F 38A5 38AB 38B1 38B7 38BD 38C3 38C9 38CF 38D5 38DB 38E1 38E7 38ED 38F3 38F9 38FF 3905 390B 3911 3969 39C1 39F9 3A41 3A49 3A55 3A61 3AE6 3B14 3B24 3B34 3B44 3B54 3B64 3B74 3B84 3B94 3BA4 3BB4 3BC4 3BD4 3BE4 3BF4 3C04 3C14 3C24 3C34 3C44 3C54 3C64 3C74 3C84 Global functions INPUT EQ INPUT EQ ON GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 GAIN9 GAIN10 GAIN11 GAIN12 GAIN13 GAIN14 GAIN15 GAIN16 GAIN17 GAIN18 GAIN19 GAIN20 GAIN21 GAIN22 GAIN23 GAIN24 GAIN25 GAIN26 GAIN27 GAIN28 GAIN29 GAIN30 GAIN31 ON/OFF CSR ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF LEVEL ON/OFF ON/OFF GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 GAIN4 GAIN5 GAIN6 GAIN7 GAIN8 +48v 1 +48v 2 +48v 3 +48v 4 +48v 5 +48v 6 +48v 7 +48v 8 HPF1 HPF2 HPF3 HPF4 HPF5 HPF6 HPF7 HPF8 FROM (HEX) 3852 3858 385E 3864 386A 3870 3876 387C 3882 3888 388E 3894 389A 38A0 38A6 38AC 38B2 38B8 38BE 38C4 38CA 38D0 38D6 38DC 38E2 38E8 38EE 38F4 38FA 3900 3906 390C 3912 396A 39C2 3A02 3A42 3A4E 3A5A 3A66 3B06 3B16 3B26 3B36 3B46 3B56 3B66 3B76 3B86 3B96 3BA6 3BB6 3BC6 3BD6 3BE6 3BF6 3C06 3C16 3C26 3C36 3C46 3C56 3C66 3C76 Output functions EQ OUTPUT (HIGHER) PARAMETER Input functions TO (HEX) 32D3 32EF 330B 3327 3343 335F 337B 3397 33B3 33CF 33EB 3407 3423 343F 347F 34BF 34E3 3507 3523 353F 3563 3587 35AB 35CF 35EB 3607 3623 363F 367F Appendices EQ EF EG FQ FF FG GQ GF GG HQ HF HG E HPF ON/OFF H LPF ON/OFF LOW TYPE(P/S/F) HIGH TYPE(P/S/F) A TYPE(P/S/F) D TYPE(P/S/F) E TYPE(P/S/F) H TYPE(P/S/F) A BYPASS B BYPASS C BYPASS D BYPASS E BYPASS F BYPASS G BYPASS H BYPASS F FROM (HEX) 32B8 32D4 32F0 330C 3328 3344 3360 337C 3398 33B4 33D0 33EC 3408 3424 3440 3480 34C0 34E4 3508 3524 3540 3564 3588 35AC 35D0 35EC 3608 3624 3640 PARAMETER *1. For EQ or COMP parameters that include INPUT CH and OUTPUT, the OUTPUT is assigned starting at 96 (60h) after the first number. Thus, the numbers from immediately after INPUT CH until immediately before OUTPUT are unassigned. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 333 Channel Library List Channel Library List This table lists the parameters that are saved in the channel library for INPUT/ST IN channels, MIX channels, MATRIX channels, and STEREO A/B channels. INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX STEREO A/B INPUT/ST IN LCR Center-Side Ratio DCA Group 1-8 On/Off Fade Time On/Off STEREO A/B DCA Group 7,8 On/Off DCA Group 7,8 On/Off DCA Group 7,8 On/Off To Stereo Point Fade Time Fading Time Insert In On/Off Mix Send Pre Point Insert Point Direct Out On/Off Mix Send Post Point Mix Send Follow Pan Vari Direct Out Point Mix Send Follow Pan Fixed Phase On/Off Mix Send 1-24 On/Off To Stereo Pan Master Balance Level Mix Send 1-24 Pre/Post Master Level Mix Send 1-24 Level Attenuator GATE On/Off Mix Send 1-24 Pan GATE Key In Filter On GATE Filter Type GATE Filter Freq. GATE Filter Q GATE Type GATE Attack GATE Range GATE Hold To Matrix On/ Off To Matrix On/ Off To Matrix Point To Matrix Point To Matrix 1-8 Level To Matrix 1-8 Level To Matrix 1-8 Pan To Matrix 1-8 Pan Selective Recall On GATE Decay Selective Recall Parameter GATE Threshold COMP LINK 1-8 COMP LINK A-H COMP On/Off COMP Key In Type COMP Attack COMP Release COMP Ratio COMP OutGain COMP Knee/Width COMP Threshold EQ LINK 1-8 EQ LINK A-F EQ LINK G,H EQ LINK A-F HPF On/Off EQ HPF On/ Off x2 EQ HPF On/ Off EQ HPF On/ Off x2 HPF Freq EQ Type 1,2 EQ On/Off EQ Filter Type x2 EQ Filter Type x4 EQ Filter Type x2 EQ Filter Type x4 EQ LPF On/Off EQ LPF On/Off x2 EQ LPF On/Off EQ LPF On/Off x2 EQ Q x4 EQ Q x8 EQ Q x4 EQ Q x8 EQ Freq x4 EQ Freq x8 EQ Freq x4 EQ Freq x8 EQ Gain x8 EQ Gain x4 EQ Gain x8 EQ Bypass x8 EQ Bypass x4 EQ Bypass x8 Delay On/Off Delay Time Surround LFE Surround Div. Surround Div.Rear Surround LR Pan Surround FR Pan Surround Div.Link 334 MATRIX To Stereo On/Off Fade Time Start Offset EQ Gain x4 MIX Mute Group 1-8 On/Off LCR On/Off PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section This table lists the behavior of channel parameters when INPUT/ST IN channels, MIX channels, or MATRIX channels are paired. ❏ Parameters that are copied when pairing is enabled MIX MATRIX MIX MATRIX Mix Send 1-24 On/Off LCR On/Off Mix Send 1-24 Pre/Post LCR Center-Side Ratio Mix Send 1-24 Level Fade Time On/Off Function menu INPUT/ST IN INPUT/ST IN Mix Send Follow Pan Fixed Information shown in the display Channel parameter behavior when paired To Matrix On/Off Fade Time Start Offset To Matrix Point Fade Time Fading Time Selective Recall On Insert In On/Off Selective Recall Parameter Insert Point Recall Safe On Direct Out On/Off Recall Safe Parameter Direct Out Point Mute Safe On On/Off Master Level Global functions Level Tracking On/Off Tracking Level GATE On/Off Solo Safe On/Off GATE Key In Source Cue/Solo On/Off GATE Key In Filter On CH COPY CH SELECT GATE Filter Type GLOBAL PASTE CH SELECT GATE Filter Freq. GATE Type GATE Attack INPUT/ST IN GATE Range MIX MATRIX Attenuator Gang GATE Hold Gate Stereo Link GATE Decay Comp Stereo Link GATE Threshold Delay Gang COMP LINK A-H COMP On/Off ❏ Parameters that are not modified when pairing is enabled (reset if RESET BOTH is selected) COMP Key In Source COMP Key In Type COMP Attack COMP Release INPUT/ST IN COMP Ratio Phase MIX MATRIX To Stereo Pan COMP OutGain Master Balance COMP Knee/Width Attenuator COMP Threshold Input functions COMP LINK 1-8 Output functions ❏ Parameters that are turned on when pairing is enabled GATE Filter Q Delay Time EQ LINK 1-8 EQ LINK A-F EQ LINK G,H HPF On/Off EQ HPF On/Off x2 EQ HPF On/Off Surround LR Pan EQ Type 1,2 Mix Send 1-24 Pan To Matrix 1-8 Level EQ On/Off EQ Filter Type x2 EQ Filter Type x4 EQ Filter Type x2 EQ LPF On/Off EQ LPF On/Off x2 EQ LPF On/Off To Matrix 1-8 Pan Input Pan Mode EQ Q x4 EQ Q x8 EQ Q x4 Surround Link On/Off EQ Freq x4 EQ Freq x8 EQ Freq x4 Surround Link Pattern EQ Gain x8 EQ Gain x4 M-S Encode On/Off EQ Bypass x8 EQ Bypass x4 M-S Encode S-Gain EQ Gain x4 Delay On/Off Surround LFE Surround Div. Surround Div.Rear Surround Div.Link Mute Group 1-8 On/Off DCA Group 1-8 On/Off DCA Group 7,8 On/Off ❏ Parameters that are not modified when pairing is enabled (not reset even if RESET BOTH is selected) INPUT/ST IN MIX MATRIX Mix Type (VARI,FIX,SURR) To Stereo On/Off Mix Send Pre Point Appendices Surround FR Pan HPF Freq TB On/Off To Stereo Point OSC On/Off Mix Send Post Point MONITOR DEFINE On/Off Mix Send Follow Pan Vari PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 335 MIDI Data Format MIDI Data Format This section explains the format of the data that the PM5D is able to understand, send, and receive. In addition to the messages described here, you can use the MIDI REMOTE function or the MIDI EVENT settings of the SCENE function to transmit any type of command. 1 CHANNEL MESSAGE 1.1 NOTE OFF Equation for converting a Control Value to parameter data paramSteps add mod curValue (8n) Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1000nnnn 8n Note off message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity(ignored) 1.2 NOTE ON paramWidth = 128; rxValue = Control value; (2) If the assigned parameter has 128 or more but less than 16,384 steps (2-1) When High and Low data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + Control value(Low); (9n) 1001nnnn 9n Note on message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off) 1.3 CONTROL CHANGE (1) If the assigned parameter has fewer than 128 steps paramWidth = 16384; Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [OTHER ECHO] is ON. They are received if [Rx CH] matches, and used to control effects. STATUS DATA = paramMax - paramMin + 1; = paramWidth / paramSteps; = paramWidth - add * paramSteps; = parm * add + mod / 2; (2-2) When Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(Low); (2-3) When High data is received rxValue = Control value(High) * 128 + (curValue & 127); (3) If the assigned parameter has 16,384 or more but less than 2,097,152 steps paramWidth = 2097152; (Bn) Two types of control change can be transmitted and received; [NRPN] (NonRegistered Parameter Numbers) and freely-assigned [TABLE] (16CH x 110) messages. Select either [TABLE] or [NRPN]. (3-1) When High, Middle, and Low data is received Reception These messages are echoed to MIDI OUT if [Control Change ECHO] is ON. If [TABLE MULTI] is selected, these messages are received when [Control Change Rx] is ON, and will control parameters according to the settings of the [Control assign table]. If [TABLE SINGLE] is selected, these messages are received when [Control Change Rx] is ON and [Rx CH] matches, and will control parameters according to the settings of the [Control assign table]. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to p.312. If [NRPN] is selected, these messages are received when [Control Change Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches; the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are used to control the specified parameter. (3-2) When only Low data is received Transmission If [TABLE MULTI] is selected, and if [Control Change Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [Control assign table], these messages will be transmitted. If [TABLE SINGLE] is selected, and if [Control Change Tx] is ON when you operate a parameter that is assigned in the [Control assign table], these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. For the parameters that can be assigned, refer to p.312. If [NRPN] is selected, and if [Control Change Tx] is ON when you operate a specified parameter, the four messages NRPN control number (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control number (06h, 26h) are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. Control Change messages are not used for transmission to PM5D Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (Parameter Change messages are always used.) Control Change numbers 0 and 32 are for selecting banks. (3-6) When only High and Low data is received STATUS DATA STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn 00 0vvvvvvv vv 1011nnnn Bn 20 0vvvvvvv vv Control change Control number (00) Control Value (0-127) Control change Control number (32) Control Value (0-127) If [TABLE] is selected 1011nnnn Bn Control change 0nnnnnnn nn Control number (1-31,33-95,102-119) * 0vvvvvvv vv Control Value (0-127) * Numbers 0, 32, and 96–101 cannot be used. STATUS DATA 336 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual rxValue = Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); rxValue = (curValue & 2097024) + Control value(Low); (3-3) When only Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080895) + Control value(Middle) * 128; (3-4) When only High data is received rxValue = (curValue & 16383) + Control value(High) * 16384; (3-5) When only Middle and Low data is received rxValue = (curValue & 2080768) + Control value(Middle) * 128 + Control value(Low); rxValue = (curValue & 16256) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Low); (3-7) When only High and Middle data is received rxValue = (curValue & 127) + Control value(High) * 16384 + Control value(Middle) * 128; if ( rxValue > paramWidth) rxValue = paramWidth; param = ( rxValue - mod / 2) / add; If [NRPN] is selected 1011nnnn Bn Control change 01100010 62 NRPN LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number LSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 01100011 63 NRPN MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter number MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00000110 06 Data entry MSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data MSB STATUS 1011nnnn Bn Control change * DATA 00100110 26 Data entry LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Parameter data LSB * The STATUS byte of the second and subsequent messages need not be added during transmission. Reception must occur correctly whether or not the status byte is omitted. STATUS DATA Reference section F0 7F dd 01 … F7 MIDI TIME CODE rx Command 11111000 F8 Timing clock 11111111 FF System reset Scene Memory & Request tx/rx Input Channel library & Request tx/rx Output Channel library & Request 1–199 512– (channel current data) 1–199 512– (channel current data) 1–199 512– (channel current data) 1–199 768 - (channel current data) tx/rx Gate library & Request tx/rx Compressor library & Request tx/rx Input Equalizer library & Request tx/rx Output Equalizer library & Request 1–199 512– (GEQ 1-12 current data) 1–199 512– (Effect 1-8 current data) 1–199 512 (current data) tx/rx GEQ Equalizer library & Request tx/rx Effect library & Request tx/rx HA library & Request ‘P’ 512 (current data) 512 (current data) ‘N’ 512 (current data) tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx Program change table & Request ‘C’ ‘A’ 512 (current data) tx/rx ‘Y’ ‘Q’ ‘E’ ‘W’ Global functions tx/rx tx/rx 11111110 FE Active sensing Reception When this message is received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared). This message is not subject to echoing. function Output patch library & Request ‘F’ (FF) tx/rx tx/rx ‘q’ (FE) Data Number (D1,2) 0-500 512 (current data) 512 (current data) tx/rx ‘O’ (F8) Reception Once this message has been received, MIDI communication will be initialized (e.g., Running Status will be cleared) if no message is received for an interval of 400 ms. This message is not subject to echoing. STATUS BULK DUMP REQUEST rx 0–99 512 (current data) 0–99 512 (current data) 1–199 512– (channel current data) 1–199 768– (channel current data) ‘R’ ‘G’ Reception This message is used to control effects. This message is transmitted twenty-four times per quarter note. Echoing of this message depends on the OTHER item in the ECHO settings. 2.3 SYSTEM RESET function BULK DUMP DATA Setup Memory & Request (current setup) Input patch library & Request ‘S’ ‘H’ 2 SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE STATUS rx/tx Output functions 1100nnnn Cn Program change 0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127) 2.2 ACTIVE SENSING rx/tx F0 43 0n 3E BB BB 0F D0 D1 D2 … EE F7 BULK DUMP DATA F0 43 2n 3E 0F D0 D1 D2 … EE F7 BULK DUMP REQUEST Function menu This message is used to send or receive the contents of various memories stored within the PM5D. The basic format is as follows. ‘h’ STATUS function MMC command Full message 3.2 Bulk Dump Data name (D0) ‘M’ If MULTI is selected The RX and TX channels will be the same. The assignment table will use the settings for each MIDI channel. Bank select messages will not be added. You can make settings for up to sixteen MIDI channels. 2.1 TIMING CLOCK rx/tx tx The PM5D uses the following data types for a bulk dump. If SINGLE is selected You can choose the RX CH, OMNI CH, and TX CH. You can choose whether a bank select message will be added. A bank of up to 16 can be specified. STATUS DATA Command F0 7F dd 06 … F7 MMC COMMAND Input functions Transmission If [Program Change] is ON, these messages are transmitted according to the [Program Change Table] settings when a scene memory is recalled. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are transmitted on the [Tx CH] channel. If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the lowest-numbered program number for each MIDI channel will be transmitted. Program Change messages are not used for transmission to PM5D Editor because there is no guarantee that the contents of the assignment tables will match. (Parameter Change messages are always used.) You can choose either MULTI MIDI CH or SINGLE CH. 3.1 Real Time System Exclusive Information shown in the display 3 System Exclusive Message (Cn) Reception If [Program Change ECHO] is ON, bank select messages will also be echoed from MIDI OUT. If SINGLE CH is selected, these messages are received if [Program Change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, these messages are received regardless of the channel. When these messages are received, scene memories are recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table]. Control change table & Request Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request Event List & Request Appendices 1.4 PROGRAM CHANGE The unique header (Model ID) identifies whether the device is a PM5D. To calculate the check sum, add the bytes starting with the byte after BYTE COUNT (LOW) and ending with the byte before CHECK SUM, take the binary complement, and set bit 7 to 0. CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F Bulk Dumps can be received at any time, and can be transmitted at any time when a Bulk Dump Request is received. A Bulk Dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel in response to a Bulk Dump Request. In the data portion, seven words of 8-bit data are converted into eight words of 7-bit data. [Conversion from actual data to bulk data] d[0. 6]: actual data b[0. 7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I); } b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F; } PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 337 MIDI Data Format 4.2 Current Scene, Setup, Backup, Window control, Input Patch, Output Patch, HA Data – Parameter request – [Recovery from bulk data to actual data] d[0. 6]: actual data b[0. 7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]); } 4.2.1 Format 3.3 PARAMTER CHANGE Reception This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a parameter change is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. When a parameter request is received, the current value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a parameter change with its Device Number as the [Rx CH]. Transmission If [Parameter change TX] is ON, and you edit a parameter for which control change transmission has not been enabled, a parameter change will be transmitted with the [Tx CH] as its device number. In response to a parameter request, a parameter change will be transmitted with [Rx CH] as its device number. Command rx/tx F0 43 1n 3E 0F … F7 RARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 0F … F7 PARAMETER REQUEST rx/tx function PM5D native parameter change rx/tx PM5D native parameter request 4.1 Current Scene, Setup, Backup, Window control, Input Patch, Output Patch, HA Data – Parameter change – 4.1.1 Format Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When the message is received, the specified parameter will be edited. Transmission If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, this message is transmitted with the [Device Number] specified by the [Tx CH] when you edit a parameter that is not assigned in the [Control change assign table]. 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 0ccccccc STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA EOX *1 See 4.1.1 F0 43 1n 3E 0F cc System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D 0eeeeeee ee Element No *1 0iiiiiii ii Index No *2 0ccccccc cc Channel No *3 0ddddddd dd data : : EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive *1 If ee is 0, the Element No. is extended by two bytes. *2 If ii is 0, the Index No. is extended by two bytes. *3 If cc is 0, the Channel No. is extended by two bytes. DATA CATEGORY 0x01 0x03 0x04 0x06 0x07 0x08 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D Element No *1 Index No *1 Channel No *1 End of exclusive DATA CATEGORY 00000001 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 Setup Data Backup Data Input patch Data Output patch Data HA Data Transmission If [Parameter change Tx] is ON, this message is transmitted with a [Device Number] of the [Tx CH]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME Setup Data Backup Data Window Control Data DATA Output patch Data HA Data EOX PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual NAME Current Scene Data Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When the message is received, the specified parameter will be edited. NAME Current Scene Data Input patch Data 00000001 00000011 00000100 00000110 00000111 00001000 4.3.1 Format 4.1.2 Data categories 338 F0 43 3n 3E 0F cc ee ii cc F7 4.3 Function Call – Library Store/Recall – (Parameter change) MODULE NAME 0x01 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 0ccccccc 0eeeeeee 0iiiiiii 0ccccccc 11110111 4.2.2 Data categories 4. PARAMETER CHANGE details STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA Category DATA Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the value of the specified parameter is transmitted as a Parameter Change. Reference section 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 01001100 01101001 01100010 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 System exclusive message 43 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 1n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 3E Digital mixer 0F PM5D 00 OTHER DATA "L" (ASCII CODE) See 4.3.2 "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.3.3 mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mh number High ml number Low ch channel High cl channel Low F7 End of exclusive Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When the message is received, the specified memory/library will be edited. Transmission In response to a request, a Parameter Change message is transmitted on the [Rx CH]. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change. 4.3.3 Module names MODULE NAME Scene Input Patch Output Patch Input Channel Output Channel Input EQ Output EQ Gate Comp GEQ Effect HA Function “LibStr__ ” “LibUnStr” “LibRcl__” “SCENE___” “INPATCH_” “OUTPATCH” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “GATE____” “COMP____” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” “HA______” STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME SCENE Number 1- 500 *5 Channel INPATCH 1- 99 *5 OUTPATCH LIB 1- 99 *5 INPUT CHANNEL LIB 1- 199 *1 OUTPUT CHANNEL LIB INPUT EQ LIB 1- 199 *2 *3 *4 41- 199 *1 OUTPUT EQ LIB 4- 199 *2 *3 *4 GATE LIB 5- 199 *1 COMP LIB 37- 199 *1 *2 *3 *4 GEQ LIB 1- 199 *6 EFFECT LIB 48- 199 *7 HA LIB 1- 199 *5 SCENE 1- 500 INPATCH 1- 99 OUTPATCH LIB 1- 99 INPUT CHANNEL LIB 1- 199 OUTPUT CHANNEL LIB INPUT EQ LIB 1- 199 OUTPUT EQ LIB 4- 199 41- 199 GATE LIB 5- 199 COMP LIB 37- 199 GEQ LIB 1- 199 EFFECT LIB 48- 199 HA LIB 1- 199 SCENE 0- 500 *5 INPATCH 0- 99 *5 OUTPATCH LIB 0- 99 *5 INPUT CHANNEL LIB 0- 199 *1 OUTPUT CHANNEL LIB INPUT EQ LIB 0- 199 *2 *3 *4 1- 199 *1 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx Tx/rx Tx/rx Tx/rx Tx/rx tx/rx OUTPUT EQ LIB 1- 199 *2 *3 *4 tx/rx GATE LIB 1- 199 *1 tx/rx COMP LIB 1- 199 *1 *2 *3 *4 tx/rx GEQ LIB 0- 199 *6 tx/rx EFFECT LIB 1- 199 *7 tx/rx HA LIB 0- 199 *5 tx/rx *1 0: CH1–47:CH48, 48:STIN1L–55:STIN4R, 56:FXRTN 1L–63: FXRTN 4R, *2 256: MIX1–279:MIX24, *3 512:MATRIX1–519: MATRIX8, *4 1024:STEREO1L–1027:STEREO2R *5 Use 512 if the recall-destination or store-source data is single *6 0: GEQ1–11:GEQ12 *7 0:Effect1–7:Effect8 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 F0 43 1n 3E 0F 00 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D OTHER DATA 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) See 4.4.2 01101001 01100010 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff 0fffffff MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm EOX 11110111 "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) ff (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.4.3 mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mh number -source start High ml number -source start Low mh number -source end High ml number -source end Low mh number -destination start High ml number -destination to start Low F7 End of exclusive 4.4.2 Function names FUNCTION NAME Copy Paste Clear Cut Insert “LibCpy__” “LibPst__” “LibClr__” “LibCut__” “LibIns__” Global functions *1 This indicates that the library data has been updated due to an external cause (such as LOAD). Information shown in the display 4.4.1 Format Output functions “LibStr__” “LibRcl__” “LibUnStr” Input functions Store Recall Store -Unknown Factor- *1 Appendices FUNCTION NAME Function menu 4.4 Function Call – Library Edit – (Parameter change) 4.3.2 Function names 4.4.3 Module names MODULE NAME Scene “SCENE___” 4.5 Function Call – Library Attribute – 4.5.1 Title (Parameter change) format Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When the message is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be edited. Transmission In response to a request, a Parameter Change message is transmitted on the [Rx CH]. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 F0 43 1n 3E PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer Reference section 339 MIDI Data Format MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 4.5.4 Protect (Parameter change) format 00001111 0F PM5D 00000000 00 OTHER DATA STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01010100 01101001 01110100 01101100 01011111 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ddddddd "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "T" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "l" (ASCII CODE) "_" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.5.3 mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mh number High ml number Low dd title 1 4.5.2 Title (Parameter request) format 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 F0 43 3n 3E 0F 00 Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer 340 OTHER DATA "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "T" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "l" (ASCII CODE) "_" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.5.3 mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mh number High ml number Low F7 End of exclusive “SCENE___” “INPATCH_” “OUTPATCH” “INCHNNL_” “OUTCHNNL” number 0-500,512 (0: response only) 0-99 (0: response only) 0-99 (0: response only) 0-199 (0-1: response only) 0-199 (0-1: response only) size 16 16 16 16 16 “INEQ____” “OUTEQ___” “GATE____” “COMP____” “GEQ_____” “EFFECT__” “HA______” 1-199 (1-40: response only) 1-199 (1-3: response only) 1-199 (1-4: response only) 1-199 (1-36: response only) 1-199 (1-52: response only) 0-199 (0: response only) 0-199 (0: response only) 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual EOX n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D OTHER DATA "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "P" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "c" (ASCII CODE) "_" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.5.6 mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mh number High ml number Low dd data (unprotected:0, protected:1, read 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Reception When this is received, a parameter change is transmitted with [Rx CH] as the device number. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME PM5D 4.5.3 Title module names MODULE NAME SCENE LIB INPATCH LIB OUTPATCH LIB INPUT CHANNEL LIB OUTPUT CHANNEL LIB INPUT EQ LIB OUTPUT EQ LIB GATE LIB COMP LIB GEQ LIB EFFECT LIB HA LIB Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) 4.5.5 Protect (Parameter request) format System exclusive message 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01010100 01101001 01110100 01101100 01011111 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm EOX 11110111 System exclusive message only:2 ) Reception When this is received, a parameter change is transmitted with [Rx CH] as the device number. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME F0 43 1n 3E 0F 00 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01010000 01110010 01110100 01100011 01011111 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ddddddd 0ddddddd dd title x 11110111 F7 End of exclusive EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D OTHER DATA 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01010000 01110010 01110100 01100011 01011111 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm EOX 11110111 Reference section F0 43 3n 3E 0F 00 "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "P" (ASCII CODE) "r" (ASCII CODE) "t" (ASCII CODE) "c" (ASCII CODE) "_" (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.5.6 mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mh number High ml number Low F7 End of exclusive Transmission In response to a request, a Parameter Change message is transmitted on the [Rx CH]. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 F0 43 1n 3E 0F 00 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D OTHER DATA 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE) 01100010 "b" (ASCII CODE) 01010000 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE) 01101110 "n" (ASCII CODE) 01101011 "k" (ASCII CODE) 01011111 "_" (ASCII CODE) MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.5.9 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) DATA 0sssssss mh library number High 0sssssss ml library number Low 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 See 4.5.10 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mh linked library number High *1 0mmmmmmm ml linked library number Low *1 0ddddddd dd data (unlinked:0, linked:1) *1 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive *1 If this portion is repeated multiple times, this means that a single packet contains link data for multiple libraries. 4.5.8 Link format (Parameter request) Reception When this is received, a parameter change is transmitted with [Rx CH] as the device number. For the function and number, refer to the table in 4.5.7. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 F0 43 3n 3E 0F 00 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D OTHER DATA 01001100 "L" (ASCII CODE) 01101001 01100010 01010000 01101001 "i" (ASCII CODE) "b" (ASCII CODE) "L" (ASCII CODE) "i" (ASCII CODE) 4.5.9 Library module names MODULE NAME SCENE LIB "SCENE___" number 0-500,512 (0:response only) Information shown in the display Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When the message is received, the link settings of the specified memory/library will be edited. Function menu 4.5.7 Link format (Parameter change) 01101110 "n" (ASCII CODE) 01101011 "k" (ASCII CODE) 01011111 "_" (ASCII CODE) MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.5.9 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) 0mmmmmmm mm (ASCII CODE) DATA 0sssssss mh library number High 0sssssss ml library number Low 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 See 4.5.10 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 0mmmmmmm mm linked library (ASCII CODE) *1 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive *1 If this portion does not exist, it is assumed that all information for the specified library and number is being requested. Global functions size 16 4.5.10 Linked library module names MODULE NAME INPATCH LIB OUTPATCH LIB HA LIB number "INPATCH_" "OUTPATCH" "HA______" 0- 99 0- 99 0-199 4.6 Function Call – Module – Output functions “SCENE___” number 0-500,512 (0:response only) 4.6.1 Effect Trigger (Parameter change) format Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this message is received, the corresponding effect function will operate (depends on the effect type). STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY FUNCTION NAME 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 00000000 F0 43 1n 3E 0F 00 System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) Input functions MODULE NAME SCENE LIB n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D OTHER DATA Appendices 4.5.6 Protect module names 01001101 "M" 01101111 01100100 01000110 01111000 01010100 01110010 01100111 MODULE NAME 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm DATA 0eeeeeee 0ppppppp EOX 11110111 "o" "d" "F" "x" "T" "r" "g" mm (ASCII CODE) See 4.6.2 mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) mm (ASCII CODE) ee Effect number (0:Effect1 - 7:Effect8) pp Release:0, Press:1 F7 End of exclusive PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 341 MIDI Data Format 4.8 Time Counter Data – Time Code – 4.6.2 Effect module names MODULE NAME Freeze Play button Freeze Record button "FRZPLAY_" "FRZREC__" channel 0:Effect1 - 7:Effect8 0:Effect1 - 7:Effect8 Nothing will happen if the Effect Type is different. 4.7 Level Meter Data – Parameter change – 4.7.1 Format (Parameter change) Once a Level Meter Request is received to enable transmission, the specified meter data will be transmitted at 50 msec intervals for a duration of ten seconds. If you want meter data to be transmitted continuously, you must transmit a Request at intervals of no longer than ten seconds. Reception This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. Transmission Once transmission is enabled by a Request, the meter data specified in the Address will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at a specific interval for a specific duration. (The transmission interval and the duration of transmission will differ between models of device.) Transmission is disabled when the power is cycled, or when PORT settings are changed. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 00100001 F0 43 1n 3E 0F 21 4.8.1 Format (Parameter change) When transmission is enabled by receiving a Remote Time Counter request, Time Counter data is transmitted at 50 ms intervals for a duration of ten seconds. If you want counter data to be transmitted continuously, you must transmit a Request at intervals of no longer than ten seconds. Reception This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. Transmission When transmission is enabled by a request, Time Counter data is transmitted for a specific duration. Transmission is disabled when the power is cycled, or when PORT settings are changed. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA System exclusive message Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) EOX PM5D (Parameter request) Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the meter data specified in the Address is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at a specific interval for a specific duration. If this is received with an Address UL = 0x7F, transmission of all meter data will stop (will be disabled) immediately. 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 dd dd dd dd F7 Hour Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D Time Counter TC Minute Second Frame End of exclusive 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001111 00100001 F0 43 3n 3E 0F 21 System exclusive message 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 11110111 mm mm mm ch cl F7 ADDRESS UL (See 4.7.3) Transmission If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change. F0 43 3n 3E 0F 2b System exclusive message STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00001111 00101011 EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D Time Counter TC 0ddddddd dd 0: Request transmission 0x7F: Request stop transmission Manufacture’s ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Digital mixer PM5D REMOTE LEVEL METER ADDRESS LU ADDRESS LL Request Ch Total Number H Request Ch Total Number L End of exclusive PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual (Parameter request) Reception This message is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches the Device number included in the SUB STATUS. This message is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this message is received, Time Counter data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel for a specific duration. If a message is received with 0x7F as the second byte of the Address, data transmission will be stopped (disabled) immediately. Transmission If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, the message is transmitted without change. 342 System exclusive message 4.8.2 Format REMOTE LEVEL METER 4.7.2 Format EOX F0 43 1n 3E 0F 2b Digital mixer 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS UL (See 4.7.3) 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LU 0mmmmmmm mm ADDRESS LL 0ddddddd dd Data1 H (See 4.7.5) *1 0ddddddd dd Data1 L : : EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive *1 Two types of meter data are provided; data that uses the decay value of the DSP as-is, and data that is converted via a table according to the number of segments in the meter display. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID DATA CATEGORY DATA 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00001111 00101011 Reference section #xxx of Scene is Read Only! You attempted to overwrite (store) a read-only scene. #xxx of Scene is Protected! You attempted to overwrite (store) a protected scene. Cannot Undo! You pressed the SCENE MEMORY [UNDO] key when Undo was not available. Cannot Assign! You clicked an unavailable (grayed-out) grid in the patch screen, or pressed an invalid key on the panel (e.g., a DCA/MUTE assign key that is unavailable due to the selected channel). Cannot Drop! You attempted to drop a EQ/compressor/gate/EQ/effect mini-graph onto a location of a different type. Pair Made. You used a panel operation to assign channel pairing. Pair Broken. You used a panel operation to cancel channel pairing. EFFECT CUE: Turned Off. CUE was defeated because you switched to another screen from the EQ PARAM or EFFECT ASSIGN screen, or because you switched the selected effect. KEY IN CUE: Turned Off. KEY IN CUE was defeated because you switched from the GATE PRM/COMP PRM screen to a different screen. Overwrite Existing Event. In the EVENT LIST screen you input an event at the same time as a previously-input event, so the existing event was overwritten. Event List Full! Last Event cancelled. In the EVENT LIST screen, the event list is full; the last event in the event list was pushed out and deleted when you added a new event. Interval from Previous Event is Too Short! The event you are attempting to input in the EVENT LIST screen is too close to an existing event earlier than that location, so it is possible that it may not be recalled at the time you intend. TIME CODE: Frame Jump! The time code that was input in the EVENT LIST screen has experienced a frame jump or is running backward. TIME CODE: Frame Mismatch! The incoming time code has a frame rate that is different than the time code specified in the EVENT LIST screen. MIDI: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input to the MIDI IN connector. MIDI: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input to the MIDI IN connector. MIDI: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the MIDI IN connector. MIDI: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the MIDI OUT connector. USB: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port. USB: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the USB connector input port. USB: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the USB connector input port. USB: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the USB connector output port. SLOT x: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input from the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the SLOT x input port. SLOT x: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being sent from the SLOT x output port. RS422: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being received at the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector. RS422: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being received at the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector. RS422: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector. RS422: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the HA REMOTE connector or RS422 REMOTE connector. CASCADE: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input to the CASCADE IN/OUT connector. CASCADE: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input to the CASCADE IN/OUT connector. CASCADE: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received at the CASCADE IN/OUT connector. CASCADE: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted from the CASCADE IN/OUT connector. DME Control: Data Framing Error! Invalid signals are being input during communication with the DME. DME Control: Data Overrun! Invalid signals are being input during communication with the DME. DME Control: Rx Buffer Full! Too much data is being received during communication with the DME. DME Control: Tx Buffer Full! Too much data is being transmitted during communication with the DME. Wrong Word Clock! The PM5D cannot synchronize because the source selected by MASTER CLOCK SELECT in the WORD CLOCK screen is not appropriate. Sync Error! [xxxx] The xxxx signal is not synchronized with the PM5D. xxxx No Signal Present! The xxxx signal is not being input. Data Type Conflict! Canceled. You attempted to execute a library recall or channel copy operation on a different type of channel. HA Type Conflict! Data Ignored. You attempted to recall a HA library of a different model (PM5D model or PM5D-RH model). Conflicting GPI OUT Cancelled. The parameter you assigned to the FADER START function or to a User Defined key is the same as an existing GPI OUT assignment, so the GPI OUT assignment was cancelled. Conflicting USER DEFINED KEY Cancelled. The parameter you assigned to GPI OUT is the same as an existing User Defined key assignment, so the User Defined key assignment was cancelled. Conflicting FADER START Cancelled. The parameter you assigned to GPI OUT is the same as an existing FADER START function, so the FADER START assignment was cancelled. Wrong Password! The system password or console password you input was incorrect. System Password Changed. The system password has been changed. Console Password Changed. The console password has been changed. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Input functions Output functions #xxx of Scene is Empty! Information shown in the display Meaning No data has been stored in the scene you attempted to recall, or the data has been damaged so that it cannot be recalled. Appendices Message Function menu These are messages displayed in the lower part of the screen. They will disappear after a certain duration has elapsed. Global functions Warning Messages 343 Error Messages Message Meaning Parameter Locked. Parameter Lock has been enabled. Parameter Unlocked. Parameter Lock has been defeated. This Parameter is Locked. The parameter you attempted to control is locked. Channel Copied. The selected channel settings were copied to the memory buffer. Channel Pasted. The channel settings in the memory buffer were pasted to the selected channel. Nothing to Paste! Paste cannot be performed because there is no data in the memory buffer. Cannot Paste to Different Channel Type. Paste cannot be performed because you are attempting to paste channel settings of a different type. No Card in Slot! No memory card is inserted in the MEMORY CARD slot. File Already Exist! The memory card already contain a file/directory with the same name as the one you are attempting to save, rename, or create. Saving Aborted. Saving to memory card was aborted. Loading Aborted. Loading from memory card was aborted. No Controllable Gain. You attempted to operate a gain knob that is currently disabled on the panel. Tap Operation Ignored. Tap operation was ignored because the TAP TEMPO button is not displayed in the screen. Cascade Unit Disconnected. The connection with a cascade-connected external device was broken. Additional Cascade Unit Detected. A cascade-connected external device was newly detected. Incorrect Cascade Connection! The connection is not appropriate for the cascade settings. Couldn’t Store Scene on Slave Console! The cascade-connected slave console was unable to store the scene because the scene was protected on the slave console, or for some other reason. Couldn’t Edit Scene on Slave Console! The cascade-connected slave console was unable to edit the scene because the scene was protected on the slave console, or for some other reason. DME Disconnected. The connection with an external DME was broken. No Response from External HA. No response from an external AD8HR or AD824. Processing Aborted. A process was aborted. Error Messages These are messages displayed as popup windows in the center of the screen. After noting the content of the message, click the OK button in the screen to close the popup window. Message 344 Meaning Cannot Store! Failed to store a scene memory or library. Cannot Recall! Failed to recall a scene memory or library. Memory Card Full! You attempted to save a file that was larger than the available capacity of the memory card. File Not Found! The file/directory does not exist on the memory card. Couldn’t Read File. Failed to read the file from the memory card. Couldn’t Write File. Failed to write the file to the memory card. Couldn’t Delete File. Failed to delete the memory card file. Couldn’t Open File. Failed to open the file from the memory card. Couldn’t Close File. Failed to close the file on the memory card. Unsupported File Format! The file you attempted to load from the memory card is of an unsupported format. No Files to Upload! Internal memory does not contain files to upload. Low Battery! The backup battery voltage is low. Power Supply has Malfunctioned! A problem has occurred with the PW800W power supply connected to the PM5D. Please contact your Yamaha dealer. Total Slot Power Capability Exceeded! The I/O cards installed in the slots exceed the rated power capacity. PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Sound is not output ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (➥ p.30) Is the [ON] key indicator of the STEREO A/B channel lit? Is an output port patched to the output channel? (➥ p.67) Could LCR be on, and the CSR value be set to 1.0? (➥ p.242) Sound is not output from headphones or the MONITOR OUT jacks ❍ Is the MONITOR section [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume? Sound is not loud enough ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (➥ p.36, 206) Is the fader of the input channel raised? Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely low setting? (➥ p.65) Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an extreme setting? (➥ p.63, 64) Is the EQ attenuator raised? (➥ p.260) Is the fader of the output channel raised? Try using the various screens of the METER function to check the levels. (➥ p.209, 210) Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised? Sound is distorted ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Is the word clock set correctly? (➥ p.31) Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (➥ p.36, 206) Could the fader of the input channel be raised too high? Could the fader of the STEREO A/B channel be raised too high? Could the EQ gain be set to an extremely high setting? (➥ p.65) Sound is output even though it is not patched to an output channel ❍ Could you have assigned an input channel to direct out? (➥ p.72) ❍ Could you have assigned an output channel as the insert out? (➥ p.70) Paired channels are not heard in stereo ❍ Are the pan mode setting and pan value correct? (➥ p.45) The volume of a specific channel rises and falls ❍ Could GATE/COMP be set to ducking? (➥ p.63, 64) Operating a fader does not control the level as you expect ❍ Have you used the layer keys ([CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys or [ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys) to select the appropriate layer? ❍ Is the FADER [FLIP] key turned off? Only the sound of a specific channel is heard from the MONITOR OUT or PHONES jack ❍ Could a [CUE] key be on? Noise occurs from an externally connected recorder or other device ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ High frequency range is attenuated ❍ Could emphasis be applied? This problem will occur if the input signal status does not match the emphasis data. (➥ p.200, 215) ❍ Could EQ be applied? (➥ p.65) An input signal is being input, but there’s no monitor output ❍ Could the CUE INTERRUPTION button be on? If this button is on, the cue/solo signal will also be output from the MONITOR OUT jacks while the Cue/Solo function is active. (➥ p.217) Some channels are always heard even in SOLO mode ❍ Could those channels be set to SOLO SAFE? (➥ p.219, 219) Not enough headroom, especially when EQ boost is applied ❍ Use the EQ attenuator function to lower the level. (➥ p.260) Sound recorded via a 2TR OUT DIGITAL jack or a digital I/O card is gritty ❍ Check that the dither function matches the word length of the recording device. (➥ p.207) Signal is delayed ❍ Check whether the delay setting for each channel is set correctly. (➥ p.58) Information shown in the display Is the optional I/O card installed correctly? (➥ p.30) Is a signal being input from the external device? Is the input port patched to an input channel? (➥ p.66) Is the GAIN of the internal head amp or external head amp set to an appropriate level? (➥ p.36, 206) Is the EQ attenuator raised? (➥ p.260) Could insert be turned on even though it has not been specified correctly? (➥ p.70) Is the [ON] key indicator of the input channel lit? Is the fader of the input channel raised? In SOLO mode, could the [CUE] key be on for a channel that has no signal? (➥ p.96) Is the DCA fader assigned to that channel raised? Could MUTE be turned on? (➥ p.75) Function menu Sound is not input ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ Global functions ❍ Are the PM5D and PW800W correctly connected by the special power cable? ❍ Is the PW800W’s POWER switch turned on? ❍ In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 2 screen, could the LED brightness have been turned down? (➥ p.188) ❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact your Yamaha dealer. Is the word clock set correctly? (➥ p.31) Could the input signal be unsynchronized? Is the dither setting appropriate? (➥ p.207) Could oscillator or talkback be turned on? (➥ p.98, 99) Appendices Input functions Power does not turn on, panel LEDs and the LCD display do not light Output functions Troubleshooting ❍ Is the [MIX SEND] key turned on? Turning a MIX encoder does not ❍ Is the MIX [ON] key turned on? change the send level to the MIX bus ❍ Is the MIX bus set to VARI type? (➥ p.201) ❍ If the send point is set to POST, could the fader have been lowered? Can’t save scene memory or library data ❍ Are you attempting to save the data to a read-only scene/library or a protected scene? (➥ p.159) Can’t save to a memory card ❍ Is the memory card protected? ❍ Does the memory card have enough free capacity to save the data? ❍ When formatting a memory card, format it in FAT16 format. Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data ❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly? (➥ p.113, 115, 117) ❍ Are the mode and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices? (➥ p.113, 115) ❍ Has an event been assigned for the program change? (➥ p.113) The [ON] keys or [SEL] keys select the wrong channels ❍ Have you used the layer keys ([CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys or [ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys) to select the appropriate layer? PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 345 General Specifications You paired input channels, but the signal phase is incorrect ❍ Set the paired input channels to the same phase setting. Even when channels are paired, the phase settings are not linked. (➥ p.45) When you recall a scene, some channels/parameters are not updated ❍ Could those channels/parameters be set to Recall Safe or Selective Recall? (➥ p.84, 86) You turn on a CUE button in the EFFECT PARAM screen, but it is automatically defeated ❍ This is defeated automatically when you switch screens in the display. (➥ p.152) Can’t make boost settings with the GEQ ❍ In the GEQ PARAM screen, could LIMIT be set to –24 dB? (➥ p.111) When you recall a scene, it takes a certain amount of time for the faders to stop ❍ Could you have specified a fade time? (➥ p.87) The panel LEDs or LCD display are too dark / too bright ❍ In the UTILITY function PREFERENCE 2 screen, use the BRIGHTNESS setting to adjust the brightness. (➥ p.188) General Specifications Sampling Frequency Signal Delay Fader 346 Internal: External: 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz 44.1 kHz (–10%) to 48 kHz (+6%) 88.2 kHz (–10%) to 96 kHz (+6%) PM5D: Less than 2.3 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 48 kHz) Less than 1.15 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 96 kHz) Less than 2.5 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 48 kHz) Less than 1.25 ms INPUT to STEREO A,B (@Fs = 96 kHz) PM5D-RH: 100mm motorized x38 Fader Resolution +10 to –138, –∞ dB (1024 steps/100 mm) Maximum Voltage Gain PM5D: PM5D-RH: Crosstalk (@1kHz) –80 dB Adjacent Input Channels (INPUT1-48) Dimensions 1551 x 950 x 283 mm (W x D x H) Net Weight PM5D: PM5D-RH: 98 kg 97 kg Power Requirements PM5D: PM5D-RH: 480W, DC 24V, 20A (Use PW800W Only) 528W, DC 24V, 22A (Use PW800W Only) Operation free-air Temperature Range +10 °C to +35 °C Storage Temperature Range –20 °C to +60 °C Included Accessories Owner’s Manual Gooseneck Lamps x 3 Power Supply PW800W Connection Cable Studio Manager CD-ROM Studio Manager Installation Guide Optional Accessories mini YGDAI cards Power Supply PW800W Power Supply Link Cable PSL120 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual 84 dB INPUT1-48 to Each Output 86 dB INPUT1-48 to Each Output Reference section Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x48 Phantom Power PM5D: PM5D-RH: +48V DC is supplied to Input by individual mechanical switch +48V DC is supplied to Input by individual software control Pad Switch PM5D: 0/26 dB attenuation PM5D: 44 dB detented –60 dB to –16 dB (PAD=OFF), –34 to +10 dB (PAD=ON) 72 dB by software control –62 dB to 10 dB (1 dB step) Red LED is lit when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping Signal Indicator Green LED is lit when post HA level reaches 14 dB below nominal Insert (Pre AD converter) PM5D: Out, In (TRS Balanced) Insert Switch PM5D: On/Off AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x8 Phantom Power PM5D-RH: +48V DC is supplied to Input by individual software control PM5D: 44 dB detented –34 dB to +10 dB 72 dB by software control –62 dB to +10 dB (1 dB step) Gain Control PM5D-RH: Peak Indicator Red LED is lit when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping Signal Indicator Green LED is lit when post HA level reaches 14 dB below nominal AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling ❏ Analog Input (2TR IN ANALOG1,2 [L,R]) ❏ STEREO A,B [L,R], MIX1-24, MATRIX1-8 Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x4 Connector XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced) Gain Switch +24 dBu (default) / +18 dBu DA Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling ❏ MONITOR OUT [L,C,R], CUE OUT ❏ Digital Input (2TR IN DIGITAL1-3) Connector AES/EBU XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) x2 (DIGITAL IN 1,2) SPDIF RCA PIN (DIGITAL IN 3) Sampling Rate Converter On/Off by software control (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio) ❏ Talkback Input Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced) Phantom Power +48V DC is supplied by software control Gain 50 dB fixed (pre level control) AD Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling Talkback Select TALKBACK IN and selected INPUT1-48 can be used simultaneously Output functions ❏ Analog Input (ST IN1-4 [L,R]) Global functions Function menu Peak Indicator Connector XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced) DA Converter 24bit linear, 128 times oversampling Level Control Analog potentiometer ❏ PHONES (x2) Connector TRS Level Control Analog potentiometer Input functions PM5D-RH: Appendices Gain Control Information shown in the display ❏ Analog Input (1-48) ❏ Digital Output (2TR OUT DIGITAL1-3) Connector AES/EBU XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced) x2 (DIGITAL OUT 1,2) SPDIF RCA PIN (DIGITAL OUT 3) Sampling Rate Converter On/Off by software control (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio) ❏ Oscillator Level 0 to –96dB (1dB step) On/Off Dedicated switch and software control Waveform MODE: Sine Wave 1ch, Sine Wave 2ch, Pink Noise, Burst Noise Sine Waveform: 100Hz, 1kHz, 10kHz Routing MIX1-24, MATRIX1-8, STEREO A,B (L,R) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 347 Input/output characteristics Input/output characteristics ❏ Analog Input Characteristics (PM5D) Input Terminals PAD GAIN Actual Load Impedance For Use With Nominal Input Level GAIN SW *4 –60dB 0 3kΩ INPUT 1-48 –16dB 50-600Ω Mics & 600Ω Lines — 26 –34dB ST IN1-4 [L,R] — Sensitivity *1 Nominal Max. Before Clip –80 dBu (0.0775 mV) –60 dBu (0.775 mV) –40 dBu (7.75 mV) –36 dBu (12.3 mV) –16 dBu (123 mV) +4 dBu (1.23 V) –10 dBu (245 mV) +10 dBu (2.45 V) +30 dBu (24.51 V) –54 dBu (1.55 mV) –34 dBu (15.5 mV) –14 dBu (155 mV) –10 dBu (245 mV) +10 dBu (2.54 V) +30 dBu (24.51 V) 4kΩ 600Ω Lines — — –16 dBu (123 mV) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +24 dB (default) –6 dBu (388 mV) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +18 dB –12 dBu (195 mV) –2 dBu (0.616 V) +18 dBu (6.16 V) — –60 dBu (0.775 mV) –50 dBu (2.45 mV) –30 dBu (24.5 mV) 10dB INSERT IN 1-48 — 10kΩ 600Ω Lines 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 [L,R] — 10kΩ 600Ω Lines TALKBACK — 3kΩ 50-600Ω Mics & 600Ω Lines Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 Phone Jack (TRS) (Balanced)*3 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 ❏ Analog Input Characteristics (PM5D-RH) Input Terminals GAIN For Use With Nominal 3kΩ 50-600Ω Mics & 600Ω Lines — 3kΩ 50-600Ω Mics & 600Ω Lines — 10kΩ 600Ω Lines –62dB INPUT 1-48 +10dB –62dB ST IN1-4 [L,R] +10dB 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 [L,R] — TALKBACK — Input Level Actual Load Impedance 3kΩ 50-600Ω Mics & 600Ω Lines GAIN SW *4 Sensitivity *1 Nominal Max. Before Clip –82 dBu (61.6 µV) –62 dBu (0.616 mV) –42 dBu (6.16 mV) –10 dBu (245 mV) +10 dBu (2.45 V) +30 dBu (24.5 V) –82dBu (61.6 µV) –62 dBu (0.616 mV) –42 dBu (6.16 mV) –10 dBu (245 mV) +10 dBu (2.45 V) +30 dBu (24.5 V) +24 dB (default) –6 dBu (388 mV) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +18 dB –12 dBu (195 mV) –2 dBu (0.616 V) +18 dBu (6.16 V) — –60 dBu (0.775 mV) –50 dBu (2.45 mV) –30 dBu (24.5 mV) Connector XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*2 *1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dBu (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.) *2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD) *3. Phone jacks are balanced. (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND ) *4. There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum input level. * In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms. * All input AD converters are 24bit linear, 128 times (@48 kHz) oversampling. * PM5D: +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT (1-48) XLR type connectors via each individual switch, and TALKBACK XLR type connectors via software switch. PM5D-RH: +48V DC (phantom power) is supplied to INPUT (1-48) and TALKBACK XLR type connectors via master mechanical switch and each individual software switch. 348 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Actual Source Impedance For Use With Nominal STEREO A,B [L,R] 150Ω 600Ω Lines MONITOR OUT [L,R,C] 150Ω 600Ω Lines CUE OUT [L,R] 150Ω 600Ω Lines MATRIX OUT 1-8 150Ω 600Ω Lines MIX OUT 1-24 150Ω 600Ω Lines INSERT OUT 1-48 150Ω 10kΩ Lines PHONES (x 2) 15Ω Nominal Max. Before Clip +24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) +24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) +24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) +24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) +24 dB (default) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) +18 dB –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) — +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) 75 mW*6 150 mW *6 150 mW 8Ω Phones — 40Ω Phones 65 mW Connector XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)*1 XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)*1 XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)*1 XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)*1 XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)*1 Phone Jack (TRS) (Balanced)*2 *5 Stereo Phone Jack (TRS) (Unbalanced)*3 XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD) Phone jacks are balanced. (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND) PHONES stereo phone jacks are unbalanced. (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND) There are switches inside the body to preset the maximum output level. INSERT OUTs are only provided for PM5D. The position of the level control is 10 dB lowered from Max. Global functions *1. *2. *3. *4. *5. *6. Output Level GAIN SW*4 Function menu Output Terminals Information shown in the display ❏ Analog Output Characteristics * In these specifications, 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms. * All output DA converters are 24bit, 128 times (@48 kHz) oversampling. Terminal 1 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU Format Data Length Level Connector AES/EBU 24bit RS422 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*1 XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*1 2 AES/EBU AES/EBU 24bit RS422 3 COAXIAL IEC-60958 24bit 0.5Vpp/75Ω CASCADE IN — RS422 RCA Pin Jack Output functions ❏ Digital Input Characteristics D-Sub Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female) ❏ Digital Output Characteristics 2TR OUT DIGITAL CASCADE OUT *1. *2. *3. *4. Format Data Length Level Connector *3 24bit RS422 XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)*4 XLR-3-32 Type (Balanced)*4 1 AES/EBU AES/EBU*1 Professional Use 2 AES/EBU AES/EBU*1 Professional Use 24bit*3 RS422 3 COAXIAL IEC-60958*2 Consumer Use 24bit*3 0.5Vpp/75Ω — RS422 RCA Pin Jack D-Sub Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female) Appendices Terminal Input functions *1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD) The channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1,2 is described on page 350. The channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3 is described on page 350. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced. (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD) PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 349 Input/output characteristics • Channel Status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1,2 byte bit Block Format 1 Mode 2-4 0 5 6-7 1 2 3 field name 0 fixed Emphasis Fs Lock Sampling Frequency variable 0-3 Channel Mode 4-7 Users Bit Management 0-2 Use of AUX 3-7 Source 0-7 Multi Channel 0-1 Digital Audio Reference Signal 3-6 7 fixed fixed 2 4 fixed/variable fixed — Sampling Frequency fixed variable Sampling Frequency Scan Flag data description 1 professional use 0 audio 0x4 off 0 lock 0x0 others 0x3 32kHz 0x2 44.1kHz 0x1 48kHz 0x1 2ch mode 0x0 — 0x1 24bits Audio Data 0x00 — 0x00 — 0x0 0 — 0x0 others 0x5 88.2kHz 0x4 96kHz fixed 0 — fixed/variable data • Channel Status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3 byte 0 bit field name 0 Block Format 1 Mode 2 Copy 3 Emphasis 0 1 5 0 — 6 audio enabled off fixed 4 description consumer use — 7 1 2 0-7 Category Code 0-3 Source Number 4-7 Channel Number 0-3 Sampling Frequency fixed 0x49 fixed 0x0 variable 3 4-5 6 7 4 0 1-3 4-7 350 Fs Accuracy fixed — Digital Mixer (L=1:original) 0xC 32kHz 0x0 44.1kHz 0x4 48kHz 0x8 — 0x1 88.2kHz 0x5 96kHz 0x0 Level II 0 — Maximum Audio Sample word length fixed 1 24bits Sample Word Length fixed 0x5 24bits Original Sampling Frequency PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual variable Reference section 0x3 32kHz 0xF 44.1kHz 0xB 48kHz 0x0 — 0xE 88.2kHz 0xA 96kHz Format Level B Type USB Connector IN MIDI THRU Connector USB 1.1 — MIDI DIN Connector 5P OUT TIME CODE IN WORD CLOCK SMPTE IN OUT SMPTE 0.3Vpp(Min)/10.0Vpp(Max), 10kΩ TTL/75Ω (ON/OFF) — TTL/75Ω GPI — KEYBOARD PS/2 MOUSE LAMP 1,2,3 D-Sub Connector 9P (Female) — DIN Connector 6P 2.5V - 11.5V — MEMORY CARD D-Sub Connector 9P (Male) RS422 RS422 REMOTE BNC Connector D-Sub Connector 25P (Female)*3 — HA REMOTE XLR-3-31 Type (Balanced)*1 — XLR-4-31 Type*2 PCMCIA (Compact Flash) *1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced. (1/Sleeve=GND, 2/Tip=HOT, 3/Ring=COLD) *2. 4pin=HOT, 3pin=COLD, Lamp rating 5 W, Voltage control by variable volume *3. Inputs: 4 channels, Outputs: 12 channels Input Pin: AD Converter (7bit, 128steps, Voltage Detection Range: 0-5V, Maximum Rating: 5V) Output Pin: Open Collector (Vmax=12V, Imax/pin=75 mA, GPO1-8: Total Imax=300 mA, GPO9-12: Total Imax=300 mA) Power Pin: Power Supply (Vp=5V, Imax/2 pin=500 mA) ❏ SLOT 1-4 Characteristics ADAT MY8-TD TASCAM MY8-AE AES/EBU MY4-AD MY8-AD MY4-DA MY8-AD24 MY8-AD96 MY8-DA96 MY8-AE96S MY8-AE96 MY16-AT ANALOG IN ANALOG OUT ANALOG IN ANALOG OUT AES/EBU Output 8 IN 8 OUT 4 IN 8 IN The Number Of Usable Cards Output functions MY8-AT Input — — 4 OUT 8 IN — 4 — 8 IN 8 OUT Input functions Function ADAT MY16-AE AES/EBU MY16-TD TASCAM MY16-C CobraNet ™ 16 IN 16 OUT 16 IN 16 OUT Appendices Card Name Function menu USB Global functions Terminal TO HOST Information shown in the display ❏ Control I/O Characteristics PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 351 Electrical characteristics Electrical characteristics All faders are nominal when measured. Output impedance of signal generator:150ohms ❏ Frequency Response Input Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz @20 Hz–20 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz Fs= 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz @20 Hz–40 kHz, referenced to the nominal output level @1 kHz Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. Max. Unit 0.0 0.5 dB Min. Typ. Max. Unit 2.0 4.0 6.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 STEREO A,B MIX OUT INPUT 1-48 MATRIX OUT 600Ω MONITOR OUT PM5D: PM5D-RH: GAIN: Max., PAD: Off GAIN: Max. –1.5 CUE OUT PHONES 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 STEREO A,B MONITOR OUT 8Ω –3.0 600Ω –1.5 ❏ Gain Error Input INPUT 1-48 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 @1 kHz Output RL STEREO A,B 600Ω STEREO A,B 600Ω Conditions PM5D: PM5D-RH: Input Level : –60 dBu, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off Input Level : –62 dBu, GAIN: Max. PM5D: PM5D-RH: Input Level : +10 dBu, GAIN: Min., PAD: On Input Level : +10 dBu, GAIN: Min. Input Level: +4 dBu STEREO A,B dBu MIX OUT Internal OSC MATRIX OUT Full Scale Output 600Ω MONITOR OUT CUE OUT PHONES INPUT 1-48 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 Output STEREO A,B STEREO A,B 24.0 24.5 –0.5 0 0.5 Min. Typ. Max. Full Scale Output, CUE Level Control: Max. 8Ω ❏ Total Harmonic Distortion Input 23.5 Full Scale Output, MONITOR Level Control: Max. –30 dBFs, PHONES Level Control: Max. Fs= 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz RL 600Ω 600Ω Conditions PM5D: PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Max. 0.1 PM5D: PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Min., PAD: On +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz, GAIN: Min. 0.05 +4 dBu @20 Hz–20 kHz 0.05 STEREO A,B % MIX OUT Internal OSC MATRIX OUT Full Scale Output @1 kHz 600Ω MONITOR OUT 0.02 Full Scale Output @1 kHz, MONITOR Level Control : Max. CUE OUT PHONES Unit Full Scale Output @1 kHz, CUE Level Control: Max. 8Ω Full Scale Output @1kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max. 0.2 * Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz ❏ Total Harmonic Distortion Input INPUT 1-48 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 Output STEREO A,B STEREO A,B Fs=88.2 kHz or 96 kHz RL 600Ω 600Ω Conditions Min. Typ. Max. PM5D: PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Max. 0.1 PM5D: PM5D-RH: +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Min., PAD: On +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz, GAIN: Min. 0.05 +4 dBu @20 Hz–40 kHz 0.05 STEREO A,B % MIX OUT Internal OSC MATRIX OUT Full Scale Output @1 kHz 600Ω MONITOR OUT 0.02 Full Scale Output @1 kHz, MONITOR Level Control : Max. CUE OUT PHONES Full Scale Output @1 kHz, CUE Level Control: Max. 8Ω Full Scale Output @1kHz, PHONES Level Control: Max. * Total Harmonic Distortion is measured with a 18 dB/octave filter @80 kHz 352 Unit PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 0.2 ❏ Hum & Noise Conditions Min. Typ. Master fader at nominal level and one INPUT fader at nominal level. INPUT 1-48 STEREO A,B 600Ω STEREO A,B 600Ω STEREO A,B Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Max., PAD: Off –64 PM5D-RH: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Max. –62 Master fader at nominal level and one INPUT fader at nominal level. PM5D: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min., PAD: On PM5D-RH: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min. –81 –64 Master fader at nominal level. Rs= 150Ω –81 dBu –76 Residual Output Noise, MIX Master Off 600Ω MONITOR OUT Residual Output Noise, MATRIX Master Off –86 Residual Output Noise, MONITOR Level Control Min. CUE OUT PHONES –76 Residual Output Noise, ST Master Off MIX OUT MATRIX OUT Unit Residual Output Noise, CUE Level Control Min. 8Ω Residual Output Noise, PHONES Level Control Min. Global functions 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 — PM5D: Master fader at nominal level and all INPUT1-48 faders at nominal level. PM5D: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min., PAD: On PM5D-RH: Rs= 150Ω, GAIN: Min. All INPUT Max. –128 EIN * Hum & Noise is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation. ❏ Dynamic Range Input INPUT 1-48 Output RL Conditions Min. Typ. PM5D: AD + DA, GAIN: Min., PAD: On Fs= 44.1/48 kHz 108 PM5D-RH: AD + DA, GAIN: Min. Fs= 88.2/96 kHz 106 STEREO A,B Max. Unit STEREO A,B MIX OUT — MATRIX OUT Information shown in the display RL Function menu Output 600Ω dB DA Converter 110 MONITOR OUT CUE OUT Output functions Input EIN= Equivalent Input Noise ❏ Input Indicator Level Input Output INPUT 1-48 INSERT OUT ST IN 1-4 Min. Typ. Max. PEAK Red LED: ON Condition 19 21 23 SIGNAL Green LED: ON –12 –10 –8 PEAK Red LED: ON 19 21 23 SIGNAL Green LED: ON –12 –10 –8 Unit dBu Input functions * Dynamic range is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation. Parameter External Clock Frequency Range Conditions 39.69 Double Rate 79.39 Word Clock : Int 44.1kHz Frequency Min. Normal Rate Word Clock : Int 48kHz Word Clock : Int 88.2kHz Word Clock : Int 96kHz Typ. Max. Appendices ❏ Sampling Frequency Unit 50.88 101.76 44.1 kHz 48 88.2 96 Word Clock : Int 44.1kHz Internal Clock Accuracy Word Clock : Int 48kHz Word Clock : Int 88.2kHz 50 ppm 5 ns Word Clock : Int 96kHz Word Clock : Int 44.1kHz Jitter Word Clock : Int 48kHz Word Clock : Int 88.2kHz Word Clock : Int 96kHz PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 353 Other Functions Other Functions ❏ Libraries ❏ Output Function Name Number Total Function Parameter Scene Memory Preset 1 + User 500 501 Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz Input Patch Library Preset 1 + User 99 100 Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB Output Patch Library Preset 1 + User 99 100 Input Channel Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 Output Channel Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 Input EQ Library Preset 40 + User 159 199 Output EQ Library Preset 3 + User 196 199 GATE Library Preset 4 + User 195 199 COMP Library Preset 36 + User 163 199 Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/Compander S Effect Library Preset 54 + User 145 199 Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB GEQ Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 HA Library Preset 1 + User 199 200 8Band Equalizer (Matrix: 4band) Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Low Shelving (Low Band) High Shelving, LPF (High Band) Type I/Type II Insert Compressor Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Fader/Post On Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec ❏ Input Function Gain= 0 dB to +18 dB Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Function Phase Parameter Normal/Reverse MS Decode On, S-Gain Attenuator –96 to +24 dB Slope= 12 dB/Oct HPF Frequency= 20 Hz to 600 Hz Time = 0.0 msec to 1000 msec Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB On On/Off DCA Group 2 Groups Mute Group 8 Groups Matrix Send Point: Pre Fader/Post Fader/Post On Mix to Matrix Stereo to Matrix Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB Frequency= 20 Hz to 20 kHz Gain= –18 dB to +18 dB 4Band Equalizer Input Delay Output Port Att ❏ Processor Low Shelving (Low Band) High Shelving, LPF (High Band) Function Type I/Type II Insert Insert Point: Pre EQ/Post EQ/Pre Delay/Post Fader Direct Out Direct Out Point: Pre HPF/Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On 31 bands x 12 systems Effects Stereo In/Stereo Out multi effector x 8 systems Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Hold= 0.02 msec to 1.96 sec Decay= 5 msec to 42.3 sec Range= –70 dB to 0 dB Key In: Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix21-24/ Ch1-STIN4R (8ch block) Key In Filter: HPF/LPF/BPF Type: Comp/Expander/Compander H/ Compander S Threshold= –54 dB to 0 dB Compressor Ratio= 1:1 to ∞:1 Attack= 0 msec to 120 msec Release= 5 msec to 42.3 sec Gain= 0 dB to +18 dB Knee= Hard to 5 (soft) Input Delay Time= 0.0 msec to 1000 msec Fader Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB On On/Off DCA Group 8 Groups Mute Group 8 Groups 24 sends Fix/Variable can be set each two mixes Mix Send Mix Send Point: Pre EQ/Pre Fader/Post On/Post TO ST Level: 1024 steps, ∞, –138 dB to +10 dB 354 LCR Pan CSR= 0% to 100% Surround Pan 3-1, 5.1, 6.1 panning support PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Parameter GEQ Type: Gate/Ducking Noise Gate 0 dB to –9 dB Q= 0.10 to 10.0 Reference section ❏ CASCADE OUT Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin 1 GND 35 GND 1 GND 35 GND 2 Input 1-2(+) 36 Input 1-2(–) 2 Output 1-2(+) 36 Output 1-2(–) 3 Input 3-4(+) 37 Input 3-4(–) 3 Output 3-4(+) 37 Output 3-4(–) 4 Input 5-6(+) 38 Input 5-6(–) 4 Output 5-6(+) 38 Output 5-6(–) 5 Input 7-8(+) 39 Input 7-8(–) 5 Output 7-8(+) 39 Output 7-8(–) 6 Input 9-10(+) 40 Input 9-10(–) 6 Output 9-10(+) 40 Output 9-10(–) 7 Input 11-12(+) 41 Input 11-12(–) 7 Output 11-12(+) 41 Output 11-12(–) 8 Input 13-14(+) 42 Input 13-14(–) 8 Output 13-14(+) 42 Output 13-14(–) 9 Input 15-16(+) 43 Input 15-16(–) 9 Output 15-16(+) 43 Output 15-16(–) 10 DTR In(+) 44 DTR In(–) 10 DTR Out(+) 44 DTR Out(–) 11 RTS Out(+) 45 RTS Out(–) 11 RTS In(+) 45 RTS In(–) 12 GND 46 GND 12 GND 46 GND 13 Word Clock In(+) 47 Word Clock In(–) 13 Word Clock Out(+) 47 Word Clock Out(–) 14 Word Clock Out(+) 48 Word Clock Out(–) 14 Word Clock In(+) 48 Word Clock In(–) 15 Control In(+) 49 Control In(–) 15 Control Out(+) 49 Control Out(–) 16 Control Out(+) 50 Control Out(–) 16 Control In(+) 50 Control In(–) 17 GND 51 ID6 In 17 GND 51 ID6 Out 18 GND 52 ID6 Out 18 GND 52 ID6 In 19 Input 17-18(+) 53 Input 17-18(–) 19 Output 17-18(+) 53 Output 17-18(–) 20 Input 19-20(+) 54 Input 19-20(–) 20 Output 19-20(+) 54 Output 19-20(–) 21 Input 21-22(+) 55 Input 21-22(–) 21 Output 21-22(+) 55 Output 21-22(–) 22 Input 23-24(+) 56 Input 23-24(–) 22 Output 23-24(+) 56 Output 23-24(–) 23 Input 25-26(+) 57 Input 25-26(–) 23 Output 25-26(+) 57 Output 25-26(–) 24 Input 27-28(+) 58 Input 27-28(–) 24 Output 27-28(+) 58 Output 27-28(–) 25 Input 29-30(+) 59 Input 29-30(–) 25 Output 29-30(+) 59 Output 29-30(–) 26 Input 31-32(+) 60 Input 31-32(–) 26 Output 31-32(+) 60 Output 31-32(–) 27 ID0 In 61 ID1 In 27 ID0 Out 61 ID1 Out 28 ID2 In 62 ID3 In 28 ID2 Out 62 ID3 Out 29 ID4 In 63 ID5 In 29 ID4 Out 63 ID5 Out 30 ID0 Out 64 ID1 Out 30 ID0 In 64 ID1 In 31 ID2 Out 65 ID3 Out 31 ID2 In 65 ID3 In 32 ID4 Out 66 ID5 Out 32 ID4 In 66 ID5 in 33 MSB In 67 2Ch/Line In 33 MSB Out 67 2Ch/Line Out 34 FG 68 FG 34 FG 68 FG 1 5 6 5 9 1 9 ❏ HA REMOTE Signal Function menu ❏ CASCADE IN Global functions 37 36 35 Output functions 68 Input functions 3 2 1 Appendices 34 Information shown in the display Pin Assignment 6 ❏ RS422 REMOTE Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name 1 GND 6 RX+ 1 GND 6 GND 2 RX– 7 RTS 2 RX– 7 RX+ 3 TX– 8 CTS 3 TX+ 8 TX– 4 TX+ 9 GND 4 GND 9 GND 5 N.C 5 N.C PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section 355 Dimensions 13 3 2 1 4 8 14 15 20 7 13 19 25 6 12 18 23 1 2 3 9 5 11 16 17 22 10 21 16 15 14 ❏ GPI ❏ DC POWER INPUT Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name 1 GPO1 14 GPO2 1 +24V 13 GND 2 GPO3 15 GPO4 2 +24V 14 GND 3 GPO5 16 GPO6 3 +24V 15 GND 4 GPO7 17 GPO8 4 +24V 16 GND 5 GND 18 GND 5 +24V 17 GND 6 GND 19 GND 6 +24V 18 GND 7 GND 20 GND 7 +24V 19 CAUTION(+) 8 GND 21 +5V 8 +24V 20 CAUTION(–) 9 +5V 22 GPI1 9 +24V 21 DETECT A 10 GPI2 23 GPI3 10 GND 22 DETECT B 11 GPI4 24 GPO9 11 GND 23 DETECT GND 12 GPO10 25 GPO11 12 GND 13 GPO12 Frame GND * For information on maximum permissible current, refer to the page 351. Dimensions PM5D PM5D-RH 260 260 1450 1551 865 950 283 271 865 950 283 271 1450 1551 Unit: mm * Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. European models Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2. Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4 356 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section MIDI Implementation Chart YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console] Model: PM5D/PM5D-RH Function... Date: 30-Apr-2004 MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.0 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Channel Default Changed 1–16 1–16 1–16 1–16 Memorized Mode Default Messages Altered X X ************** 1, 3 X X Memorized Note Number :True Voice X ************** 0–127 X Velocity Note On Note Off X X O O After Touch Key’s Ch’s X X X X X X O O O O O O O O Pitch Bend Control Change Prog Change 0,32 6,38 98,99 1-31,33-98, 102-119 :True# System Exclusive O 0–127 ************** O 0–127 0–500 O *1 O *1 System Common :Song Pos :Song Sel :Tune X X X X X X System Real Time :Clock :Commands X X O X Aux Messages :All Sound Off :Reset All Cntrls :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset X X X X X X X X X X O O Effect Control Bank Select Data Entry NRPN LSB,MSB Assignable Cntrl Assignable Effect Control *1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC. Notes For MIDI remote and event, all messages can be transmitted. MTC quarter frame message is recognized. Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO O: Yes X: No Index Index Symbols ø ................................................... 59 ø/ATT 1-48 ................................. 262 ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN................... 262 Numerics 2TR I/O....................................... 215 A Accessing a screen ......................... 23 AD IN section ............................... 35 Add-On Effects ........................... 109 Adjusting the input gain (PM5D-RH) ............. 148 Adjusting the output gain ............ 148 ADVANCED mode .............. 193, 196 Analog audio connections ............. 27 Analog output connections............ 28 Appendices.................................. 290 Assign ASSIGN MODE section............ 73 Assigning a name...................... 26 Assigning MIDI messages ....... 117 GEQ ASSIGN ......................... 157 ATTENUATION........................... 59 AUTO CAPTURE ....................... 162 Auto Store function ....................... 83 B BASIC mode ........................ 192, 196 Basic operation.............................. 19 BLANK SKIP............................... 160 Block Diagram .......... End of Manual Boxes ............................................ 19 BPM ........................................... 153 BUSY indicator ........................... 150 Buttons ................................... 19, 25 C Calibrating the GPI IN ports........ 125 Calibration .................................. 147 Cascade ....................................... 204 BI-DIRECTION ..................... 203 Cascade connections............... 143 CASCADE IN PORT SELECT 202 Cascade master ....................... 143 CASCADE MODE ................. 203 CASCADE OUT PORT SOURCE SELECT .... 203 Cascade slave .......................... 144 Source when cascade connected ................................. 202 CASCADE FROM ....................... 205 CASCADE/Fs .............................. 149 CH 1-12 ...................................... 267 CH 1-24 ............................... 258, 270 358 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual CH 1-24 layer ................................ 37 CH 13-24 .................................... 267 CH 25-36 .................................... 267 CH 25-48 .................................... 270 CH 25-48 layer .............................. 37 CH 37-48 .................................... 267 CH COPY ............................ 249, 289 CH to MIX ........................... 104, 274 CH VIEW ............................ 245, 286 Channel Library List .................... 334 Channel parameter behavior when paired ....................... 335 CHANNEL SELECT ...................... 58 Channel strip...................... 37, 39, 53 INPUT channel ........................ 37 ST IN/FX RTN channel ............ 39 STEREO A/B channel ............... 53 Channel structure .......................... 12 Character palette ........................... 19 COMP LIBRARY ........... 63, 232, 269 COMP LINK ASSIGN .... 77, 237, 273 COMP PARAM.................... 229, 266 Compressor........................... 60, 102 Operations ............................... 63 Compressor Library List .............. 292 Compressor Link ........................... 77 Connecting to a computer ........... 146 Connections .................................. 27 Analog audio connections......... 27 Analog output connections ....... 28 Digital input/output connections ................................... 29 Console Lock............................... 142 Control change parameter assignments........................ 314 Control changes .......................... 115 CSV EXPORT mode.................... 193 CSV IMPORT mode ................... 197 Cue ............................................... 91 Cue function ............................ 96 CUE mode ............................... 94 CUE section ....................... 91, 94 Cue/Solo functions ................... 94 Solo function ............................ 96 CUE FUNCTION........................ 218 CUE/SOLO ................................. 217 CUE FUNCTION................... 218 INPUT SOLO SAFE ............... 219 OUTPUT SOLO SAFE ........... 219 SOLO ON/OFF ...................... 217 Cursor ..................................... 19, 23 D Daisy-chain connections................ 31 Data Entry ..................................... 20 DCA.............................................. 73 DCA CUE indicator .................... 150 DCA GROUP ASSIGN ......... 234, 271 DCA Groups ........................... 73, 74 Reference section DELAY .......................................... 58 Digital input/output connections ... 29 Dimensions ................................. 356 DIMM indicator .......................... 150 DIRECT OUT PATCH .......... 72, 253 DIRECT RECALL........................ 151 DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN .......... 161 Direct Recall function .................... 83 Directly outputting ........................ 72 DISPLAY ACCESS .................. 20, 23 DISPLAY ACCESS section ........... 151 Distribution box ............................ 31 DITHER...................................... 207 Divergence .................................. 136 DME CONTROL ........................ 182 Drag and drop ............................... 22 Dynamics Parameters .................. 294 E Effect Library Program Change Table ........... 308 Effects ......................................... 103 Add-On Effects ....................... 109 Basic operations...................... 106 Editing ................................... 106 EFFECT ASSIGN .................... 154 EFFECT CUE indicator .......... 150 EFFECT functions .................. 152 EFFECT LIBRARY.................. 155 Effect Library List ................... 297 EFFECT PARAM .......... 104, 105, 106, 152 Effects Parameters .................. 298 Freeze effect ............................ 109 Inserting into a channel .......... 105 Recalling................................. 106 Storing ................................... 107 Tap Tempo function............... 108 Using via a MIX bus ............... 104 Effects and tempo synchronization ................................. 307 Electrical characteristics ............... 352 Encoder function ........................... 41 Encoder mode ............................. 150 EQ (Equalizer) ...................... 61, 261 Operations ............................... 65 EQ Library List ............................ 290 EQ Link......................................... 77 EQ LINK ASSIGN .......... 77, 236, 272 EQ PARAM ......................... 225, 260 EQ STIN/FXRTN ........................ 261 Error Messages ............................ 344 EVENT indicator ......................... 150 EVENT LIST ............................... 161 AUTO CAPTURE .................. 162 DISABLE ........................ 149, 161 ENABLE ......................... 149, 161 EVENT RECALL .................... 162 EVENT TRIGGER .................. 162 G Gain .............................................. 59 Adjusting ............................... 148 Gain reduction ....................... 102 Gate ............................................ 102 Operations ............................... 64 GATE LIBRARY..................... 64, 268 GATE Library List ....................... 291 GATE PARAM ............................ 264 GEQ GEQ ASSIGN ......................... 157 GEQ function......................... 156 GEQ LIBRARY....................... 158 GEQ PARAM .................. 110, 156 Global ............................ 20, 151, 152 EFFECT functions .................. 152 GEQ function......................... 156 METER function .................... 209 MIDI REMOTE function ....... 171 MON/CUE function .............. 212 SCENE function ..................... 159 SYS/W.CLOCK function ........ 199 UTILITY function .................. 186 GLOBAL PASTE .................... 89, 170 Global Paste function .................... 89 GPI ............................................. 177 Calibrating ............................. 125 General Purpose Interface ...... 123 GPI IN ................................... 123 I I/O card ........................................ 29 Indicator ..................................... 150 Initializing ................................... 147 Input .............................. 20, 151, 252 ø/ATT 1-48 ............................ 262 ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN.............. 262 ø/EQ function ........................ 260 CH 1-12 ................................. 267 CH 1-24 .......................... 258, 270 CH 13-24 ............................... 267 CH 25-36 ............................... 267 CH 25-48 ............................... 270 CH 37-48 ............................... 267 CH COPY .............................. 289 CH LIBRARY ......................... 289 CH to MIX ............................. 274 CH VIEW .............................. 286 COMP LIBRARY ................... 269 COMP LINK ASSIGN ............ 273 COMP PARAM...................... 266 DCA GROUP ASSIGN ........... 271 DCA/GROUP function .......... 271 DELAY function..................... 270 DIRECT OUT PATCH ........... 253 EQ ......................................... 261 EQ LIBRARY ......................... 263 EQ LINK ASSIGN .................. 272 EQ PARAM............................ 260 EQ STIN/FXRTN ................... 261 FADER VIEW ........................ 288 FIX ASSIGN VIEW ................ 282 GATE LIBRARY ..................... 268 GATE PARAM ....................... 264 GATE/COMP function........... 264 HA LIBRARY ......................... 260 HA/INSERT function ............. 258 INSERT.................................. 259 INSERT PATCH .................... 254 INSERT STIN ........................ 259 INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT ................................. 256 LCR ....................................... 283 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display Function menu HA (Head Amp) .................... 36, 206 HA indicator ............................... 150 HA LIBRARY ............... 208, 225, 260 HORIZONTAL PAIR ............. 45, 200 HPF (High Pass Filter) .................. 61 Operations ............................... 65 Global functions H Output functions Fade function ................................ 87 FADE TIME ........................... 87, 167 FADER ASSIGN.......................... 197 Fader Assign function .................. 139 Fader calibration ......................... 147 FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section ........................ 40 FADER MODE .................... 150, 151 FADER MODE section................ 139 FADER START ........................... 179 FADER VIEW ...................... 249, 288 Faders ...................................... 19, 25 FADING indicator ...................... 150 Features ........................................ 10 FIX ASSIGN VIEW ..................... 282 FIXED type MIX bus ..................... 44 FRAME RATE............................. 163 Freeze effect ................................ 109 Front panel ................................... 18 Function Name ........................... 149 Function parameters ................... 150 FX RTN channels 1–4.................... 34 FX RTN layer ......................... 39, 151 M/S ........................................ 285 MIX SEND VIEW .................. 280 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN ........ 272 NAME.................................... 257 PAN/ROUTING function....... 274 PATCH .................................. 252 PATCH function .................... 252 PATCH LIBRARY .................. 257 SIGNAL FLOW ...................... 287 ST IN .............................. 267, 270 STIN/FXRTN ......................... 258 SURR PARAM ....................... 283 SURR VIEW........................... 285 VIEW function ....................... 286 Input a character ........................... 26 Assigning a name ...................... 26 INPUT CH layer ......................... 151 Input channel ....... 12, 33, 258, 267, 270 AD IN section........................... 35 Channel strip ...................... 37, 39 FADER FLIP/ENCODER MODE section ........................ 40 FX RTN channels 1–4 ............... 34 Input channels 1–48 ................. 33 ST IN channels 1–4................... 33 INPUT CUE indicator ................. 150 INPUT DCA/GROUP function ... 271 COMP LINK ASSIGN ............ 273 DCA GROUP ASSIGN ........... 271 EQ LINK ASSIGN .................. 272 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN ........ 272 INPUT DELAY function ............. 270 Input Gain Reduction.................. 211 INPUT GATE/COMP function ... 264 COMP LIBRARY.................... 269 COMP PARAM ...................... 266 GATE LIBRARY ..................... 268 GATE PARAM ....................... 264 Input channel ......................... 267 ST IN ..................................... 267 INPUT GR ........................... 102, 211 INPUT HA/INSERT function ...... 258 CH 1-24 ................................. 258 HA LIBRARY ......................... 260 Input channel ......................... 258 INSERT .................................. 259 STIN/FXRTN ......................... 258 INPUT METER ........................... 209 INPUT ø/EQ function ................. 260 ø/ATT 1-48 ............................ 262 ø/ATT STIN/FXRTN .............. 262 EQ ......................................... 261 EQ PARAM ............................ 260 EQ STIN/FXRTN ................... 261 INPUT EQ LIBRARY ............. 263 Input patch ................................... 66 INPUT PATCH function ............. 252 DIRECT OUT PATCH ........... 253 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY ...... 257 INSERT PATCH .................... 254 INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT ................................. 256 NAME.................................... 257 INPUT SOLO SAFE .................... 219 Input functions F GPI IN MONITOR ................ 178 GPI indicator ......................... 150 GPI OUT ........................ 126, 178 TALLY ............................ 127, 179 USER DEFINED KEYS ........... 127 Graphic EQ ................................. 110 Patching ................................. 110 Group ........................................... 57 Cue and Solo ............................ 95 Grouping ...................................... 73 ASSIGN MODE section............ 73 DCA......................................... 73 Appendices MOVE DOWN ...................... 163 MOVE UP ............................. 162 Events .................................. 113, 115 Exchanging the fader and encoder functions .................... 41 EXTERNAL CUE indicator ......... 150 External user interface ................... 21 359 Index INPUT VIEW function ............... 286 CH COPY .............................. 289 CH VIEW .............................. 286 FADER VIEW ........................ 288 INPUT CH LIBRARY............. 289 SIGNAL FLOW ...................... 287 Input/output characteristics......... 348 INSERT....................................... 259 INSERT IN MIX 1-24.................. 224 INSERT PATCH ............ 70, 221, 254 INSERT POINT .......................... 222 INSERT STIN ............................. 259 INSERT/DIRECT OUT POINT .............. 70, 72, 105, 256 Inserting External device ......................... 69 Internal effect into a channel... 105 Insert-out and insert-in Patching ................................... 70 Internal memory Initializing .............................. 147 K KEY IN CUE indicator ................ 150 Keyboard ...................................... 21 Knobs ..................................... 19, 25 L LATCH ....................................... 176 Layer ....................................... 37, 39 [CH 1-24]/[CH 25-48] keys ...... 37 [ST IN 1-4]/[FX RTN 1-4] keys 39 INPUT CH............................. 151 ST IN/FX RTN ....................... 151 LCR ..................................... 242, 283 LCR [B] indicator........................ 150 LCR indicator.............................. 150 LEARN ....................................... 176 Level Diagram ........... End of Manual LFE ............................................. 136 Library COMP LIBRARY ................... 269 EFFECT LIBRARY ................. 155 GATE LIBRARY ..................... 268 GEQ LIBRARY ....................... 158 HA LIBRARY .................. 225, 260 INPUT CH LIBRARY............. 289 INPUT EQ LIBRARY ............. 263 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY...... 257 OUTPUT CH LIBRARY ......... 251 OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY .. 223 Linking ......................................... 73 ASSIGN MODE section............ 73 Compressor Link ...................... 77 EQ Link.................................... 77 LOAD ......................................... 195 ADVANCED mode ................ 196 BASIC mode .......................... 196 CSV IMPORT mode .............. 197 Loading ....................................... 130 360 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual M M/S ............................................. 285 Manual organize............................ 13 MATRIX channels 1–8 .................. 48 MATRIX section ........................... 55 MATRIX/ST function.................. 238 LCR........................................ 242 MATRIX/ST ROUTING......... 238 MIX to MATRIX VIEW ......... 240 SURR SETUP ......................... 244 MATRIX/STEREO ....... 227, 231, 233 Memory cards ............................. 128 METER function ......................... 209 INPUT GR ............................. 211 INPUT METER ...................... 209 OUTPUT GR ......................... 211 OUTPUT METER .................. 210 Meter section........................ 100, 150 Meters ......................................... 100 Metering point ....................... 101 MIDI........................................... 113 Assigning MIDI messages ....... 117 MIDI events ........................... 122 MIDI remote channels............ 121 MIDI CTRL CHANGE ......... 115, 174 MIDI Data Format ...................... 336 MIDI EVENT .............................. 159 MIDI Implementation Chart ....... 357 MIDI indicator ............................ 150 MIDI PGM CHANGE .......... 113, 173 MIDI REMOTE ................... 117, 175 MIDI REMOTE function ............ 171 DME CONTROL ................... 182 FADER START ...................... 179 GPI ........................................ 177 LATCH .................................. 176 LEARN................................... 176 MMC .............................. 180, 181 RS422 .............................. 180, 181 TALLY ................................... 179 TRANSPORT ......................... 181 MIDI SETUP............................... 171 mini-YGDAI I/O cards .................. 29 MIX 1-24 ..................... 227, 231, 233 MIX channel output signals ........... 52 MIX channels 1–24........................ 47 MIX section........................... 49, 150 MIX SEND VIEW ....................... 280 MIX to MATRIX VIEW .............. 240 MIXER SETUP...................... 45, 200 PAIR MODE .......................... 200 MMC ................................... 180, 181 MON/CUE function.................... 212 2TR I/O .................................. 215 CUE/SOLO ............................ 217 MONITOR ............................ 216 OSCILLATOR ........................ 213 TALKBACK ........................... 212 Monitor ........................... 91, 93, 216 CUE mode ............................... 94 SOLO mode ............................. 94 MONITOR sections ...................... 91 Mouse ........................................... 21 Reference section MOVE DOWN ........................... 163 MOVE UP ................................... 162 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN ..... 235, 272 Mute Groups ........................... 73, 75 MUTE MASTER ......................... 151 N NAME......................................... 257 NEXT SCENE/NEXT EVENT ..... 149 NOISE GATE ................................ 59 NRPN parameter assignments ..... 331 O OFFSET TIME ............................ 163 Operating section .......................... 10 Option card ................................... 30 types of I/O card ....................... 29 OSC indicator ............................. 150 OSCILLATOR .................. 97, 99, 213 Output ........................... 20, 151, 220 CH COPY .............................. 249 CH LIBRARY ......................... 251 CH VIEW............................... 245 COMP function...................... 229 COMP LIBRARY.................... 232 COMP LINK ASSIGN ............ 237 COMP PARAM ...................... 229 DCA GROUP ASSIGN ........... 234 DCA/GROUP function........... 234 DELAY function ..................... 233 EQ function............................ 225 EQ LIBRARY.......................... 228 EQ LINK ASSIGN .................. 236 EQ PARAM ............................ 225 FADER VIEW ........................ 249 HA LIBRARY ......................... 225 INSERT function .................... 224 INSERT IN MATRIX/STEREO/MONITOR ...... 224 INSERT IN MIX 1-24 ............. 224 INSERT PATCH .................... 221 INSERT POINT ..................... 222 LCR........................................ 242 MATRIX/ST function ............. 238 MATRIX/ST ROUTING ......... 238 MATRIX/STEREO .................. 227, 231, 233 MIX 1-24................. 227, 231, 233 MIX to MATRIX VIEW.......... 240 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN ........ 235 PATCH .................................. 220 PATCH function .................... 220 PATCH LIBRARY .................. 223 SIGNAL FLOW ...................... 247 SURR SETUP ......................... 244 VIEW function ....................... 245 Output channel ....................... 12, 47 Channel strip ............................ 53 MATRIX channels 1–8 ............. 48 MATRIX section....................... 55 MIX channels 1–24 ................... 47 MIX section .............................. 49 STEREO A/B channels .............. 47 P PAIR MODE .......................... 45, 200 Pairing Enabling/disabling.................... 45 Pairing MIX channels ............... 51 PAN/ROUTING function ........... 274 CH to MIX ............................. 274 FIX ASSIGN VIEW ................ 282 LCR ....................................... 283 M/S ........................................ 285 MIX SEND VIEW .................. 280 SURR PARAM ....................... 283 SURR VIEW .......................... 285 Panels ........................................... 14 Parameter Lock ........................... 142 Parameters that can be assigned to control changes......... 312 PASTE MODE .............................. 89 Patch............................................. 66 Patching Insert-out and insert-in ............ 70 Pattern ........................................ 136 Phantom power ............................ 36 S SAVE ................................... 128, 192 ADVANCED mode ................ 193 BASIC mode .......................... 192 CSV EXPORT mode............... 193 Scene...................................... 79, 159 Restoring to the default state ..... 32 Scene memory ........................ 79, 149 Auto Store function .................. 83 Basic operation ......................... 81 BLANK SKIP.......................... 160 DIRECT RECALL ASSIGN..... 161 Direct Recall function ............... 83 EVENT LIST .......................... 161 Fade function ........................... 87 FADE TIME ........................... 167 GLOBAL PASTE .................... 170 Global Paste function ............... 89 GPI OUT CONTROL............. 160 MIDI EVENT ......................... 159 PREVIEW mode ...................... 82 Program Change Table ........... 308 RECALL SAFE........................ 166 Recall Safe function .................. 86 Recalling .................................. 82 REMOTE TRANSPORT......... 160 SCENE ................................... 159 SCENE FUNCTION............... 160 SCENE function ..................... 159 SCENE MEMORY section ........ 80 SELECTIVE RECALL ............. 164 Selective Recall function ........... 84 Storing ..................................... 81 TRACKING RECALL ............. 169 Tracking Recall function ........... 88 Scroll............................................. 24 Scroll bar ....................................... 20 SECURITY .................................. 198 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section Information shown in the display Function menu Rear panel ..................................... 16 RECALL SAFE ....................... 86, 166 Recall Safe function ....................... 86 Reference section......................... 149 Remote control ........................... 113 Control changes ..................... 115 MIDI...................................... 113 MIDI Remote ......................... 117 MIDI remote channels............ 121 Program changes .................... 113 Restoring to the default state.......... 32 RS422................................... 180, 181 RS422 indicator ........................... 150 Global functions R Security functions ........................ 141 Console Lock.......................... 142 Parameter Lock ...................... 142 Selected channel .................... 57, 150 Editing parameters ................... 62 SELECTED CHANNEL section 57 Selecting the word clock master ..... 31 SELECTIVE RECALL ............ 84, 164 Selective Recall function ................ 84 Sending signals from the MATRIX section to output jacks ................ 55 from the STEREO A/B channels to MATRIX buses 54 from the STEREO A/B channels to output jacks ..... 54 to a MIX bus ............................ 43 to MATRIX buses ..................... 50 to the STEREO bus ............. 42, 51 Setup ............................................. 27 Word clock............................... 31 Shown in the display.................... 149 SIGNAL FLOW .................... 247, 287 Signals sent to a VARI type MIX bus............ 52 to MATRIX buses ..................... 56 Solo function ................................. 96 SOLO indicator ........................... 150 SOLO mode .................................. 94 SOLO ON/OFF ........................... 217 Specifications .............................. 346 ST IN ................................... 267, 270 ST IN channels 1–4........................ 33 ST IN layer ............................ 39, 151 START OFFSET button ............... 168 START TIME .............................. 163 STEREO ........................................ 60 STEREO A/B channels ................... 47 STEREO B................................... 201 STIN/FXRTN .............................. 258 Surround SURR PARAM ....................... 283 SURR SETUP ......................... 244 SURR VIEW........................... 285 Surround mode ............ 132, 133, 201 Surround pan ....................... 132, 201 Divergence ............................. 136 LFE ........................................ 136 Notes...................................... 137 Pattern ................................... 136 Surround buses ...................... 133 Synchronization ............................ 12 SYS/W.CLOCK function ............. 199 CASCADE .............................. 204 DITHER................................. 207 HA (Head Amp)..................... 206 HA LIBRARY ......................... 208 MIXER SETUP....................... 200 OUTPUT PORT ATT............. 207 WORD CLOCK ..................... 199 Output functions ................................. 234 COMP LINK ASSIGN ............ 237 DCA GROUP ASSIGN ........... 234 EQ LINK ASSIGN .................. 236 MUTE GROUP ASSIGN ........ 235 OUTPUT DELAY function ......... 233 OUTPUT EQ function ................ 225 EQ PARAM ........................... 225 MATRIX/STEREO ................. 227 MIX 1-24 ............................... 227 OUTPUT EQ LIBRARY ......... 228 Output Gain Reduction ............... 211 OUTPUT GR ....................... 102, 211 OUTPUT INSERT function ........ 224 HA LIBRARY ......................... 225 INSERT IN MIX 1-24............. 224 OUTPUT METER....................... 210 Output patch ................................ 67 OUTPUT PATCH function......... 220 INSERT PATCH .................... 221 INSERT POINT ..................... 222 OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY .. 223 OUTPUT PORT ATT ................. 207 Output signals from MATRIX channels ..................... 56 OUTPUT SOLO SAFE ................ 219 OUTPUT VIEW function ........... 245 CH COPY .............................. 249 CH VIEW .............................. 245 FADER VIEW ........................ 249 OUTPUT CH LIBRARY......... 251 SIGNAL FLOW ...................... 247 Overview of the PM5D .................. 10 Phase............................................. 59 Pin Assignment ........................... 355 PM5D, PM5D-RH model .............. 11 Pointer .......................................... 19 PREFERENCE 1/2 ....................... 186 PRESENT TIME ......................... 149 PREVIEW indicator ...................... 82 PREVIEW mode ........................... 82 Program changes ......................... 113 Input functions 229 232 229 231 231 150 Appendices OUTPUT COMP function .......... COMP LIBRARY ................... COMP PARAM ..................... MATRIX/STEREO ................. MIX 1-24 ............................... OUTPUT CUE indicator ............. OUTPUT DCA/GROUP function 361 Index T Tabs ....................................... 19, 150 TALKBACK ..................... 97, 98, 212 TALKBACK/OSCILLATOR sections ................................... 97 TALLY ........................................ 179 TAP TEMPO BPM....................................... 153 Tap Tempo function ................... 108 Tapping ........................................ 22 TB indicator ................................ 150 TIME CODE ........................ 149, 163 TIME CODE SETUP ................... 163 Top panel ...................................... 14 TRACKING indicator ................. 150 TRACKING RECALL ............. 88, 169 Tracking Recall function................ 88 TRANSPORT .............................. 181 Troubleshooting.......................... 345 U USB USB TO HOST connector ...... 146 USE AS CENTER BUS ......... 201, 216 USE AS STEREO BUS .......... 201, 216 USER DEFINE ............................ 189 USER DEFINED KEY BANK....... 151 USER DEFINED KEYS ......... 138, 179 USER DEFINED section.............. 138 User interface ................................ 19 Using an internal effect via a MIX bus ........................... 104 UTILITY function ....................... 186 FADER ASSIGN ..................... 197 LOAD .................................... 195 PREFERENCE 1/2 .................. 186 SAVE ..................................... 192 SECURITY ............................. 198 USER DEFINE ....................... 189 V VARI type MIX bus ....................... 44 VERTICAL PAIR ................... 45, 200 W Warning Messages ....................... 343 Word clock ...................... 12, 31, 199 362 PM5D/PM5D-RH Owner’s Manual Reference section PM5D/PM5D-RH Block Diagram PM5D(NonRecallable HA) SIGNAL AD ST IN 1-4 L GATE KEYIN METER Keyin Self Pre EQ/ Self Post EQ/ Mix21-24 OUT/ Keyin Filter CH1-8 Post EQ/ CH9-16 Post EQ/ ... CH41-48 Post EQ LINK ON/OFF INSERT IN LEVEL/ DCA1-8 ON Keyin Self Pre EQ/ Self Post EQ/ Mix21-24 OUT/ CH1-8 Post EQ/ CH9-16 Post EQ/ ... CH41-48 Post EQ LINK ON/OFF PreEQ/ PreFader/ PostON x 48 [INPUT] (1-48) ON INSERT OUT PreEQ/ PostEQ/ PreDelay/ PostFader TO TALKBACK SELECT +48V TO TALKBACK ON SIGNAL AD INPUT x4 SIGNAL AD ST IN R ST IN 1-4 R SLOT3 SLOT4 METER PostFader 16 SLOT4 1-16 PAN 30 METER 24 95 SELECT INSERT OUT FX4 IN L/R FX5 IN L/R EFFECT 1-8 FX6 IN L/R 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 2TR IN DIGITAL 3 2 2 AES/EBU COAXIAL Lch METER 2 HPF +48V ON USE IN (1-48) AS TALKBACK METER 2TR IN D3 L/R IN 1-48 LEVEL 2TR IN A1 L/R INSERT OUT 31BAND GEQ L R 2TR IN A2 L/R 10 INPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT SELECT CUE L CUE R 30 8 32 METER CUE OUT LEVEL CUE OUT DELAY CUE OUT DELAY INPUT/ OUTPUT/ DCA TRIM 30 DA L DA R CUE OUT OUT ATT. ON PHONES LEVEL DA CUE/SOLO LOGIC DA PHONES DA OUTPUT PATCH STEREO A STEREO B MIX1-24 MATRIX1-8 DIRECT OUT 1-STIN-4R INSERT OUT OSC OUT(Lch) TB OUT MONITOR L,R,C BYPASS BI DIRECTION CASCADE IN ON/OFF INSERT IN SPECTRUM ANALYZER DA METER ON 2 2 24 8 56 From 2TR IN DIGITAL1-3, ANALOG1-2 OUT ATT. SLOT1 16 SLOT2 16 SLOT3 16 SLOT4 16 DITHER SLOT1 DITHER SLOT2 DITHER SLOT3 DITHER STEREO A STEREO B 2TR IN D1 2TR IN D2 2TR IN D3 2TR IN A1 2TR IN A2 MIX1-24 MATRIX1-8 SRC 2 1 DITHER SRC 2 3 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 AES/EBU DITHER SRC 2 2 2 2 2 INSERT MONITOR DELAY MONITOR DELAY 2 2 24 2 8 MONITOR DELAY METER METER 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3 COAXIAL MONITOR LEVEL DA L DA R DA C INSERT OUT ATT.ON METER AES/EBU 1 INSERT 2 DEFINE SLOT4 95 DITHER DA MONITOR SELECT CASCADE OUT ON/OFF 1 To OUTPUT PATCH OUT ATT. From CASCADE IN SELECT METER 12 AD PreEQ/ PostEQ/ PreFader/ PostOn PFL/ PostON To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH CASCADE OUT GEQ 1(...12) [MATRIX OUT] (1~8) INSERT OUT To OUTPUT PATCH From CASCADE IN SELECT 1 DA To OUTPUT PATCH STEREO B-L External CUE SELECT SLOT1-4(1-16) TB OUT TALKBACK SELECT METER AD OSC OUT ON 2TR IN D2 L/R SRC OUTPUT DELAY PostDelay OUT ATT. Same as the matrix master 1 LPF AD TALKBACK 2TR IN D1 L/R SRC ON METER PostON INSERT Keyin Self Pre EQ/ Self Post EQ/ Mix21-24 OUT/ Stereo A,B,Matrix1-8 Post EQ LINK ON/OFF STEREO A-R VARI INSERT PreFader PostFader COMP ON Rch METER FX8 OUT L/R R 2TR IN ANALOG 2 4BAND EQ STEREO B-R OFF L 2TR IN ANALOG 1 INSERT LEVEL/ DCA7-8 24 PreEQ Same as the above LEVEL OSC(L) OSC(R) Pink Noise Burst Noise FX5 OUT L/R FX7 OUT L/R SRC To OUTPUT PATCH To OUTPUT PATCH METER OUT METER IN OUT METER METER GR To METER INSERT METER STEREO A-L METER AES/EBU KEYIN MIX24 Same as the above FX6 OUT L/R FX8 IN L/R [MIX OUT] (1~24) INSERT OUT PreEQ/ PostEQ/ PreFader/ PostOn CUE FX4 OUT L/R 1 DA OUT ATT. DA IN METER MIX1 MIX24 FX3 OUT L/R FX7 IN L/R 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 LEVEL ON FIX MIX PAIR FX2 OUT L/R FX3 IN L/R PostDelay Same as the mix master 1 TO ST MIX2 FX1 OUT L/R FX2 IN L/R PreON/ PostON PFL/ PostON CUE EFFECT FX1 IN L/R R To OUTPUT PATCH PreFader/ PostFader/ PostON ON CUE FIXED MIX PAN POST TO ST FOLLOW PAN MIX1 Pre EQ/ PreFader/ PostON 16 TO External CUE SELECT to MATRIX 4BAND EQ 16 SLOT3 1-16 ON MIX to STEREO ON CSR SLOT2 1-16 16 L [STEREO B] OUT ATT. OUT ATT. ON 16 16 OUTPUT DELAY INSERT OUT METER To BUS SUMMING MIX 1~24 PFL/ AFL/ POST PAN ON COMP PAN SLOT1 1-16 16 DCA7-8 8BAND EQ ON CSR PreFader R To OUTPUT PATCH KEYIN METER Keyin Self Pre EQ/Self Post EQ/Mix21-24 OUT/ OUT IN To MONITOR SELECT OUT Mix1-12 Post EQ/Mix13-24 Post EQ METER METER PreEQ METER LINK ON/OFF PreFader GR METER LEVEL/ PostFader INSERT To METER INSERT METER PostON BI DIRECTION LEVEL/ DCA1-8 ATT HPF CASCADE IN SELECT 32 CASCADE IN IN METER DA IN METER PreGate PreATT To METER GAIN 16 PreATT METER [STEREO A] DA To OUTPUT PATCH DIRECT OUT PostON SIGNAL L DA To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT PFL/ PostON ON INSERT GAIN ON SLOT2 PostON PreFader PreEQ PreHPF FX RTN 1-4 Pair configuration of Mono channel PEAK OFF SLOT1 To OUTPUT PATCH ON ST IN 1-4 L PostDelay OUT ATT. DA Same as the above AD OUTPUT DELAY PreFader/ PostFader/ PostON Same as the stereo master A Same as the monaural input ON METER PostON INSERT To OUTPUT PATCH To MONITOR SELECT INPUT 1-48 GAIN ST IN L ON PreEQ PreFader PostFader ON To OUTPUT PATCH Same as the stereo master L KEYIN CUE ON COMP to MATRIX CUE PEAK OFF 8BAND EQ BI DIRECTION ON INSERT OUT PreEQ/ PostEQ/ PreFader/ PostOn DCA7-8 BAL ON VARI ST IN 1-4 Pair configuration of Mono channel ON [ST IN] (1-4) FIX Keyin Self Pre EQ/ Self Post EQ/ Mix21-24 OUT/ Stereo A,B,Matrix1-8 Post EQ LINK ON/OFF KEYIN METER IN OUT IN OUT METER METER METER METER GR INSERT To METER INSERT METER INSERT LEVEL/ MIX24 PEAK +48V ON From CASCADE IN SELECT FIXED MIX PAN POST TO ST MIX PAIR ST IN 1-4 R +48V MASTER OFF OFF PAN TO ST MIX2 AD PM5D RH(Recallable HA) CUE OUT ATT. SIGNAL ST IN R ON CSR FOLLOW PAN MIX1 PEAK GAIN STB (C) STA INSERT INPUT DELAY COMP KEYIN METER SIGNAL GAIN PostON MIX1-24 CUE MONO x4 OUT OUT METER METER GR GR INSERT METER METER 4BAND EQ HPF InsertIn METER PEAK ST IN L PFL/ AFL/ Post PAN MONO [ST IN] (1-4) INSERT INPUT 1-48 ON OUT METER INSERT MSATT DECODE TO TALKBACK SELECT AD INSERT IN IN METER PreATT METER To METER INSERT OFF METER PostFader To METER 0 26 INSERT OUT IN METER GAIN PAD INPUT PreFader DIM ON PreATT PreGate CH 1(...48) MONO PEAK +48V DIM OFF MATRIX1 MATRIX2 MATRIX3 MATRIX4 MATRIX5 MATRIX6 MATRIX7 MATRIX8 x 48 [INPUT] (1-48) To OUTPUT PATCH MONITOR OUT PM5D Level Diagram Analog Analog dBu +30 +24 +20 Digital dBFS 0 -10 +10 +4 0 -20 -10 -40 -20 -50 -30 -60 -40 -70 -50 -80 -30 -60 -90 -70 -100 -80 -110 -90 -120 -100 -130 -110 -140 -120 -150 -130 -160 -140 -170 -150 -180 -160 -190 -170 -180 -190 -200 -210 PAD GAIN Digital AD INPUT PATCH Digital MSEQ INSERT GATE COMP INSERT DELAY LEVEL DCA INSERT ON HPF INSERT (x4) PHASE ATT. DECDE (x8) Analog Analog BUS MASTER OUTPUT EQ DCA MASTER PAN Adder INSERT (x8/4) INSERT COMP INSERT LEVEL BAL (x2) INSERT DELAY PATCH DA ON Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 dBu 1 Max. Input [+30dBu] INSERT IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN Digital Clipping Level 2 Max. Input [+24dBu] 36 [0dBu = 0.775Vrms] [0dBFS = Full Scale] Nominal Output [+4dBu] +10 +4 0 CASCADE IN 1 Nominal [+10dBu] Input 2 Nominal [+4dBu] Input OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT PHONES Max Output (150mW@8Ω) 3 Max. Input [-14dBu] Nominal Output (75mW@8Ω) [The position of the level control is 10dB lowered from Max] 5 Max. Input [-30dBu] 3 Nominal Input [-34dBu] 4 Max. Input [-40dBu] 5 Nominal Input [-50dBu] 4 default setting Nominal [-60dBu] Input STEREO A,B[L,R] MONITOR OUT[L,R,C] CUE OUT[L,R] MATRIX OUT1-8 MIX OUT1-24 INSERT OUT 1-48 -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 1 INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MIN.,PAD ON) ST IN (GAIN MIN.) 2 INSERT IN 1-48 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 [L,R] (default setting) 3 ST IN (GAIN MAX.) -100 4 INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MAX.,PAD OFF) -110 5 TALKBACK -120 -80 -90 -130 -140 -150 30 31 34 35 +30 +24 +20 CASCADE OUT 27 28 29 32 33 Max. Output [+24dBu] -160 Max. DSP Noise Floor -170 -180 -190 PM5D-RH Level Diagram Analog Analog dBu +30 +24 +20 Digital 0 -10 -20 -10 -40 -20 -50 -30 -60 -40 -70 -50 -80 -70 -80 -90 -100 -110 -30 -90 -100 -110 -120 -130 -140 -120 -150 -130 -160 -140 -170 -150 -180 -160 -190 -170 -180 -190 AD INPUT PATCH Digital EQ INSERT GATE COMP INSERT DELAY LEVEL DCA INSERT ON MSPHASE ATT. DECDE HPF INSERT (x4) (x8) Analog Analog BUS MASTER OUTPUT DCA MASTER EQ PAN Adder INSERT (x8/4) INSERT COMP INSERT LEVEL BAL (x2) INSERT DELAY PATCH DA ON dBFS Bit +10 +4 0 -60 GAIN Digital -200 -210 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 dBu 1 Max. Input [+30dBu] INSERT IN IN IN IN IN IN IN IN Digital Clipping Level IN 2 Max.Input [+24dBu] OUT [+10dBu] OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT [0dBu = 0.775Vrms] [0dBFS = Full Scale] +10 +4 0 OUT 2 Nominal [+4dBu] Input PHONES Max Output (150mW@8Ω) Nominal Output (75mW@8Ω) [The position of the level control is 10 dB lowered from Max] 4 Max. Input [-30dBu] 3 Max. Input [-42dBu] default setting 4 Nominal Input 3 Nominal Input STEREO A,B[L,R] MONITOR OUT[L,R,C] CUE OUT[L,R] MATRIX OUT1-8 MIX OUT1-24 [-50dBu] [-62dBu] 1 INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MIN.) ST IN (GAIN MIN.) 2 2TR IN ANALOG 1,2 [L,R] (default setting) 3 INPUT 1-48 (GAIN MAX.) ST IN (GAIN MAX.) 4 TALKBACK -10 -20 -30 -40 -50 -60 -70 -80 -90 -100 -110 -120 -130 -140 -150 30 31 36 Nominal Output [+4dBu] CASCADE IN Nominal 1 Input 27 28 29 34 35 +30 +24 +20 CASCADE OUT 24 25 26 32 33 Max. Output [+24dBu] -160 Max. DSP Noise Floor -170 -180 -190 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha representative or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Belgium Rue de Geneve (Genevastraat) 10, 1140 - Brussels, Belgium Tel: 02-726 6032 FRANCE U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México S.A. de C.V. Calz. Javier Rojo Gómez #1149, Col. Guadalupe del Moral C.P. 09300, México, D.F., México Tel: 55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Av. Reboucas 2636-Pinheiros CEP: 05402-400 Sao Paulo-SP. Brasil Tel: 011-3085-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Sucursal de Argentina Viamonte 1145 Piso2-B 1053, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: 1-4371-7021 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland Seefeldstrasse 94, 8008 Zürich, Switzerland Tel: 01-383 3990 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH, Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien, Austria Tel: 01-60203900 ASIA BELGIUM/LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Musique France BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Vallée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 ITALY Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A. Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha-Hazen Música, S.A. Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17, 200, 28230 Las Rozas (Madrid), Spain Tel: 91-639-8888 SWEDEN Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. Tong-Yang Securities Bldg. 16F 23-8 Yoido-dong, Youngdungpo-ku, Seoul, Korea Tel: 02-3770-0660 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. Lot 8, Jalan Perbandaran, 47301 Kelana Jaya, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-78030900 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. #03-11 A-Z Building 140 Paya Lebor Road, Singapore 409015 Tel: 747-4374 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 NORWAY Norsk filial av Yamaha Scandinavia AB Grini Næringspark 1 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 16 77 70 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Music Central Europe GmbH Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: 04101-3030 Yamaha Music Gulf FZE LB21-128 Jebel Ali Freezone P.O.Box 17328, Dubai, U.A.E. Tel: +971-4-881-5868 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 25/F., United Plaza, 1468 Nanjing Road (West), Jingan, Shanghai, China Tel: 021-6247-2211 SINGAPORE DENMARK OTHER COUNTRIES THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA TAIWAN Yamaha KHS Music Co., Ltd. 3F, #6, Sec.2, Nan Jing E. Rd. Taipei. Taiwan 104, R.O.C. Tel: 02-2511-8688 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 891/1 Siam Motors Building, 15-16 floor Rama 1 road, Wangmai, Pathumwan Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 02-215-2626 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2317 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, Victoria 3006, Australia Tel: 3-9693-5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation, Asia-Pacific Music Marketing Group Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2313 THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Central Europe, Branch Nederland Clarissenhof 5-b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: 0347-358 040 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2441 PA10 Yamaha Manual Library http://www2.yamaha.co.jp/manual/english/ This document is printed on recycled chlorine free (ECF) paper with soy ink. U.R.G., Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division, Yamaha Corporation © 2004 Yamaha Corporation WC42160 405IPAP2.2-01A0 Printed in Japan